NEW INSTRUMENTS
TYPE p A GE
R422 DC to 15 MHz
Oscilloscope 26
453/R453 DC to 50 MHz Oscilloscopes 29
529 Television Waveform Monitor 52
549 DC to 30 MHz Storage Oscilloscope 76
556/R556 DC to 50 MHz Dual-Beam Oscilloscope 86
1A7 High-Gain DC Differential Plug-In Unit 108
1L2 ° 10MHz to 4.2 GHz Spectrum Analyzer Unit .... 112
1L30 925MHz to 10.5 GHz Spectrum Analyzer Unit .. 112
1S2 Wideband Sampling and TDR Unit 116
3AS Automatic/Programmable Amplifier Unit 152
3B5 Automatic/Programmable Time-Base Unit 153
3A7 High-Gain Differential Comparator Unit 154
3A8 Operational Amplifier Unit 155
3L '° 1 to 36 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Unit 164
106 Squarewave Generator 206
R'16 Programmable Pulse Generator 211
184 Time-Mark Generator 227
191 Constant-Amplitude Signal Generator 228
263 3A5/3B5 Programmer 229
281 Time Domain Reflectometer Pulser 231
282 Probe Adapter 231
R293 Programmable Pulse Generator
and Power Supply 233
C-30 Oscilloscope Camera 246
OUR CONTINUING CREED IS THAT OF SERVING TEKTRDNIX CUSTOMERS
WITH PRODUCTS AND POLICIES THAT ARE UNEXCELLED IN THE ELECTRDNICS
INDUSTRY AND LIMITED ONLY BY THE CURRENT STATE OF THE ART.
Information in this catalog supersedes all previously published
material. Specification and price change privileges reserved.
© 1966 Tektronix, Inc. All Rights Reserved.
Readers who know our product line can consult the contents page and go directly
to the instrument of interest. Others, who are not so well acquainted must approach
the solution to their measurement problem in a different way. This page points out
features of this catalog that are included to help the reader find the instrument
he requires.
«
CONTENTS
Instruments are grouped together according to common
characteristics; for example, those oscilloscopes that feature
portability; those oscilloscopes that use the same group of
plug-in units; those oscilloscopes that use the sampling tech-
nique for their display, etc. The sequence of instruments within
these groups is arranged by instrument type number in an
ascending order. The first group starts with the Type 31 OA
and the last group ends with the Type 661. For quick associ-
ation, you'll find the applicable plug-in units grouped immedi-
ately after the group or groups of oscilloscopes in which they
are used.
The contents illustrate the grouping of our instruments accord-
ing to type number designations. For example, we refer to
the 300-Series and 400-Series as portable oscilloscopes, the
530, 540, and 550-Series as oscilloscopes that use Letter and
1 -Series plug-in units, the 560-Series as oscilloscopes that use
2-Series and 3-Serifes plug-in units, etc. Other oscilloscopes
are listed in their proper numerical sequence. In the last third
of the catalog, associated instruments are identified by 100-
Series and 200-Series designations.
REFERENCE CHARTS
Since bandwidth, risetime, and deflection factor as well as
other parameters are of vital interest to you in selecting an
instrument, this catalog contains a group of reference charts
that provide these essentials. These charts will allow you to
make a quick comparison among instruments. The first chart
on pages 4 and 5 starts with the oscilloscope/plug-in com-
bination that offers the greatest bandwidth followed by oscillo-
scopes in a descending bandwidth capability. Thus, if you
wanted a DC to 15 MHz portable instrument, the chart would
quickly lead you to the Type 422. Once there, you can move
horizontally across the chart and find risetime, deflection fac-
tor, signal delay, sweep delay, sweep range, magnifier, and
price as well as the number of the catalog page that describes
the instrument in detail.
The chart on pages 6 and 7 contain the bandwidth and
risetime characteristics for a variety of Letter-Series and 1 -Series
plug-in units when used with appropriate oscilloscopes. This
chart quickly points out the versatility offered by a plug-in type
oscilloscope.
Pages 8 and 9 contain five separate charts that describe
characteristics of surge-test oscilloscopes, television oscillo-
scopes, digital readout systems, and 2 and 3-Series plug-in
units when used with appropriate oscilloscope. Page 10 con-
tains reference charts on spectrum analyzer plug-in units and
page 1 1 contains charts on sampling type oscilloscopes.
REFERENCE INFORMATION
Page 13 explains the significance of characteristics in terms
of measurement capability. Much of the information on band-
width and risetime will be helpful in judging the applicability
of various instruments to a measurement problem. Page 14
discusses Tektronix-manufactured components and also con-
tains a chart of available CRT phosphors with technical data
as well as suggested areas of usage.
DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS
Pages 15 through 17 are a new feature of this catalog. These
definitions represent our concept of the terms used in this cat-
alog. The abbreviations are primarily derived from IEEE stand-
ards.
FOR QUICK COMPARISONS
The first page of each major instrument description includes
a characteristic summary that contains details of the vertical,
horizontal, and CRT systems. Thus, a glance between sum-
maries of two instruments should point out their major differ-
ences.
ACCESSORIES
Page 251 is a table of contents for the many accessories
listed on pages 252 through 280.
FIELD OFFICE ASSISTANCE
Tektronix maintains 47 domestic and international field offices
as well as 31 distributors with 44 offices spread throughout the
world. These offices are staffed with qualified field engineers
who specialize in solving measurement problems. They pro-
vide a direct communication link between you and the factory
and are the people to contact for assistance. Please call or
visit your nearest field office for details on applications, main-
tenance, or instrument orders. You'll find these offices listed
on pages 285 through 287.
Ordering information such as terms, shipment, and warranty
details are contained on pages 283 and 284.
INDEX
The last two pages contain a comprehensive index of (1)
instruments in numerical order according to type numbers,
and (2) accessories by subject.
Contents
"PE PAGE
How to Use the Catalog 1
Contents 2
Reference Charts 4
Reference Information 13
Abbreviations 15
Definitions 16
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPES
DC to 4 MHz 18
DC to 10 MHz 20
DC to 6 MHz, AC/DC or Battery 23
DC to 15 MHz, AC, AC/DC or Battery 26
DC to 50 MHz — Sweep Delay 29
OSCILLOSCOPES WITHOUT PLUG-IN UNITS
100 ^V/cm Dual-Beam 33
DC to 450 kHz, X-Y 36
DC to 450 kHz 38
High Voltage, Surge Test 238
DC to 15 MHz 40
DC to 15 MHz— Dual-Trace 42
31 0A
317,
RM17
321 A
422,
R422
453,
R453
502A
, RM502A
503,
RM503
504,
RM504
507
51 5A
RM15
516
519
524AD
526
529, RM529
531 A, RM31A
535A, RM35A
533A, RM33A
536
543B, RM543B
545B, RM545B
544, RM544
546, RM546
547, RM547
549
551
555
556, R556
B
CA
D
E
G
HIGH-SPEED OSCILLOSCOPE
DC to 1 GHz
44
TELEVISION OSCILLOSCOPES
DC to 10 MHz 47
Color TV Vectorscope 49
Waveform Monitor 52
OSCILLOSCOPES THAT USE LETTER AND
1 -SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
DC to 15 MHz 56
DC to 15 MHz — Sweep Delay 56
DC to 15 MHz— XI 00 Magnifier 59
DC to 10MHz— X-Y 62
DC to 33 MHz— XI 00 Magnifier 65
DC to 33 MHz — Sweep Delay 65
DC to 50 MHz— X100 Magnifier 69
DC to 50 MHz— Sweep Delay 72
DC to 50 MHz— Automatic Display Switching . . 72
DC to 30 MHz Storage — Sweep Delay 76
DC to 27 MHz— Dual-Vertical, Dual-Beam 80
DC to 33 MHz— Sweep Delay, Dual-Beam 83
DC to 50 MHz— Dual-Vertical and Horizontal
— Dual-Beam — Sweep Delay 86
LETTER AND 1 -SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
High-Gain oq
Dual-Trace DC 91
High-Gain DC Differential 92
Low-Level AC Differential 93
Wide-Band DC Differential 94
H
K
L
M
O
Q
R
S
T
W
z
1A1,
1A7
1A2
1L10
1L20, 1L30
1S1
1S2
561 A, RM56IA
564, RM564
565, RM565
567, RM567
6R1A
3A2
3B2
3S3
3S76
3T4
3T77A
262
2A60
2A61
2A63
2B67
3A1
3A6
3A3
3A5
3B5
3A7
3A8
3A72
Wide-Band, High-Gain DC 9:
Fast-Rise DC 96
Fast-Rise, High-Gain 97
Four-Trace DC 98
Operational Amplifier 99
Transducer and Strain Gage 101
Transistor Risetime 238
Diode Recovery 238
Time-Base Generator 103
High-Gain Differential Comparator 104
High-Gain Differential Comparator 238
Wide-Band, High-Gain Dual-Trace 106
High-Gain DC Differential 108
c»
1 -SERIES SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNITS |
1 to 36MHz in
Multi-Band 10 MHz— 10.5 GHz 112
1 -SERIES SAMPLING PLUG-IN UNITS
Wide-Band 114
Reflectometer and Wide-Band 116
OSCILLOSCOPES THAT USE 2 AND
3-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
DC to 15 MHz— X-Y H8,
Split-Screen Storage 122\.
Dual-Beam — Delayed Sweep 127
DIGITAL READOUT OSCILLOSCOPES AND
PLUG-IN UNITS
Digital Readout Oscilloscope 131
Digital Unit 135
Dual-Trace Unit 133
Time-Base Unit 1 33
Sampling Probe Dual-Trace Unit 139
Dual-Trace Sampling Unit 140
Programmable Sampling Sweep Unit 141
Sampling Sweep Unit 142
Programmer 143
Sampling Accessories 145
2 AND 3-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
DC to 1MHz 147
Low-Level Differential 147
DC to 300 kHz Differential 148
Time-Base 1 43
Dual-Trace DC to 10 MHz 149
Dual-Trace DC to 10 MHz 149
100/tV/div DC Differential 150
DC to 15 MHz Automatic/Programmable
Amplifier 152 *
Automatic/Programmable Time-Base 153
High-Gain Differential Comparator 154
Operational Amplifier 155
Dual-Trace DC to 650 kHz 157
Contents
3A75
3A74
3B1
3B3
3B4
3C66
3L10
3S3
3S76
3T4
3T77A
DC to 4MHz 157
Four-Trace DC to 2 MHz 158
Time-Base — Delayed Sweep 159
Time-Base — Delayed Sweep 160
Time-Base — X50 Magnifier 161
Carrier Amplifier 162
570
575
175
585A, RM585A
81
82
86
647, RM647
10A1
10A2
11B1
11B2
661
4S1
4S2A
4S3
3-SERIES SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT
1 to 36 MHz
164
3-SERIES SAMPLING PLUG-IN UNITS
Sampling-Probe Dual-Trace 166
Dual-Trace Sampling 167
Programmable Sampling Sweep 168
Sampling Sweep 169
CURVE-TRACER OSCILLOSCOPES
Vacuum Tube Curve Tracer 238
Transistor Curve Tracer 170
High-Current Adapter for Type 575 170
HIGH-FREQUENCY OSCILLOSCOPES THAT
USE TYPE 80-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
DC to 85 MHz 175
DC to 85 MHz— Sweep Delay 1 75
80-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
Plug-In Adapter (for 1 and Letter-Series
Plug-In Units)
Dual-Trace DC to 85 MHz
DC to 85 MHz
179
180
181
OSCILLOSCOPES THAT USE 10 AND 11-
SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
DC to 50 MHz— Environmental 182
10 AND 11 -SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
High-Gain Differential Comparator 185
Dual-Trace DC to 50 MHz 187
Time-Base— X50 Magnifier 188
Time-Base — Delayed Sweep 190
Accessories (Type 647) 1 92
SAMPLING OSCILLOSCOPE THAT
4 AND 5-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
USES
. ... 193
4 and 5-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
. ... 195
Dual-Trace Sampling
Sampling-Probe Dual-Trace
196
197
Sampling Probe 198
5T3 Sampling and Real Time Sweep 199
280 Trigger Countdown 201
292 Semi-Conductor Tester Power Supply 202
Sampling Accessories 203
AUXILIARY INSTRUMENTS
106 Square-wave Generator 206
109 Pulse Generator 207
111 Pretrigger Pulse Generator 208
113 Delay Cable 209
114 Variable Pulse Generator 210
R116 Programmable Pulse Generator 21 I
122, FM122, Low-Level Preamplifiers 213
RM122
123 Preamplifier 238
125, FM125, Power Supplies 215
RM125
127 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 216
129 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 218
130 L-C Meter 220
132 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 221
133 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 222
160A Power Supply 223
161 Pulse Generator 224
162 Waveform Generator 225
163 Pulse Generator 226
1 84 Time-Mark Generator 227
191 Constant-Amplitude Signal Generator 228
261 Coaxial Switch 238
263 3A5/3B5 Programmer 229
280 Trigger Countdown 230
281 Time Domain Reflectometer Pulser 231
282 Probe Adapter 231
290 Transistor Switching Time Tester 238
291 Diode Switching-Time Tester 238
292 Semi-Conductor Tesrer Power Supply 232
R293 Programmable Pulse Generator 233
360 Indicator Unit 235
1121 X100 Amplifier 236
Limited Demand (Types 507, 570, 123, 261, 290, 291, R, S, Z,
500A/500/53A) 238
Cameras 239
®
Scope-Mobile Carts 250
Accessory Contents 251
Probe Compatibility Chart 252
Accessories 254
Instrument Dimensions 281
Shipping Weights and Volumes 282
General and Ordering Information 283
Field Offices and Overseas Distributors 285
Index, Instrument 288
Index, Accessory Inside Back Cover
•l
Due to the wide range of capabilities of Tektronix Oscilloscopes, some instru-
ments appear more than once in the Reference Section. A more complete descrip-
tion can be found in the individual instrument discussion.
For help in selection of the instrument for your particular application, feel free
to call your Tektronix Field Office.
TEKTRONIX OSCILLOSCOPES
(According to Bandwidth Capabilities)
Oscilloscope
Type 530,
540, 550,
580tt Series®
Verficott
Bandwidth
Risetime
Calibrated Vertical Calibrated
Deflection Signal Sweep
Factor Delay Delay
1
Calibrated Magnifier
Sweep Range Max Cal
Sweep
Range
Price
Page
Equiv to DC
to 3900 MHz
90 ps
5 mV/div to
500 mV/div
No
Time Positions
through full
time base
(uncalibrated)
lOns/div to 2,5,10,
1 yus/div 20,50, 100 X
lOOps/cm
Type 661®
Equiv to DC
to 3900 MHz
90 ps
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
No
1 ns/cm to
lOOiis/cm
and
0.2 ms/cm to
5 s/cm
(real-time)
2, 5, 10,
20,50,100X
10 ps/cm
$1150t
193
Type 661©
Equiv to DC
to 1000 MHz
0.35 ns
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Yes
2,5,10,
20,50, 100 X
10 ps/cm
to
100 ps/cm
$1150t
193
Type 530,®
540, 550,
580tt Series
Equiv to DC
to 1000 MHz
0.35 ns
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Yes
1 ns/cm to
50 fts/cm
Type 519
DC to 1000 MHz
0.35 ns
less than
lOV/cm
Yes
to 35 ns
2 ns/cm
to 1 /is/cm
None
$3900
44
*Type 561 A®
Equiv to DC
to 875 MHz
0.4 ns
2mV/div to
200 mV/div
Yes
Time Positions
through full
time base
(uncalibrated)
0.2 ns/div
to lOtis/div
10X
20 ps/div
$ 500t
118
1
*Type 564®
Storage
0.4 ns
Same features as Type 561 A (above
AGE of signal information.
plus SPLIT-SCREEN STOR-
$ 875 1
122
*Type 567®
Readout
0.4 ns
Same features as Type 561 A (above) plus DIGITAL READOUT
of pulse risetime, pulse width, time differences (with Type 6R1A
Digital Unit).
$ 700t
131
Type 581 A®
DC to 85 MHz
4.2 ns
lOOmV/cm
to 50V/cm
Yes
None
50 ns/cm
to 2 s/cm
5X
10 ns/cm
$1425t
175
*Type 585A®
4.2 ns
1 00 mV/cm
to 50V/cm
Yes
2 //,s
to 10 s
50 ns/cm
to 2 s/cm
5X
10 ns/cm
$1725t
175
*Type 453
*Type 544©
DC to 50 MHz
7 ns
5 mV/div to
lOV/div
Yes
1 /IS
to 50 s
0.1 iis/div to
5s/div
10X
10 ns/div
$2050
29
7 ns
50mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
None
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
2, 5, 10,
20,50, 100X
10 ns/cm
$1550t
69
*Type 546©
7 ns
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
0.1 its
to 50 s
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
2, 5, 10X
10 ns/cm
$1750t
72
*Type 547©
Display-
Switching
*Type 556©
Dual-Beam
Dual Vertical
and Sweep
*Type 647®
Environ-
mentalized
7 ns
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
0.1 lis
to 50 s
0.1 /is/cm
to 5 s/cm
2, 5, 10X
10 ns/cm
$1 875t
72
7 ns
50mV/cm to
20 V/cm
Yes
0.1 /AS
to 50 s
0.1 iis/cm
to 5 s/cm
10X
10 ns/cm
$3150t
86
7 ns
lOmV/cm
to 20 V/cm
Yes
1 jUS
to 50 s
0.1 iis/cm
to 5 s/cm
10X
10 ns/cm
$1350t
182
t Frequency Specifications are at 3-dB down.
f Price does not include Plug-In Units.
ft A Type 81 Adapter is required.
* Rack-Mount models are available.
©When used with Type 1S2 Sampling Plug-In Unit.
® When used with Types 4S2A and 5T3 Sampling Plug-In Units.
© When used with Types 4S1 and 5T3 Sampling Plug-In Units.
©When used with Type 1S1 Sampling Plug-In Unit.
© When used with Types 3S76 and 3T77A Sampling Plug-In Units.
® When used with Type 82 or 86 Plug-In Units, 10 mV/cm at DC to 80 MHz.
© When used with Type 1A1 Plug-In Preamplifier, 5 mV/cm at DC to 28 MHz.
® When used with Type 10A2 Amplifier and Type 11B2 Time Base Unit.
**"
TEKTRONIX OSCILLOSCOPES
(According to Bandwidth Capabilities)
Oscilloscope
♦Type 543B®
Vertical $
Bandwidth
Risetime
DC to 33 MHz
♦Type 545B®
Type 555®
Dual-Beam
Type 549®
Storage
Type 551®
Dual-Beam
♦Type 51 5 A
10.5 ns
10.5 i
10.5 ns
DC to 30 MHz 12
Calibrated
Deflection
Factor
Vertical Calibrated
Signal Sweep
Delay Delay
50 mV/cm
to 20 V/ cm
50mV/cm to
20V/cm
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
Yes
Yes
None
1 /xs
to 10 s
0.1 /AS
to 50 s
Type 516
Dual-Trace
♦Type 531 A©
DC to 27 MHz
♦Type 533A©
♦Type 535A©
DC to 15 MHz
♦Type 422 DC to 15 MHz
Dual-Trace
AC or Battery 5 Hz to 5 MHz
Portable
Type 536®
X-Y
♦Type 317
3" Portable
♦Type 561 A®
DC to 1 1 MHz
13
50mV/cm
to 20 V/ cm
Yes
23
23 ns
23
23
50mV/cm
to 20V/cm
50mV/cm
to 20V/cm
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
Yes
1 /XS
to 10 s
Calibrated
Sweep Range
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
Magnifier
Max Co/
Sweep
Range
Price Page
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
2, 5, 10,
20,50, 100 X
20 ns/cm
5X
20 ns/cm
0.1 tis/cm
to 5 s/cm
None
None
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
5X
20 ns/cm
0.1 jus/cm
to 5 s/cm
0.2 /xs/cm
to 2 s/cm
5X
20 ns/cm
5X
20 ns/cm
$1300t
$1 550t
$26501
$2375t
$1850t
Yes
None
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
Yes
None
None
23 ns
50 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
Yes
23
70 ns
31 ns
DC to 10 MHz
♦Type 564®
Storage
♦Type 565®
Dual-Beam
Type 321 A
AC or Battery
3" Portable
Type 310A
3" Portable
DC to 6 MHz
DC to 4 MHz
35 ns
lOmV/div
to 20V/div
1 mV/div
Yes
2/xs
to 10 s
None
50 mV/div
to 20V/div
35 ns
lOmV/div
to 50V/div
lOmV/div
to lOV/div
No
Yes
Yes
None
None
0.2 /xs/cm
to 2 s/cm
5X
40 ns/cm
$ 875
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
5X $1070
40 ns/cm
0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
0.5 xis/div
to
0.5s/div
0.2 xis/div
to 2s/div
0.2 /xs/div
to 2s/div
0.5 /xs
to 10 s
0.5 /xs/div
to 1 s/div
5X
20 ns/cm
2,5,10,
20, 50,1 00 X
20 ns/cm
5X
20 ns/cm
10X
50 ns/div
$ 995t
$1125t
$1400t
$1400
5X
40 ns/div
5X
40 ns/div
5X
0.1 xis/div
Same features as Type 561 A (above) plus SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE of
signal information.
35 ns
58 ns
♦Type 503
Differential
and X-Y
♦Type 504
♦Type 502A
Dual-Beam
and X-Y
DC to 450 kHz
DC to 50 kHz
increasing to
DC to 1 MHz
0.1 /xs
90 ns
lOmV/div
to lOV/div
lOmV/div
to
20V/div
0.75 /is
0.75 /xs
lOmV/div
to 0.1 V/div
0.1 V/div
to 50 V/div
No
No
No
10 its
to 50 s
None
None
1 /xs/div
to 5 s/div
0.5 /xs/div
to 0.5 s/div
10X
0.1 /xs/div
1 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
5 mV/cm
to 20V/cm
100/xV/cm
to 20V/cm
No
No
No
None
None
None
J Frequency Specifications are at 3-dB down.
f Price does not include Plug-In Units.
* Rack-Mount models are available.
®When used with Type 1A1 Plug-In Preamplifier, 5 mV/cm at DC to
23 MHz.
© When used with Type 1A1 Plug-In Preamplifier, 5 mV/cm at DC to
23 MHz. Type 555 is designed for 2 Plug-In Preamplifiers.
0.5 tis/div
to 0.2 s/div
5X
0.1 /xs/div
1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
1 /xs/cm
to 0.5 s/cm
1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm
5X
0.1 /xs/div
$1085t
$ 875
$ 500t
$ 875t
$1 400t
$ 900
$ 675
2, 5, 10,
20, and 50X
0.1 /xs/cm
None
2, 5, 10,
and 20X
1 lis /cm
$ 640
$ 540
$1050
65
65
83
76
80
40
42
56
59
56
26
62
20
118
122
127
23
18
36
38
33
® When used with Type 1A1 Plug-In Preamplifier, 5 mV/cm at DC to 21 MHz.
Type 551 is designed for 2 Plug-In Preamplifiers.
© When used with Type 1A1 Plug-In Preamplifier, 5 mV/cm at DC to 14 MHz.
® When used with Type 1A1 Plug-In Preamplifier and Type T Plug-In Time Base.
®When used with Type 3A6 Plug-In Amplifier and Type 3B3 Plug-In Time Base.
© When used with Type 3A1 Plug-In Amplifier, Type 565 is designed for 2 Plug-In
Amplifiers.
CHARACTERISTICS OF TEKTRONIX OSCILLOSCOPES JW
PLUG-IN UNIT TYPE
1A1
Wide-Band, High-Gain
Dual-Trace Unit
1 A2 Wide-Band
Dual-Trace Unit
1 A7 High-Gain
Differential Unit
1 L 1 Spectrum Analyzer
Unit
1 L20 Spectrum Analyzer
Unit
1 L30 Spectrum Analyzer
Unit
1 S 1 Sampling Unit
1 S2 Time Domain Reflec-
tometer and Wide-
Band Sampler
PAGE
106
106
108
111
112
112
114
116
B
High-Gain Unit
CA Dual-Trace DC Unit
D High-Gain Differential
Unit
E Low-Level AC Differ-
ential Unit
90
91
92
G Wide-Band DC
Differential Unit
H Wide-Band; High-Gain
DC Unit
Fast-Rise DC Unit
I Fast-Rise High-Gain
Unit
M
Four-Trace Unit
O Operational Amplifier
Unit
Q Strain Gage Unit
Time-Base Generator
Unit
W High-Gain Differ-
ential Comparator Unit
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
101
103
104
PRICE
_L
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION FACTOR
$ 600
325
~500 /xV/cm,
5 mV/cm
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
Type 531 A*, 533A*,
535A*
35 ns; 2 Hz to 10 MHz
25ns ; DC to 14 MHz
23ns ; DC to 15 MHz
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
425
1100
1825
1825
1100
1300
10/xV/cm to 10 V/cm
23ns ; DC to 15 MHz
Sensitivity: to — lOOdBm
at 1-kHz resolution
Sensitivity: to — llOdBm
at 1-kHz resolution
Sensitivity: to — 105dBm
at 1-kHz resolution
2 mV/cm to 200 mV/cm
p = 0.005/div to 0.5/div
5 mV/div to 500 mV/div
145 5mV/cm to 20 mV/cm
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
260
170
190
190
185
145
210
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
1 mV/cm to 50 V/cm
50^.V/cm to lOmV/cm
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
35 ns ; 2 Hz to 10 MHz
25 ns ; DC to 14 MHz
23 ns; DC to 15 M
5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
525
525
325
240
575
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
20mV/cm to 10 V/cm
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
10/istrain/div to 10,000
justrain/div
25 ns; DC to 14 MHz
31 ns ; DC to 11 MHz
23 ns ; DC to 15 MHz
23ns ; 3 Hz to 15 MHz
23ns ; DC to 15 MHz
25ns ; DC to 14 MHz
1 mV/cm to 1 mV/cm
50 V/cm 50 mV/cm
50 ns; DC to 7 MHz
26 ns; DC to 13.5 MHz
*Rack-Mount Models are available.
tUses "1" Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units with Type 81 Adapter.
WITH "I" SERIES AND LETTER SERIES PLUG-IN PREAMPLIFIERS
Type 536
Type 543B*, 545B*, Type 544*, 546*,
555, 581 At, 585At* 547*, 556*
Type 549
Type 551
RISETIME AND BANDWIDTH OF OSCILLOSCOPE AND PLUG-IN UNIT
44 ns; 2 Hz to 8 MHz
33 ns ; DC to 10.5 MHz
31 ns; DC to 1 1 MHz
31 ns; DC to 1 1 MHz
25 ns; 2 Hz to 14 MHz I 23 ns; 2 Hz to 15 MHz
15ns ; DC to 23 MHz 12.5 ns ; DC to 28 MHz
10.5 ns; DC to 33 MHz | 7 ns; DC to 50 MHz
10.5 ns; DC to 33 MHz
7ns ; DC to 50 MHz
25 ns; 2 Hz to 14 MHz
15ns ; DC to 23 MHz
12ns ; DC to 30 MHz
12ns ; DC to 30 MHz
26ns ; 2 Hz to 13 MHz
16.5 ns; DC to 21 MHz
13ns ; DC to 27 MHz
13 ns ; DC to 27 MHz
0.7 us ; DC to 500 kHz; Bandwidth at high and low -3 dB points is selectable
Frequency range is 1 to 36 MHz.
Frequency range is 10 MHz to 4.2 GHz.
Frequency range is 925 MHz to 10.5 GHz.
150 ps risetime (corresponding to an equivalent bandwidth of 1 GHz), equivalent sweep range of
lOOps/cm to 50 us/cm, 50fi inputs .
90 ps risetime (corresponding to an e quivalent bandwidth of 3.9 GHz), full scale time measurements
to 10 us; distance measurements to 1 km.
40 ns; 2 Hz to 9 MHz
35ns ; DC to 10 MHz
(s; DC to 10 MHz
30 ns; 2 Hz to 12 MHz
18 ns; DC to 20 MHz
15 ns; DC to 24 MHz
0.18 /j.s; DC to 300 kHz, increasing to 2 MHz
30ns ; 2 Hz to 12 MHz
20ns ; DC to 18 MHz
16 ns; DC to 22 MHz
6/is ; 0.06 Hz to 20 kHz, increasing to 60 kHz.
35ns ; DC to 10 MHz
37 ns; DC to 9.5 MHz
31 ns; DC to 11 MHz
35 ns; 3 Hz to 10 MHz
31 ns; DC to 11 MHz
35ns ; DC to 10 MHz
18 ns; DC to 20 MHz
23 ns; DC to 15 MHz
12 ns; DC to 30 MHz
1 5 ns; 3 Hz to 24 MHz
12 ns; DC to 30 MHz
17 ns ; DC to 20 MHz
20 ns; DC to 18 MHz
25 ns; DC to 14 MHz
14 ns; DC to 25 MHz
16ns ; 3 Hz to 22 MHz
14 ns; DC to 25 MHz
18 ns; DC to 19 MHz
Performs precise o perations of integration, differentiation, function generate, ana linear or non-
linear amplification.
60 as risetime, D C to 6 kHz, measures force, displacement, acceleration, strain any mecham-
cdquantity Art can be converted to a change in resistance, capaatance, or induction.
Generates a sawtooth sweep in 22 calibrated steps from ^f f^J^^J^^SS""^-
Triggering facilities inclu de Manual, Automatic, HF Sync and Line, either AC or DC-coupled.
54 ns ; DC to 6.5 MHz
34 ns ; DC to 10.5 MHz
44 ns ; DC to 8 MHz
15 ns; DC to 23 MHz
44 ns ; DC to 8 MHz
17 ns; DC to 20.5 MHz
_L
Oscilloscope
Type 507
Risetime
HIGH-VOLTAGE SURGE-TEST OSCILLOSCOPES
Deflection Factor S '9 nal Sweep Calibrated
Delay Delay Sweep Range
None
10 ns Approximately 50V/cm
to 500 V/cm
tCable not supplied with instrument.
Ext
Cablet
Sweep Accel
Magnifier Potential
Price
o
20 ns/cm
to 50 /is /cm
None
24 kV
$2900
Page
238
Instrument
Type 524AD
Oscilloscope
Type 526
Vectorscope
Type 529*
Waveform
Monitor
Risetime Calibrated Signal
Deflection Factor Delay
35 ns
15mV/cm
to 20 V/cm
TELEVISION OSCILLOSCOPES
Vertical Calibrated
Response Sweep Range
Normal, 0.1 ,,.s/cm
Flat, IEEE to 0.01 s/cm
Yes
Sweep
Magnifier
3 and 10X
Accel
Potential
4kV
Price
chroma^nal displays ' with either vector or linear-sweep presentation of demodulated
4kV
$1300
$1665
Page
47
49
For 6 cm deflec-
tion: 1 V, 0.5 V,
and 0.2 V steps;
120 mV to 1.5 V
(uncalibrated vari-
able range)
No
*Rack-Mount models are available.
Flat, IEEE,
Low-Pass,
High-Pass
0.125 H/cm,
Field and
Line Rates
5 and 25X
5.5 kV
$1050
52
Plug-In Type
2B67
Single Sweep
TIME- BASE UNITS FOR TYPE 560 -SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Sweep Range* Magnifier
1 /xs/div to 5s/div, 1-2-5
3B1
Sweep Delay
se-
quence.
3B2
Calibrated
Sweep Delay
3B3
Calibrated
Sweep Delay
Single Sweep
3B4
Direct-Reading
Magnifier
Single Sweep
3B5 Automatic/
Programmable
3T4
Programmable
Sampling Sweep
(use with 3S3 or 3S76)
3T77A
Sampling Sweep
(use with 3S3 or 3S76)
0.5 /xs/div to 1 s/div, 1-2-5 se-
quence (for both normal and
delayed sweeps).
2 /xs/div to 1 s/div, 1-2-5 se-
quence. Continuously variable
calibrated delay from 5 /xs to
10.5 s.
5X
Price
5X
No
0.5 /xs/div to 1 s/div, 1-2-5 se-
quence (for both normal and
delayed sweeps). Continuously
variable calibrated delay from
0.5 /xs to 10 s.
Triggering
Internal, External, Line; amplitude-level 1 $ 210 I 148
Page
selection; AC or DC-coupled; automatic or
free run; ±slope.
Internal, External; amplitude-level selec-
tion; AC or DC-coupled; automatic (normal
sweep only) or free-run; ± slope.
Internal, External, Line; amplitude-level
selection; AC or DC-coupled; ± slope.
5X
0.2 /xs/div to 5 s/div, 1-2-5 se-
quence. Magnifier reads sweep
range directly up to 50 ns/div.
up to
50X
5 s/div to 0.1 /xs/div, 1-2-5 se- I 10X and
quence. iqqx
Internal, External; amplitude-level selec-
tion, AC or DC-coupled, ± slope. Nor-
mal sweep has in addition: automatic
and line plus single sweep.
$ 535
$ 650
$ 585
o
159
138
160
Equivalent sweep range 1 ns/
div to 200 /xs/div, 1-2-5 se-
quence. Programmable through
front-panel connector.
Equivalent sweep range 0.2 ns
/div to 10 /xs/div, 1-2-5 se-
quence.
10X
10X
Internal, External, External 4-10, Line; am-
plitude-level selection, AC, AC low-fre-
quency reject or DC-coupling; free-run,
automatic, or normal modes; ± slope.
Internal, External; amplitude-level selection;
AC or DC-coupled; automatic; ± slope.
$ 400
161
$ 890
Internal (3S76 only) or External, zfcslope.
Internal (3S76 only), or External, ± slope.
"Variable between steps, uncalibrated.
$1300
$ 650
153
168
169
1 Type 561 A, RM561A, 564, and RM564 Oscilloscopes use
1 any of these Plug-in Units.
oTJlinlT RM5 f T . Read ° uf Oscilloscopes use Digital and these units for digital readout
Other Amplifier and Time Base Units can be used without digital readout.
4
8
•
AMPLIFIER UNITS FOR TYPE 560-5ERIE5 OSCILLOSCOPES
4
Plug-In Type
Bandwidth Calibrated Deflection Factor*
(3-dB down)
Input
(AC or DC-coupled)
Price
Page
2A60
DC— 1 MHz
50mV/div— 50V/div in 4 steps.
1 megohm shunted by
47 pF, 600 volts max
$ 105
147
2A61 Low-Level
Differential
0.06 Hz— 300 kHz
lOjuV/div— 20mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
10 megohm — 50 pF;
±5V (AC-coupled only)
$ 385
147
2A63 Differential
50:1 rejection ratio
DC— 300 kHz
1 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
1 megohm shunted by
20 pF, 600 volts max
$ 150
148
3A1 Dual-Trace
(Identical Channels)
DC— 10 MHz
lOmV/div— 20V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
$ 450
149
3A2 Dual-Trace
(Identical Channels)
DC— 500 kHz
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
$ 500
138
3A3 Dual-Trace
Differential
Selectable
DC— 5 kHz or
DC— 500 kHz
100 juV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
$ 790
150
3A5 Automatic/
Programmable
DC— 15 MHz
DC— 5 MHz
lOmV/div— 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
1 mV/div — 5 mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
1 megohm shunted by
24 pF, 600 volts max
$ 760
152
3A6 Dual-Trace
(Identical Channels)
DC— 10 MHz
Identical to Type 3A1 above but with
internal delay line.
1 megohm shunted by
47 pF, 600 volts max
$ 540
149
3A7 High Gain
Differential
Comparator
3A8 Operational
Amplifier
DC— 10 MHz,
decreasing to
DC— 4 MHz
1 mV/div — 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
plus 4-step decade attenuator.
1 megohm shunted by
20 pF, 500 volts max
$ 635
154
DC— 3.5 MHz
20mV/div— 10 V/div.
1 megohm shunted by
47 pF, 600 volts max
$ 600
155
3A72 Dual-Trace
(Identical Channels)
DC— 650 kHz
lOmV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
$ 275
157
3A74 Four-Trace
(Identical Channels)
DC— 2 MHz
20 m V/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
$ 590
158
3A75
DC— 4 MHz
50mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
$ 175
157
3C66 Strain Gage
DC— 5 kHz
10 justrain/div— 10,000 ,u,strain/div,
1-2-5 sequence.
120 fi strain gage
bridge
$ 400
162
3L10 Spectrum
Analyzer
1—36 MHz
— lOOdBm at 2kHz/div dispersion
and 1 kHz (coupled) resolution
50 and 600 n
$1200
164
3S3 Dual-Trace
Sampling (Use
with 2177k or 3T4)
3S76 Dual-Trace
Sampling (Use
with 3T77A or 3T4)
DC to equivalent
1 GHz
(0.35 ns risetime)
5 mV/div — lOOmV/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
1 00 kO, 2 pF, ±3 V max
$1500
(with
probes)
166
DC to equivalent
875 MHz
(0.4 ns risetime)
2 mV/div— 200 mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
50 n, 2 volts
P to P max
DC-coupled
$1100
167
♦Variable between steps, uncalibrated.
Type 561 A,
RM561A, 564, and RM564 Oscilloscope.
i Plug-In Units.
IM565 Oscilloscopes use Plug-In Units fc
on only.
'67 Readout Oscilloscopes use Digital
ur digital readout. Other Amplifier
■ use
r
an/ or mesi
Type 565 and 1
9
T
r
ype 567 and RMi
nd these units f
•
c
nd Time Base Units can be used without digital readout.
SPECTRUM
ANALYZER PLUG-IN UNITS
o
SINGLE-BAND GENERAL PURPOSE
MULTI-BAND (5) HIGH FREQUENCY
CHARACTERISTICS
3L10
1L10
1L20
1L30
FREQUENl
COVERAC
:y
E
~Y (dBmj
1—36 MHz
10— 4200 MHz
925— 10,500 MHz
SENSITIVI1
-100
-110 to -90
-105 to —75
CALIBRATED
DISPERSION
lOHz/dlv to 2kHz/div
calibrated, plus uncali-
brated search. Internal 4
kHz crystal controlled
frequency calibrator.
10 Hz/cm to 2 kHz/cm
calibrated, plus uncali-
brated search.
1 kHz/cm to 10 MHz/cm; 1-2-5 sequence plus uncali-
brated search.
IF CENTEF
CONTROL
FREQ
LATNESS
Range: ±4 kHz max
NA
Range: ±25 MHz max
DISPLAY F
±1 dB
±1.5 dB (over 100 MHz Dispersion)
RESOLUTION
BANDWIDTH
10 Hz to 1 kHz. Coupled to dispersion.
1 kHz to 100 kHz. Coupled to dispersion.
INCIDENTAL FM
IF— 5 Hz LO— 26-61 Hz
Less than 300 Hz with Phase Lock.
ATTENUATOR
(1-dB Step)
(RF) 51 dB, ±0.1 dB per dB
(IF) 51 dB, ±0.1 dB per dB
IF GAIN CONTROL
60 dB (variable)
50 dB (variable)
LOG
LINEAR
50 dB, 8-div vertical dis-
play
50 dB, 6-cm vertical dis-
play
40 dB, 6-cm vertical display
20 dB, 8-div vertical dis-
play
26 dB, 6-cm vertical dis-
play
26 dB, 6-cm vertical display
DISPLAY
LINEAR
X?0
NA
26 dB, 6-cm vertical dis-
play
NA
SQUARE
LAW
NA
NA
13 dB, 6-cm vertical display
VIDEO
1 00 mV/cm (variable),
DC to 50 kHz, a 50 n
input resistance
1 00 mV/cm (variable),
<16Hz to >10MHz,
^50 Q input resistance
lOOmV/cm (variable), <16Hz to >10MHz,
^50 Q input resistance.
INSTRUME
WITH
NT USED
Type 560 Series
Oscilloscopes
Type 530, 540, 550, and
580* Series Oscilloscopes
Type 530, 540, 550, and 580* Series Oscilloscopes
INSTRUME
NT
Type 3L10
Type 1L10
Type 1L20
Type 1L30
PRICE
$1200
$1100
$1825
$1825
PAGE
164
111
112
112
*Requires a Type 81 Adapter.
DIGITAL READOUT COMBINATIONS
Digital plus analog displays are simultaneously presented on the Type 567 Oscilloscope and Type 6R1A Digital Unit. A Digital Readout
Combination consists of a Type 567/6R1A and any of 5 combinations of vertical and horizontal Plug-In Units; Type 3S3/3T77A, 3S76/
3T77A, 3A2/3B2, 3S3/3T4, or 3S76/3T4. Other 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units can be used for normal analog CRT display, but do
not provide digital readout.
X & Y
Plug-Ins
Calibrated De- Input RC Calibrated
Risetime flection Factor or Impedance Sweep Range
Time
Position
Digital
Resolution
Trigger
System
Price
3S3/3T77A*
0.35 ns
5 mV/div to
lOOmV/div
100 kn, 2pF
equiv 0.2 ns/
div to 10 fxs/
div plus 10X
magnifier
Through full
time base
10 or
100 dots
per div
External
$5450
(including 2
probes)
3S76/3T77A*
0.4 ns
2 mV/div to
200 mV/div
50 n
Internal
or
External
$5050
3A2/3B2
0.7 [us
lOmV/div to
lOV/div
1 Mfi, 47 pF
2 /xs/div
to 1 s/div
5 /xs to
10.5 s
1 /is to 10 ms
clock rate
in decades
$4450
o
*The Type 3T4 Programmable Sampling Sweep can be programmed through a fron
functions include sweep range (1 ns/div to 200 ,as/div), 3 calibrated sweep delay range
(100 or 1000 or alternately 100 or 10001 and sinale disolav for real-time measurements
t panel connector. Programr
s (1 /is to 1 ms), samples per s
. Type 3T4 $
nable
weep
1300.
10
SAMPLING PLUG-IN UNITS
FOR TYPE 530, 540, 550, AND 580* SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Plug-In
Input
Impedance
Risetime
Calibrated
Deflection
Factor
Signal T .
Delay Tn " er
Time
Position
Equivalent c , D
\ Samples Per
" Centimeter
Range
Price
Page
1S1
50 n
0.35 ns
2—200 mV/
cm, 1-2-5
sequence
Yes
Internal
or
External
to
500 /is
lOOps/cm
to 50 jus/cm
Variable from
approx 5
samples/cm
to over 700
samples/cm
$1 1 oot
114
1S2
50 n
90 ps
5—500 mV/
cm, 1-2-5
sequence
No
External
Through
full time
base
0.1 ns/cm to
1 fis/cm
Selected by
resolution
switch
$1300t
116
*A Type 81 Adapter is required. tPrice does not include oscilloscope.
SAMPLING SYSTEM FOR TYPE 560- SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES
Input
Instrument RC or Risetime
Impedance
Calibrated .. , _. Equivalent c . D ?„,♦„-,
_. ,. ,. Signal Time ^ Samples Per T . bystem p _„_
Def ection „", „ ... Sweep n ~. . Trigger _ . Page
r . Delay Position „ r Division Price
Factor ' Range
*Type 561 A
with Types 3S76 and
3T77A Units
50 n
0.4 ns
2-200 mV/div v
lie Yes
1-2-5 sequence
Through
full
time
base
0.2 ns/div
to
10/xs/div
plus 10X mag
10 or 100
Internal
or
External
$2250
118
♦Type 561 A
with Types 3S3 and
3T77A Units
100 kn,
2pF
0.35 ns
5-100 mV/div ..
ioc No
1-2-5 sequence
1
External
$2650
(with probes)
118
Type 564 with Types
3S76 and 3T77A Units
50 n
0.4 ns
Same features as Types 561 A, 3S76, 3T77A, (above) plus SPLIT-SCREEN
STORAGE of signal information.
$2625
122
*Type 564 with Types
3S3 and 3T77A Units
100 kn,
2pF
0.35 ns
Same features as Types 561 A, 3S3, 3T77A, (above) plus SPLIT-SCREEN
STORAGE of signal information.
$3025
(with probes)
122
*Type 567 with Types
3S76, 3T77A, and
6R1A Units
50 a
0.4 ns
Same features as Types 561 A, 3S76, 3T77A (above) plus DIGITAL READ-
OUT of pulse risetime, pulse amplitude, pulse width, time differences.
$5050
131
*Type 567 with Types
3S3, 3T77A, and6RlA
Units
100 kQ,
2pF
0.35 ns
Same features as Types 561 A, 3S3, 3T77A (above) plus DIGITAL READ-
of pulse risetime, pulse amplitude, pulse width, time differences.
$5450
(with probes)
131
The Type 3T4 Programmable Sampling Sweep is similar to the Type 3T77A except it can be programmed through a front-panel connec-
tor. Programmable functions include sweep range Ins/cm to 200/j.s/cm), 3 calibrated sweep delay ranges (1 jus to 1ms), samples
per sweep (100 or 1000), and single display for real-time measurements. Type 3T4 — $1300.
* Rack Mount models are available
SAMPLING SYSTEMS FOR TYPE 661 OSCILLOSCOPE
Input
Instruments Impedance
or RC
Calibrated c . • T .
.. .. p. ,, .. Signal Time
Risetime Deflection _ , n ...
r . Delay Position
Factor ' |
Equivalent
Sweep
Range
Samples
Per
Division
Trigger
System
Price
Page
Type 661
with Types
5T3 and 4S2A
50 fi
90 ps
2—200 mV/cm,
1-2-5 sequence
No
Through
full time
base
10 ps/cm to
100/is/cm
5, 10, 20,
50, 100,
or 1000
Ext only
$3400
193
Type 661
with Types
5T3 and 4S1
50 n
0.35 ns
Yes
Int or Ext
$3380
193
Type 661 10Qkn
with Types 2 _
J 5T3 and 4S3 P
0.35 ns
No
Ext only
$3400
with
probes
193
11
Instrument
SAMPLING SYSTEM ACCESSORIES
Description
Type 280 Trigger Countdown
281 Time Domain Reflectometry Pulser
282 Probe Adapter
Type 290 Transistor Switching-Time
Tester
Type 291 Diode Switching-Time Tester
Type 292 Semiconductor Tester and
Power Supply
Allows, timing systems to be synchronized up to 5 GHz. Output repetition
rate variable from 15 to 45 MHz.
Price Pa
$265
Provides 0.5 V pulse with <0.75 ns risetime and >5/is width for TDR
applications. Uses probe power.
Allows many conventional probes to work into 50 Q. Uses probe power.
Measures fast transistors, short duty cycle measurements of delay time,
risetime, storage time, and fall time.
Measures fast-switching diodes, forward and reverse recovery. Response
better than 0.35 ns.
Furnishes DC power and provides sub-nanosecond environments for read-
ing out time and charge information about fast semiconductor diodes
and transistors.
$ 95
$ 95
$290
$185
$325
AMPLIFIERS
::
231
231
238
238
202
Instrument
1
Gain
Frequency
Bandwidtht
Noise Level
Differential
Input
Input
RC
Output
Impedance
Price
Page
♦Type 122
lOOXor
1000X
0.2 Hz to 40 kHz
1-5/iV, RMS,
grounded
Yes
10 megohms,
50 pF
1 000 ohms
$ 135
213
Type 123
100X
3 Hz to 25 kHz
7.5 /iV, RMS, or
less grounded
No
10 megohms
31 kilohms
$ 75
238
Type 1121
100X
5 Hz to 17 MHz 50 /xV or less
21 -ns risetime P to P, grounded
No
1 megohm,
22 pF
93 ohms
$ 465
236
t Bandwidth Specifications are at 3-dB down. * Rack-Mount models are available.
PULSE GENERATORS
o
Instrument
Frequency
or Period
Main Pulse
Width
Output Trigger
Risetime Delay Amplitude Impedance Req
Price
Page
Type 109
275 to 700 Hz
0.5 ns to 300 ns
< 0.25 ns None
to 50 V
50 O None
$ 360
207
Type 1 1 1
to 100 kHz
2 ns to 0.1 (is
0.5 ns
30 to
250 ns
±5V
50 Q +5V
$ 365
208
Type 114 '{? to
10 ms
Squarewave and
1 00 ns to 1 ms
<10ns
None
±1 V to
±10V
16— 84 a
+2V to
+20 V
$ 350
210
Type R116 .„ ,
(Program- 10 ° ns to
mable) llms
50 ns to
550 jm
10 ns to
(Selectable)
50 ns to
550 /is
0.4 V to
10V
50 Q
+2V to
+20 V
$1550
211
tType 161 to 50 kHz
10 /is to 0.1 s
0.5 ps
Variable
Oto ±50 V
1— 5kQ
+3V
$ 130
224
tType 162 to 10 kHz
100 /is to 10 s
1 /IS
None
50 V
l kn
+ 15V
$ 130
225
tType 163
to 500 kHz
1 jus to 10 ms
0.2 /is
Variable
to +25 V
loon— 3.5 kn
2V
$ 130
226
Type R293
(Program-
mable)
10 kHz to
100 kHz
2 ns to
250 ns
1 ns
200 ns ^ y° 50 Q
+2V
$1000
233
tType 160A Power Supply provides power for up to 7 Type 161 or 162 Generators, 5 Type 163 Generators, or 5 Type 360 Indicators. $190
Instrument
SIGNAL GENERATORS
Description
Type 106 Square-Wave Generator; frequency range is 10 Hz to 1 MHz, risetime <1 ns; pos and neg
outputs of 50 mV to 500 mV into 50 Q plus high ampl output with <12ns risetime.
Type 184
Type 191
Time-Mark Generator; marker interval range of 100 ns to 5 s in 1-5-10 sequence, crystal-con-
trolled oscillator.
Price
$590
675
Page
206
227
Constant Amplitude Signal Generator; frequency range is 350 kHz to 100 MHz, 5 mV to 5 V
amplitude.
400
228
12
Reference Information
DESCRIPTIONS AND SPECIFICATIONS
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME MEASUREMENTS
All present regular-production Tektronix Instruments and Ac-
cessories are listed and described in this catalog. We hope
that it contains the right kind and amount of information for you.
THE OSCILLOSCOPE
The principal Tektronix instrument is the cathode-ray oscillo-
scope, which is a three-dimensional display device. These three
axes are designated: X (time-base or horizontal plane), Y (ampli-
tude or vertical plane), and Z (brightness range of display). The
X and Y axes convey precise quantitative information and are
usually specified as TIME per division and/or VOLTS per divi-
sion. The Z axis is usually modulated by blanking or unblanking
voltages in order to eliminate retrace time from the presentation.
We have tried to describe all of the more significant fea-
tures, capabilities, and limitations of Tektronix instruments in a
way that will be of the most value to most customers.
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
The following instruments are specifically designed for the
more severe environments often encountered when they are used
in portable or mobile applications:
321 A, 422 and R422, 453 and R453, 647 and RM647.
The environmental characteristics listed include some or all of
the following:
Temperature, Altitude, Humidity, Vibration, Shock, Electro-
magnetic interference (EMI, previously RFI), and Transporta-
tion.
Sample production instruments are tested periodically as part
of a continual quality control process. Complete tests on every
production instrument are undersirable as well as uneconomical.
The specifications for humidity, vibration, shock and trans-
portation are intended to be beyond what can be expected in
use, and operation at these extremes may cause minor physical
deterioration. Such operation, however, should not cause elec-
trical performance deterioration outside specifications. The
specifications for temperature and altitude are such that con-
tinual use at the limits will not cause significant short term dete-
rioration. Naturally, higher temperature operation can be
expected to reduce long term reliability and should be avoided
if possible. The EMI test is completely non-destructive.
For more specific information on the environmental charac-
teristics and how they apply to the above instruments, please
refer to the page covering that instrument.
BANDWIDTH
Frequency-response characteristics are at the 3-dB down
points unless otherwise stated.
Equipment for measuring frequency response (bandwidth)
must be carefully selected to assure accurate readings. A gen-
erator which is correct in amplitude at just the low frequency
and high frequency check points could prove misleading. Uni-
form frequency response measurements require a generator
with "flat" output amplitude characteristics over its entire fre-
quency range. Loading placed on the generator must also be
considered. High frequency sinewave generators must usually
be terminated to match their output impedance. For oscillo-
scopes having an upper frequency response in the area from
350 kilohertz through 100 megahertz, Tektronix uses Type 191
Constant Amplitude Signal Generator to check for high fre-
quency roll-off characteristics.
RISETIME
A characteristic of importance to the pulse-measurement field
is risetime. This parameter is generally a good indication of
relative bandwidth. In short, faster risetime means greater band-
width (in the direction of higher frequencies). Several factors
must be considered in making risetime measurements. For reason-
ably accurate readings of risetime, the oscilloscope should be
approximately 5 times faster than the signal to be measured.
When risetime of the signal approaches risetime of the oscillo-
scope, the true signal risetime can be computed. Risetime of
cascaded signals is calculated by taking the square root of the
sum of the squares (of signal and oscilloscope risetimes). For
example, a signal with a risetime of one nanosecond viewed on
an oscilloscope with a risetime capability of one nanosecond
will appear as approximately 1.4 nanoseconds.
RISETIME MEASUREMENT EQUIPMENT
In order to measure actual risetime of the oscilloscope, the
input pulse should be free of overshoot and ringing, since rise-
time is generally measured between the 10% and 90% ampli-
tude points on a waveform. Proper termination of the input-
pulse source must also be considered. Tektronix uses Type
106 Square-wave Generator (approximately 1 ns risetime), or
Type 109 Pulse Generator (less than 0.25 ns risetime) for check-
ing risetime of general purpose oscilloscopes.
VOLTAGE RATINGS
In general, peak to peak input voltage ratings are for DC
and low-frequency values. Because of possible damage to input
components, especially solid-state devices, continuous operating
is required as frequency is increased. This is especially true with
RF at high-sensitivity settings.
13
Reference Information
MECHANICAL CONSIDERATIONS
VENTILATION
In general, a standard oscilloscope using 250 waffs of power
or more will have filfered forced-air cooling.
CLEARANCE
Under normal conditions, af leasf two inches of unobstructed
space around the oscilloscope should be maintained to assure
safe operating temperature. Should the chassis temperature
become excessive, a thermal-cutout switch will interrupt the
power and keep it off until a safe operating temperature is
reached.
CONSTRUCTION
The oscilloscope chassis and cabinet are of aluminum alloy
for lightweight durability.
FINISH
The oscilloscope front panel is anodized and the cabinet has
blue-vinyl finish.
TEKTRONIX-MANUFACTURED COMPONENTS
When standard commercially-available components do not
meet rigid requirements of Tektronix Oscilloscopes and associ-
ated instruments, and suppliers cannot fulfill adequately this
demand for these specialized components, Tektronix manu-
factures them.
Some of these special components manufactured by Tektronix
for exclusive use in its own equipment include cathode-ray
tubes, transformers, ceramic terminal strips, and etched cir-
cuitry — in addition to precision potentiometers, capacitors, wire-
wound resistors, inductors, semiconductor and solid-state
devices.
Designed compactly for reliability and efficiency these Tek-
tronix-manufactured components incorporate the highest stand-
ards of craftsmanship in meeting the special needs of particular
instruments.
CATHODE-RAY-TUBE PHOSPHOR DATA
The catalog description of each oscilloscope indicates
the phosphor normally supplied. However, for specific
applications, you may want to specify another phosphor.
The phosphor data chart will help in your selection.
For more specific information regarding the best-suited
phosphor for your particular application, please confer
with your Tektronix Field Engineer. He will know the
factors that must be considered in selection of a phos-
phor for any given application. For example, Type PI 1 is
excellent for waveform photography but due to its short
persistence, it is not well suited for applications requiring
visual observation of low speed phenomena.
Phosphors are rated in several parameters, such as color
of fluorescence or phosphorescence, decay, etc. The fol- {
lowing table describes the more commonly used phosphors.
PHOSPHOR DATA CHART
Phosphor
Fluorescence
Phosphorescence®
Relative
Luminance^ 1
Relative
Writing Speed® Decay
(in % based on to 0.7%
P-ll as 100 % ) (time in ms)
Comments
P-l
Yellowish-green
—
45%
35%
95
General purpose.
P-2
Bluish-green
Green
60%
70%
51*
Good compromise for
high and low speed
applications.
P-4
White
—
50%
75%
20
Television displays.
P-7
Blue-white
Yellow-green
45%
95%
66*
Long decay.
P-l 1
Purplish-blue
—
25%
100%
17
High photographic
writing speed.
P-l 5
Bluish-green
—
15%
25%
0.05
Very short decay.
P-31
Green
.
100%
75%
32
High luminance; gen-
eral purpose.
® Where different than fluorescence.
© Taken with a Spectra Brightness Spot Meter which incorporates a CIE standard eye filter. Representative of 10 kV alumi-
nized screens. P-31 as reference.
® P-l 1 as reference with Polaroid 410 film. Representative of 10 kV aluminized screens.
* Low level decay lasts over one minute under conditions of low ambient illumination.
14
Symbols and Abbreviations
The user of this catalog may find some unfamiliar symbols and abbreviations. In general, Tektronix has adopted the
Symbols For Units, IEEE Standard Number 260, dated January 15, 1965. The abbreviations have been adopted by Tek-
tronix following a thorough study of available abbreviations and guidelines published by the National Bureau of Stand-
ards, United States Government, American Standards Association, and others.
Many of these symbols and abbreviations are new, and inconsistencies between this list and other sources such as
instrument panels and existing instrument manuals will be found. Future instruments and manuals will reflect adherence to
these new symbols and abbreviations.
Below are some of the symbols and abbreviations used in this catalog. Those symbols found in IEEE Standard Number
260 ore marked with an asterisk.
alternating current
*ampere
amplitude modulation
approximate
approximately equal to
attenuation
audio frequency
automatic
bandwidth
base
*bel
' calibrate
cathode-ray oscilloscope
cathode-ray tube
*centimeter
clockwise
common mode rejection
common mode rejection ratio
counterclockwise
continuous wave
current
♦decibel
*decibel referred to one
milliwatt
deflection factor
*degree
*degree Celsius (centigrade)
*degree fahrenheit
♦degree kelvin
delayed
delay line
differential
direct current
division
*farad
♦foot
*foot lambert
^frequency modulation
AC
gig°
A
♦gigahertz
AM
graticule
approx
gravity unit
or eat
greater than
a Hen
greater than or equal to
AF
ground
auto
♦henry
bw
*hertz
b
*hour
B
impedance
cal
inductance
CRO
intermediate frequency
CRT
cm
kilo
cw
♦kilohertz
CMR
kilohm
CMRR
kilometer
ccw
♦kilovolt
CW
1
less than
less than or equal to
dB
local oscillator
low frequency
dBm
DF
maximum
mega
"C
♦megahertz
"F
♦megohm
°K
*meter
dlyd
micro
DL
♦microsecond
diff
milli
DC
♦millimeter
div
♦millisecond
minus
F
ft
nano
R
♦nanosecond
FM
negative
G
GHz
grat
g
>
>
gnd
H
Hz
h
Z
L
IF
k
kHz
kn
km
kV
<
<
LO
LF
max
M
MHz
Mn
m
li
jus
m
mm
ms
n
ns
neg
ohm Q
operational amplifier op amp
pair pr
parts per million P/M
peak to peak P to P
pico p
*picoampere pA
♦pico farad pF
♦picosecond ps
plus +
plus and minus + and —
plus or minus ±
positive pos
pulse per second p/s
pulse repetition rate PRR or r p
pulse width PW or t p
radio frequency interference RFI
resistance R
resistance capacitance RC
resistance inductance RL
root mean square RMS
♦revolution per minute r/min
risetime t r
♦second (time) s
serial number SN
signal sig
signal to noise ratio S/N
standing wave ratio SWR
storage time t 5
sweep swp
synchronize sync
temperature T
time domain reflectometry TDR
tolerance tol
♦volt V
♦watt W
15
This glossary of oscilloscope ierms is published to promote
better communication through use of a common concept
of terms.
These terms are, in part, the result of work performed
by the Subcommittee on Oscilloscopes, IEEE G-IM Com-
mittee on High Frequency Instruments.
At this time, the proposed list has been submitted, but
not yet accepted by the IEEE.
Accelerating Voltage — The cathode-to-screen voltage applied
to a cathode-ray tube for the purpose of accelerating the
electron beam.
Alternate Mode — A means of displaying output signals of two
or more channels by switching the channels, in sequence, after
each sweep.
Astigmatism — In the viewing plane of the cathode-ray tube,
any deviation of the indicating spot from a circle.
Bandwidth — A statement of the frequencies defining the upper
and lower limits of a frequency spectrum where the amplitude
response of an amplifier to a sinusoidal waveform becomes
0.707 (— 3dB) the amplitude at a reference frequency. When
only one number appears, it is taken as the upper limit.
Bezel — The flange or cover used for holding an external grati-
cule or CRT cover in front of the CRT in an oscilloscope. May
also be used for mounting a trace recording camera or other
accessory item.
Blanking — Extinguishing of the spot. Retrace Blanking is the
extinction of the spot during the retrace portion of the sweep
waveform. The term does not necessarily imply blanking during
the holdoff interval or while waiting for a trigger in a triggered
sweep system.
Brightness — The attribute of visual perception in accordance
with which an area appears to emit more or less light. (See
Luminance.)
Channel — A single path for transmitting electric signals, usually
in distinction from other parallel paths.
Chopped Blanking — The process of blanking the indicating
spot during the switching periods in chopped mode.
Chopped Mode — A means of displaying output signals of two
or more channels by switching the channels, in sequence, at a
rate not referenced to in the sweep.
Chopping Rate — The rate at which channel switching occurs
in Chopped Mode.
Chopping Transient Blanking — The process of blanking the
indicating spot during the switching periods in Chopped Mode.
Common-Mode Rejection Ratio (CMRR) — The ratio of the
deflection factor of a Common-Mode Signal to the deflection
factor of a Differential Signal.
Common-Mode Signal — The instantaneous algebraic average
of two signals applied to a balanced circuit, all signals referred
to a common reference.
DC Balance — An adjustment of circuitry to avoid a change in
DC level when changing gain.
DC Offset — A DC level which may be added to the input
signal, referred to the input terminals.
DC Shift — An error in transient response with a time constant
approaching several seconds.
Deflection Blanking — Blanking by means of a deflection
structure in the CRT electron gun which traps the electron beam
inside the gun to extinguish the spot, permitting blanking during
retrace and between sweeps regardless of intensity setting.
Deflection Factor — The ratio of the input signal amplitude to
the resultant displacement of the indicating spot, (e.g., volts/
division.)
Delayed Sweep — 1. A sweep that has been delayed either
by a predetermined period or by a period determined by an
additional independent variable. 2. Mode of operation of a
sweep, as defined above.
Dual-Beam Oscilloscopes — An oscilloscope in which the cath-
ode-ray tube produces two separate electron beams that may
be individually or jointly controlled.
Dual-Trace — A mode of operation in which a single beam in a
cathode-ray tube is shared by two signal channels. See Alter-
nate Mode and Chopped Mode.
External Triggering — Introducing the Triggering Signal directly
into the trigger circuit from an external source.
Fluorescence — Emission of light from a substance (a phosphor)
during excitation by radiant energy.
Focus — The point of maximum convergence on the electron
beam manifested by minimum spot size on the cathode-ray
tube. (Note definition for Astigmatism.)
Graticule — A scale for measurement of quantities displayed
on the cathode-ray tube of an oscilloscope.
Information Writing Speed — The cathode-ray tube character-
istic which is an indication of the maximum number of bits of
information per second that can be photographically recorded
and identified. Test conditions must be specified.
Input RC Characteristics — The DC resistance and capacitance
to ground present at the input to an oscilloscope.
Intensity Modulation — The process and/or effect of varying
the electron beam current in a cathode-ray tube resulting in
varying brightness or luminance of the trace.
Internal Graticule — A graticule whose rulings are a permanent
part of the inner surface of the cathode-ray tube faceplate.
Internal Triggering — Using a sample of a deflection signal
(usually the vertical deflection signal) as a triggering signal
source.
Jitter — An aberration of a repetitive display indicating insta-
bility of the signal or of the oscilloscope. May be random or
periodic, and is usually associated with the time axis.
Line Triggering — Triggering from the power-line frequency.
Luminance — The photometric equivalent of brightness.
Note: Luminance is recommended for the photometric quan-
tity which has been called brightness. Use of this term permits
brightness to be used entirely with reference to the sensory
response. The photometric quantity has been confused often
with the sensation merely because of the use of one name for
two distinct ideas. Brightness will continue to be used properly
in non-quantitative statements especially with reference to'
sensations and perceptions of light.
Magnified Sweep — A sweep whose time per division has been
decreased by amplification of the sweep waveform rather than
by changing the time constants used to generate it.
16
Glossary of Oscilloscope Terms
Oscillography — The art and practice of utilizing the oscillo-
graph.
Oscilloscope — An oscillograph primarily intended for the im-
mediate viewing of the graphical plot . . . most commonly used
to denote a cathode-ray oscilloscope.
Overshoot — The initial transient response to a unidirectional
change in input which occurs simultaneously with the main
transmission but exceeds its limiting final value.
Persistence — See Phosphor Decay.
Phosphor Decay — A phosphorescence curve, energy emitted
versus time.
Phosphorescence — Emission of light from a substance after
excitation has been removed.
Preshoot — The initial transient response to a unidirectional
change in input which precedes the main transmission and may
be of the same or opposite polarity.
Raster — A predetermined pattern of scanning lines used in a
CRT display.
Ringing — An oscillatory transient occurring in the output of a
system as a result of a suddenly applied change in input.
Usually damped in time.
Risetime — The interval between the instants at which the instan-
taneous pulse amplitude first reaches specified lower and upper
limits. Unless otherwise stated, these limits shall be 10% and
90% of the pulse's amplitude.
Rolloff — The particular manner in which the amplitude-fre-
quency characteristic behaves as it approaches its frequency
limits.
Rounding — The loss of a sharp corner of a waveform; hence,
a loss of high frequency components in the waveform. Com-
monly, the loss of the corner following the leading edge of a
squarewave.
Signal Delay — The transmission time of a signal through a
network. The time is always finite, may be undesired, or may
be purposely introduced .
Single Sweep — Operating mode for a triggered-sweep oscillo-
scope in which the sweep must" be reset for each operation,
thus preventing unwanted multiple display; particularly useful
for trace photography. In the interval after the sweep is reset
and before it is triggered it is said to be armed.
Spot — The illuminated spot that appears where the electron
beam strikes the fluorescent screen of a CRT.
Stability — Property of retaining defined electrical characteristics
for a prescribed period. Deviations from a stable state may be
called drift or jitter. In triggered sweep systems, triggering
stability may refer to the ability of the trigger and sweep
system to maintain jitter-free display of high-frequency wave-
forms for relatively long (seconds to hours) periods of time.
Also the name of the oscilloscope control used to adjust the
sweep for triggered, free running, or synchronized operation.
Sweep Accuracy — Accuracy of the trace horizontal displace-
ment compared with the reference independent variable, usually
expressed in terms of average rate error as a percent of full
scale. (See Sweep Linearity.)
Sweep Delay Accuracy — Accuracy of indicated sweep delay,
usually specified in error terms.
Sweep Magnifier — Circuit or control for expanding part of a
display in the reference coordinate. Sometimes known as sweep
expander.
Sweep Linearity — Maximum displacement error of the inde-
pendent variable between specified points on the display area.
Commonly expressed as a percent of the distance between
these points.
Sweep Lockout — Means for preventing multiple sweeps when
operating in a single-sweep mode.
Sweep Range — The set of sweep time/division settings pro-
vided.
Sweep Reset — In oscilloscopes the single-sweep operation, the
arming of the sweep generator to allow it to cycle once.
Sweep Switching — Alternate display of two or more time bases
or other sweeps using a single-beam CRT; comparable to dual-
or multiple-trace operation of a deflection amplifier.
Sweep Time/Div — The nominal time required for the spot in
the reference coordinate to move from one graticule division
to the next.
Synchronized Sweep — A sweep which would free-run in the
absence of an applied signal but in the presence of the signal,
is synchronized by it.
Tilt — The slope associated with the flat portion of a nominally
rectangular pulse of given time duration.
Trace Width — The distance between points on opposite sides
of a trace at which luminance is 50% of maximum. If the trace
departs from a well-behaved (approximately Gaussian) form, it
should be smoothed for the purpose of measurement.
Transient Response — Commonly, the characteristic response
of a system to a unit step or unit impulse. Elements of transient
response most commonly specified are: risetime, falltime, over-
shoot, undershoot, preshoot, and ringing.
Trigger — A pulse used to initiate some function (e.g., a Trig-
gered Sweep or delay ramp). Where the terms Trigger and
Triggering Signal are used together, Triggering Signal con-
ventionally refers to a waveform applied to the triggering cir-
cuits and from which a trigger or trigger pulse is derived. Other-
wise, Trigger may loosely refer to a waveform of any shape
used as a signal from which to derive a trigger pulse, as in
"trigger source", "trigger input", etc.
Trigger Countdown — A process that reduces the repetition
rate of a triggering signal.
Triggering Level — The instantaneous amplitude of a triggering
signal at which a trigger is to be generated. Also the name of
the control which selects the level.
Triggering Signal — The signal from which a trigger is derived.
Triggering Slope — The positive-going ( + slope) or negative-
going ( — slope) portion of a triggering signal from which a
Trigger is to be derived. Also, the control which selects the
slope to be employed.
Unblanking — Turning on of the CRT beam.
Undershoot — The initial transient response to a unidirectional
change in input which occurs simultaneously with the main
transmission and is opposite in polarity (See Rounding).
Writing Speed — See Information Writing Speed.
Writing Time/Div — The minimum time per unit distance re-
quired to record a trace. The method of recording must be
specified.
X-Y Display — A rectilinear coordinate plot of two variables.
Z-Axis Amplifier — An amplifier for signals controlling a display
perpendicular to the X-Y Axis (commonly intensity of the spot).
17
Type DC-to-4 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE
SMALL IN SIZE
LOW IN WEIGHT
4 MHz BANDWIDTH
TOmV/div DEFLECTION FACTOR
The Type 31 OA Oscilloscope is an instrument you can take
with you — easily, comfortably. Small size and low weight com-
bined with operation on 50- to 800-hertz line frequency make
this an ideal instrument for maintenance and calibration of
specialized measuring and recording instruments at their point
of use. Accurate calibration and excellent linearity assure
faithful displays and precise time and amplitude measurements
either in the laboratory or in the field. Functional panel design
and versatile control systems contribute to operator convenience.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
DC-coupled, 0.1 V/div to 50 V/div.
AC-coupled only, 0.01 V/div to 0.05 V/div.
BANDWIDTH— 0.1 V/div to 50 V/div, DC to 4 MHz. 0.01 V/div
to 0.05 V/div, 2 Hz to 3.5 MHz.
INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.5 /xs/div to 0.2s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep time/div to 0.1 iis/div.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS—
Internal: 0.5 div deflection at 1 kHz, increasing to 2 div
deflection at 5 MHz.
External: 0.2 V peak to peak at 1 kHz, increasing to 2 V peak
to peak at 5 MHz.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.5 V/div.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 div. Each div equal to V 4 inch.
ACCELERATING POTENTIAL— 1 .85 kV.
PHOSPHOR— P31.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square-
wave (approx).
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 175
watts.
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH
DC to 4 MHz (— 3dB), approx 90-ns risetime to 0.1 V/div;
2 Hz to 3.5 MHz (— 3dB), approx 100-ns risetime to 0.01
V/div.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
lOOmV/div to 50 V/div, DC coupled, in 9 steps, 1-2-5
sequence. An AC-coupled preamplifier provides three addi-
tional steps of lOmV/div, 20 mV/div, and 50 mV/div. An
uncalibrated control provides adjustment between steps and
to approx 125 V/div.
ACCURACY
When gain adjustments are accurately set at 0.1 V/div and
lOmV/div, any other position of the VOLTS/DIV switch
will have an accuracy of ±3%.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. With 10X attenuator
probe, input RC is 10 megohm paralleled by approx 9.5 pF.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE
0.5^s/div to 0.2s/div in 18 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. An uncali-
brated control provides adjustment between steps and to
approx 0.6s/div. A front-panel warning light indicates when
the control is in an uncalibrated position.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER ^^
X5, expands the center 2-division portion of the normaK
trace to 10 divisions. Extends the fastest sweep range to
0.1 iis/div.
18
310A
ACCURACY
Normal, ±3%. Magnified, ±3% except the 0.5 /xs/div
step, which is ±5%.
HORIZONTAL INPUT
Deflection factor is 1.5V/div. Can be adjusted by a gain
control. Bandwidth is DC to 1 MHz (—3 dB). Input R approx
lOOkfi.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES
Triggering level; ± Internal, ± External, or ± Line; AC
or DC; Automatic.
TRIGGERING REQUIREMENTS
Internal — 0.5-div deflection at 1 kHz, increasing to 2-div
deflection at 5 MHz.
External — 0.2-V peak to peak at 1 kHz, increasing to 2-V
peak to peak at 5 MHz.
Automatic — requires a signal between approx 60 Hz and 2
MHz. In the absence of signal, a reference trace at approx
50 Hz is provided.
UNBLANKING
The unblanking waveform is DC-coupled to the control grid
of the CRT, assuring uniform bias for all sweep steps and
repetition rates.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Squarewave with 11 steps from 50 mV to 100 V peak to
peak, 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is ±3%. Squarewave repe-
tition rate is approx 1 kHz.
GRATICULE
Edge-lighted, ruled in 8 vertical and 10 horizontal '/,-inch
divisions. Illumination is controlled by a front-panel control.
CATHODE RAY TUBE
The 3-inch flat-faced mono-accelerator CRT operates at
1.85-kV accelerating potential. A P31 phosphor is normally
supplied.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105V to 125V or 210 to 250V.
Transformer taps permit selection of center line-voltage within
this range. Frequency — 50 to 800 Hz. Requires approx 4%
higher line voltage at 800 Hz. Power requirements — approx
175W. Instrument is factory-wired for 105-125 V.
HINGED CHASSIS
The Type 31 0A opens up to permit easy accessibility to all
components.
MECHANICAL
Dimensions are 10%" high by 7" wide by 17%" deep. Net
weight is 23 pounds. Shipping weight is 34 pounds, approx.
TYPE 310A OSCILLOSCOPE $675
Each instrument includes: 1 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — patch cord,
18", BNC-to-BNC (012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, 18", BNC-to-banana
plug (012-0091-00); 1— post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0024-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 —
smoke gray filter (378-0550-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0244-00).
FAN BASE
A Fan Base is available to provide filtered forced-air ven-
tilation. This will reduce operating temperature when the Type
31 0A is used continuously for prolonged periods of time or
in hot or limited-ventilation area. For convenience, the Fan
Base tilts the oscilloscope to a convenient viewing angle. For
use on 105-1 25 V, 50 to 60 Hz only:
Order Part Number 016-0012-00 $50
For use on 21 0-250 V, 50 to 60 Hz only:
Order Part Number 016-0013-00
$50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
19
Type
DC-to-10 MHz-9-kV OSCILLOSCOPE
BRIGHT TRACE
TO MHz BANDWIDTH AT 10 mV/div
INTERNAL DELAY LINE
COMPACT CABINET OR RACK-MOUNT
MODELS
The Type 317 is an excellent oscilloscope for the daylight
conditions often encountered in the field and at production test
stations. Its brilliant trace, provided by 9-kV accelerating poten-
tial on a Tektronix 3-inch cathode-ray tube, is easily readable
in bright areas . . . even at low sweep-repetition rates. And
its DC-to-10 MHz vertical response and wide sweep range take
care of many of today's complex field and test station appli-
cations. Of course, these fine characteristics make it an excellent
laboratory oscilloscope, too.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR —
DC-coupled, 0.1 V/div to 50V/div.
AC-coupled, 0.01 V/div to 50 V/div.
BANDWIDTH— DC-coupled, DC to 10 MHz. AC-coupled, 2 Hz
to 10 MHz.
RISETIME— <35ns.
INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.2 /xs/div to 2 s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 0.04/ts/div.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 0.2-div deflection.
External: 0.5 to 20 V.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.4 V/div, DC to 400 kHz.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 div. Each div equal to % inch.
ACCELERATING POTENTIAL— 9 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square- ^%
wave (approx).
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 260
watts.
20
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH
DC to 10 MHz
2 Hz to 10 MHz
-3 dB), approx 35-ns risetime to 0.1 V/div;
-3 dB), approx 35-ns risetime to 0.01 V/div.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
100 m V/div to 50 V/div, DC coupled, in 9 steps, 1-2-5 se-
quence. An AC-coupled preamplifier provides three additional
steps of lOmV/div, 20mV/div, and 50 mV/div. An uncali-
brated control provides adjustment between steps and to
approx 125 V/div.
ACCURACY
When gain adjustments are accurately set at 0.1 V/div and
lOmV/div, any other position of the VOLTS/DIV switch
will have an accuracy of ±3%.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approx 40 pF. With 10X attenuator
probe, input RC is 10 megohms paralleled by approx 9.5 pF.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE
0.2/xs/div to 2s/div in 22 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. An uncali-
brated control provides adjustment between steps and to
approx 6s/div. A front-panel light indicates when the control
is in an uncalibrated position.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER
X5, expands the center 2-division portion of the normal trace
to 10 divisions. Extends the fastest sweep range to 0.04 /xs/
div.
ACCURACY
Normal, ±3%
Magnified, ±5%.
Under daylight conditions, the trace is
easily readable . . . even at low sweep repe-
tition rates on this portable Type 317.
317
RM"17
HORIZONTAL INPUT
Deflection factor is l. 4 V/div (approx). Can be adjusted with
HORIZ INPUT ATTEN control. Bandwidth is DC to 500 kHz
(— 3dB). Input R approx lOOkO.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES
Triggering level; ± Internal, ± External, or ztLine; AC or DC;
Automatic; HF Sync.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal — 0.2-div deflection at l kHz, increasing to 2-div at
5 MHz in AC MODE; 0.3-div to 2-div in DC MODE; 0.5-div
deflection at 60 Hz, increasing to 2-div at 2 MHz in AUTO
MODE.
External — 0.5-V peak to peak at l kHz, increasing to approx
2-V peak to peak at 5 MHz. TRIGGERING LEVEL control
covers range of 0.5 V to 20 V.
Automatic — requires a signal between approx 60 Hz and
2 MHz. In the absence of signal, a reference trace' at approx
50 Hz is provided.
High-Frequency Sync — assures a stable display of sinewave
signals up to approx 15 MHz. Requires 0.2-div deflection at
5 MHz, 2-div at 15 MHz, or an external signal of approx 2-V.
UNBLANKING
The unblanking waveform is DC-coupled to the control grid of
the CRT, assuring uniform bias for all sweep steps and repe-
tition rates.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Squarewave with 11 steps from 50 mV to 100 V peak to peak,
1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is ±3%. Squarewave repetition
rate is approx 1 kHz.
21
317
RM"l7
GRATICULE
Edge-lighted, ruled in 8 vertical and 10 horizontal '/ 4 -inch
divisions. Illumination is controlled by a front-panel control.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
The 3" flat-faced helical post-accelerator CRT operates at
9-kV accelerating potential. A P3l phosphor is normally
supplied.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
A 20-V (approx) positive-gate waveform of the same dura-
tion as the sweep, and a 150-V (approx) positive-going saw-
tooth waveform are available at front-panel connectors.
WARNING INDICATORS
Separate front-panel neon lights indicate when the variable
controls for vertical deflection or sweep range are not in
their calibrated positions.
POWER REQUIREMENT
1 05 V to 1 25 V or 21 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, approx 260 W.
Instrument factory wired for 105 V to 125 V. Type 317 can be
ordered wired for operation on several nominal line voltages
as follows:
Nominal Line Voltage Operating Range
(Figures taken at 60 Hz)
110
117
124
220
234
248
99 to 117 volts
105 to 125 volts
111 to 132 volts
198 to 235 volts
210 to 250 volts
223 to 265 volts
A decal on the transformer gives complete instructions for
changing the operating range.
CABINET MODEL
Dimensions are 12 3 / 8 " high by 8%" wide by 19'/j" deep.
Net weight is 33V 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 47 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 317 $875
Each instrument includes: 1— P6006 probe (010-0127-00]; 1— patch
cord, 18", BNC-to-BNC (012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, 18", BNC-to-
banana plug (012-0091-00); 1— post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1—3-
conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-
00); 1 — smoke gray filter (378-0550-00); 2 — instruction manual (070-
0297-00).
RACK MOUNT MODEL
Dimensions are 7" high by 19" wide by 17 5 / 8 " deep. The
instrument mounts to the standard 19" rack on slide-out tracks
and can be pulled forward, tilted, and locked in any of 7
positions for easy servicing. Net weight is 35 pounds. Ship-
ping weight is 66 pounds, approx.
For more mounting information, please refer to the catalog
Mounting Dimension page.
TYPE RM1 7 $950
Each instrument includes; 1— P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1— patch cord,
18", BNC-to-BNC (012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, 18", BNC-to-banana
plug (012-0091-00); 1— post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 —
smoke gray filter (378-0550-00); 1 — pair mounting tracks (351-0017-00);
2 — instruction manual (070-0325-00).
SUPPORTING CRADLES
When the RM17 is mounted in a backless rack, these sup-^^
porting cradles are necessary for rear-slide support.
Order Part Number 040-0345-00 $12.00 '
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
22
1
PORTABLE OSCILLOSCOPE Type
6 MHz BANDWIDTH AT 10 mV/DIV
SMALL SIZE— LIGHT WEIGHT
LOW POWER CONSUMPTION
AC, DC, OR BATTERY OPERATED
DESIGNED FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS
The Type 321 A combines small size with performance equal
to laboratory instrument standards of accuracy. Weighing
only 17 pounds, complete with re-chargeable batteries, it may
be used in the many applications where accurate measure-
ments are required in the field. It can be operated from its
own internal battery pack, from the DC systems on boats, air-
planes, cars, etc, or from an AC line.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 0.01 V/div to 20V/div,
DC coupled.
BANDWIDTH— DC to at least 6 MHz.
INPUT RC — 1 megohm paralleled by approx 35 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.5 /xs/div to 0.5 s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep time/div to 0.1 jus/div.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS—
Internal: AC, DC, Auto — 0.2 major div display at 1 kHz
increasing to 1 major div display at 6 MHz.
External: AC, DC, Auto — 1 V peak to peak at 1 kHz increas-
ing to 3 V peak to peak at 6 MHz.
EXTERNAL INPUT
Deflection Factor: With 5X MAG on, 1 V/div ±10%.
Bandwidth: DC to at least 1 MHz.
Input RC: 100 kO paralleled by approximately 30 pF.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 div. Each div equal to '/, inch.
ACCELERATING POTENTIAL— 4 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 500-mV squarewave peak to peak
and internal 40-mV squarewave peak to peak at approx
2 kHz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— Approx 700 mA from 10 size D
batteries or a DC supply of 11.5V to 35 V. Approx 20 watts
from an AC supply of 115V ±10% or 230V ±10%, 45 —
800 Hz.
23
321A
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.
DC COUPLED VERTICAL AMPLIFIER has a bandwidth of
DC to 6 MHz. Vertical deflection is calibrated in ll steps from
0.01 to 20 V/div in a l, 2, 5 sequence. A vernier control pro-
vides for continuously variable adjustment from 0.01 V/div to
50 V/div, uncalibrated. In addition, the fully-clockwise posi-
tion of the VOLTS/DIV switch marked CAL 4 DIV, allows
observation of an internally-coupled 40-mV peak to peak
squarewave calibration signal.
CALIBRATION ACCURACY is adjusted internally for setting
the gain of the vertical amplifier. When this adjustment is
set, the vertical deflection factor is ±3% for any V/div switch
position.
INPUT RC is I megohm paralleled by approximately 35 pF.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE RATING is 600 volts com-
bined DC and AC peak.
PROBE providing 10X attenuation is supplied with the instru-
ment and presents an input resistance of 10 megohms par-
alleled by approximately 8.5 pF. The probe reduces the ver-
tical deflection factor by ten.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION FACTOR
SWEEP RANGE is calibrated in 19 steps from 0.5 /xs/div to
0.5s/div in a 1, 2, 5 sequence. Accuracy is ±3%- A vernier
control provides for continuously variable adjustment from
0.5/xs/div to approximately 1.5s/div, uncalibrated.
DC COUPLED UNBLANKING provides uniform brightness at
all sweep time/div settings.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES provide for complete manual con-
trol or fully-automatic triggering.
AMPLITUDE-LEVEL SELECTION is accomplished with adjust-
able amplitude-level and stability controls for triggering the
sweep at a selected amplitude level on the triggering wave-
form. Trigger source can be internal or external, AC-coupled
or DC-coupled. Trigger point can occur anywhere on the ris-
ing slope or falling slope of the triggering waveform.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING is provided by an automatic
level-seeking trigger circuit which is useful for triggering above
50 Hz. The sweep is triggered automatically at about a 50-Hz
rate in the absence of an input signal to provide a convenient
reference trace on the screen.
o
24
321A
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for internal triggering: a signal
' large enough to produce 0.2 major divisions of vertical deflec-
tion at 1 kHz is required, increasing to 1 major division of ver-
tical deflection at 6 MHz. For external triggering: a signal
of 1 V peak to peak at 1 kHz is required, increasing to 3 V
peak to peak at 6 MHz.
HORIZONTAL INPUT is provided by a DC-coupled external
connection to the sweep amplifier through a front-panel con-
nector. Bandwidth is DC to at least 1 MHz. The horizontal
deflection factor is 1 V/div ±10% with the 5X MAG on.
Input RC is 100 kf> ±10% paralleled by approximately 30 pF.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides a 500 mV peak to peak
squarewave voltage through a front-panel connector. In addi-
tion, an internally coupled 40 mV peak to peak squarewave
voltage is available in the fully clockwise position (CAL 4 DIV)
of the VOLTS/DIV switch. Accuracy is ±3%. Repetition rate
of the squarewave is approximately 2 kHz.
INTENSITY MODULATION of the cathode-ray tube display
is provided by an external signal connected to the CRT grid
terminal on the back panel of the oscilloscope. A negative
signal of approximately 30 volts peak is required to cut off
the beam from maximum brightness. Less voltage is required
with low intensity settings.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE is a Tektronix flat-faced, 3-inch post
accelerator tube which provides a bright trace and utilizes
low heater power. Accelerating potential is 4 kV. Deflection
blanking of the beam is used. A P31 phosphor is normally
supplied.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE is edge lighted. Adjustment is
provided by the SCALE ILLUM control when operating from an
AC line only. Display area of the graticule is marked in six
vertical and ten horizontal one-fourth inch major divisions.
ELECTRONICALLY REGULATED DC POWER SUPPLY insures
stable operation over line variations between 11.5 and 35 volts
DC, or 115 volts ±10% or 230 volts RMS ±10%, 45 to 800 Hz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS are satisfied either from ten size
D flashlight cells (approximately '/ 2 hour continuous operation,
more on intermittent operation); from ten size D alkaline cells,
such as Eveready E95, Burgess Al-2, or Mallory MN-1300
(approximately 2'/ 2 hours continuous operation), or from ten
size D NiCd rechargeable cells (up to 5 hours continuous opera-
tion depending on type used).
The current drain on external DC or on internal batteries
is approximately 700 mA regardless of supply voltage. The
power consumption from any AC source is approximately 20
watts. A thermal cutout protects the instrument against opera-
tion at temperatures in excess of about 55° C.
A light on the front panel indicates when the internal bat-
teries are approaching discharge; it also lights if an external
AC or DC supply voltage falls too low.
BATTERY CHARGER is built-in and provides two different
charging currents to the internal batteries, or no charging cur-
rent in the case of dry cells. The mode is selected with an inter-
nal switch. A 4-position front-panel switch provides for opera-
tion from external AC or DC, or from the internal batteries. It
also provides a trickle charge or a full charge to the internal
batteries when the instrument is turned off but is connected
to the AC line.
DIMENSIONS are 8 1 /," high by 5 3 / 4 " wide by 16" deep.
NET WEIGHT is 14 pounds without batteries, 16 pounds with
batteries.
SHIPPING WEIGHT is approximately 22 pounds without bat-
teries and 26 pounds with batteries.
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
TEMPERATURE
Operating (without batteries) — 15°C to +55°C.
(with batteries installed) 0°C to +40°C.
Non-operating (without batteries) — 55°C to +75°C.
(with batteries installed) — 40°C to +60°C.
ALTITUDE
Operating: 15,000 ft max.
Non-operating: 50,000 ft max.
VIBRATION
Operating: 15 minutes along each of 3 axes at 0.025" peak
to peak displacement (4g's at 55 Hz), 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in
1 -minute cycles.
SHOCK
Operating: 30 g's, '/ 2 sine, 11 -ms duration, 12 shocks total.
Non-operating: 60 g's, y 2 sine, 11 -ms duration, 6 shocks total.
TRANSPORTATION
In shipping carton: meets National Safe Transit test-vibration
for one hour at slightly greater than 1 g; 18" drops on one
corner, all edges radiating from that corner, and all flat
surfaces (total of 10 drops).
TYPE 321 A OSCILLOSCOPE (without batteries) $900
Each instrument includes: 1— P6006 probe 1010-0127-00); 2— patch cord,
18", BNC-to-banana plug (012-0091-00); 1— DC power cord (161-0016-
01); 1— 3-conductor AC power cord (161-0015-01); 1—3 to 2-wire
adapter (103-0013-00); 1— light filter (378-0547-00); 1— mesh filter
(378-0577-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0425-00).
Set of ten rechargeable NiCd cells will operate the Type
321 A for approximately 5 hours.
Individual batteries— Part Number 146-0005-00, each ... $7.00
Set of 10 Batteries— Part Number 016-0077-00 $70.00
CARRYING CASE
Attractive carrying case for the Type 321 A provides in-transit
protection as well as a convenient accessory storage compart-
ment.
Order Part Number 016-0026-00 $35
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
25
Type DC-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE
NEW
SMALL SIZE— LIGHT WEIGHT
DUAL TRACE
SHARP, BRIGHT DISPLAYS
DESIGNED FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS
AC, AC/DC OR BATTERY OPERATED
VERSATILE PERFORMANCE
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 10 mV/div to 20V/div.
RISETIME— 23 ns.
BANDWIDTH— DC to 1 5 MHz.
INPUT RC — I megohm paralleled by approximately 30 pF.
DELAY LINE— Approximately 150 ns.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.5 /xs/div to 0.5s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 10X, extends fastest sweep rate to 0.05
/xs/div.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS—
Internal: 0.2 divisions of deflection at 5 MHz. 1.0 division of
deflection at 15 MHz.
Externa!: 0.125 V up to 5 MHz, 0.6 V at 15 MHz.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 divisions (0.8cm/div).
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 6 kV.
GRATICULE— Internal.
26
422
R422
The Type 422 is a portable dual-trace oscilloscope that com-
bines small size and light weight with the ability to make precise
laboratory measurements. It weighs under 22 pounds and
occupies less than 0.6 cubic feet. To make it truly portable the
Type 422 is ruggedly constructed to withstand shock, vibration,
and extremes of environment. Because of this, it is finding its
way on shipboard, flight lines, and even remote communication
sites. No longer need measurements be compromised due to
adverse field conditions; the Type 422 brings the precision of
the laboratory to the field.
The Type R422, on the other hand, is the same instrument
arranged in a rackmount panel assembly with a hinged-door
compartment for storing accessories. The hinged-door can be
removed to allow the installation of a second Type 422 for
applications that require two instruments. Connections to the
rear of the instrument are easily made since the entire assembly
is mounted to the rack with slideout tracks.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME
DC to >15MHz each channel; <23-ns risetime. AC or DC
coupled. 5 Hz to 5 MHz, 70-ns risetime, on 10X gain (channel
2).
DEFLECTION FACTOR
lOmV/div to 20 V/div in 11 calibrated steps (each channel).
Deflection factor extended to 1 mV/div in 10X position.
2.5:1 vernier allows continuous range (uncalibrated) between
steps and extends range (uncalibrated) to 50 V/div. Warning
light indicates uncalibrated setting. Accuracy is ±3% of
indicated deflection; ±7.5% on 10X AC gain.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. Channel 1 and 2
time constants matched to ±1%.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE
300 V combined DC and peak AC.
OPERATING MODES
Channel 1 only; Channel 2 only; Channels 1 and 2 added
algebraically; dual-trace chopped; dual-trace alternate. Chop-
ping rate is 100 kHz. Channel 2 has polarity inversion. Com-
mon-mode rejection ratio is > 1 00:1 at 50 kHz with optimized
gain setting.
DELAY LINE
Approx 150 ns.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RANGE
0.5/xs/div to 0.5s/div, in 19 calibrated steps. Accuracy is
±3%. 2.5:1 vernier gives variable and continuous sweep
rates, uncalibrated, between steps. It also extends slowest
sweep rates to 1 .25 s/dtv, uncalibrated. Warning light indi-
cates uncalibrated sweep settings. X10 magnifier extends all
sweep speeds with fastest extended to 0.05 jiis/div; accuracy
is ±5%.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
Deflection Factor: Variable between approx 1 V/div to
approx 10 V/div and approx 10 V/div to
approx 100 V/div with XI Mag.
Bandwidth: DC to >500kHz.
Input RC: Approx 300 kn paralleled by approx 35 pF.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
MODE
INTERNAL
DC
0.2 div up to 5 MHz, increasing to 1
div at 15 MHz.
AC
0.2 div up to 5 MHz, increasing to 1
div at 15 MHz. Low frequency response
3-dB down at approx 25 Hz.
AUTOMATIC
0.8 div from 50 Hz to 4 MHz, increasing
to 2.5 div at 15 MHz.
AC LOW FREQ
REJECT
0.2 div up to 5 MHz, increasing to 1
div at 15 MHz. Low frequency response
3 dB down at approx 25 kHz.
EXTERNAL
DC
125 mV up to 5 MHz, increasing to 0.6 V
at 15 MHz.
AC
125 mV up to 5 MHz, increasing to 0.6 V
at 15 MHz. Low frequency response
3 dB down at approx 25 Hz.
AUTOMATIC
0.6 V from 50 Hz to 7 MHz, increasing
to 1.2 V at 15 MHz.
AC LOW FREQ
REJECT
125mV to 5 MHz increasing to 0.6 V
at 15 MHz. Low frequency response 3
dB down at approximately 25 kHz.
MISCELLANEOUS
FRONT-PANEL OUTPUTS
Amplitude Calibrator: approx 1-kHz squarewave, negative-
going. Provides 0.2 V, internally, ±0.7%, and 2 V, ±2.7%,
at Probe Cal jack on front panel.
Gate Signal: Rectangular pulse, negative-going; 0.5 V mini-
mum, duration same as sweep. Approx 600-ohm source resist-
ance.
TEKTRONIX CRT
Rectangular, 4-inch, with 0.8-cm divisions; 8xl0-div display
area. Illuminated internal graticule. 6-kV accelerating
potential. External blanking, DC-coupled. Phosphor is P31.
MECHANICAL
TYPE 422 NET WEIGHT: AC model— 20.5 lbs; AC-DC model
— 23 lbs, (29 lbs, 12 oz with batteries). Shipping weight:
(Including accessories, manuals, and packaging) AC model —
28 lbs; AC-DC model— 28 lbs, 6 oz, without batteries. Over-
all height, including feet: 7". Overall width, including handle:
10". Length, including rear feet and front-panel knobs: 14".
(To front of panel cover: 16".) To front edge of carrying
handle, in forward position: 18". (With AC/DC Power Sup-
ply, add 3" to length measurements.)
Type R422 NET WEIGHT: 18 lbs; Shipping Weight: (includ-
ing accessories, manuals, and packaging) 50'/ 2 lbs. Over-
all height: 7". Overall width: 19". Overall depth includ-
ing rear feet and front panel knobs: 14".
ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES— AC MODEL
Temperature: Operating: — 15°C to +55°C.
Non-operating: — 55°C to +75°C.
Altitude: Operating: 15,000 ft, maximum.
Non-operating: 50,000 ft, maximum.
27
422
R422
Humidity:
Vibration:
Shock:
Non-operating: Meets electrical performance
specification after exposure to five cycles
(120 hrs) of MIL-STD-202B, Method 106A
(omit freezing and vibration, and allow a
24-hour post-test drying period at room am-
bient conditions of 25, ±5° C and 20 to 80%
relative humidity).
Operating: 0.025" peak to peak displacement
(4 g's for 15 minutes along each of 3 axes at
55 Hz) 10-55-10 Hz.
Operating: 30 g's, '/ 2 sine, 11 -ms duration,
12 shocks total.
Non-operating: 60 g's,
tion, 6 shocks total.
V 2 sine, 11 -ms dura-
RFI:
Meets interference requirements of MIL-I-
6181 D and MIL-I-16910A, Power line conduct-
ed: 150 kHz— 25 MHz. Radiated (with mesh
filter installed): 14 kHz— 1000 MHz.
Transportation: National Safe Transit. 1 hour at approx 1
(In shipping g vibration. 30 inch drops on one corner,
carton.) all edges radiating from that corner, and all
flat surfaces (total of 10 drops).
ENVIRONMENTAL FEATURES— AC/DC MODEL,
with batteries
Same as AC MODEL, except,
Temperature: Operating: — 15°C to +40°C
Non-operating: —40° C to +60° C
Humidity: With batteries, derate temperature from
+65°C to +60°C.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
AC Model: 115 V or 230 V
Requires approx 40 watts.
:10%, 45 to 440 Hz.
AC/DC Model: AC mode: 115 V or 230 V ±20% 45-440
Hz except derate linearly to +10% from 50 Hz to 45 Hz.
DC mode: 11.5 V— 35 V, approx 23 watts (CONSTANT
POWER— 2 A max, 650 mA min). Accepts 24 V battery pack.
AC POWERED INSTRUMENTS
TYPE 422 OSCILLOSCOPE $1400
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — adapter,
BNC to binding post (103-0033-00); 1— ring, ornamental (354-0248-00);
1 — filter, light graticule, smoke gray (378-0549-00); 1— plate, protector,
clear, CRT (386-0118-00); 1— mesh filter (installed) (378-0571-00); 1— AC
power supply (016-0072-00); 1— adapter, 3 to 2-wire (103-0013-00);
1 — power cord, 117 V, 3-conductor, right-angle, female w/straight
male plug (161-0024-00); 2— instruction manual for Type 422 (070-
0434-00).
TYPE R422 OSCILLOSCOPE (mounted on left side) . . $1475
(Includes accessories listed under Type 422 above.)
TYPE R422 OSCILLOSCOPE (mounted on right side)
(Includes accessories listed above)
Type R422 MOD 150E $1475
TYPE 422 OSCILLOSCOPE WITHOUT CABINET for rack-
mount conversion. (Includes accessories listed above.)
Type 422 MOD 146B $1375
TWO TYPE 422's MOUNTED IN A RACK-MOUNT PANEL.
(Includes 2 sets of accessories listed under Type 422 above.)
Type R422 MOD 1 50B $2850
P
DC POWERED INSTRUMENTS
TYPE 422 WITH AC/DC BATTERY POWER SUPPLY, less
batteries.
Type 422 MOD 125B $1750
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1— paten
cord, BNC to BNC (012-0084-00); 1 — jack, BNC to post (012-0092-00);
1 — ring, ornamental (354-0248-00); 1 — filter, light, graticule, smoke
gray (378-0549-00); 1— plate, protector, clear, CRT 1386-0118-00); 1 —
mesh filter installed (378-0571-00); 1— ac/dc power supply (016-0073-
00; 1— adapter, 3 to 2-wire (103-0013-00); 1— power cord, 3-wire oc
w/female connector and male plug (161-0015-00); 1 — power cord,
3-wire dc w/female connector (161-0016-00); 2 — instruction manual
for ac/dc power supply (070-0471-00); 2 — instruction manual, for Type
422 (070-0434-00).
BATTERY PACK for Type 422 MOD 125B. Provides 24 volts;
rechargeable internally from AC line. Powers the Type 422
Oscilloscope for approximately 4 hours. Shipping weight 9
lbs, 15 oz.
Order Part Number 01 6-0066-00 $1 25
CONVERSION KITS
Power Supply AC/DC Battery, less batteries.
Shipping weight 10 lbs, 4 oz.
Each supply includes: 1 — adapter, 3-wire to 2-wire (103-0013-00);
1 — power cord, 3-wire AC w/female connector and male plug (161-
0015-01); 1 — power cord, 3-wire DC w/female connector (161-0016-
01); 2— instruction manual (070-0471-00).
Order Part Number 01 6-0073-00 $600
Portable to Rack-mount conversion kit.
This mounting kit includes hardware and instructions to con-
vert existing Type 422 Oscilloscopes for rack-mount installa-
tion.
Order Part Number 040-0419-00 $75
Rack-mount to Portable conversion kit.
This kit includes the cabinet and necessary hardware to con-/ v
vert existing Type R422 Oscilloscopes for portable operation. V>
Order Part Number 040-0421 -00 $40
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
28
DC-to-50 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE Type
N
E
W
COMPACT, LIGHT WEIGHT
• DUAL-TRACE, 5-mV DEFLECTION
FACTOR
• 50-MHz BANDWIDTH WITH PROBE
• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
• FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING
• FULL-SENSITIVITY X-Y DISPLAY
• FOR SEVERE ENVIRONMENTS
The Type 453 combines portability and performance pre-
viously unavailable in a DC-to-50 MHz oscilloscope. Weighing
only 28 pounds, it is an easy-to-carry instrument V 2 to '/ 3 the
size of previous DC-to-50 MHz oscilloscopes.
The Type R453 is electrically identical to the Type 453. It
mounts on tilting, slide-out tracks to a standard 19" rack,
requiring only 7" of panel height.
Their general-purpose capabilities are further enhanced by
their ruggedness. They operate almost anywhere, and with-
stand environmental extremes between jobs. The regulated
power supply is easily adaptable to a wide range of power-
line voltages, and requires approx 100 watts.
Accurate X-Y measurements can be made of low-frequency
phenomena, with Channel 2 providing the vertical deflection
and Channel 1 providing the horizontal deflection.
A fine-mesh filter placed in front of the CRT attenuates external
Reflections and significantly improves display contrast, for view-
ing under high ambient light conditions.
With these state-of-the-art oscilloscopes, Tektronix offers
an ideal combination of performance, weight, size and cost:
The Type 453 and R453.
NEW
29
453
R453
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR — 5 mV/div to lOV/div.
BANDWIDTH with P6010 Probe— DC to 50 MHz from 20 mV/
div to lOV/div, DC to 45 MHz at lOmV/div, DC to 40 MHz
at 5 mV/div.
INPUT RC— 1 megohm, 20 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 /t s/div to 5s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— XI 0, extends sweep range to lOns/div.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 1 f« to 50 s.
MINIMUM TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS—
Internal: 0.2 div/deflection (DC to 10 MHz)
1 div/deflection (to 50 MHz).
External: 50 mV (DC to 10 MHz)
200 mV (to 50 MHz).
EXTERNAL INPUT— 270 mV/div and 2.7 V/div.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 div (each div = 0.8 cm).
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.1 and 1 V, 5 mA, 1 kHz PRR.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 96 to 137 V or 192 to 274 V, 45 to
440 Hz, approx 100 watts.
The Type 453 with the Tektronix C-30 Camera.
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH*
RISETIME
Type 453 Only With P6010 Probe
Type 453 Only With P6010 Probe
5 mV/div
DC to >41 MHz
DC to > 40 MHz
< 8.5 ns
<8.75 ns
lOmV/div
DC to > 46.5 MHz
DC to >45 MHz
<7.5 ns
<7.8 ns
20 mV/div
through 10 V/div
DC to >52.5MHz DC to >50MHz
<6.7 ns
<7ns
1 mV/div
Ch 1 & 2 Cascaded
DC to > 25 MHz
<14ns
*Measured at the 3-dB down points. AC response is 3-dB down at —1.6 Hz (^0.16 Hz with P6010
10X probe).
DEFLECTION FACTOR (EACH CHANNEL)
5mV/div to 10 V/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accuracy within ±3%. Uncalibrated continuous variation
between steps and up to ~25 V/div. Warning lights indicate
uncalibrated settings.
INPUT RC
1 megohm ±2% paralleled by 20 pF ±3%.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE
600 volts combined DC and peak AC.
OPERATING MODES
Channel 1 only; Channel 2 only (normal or inverted); Added
algebraically (>20:1 Common-Mode Rejection Ratio at up to
20 MHz, linear dynamic range >20X indicated deflection
factor); Alternate; Chopped (500 kHz ±20% chopping rate).
TRACE DRIFT
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
TIME
TEMPERATURE
5mV/div
<1 div/h
<0.1 div/°C
lOmV/div
<0.5 div/h
<0.05div/°C
20 mV/div
through 10 V/div
<0.25 div/h
<0.025div/°C
DELAY LINE
Approx 140 ns.
TRIGGER SOURCE
Normal (displayed signal); Channel 1 (pickoff ahead of chan-
nel switching).
30
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
TIME BASE A SWEEP RANGE
0.1 /As/div to 5 s/div in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence).
Uncalibrated continuous variation between steps and to
> 1 2.5 s/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated setting.
Sweep length continuously variable from <4div to 11.0
±0.5 div.
TIME BASE B SWEEP RANGE
0.1 jus/div to 0.5 s/div in 21 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence).
Uncalibrated continuous variation between steps and to
> 1.25 s/div. Warning light indicates uncalibrated setting.
TIME BASE A & B SWEEP ACCURACY
SWEEP RANGE
0°C to 40°C
-15°C to +55°C
0.1 /ts/div to
50 ms/div
±3%
±4%
0.1 s/div to
5 s/div
±3%
±5%
TIME BASE A SWEEP MODES
Auto Trigger — sweep free runs in absence of triggering sig-
nal; Normal Trigger; Single Sweep. Light indicates when
sweep is triggered.
TIME BASE B SWEEP MODES
Time Base B Triggerable after delay time; Time Base B starts
after delay time.
XI MAGNIFIER
Magnifies any portion of displayed sweep ten times, which
also extends fastest sweep range to lOns/div. Accuracy is
1 % in addition to specified basic sweep accuracy.
TIME BASE A & B TRIGGER SENSITIVITY
TRIGGER MODE ! TO 10 MHz
AT 50 MHz
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
<0.2div deflection
<50mV
<1 div deflection
<200mV
AC
As above, except — 3 dB at 16 Hz
AC LF REJECT
As above, except — 3 dB at 16 kHz
AC HF REJECT
As above, except — 3dB at 16 Hz and
100 kHz
TRIGGER SOURCES
Internal, Line, External, External -S- 10.
Input RC ap'prox 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF
(except in AC LF Reject mode). 600 volts maximum input (DC
+ peak AC). Level adjustment through > ±2 volts in
External, through > ±20 volts in External -j- 10.
FULL-SENSITIVITY X-Y (CH 1 HORIZ, CH 2 VERT)
5 mV/div to lOV/div in 11 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accuracy within ±5% from 0°C to +40°C, within ±8%
from -15° C to +55° C. Bandwidth is DC to >5MHz
( — 3 dB). Phase difference from Channel 2 is <3° at 50 kHz.
HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIER (EXTERNAL INPUT)
270mV/div ±15% in External, 27V/div ±20% in External
-M0. Same bandwidth and phase difference as above.
453
R453
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
DELAY TIME RANGE
1 jus to 50 s, continuously variable with 10-turn multiplier.
DELAY ACCURACY
DELAY
0°C to +40°C
-I5°C to +55°C
1 /is/div to
50 ms/div
±1.5%
±2.0%
0.1 s/div to
5 s/div
±2.5%
±3.5%
MULTIPLIER INCREMENTAL LINEARITY
Included in delay accuracy: ±0.2% from 0°C to +40°C,
±0.3% from -15°C to +55°C.
JITTER
<1 part in 20,000 of maximum delay.
Small probe for easy access to dense circuitry.
31
453
R453
ENVIRONMENTAL CAPABILITIES
TEMPERATURE
Operating: (Type 453) —15° C to +55° C.
Operating: (Type R453) —15° C to +45° C.
Non-operating: (both models) —55° C to +75° C.
ALTITUDE
Operating: 15,000 feet; maximum allowable ambient tem-
perature decreased 1°C/1000 feet from 5,000 to 15,000 feet.
Non-operating: 50,000 feet.
HUMIDITY
Non-operating: Meets electrical performance specifications
after exposure to five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202B,
Method 106A (omit freezing and vibration, and allow a 24-
hour post-test drying period at +25° C and 20% to 80%
relative humidity).
VIBRATION
Operating: 15 minutes along each of the three axes, 0.025
inch peak to peak displacement (4 g's at 55 Hz) 10 to 55 to
10 Hz in 1 -minute cycles.
SHOCK
Operating and non-operating: 30 g's, ] / 2 sine, 11 -ms duration,
12 shocks total.
TRANSPORTATION
In shipping carton: Meets National Safe Transit test of vibra-
tion for 1 hour at slightly greater than 1 g, 30-inch drops on
one corner, all edges radiating from that corner, and all
flat surfaces (total of 10 drops).
OTHER FEATURES
TIME AND AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
1 volt or 0.1 volt output; 5-mA output. Amplitude accuracy
within ±1% from 0°C to +40°C, within ±1.5% from
— 15°C to +55°C. 1-kHz repetition rate accurate within
±0.5% from 0°C to +40°C, within ±1% from — 15°C to
+ 55 °C. <l-/xs risetime; 49% to 51% duty cycle.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS
A & B Gates: 12 volts ±10%, approx 1.5 kQ output resist-
ance. Channel 1 Vertical Signal: >25mV/div into 1 megohm;
approx 50 Q output resistance; DC to > 25 MHz (— 3dB).
TRACE FINDER
Compresses display within graticule area, for ease in deter-
mining the nature of an improper deflection signal.
TEKTRONIX CRT
4-inch rectangular tube; 6xl0div (each div = 0.8cm) dis-
play area; P31 phosphor standard. 10-kV accelerating
potential. Noticeable modulation at normal intensity with
5 volts or less peak to peak at Z-axis input; DC to >50MHz
usable frequency range; 200 volts (DC and peak AC) maxi-
mum input voltage.
u-posmoN
HANDLE
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Operates from 115-volt or 230-volt nominal line, 45 to 440
Hz. Oscilloscope power supply automatically regulates at
either nominal voltage, when appropriate power cord is in-
serted. Rear-panel switch permits operation on line volt-
age above or below nominal: high range — 103 to 137 volts or
206 to 274 volts, low range— 96 to 127 volts or 192 to 254
volts (when line contains <2% total harmonic distortion).
Power consumption approx 100 watts.
COOLING
Filtered forced-air cooling.
CABINET MODEL
Type 453 net weight is 28 3 / 4 pounds, including panel cover. [\
Shipping weight is 36 pounds. Height, including feet: 7.25". *
Width, including handle: 12.5". Length, including rear feet
and front cover: 20.5"; with extended handle: 22.4".
RACK MODEL
Type R453, net weight is approx 32 pounds. Shipping weight
64V 2 pounds. Height, 7". Width, 19". Length (not including
front panel hardware), 17 3 / 4 ".
TYPE 453 OSCILLOSCOPE $2050
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6010 3.5 ft 1 OX probe package (010-
0188-00); 1—18" 50-12 BNC cable (012-0076-00); 1— BNC jack post
(012-0092-00); 1— 115-volt power cord (161-0024-01); 1— 230-volt power
cord (161-0027-01); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— CRT orna-
mental ring (354-0269-00); 1— smoke gray light filter (378-0576-00);
1— mesh filter (installed) (378-0573-00); 1— CRT faceplate protector
(386-0218-00); 1— oscilloscope dust and rain cover (016-0074-00); 2—
BNC to binding post adapter (103-0033-00); 2 — instruction manual
(070-0478-00).
TYPE R453 OSCILLOSCOPE $2135
Each instrument includes; 2 — P6010 3.5 ft 10X probe package (010-
0188-00); 1—18" 50-fi BNC cable (012-0076-00); 1— BNC jack post
(012-0092-00); 1— 115-volt power cord (161-0024-01); 1— 230-volt power
cord (161-0027-01); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— CRT orna-
mental ring (354-0269-00); 1— smoke gray light filter (378-0576-00);
1— mesh filter (installed) (378-0573-00); 1— CRT faceplate protector
(386-0218-00); 2— BNC to binding post adapter (103-0033-00); 1— set
mounting hardware; 1 — set slide-out tracks (351-0101-00); 2 — instruction
manual (070-0478-00).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6010 6 ft 1 OX Probe Package (010-0185-00) $30
P6011 3.5 ft IX Probe Package (010-0193-00) $15
P6011 6 ft IX Probe Package (010-0190-00) $15
RACK-MOUNT CONVERSION KIT (040-0420-00) $85^^
Includes hardware and instructions to convert existing Type!
453 Portable Oscilloscopes for rack-mount installation.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
32
100 jmV/cm DUAL-BEAM T
OSCILLOSCOPE
2 IDENTICAL VERTICAL AMPLIFIERS
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT AT ALL DEFLECTION
FACTORS
X-Y CURVE TRACING WITH 7 OR 2 BEAMS
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION
BEAM FINDERS
The new Tektronix Type 502A and RM502A retains the
popular dual-beam design of the Type 502, and adds these
extremely useful features: lOOjuV/cm deflection factor,
single-sweep operation, variable deflection factor and
Fsweep-time controls, intensity balance, beam finders, and
other refinements.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 1 00 M V/cm to 20 V/
cm.
BANDWIDTH — DC to 50 kHz thru I MHz.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION— Up to 40,000 to 1.
PHASE DIFFERENCE — Less than 5 degrees.
INPUT RC— 1 megohm, 47 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE — 1 jus/cm to 5 s / cm .
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, XI 0, X20; 3% accuracy
to 1 /xs/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS — Internal: 2 mm or greater.
External: 0.4 to 10 V.
EXTERNAL INPUT — 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1 and 2 V/cm.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA — 8 x 10cm (each beam).
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR — 0.5 mV to 50 V, 1-kHz square
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V,
305 wafts, maximum.
33
502A
RM502A
APPLICATIONS
Here are just a few of the many possible uses for this
versatile oscilloscope:
7. Compare and measure the waveforms at two points in a
circuit simultaneously.
2. Compare and measure the outputs of two transducers on
the same time base.
3. Display X-Y curves with one or both beams in a variety
of applications.
4. Plot one transducer output against another — pressure
against volume or temperature, for instance.
5. Compare and measure stimulus and reaction on the
same time base.
6. Use the differential-input feature for cancellation of
common-mode signals, and to eliminate the need for a
common terminal, in both single and dual displays.
7. Measure phase angles and frequency differences.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.
IDENTICAL VERTICAL AMPLIFIERS provide an accurate
means of displaying dual-beam waveforms on a linear time
base, single-beam X-Y curves at up to 100>V/cm deflection
factor, or dual-beam X-Y curves at up to 0.1 V/cm deflection
factor.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR from 100>V/cm to 20
V/cm in 17 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and accurate
within 3% of panel reading. Variable controls permit con-
tinuous adjustment uncalibrated from 100 //V/cm to approxi-
mately 50 V/cm.
BANDWIDTHS are DC to 50 kHz at 100/iV/cm, increasing
to DC to 100 kHz at 200/tV/cm, DC to 200 kHz at 1 mV/cm,
DC to 400 kHz at 50 mV/cm, and DC to 1 MHz at 0.2 V/cm.
Bandwidths at lower deflection factor' are DC to 300 kHz at
0.5 V/cm and 5 V/cm, DC to 500 kHz at 1 V/cm and 10 V/cm,
DC to 1 MHz at 2 V/cm and 20 V/cm.
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT provides an effective means of elim-
inating unwanted common-mode signals. Common-mode re-
jection ratios vary according to deflection factor and frequency,
and are measured using a direct-coupled sinewave. Common-
mode signals should not exceed 2 V peak to peak at the input
grid. With a 1-kHz sinewave, rejection ratios are 40,00:1 at 0.1
mV/cm, 20,000:1 at 0.2 mV/cm, 100:1 at 0.2 V/cm, and 50:1
at 5 V/cm. Rejection ratios at higher frequencies are 2000:1
at 50 kHz with 0.1 mV/cm deflection factor, 1000:1 at 100 kHz
with 0.2 mV/cm deflection factor and 50:1 at 400 kHz with 0.2
V/cm deflection factor. Measurements are made with a com-
mon signal applied to both A and B inputs.
AC or DC COUPLING, inversion of the signal to the
oscilloscope, is controlled from the front panel. An inverted
display on one beam is sometimes desirable in comparison
measurements. With AC-coupling, the low-frequency — 3-dB
point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF.
PASSIVE PROBES supplied with the Type 502A and RM502A
reduce loading on the circuit under test and attenuate the signal
by a factor of 10. Input RC becomes 10 megohms paralleled
by approximately 9.5 pF.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RANGE from 1 fa/em to 5s/cm is in 21 cali-
brated steps with 1-2-5 sequence and is accurate within 3%
of panel reading. Sweep rate is continuously variable un-
calibrated from 1 fis/cm to over 12s/cm. Sweep rate selected
deflects both beams simultaneously.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands the center portion of the
normal sweep to fill 10 cm. X2, X5, X10, or X20 magnifica-
tion is available. When the magnified sweep does not ex-
ceed the maximum calibrated rate of 1 ^s/cm, accuracy
is within 5% of the displayed portion of the magnified sweep.
A panel light indicates when the maximum calibrated rate is
being exceeded, or sweep rate variable is in use.
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic re-
cording of waveforms. Lockout-reset circuitry provides for one-
shot recording. After a single sweep is triggered, the sweep
circuit is automatically locked out until manually reset. When
reset, the sweep will fire on the next trigger received, then
automatically lock out until reset or returned to normal opera-
tion.
Dual-beam presentation of electrocardiogram
vs heart sounds (upper beam is ECG, lower
beam is heart sound). Heart sound was picked
up by microphone taped to chest.
34
502A
RM502A
Comparison of input and output waveforms.
Lower trace is result of passing upper wave-
form through an integrating network. Lower
trace is inverted.
X-Y OPERATION
SINGLE BEAM X-Y CURVE TRACING at equal horizontal
jnd vertical deflection factors can be accomplished when the
upper-beam vertical amplifier is switched to the CRT horizontal-
deflection plates. A panel light indicates when the upper-beam
amplifier is connected in this manner. The full lOO^V/cm
deflection factor can be used with either single-ended or dif-
ferential input.
PHASE DIFFERENCE between vertical amplifiers, when both
are set at equal deflection factors, is typically less than 5
degrees up to the specified -3dB point.
DUAL-BEAM X-Y CURVE TRACING can be accomplished
when a signal source is applied to the external horizontal
amplifier. Horizontal deflection is calibrated in steps of 0.1,
0.2, 0.5, 1, and 2V/cm, and is accurate within 5%.
TRIGGER
AUTOMATIC OPERATION assures positive sweep trig-
gering by signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repeti-
tion rates. In the absence of an input signal, automatic trig-
gering occurs at about a 50-Hz rate to provide a convenient
reference trace.
RECURRENT OPERATION provides a convenient reference
at a frequency dependent on the sweep time per centimeter.
TRIGGER LEVEL is adjustable to allow sweep triggering at
any selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the
waveform.
SOURCE can be internal from either amplifier (2-mm deflec-
tion), external (0.4 V to 10 V), or line, and can be AC or DC
coupled.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX 5" CRT is a dual-gun tube with two pairs of
vertical and one pair of horizontal-deflection plates. A P2
phosphor is normally supplied. Accelerating potential is 3 kV.
Display area for each beam is 8 cm by 10 cm. Beams overlap
in the center 6-cm vertical area.
CRT CONTROLS include a separate focus adjustment for
each beam, a common intensity control, and an intensity
balance. The balance control provides an effective method of
identifying upper and lower beams, especially when they are
superimposed for comparison.
PUSH-BUTTON BEAM FINDERS indicate the relative posi-
tion of the trace when it is deflected off the CRT screen. This
feature is especially useful at the higher sensitivities.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE with variable edge lighting is
accurately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing area is 10 by
10 centimeters. Vertical centerline and horizontal centerlines
for each beam are further marked in 5 minor divisions per cm.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 6 square-wave voltages
at the front panel. Peak-to-peak amplitude is 0.5 mV, 5 mV,
50 mV, 0.5 V, 5 V or 50 V, and is accurate within 3%. Fre-
quency is about 1 kHz.
INPUT STAGE DC HEATERS of both vertical amplifiers are
transistor regulated.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES insure stable
operation between 105 and 125 V or between 210 and 250 V,
50 to 60 Hz. Transformer taps allow operation on either range.
Instrument factory wired for 117 V. Power consumption approxi-
mately 280 watts.
CABINET MODEL dimensions are 15 3 //' high by 11 V 2 "
wide by 23 3 / 4 " deep. Net weight is 60 pounds. Shipping
weight is 65 pounds, approximately.
RACK MOUNT MODEL dimensions are 12%" high by
19" wide by 22 3 / 4 " deep. Net weight is 58V 2 pounds. Ship-
ping weight is 86 pounds approximately. Instrument mounts
on tilt-lock slide-out tracks to a standard 19" rack.
TYPE 502A OSCILLOSCOPE $1 050
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probe (010-0125-00); 1— Test lead
(012-0031-00); 2— A510 binding post adapter (013-0004-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1— Smoke gray light filter (378-0567-00); 2— Instruction Manual
(070-0382-00).
TYPE RM502A OSCILLOSCOPE $1 1 50
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probe (010-0125-00); 1— Test lead
(012-0031-00); 2— A510 binding post adapter (013-0004-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1— Smoke gray light filter (378-0567-00); 1— Pr Mounting tracks
(351-0085-00); 1— Set mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction Manual (070-
0382-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
35
Type DC-to-450 kHz X-Y OSCILLOSCOPE
VERTICAL & HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 1 mV/cm to 20 V/cm.
BANDWIDTH — DC to 450 kHz.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION— 100:1 at 1 mV/cm deflec-
tion factor. DC to 50 kHz, 4 V P to P, max.
INPUT RC— 1 megohm, 47 pF.
SWEEP GENERATOR
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 1 M s/cm to 5 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER — X2, X5, XI 0, X20 X50.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 0.5-cm deflection.
External: 0.5 to 1 V.
DISPLAY AREA— 8 x 10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE-
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 5 mV and 0.5 V, approx 400 ^k
Hz square wave. ^^
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V,
1 10 watts, max.
36
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
BANDWIDTH of DC-coupled amplifiers extends to 450 kHz
at 3-dB down.
DEFLECTION FACTOR from 1 mV/cm to 20 V/cm is in 14
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and is accurate within
3%. A variable control permits continuous adjustment (uncali-
brated) from 1 mV/cm to approximately 50 V/cm.
COMMON-MODE
REJECTION
REJECTION
RATIO
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
CMR SIGNAL
FRE-
QUENCY
At least 100:1
At least 30:1
At least 30:1
1 mV to 0.2 V/cm
0.5 V to 2 V/cm
5 V to 20 V/cm
4 V P-to-P, max
40 V P-to-P, max
400 V P-to-P, max
DC to 50 kHz
DC to 50 kHz
DC to 50 kHz
AC or DC COUPLING of the signal to the oscilloscope,
or grounding of the input stage grid is controlled from the
front panel. With AC coupling, the low-frequency —3-dB point
is 10 Hz direct or 1 Hz with optional 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm parallaled by 47 pF, and remains
constant with varying deflection factors.
X-Y OPERATION
IDENTICAL VERTICAL and HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
provide an accurate means of displaying X-Y curves at up
to 1 mV/cm deflection factor.
PHASE SHIFT is 1 °, or less, at a deflection factor of 1 mV to
0.2 V/cm, up to a frequency of 450 kHz. It is 2°, or less, at
a deflection factor of 0.5 V to 20 V/cm, up to a frequency of
,50 kHz. (Includes variable sweep between steps.)
SWEEP GENERATOR
SWEEP RANGE from 1 /ts/cm to 5s/cm is in 21 cali-
brated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and accurate within 3%.
Sweep speed is variable between steps uncalibrated from 1
fis/cm to over 12s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands any portion of the normal
sweep. Magnification of 2X, 5X, 10X, 20X, or 50X is available.
When the magnified sweep does not exceed the maximum
calibrated rate of 0.1 jas/cm, accuracy is within 5% of the
displayed portion of the magnified sweep.
TRIGGER
AUTOMATIC OPERATION assures positive sweep trigger-
ing by signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition
rates. In the absence of an input signal, automatic triggering
occurs at about a 50-Hz rate to provide a convenient refer-
ence trace.
FREE-RUNNING OPERATION provides a convenient refer-
ence trace at a frequency dependent on the sweep time per
centimeter.
TRIGGER LEVEL is adjustable to allow sweep triggering
at any selected point on either the rising or falling portion of
the waveform.
SOURCE can be internal (minimum trigger requirement V 2 -
cm deflection), external (y 2 -volt minimum required), or line, and
can be AC or DC coupled.
CRT & DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX 5" CRT provides a high-contrast trace for
easy reading under high ambient light conditions. An im-
proved P2 phosphor is normally supplied with the instrument,
and offers distinct advantages for oscilloscope photography.
Accelerating potential is 3 kV.
DEFLECTION BLANKING assures uniform beam current
for all sweep and repetition rates. The system consists in part
503
rm503
of two pairs of cross-connected deflection plates which inter-
cept the beam current, and blank the CRT screen except during
sweep time.
INTENSITY MODULATION can be accomplished by using
the CRT grid-input terminal at the rear of the oscilloscope.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE with variable edge lighting is
accurately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing area is 8x10
centimeters. Vertical and horizontal centerlines are marked
in 5 minor divisions per centimeter.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 2 square-wave volt-
ages at the front panel. Peak-to-peak amplitudes are 500 mV
and 5 mV, accurate within 3%. Frequency is between 300
and 500 Hz.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES insure stable
operation between 105 and 125 volts, or 210 and 250 volts.
Input stage heaters of the vertical and horizontal amplifiers
are supplied with regulated DC.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 to 125 volts, or 210 to
250 volts, 50 to 800 Hz, typically 107 watts at 117 volts. The
low-line voltage requirement increases about 10% at 400 Hz,
and about 15% at 800 Hz.
CABINET MODEL dimensions are 14 3 / 4 " high by 10" wide
by 21 5 / e " deep. Net weight is 29y 2 pounds. Shipping weight
is approximately 38 pounds.
RACK MOUNT MODEL dimensions are 7" high by 19"
wide by 17" deep. The instrument mounts directly to a stand-
ard 19" rack. Optional rack slides are available. Net weight
is 27 pounds. Shipping weight is approximately 51 pounds.
TYPE 503 OSCILLOSCOPE $640
Each instrument includes: 2 — A510 binding-post adapter (013-0004-00];
1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00]; 1— Smoke gray filter (378-
0567-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0218-00).
TYPE RM503 OSCILLOSCOPE $655
Each instrument includes: 2 — A510 binding post adapter (013-0004-00);
1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-
0024-00); 1 — Set mounting hardware; 1 — Smoke gray filter (378-0567-
00]; 2— Instruction Manual (070-0314-00).
SLIDE-OUT TRACKS FOR TYPE RM503
Slide-out tracks can be used to mount the Type RM503
Oscilloscope to a standard 19" rack. These tracks provide
tilting and locking convenience in any of 7 positions. Slide-out
tracks can be ordered separately, or as MOD 171 A installed at
the factory.
TYPE RM503 MOD 1 71 A $705
Each instrument includes: 2 — A510 binding post adapter (013-0004-00);
1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-
0024-00); 1— Set mounting hardware; 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-
00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0314-00).
SLIDE-OUT TRACK KIT (Part Number 351-0050-00) $45
PROBES
For minimum loading on the circuit under test, RC attenuator
probes are recommended. These probes, each with a 42"
cable, are ideally suited for use with the Type 503 or RM503
Oscilloscope.
Input
RC
Probe
Atten.
Resist-
Capaci-
Voltage
Part No.
Price
Ratio
ance
tance
Rating
P6006
10:1
10MSJ
9.5 pF
600 V
010-0125-00
$22.00
P6023
10:1
8 MS2
12 pF
1000 V
010-0065-00
$40.00
P6027
1:1
1 Mfi
87 pF
600 V
010-0070-00
$12.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
37
Type DC-to-450 kHz OSCILLOSCOPE
CONSTANT INPUT RC
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES
COMPACT CABINET OR RACK-MOUNT MODELS
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm.
BANDWIDTH — DC to 450 kHz.
INPUT RC— 1 megohm, 47 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 1 fis/cm to 0.5 s/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 0.5-cm deflection.
External: 0.5 to 10 V.
EXTERNAL INPUT — 0.5 V/cm maximum deflection factor.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA — 8 x 10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR — 25 mV and 0.5 V, approx 400-
Hz square wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS — 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V,
93 watts.
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH of the DC-coupled amplifier extends to 450
kHz at 3-dB down.
DEFLECTION FACTORS from 5 m V/cm to 20 V/cm are in 12
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Accurate to ±3%. A
variable control permits continuous adjustment (uncalibrated)
from 5 mV/cm to approximately 50 V/cm.
AC or DC COUPLING of the signal to the oscilloscope, or
grounding of the input stage grid is controlled from the front
panel. With AC coupling, the low-frequency —3-dB point is 10
Hz direct or 1 Hz with optional 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by about 47 pF. Remains
constant with varying deflection factors.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RANGE from 1 ps/cm to 0.5 s/cm is in 18 cali-
brated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and is accurate within 3%.
Sweep rate is variable between steps uncalibrated from
1 /xs/cm to over 1.2 s/cm.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT provides for horizontal^
deflection using an external source. Deflection factor is variable!
from a maximum of 0.5 V/cm.
38
TRIGGER
AUTOMATIC OPERATION assures positive sweep trigger-
ing by signals of different amplitudes, shapes, and repetition
rates. In absence of an input signal, automatic triggering
occurs at about a 50-Hz rate to provide a convenient reference
trace.
FREE-RUNNING OPERATION provides a convenient refer-
ence trace at a frequency dependent on the sweep time per
centimeter.
TRIGGER LEVEL is adjustable to allow sweep triggering at
any selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the
waveform.
SOURCE can be internal (V 2 -cm deflection minimum trigger
requirement), external (V 2 -volt minimum trigger requirement),
or line, and can be AC or DC coupled.
CRT & DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX 5" CRT provides a- high-contrast trace for
easy reading under high ambient light conditions. An im-
proved P2 phosphor is normally supplied with the instrument,
and offers distinct advantages for oscilloscope photography.
Accelerating potential is 3 kV.
DEFLECTION BLANKING assures uniform beam current
for all sweep and repetition rates. The system consists in
part of two pairs of cross-connected deflection plates which
intercept the beam current, and blank the CRT screen except
during sweep time.
INTENSITY MODULATION can be accomplished by using
the CRT grid-input terminal at the rear of the oscilloscope.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE with variable edge lighting is
accurately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing area is 8x10
centimeters. Vertical and horizontal centerlines are marked
in 5 minor divisions per centimeter.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 2 square-wave volt-
ages at the front panel. Peak-to-peak amplitudes are 500 mV
and 25 mV, accurate within 3%. Frequency is between 300
and 500 Hz.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES insure stable
operation between 105 and 125 volts, or 210 and 250 volts.
Input stage heaters are supplied with regulated DC.
504
rm504
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 to 125 volts, or 210 to 250
volts, 50 to 800 Hz, typically 93 watts at 117 volts. The low-
line voltage requirement increases about 10% at 400 Hz, and
about 15% at 800 Hz.
CABINET MODEL dimensions are 14%" high by 10" wide
by 21 y 8 " deep. Net weight is 27'/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight
is approximately 43 pounds.
RACK MOUNT MODEL dimensions are 7" high by 19"
wide by 17" deep. The instrument mounts directly to a stand-
ard 19" rack. Optional rack slides are available. Net weight
is 25V 2 pounds. Shipping weight is approximately 48 pounds.
TYPE 504 OSCILLOSCOPE $540
Each instrument includes: 1 — A510 binding-post adapter (013-0004-00);
1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-
00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0224-00).
TYPE RM504 OSCILLOSCOPE $550
Each instrument includes: 1— A510 binding-post adapter (013-0004-00);
1 — 3- to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord
(161-0024-00); 1 — Set mounting hardware; 1 — Smoke gray filter (378-
0567-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0315-00).
SLIDE-OUT TRACKS FOR TYPE RM504
Slide-out tracks can be used to mount the Type RM504
Oscilloscope to a standard 19" rack. These tracks provide
tilting and locking convenience in any of 7 positions. Slide-
out tracks can be ordered separately, or as MOD 171 A installed
at the factory.
TYPE RM504 MOD 171 A
$600
Each instrument includes: 1 — A510 binding-post adapter (013-0004-00);
1—3- to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord
(161-0024-00); 1 — Set mounting hardware; 1 — Smoke gray filter (378-
0567-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0315-00).
SLIDE-OUT TRACK KIT (Part Number 351-0050-00) $45
PROBES
For minimum loading on the circuit under test, RC attenuator
probes are recommended. These probes, each with a 42"
cable, are ideally suited for use with the Type 504 or RM504
Oscilloscope.
Probe
P6006
P6027
Atten.
Ratio
10:1
III
Input RC
Resist- Capaci-
ance tance
10MJ2
1 Mil
9.5 pF
87 pF
Voltage
Rating
600 V
600 V
Part No.
010-0125-00
01 0-0070-00
Price
$22.00
$12.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
39
Type
DC-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE
The Tektronix Type 51 5A is a DC-coupled general-purpose
cathode-ray oscilloscope combining reliable Tektronix oscillo-
scope circuitry in a compact instrument. Wide sweep range
of 0.04,u.s/cm to 6s/cm, DC to 15 MHz bandwidth, and cali-
brated deflection factor to 0.05 V/cm qualify the Type 51 5A
for general-purpose laboratory work and for many field appli-
cations.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm.
RISETIME— 23 ns.
BANDWIDTH— DC to 15 MHz.
INPUT RC — 1 megohm, approx 36 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.2 ^s/cm to 2s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 40 ns/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-mm deflection.
External: 0.5 V to 20 V.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 1.4 V/cm, DC to 500 kHz at maximum
deflection factor.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 300
watts, 50 to 60 Hz.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Frequency specifications are at 3-db down
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME
DC to 15 MHz, 23-ns risetime. AC-coupled, 2 Hz to 15 MHz.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
0.05 V/cm to 20 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps with 1-2-5
sequence. 2.5:1 vernier allows continuous range (uncali-
brated) between steps and extends range to 50 V/cm. Neon
light indicates when deflection factor is uncalibrated. Accu-
racy is ±3% of V/cm switch setting.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approximately 36 pF.
SIGNAL INPUTS
Two coaxial signal inputs (60-dB isolation) are available
with a 4-position AC-DC selector switch.
DELAY LINE
250 ns.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RATES
0.2 ^s/cm to 2s/cm in 22 steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Accu
racy is ±3% of time/cm switch setting. A vernier con-
trol allows continuous range (uncalibrated) between steps
and extends slowest sweep rate to 5s/cm. Neon light
indicates when sweep is uncalibrated.
40
WEEP MAGNIFIER
5X magnifier expands center 2-cm of display to full screen
width. Magnified sweep is indicated by blue numbers around
TIME/CM switch. Accuracy of magnified sweep is ±5%.
A neon light indicates when magnified sweep is in use.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING
The unblanking waveform is DC-coupled to the control grid
of the CRT to assure uniform intensity across the screen for
all sweep rates.
HORIZONTAL EXTERNAL INPUT
Through a front-panel connector with deflection factor of
approximately 1.4V/cm continuously variable to more than
25V/cm. Bandwidth is DC to 500 kHz at 1.4V/cm.
TRIGGERING
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal: signal producing at least 2 mm of vertical display.
External: signal between 0.5 V and 20 V P to P.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES
Triggering modes include complete manual control, preset
stability, and fully automatic triggering.
LEVEL AND PRESET STABILITY
Level and stability controls allow triggering at selected
amplitude levels on the triggering signal. Preset stability
allows setting circuit to optimum triggering point with sta-
bility control in preset position — requires no readjustment.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING
Range of automatic operation is approximately between 60
Hz and 2 MHz. In the absence of an input signal the sweep
is automatically triggered at about a 50-Hz rate. This pro-
vides a reference trace on the screen.
HIGH-FREQUENCY SYNC
Assures a steady display of sinewave signals up to approx-
imately 20 MHz. Requires a triggering signal large enough
to cause about 2 cm of vertical deflection, or an external
signal of about 2 V P to P.
MISCELLANEOUS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Square-wave voltage available in 11 fixed voltages in a 1-2-5
sequence between 0.05 V and 100 V peak to peak. Accuracy
is ±3%, frequency is approximately 1 kHz.
FRONT PANEL OUTPUTS
Gate signal — rectangular pulse, positive-going +20 V, dura-
tion same as sweep. Sawtooth — positive-going +150 V,
duration same as sweep.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
5" round, flat-faced tube with helical post-accelerating
anode. 4-kV accelerating potential. P31 phosphor normally
supplied.
515A
RM-J5
Z-AXIS INPUT (51 5A only)
External intensity control signals may be applied (AC cou-
pled) to the CRT through a rear panel connector.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
Edge-lighted with 6 vertical by 10 horizontal centimeter divi-
sions with 2 millimeter baseline divisions. Lighting controlled
by front panel knob.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, wired for
117 V. The Type 515 draws
insures regulation as follows:
300 watts. Changing taps
110
99 to 117 volts
220
198 to 235 volts
117
105 to 125 volts
234
210 to 250 volts
124
111 to 132 volts
248
223 to 265 volts
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 14" high by 9 7 / 8 " wide by 21 3 //' deep.
Net weight is 42V 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 52 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 51 5A $875
Each instrument includes: 1— P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1—3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-001; 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord BNC-to-BNC, 18"
(012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00);
1— Post jack, BNC, (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0247-00).
RACK-MOUNT OSCILLOSCOPE
The Type RM15 is a mechanically rearranged Type 51 5A
Oscilloscope. It mounts in a standard 19-inch rack on slide
out tracks. It can be pulled forward, tilted, and locked in
any of seven positions for servicing convenience. Except for
no Z-axis input, electrical characteristics of the instrument are
the same as described for the Type 51 5A Oscilloscope.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 8 3 / 4 " high by 19" wide by 22 3 / 4 " deep.
Net weight is 57 pounds. Shipping weight is 75 pounds,
approx. For more mounting information, please refer to the
Mounting Dimensions page in the catalog.
TYPE RM15 OSCILLOSCOPE $950
Each instrument includes: 1 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — 3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18"
(012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00);
1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Pr Mounting tracks (351-0085-00);
2 — Instruction Manual (070-0242-00).
SUPPORTING CRADLES. Order Part Number 040-0344-00
$11.45
When the Type RM15 is used in a backless rack, these sup-
porting cradles are necessary for rear slide support.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
41
Type DC-to-15MHz
DUAL-TRACE OSCILLOSCOPE
2 IDENTICAL INPUT CHANNELS
CHOPPED OR ALTERNATE SWITCHING
The Type 51 6 is a dual-trace, semi-portable instrument
ideally suited to bench work applications. Vertical calibrated
deflection factor is 0.05 V/cm for each channel, with four
operating modes. Small size and light weight combined with
simple operation and reliable performance fit the Type 516
Oscilloscope for many laboratory and field applications.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR— 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm.
RISETIME— 23 ns.
BANDWIDTH— DC to 15 MHz.
INPUT RC— 1 megohm, 20 pF.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.2 ,us/cm to 2 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 40 ns/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-mm deflection
External: 0.5 V to 25 V.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT— 1.5 V/cm, DC to 500 kHz.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 50 mV to 100 V, approx 1-kHz
square wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 300
watts.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME
DC to 15 MHz, 23-ns risetime. AC-coupled, 2 Hz to 15 MHz.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
0.05V/div to 20V/div in 9 calibrated steps with 1-2-5
sequence. 2.5:1 vernier allows continuous range (uncali-
brated) between steps and extends range to 50 V/div. Neon
light indicates when deflection factor is uncalibrated. Accu-
racy is ±3% of the V/div switch setting.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approximately 20 pF.
OPERATING MODES
Channel A only; Channel B only.
Alternate.
Chopped; 3.3 /is segments of each channel are displayed
(chopping rate 150 kHz). Chopped transient blanking is
provided. Polarity; either channel may be operated as nor-
mal or inverted.
SIGNAL DELAY
Permits viewing the leading edge of waveform that triggers
the sweep.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RATES
0.2/is/div to 2 s/div in 22 steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Accu-
racy is ±3% of time/div switch setting. A vernier con-
trol allows continuous range (uncalibrated) between steps
and extends the slowest sweep rate to more than 6 s/div.
A neon light indicates when sweep is uncalibrated.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER
5X magnifier expands center 2 cm of display to full screen
width. Time/cm of magnified sweep is indicated by blue
numbers at range switch positions. Accuracy of magnified
sweep is ±5%. A neon light indicates when magnified
sweep is in use.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING
The unblanking waveform is DC-coupled to the control grid
of the CRT to assure uniform grid bias for all sweep rates.
42
516
HORIZONTAL EXTERNAL INPUT
Through a front panel connector with deflection sensitivity
of 1.5V/cm. Bandwidth is DC to 500 kHz at maximum
deflection factor.
TRIGGERING
TRIGGERING REQUIREMENTS
Internal: signal producing at least 2 mm of vertical display.
External: signal between 0.5 V and 25 V.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES
Triggering modes include: complete manual control, preset
stability, and fully automatic triggering.
LEVEL AND PRESET STABILITY
Level and stability controls allow triggering at selected
amplitude levels on the triggering signal. Preset stability
allows setting circuit to optimum triggering point with sta-
bility control in preset position — requires no readjustment.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING
Range of automatic operation is between 50 Hz and 2 MHz.
In the absence of an input signal the sweep is automat-
ically triggered at about a 50-Hz rate. This provides a
reference trace on the screen.
HIGH-FREQUENCY SYNC
Assures a steady display of sinewave signals up to approxi-
mately 20 MHz. Requires a triggering signal large enough
to cause about 2 cm of vertical deflection, or an external
signal of about 2 volts.
MISCELLANEOUS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Square-wave voltage available in 11 fixed voltages between
0.05 V and 100 V peak to peak. Accuracy is ±3%, fre-
quency is approximately 1 kHz.
FRONT PANEL OUTPUTS
Gate signal — rectangular pulse, positive-going +25 V, dura-
tion same as sweep. Sawtooth — positive-going to +150V,
duration same as sweep.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
5" round, flat-faced tube with helical post-accelerating
anode. 4 kV accelerating potential. P31 phosphor normally
supplied.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
Edge-lighted with 6 vertical and 10 horizontal centimeter
divisions with 2 millimeter baseline divisions. Lighting con-
trolled by front panel knob.
DUAL-TRACE BLANKING
A rear panel switch provides blanking voltage to eliminate
switching transients when operating in the chopped mode.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, typically
300 watts at 117 V. If requested the instrument will be wired
for any of the following nominal line voltages.
Nominal Line Voltage Operating Range
(Figures taken at 60 Hz)
110 99 to 117 volts
117 105 to 125 volts
124 111 to 132 volts
220 198 to 235 volts
234 210 to 250 volts
248 223 to 265 volts
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 14" high by 9 7 / 8 " wide by 21 3 / 4 " deep.
Net weight is 44y 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 54 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 516 $1070
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — 3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-00]; 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18"
(012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00);
1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0225-00).
RACK-MOUNT ADAPTER.
Order Part Number 040-0277-00 $45
A cradle mount to adapt the Type 516 Oscilloscope for rack
mounting is available. It consists of a cradle to support
the instrument in any standard 19" relay rack and a mask
to fit around the regular instrument panel. Rack height
requirement is 1 5 3 / 4 ".
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
43
Type
!] DC-to-1 GIGAHERTZ OSCILLOSCOPE
SINGLE-SHOT PHOTOGRAPHS AT 2 NS/CM
0.004-INCH SPOT SIZE
SENSITIVE WIDEBAND TRIGGER SYSTEM
SYNCHRONIZATION TO OVER I GIGAHERTZ
VSWR 7.25, OR LESS, TO 1 GIGAHERTZ
DISTRIBUTED-DEfLECTION CRT
BUILT-IN DELAY LINE
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
DEFLECTION FACTOR— <10 V/cm.
RISETIME— less than 0.35 ns.
BANDWIDTH— DC to 1000 MHz.
INPUT IMPEDANCE— 125 O ±2%.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 2 to lOOOns/cm.
SWEEP DELAY— to 35 ns.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal: 2 trace widths, 1-ns duration.
External: 20 mV, 1-ns duration.
TRIGGER GAIN— X0.2, XI, X5, and X20.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 2x 6cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 24 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
CALIBRATOR-STEP GENERATOR— to 10 V into 125 or
to 1 V into 50 Q, calibrated and continuously variable.
(0.1ns risetime, approx.) Approximately 750 Hz repetition
rate.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V,
650 watts.
The Tektronix Type 519 Oscilloscope is a calibrated, high-
speed, laboratory instrument designed for observation, meas-
urement, and photographic recording of fractional nanosecond
risetimes. A 2 x 6 cm viewing area, coupled with 24-kV accel-
erating potential, affords bright displays with excellent resolu-
tion. Performance features include: bandwidth from DC to
beyond 1 gigahertz, risetime less than 0.35 ns, deflection fac-
tor <10V/cm, linear sweeps to 2 ns/cm, sweep delay through
35 ns, and a wideband trigger system. The single unit houses
a fixed signal delay line, a convenient sweep-delay control,
a pulse-rate generator, a standard amplitude and waveshape
generator, and regulated power supplies and high-voltage
supply. Only one connection is necessary for normal opera-
tion — a connection of the signal from the device under test.
Combinirtg simple operation with laboratory precision and
reliability, the Type 519 ideally suits single-shot or random
nuclear events. In addition, the bandwidth permits applications
to general measurements where oscilloscope risetime must be
less than signal risetime.
SINGLE-SHOT PHOTOGRAPHY
A single-shot exposure was used to take the picture at
the right. The display shows a 1 gigahertz damped wave
(approximately) on the fastest rate of the oscilloscope.
44
519
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
(Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.)
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME
Bandwidth— DC to l GHz.
Risetime — less than 0.35 ns.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
<lOV/cm.
SIGNAL DELAY
45 ns approx.
INPUT IMPEDANCE
I25fi ±2%.
MAXIMUM INPUT SIGNAL
±15VDC or 15 V RMS, or :
input is 1.8 watts.
:100-V pulse. Maximum power
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RANGE
2 ns/cm to lOOOns/cm in 9 steps with 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy is ±3%.
SWEEP DELAY
Sweep start delayed — 35 ns.
SINGLE SWEEP
After a single sweep is generated, the sweep circuit is
locked out until the RESET button is pressed — sweep fires
on next trigger. An external jack is provided for remote
control of single sweep operation.
SYNCHROSCOPE OPERATION
The output signal from either the +TRIGGER 50 Q, the
DELAYED +GATE 50 fi, or the +RATE 50 n connector can
be used to control an external device.
RATE GENERATOR
Output pulse approx 15 V, risetime < 0.8 ns, duration
approx 10 ns. Repetition rate variable between 3 Hz and
30 kHz.
TRIGGERING
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internally — A vertical signal deflection of two trace widths
and Ins duration. Externally — Signal of 20 mV amplitude
and 1 ns duration. Sweep triggers on either the positive
or negative slope of the triggering signal.
TRIGGER SOURCES
Internal, external, calibration-step generator, and rate gen-
erator.
TRIGGER FUNCTIONS
Pulse — Permits choice of a free-running sweep or a stable
sweep which can be triggered on random or uniform repe-
tition rates up to approximately 50 MHz. Sync — Permits
stable displays of signals occurring at a constant repetition
rate to over 100 MHz. HF Sync — Permits the sweep to be
synchronized with signals from approximately 100 MHz to
over 1 GHz.
TRIGGER GAIN
Four gain settings of X0.2, NORMAL, X5, and X20 provide
for attenuation or amplification of trigger signals.
MISCELLANEOUS
CALIBRATION STEP GENERATOR
A step-waveform of approximately 750 Hz, with amplitude
continuously variable and calibrated from to 10 V into
1250, or to 1 V into 50 Q (through a T50/T125 adapter)
is available at a front-panel 125-Q connector. Risetime is
approximately 0.1 ns and either polarity can be selected.
Continuously variable uncalibrated amplitudes of to 50 V
into 125Q are also available.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
5" round, flat-faced tube. 24 kV accelerating potential.
Spot diameter at normal intensity 0.004 inch. Usable view-
ing area 2x6cm. Maximum x-ray radiation at a distance
of two inches from the faceplate does not exceed 0.7 milli-
rems per hour (human limit is 2.5 millirems per hour). At
normal viewing distances, x-ray radiation is essentially zero.
Normally supplied with Pll phosphor.
Negligible Trigger-Pulse Slewing for Sweep Time of 2 ns/cm.
60
High-frequency synchro-
nization permits locking to
sine-waves or constant-
repetition-rates to over 1
gigahertz. Triggering cir-
cuits count down from
external triggers faster than
400 kHz.
TRIGGER PULSE
SLEWING
5 10
NANOSECOND
DIODE CHARACTERISTICS
Switching and storage times of fast transistors and diodes
can be measured using the outstanding characteristics of the
Type 519. In the typical diode recovery-time waveform, the
upper trace is a reference trace, the middle trace shows the
diode turned on, and the lower trace shows the diode shorted.
Sweep time 2 ns/cm.
45
519
GRATICULE
Edge-lighted with 2 vertical - 6 horizontal centimeter divisions.
The horizontal center line markings are 5 mm apart and
the vertical center line markings are 2 mm apart. Illumina-
tion is controlled by a front-panel knob. The graticule can
be dropped out of view if desired.
CAMERA MOUNTING
A special camera-mounting bezel with swing-away hinging
easily accepts a Tektronix Trace-Recording Camera. Several
lenses, viewing systems, and film-back options are available.
Please refer to the Camera Section for complete description.
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY
Electronically-regulated DC supplies assure stable operation
over line variations between 105 and 125 volts or 210 and
250 volts, 50 to 60 hertz.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, typically
650 watts.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 22V 4 " high by 14%" wide by 25 1 /," deep.
Net weight is 103 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 136 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 519 OSCILLOSCOPE $3900
Each instrument includes: 1 — Viewing hood (016-0001-00); 2 — 1 25 SI
termination (017-0051-001; 2— 125 $2 insertion unit (017-0013-00); 1 —
125 £2 coupling capacitor (017-0018-00); 1 — 1 25 SI 1-GHz timing stand-
ard (017-0019-00); 1— Double-button contact assembly (017-0032-00);
1— Panel adapter assembly (017-0033-00); 1— Cable connector (017-
0035-00); 1— 125 J2 min loss attenuator, T50/T125 (017-0052-00); I—
125 SI adapter N50/N125 (017-0053-00); 1— 125 SI adapter, T50/N125
(017-0055-00); 1— Delay-line equalizer (017-0057-00); 1-ns cable (017-
0507-00); 1— 2-ns cable (017-0508-00); 1— 5-ns cable (017-0509-00);
1— 10-ns cable (017-0510-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00);
1— Phone jack plug (134-0069-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— Walnut box (202-0083-00); 2— Reed switch (260-0693-00);
1— Accessory box tray (436-0030-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-
0243-00).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Accessory
Part Number
Price
125-fi 2:1 attenuator
017-0071-00
$30.00
125-n 5:1 attenuator
017-0049-00
30.00
125-0 10:1 attenuator
017-0050-00
30.00
125-a N50/T125 adapter
017-0054-00
17.50
125-Q 90° elbow assembly
017-0043-00
15.00
125-fi 20-ns cable
017-0511-00
24.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
46
TELEVISION OSCILLOSCOPE Type
TYPE S24AD CAfHODE-MY OSOUOSCOPi
# • • •
• #
^5#
»
«5tii_
- SWW «W**!OI -
»
# ##
I
V'
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Normal— DC to 10 MHz from 0.15 V/cm to 50V/cm.
2 hertz to 10 MHz from 15mV/cm to 50 V/cm.
Flat— within 1 % from 60 hertz to 5 MHz.
IRE — meets IRE standards for level measurements.
TRANSIENT RESPONSE— 35 ns risetime.
SWEEP RANGE— Continuously variable, 0.1 jus/cm to 0.01
s/cm.
TIME MARKERS— 0.05 fis, 0.1 ps, 1.0 /is, 200 pips per tele-
vision line, and 40 pips per television line.
SWEEP DELAY — Permits detailed observation of any portion
of a single television line.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING
VARIABLE DUTY-CYCLE AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
The Tektronix Type 524AD Oscilloscope is a self-contained
instrument with the characteristics desirable for maintenance
and adjustment of television transmitter and studio equip-
ment. The Type 524AD will prove itself invaluable in enabling
the engineer to observe any portion of the television picture —
from complete frames to small portions of individual lines.
Features contributing to the versatility of this oscilloscope
include — accurate time markers to facilitate sync-pulse timing,
normal response of DC to 10 MHz, flat response within 1%
from 60 hertz to 5 MHz for color-television work, variable-duty-
cycle amplitude calibrator, and two steps of sweep magnifica-
tion, 3X and 10X, for detailed observations.
A switch on the access panel selects the desired band-
width of the vertical amplifier. The NORMal position provides
a bandwidth of DC to 10 MHz. The FLAT position provides a
vertical-amplifier response flat within 1 % from 60 hertz to
5 MHz. About 5% overshoot will occur on extremely sharp
waveforms when the switch is in the FLAT position; however,
TV signals within the 5 MHz bandwidth are not affected.
Response of the amplifier meets the IRE standards for level
measurements when the access-panel switch is in the IRE posi-
tion. EXTernal position provides AC-coupled external connec-
tions to the vertical-deflection plates, bypassing the main ver-
tical amplifier but retaining the function of the vertical-position
control.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Frequency specifications are at 3-db down
FREQUENCY RESPONSE AND RISETIME
Bandwidth— DC to 10 MHz. AC-coupled 2 Hz to 10 MHz.
Risetime — less than 35 ns.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
0.01 5 V/cm to 50 V/cm in 8 calibrated steps. Signal AC-
coupled from 0.01 5 V/cm to 0.15 V/cm. A variable attenu-
ator control provides between steps adjustment.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approximately 45 pF.
OPERATING MODES
Two signal inputs — each input can be switched to AC or
DC input coupling.
SIGNAL DELAY
250 ns.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RATES
0.1 jus/cm to 0.01 s/cm in 5 calibrated steps. Dual sweep-
time multiplier dials cover the range between steps. Accu-
racy is ±5%.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER
X3 or XI selected by a front-panel switch. Accuracy is
±7%.
47
524AD
SWEEP DELAY
Continuously variable from to 25 ms. Adjustable through
about 1 '/ 2 fields at frame rate of 30 Hz so only consecutive
lines of one field are observed at any time. A field-shift
button switches to the corresponding line in the other field.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING
The unblanking waveform is DC-coupled to the grid of the
CRT to assure uniform bias for all sweep rates.
TRIGGERING
TRIGGER REQUIREMENT
Internal — A signal that produces 5 mm of vertical deflec-
tion. External — 0.5 V. Composite Waveform — A signal that
produces 1.5 cm of vertical deflection.
TRIGGER SELECTOR
±internal, ±external, or line. Applies to both normal and
delayed sweep.
MISCELLANEOUS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
to 50 V in 7 ranges. Accurate to ±3% of full scale. Vari-
able duty-cycle square-wave of approximately 1 kHz. Vari-
able control linearity ±1% of full scale.
TIME-MARK GENERATOR
Time markers are inserted as intensification pips on the CRT
trace at time intervals of 0.025H, 0.005H, 1.0 /as, 0.1 ps, and
0.05 /is. Since H is 63.5 /as, 0.025H will give 40 pips per tele-
vision line and 0.005H will give 200 pips per television line.
These markers provide a means of accurately timing the
sync pulses of a composite signal. Pips spaced at 40 or 200
per television line are useful for adjusting both color and
monochrome equipment.
A phasing control permits markers to be positioned on any
desired point of the waveform under observation.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
Positive and negative gate. Same duration as sweep. Saw-
tooth — same duration as sweep.
LINE-INDICATING VIDEO
When a picture monitor is connected to the coaxial con-
nector at the rear of the cabinet, the picture appearing
on the monitor will be brightened during the time of the
oscilloscope sweep. This technique is useful when it is
desired to know what portion of the picture is being dis-
played on the oscilloscope.
60 Hz SWEEP
A 60 Hz sweep with variable amplitude and phasing through
approximately 150° aids in making bandwidth measure-
ments with a video-sweep generator.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
5" flat-faced tube with 4-kV electronically-regulated accel-
erating potential. A PI phosphor is normally supplied.
GRATICULE
Edge-lighted 6 vertical by 10 horizontal centimeter divisions.
A graticule marked for modulation measurements is also
supplied with the instrument. A front-panel knob controls
graticule illumination.
PROBE POWER SOCKET
6.3 VDC at 1A and 120 VDC (reg) at 15 mA.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz. Power con-
sumption approximately 500 watts. Unit factory wired for
117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 16 3 /»" high by 13" wide by 25" deep. Net
weight is 61 pounds. Shipping weight is 82 pounds, approx.
TYPE 524AD OSCILLOSCOPE $1 300
Each instrument includes: 1— P6006 probe (010-0125-00); 2— Binding
post adapter (013-0004-001; 1— Viewing hood assembly (016-0001-001;
1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord
(161-0010-00); 1— TV graticule (331-0009-00); 1— Smoke gray filter
(installed) (378-0567-00); 2— Instruction manual (070-0236-00).
RACK-MOUNT ADAPTER. Order Part Number 040-0281-00
$45
Rack-Mount Adapter for the Type 524AD Oscilloscope con-
sists of a cradle to support the instrument in any standard
19" relay rack and a mask to fit around the regular panel.
Rack height requirement is 17V 2 ".
SCOPE-MOBILE® CARTS
TYPE 202-1 TILT-LOCK CART with storage drawer and lock-
ing front wheels $1 20.00
See Catalog accessory pages for complete information.
CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE. Order Part Number 010-
0109-00 $85
The P500CF Cathode-Follower Probe has input RC of 40
megohms paralleled by 4 pF and gain of 0.8 to 0.85. With
10X attenuator head, input RC is 10 megohms paralleled by
2 pF. Amplitude distortion is less than 3% on unidirectional
signals up to 5 V.
A TV Sync Separator is available for use with many Tek-
tronix general-purpose oscilloscopes. The unit provides stable
triggering for the display of composite video signals. See
the Accessories Section for complete information.
Please refer to Catalog accessory pages for 75-ohm coaxial
cables, attenuators, and terminating resistors.
U.S. Sales Prices t.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
48
COLOR-TELEVISION VECTORSCOPE Type
DIFFERENTIAL PHASE MEASUREMENTS— 7b 0.1°.
DIFFERENTIAL GAIN MEASUREMENTS— Under ?%
con be read.
VERTICAL INTERVAL TESTING— A keying circuit per-
mits measurements of differential gain and differential
phase during color broadcasts, on test signals transmitted
during vertical blanking interval.
LINEAR TIME BASE— Operates at line rate, synchro-
nized by horizontal sync pulse.
BURST BRIGHTENING — Positive identification of burst
pulse.
PUSH-PULL SYNCHRONOUS DEMODULATORS—
DC-coupled to CRT.
SELF-CHECKING CIRCUITRY
SUBCARRIER REGENERATOR
"
The Tektronix Type 526 Vectorscope greatly reduces the
time and effort involved in making extremely accurate relative
phase and amplitude measurements of chrominance informa-
tion in the NTSC color signal. Electronically-switched dual
signal channels facilitate matching equipment such as encoders,
cameras, etc.
The Type 526 presents either a vector display of the demodu-
lated chroma signal, or a display of the demodulated chroma
signal on a linear time base. DC-coupled signal circuits permit
monitoring program signals as well as industry test signals
such as 75% saturated color bars, interfield test signals, linearity
stair step, and the Bell Kelly Set tests for differential phase and
amplitude. A built-in subcarrier regenerator facilitates operation
remote from the subcarrier source.
PHASE MEASUREMENT
Phase measurements are made by demodulating the chroma
signal with a subcarrier signal which can be shifted in phase
relative to burst phase in the signal. High accuracy is ob-
tained with the 20-turn precision calibrated phase shifter.
This control reads out directly in degrees and tenths of
degrees. It has a range of 200°, and the 180° point can
be verified within the instrument. Random phase shifts in
the subcarrier signal due to cable length can be cancelled
out with a push button operated phase-shift network covering
0° to 330° in twelve steps. A fine-phase control (±20°)
provides for variable adjustment between steps, and fine
phase adjustment when using the burst-controlled oscillator.
49
526
VECTOR PRESENTATION
The vector presentation is a graphic display for operational
measurements with a color-bar, interfield-test signal, other
industry test signals, or with program material. Signal
circuits are DC-coupled, preventing changes in chroma signal
composition from affecting the positioning of the display.
An internally generated test circle matched with the graticule
circle verifies the accuracy of the vector display. The test
circle can also be used to verify the accuracy of the com-
plementary-color relationships. Phase measurements accurate
within ±1.5° can be made using the vector display. Accuracy
of saturation measurements will be within ±2% on graticule,
closer when comparing two signals.
LINEAR-SWEEP PRESENTATION
Phase measurements are simplified by displaying the demodu-
lated chroma signals vertically on a linear horizontal sweep,
which is terminated by the horizontal sync pulse and restarts
just prior to the burst packet. Using the null technique,
differential phase can be measured to an accuracy of 0.1 °
and differential gain to an accuracy of 1%. A signal mag-
nifier can be used to expand the vertical deflection approxi-
mately 7 times.
DUAL DISPLAYS
In dual-channel operation, successive 2-ms segments of each
channel are displayed at an approx 500-hertz rate per
channel. For example, the input signal to a portion of the
broadcast plant can be compared to the output signal to
measure any phase and/or amplitude distortion caused by
the broadcast equipment. Also, the outputs of any two
portions of the broadcast plant can be compared.
When using the vector display, either channel can be turned
off to provide a zero reference point for the other channel.
The reference point is a sharply defined spot in the center
of the display. Any drift in the Vectorscope circuit will
change the position of the spot, therefore the drift is easily
detected and corrected.
When using the linear-sweep display, turning off one channel
while the other remains in use provides a zero reference
line against which signals can be nulled. This technique
eliminates the possibility of measurement errors due to
parallax.
BURST BRIGHTENING
The burst amplifier in the burst-controlled oscillator circuit
is keyed on during the first 3 /xs of the linear sweep. During
the 3-|U,s interval the CRT trace is brightened for positive
identification of the burst packet. Trace brightening during
the burst-sampling interval also facilitates adjustment of
burst-amplifier gating.
VERTICAL INTERVAL TEST SIGNAL OBSERVATION
Line 18 of Field 2 has been reserved for a color test signal,
as yet unspecified. Line 19 of Field 2 will carry a linearity
test signal. The Type 526 can measure differential gain
quite accurately by means of the later test signal. Differential
phase measurements may also be made, provided that the
same subcarrier source is used for both color burst and the
linearity test signal subcarrier. Color burst must be present
(during color-casting).
The difficulty in seeing these two lines of test signals amidst
the program signals — which hinders measurements — is elimi-
nated by the Interfield Signal Key. Trace intensification dur-
ing these test lines modulates the CRT display so that byj\
adjusting the Intensity Control, only these two lines per fields-
may be seen.
The resulting display, while dim, is quite usable.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
DC-COUPLED SIGNAL CIRCUITS
DC-coupling from the push-pull synchronous demodulators to
the cathode-ray tube prevents changes in chroma signal
composition from affecting the positioning of the display,
making possible the detection and measurement of color
carrier present during blanking time. Carrier-balance cor-
rections can be made even while on the air, because the
vector display shows the direction and magnitude of the
required adjustments.
VIDEO INPUTS
Channel A and Channel B inputs are compensated for 75-ohm
loop-through operation. Input stages are cathode followers.
Sufficient gain is provided to allow use of a compensated
probe rather than loop-through input.
The gain controls of each channel have a range of 40 dB
and produce virtually no phase-shift effects.
SYNC INPUT
External, 1-V sync-negative composite video signal or 3.5-V
to 8-V negative-going composite sync signal can be used.
Also, horizontal drive pulses can be used if interfield keying
feature is not used. With external sync, Channels A and B
can display non-composite video or chroma signals. External
input is high-impedance compensated, loop-through connector
for 75-ohm coaxial cable (R = 1 megohm, C = 25 pF).
Internal sync is available.
EXTERNAL SUBCARRIER INPUT
High-impedance compensated loop-through connector for 75-
ohm coaxial cable (R = 1 megohm, C = 20 pF). Input has
buffer-amplifier stage and requires a signal level of 2 V
peak to peak minimum.
VERTICAL SIGNAL OUTPUT
The demodulated vertical signal is available at a binding
post, DC-coupled, for feeding remote indicators.
TRACE INTENSIFICATION INPUT
A jack (PL-55) is provided for external trace-brightening
pulses. Internal blanking circuitry is disconnected when an
external signal is being applied. Signal required for trace
brightening is an AC-coupled positive-going 20-volt pulse,
which can be obtained from the + GATE terminal of any
Tektronix Oscilloscope that is being triggered by the vertical-
signal output of the Type 526. This type of trace brightening
is useful for determining the time limits over which a phase
shift is occurring.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
The Type 526 uses a 5" flat-faced monoaccelerator tube
with similar vertical and horizontal deflection factors and
excellent linearity. Accelerating potential is 4 kV. A P31
phosphor is normally supplied.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
The edge-lighted graticule is marked with polar coordinates
for hue and saturation of the chrominance signals, and with'
vectors for the Q, I, and burst signals. The large boxes
represent ±20% in amplitude and ±10° in phase. This is
in accord with current FCC rules and regulations. The small
50
d)
WM&m
-— --r^So
(2)
l 29 i '"'"-'^O -
? fe
''■ fjptj
mm3A
526
(3)
U HI
no
'"^aaj&eo -
140^^ X^Jip 1
w^
li*|WT
1
..
(4)
(5)
Figure 1. VECTOR DISPLAY
Modulated Stairstep Signal showing differentia! gain
(differing radial distance from center), and differential
phase (rotation of dots around center).
Figure 2. LINE SWEEP DISPLAY
Modulated Stairstep Signal. Subcarrier regenerator is
free running to show only differential gain or change
in amplitude of subcarrier with changing luminance
signal.
Figure 3. LINE SWEEP DISPLAY
Modulated Stairstep Signal. Subcarrier regenerator is
locked to color burst to synchronously demodulate the
subcarrier. Differential phase is shown by variations in
synchronously demodulated subcarriers.
Figure 4. LINE SWEEP DISPLAY
Modulated Stairstep Signal with increased sensitivity
and subcarrier phasing adjusted to be in quadrature
with the last step of modulated stairstep.
Figure 5. LINE SWEEP DISPLAY
Modulated Stairstep Signal with increased vertical
sensitivity and subcarrier phasing adjusted to be in
quadrature with first step of the modulated stairstep.
boxes represent ±5% in amplitude and ±3° in phase.
These numbers are thought to represent good studio practice.
The limits around the burst signal are ±10%- Graticule
illumination is controlled by a front-panel knob.
POWER REQUIREMENT
Electronically-regulated DC supplies insure stable operation
between 105 and 125 V or between 210 and 250 V, 50 to
60 Hz. Transformer taps allow operation on either range.
Instrument factory wired for 117 V. Power consumption
approximately 240 watts.
ACCESSIBILITY
The Type 526 is designed for standard rack mounting.
Chassis attaches to rack with slide-out mounting that permits
it to be tilted vertically, providing easy access to all com-
ponents.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 8 3 / 4 " high by 19" wide by 18" rack depth.
Net weight is 45V 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 74 pounds,
approx.
*
PE 526 VECTORSCOPE $1665
Each instrument includes: 3 — Terminating resistor (011-0023-00); 1 — 3
to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0024-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Pr mounting tracks
(351-0084-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0121-00).
SUPPORTING CRADLES.
Order Part Number 040-0344-00 $11.45
Supporting Cradles — for rear slide support when the instru-
ment is to be mounted in a backless rack. Two cradles with
necessary mounting hardware.
TYPE 526 MOD 158M VECTORSCOPE $1750
The Type 526 MOD 158M is modified and factory calibrated
for use at the PAL color subcarrier frequency of 4.43361875
MHz. The Precision Phase Shift dial reads directly in degrees
at the PAL frequency. An appropriate graticule will be fur-
nished. All other specifications are identical to those for the
Type 526.
Each instrument includes: 3 — Terminating resistor (011-0023-00); 1 — 3
to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-
0024-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Pr mounting tracks
(351-0084-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0121-00).
A TV Sync Separator is available for use with many Tek-
tronix general-purpose oscilloscopes. The unit provides stable
triggering for the display of composite video signals. See
the Accessories Section for complete information.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
51
LINE SELECTOR
FLAT TO 8 MHz
4 FREQUENCY RESPONSES
POSITIVE FIELD SELECTOR
45 TRANSISTORS— 7 TUBES
COOL— QUIET— CLEAN
NO FAN— ONLY 80 WATTS
Newest of the Tektronix line of Television Instruments, the
Type 529 and RM529 bring to the Industry a new flexibility in
waveform monitoring: signal-level monitoring, bandwidth and
differential gain measurements, sine 2 -pulse and bar testing,
monitoring Vertical Interval Test signals, transmitter percent-of-
modulation measurements, YRGB or RGB displays (in conjunc-
tion with color-processing amplifiers) and others. Included are
four video response characteristics, HIGH-PASS, LOW-PASS,
IEEE, and FLAT. Both instruments feature FLAT RESPONSE to.
8 MHz, assuring excellent waveform fidelity for sine squares
testing with 2T, T and '/ 2 T pulses.
52
DC RESTORATION maintains the back porch at an essentially
constant level despite changes in signal amplitude, APL, and
color burst, and may be turned off for viewing other than video
signals. The circuit can easily be modified for sync-tip restora-
tion.
Sensitivity range is 0.12 volts to 1.5 volts for full-scale deflec-
tion. Full-scale calibration at 0.714 V or 1.00 V is provided.
BRIGHT WAVEFORM DISPLAYS in line selector operation are
obtained with a new, highly efficient 5" ALUMINIZED CRT,
operating at increased accelerating potential. The instrument
uses the best of both solid-state and vacuum-tube circuitry re-
sulting in improved stability and reliability. These instruments
do not require a fan, resulting in cleaner operation and com-
plete freedom from noise.
HORIZONTAL SELECTION provides 2-field or 2-line displays,
plus calibrated sweep rates of 0.125 H/cm or 0.25 H/cm. Either
calibrated rate may be delayed for line selection. SWEEP
MAGNIFICATION extends the sweep rate by X5 or X25, offer-
ing calibrated sweep rates from 0.250 H/cm to 0.005 H/cm.
POSITIVE FIELD SELECTION assures stable displays in the
presence of random noise bursts and video switching. The LINE
SELECTOR permits detailed study of any portion of any desired
line(s), and a front panel switch selects lines 16 through 21
for viewing VIT signals. A VIDEO-OUTPUT AMPLIFIER supplies
video and a brightening pulse to the associated picture moni-
tor, intensifying the same line, or lines, displayed on the instru-
ment when using the LINE SELECTOR. The amplifier has
excellent frequency response and linearity.
VIDEO FEATURES
INPUTS
Two unbalanced inputs may be used with either 75-fi loop-
through or bridging connection (input R & C is 1 Meg and
24 pF). Alternatively, one balanced, differential input may
be used for 124-fi circuits.
529
rm529
jr-"! c : .:.?"7ii; t. jm :~/rf}
1
■m,
H
■lib
m
■ Bm
Eiyy
in
'S ■IV
I15W5B
H HUH
mm
■II
■■
■■
■■
Fig. I. — Multiburst Signal. Multiple exposure
photograph. Left: High-pass response posi-
tion. Center: Flat-frequency response posi-
tion. Right: Low-pass response position.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
120mV to 1.5 V full scale. Continuously variable between
ranges. Calibrated full-scale: 1.0, 0.50 and 0.20 V.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
4 response characteristics provide: FLAT: +0.0 — 0.1 dB to
6 MHz; +0.0 — 0.3 dB to 8 MHz. IEEE-Spec 23S-1 of 1958
(amended): 3.58 MHz -20 dB. HIGHPASS: 3.58 MHz plus
and minus 400 kHz at — 3dB. LOW PASS: —18 dB at
500 kHz.
LOW FREQUENCY TILT
Less than 1 % tilt on 50-Hz square wave.
LINEARITY
Differential gain and multiburst axis shift: 1 % or less.
DC RESTORER
Keyed back porch* type eliminates drift in DC-coupled verti-
cal amplifier. Does not distort color burst. Blanking level
shift due to color burst less than 1 IEEE unit. Waveform will
remain on screen if there is a loss of sync pulses for DC re-
storer keying. DC restorer may be disabled by front-panel
switch.
VERTICAL AMPLIFIER
May be DC-coupled to diode demodulator as in % Video
Modulation Monitoring. Details are available in manual.
GAIN STABILITY
±1% over rated line voltage and ambient temperature
ranges.
TIME-BASE FEATURES
CALIBRATED TIME BASE
0.1 25 H/cm. Magnifier extends calibrated time base to 0.025
H/cm and 0.005 H/cm. Accuracy is ±3%. Rep rate is V 2
of the TV line rate. The time base can be calibrated using
TV signals. Color burst is displayed without phase interlace,
(see Fig. 6)
*Sync tip restoration available by simple modification.
Fig. 2. — Modulated Stair-Step Signal. Multiple
exposure. Left: High-pass position, showing
gain increased to X5 for measuring differen-
tial gain. Center: Flat-response position.
Stair-step signal shows 20 IEEE units of color
sub-carrier. Right: IEEE response position
showing sub-carrier substantially eliminated
for accurate level measurements.
Fig. 3. — Sine 2 Pulse and Bar Signal. 0.725
/is HAD T-Pu/se and Bar.
53
529
rm529
Fig. 4 — 27 Signal. Multiple exposure. Left:
27. Cenfer: 7. Right: '/ 2 7 Sine 2 , 0.25, 0.125,
0.0625 ixs HAD.
Fig. 5. — Double exposure showing complete
two-field displays and two-line displays.
Fig. 6. — Color-Burst Signal. Double exposure.
Top: X5 magnification. Horizontal display.
0.125 H/cm. Sweep: 0.025 H/cm. Bottom-.
X25 magnification. Horizontal display: O.J 25
H/cm. Sweep: 0.005 H/cm.
UNCALIBRATED TIME BASE
2 LINE: Triggered time base with rep rate of V 3 TV line
frequency. Provides complete 2-line display with horizontal
blanking centered on the screen, (see Fig. 5.)
2 FIELD: Synchronized time base with rep rate the same as
the TV frame rate. Entire frame of video is displayed with
the vertical blanking centered on the screen. Time base will
free-run in the absence of signal, indicating loss of incoming
signal.
TIME-BASE MAGNIFIER
X5 and X25. Accuracy ±3%. Magnifier expands the center
of the display, convenient for monitoring equalizing or ser-
rated pulses.
COLOR CAMERA YRGB AND RBG DISPLAYS
Can be used with color camera processing amplifiers pro-
viding these sequential signals and the staircase signal. To
provide RBG display directly, switching is done in the color
processing amplifier. Receptacle to interconnect color proc-
essing amplifier (relay control, staircase signal input, and
ground) is provided on rear panel.
VIT SELECTOR
Front-panel switch selects lines 16 through 21. Knob position
indicates line selected for viewing.
LINE SELECTOR
Variable delay allows any line of either field to be viewed.
FIELD SELECTOR
Positive-acting field selection. Noise impulses will not shift
the field.
TRIGGER SELECTION
Stable triggering on composite video signals. INTERNAL:
200 mV to 1 V or more, peak to peak. EXTERNAL: 250 mV
to 1 V or more, peak to peak.
OTHER FEATURES
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY
Operates on 115 V or 230 V line ± 10% RMS. LINE FRE-
QUENCY: 50-60 Hz. POWER CONSUMPTION: Approx 80 W
at 115V, 60Hz.
TEKTRONIX CATHODE-RAY TUBE
Flat-faced, 5" rectangular CRT, operating at 5.5 kV accelerat-
ing potential. Calibrated viewing area, 7 x 10 cm. Electrical
beam rotator provides trace alignment. Standard phosphor
furnished (P-31). Scale illumination: Variable edge-lighting.
CALIBRATOR
Two internal calibration voltages of 0.714 V and 1.00 V on 1-
volt full-scale range of VERTICAL GAIN switch. An external
calibration signal may be used. Internal calibration pulse
amplitude ±1% over ambient temperature range and line-
voltage range. Reference is a Zener diode.
MECHANICAL FEATURES
Operating Temperature Range: 0° C
VENTILATION
Convection air-cooled,
to +50° C.
CONSTRUCTION
Aluminum-alloy chassis.
FINISH
Anodized front panel.
DIMENSIONS
Type 529: 8 1 /," high x 8%" wide x 19" deep overall. Two
Type 529 Waveform Monitors can be mounted side by side,
or one mounted along side an associated picture monitor,
in a standard 19" rack or console.
Type RM529: 5 1 /," high x 19" wide x 20" deep overall.
Fits standard 19" rack. Instrument can be pulled forward
and tilted 90°.
NET WEIGHT
Type 529: approx 24 lbs. Shipping weight, 33 lbs.
Type RM529: approx 27 lbs. Shipping weight, 58 lbs.
54
For 525 LINE, 30 FRAME TELEVISION STANDARDS,
TYPE 529 WAVEFORM MONITOR $1050
Each instrument includes: 1 — filter, smoke gray (378-0560-00); 1 —
graticule, composite, as shown in fig. 5 (331-0156-01); 1 — graticule,
noncomposite, as shown in fig. 1 (331-0077-01); 1 — graticule, dual
scale, as shown in fig. 2 (331-0157-00); 1 — graticule, sine 2 , K factor,
and IEEE, as shown in figs. 3, 4, 6 (331-0161-00); 1—3 to 2-wire
adapter (103-0013-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0509-00).
TYPE RM529 WAVEFORM MONITOR $1 100
Each instrument includes: 1 — filter, smoke gray (378-0560-00); 1 —
graticule, composite, as shown in fig 5 (331-0156-01); 1 — graticule,
noncomposite, as shown in fig. 1 (331-0077-01); 1 — graticule, dual
scale, as shown in fig. 2 (331-0157-00); 1 — graticule, sine 2 , K factor,
and IEEE, as shown in figs. 3, 4, 6 (331-0161-00); 1—3 to 2-wire
adapter (103-0013-00); 4— Bar retainer (381-0187-00); 2— instruction
manual (070-0466-00).
FOR 625 LINE, 25 FRAME TELEVISION STANDARDS, CALI-
BRATED WITH CCIR SIGNALS.
Features variable line selector, but without VIT line selector
switch. HORIZONTAL DISPLAYS changed to: 2 FIELD, 2 LINE,
0.1 H/cm and 10/ts/cm. LINE SELECTOR SWEEP RATES: 0.2
H/cm and 0.1 H/cm. CALIBRATION VOLTAGES: 0.700 and
1.00 V are provided. HIGH PASS RESPONSE: 4.43 MHz cen-
ter frequency; bandwidth ±0.4 MHz at — 3dB. LINE VOLTAGE:
Fused and wired for 230 V operation. Each instrument includes
the same accessories listed above.
TYPE 529, MOD 158L $1050
TYPE RM529, MOD 158L $1100
The Type 529 and RM529 can be adapted for use on other
television system standards. Please consult with your Tektronix
Field Engineer or Representative.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Filter, Mesh Assembly with Graticule Cover. Order Part
Number 378-0575-00 $1 5.00
Film, Projected Graticule, 7 cm HAD Sine 2 , 2% and 4%
K Factor.
Order Part Number 331-0161-01 $.85
(For use with Tektronix Projected Graticule.) See C-12
Camera, Camera Section.
Connector. Use with color processing amplifiers for RBG,
etc. displays. Order Part Number 134-0049-00 $4.00
Camera Mounting Bezel. For Tektronix Cameras, see Camera
Section. For Mounting other commercially available cam-
eras order:
Part Number 014-0031-00 $4.50
TYPE 529 FIELD CASE
Provides cabinet protection for the Type 529 when used for
applications outside of the rack. Aluminum construction,
blue vinyl finish.
Order Part Number 016-0084-00 $50.00
•1
il
•
529
rm529
MOUNTING CRADLES
Two different cradle assemblies, with associated bezels,
allow the Type 529 Waveform Monitor to be mounted along
side an 8" or 9" Conrac® Picture Monitor, in a standard 19"
rack. A cradle and bezel are also available for mounting two
Type 529s side-by-side.
FOR MOUNTING 8" CNB-8 PICTURE MONITOR (REQUIRES
10'/ 2 " RACK SPACE)
Description
Part Number
Price
Cradle Assembly
014-0021-00
$25.00
Bezel, for mounting Type
529 on operator's left
014-0027-00
45.00
Bezel, for mounting Type
529 on operator's right
014-0028-00
45.00
014-0021-00
25.00
014-0025-00
45.00
014-0026-00
45.00
FOR MOUNTING 8" CZB-8 PICTURE MONITOR (REQUIRES
10y 2 " RACK SPACE)
Cradle Assembly
Bezel, for mounting Type
529 on operator's left
Bezel, for mounting Type
529 on operator's right
FOR MOUNTING 9" RNB-9 PICTURE MONITOR (REQUIRES
8 3 / 4 " RACK SPACE)
Cradle Assembly
Bezel, for mounting Type
529 on operator's left
Bezel, for mounting Type
529 on operator's right
FOR MOUNTING TWO TYPE 529 WAVEFORM MONITORS
SIDE-BY-SIDE (REQUIRES 8 3 / 4 " RACK SPACE)
014-0020-00
25.00
014-0023-00
35.00
014-0024-00
35.00
Cradle Assembly
Bezel
014-0020-00
014-0022-00
25.00
35.00
A TV Sync Separator is available for use with many Tek-
tronix general-purpose oscilloscopes. The unit provides stable
triggering for the display of composite video signals. See
the Accessories Section for complete information.
^Registered Trademark
Conrac Division, Giannini
Controls Corporation
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
55
Type
RM
DC-to-15 MHz
OSCILLOSCOPES
~3s*
HIGH INTENSITY TRACE
6X10 CM DISPLAY
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER,
AND SPECIAL PURPOSE PLUG-INS
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY (535 A ONLY)
The Type 531 A and 535A are essentially the same, except
that Type 535A includes a second sweep generator (Time
Base B) which functions as a delay generator. Both instru-
ments feature a DC-to-15 MHz bandwidth and 23-ns risetime.
Also, both utilize a broad selection of PLUG-IN UNITS to
adapt the vertical deflection system to various application
areas, (see PLUG-IN UNIT chart).
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Plug-In Preamplifiers adapt the Type 531 A and 535A to
a wide range of measurement capabilities. The oscilloscope
vertical system accepts all Tektronix Letter-Series and T Series
Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— Time Base A: 0.1 /is/cm to
5s/cm. Time Base B (535A only): 2 /ts/cm to 1 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X5, (extends calibrated sweep rate to
20 ns/cm).
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 2ms to 10s, continuously
variable (535A only).
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-mm deflection. Ex-
ternal 0.2 V, ±50 V combined DC and peak AC.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to 1 V/cm ; DC to 350 kHz; 1
megohm, ~47 pF.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE-
-lOkV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (1-kHz square ^%
wave).
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 455
watts maximum for 531 A, 550 watts maximum for 535A.
56
RM31A 531 A
RM35A 535 A
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB
PLUG-IN
UNIT
DEFLECTION
FACTOR BANDWIDTH RISETIME
For Wide-Band Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
5 mV/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
500 ^V/cm
2 Hz to 8 MHz
44 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
CA Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 13.5 MHz
26 ns
M Four-Trace
20mV/cm to
25 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50 mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
5 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 10 MHz
35 ns
K
50 mV/cm to
40 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
L
50mV/cm to
40 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
I
5 mV/cm to
4 V/cm
3 Hz to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Differential Input Applications
1A7
10/tV/cm (to
10 V/cm)
DC to 500 kHz
0.7 /«s
D High-Gain
1 mV/cm (to
50 mV/cm)
DC to 300 kHz
(DC to 2 MHz)
0.18 its
E Low-Level
50 MV/cm (to
lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to 20
kHz (to 60 kHz)
6 /is
G Wide-Band
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5 mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 1 1 MHz
31 ns
For Spectrum Analysis
Type 1L Series Units — Present units cover 1 MHz to 10.5 GHz.
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear and
Non-Linear Uses
O Operational
Amplifier
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz 25 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10/istrain/div to DC to 6 kHz 60 fis
10 k MStrain/div
For Transisfor-Ri'sefime Checics
r "
0.5 mA/cm to 23 ns
100 m A/cm
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
23 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements
Via Slide-back
W
1 mV/cm to
50 V/cm
at 1 mV/cm
DC to 13.5 MHz
DC to 7 MHz
26 ns
to
50 ns
Z
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 13 MHz
27 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
90 ps
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH
DC to 15 MHz with Type 1A1 or 1A2 Plug-In Unit. See Plug-
In Chart for other combinations.
DELAY LINE
250 ns.
SIGNAL OUT AT FRONT PANEL
1.5 V/cm of displayed signal.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
TIME BASE A
0.1 fis/ cm to 5s/cm; 24 calibrated steps; 1-2-5 sequence.
Range continuously variable between steps, uncalibrated.
Range extended from 5 to 12s/cm, uncalibrated. Calibra-
tion of fixed sweep rates is typically ±1% of full scale,
and in all cases within ±3%.
TIME BASE B (535A only)
2 jxs/cm to Is/cm; 18 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Sweep-length control adjusts length from 4 cm to 10 cm to
permit changing sweep repetition rate. Time Base B is there-
fore useful as a repetition-rate generator over the range of
0.1 Hz to 40 kHz.
SWEEP DELAY (535A only)
Calibrated delay range variable from 2 /is to 10 s. Accu-
racy from 2 ,us to 0.1 s is within ±1% of indicated delay
±2 minor dial divisions of Delay-Time Multiplier control.
Accuracy of the three remaining steps, 0.2, 0.5, and 1 sec-
ond is within ±3%. Time jitter in delayed trigger or delayed
sweep less than one part in 20,000.
SWEEP MAGNIFICATION
5X accuracy ±5%, extends sweep to 20 ns/cm.
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION (535A only)
Locked out after firing until reset at front panel.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
DC to at least 350 kHz; deflection factor continuously vari-
able from 0.2 V/cm to approximately 15 V/cm. Input RC
is 1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF.
57
RM31A 531 A
RM35A 535 A
FRONT-PANEL OUTPUTS
+20 V gates from both time bases; +l 50 V sawtooth from
Time Base A;+5V delayed trigger pulse.
TRIGGER
Separate and identical for both Time Bases except that Time
Base A has two additional modes: HF SYNC and AC LF
(low-frequency) REJECT.
TRIGGER MODE
Internal, external, or line. Internal source selected from scope
vertical amplifier. Coupling is direct or AC. Features AC
Low-Frequency Reject (3dB down at 1.5 kHz). Also may be
triggered or Automatic. Latter provides bright reference trace
with no input (or input less than 50 Hz). Above 50 Hz, time
base can be triggered at repetition rate of incoming signal.
HF SYNC assures a steady display of sine-wave signals up
to approximately 30 MHz.
TRIGGER LEVEL
Adjustable to provide triggering at desired point on input
waveform (rising or falling portion).
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal: Minimum of 2 mm of displayed signal. External:
0.2 V minimum, up to ±50 V combined DC and peak AC.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
CRT
The Tektronix cathode-ray tube is a 5" flat-faced metallized
tube with a helical post-accelerating anode. 10-kV accel-
erating potential assures a bright display even with high
sweep speeds at low repetition rates. P2 phosphor is nor-
mally furnished.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
The edge-lighted graticule has 6x10 centimeters marked
in centimeter squares with centerline markings every 2 milli-
meters. Illumination is controlled by a front-panel knob.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Eighteen direct-reading fixed steps — 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10,
20, 50 millivolts, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 volts
peak to peak are provided by the single knob control.
Accuracy is within 3%. Square-wave frequency is approxi-
mately 1 kHz.
DISPLAY FEATURES
Front-panel controls: intensity, focus, astigmatism. Internal
screwdriver adjustments control display geometry and high-
voltage supply level. Beam-position indicators show direc-
tion of CRT beam when off screen. DC-coupled unblanking
to CRT grid assures uniform beam current for all sweep
speeds and repetition rates at any setting of intensity con-
trol. Z-Axis input for external modulation of CRT beam is
AC coupled; requires 15 V, peak to peak.
POWER REQUIREMENT
Wired for 115 V, 50 to 60 Hz, the electronically-regulated
power supplies permit a line voltage variation between
103.5 and 126.5 V (115 V ±10%). Changing transformer
taps permits operation at 108, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V reg-
ulated within 10%, each range. The Type 531 A draws 455
watts maximum; the Type 535A draws 550 watts maximum.
CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS
Type 531A and 535A dimensions are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13'/ e "
wide by 23 7 / 8 " deep. Type 531 A net weight is 57 3 / 4 pounds;
shipping weight is 78 pounds, approx. Type 535A net weight
is 61 '/ 2 pounds; shipping weight is 83 pounds, approx.
RACK-MOUNT MODEL DIMENSIONS
Type RM31A and RM35A cabinets mount to a standard 19"
rack. They withdraw from the cabinet on slide-out tracks
and can be tilted and locked in any of 7 positions for serv-
icing convenience. Dimensions are 14" high by 19" wide
by 22 3 / 4 " deep. For further mounting information, refer to
the Catalog instrument dimension page. Type RM31A net
weight is 75 pounds; shipping weight is 101 pounds, approx.
Type RM35A net weight is 78 1 /, pounds; shipping weight is
105 pounds, approx.
TYPE 531 A, without plug-in units $995
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — 3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-
BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug,
18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC, (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction
Manual (070-0130-00).
TYPE 535A, without plug-in units $1400
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-
BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug,
18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC, (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction
Manual (070-0145-00).
Type RM31A, without plug-in units $1095
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — 3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-
BNC, 18", (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug,
18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC, (012-0092-00); 1— Set mount-
ing hardware; 2 — Instruction Manual (070-0301-00).
TYPE RM35A, without plug-in units $1500
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — 3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-
BNC, 18", (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug,
18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC, (012-0092-00); 1— Set mount-
ing hardware; 2 — Instruction Manual (070-0306-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
58
DC-to-15 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE Type
with 100X MAGNIFIER
rr« sua oscilloscope
' IIMI
■" 1 - 7*fl
.#
7^" o 1
-IP #
•:-,■ "^^M« — I »j«
•
rowu
■ariMMH*, He «
1 A. 1
HIGH-INTENSITY TRACE
WIDE RANGE SWEEP MAGNIFICATION
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER,
AND SPECIAL-PURPOSE PLUG-INS
The Type 533A is a DC-to-15 MHz oscilloscope with a wide
range of application coverage through use of versatile Tektronix
Plug-In Units. Six different degrees of sweep magnification are
available. Sweep lockout and high writing rate are combined
for best results in one-shot recording.
Operating convenience results from functionally-grouped
controls, a single-knob direct-reading sweep selector, and fiddle-
free triggering settings. Other useful features are warning
lights for uncalibrated sweep-rate and sweep-magnifier settings,
beam-position indicators, and built-in blanking for switching
transients in multi-trace operation.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible through
use of the 1 -Series, Spectrum Analyzer, and all Letter-Series
Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 /xs/cm to 5 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2 to XI 00, extends sweep range, accu-
rately, to 0.02 /is/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS (minimum)— Internal: 2-mm deflec-
tion.
External: 0.2 V to
±50 V combined DC
and peak AC.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to 10 V/cm (calibrated) DC to
350 kHz; 1 megohm, 47 pF.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V; 1-kHz square
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 500
watts max.
59
533A
rm33A
1
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
Jandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.
PLUG-IN
UNIT
DEFLECTION
FACTOR BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
5 mV/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
500 MV/cm
2 Hz to 8 MHz
44 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
CA Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 13.5 MHz
23 ns
M Four-Trace
20mV/cm to
25 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
5 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 10MHz
35 ns
K
50mV/cm to
40 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
L
50mV/cm to
40 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
5 mV/cm to
4 V/cm
3 Hz to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Differential Input Applications
1A7
lO/tV/cm (to
10 V/cm)
DC to 500 kHz
Selectable
Bandwidth
0.7 lis
D High-Gain
1 mV/cm (to
50 mV/cm)
DC to 300 kHz
DC to 2 MHz
0.18 /ts
E Low-Level
50/tV/cm (to
lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to 20
kHz; 0.06 Hz to
60 kHz
6 lis
G Wide-Band
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5 mV/cm to DC to 11 MHz
50 V/cm
31ns
For Spectrum Analysis
Type 1 L Series
Units — Present units cover 1 MHz to
10.5 GHz.
For Integration,
Non-Linear Uses
Differentiation, Function Generation,
Linear and
O Operational
Amplifier
50mV/cm to DC to 14 MHz
50 V/cm
25 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10Mstrain/div to DC to 6 kHz
10 k /istrain/div
60 as
For Transisfor-Risefime Checks
R
0.5 mA/cm to
100 m A/cm
23 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
23 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements
Via Slide-back
w
1 mV/cm to
50 V/cm
at 1 mV/cm
DC to 13.5 MHz
DC to 7 MHz
26 ns
to
50 ns
z
50mV/cm to
50 V/cm
DC to 10 MHz
35 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
90 ps
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME
Output Amplifier— DC to 15 MHz.
Risetime— 23 ns with Type 1A1, 1A2, CA, K, L, R, or S Plug-
In Units.
DELAY LINE
Permits viewing the leading edge of the waveform that
triggers the sweep.
MULTI-TRACE BLANKING
A blanking voltage is available to eliminate switching
transients from the display when a multi-trace plug-in unit
is operated in its chopped mode. External blanking volt-
age can be applied to the CRT cathode by means of a
connector located on the rear panel of the instrument.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
SWEEP RATES
0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm in 24 steps with a 1-2-5 sequence. Accu-
racy is ±3% of the time/cm switch setting. A vernier control
allows continuous range (uncalibrated) between steps and
extends the slowest rate to 12s/cm. A neon light indicates
when sweep is uncalibrated.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER
Six degrees of sweep magnification are provided: 2, 5, 10,
20, 50, and 100 times. Any ten centimeters of a magnified
sweep can be displayed. When the magnified sweep does
not exceed the maximum calibrated rate of 0.02 jus/cm,
accuracy is +5% of the displayed portion. An indicator
light warns the operator when the maximum calibrated rate
is being exceeded.
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION -^
Lockout-reset circuitry provides for one-shot recording. After
a single sweep is triggered, the sweep circuit is automatically
locked out until manually reset. When reset, the sweep will
fire on the next trigger received, then automatically lock
out until the operator activates the RESET lever.
60
533A
rm33A
'DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING
The unblanking waveform is DC-coupled to the control grid
of the CRT to assure uniform intensity for all sweep rates.
HORIZONTAL INPUT
An external signal can be applied to the horizontal deflec-
tion plates through the DC-coupled horizontal amplifier via
a front-panel connector. Three calibrated deflection steps
are provided: 0.1, 1, and lOV/cm. A variable control pro-
vides for continuous adjustment from 0.1 to approximately
lOOV/cm. Horizontal amplifier bandwidth is DC to 350 kHz
or better at maximum gain. Input RC is approximately 1
megohm paralleled by 47 pF.
TRIGGERING
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal: signal producing 2 mm of deflection.
External: signal between 0.2 to ±50 V combined DC and
peak AC.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES
Versatile triggering circuitry provides for complete manual
control, preset stability control, and fully-automatic triggering.
AMPLITUDE-LEVEL SELECTION
Adjustable amplitude-level and stability controls provide
for triggering the sweep at a selected amplitude level on
the triggering waveform. Triggering source can be internal,
external or the line frequency, either AC or DC coupled.
The triggering point can be on either the rising or falling
slope of the trigger waveform.
PRESET STABILITY
Same as above, except the stability control is preset to the
optimum triggering point and requires no readjustment.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING
Range of automatic operation is between 60 Hz and 2 MHz.
In the absence of an input signal the sweep is automatically
triggered at about a 50 Hz rate. This provides a reference
trace on the screen.
LOW FREQUENCY REJECT
Prevents low-frequency components, such as hum, from inter-
fering with stable triggering.
HIGH-FREQUENCY SYNC
Assures a steady display of sine-wave signals up to approxi-
mately 30 MHz. Requires a signal large enough to cause
2 cm of deflection, or an external signal of about 2 V.
MISCELLANEOUS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
A square-wave calibration voltage is available through a
front-panel connector. Eighteen fixed steps between 0.2
millivolts and 100 volts peak to peak in a 1-2-5 sequence
are provided. Accuracy is ±3%. Square-wave frequency is
approximately 1 kHz.
FRONT-PANEL OUTPUTS
Gate Signal— Rectangular pulse approx +20 V, same dura-
tion as sweep.
Sawtooth — Positive-going approx +150 V, same duration
as sweep.
Vertical Signal Out — Approx 1.5 V for each centimeter of
vertical deflection on screen.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
5" flat-faced, metallized tube with helical post-accelerating
anode. 10 kV accelerating potential. P2 phosphor is normally
supplied.
DIRECT INPUT TO CRT
An opening in the side of the cabinet permits direct connec-
tion to the cathode-ray tube deflection plates.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
Edge-lighted 6 vertical by 10 horizontal centimeter divisions
with 2 millimeter baseline divisions. Lighting controlled by a
front-panel knob.
BEAM-POSITION INDICATORS
Two pairs of indicator lights show direction of the electron
beam when the spot is not on the screen.
POWER REQUIREMENT
Electronically-regulated DC supplies insure stable operation
between 105 and 125 V or between 210 and 250 V, 50 to
60 Hz. Transformer taps allow operation on either range.
Instrument factory wired for 117 V. Power consumption
approximately 500 watts.
PROBES
Two low capacitance probes (10-X atten) are supplied with
the instrument. Input capacitance of the Type 533A — Type
K combination with probes, 7 pF; maximum deflection factor
is 0.5 V/cm. Excellent transient response is retained, as the
probes introduce no overshoot or ringing.
CABINET MODEL
Type 533A dimensions are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13V 8 " wide by
23 7 / 8 " deep. Net weight is 62'/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight
is 78 pounds, approx.
RACK-MOUNT MODEL
Type RM33A cabinet mounts to a standard 19" rack. It
withdraws from the cabinet on slide-out tracks and can be
tilted and locked in any of 7 positions for servicing con-
venience. Dimensions are 14" high by 19" wide by 22 3 / 4 "
deep. For further mounting information, refer to the Catalog
instrument dimension page. Net weight is 7Ay 2 pounds,
approx. Shipping weight is 100 pounds, approx.
TYPE 533A, without plug-in units $1 1 25
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1—3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-
BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch Cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18"
(012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction Manual
(070-0258-00).
TYPE RM33A, without plug-in units $1225
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1—3 to 2-wire
adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1 —
Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-
0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1 —
Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Set mounting hardware; 2— Instruc-
tion Manual (070-0304-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
61
Type
DC-to-10 MHz X-Y OSCILLOSCOPE
ACCURATE PHASE BALANCE
WIDE BAND "X-Y" DISPLAY
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER,
AND SPECIAL-PURPOSE PLUG-INS
The Type 536 represents a combination of wide-band "X-Y"
and general-purpose laboratory oscilloscopes. Identical main
amplifiers and a Tektronix CRT with equal X and Y deflection
characteristics are the basic components. Using identical wide-
band Plug-In Units, horizontal and vertical deflection systems
are almost identical. Relative phase shift is less than l ° to
15 MHz, and phase balance can be obtained at any frequency
to over 25 MHz.
With the Type T utilized in the horizontal deflection, and a
Type 1A1, 1A2, or Letter-Series units in the vertical, the Type
536 functions as a general-purpose instrument. In order to view
the leading edge of a fast-rising waveform, a pretrigger signal
occurring approx 0.2 /xs in advance of the signal to be viewed
must be applied to the external trigger input of the Type T
Unit.
APPLICATIONS
In curve-tracing applications the Type 536 extends the range
of familiar techniques to today's higher-frequency problems.
Differential input, a feature that eliminates the need for a
common XY terminal, is available in the wide-band Type G
Plug-In Preamplifier. A pair of Type G Units provide accuracy
needed in many curve-tracing applications.
Some applications for a wide-band "X-Y" oscilloscope:
1. Examination of semiconductor diode characteristics — volts
vs amperes plot.
2. Determination of ferromagnetic material characteristics.
3. Linear amplifier distortion measurement.
4. Limiting or expanding-amplifier performance measure-
ments.
5. Displaying pressure vs volume diagrams.
6. Analyzing amplitude selector type circuits such as Schmitt,
diode pick-off, etc.
7. Checking regulated power supply performance.
8. Measurement of voltage coefficient of resistors.
9. Performance tests of various modulation systems such as
AM, suppressed carrier, FM, PTM, PAM, etc.
10. Performance tests of demodulators for above modulation
systems.
11. Determining gating circuit characteristics.
12. Function generator — y = f (x).
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
Both vertical and horizontal deflection characteristics extremely
flexible through use of the 1 -Series, Spectrum Analyzer, and
Letter-Series Plug-In Units.
TIME-BASE DEFLECTION
(with Type T Time-Base Generator)
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.2 /ts/div to 2s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 0.04 /xs/div.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENT— 0.2 V to 10 V.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 10x10 divisions (3V 8 x3'/ 8 inches).
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V; 1 kHz square
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V; (\
approximately 625 watts, with two Type K Units.
62
536
AMPLIFIER PLUG-IN UNITS
Bandwidth Specifications are — 3 dB.
TYPE 1A1— DC to 11 MHz, 31 ns at 0.05 V/div to 50V/div . . .
DC to 10.5 MHz, 33 ns at 0.005 V/div, increasing to 11 MHz,
31 ns at 0.05 V/div.
TYPE 1A2— DC to 11 MHz, 31 ns at 0.05 V/div to 50 V/div.
TYPE B— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns at 0.05 V/div to 50 V/div . . .
2 hertz to 9 MHz, 0.04 /xs at 5 mV/div to 0.05 V/div.
TYPE CA— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns.
TYPE D— DC to 300 kHz at 1 mV/div, increasing to 2 MHz at
50mV/div, 0.1 8 /as.
TYPE E— 0.06 hertz to 20 kHz, increasing to 60 kHz at 0.5
mV/cm.
TYPE G— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns.
TYPE H— DC to 9.5 MHz, 37 ns.
TYPE K— DC to 1 1 MHz, 31 ns.
TYPE L— DC to 1 1 MHz, 31 ns at 0.05 to 40 V/div ... 3 hertz
to 10 MHz, 35 ns at 0.005 to 4 V/div.
TYPE M— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns.
For operations of integration, differentiation, function genera-
tion, and linear or nonlinear amplification —
TYPE O— DC to 10 MHz, 35 ns.
For transducer and strain gage applications —
TYPE Q— Sensitivity 10 microstrain/div, DC to 6 kHz.
For precise amplitude measurements via the slide-back tech-
nique— TYPE W and TYPE Z Units.
ADDITIONAL PLUG-IN UNITS
TYPE T — Must be plugged into horizontal for conventional
operation. Specifications of horizontal-deflection system with
TYPE T Unit:
Calibrated Sweep Range — Twenty-two sweep ranges from 0.2
jus/div to 2s/div.
5X Sweep Magnifier — Increases calibrated sweep range to
0.04 /j.s/div.
Versatile Trigger Selection — Positive or negative slope, exter-
nal or line voltage, AC-coupling or DC-coupling through
triggering circuits.
Amplitude-Level Selection — With preset or manual stability
control.
Automatic Triggering — No trigger control adjustment neces-
sary for trigger signals between 60 Hz and approx 2 MHz.
High-Frequency Sync — Synchronizes with sine-wave signals
in frequency range of 5 MHz to 15 MHz.
Please refer to the description of the Type T Time-Base
Generator for complete characteristics.
TYPE R Plug-In, for transistor risetime measurements, and
TYPE S Plug-In, for diode-recovery measurements, are electri-
cally compatible with the Type 536, but because of the matched
X-Y delay of the instrument (no vertical system delay line) and
its 35-ns amplifier risetime, utility of these plug-ins is severely
restricted.
For Spectrum Analysis —
TYPE U-Series Units— Present Units cover 1-1 0,400 MHz.
For High-Frequency Sampling Applications —
TYPE 1S1 Sampling Unit — 350-ps risetime.
Ferrite bead characteristics at two dif-
ferent temperatures — left at 25° C; right,
at equilibrium temperature due to self
heating. Type 536 with two Type G units,
driving frequency 1 MHz.
High-condition diffused silicon diode char-
acteristics — left, at 60 hertz; right, at 2
MHz. Type 536 with two Type G Units,
horizontal calibration 1 V/div ; vertical cali-
bration lOOmA/div.
63
536
VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
All characteristics of the horizontal deflection systems are
identical to those of the vertical deflection system when identi-
cal Plug-In Units are used. Both main amplifiers have excel-
lent transient response. Following are typical specifications
using the K and G Units. (All specifications are valid provid-
ing amplifiers are not overdriven by input signal.)
TYPE 536 USED WITH TYPE K UNITS
RISETIME— 31 ns. BANDWIDTH— DC to 11 MHz. RELATIVE
PHASE SHIFT— less than 1 degree from DC to 15 MHz.
PHASE-SHIFT BALANCE— obtainable at any frequency to 30
MHz, using the front-panel Amplifier Phasing Control.
TYPE 536 USED WITH TYPE G UNITS
RISETIME— 35 ns. BANDWIDTH— DC to 10 MHz. RELATIVE
PHASE SHIFT— less than one degree to 15 MHz, less than
two degrees to 17 MHz, less than five degrees to 23 MHz.
PHASE-SHIFT BALANCE — obtainable at any frequency to over
25 MHz.
FOLLOWING ARE APPLICABLE TO BOTH K AND G UNITS
USED WITH TYPE 536:
DEFLECTION FACTORS: 0.05 V/div max, 9 calibrated steps
from 0.05 V/div to 20 V/div ; continuously variable adjustment
between steps. DEFLECTION CAPABILITY— five divisions of
deflection can be obtained at 20 MHz without overdriving the
input amplifiers.
MISCELLANEOUS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
A square-wave voltage is available through a front-panel
coaxial connector. Eighteen fixed voltage steps — 0.2, 0.5, 1,
2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 millivolts, 0.2, 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50,
and 100 volts peak to peak are provided. Accuracy is
±3%. Square-wave frequency is approximately 1 kHz.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
A Tektronix cathode-ray tube provides a 10-by-10 division
(3y 8 " x3'/ 8 ") viewing area. Deflection factor is approximately
the same for both horizontal and vertical deflection plates.
Accelerating potential is approx 4 kV. For best results over
the wide sweep range, a P31 phosphor is normally supplied.
BEAM-POSITION INDICATORS
Two pairs of indicator lights show direction of the electron
beam when the spot is not on the screen.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
The vertical and horizontal signals are brought out to front-
panel terminals for external applications. Output signals are
DC-coupled and are nominally one volt per division of
deflection on CRT face.
INTENSITY MODULATION
A front-panel switch selects the desired method of intensity
modulation . . . internal DC-coupled unblanking (for T unit)
or external AC-coupling or DC-coupling to the CRT grid.
The visually perceptible input level is typically 1 V. Positive
20 V signal will provide complete "black to white" un-
blanking.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
The edge-lighted graticule is marked in 10 by 10 divisions
(3% by 3y 8 inches total area), with centerlines marked
every one-fifth of a division. Illumination is controlled by a
front-panel knob.
PROBES
Two low capacitance probes (10-X atten) are supplied with
the instrument. Input capacitance of the Type 536 — Type K
combination with probes is 7 pF, maximum deflection factor
is 0.5 V/cm. Excellent transient response is retained, as the
probes introduce no overshoot or ringing.
POWER REQUIREMENT
Wired for 115 V, 50 to 60 Hz, the electronically-regulated
power supplies permit a line-voltage variation between 103.5
and 126.5 V (115 V ±10%). Changing transformer taps per-
mits operation at 108, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V, regulated
within 10%, each range. The Type 536 draws 625 watts,
typically, with two Type K Units.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13%" wide by 23 7 / 8 " deep. ^^
Net weight is 55 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 76 pounds, '
approx.
TYPE 536, without plug-in units $1085
2— P6006 probe (010-0127-00]; 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00);
1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00]; 1— Graticule (331-0057-00);
1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— Patch cord, BNCto-BNC, 18"
(012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00);
1— Post iack, BNC (012-0092-00]; 2— Instruction Manual (070-0270-00).
RACK-MOUNT ADAPTER.
Order Part Number 040-0281 -00 $45
A cradle mount to adapt the Type 536 Oscilloscope for
rack mounting is available. It consists of a cradle to support
the instrument in any standard 19" relay rack and a mask
to fit around the regular instrument panel. Tektronix blue
vinyl finish. Rack height requirements 17V 2 ".
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
64
DC-to-33 MHz
OSCILLOSCOPES
Type
543B rm543B
45B rm5
cf
f
•
•
i
"-«-'"
&=
All information in color describes the additional capabilities
of the Type 545B and RM545B. Time Base A characteristics
described are the same for the Time Base in the Type 543B/
RM543B.
• UNIFORM-FOCUS 6xl0-cm DISPLAY
• ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
• XI 00 SWEEP MAGNIFIER (543B)
• FULL BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING
• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY (545B)
• ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM
ANALYZER, AND SPECIAL PURPOSE
PLUG-IN UNITS
• 90-ps SAMPLING AND TDR WITH TYPE
1S2 PLUG-IN UNIT
The Type 543B and 545B are versatile laboratory oscillo-
scopes designed for use with all Tektronix 1 -Series and Letter-
series Plug-In Units. The Type 545B and RM545B have many of
j\e features of the Type 543B and also contain an additional
Time base with calibrated sweep delay.
The sweep magnifier of the Type 543B is adjustable in steps
from X2 to XI 00 while the Type 545B contains a single X5
magnifier.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible
through use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 jus/cm to 5 s/cm.
B 2 /is/cm to 1 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2 to X100, extends calibrated sweep
range to 0.02 /is/cm. (543B)
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 1 [xs to 10s.
EXTERNAL INPUT— RC 1 megohm, 55 pF (approx).
Bandwidth: (543B) DC to 500 kHz.
(545B) DC to 350 kHz.
Deflection Factor: (543B) 0.1, 1, lOV/cm plus 10:1 variable.
(545B) at least 0.2 V/cm to 2 V/cm plus
10:1 variable, XI and XI atten.
CRT
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V ±3%; 1-kHz
squarewave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V
(±10% on each range). 600 watts maximum (Type 545B-5
65
543B rm543B
545B rm 545B
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
(Bandwidth specifications at 3-dB down.)
PLUG-IN UNIT
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 33 MHz
10.5 ns
5 mV/cm
DC to 23 MHz
15 ns
^500 /xV/cm
2 Hz to 14 MHz
25 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm
DC to 33 MHz
10.5 ns
20 V/cm
CA Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 24 MHz
15 ns
M Four-Trace
20mV/cm to 10 V/cm | DC to 20 MHz
17 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50 /iV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
5 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
K
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
L
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 3 Hz to 24 MHz
15 ns
For Differential Input Applications
1A7 High-Gain
10/xV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 500 kHz
0.7 /xs
D High-Gain
1 mV/cm
(to 50 mV/cm)
DC to 300 kHz
DC to 2 MHz
E Low-Level
50 juV/cm
(to lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to
20 kHz
20 kHz to 60 kHz
G Wide-Band 1 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
1
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover 1-1 0,500 MHz.
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Lin
Non-Linear Uses
*ar and
O Operational
Amplifier
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
14 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10 ^.strain/div to
10 k /istrain/div
DC to 6 kHz
60 ^.s
For Transistor-R/sefime Checks
R
0.5 mA/cm to
100 m A/cm
12 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
12 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back
W
1 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm
at 1 mV/cm
DC to 23 MHz
DC to 8 MHz
15 ns
44 ns
Z
50 mV/cm to 25 V/cm
DC to 13 MHz
27 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Equiv to
DC to 1 GHz
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
Equiv to
90 ps
500 mV/cm
DC to 3.9 GHz
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
BANDWIDTH with these Plug-in Units extends from DC to
30 MHz, depending on the unit used. Specialized Plug-In Units
adapt the oscilloscopes to strain-gage, operational-amplifier,
multi-channel, and other applications. Dual-Trace DC-to-33 MHz
displays at 50 mV/cm are achieved with either the Type 1A1,
or Type 1A2 Plug-In Units. The Type 1A1 offers 5 mV/cm sensi-
tivity from DC-to-23-MHz.
SIGNAL DELAY permits observation of the leading edge
of the waveform that triggers the sweep.
SIGNAL OUTPUT from the front panel provides 1.2 volts
or more for each centimeter of displayed signal.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Two separate time bases are featured in the Type 545B.
Either time base can be used alone, or Time Base B can
be used to accurately delay the start of Time Base A.
TIME BASE A SWEEP RANGE from 0.1 ps/cm to 5s/cm is
in 24 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within
±3%. Sweep rates are also continuously variable uncalibrated
between steps and to approximately 12s/cm. A front-panel
lamp indicates uncalibrated sweep rates.
TIME BASE B SWEEP RANGE from 2/xs/cm to 1 s/cm is in
18 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within ±3%.
A control for varying the sweep length from 4 to 10 cm allows
maximum duty cycle which allows maximum brightness when -
using delaying sweep and also permits use of Time Base B as
a repetition-rate generator from 0.1 Hz to 40 kHz.
5X SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands the center 2-cm of a
signal displayed on either time base so that it covers a full
10 centimeters. The magnifier can be used to extend the
Time Base A calibrated sweep rate to 20 ns/cm, and the Time
Base B calibrated sweep rate to 0.4/i.s/cm. Sweep accuracy
when using the magnifier is within ±5%.
X2 to XI 00 SWEEP MAGNIFIER (Type 543B/RM543B only)
expands the center portion of a displayed signal so that it
covers a full 10 centimeters. Magnified sweep accuracy is
±5% up to the fastest calibrated rate of 20 ns/cm. An indi-
cator light warns the operator when the maximum calibrated
rate is exceeded.
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic re-
cording of waveforms. The front-panel reset control arms the
sweep to fire on the next received trigger. After firing once,
the sweep is locked out until reset. A lamp indicates when the
time base is ready to fire.
EXTERNAL INPUT provides for horizontal beam deflection
with an external source.
EXTERNAL INPUT— RC 1 megohm, 55 pF (approx).
Bandwidth: (543B) DC to 500 kHz.
(545B) DC to 350 kHz.
Deflection Factor: (543B) 0.1, 1, 10 V/cm plus 10:1 vari-
able.
(545B) at least 0.2 V/cm to 2 V/cm
plus 10:1 variable, XI and XI atten.
FRONT PANEL OUTPUTS include gates from both time
bases (0 to at least +20 volts), sawtooth from Time Base A
(typically to at least +130 volts), and a delayed-trigger
pulse (at least 5 volts).
66
SWEEP DELAY
Highly-accurate time measurements can be made with
the 2 time bases used for sweep delay. Two modes of
delay are available: triggered and conventional.
CALIBRATED DELAY RANGE is continuously variable from
1 ix.s to 10 s, accuracy within 1%. Incremental accuracy of the
Delay-Time Multiplier is 0.2%.
TRIGGERED OPERATION holds off the start of the delayed
sweep until the arrival of the first trigger signal following the
selected delay time. Because the delayed sweep is actually
triggered by the signal under observation, the display is com-
pletely jitter free. A steady display is thus provided for time-
modulated pulses and signals with inherent jitter.
CONVENTIONAL OPERATION holds off the start of the
delayed sweep for the precise amount of the selected delay
time. Any time-modulation or jitter on the signal will be mag-
nified in proportion to the amount of sweep expansion. Time
jitter in the delayed trigger pulse or delayed sweep is less
than one part in 20,000 of maximum available delay time.
WIDE-RANGE MAGNIFICATION is readily accomplished
when Time Base A is operated at a faster rate than Time
Base B. For example, if Time Base A is operating at 1 jus/cm
and Time Base B is operating at 50 /us/cm, the magnification
is 50 times.
TRACE BRIGHTENING indicates the exact portion of the
signal that will appear on the magnified display, and also
the point-in-time relationship of the magnified display to the
original display.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
These instruments use a T5470 CRT which is a new flat-faced
tube with electrostatic focus and deflection, and a helical post
accelerator operated at a 10-kV total potential. A longer
envelope, careful gun design, and a low 5:1 post-to-gun accel-
erating voltage ratio provide several characteristics which con-
tribute directly to the many advanced performance features
achieved in these instruments.
The CRT produces a small 9-mil nominal spot diameter at 2-
/xA beam current [2-fiA provides a bright display under average
ambient light for repetitive signals even at high sweep-rates).
Focus of the spot is very uniform over the full 6x 10-cm viewing
area. In flat-faced electrostatically-focused tubes, the spot size
varies most at the ends of the horizontal axis. In the T5470,
a centered 9-mil spot measures no more than 12 mils at either
end; a change ratio of only 1:1.3 compared with a typical
change of 1:4 in comparable CRT's operated at 10 kV. Even
with 6 cm of vertical scan, high deflection sensitivity is main-
tained, deflection-plate input capacity is low, and linearity and
overall pattern geometry is superior. P31 phosphor is standard.
INTERNAL 6x 10-CM GRATICULE with variable edge-light-
ing provides a no-parallax display for viewing or for photo-
graphic recording. The graticule is marked in centimeter squares
with 2-mm divisions on the vertical and horizontal center lines,
wo special horizontal lines have been added to the graticule
for convenience in making accurate risetime measurements.
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS include trace rotation (a screw-
driver adjustment), intensity, focus, and astigmatism.
543B rm543B
545B rm545B
Small spot size and uniform focus provide fine trace definition
across the entire 6 x 10-cm viewing area. Risetime and falltime
measurements (10 to 90%) are easily made using the dashed
graticule lines. A 30-MHz sine wave (internally triggered) is
displayed.
~
BEAM-POSITION INDICATORS show the direction of the
CRT beam when it is deflected from the center-screen area.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING to the CRT grid assures uni-
form beam current for all sweep speeds and repetition rates
at any setting of the intensity control.
Z-AXIS INPUT through a terminal at the rear of the in-
strument permits external modulation of the CRT cathode. The
input is AC-coupled and requires approx 15 volts, peak to peak
for visible modulation.
TRIGGER
Triggering system is separate but similar for both time
bases. The trigger circuits offer complete manual control,
preset stability, and fully-automatic triggering.
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal, external, or line, either
AC or DC-coupled. The instruments can be externally triggered
from Channel 1 only of the Type 1A1 Dual-Trace Unit.
TRIGGERING LEVEL adjusts to allow sweep triggering at
any selected point on either the rising or falling portion of
the waveform.
STABILITY can be preset at an optimum triggering point
to eliminate further adjustment, and is also used to obtain
free-running displays.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING provides normal triggering on
signals with repetition rates higher than about 50 Hz. With
no trigger signal, or with a lower repetition rate, the trigger
circuit free runs at about 40 Hz and triggers the time base at
this rate, providing a reference trace.
67
543B rm543B
545B rm545B
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
INTERNAL
TRIGGER MODE
TIME BASE A
TIME BASE B
AC
2-mm deflection from 150 Hz to 10 MHz, in-
creasing to 1 cm at 30 MHz. Will trigger
below 150 Hz with increased deflection.
2-mm deflection from 300 Hz to 5 MHz, in-
creasing to 1 cm at 10 MHz. Will trigger
below 300 Hz with increased deflection.
AC LF REJECT
2-mm deflection from 30 kHz to 10 MHz, in-
creasing to 1 cm to 30 MHz. Will trigger
below 30 kHz with increased deflection.
DC
6-mm deflection to 10 MHz.
6-mm deflection to 5 MHz.
AUTOMATIC
5-mm deflection at 150-Hz. With increasing
deflection, to 10 MHz. Will trigger to 50 Hz
with increased deflection.
5-mm deflection from 300 Hz to 5 MHz.
Will trigger to 50 Hz with increased deflec-
tion.
EXTERNAL
AC
0.2 V from 150 Hz to 10 MHz, increasing to
1 V at 30 MHz. Will trigger below 150 Hz
with increased signal.
0.5 V at 300 Hz to 5 MHz, increasing to
1 V at 10 MHz. Will trigger below 300 Hz
with increased signal.
AC LF REJECT
0.2 V from 30 kHz to 10 MHz, increasing to
1 V at 30 MHz. Will trigger below 30 kHz
with increased siqnal.
DC
0.2 V to 10 MHz, increasing to 1 V at 30
MHz.
0.2 V to 5 MHz, increasing to 1 V at 10 MHz.
AUTOMATIC
0.5 V at 150 Hz. With increasing deflection,
to 10 MHz. Will trigger to 50 Hz with in-
creased deflection.
0.5 V at 300 Hz to 5 MHz. Will trigger to
50 Hz with increased signal.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
POWER REQUIREMENT is 115 V, 50 to 60 Hz. Instrument
factory wired for 115 V. The electronically-regulated power
supplies permit a line-voltage variation between 103.5 V and
126.5V (115V ±10%). Changing transformer taps permits
operation at 108, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V, regulated within 10%,
on each range. The Type 543B draws 535 watts, maximum.
5 watts) For other line frequency operation,
please consult your Tektronix field office or representative.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 18 squarewave volt-
ages from 0.2 mV to 100 V in a 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within
±3%. Squarewave frequency is approximately 1 kHz. A
special output, useful in calibrating sampling plug-ins, provides
0.1 V ±3% into 50 Q.
DIMENSIONS are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13%" wide by 23%"
deep. Net weight is approximately 64 pounds, without plug-
in units.
TYPE 543B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units .. $1300
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 Probe (BNC) (01 0-01 27-00); 1—
Power Cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-Wire Adapter (103-0013-00);
1— 50 fi Cable BNC to BNC 18" (012-0076-00); 1— Smoke gray filter
(378-0567-00); 1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (378-0918-00); 1— Patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00), 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana
plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC, (021-0092-00); 2— Instruc-
tion Manual (070-0429-00).
TYPE 545B OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units .. $1550
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 Probe (BNC) (010-0127-00); 1 —
Power Cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-Wire Adapter (103-0013-00);
1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 1— 50 £2 Cable BNC
to BNC, 18" (012-0076-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 2—
Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00);
o Inctrurtion Manual (070-0428-001
RACK-MOUNT OSCILLOSCOPES
The Type RM543B and RM545B are electrically identical to
their cabinet counterparts but are mechanically rearranged to
fit a 19-inch rack. The instrument withdraws from its cabinet
on slide-out tracks and can be tilted and locked in any one of
7 positions. Dimensions are 14" high by 19" wide by 22 3 / 4 "
deep. Net weight is 81 pounds (RM543B) and 85 pounds
(RM545B) without plug-in units.
TYPE RM543B OSCILLOSCOPE, less plug-in units ... $1400
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probe (BNC) (010-0127-00); 1 —
Power Cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 —
50 J2 cable BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0076-00); 1— Smoke gray filter
(378-0567-00); 1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 1— Patch
cord BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana
plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Set
mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction manual (070-0437-00).
TYPE RM545B OSCILLOSCOPE, less plug-in units ... $1650
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 Probe (BNC) (010-0127-00); 1 —
Power Cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-Wire Adapter (103-0013-00);
1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 1— 50 « Cable BNC
to BNC, 18" (012-0076-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 2—
Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-banana plug, 18" 1012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (0120092-00);
Set mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction Manual (070-0438-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
o*
68
DC-to-50 MHz OSCILLOSCOPE Type
with XI 00 MAGNIFIER
544
:m544
UNIFORM-FOCUS 6 x JO-CM DISPLAY
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
WIDE-RANGE SWEEP MAGNIFIER
FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Plug-In Preamplifiers adapt the Type 544 to a wide range
of measurement capabilities. The oscilloscope vertical system
accepts all Tektronix Letter-Series, and 1 -Series Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 (is/m to 5s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, X10, X20, X50, X100 (extends
calibrated sweep rate to lOns/cm).
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-mm deflection.
External: 0.2 V, AC or DC.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to 10 V/cm, DC to 400 kHz. Input
RC, 1 megohm, 55 pF (approx).
CRT
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER, display AREA-6xi0cm.
90 ps SAMPLING AND TDR PLUG-INS accelerating voLTAGE-iokv.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (1 kHz square-
wave), 100 V DC, 5 mA DC, 5 mA 1-kHz squarewave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 108, 115, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V
(±10% on each range), typically 400 watts.
69
544
rm544
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
Bandwidth specifications are at 3-dB down.
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION
PLUG-IN UNIT FACTOR BANDWIDTH RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 50 MHz 7 ns
5 mV/cm
DC to 28 MHz 12.5 ns
^500 iiV/cm
2 Hz to 15 MHz 23 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 50 MHz
7 ns
CA Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 24 MHz
15 ns
M Four-Trace
20mV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
17 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
5mV/cm to 20 mV/cm 2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
K ; 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
L
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 3 Hz to 24 MHz
15 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Differential Input Applications
D High-Gain
1 mV/cm
(to 50 mV/cm)
DC to 300 kHz
(DC to 2 MHz)
0.18 /xs
E Low-Level
50 iiV/cm
(to lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to
20 kHz
(to 60 kHz)
6 /xs
G Wide-Band 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
1A7 High-Gain
10 n V/cm to 10 V/cm DC to 500 kHz
Selectable
Bandwidth
0.7 /«
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover 1-10,500 MHz.
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear and
Non-Linear Uses
O Operational 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm ' DC to 25 MHz 14 ns
Amplifier
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
lOjusfrain/div to DC to 6 kHz 60 fis 1
10 k iistrain/div
For Transistor-Risetime Checks
R 0.5mA/cm to
100 m A/cm
12 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
12 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back
W
1 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
DC-8MHz to
DC-23 MHz
44 ns to
15 ns
z
50mV/cm to 25 V/cm
DC to 13 MHz
27 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Equiv to 1 GHz
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
Equiv to 3.9 GHz
90 ps
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
BANDWIDTH with the Type 1 Al Plug-In Unit is DC to 50 MHz
from 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm, DC to 28 MHz at 5 mV/cm. Letter-
Series Plug-In Units provide response from DC to 30 MHz de-
pending on the unit used. Specialized Letter-Series Units adapt
the Type 544 to strain-gage, operational amplifier, multi-channel,
and other applications.
SIGNAL DELAY permits observation of the leading edge of
the waveform that triggers the sweep.
SIGNAL OUTPUT from the front panel provides approxi-
mately 0.4 V/cm of displayed signal. This AC-coupled signal
output has a risetime capability of 20 ns.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
SWEEP RANGE from 0.1 tis/crn to 5 s/cm is in 24 calibrated
steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within ±2%. Sweep rates
are also continuously variable uncalibrated between steps and
to approximately 12 s/cm. A front-panel lamp indicates uncali-
brated sweep rates.
X2 to XI 00 SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands the center portion
of a displayed signal so that if covers a full 10 centimeters.
Magnified sweep accuracy is within ±5% up to the fastest
calibrated rate of lOns/cm. An indicator light warns the
operator when the maximum calibrated rate is exceeded.
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic record-
ing of waveforms. A front-panel reset control arms the sweep ^^
to fire on the next received trigger. After firing once, the sweep I
is locked out until reset at the front panel, or with a +20-volt
pulse applied through a rear-panel connector. A front-panel
lamp indicates when the time base is ready to fire. It extin-
guishes as soon as the sweep starts.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT provides for horizontal
beam deflection with an external source. Horizontal Amplifier
bandwidth is DC to at least 400 kHz (3-dB down). Deflection
factor is 0.1, 1, or 10 V/cm with step attenuation. Deflection
factor potentiometer is continuously variable over a 10:1 range.
Input RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 55 pF.
FRONT-PANEL OUTPUTS include a +20-V gate having the
same duration as the sweep and a 100-V sawtooth (both volt-
ages are approximate).
TRIGGER
Wide-range trigger circuits allow triggering to beyond 50
MHz. The Trigger signal is selected and processed by a series
of four lever switches.
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal, external, or line. The
internal source can be selected from the oscilloscope vertical
amplifier, or direct from Channel 1 of the Type 1A1 Dual-Trace
Plug-In Unit, or Channel 1 or 2 of Type 1A2. With a Type 1A1
operating in one of its channel-switching modes, the internal
trigger signal can be selected from Channel 1 before switching
occurs, or from the composite signal after the two channels
have been combined. When triggering from Channel 1, the
true time relationship between Channel 1 and 2 signals is dis-
played. With the Type 1A1 Unit, or 1A2, in "Alternate" switch- I
ing mode, triggering internally from Channels 1 and 2 com-
posite signal allows observation of 2 signals which are not
harmonically related.
70
544
rm544
UN/FORM-FOCUS 6 x JO-CM DISPLAY
TRIGGER COUPLING can be direct or AC-coupled. AC Low-
Frequency Reject (approximately 3-dB down at 1.5 kHz) prevents
low-frequency components such as 60-Hz hum from interfering
with stable operation.
TRIGGER MODE selects either Triggered or Automatic
operation. Automatic triggering provides a bright reference
trace (regardless of sweep speed) when no input signal is ap-
plied, or when the trigger-signal repetition rate is less than 20
Hz. Above 20 Hz, the time base can be triggered at the repe-
tition rate of the incoming trigger signal to achieve jitter-free
displays to beyond 50 MHz.
TRIGGER LEVEL adjusts to allow sweep triggering at any
selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the
waveform. A two-position control permits trigger-level selection
between ±2V or ±20 V.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for internal triggering are a mini-
mum of 2 mm of displayed signal, increasing to 1 cm at approxi-
mately 50 MHz (either AC-coupled mode) and 5 mm at DC with
direct coupling. External triggering requires 0.2 V, AC or DC
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
The Tektronix T5470 CRT is a new flat-faced tube with electro-
static focus and deflection, and a helical post accelerator oper-
ated at a 10-kV total potential. A longer envelope, careful gun
design, and a low 5:1 post-to-gun accelerating-voltage ratio
provide several characteristics which contribute directly to the
many advanced performance features achieved in the Type
544 and RM544: 6-cm vertical scan with 50 MHz bandwidth,
lOns/cm maximum sweep rate, bright displays with high reso-
lution and read-out accuracy.
The CRT produces a small 9-mil (nominal) spot diameter at
2 /xA beam current (2 fxA provides a bright display under aver-
age ambient light for repetitive signals even at high sweep
rates). Focus of the spot is very uniform over the full 6xl0-cm
viewing area. In flat-faced electrostatically-focused tubes, the
spot size varies most at the ends of the horizontal axis. In
the T5470, a centered 9-mil spot measures no more than 12
mils at either end; a change ratio of only 1:1.3 compared
yith a typical change of 1:4 in comparable tubes operated
'at lOkV. Even with 6 cm of vertical scan, high deflection sensi-
tivity is maintained, deflection-plate input capacitance is low,
and linearity and overall pattern geometry is superior. P31
phosphor is standard.
INTERNAL 6x10-CM GRATICULE with variable edge-
lighting provides a no-parallax display for viewing or for
photographic recording. The graticule is marked in centimeter
squares with 2-mm divisions on the vertical and horizontal
center lines. Two special horizontal lines have been added
to the graticule for convenience in making accurate risetime
measurements.
FRONT-PANEL CONTROLS include trace rotation (a screw-
driver adjustment), intensity, focus, and astigmatism. Internal
screwdriver adjustments control display geometry and the high-
voltage supply level.
BEAM-POSITION INDICATORS show the direction of the
CRT beam when it is deflected away from the center-screen area.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING to the CRT grid assures uniform
beam current for all sweep speeds and repetition rates at any
setting of the intensity control.
Z-AXIS INPUT, AC-coupled, through terminal at rear of in-
strument, permits external modulation of CRT cathode. Requires
15 V, peak to peak.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 18 squarewave voltages
from 0.2 mV to 100 volts in a 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within
2%. Output resistance is 50 ohms from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. Fre-
quency is approximately 1 kHz. Risetime and falltime is 0.6 /xs
from 0.2 mV to 5 V, and 1.0 /ts from 10 V to 100 V. A 100-volt
DC output is also provided. Reference currents supplied through
the front-panel loop are 5-mA DC and a 5-mA 1 kHz square-
wave. Current probes can be slipped directly over the loop for
calibration.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 115 V, 50 to 60 Hz. Instrument
factory wired for 115 V. The electronically-regulated power
supplies permit a line-voltage variation between 103.5 and
126.5 V (115 V ±10%). Changing transformer taps permits
operation at 108, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V, regulated within 10%,
each range. The Type 544 draws 400 watts, typically. For
other line frequency operation, please consult your Tektronix
field office or representative.
CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13%"
wide by 23 7 / 8 " deep. Net weight is 59 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping
weight is approximately 80 pounds.
RACK-MOUNT MODEL DIMENSIONS are 14" high by 19"
wide by 22 3 / 4 " deep. The Type RM544 is electrically identical
to the Type 544, but mechanically rearranged to fit a standard
19-inch rack. They withdraw from their cabinet on slide-out
tracks and can be tilted and locked in any of 7 positions. Net
weight is 80V 2 pounds. Shipping weight is approximately 109
pounds.
TYPE 544 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units .... $1550
Each instrument includes: 2— P6008 probe (010-0129-00); 1— Plate,
protector, CRT (387-0918-001; 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-001;
1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00]; 1— Smoke gray filter (installed]
(378-0567-00]; 2— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1 —
Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack,
BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0418-00).
TYPE RM544 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1650
Each instrument includes: 2— P6008 probe (010-0129-00); 1— Plate,
protector, CRT (387-0918-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (installed)
(378-0567-00); 2— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1 —
Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack,
BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Set mounting hardware; 2— Instruction Manual
(070-0422-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
71
Type
46 RM54
7m
•J
DC-to-50MHz
OSCILLOSCOPES
rrpt 547 osaiioscopf
IVPt RM546 OSCIUOSCOPt
©
© •
1©
• » #
" ♦>* tP a 'm 4
©
» ^T'-|P T=y '
1
§}fl
m 1
6. |
HOMZONTM DKPIM 1
n
*f
: —
(>*',[» ^ q) 1
l\'lfl
-.^^
» .... ■
-^H ._ o 1
• * j
I • » ir ? 1
■Hte
^"°«>^,.
•* Jr
FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING • CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY Q
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE • AUTOMAT/C D/SPLAY SWITCHING (Type 547)
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER, AND SAMPLING PLUG-INS
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics extremely flexible through
use of all 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 ,.s/cm to 5s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— X2, X5, or XI 0, extends calibrated sweep
to 10 ns/cm.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 0.1 ps to 50 s.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.1 V/cm to 1 V/cm deflection factor, DC
to 500 kHz. Input RC 1 megohm paralleled by 55 pF, (approx).
TRIGGER REQUIREMENT— Internal, 1-cm deflection at 50 MHz.
External, 0.2 V, AC or DC.
CRT
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (1 kHz square-
wave), 100 V DC, 5 mA DC, 5 mA 1-kHz squarewave.
POWER REQUIREMENT— 103.5 to 126.5 V, 510 watts.
The 546 and 547 are essentially identical instruments. Type
547 features AUTOMATIC DISPLAY SWITCHING which provides
general dual-beam performance without the additional cost
of a dual-beam oscilloscope. With appropriate Plug-In units,
both instruments are adaptable to a wide variety of applica-
tions such as WIDE-BAND RESPONSE (up to 50 MHz with
Type 1A1 Plug-In Unit), DIFFERENTIAL INPUT, OPERATIONAL,
TRANSDUCER AND STRAIN-GAGE, and others.
72
AUTOMATIC DISPLAY SWITCHING
featured in the Type 547 and RM547 Oscilloscopes
Electronic switching between 2 wide-range time bases al-
lows an alternate presentation of the same signal at 2 differ-
ent sweep rates. Gallium Arsenide diodes in the switching
circuit provide fast switching between time bases, and insure
that only the desired time base is displayed at one time.
Two different signals can be alternately displayed at the
same or different sweep rates with a dual-trace unit such as
the new Type 1A1 or 1A2. In many applications, this pro-
vides equivalent dual-beam operation without the additional
cost and complexity of a dual-beam oscilloscope. Dual dis-
plays are equal in quality to the finest single presentations.
Also, the full 6xl0-cm screen area can be used to display
signals on either time base. A trace separation control oper-
ates in conjunction with the normal vertical position to allow
full control of dual displays.
546 RM546
547 RM547
HORIZONTAL DISPLAY
X5
SWEEP
MAGNIFIER
Vertical and Horizontal Expansion — same signal applied to
both channels of the Type 1A1 Dual-Trace Unit with inde-
pendent control of sensitivity and sweep rate in each channel.
Dual-Scope Operation — independent control of each signal
with Channel 1 of the Type 1A1 Dual-Trace Unit locked to
Time Base A, and Channel 2 locked to Time Base B.
Calibrated Sweep Delay — alternate presentation of 2 signals
brightened over a selected portion, and the selected portions
expanded to fill 10 cm.
73
546 rm 546
547 RM547
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
(Bandwidth is specified at — 3 dB.)
PLUG-IN UNIT
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
5 mV/cm
;500 /iV/cm
1A2 Dual-Trace 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 50 MHz
DC to 28 MHz
2 Hz to 15 MHz
DC to 50 MHz
CA Dual-Trace 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 24 MHz
M Four-Trace 20 mV/cm to 10 V/cm DC to 20 MHz
7 ns
12.5 ns
23 ns
7 ns
15 ns
17 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 20 MHz
5mV/cm to 20 mV/cm 2 Hz to 12 MHz
~50mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 3 Hz to 24 MHz
18 ns
30 ns
12 ns
12 ns
15 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5 m V/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Differential Input Applications
D High-Gain
E Low-Level
1 mV/cm
(to 50mV/cm)
50 /tV/cm
(to lOmV/cm)
DC to 300 kHz
(DC to 2 MHz)
0.06 Hz to
20 kHz
(to 60 kHz)
0.18 /ts
6 /AS
G Wide-Band 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 20 MHz 18 ns
1A7 High-Gain 10 /x V/cm to 10 V/cm DC to 500 kHz 0.7 /is
Selectable
Bandwidth
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover l-10,500MHz.
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear and
Non-Linear Uses
O Operational
Amplifier
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
14 i
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
10 /xstrain/div to
10 k /tstrain/div
DC to 6 kHz
60 /xs
For Transistor-Risetime Checks
0.5 mA/cm to
100 m A/cm
12 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
12 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back Technique
W
1 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
50mV/cm to 25 V/cm
DC— 8 MHz to
DC— 23 MHz
DC to 13 MHz
44 ns to
15 ns
27 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
1S2
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
Equiv to
DC to 1 GHz
350 ps
Equiv to
DC to 3.9 GHz
90 ps
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
(Bandwidth is specified at — 3 dB)
BANDWIDTH
DC to 50 MHz with Type 1A1 or 1A2 Plug-in Unit. See Plug-
In Chart for other combinations.
DELAY LINE
1 70 ns.
SIGNAL OUT AT FRONT PANEL
0.5 V/cm of displayed signal; risetime 20 ns.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
TIME BASE A
0.1 /is/cm to 5 s/cm; 24 calibrated steps accurate to ±2%,
1-2-5 sequence. Range continuously variable between steps,
uncalibrated. Range extended from 5 to 12 s/cm, uncalibrated.
TIME BASE B
Identical to Time Base A.
SWEEP DELAY
Calibrated Delay Range variable from 0.1 //.s to 50 s. Accu-
racy from 50 /xs to 50 s is within ±1 % of indicated delay ±2
minor dial divisions of Delay-Time Multiplier control. For
delays less than 50 /is, accuracy is the same plus 75-100 ns
(inherent circuit delay). Delay Range extended to 120 s, un-
calibrated. Time jitter in delayed trigger or delayed sweep
less than one part in 20,000.
SWEEP MAGNIFICATION
2, 5, or 10X; accuracy ±5%, extends sweep to lOns/cm.
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION
Locked out after firing until reset at front panel, or with 20 V
at rear. Time Base A and B reset by same switch.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
DC to at least 400 kHz deflection factor 0.1 V/cm or 1 V/cm
with 10X step attenuation. Deflection factor continuously
variable over 10 to 1 range. Input RC: 1 megohm paralleled
with 55 pF (approx).
FRONT PANEL OUTPUTS
+ 20 V gates from both time bases; +100 V sawtooth from
Time Base A; +10 V delayed trigger pulse.
TRIGGER
Separate and identical for both Time Bases. Trigger circuits
respond to beyond 50 MHz.
TRIGGER SOURCE
Internal, external, or line. Internal source selected from oscil-
loscope vertical amplifier, or direct from certain Plug-In Units
such as the Type 1A1 Dual-Trace. Coupling is direct or AC
Features AC Low-Frequency Reject (3-dB down at 1.5 kHz).
TRIGGER MODE
Triggered or Automatic. Latter provides bright reference trace
with no input (or input less than 20 Hz). Above 20 Hz, time
base can be triggered at repetition rate of incoming signal.
Display is jitter-free to beyond 50 MHz.
TRIGGER LEVEL
Adjustable to provide triggering at desired point on input
waveform (rising or falling portion). Switch provides either
±2% or ±20 V trigger-level selection.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal: Minimum of 2 mm of displayed signal; increasing to
1 cm at approx 50 MHz, AC coupled, or 5 mm, DC input,
directly coupled. External: 0.2 V, AC or DC.
74
546 rm 546
547 RM547
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
CRT
Tektronix T5470, flat-faced, electrostatic focus and deflec-
tion. Helical post accelerator. 5:1 post-to-post accelerating-
voltage ratio. 6 cm vertical scan; bright display with high
resolution. 9-mil spot diameter (nominal) at 2 //.A beam cur-
rent provides bright display under average ambient light
even at high sweep rates. Uniform focus over full cm view-
ing area. P31 Phosphor. Centered 9-mil spot expands to
not more than 12 mils at either end (ratio of 1:1.3 as com-
pared to typical change of 1:4 in comparable tubes operated
at 10 kV). Throughout full 6 cm of vertical scan, high deflec-
tion sensitivity is maintained. Deflection-plate input capaci-
tance is low; linearity and over-all pattern geometry is su-
perior.
GRATICULE
Internal, 6x10 cm; no parallax; variable edge-lighting.
Graduated in centimeter squares with 2-mm divisions scribed
on vertical and horizontal center lines. Has two additional
horizontal lines to aid in risetime measurements.
DISPLAY FEATURES
Front-panel controls: trace rotation (screwdriver adjustment),
intensity, focus, astigmatism. Internal screwdriver adjustments
control display geometry and high-voltage supply level.
Beam-position indicators show direction of CRT beam when
off screen. DC-coupled unblanking to CRT grid assures uni-
form beam current for all sweep speeds and repetition rates
at any setting of intensity control. Z-Axis input for external
modulation of CRT beam is AC coupled; requires 15 V, peak
to peak.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Provides 18 squarewave voltages, 0.2 mV to 100 V, ±2%,
1-2-5 sequence. Output Z is 50 ohms, 0.2 mV to 0.2 V. Fre-
quency approx 1 kHz. Risetime and falltime: 0.6 ^.s from 0.2
mV to 5 V, and 1 /xs from 10 V to 100 V. 100-V DC output
also provided. Reference currents supplied through front-panel
loop: 5 mA DC and 5 mA, 1-kHz squarewave.
POWER REQUIREMENT
Wired for 115 V, 50 to 60 Hz, the electrically-regulated
power supplies permit a line-voltage variation between 103.5
and 126.5 V (115 V ±10%). Changing transformer taps per-
mits operation at 108, 122, 216, 230, or 244 V, regulated with-
in 10%, each range. The Type 546/547 draws 510 watts,
typically. For other line frequency operation, please consult
your Tektronix field office or representative.
CABINET MODEL DIMENSIONS
16 7 / 8 " high by 13%" wide by 23 7 / e " deep.
65 3 / 4 lbs; shipping weight approx 85 lbs.
Net weight:
RACK-MOUNT MODEL DIMENSIONS
14" high by 19" wide by 23 3 / 4 " deep. Type RM546 and
RM547 are electrically identical to the Type 546 and 547.
Can be withdrawn from cabinet on slide-out tracks and
tilted and locked in 7 positions. Net weight: 87 lbs, ea. Ship-
ping weight: approx 114 and 116 lbs, respectively.
TYPE 546 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units ... $1750
Each instrument includes: 2— P6008 probes (010-0129-00): 1— Plate,
Protector, CRT (387-0918-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (in-
stalled) (378-0567-00); 3— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-
00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post
jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0367-00).
TYPE 547 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units ... $1875
Each instrument includes: 2— P6008 probes (010-0129-00); 1— Plate,
Protector, CRT (387-0918-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — Smoke gray filter (in-
stalled) (378-0567-00); 3— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-
00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post
jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0398-00).
TYPE RM546 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1850
Each instrument includes: 2— P6008 probes (010-0129-00); 1— Plate,
Protector, CRT (387-0918-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (in-
stalled) (378-0567-00); 3— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-
00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post
jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Set mounting hardware; 2— Instruction
Manual (070-0421-00).
TYPE RM547 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1975
Each instrument includes: 2— P6008 probes (010-0129-00); 1— Plate
Protector, CRT (387-0918-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-
00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — Smoke gray filter (in-
stalled) (378-0567-00); 3— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-
00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091 -00); 1— Post
jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Set mounting hardware; 2— Instruction
Manual (070-0420-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
75
Type
DC-to-30 MHz STORAGE
OSCILLOSCOPE
NEW
• BISTABLE SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE AND CONVENTIONAL DISPLAYS
• AUTOMATIC ERASE SYSTEM
• 5cm/ M s WRITING SPEED
• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
• ACCEPTS LETTER-SERIES AND ISERIES PLUG-IN UNITS
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics extremely flexible through
use of all Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 ps/em to 5 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 0.02 /is/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: less than 2-cm deflection
to 30 MHz. External: less than 3 V to 30 MHz.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 1 /xs to 10 s.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm maximum, DC to 350 kHz.
STORAGE CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 6x10 cm.
SPLIT SCREEN STORAGE— Store on either upper or lower half
of screen with non-storage on other half; store on entire
screen; or non-store on entire screen.
LOCATE ZONE — Locate button permits vertical position finding.
STORAGE TIME— Up to one hour.
ERASE TIME — 150 ms maximum.
WRITING SPEED— 0.5 cm/ju.s. 5 cm/fis with enhancement.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V. Source imped-
ance 50 fi from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V; frequency, 1-kHz squarewave.
Front-panel current loop output, 5 mA DC and 5 mA, 1-kHz
squarewave output.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 104, 115, 127, or 208, 230, and
254 volts, center value (regulation range ±10%), 650 W
(approx) maximum.
The Type 549 is a new instrument that extends the exclusive
Tektronix split-screen and bistable storage features into research
and development applications. The Type 549 offers a high
degree of versatility. It accepts all letter-series and 1 -series plug-
in units covering a multitude of applications including sampling
and spectrum analysis. A wide-band vertical system, plus a
delaying sweep circuit, insures accurate measurements in both
stored and conventional modes of operation.
A new split-screen, bistable CRT offers high contrast displays
coupled with unparalleled writing speeds. Each half of the
6xl0-cm display area can be independently controlled, thus
allowing stored or conventional displays on either the upper or
lower half. A stored display can then be compared simul-
taneously with a conventional display. Or, a test or standard
signal can be stored on one half of the screen, and compared
in detail with successive signals displayed on the other half.
An automatic erase system offers a new convenience to stor-
age oscilloscope users. Through front panel controls, this system
can be directed to automatically erase either one, or both
halves of the display area after a predetermined viewing time.
Automatic circuitry includes a timing circuit which permits
viewing time to be varied from 0.5 seconds to 5 seconds with
AUTO ERASE selected for either PERIODIC or AFTER-SWEEP
operation. Used in conjunction with the SINGLE SWEEP, the^-^
"After-Sweep" erase circuit automatically resets the Single-l i
Sweep circuit at the end of the viewing-time interval.
76
549
AVAILABLE DISPLAYS
With the wide range of sensitivity and bandwidth of the Type
549, several storage and conventional displays are obtainable.
The Type 549, by virtue of a new bistable split-screen storage
CRT capable of unparalleled writing speeds, extends storage-
measuring capability into previously unattainable areas.
SINGLE-TRACE AND MULTI-TRACE
Multi-trace displays are obtained by selecting a Type 1A1,
1A2, CA, or M Amplifier Plug-In Unit. All other 1 -Series and
Letter-Series Plug-In Units will give single-trace displays. Selec-
tion of the Type 1A7, D, E, or G gives differential amplifier
operation, while strain gage and other transducer operations
are available with the Type O Unit.
SAMPLING DISPLAYS
Sampling displays with risetimes in the sub-nanosecond region
are obtained using a Type 1S1 or 1S2 Sampling Unit. The
Type 1S1 is a general-purpose sampler with 1 GHz bandwidth,
delay line and internal triggering. The Type 1S2 is designed
specifically for TDR (time-domain reflectometry) applications,
but offers general-purpose sampling with 3.9 GHz bandwidth
and built-in triggering.
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
Spectral displays are obtained using a Type 1L10, 1L20, or
1L30 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit to cover a frequency
range from 1 MHz to 10.5 GHz.
There are decided advantages in using the storage oscillo-
scope for spectrum analysis. When slow sweep rates are
used, it is often difficult to view a complete display; however,
by storing the display it can be completely and easily
observed.
Signal drift is easily measured using the storage technique.
The signal is stored and then as subsequent displays are
stored, drift of the signal can be observed. Or, the spectral
display can be stored on one half of the screen and simply
compared with a similar non-stored display on the other.
STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
STORAGE CRT
Direct viewing, bistable, split-screen, mono-accelerating with
4-kV accelerating potential and separate non-store "locate
zone". External edge-lighted graticule. Tektronix bistable
storage offers: 1) Brightness of a stored trace independent of
viewing time; 2) Contrast of a stored trace independent of
viewing time; and 3) Brightness of a stored trace independent
of writing speed.
RELATIVE STORED BRIGHTNESS
T5490-202
BRIGHTNESS
PERCENT
00
n
500 1000 1500 2000
HOURS OF OPERATION (STORED MODE)
DISPLAY AREA
6xl0-cm split-screen storage area with independent or com-
mon control, plus locate zone.
SPLIT-SCREEN STORAGE
Store on either upper or lower half of screen with conven-
tional display on other half; store on entire screen; or, non-
store on entire screen. Independent operation of both halves.
STORAGE TIME
Bistable storage yields a stable display for up to one hour.
Where applications require maximum writing speed, viewing
times of 20 minutes or less are recommended.
ENHANCE MODE
Controls the single sweep storage capabilities of the storage
CRT. Through adjustment of ENHANCE LEVEL control, single-
trace spot velocities up to 5 cm//is or better can be stored
with minimal loss of resolution and contrast.
LOCATE BUTTON (Serves two functions)
STORAGE — When depressed, the beam appears at the left
of the CRT screen marking the vertical position of the next
sweep. CONVENTIONAL DISPLAYS— Permits beam finding
of off screen signals.
ERASE TIME
150 ms maximum.
AUTO ERASE SYSTEM
Viewing time before erase continuously variable from 0.5 s
to 5 s (approximately).
In the PERIODIC Mode, there is a continuous sequence of stor-
ing, viewing time and erasure. This sequence occurs regard-
less of whether or not a signal is present and is independent
of the sweep. In the AFTER SWEEP mode — which is used in
conjunction with the SINGLE SWEEP — the sequence of viewing
time and erasure is part of a cycle. This cycle occurs in the
presence of a signal and begins with the arrival of the signal.
The signal initiates a sweep by triggering the Single Sweep
circuitry. Viewing time begins as the sweep ends and is
followed by erasure. Erasure automatically resets the SINGLE
SWEEP readying it for the next signal and thus completes
the cycle. The cycle will automatically repeat itself as long
as a signal is available.
Manual control available through Erase and Reset button or
by Reset position of Single Sweep switch.
REMOTE CONTROL OPERATION
The Type 549 has remote control-operation capabilities using
contact closure. A 9-pin connector, located on the rear panel,
supplies one ground and 7 inputs (plus one spare) that allows
the following functions:
1. Remote erase of upper screen.
2. Remote erase of lower screen.
3. Remote resetting of sweep for single-sweep operation.
4. Remote erase of both halves of the screen and resetting
of the sweep.
5. Remote switching from conventional operation to storage
operation (independently or commonly) of upper or
lower screen halves.
6. Remote interruption of the Auto Erase sequence in order
to hold a stored waveform.
Operation of these circuits is achieved by grounding the
appropriate pin in the connector.
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT
(Optional accessory, part number 012-0102-00). Performs
Remote Erase and Reset functions numbers 1, 2, and 3 above.
77
549
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
(Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.)
PLUG-IN UNIT
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 50 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
15 ns
5 mV/cm DC to 23 MHz
500/xV/cm 2 Hz to 14 MHz
26 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to 50 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
CA Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm
DC to 24 MHz
15ns
50 V/cm
M Four-Trace
20 mV/cm to 25 V/cm DC to 20 MHz
17 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50 mV/cm to 50 V/cm DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
30 ns
5 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm 2 Hz to 12 MHz
K
50 mV/cm to 40 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
L
50 mV/cm to 40 V/cm DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
5 mV/cm to 4 V/cm 3 Hz to 24 MHz
15 ns
For Differential Input Applications
1A7 High-Gain 1 10/iV/cm to lOV/cm DC to 500 kHz
0.7 ps
D High-Gain 1 mV/cm DC to 300 kHz
(to 50 mV/cm) DC to 2 MHz
0.18 /as
E Low-Level 50 /xV/cm 0.06 Hz to 20 kH 2
(to lOmV/cm) {to 60 kHz)
6 /is
G Wide-Band
50mV/cm to 50 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5 mV/cm to 50 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover 1 MHz to 10.5 GHz.
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear
Linear Uses
and Non-
O Operational 50 mV/cm to 50 V/cm DC to 25 MHz
Amplifier
14 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10/xstrain/div to J DC to 6 kHz
10 k /xstrain/div
60 fxs
For Transistor-Risetime Checks
R
0.5 mA/cm to
100 m A/cm
12 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S 0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
12 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back Tec
hnique
W
1 mV/cm to DC-7 MHz to
50 mV/cm DC-23 MHz
50 ns to
15 ns
Z
50mV/cm to 50 V/cm DC to 13 MHz
27 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
DC to 1 GHz
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
DC to 3.9 GHz
90 ps
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Frequency Specifications are at — 3 dB
BANDWIDTH— DC to > 30 MHz*.
RISETIME— <12ns*.
SIGNAL DELAY— 200 ns, approx.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
TIME BASE A
0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm; 24 calibrated steps accurate within
±3%, 1-2-5 sequence. Range continuously variable between
steps, uncalibrated. (Extends to 12s/cm, uncalibrated.)
TIME BASE B
2 /xs/cm to 1 s/cm; 18 calibrated steps accurate within
1-2-5 sequence. No variable time/cm control.
:3%,
500 mV/cm
SWEEP DELAY
Calibrated delay range from 1 ps to 10 s. ACCURACY: from
1 /is to 1 s is ±1 % of TIME BASE B sweep accuracy and ±2
minor dial divisions, plus signal processing time (typically
200 ns depending on signal risetime); within ±3% from 1 s to
10 s. LINEARITY: 0.2% of full scale.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER
X5; accuracy, +2% added to the specified sweep time accu-
racy, extends Time Base A sweep to 20 ns/cm and Time Base
B sweep to 0.4 /xs/cm.
SINGLE SWEEP
Controls Time Base A in "A" position of Horiz Display switch.
Controls Time Base B in "B", "B intensified by A", and "A
dly'd" positions. A three-position switch selects normal, single
sweep, or reset operation. Reset may be accomplished by
the ERASE and RESET button, or by remote control through
remote control connector.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
DC to 350 kHz at minimum deflection factor; 0.2 V/cm in IX
position, or 2 V/cm with 10X attenuation. Continuously vari-
able 10:1 gain control for up to 100X attenuation.
FRONT PANEL OUTPUTS
Gates from both time bases (0 to at least +20 V). Sawtooth
from Time Base A (typically to at least +130 V), and a
delayed trigger pulse (at least +5V). Vertical-Signal-Out
Risetime <1 /is, deflection factor 1 .5 V/displayed cm ±20%,
DC coupled.
TRIGGER
Separate but similar trigger circuits for both time bases. The
trigger circuits offer complete manual control, preset stability,
and fully-automatic triggering.
TRIGGER SOURCE
Internal, external or line, either AC or DC coupled. (The Type
549 can also be internally triggered from Channel 1 only of
the Type 1A1 or 1A2 Dual-Trace Plug-In Units.) COUPLING:
AC, AC Low Frequency Reject, or DC. TRIGGER POLARITY:
zbslope. TRIGGER MODES: Triggered or Automatic. Lattei^^
provides reference trace with no input (or inputs less thar\_
50 Hz). Above 50 Hz, time base automatically triggers at
repetition rate of incoming signal.
♦With Types K, L, 1A1, or 1A2 Plug-In Units.
78
549
■ama
IK!
wmaimn
I ■■«!■■■■«
o cm/ /XS r/\jl or
vkjLC ovvccr
Upper display shows a single shot 625-kHz sinewave stored
in enhanced mode of operation. Sweep rate is I /is/cm.
FAST REPETITIVE DISPLAY
Lower display is a recurrent, 1-MHz squarewave with a
riselime of 20 ns stored without enhancement. Sweep rate
is 0.1 /.is.
(IL20 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit]
At left — Time domain display of sine 2 pulse (used extensively
in TV testing], sweep speed 0.2 /.is/cm.
At right — Frequency domain display of the same pulse.
Sweep speed 5 s/cm, 2-MHz/cm dispersion and logarithmic
vertical display. The feed-through signal at the center of
the main lobe is a "zero" hertz marker.
TRIGGERING LEVEL
Adjustable to allow triggering at desired
waveform (rising or falling portion).
point on input
STABILITY
Can be preset to an optimum triggering point to eliminate
further adjustment. Also used to obtain free-running displays.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
MODE
TIME BASE A
TIME BASE B
1
N
T
E
R
N
A
L
DC
Min 2 mm of deflec-
tion, DC to 10 MHz,
increasing to 2 cm at
30 MHz.
Min 0.2 cm of deflec-
tion, DC to 1 MHz, in-
creasing to 1 cm at 10
MHz.
AC
Same amplitude as DC
300 Hz to 30 MHz.
Same amplitude as DC
300 Hz to 10 MHz.
AC LF REJ
Same amplitude as DC Same amplitude as DC
200 kHz to 30 MHz. 200 kHz to 10 MHz.
AUTOMATIC
Min 2 mm of deflec-
tion, 50 Hz to 10 kHz,
increasing to 2 cm at
1 MHz.
Same as Time Base A
E
X
T
E
R
N
A
L
DC
Min 0.3 V sig, DC to
10 MHz increasing to
3 V at 30 MHz.
Min 0.3 V sig, DC to
1 MHz, increasing to
1.5V at 10MHz.
AC
Same amplitude as DC
300 Hz to 30 MHz.
Same amplitude as DC
300 Hz to 10 MHz.
AC LF REJ
Same amplitude as DC Same amplitude as DC
200 kHz to 30 MHz. 200 kHz to 10 MHz.
AUTOMATIC
Min 0.3 V sig, 50 Hz to
10 kHz, increasing to
3 V at 1MHz.
Same as Time Base A
Z-AXIS INPUT
A CRT grid selector switch on the rear panel allows the CRT
grid to be driven from the internal unblanking signal, or from
an external source, DC coupled. A CRT CATHODE-SELECTOR
switch allows the cathode to be driven from the internal
chopped-blanking signal, or from an external source, AC
coupled.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Squarewave output from 0.2 mV to 100 V, accurate to within
±2%. Source impedance is 50 fi from 0.2 mV to 0.2 V.
Frequency is approx 1 kHz. A 100-V DC-coupled output is
also provided. Reference currents supplied through front-
panel loop: 5-mA DC, and a 5-mA, 1-kHz squarewave output
for current-probe calibration.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Electronically-regulated power supply operates on nominal
voltages of 104, 115, 127, or 208, 230, and 254 V (±10%
regulation range on each range), 50-60 Hz. Appropriate
range selected by rear-panel and internal switches. MAX
POWER CONSUMPTION: -650 W, ^750 VA.
Net weight is 66 lbs.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
17" high by 13" wide by 24" deep.
Shipping weight is 86 lbs, approx.
TYPE 549 OSCILLOSCOPE (without plug-in units) . . $2375
Each instrument includes: 2— P6006 probes (010-0127-00); 1— 3-conduc-
tor power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00);
2— patch cord, BNC-to-banana plugs, red, 17%" (012-0087-00); 1 —
smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 1— adapter, BNC-to-binding post
(103-0033-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0058-00).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
REMOTE CONTROL UNIT (012-0102-00) $25
CONNECTOR 9-pin Amphenol (136-0089-00) $6
MESH CRT FILTER, with graticule cover (378-0572-00) .... $15
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
79
Type
DC-to-27 MHz DUAL-BEAM
OSCILLOSCOPE
TWO VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
DUAL-BEAM CRT
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM
ANALYZER, OR SAMPLING PLUG-INS
The Type 551 uses a Tektronix two-gun cathode-ray tube
with two pairs of vertical-deflection plates. A single pair of
horizontal-deflection plates is common to both electron beams.
The two wide-band main amplifiers in the Type 551 are designed
for Tektronix Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units, providing
a high degree of signal-handling versatility in both channels.
Both electron beams are simultaneously deflected horizontally
at any one of many sweep rates provided by an accurately-
calibrated time base generator.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
2 identical vertical-deflection systems.
Letter-Series, 1 -Series, Spectrum Analyzer and Sampling Plug-
In Units offer a wide selection of vertical-deflection character-
istcis for both beams.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 /xs/cm to 5 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 0.02 ^s/cm.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-mm deflection.
External: 0.2 V to 10 V.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V to 50V/cm ; DC to 400 kHz.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA^txIOcm (each beam), 2-cm overlap.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 kV
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square-
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, O
900 watts maximum.
80
551
-
~ / VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
Bandwidth specifications are at 3 dB down.
CALIBRATED
| DEFLECTION
PLUG-IN UNIT | FACTOR.
BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 27 MHz
13 ns
5 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm
DC to 21 MHz
16.5 ns
~500 iiV/cm
2 Hz to 13 Hz
26 ns
1A2 Dual Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 27 MHz | 13 ns
CA Dual Trace
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 27 MHz
16 ns
M Four Trace
20mV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 19 MHz
18 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 18 MHz 20 ns
5mV/cm to 20mV/cm
2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
K
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
14 ns
L
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
14 ns
5mV/cm to 2 V/cm
2 Hz to 22 MHz
16 ns
For Differential Input Applications
1A7 High-Gain
lOiiV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 500 kHz
0.7 lis
D High-Gain
1 mV/cm (to
50 mV/cm)
DC to 350 kHz
(DC to 2 MHz)
0.1 8 its
E Low-Level
50/xV/cm (to
lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to 20
kHz (20 kHz to
60 kHz)
6 tis
JG Wide-Band
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 18 MHz
20 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover l-10,500MHz.
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear and
Non-Linear Uses.
O Operational
Amplifier
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 22 MHz
16 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10/xstrain/div to 10 k
/astrain/div
DC to 6 kHz
60 /as
For Transistor-Risetime Checks
R
0.5 m A/cm to 100
mA/cm
14 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
14 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back
w
1 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
DC to 8 MHz to
DC to 23 MHz
44 ns to
15 ns
z
50 mV/cm to 25 V/cm
DC to 13 MHz
27 ns
^ High-Frequency Sampling Applications
"isi
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Equiv to
1.0 GHz
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
Equiv to
3.9 GHz
90 ps
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
DC-COUPLED MAIN AMPLIFIERS
Risetime — 14 ns (with K or L Plug-In). Accepts any Letter-
Series or 1 -Series Plug-In Unit.
BALANCED DELAY NETWORK
Signal Delay — 0.2 /xs.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Both electron beams of the Type 551 are deflected by the
same sweep voltage.
SWEEP RANGES
0.1 tis/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps. Accuracy is ±3%.
A vernier control provides a continuous adjustment of sweep
times (uncalibrated) from 0.1 tis/cm to 12s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER
5X magnifier increases sweep time to 0.02 /xs/cm. Accuracy
is ±5%.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
DC-coupled through a front-panel connector. Variable deflec-
tion factor —0.2 V/cm to 50 V/cm. Bandwidth— DC to 400
kHz (approx).
SINGLE SWEEP
A front-panel Reset push button arms the sweep to fire once
on receipt of the next trigger. Sweep is then locked out until
rearmed with reset push button.
UNBLANKING
DC-coupled unblanking to the grid of the CRT assures uniform
bias for all sweep rates.
TRIGGERING
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal: A signal producing 2 mm of deflection.
External: 0.2 V to 10 V.
TRIGGERING FACILITIES
Triggering modes include complete manual control, preset
stability control and fully automatic triggering.
LEVEL AND PRESET STABILITY
Level and stability controls allow triggering at selected ampli-
tude levels on the triggering signal. Preset stability allows
setting circuit to optimum triggering point with stability control
in preset positions — requires no readjustment. Trigger source
can be internal, external or line frequency, either AC or DC
coupled.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING
Range of automatic operation is approximately between 60 Hz
and 2 MHz. In the absence of an input signal the sweep is
automatically triggered at about a 50 Hz rate. This provides
a reference trace on the CRT.
HIGH-FREQUENCY SYNC
Assures a steady display of sinewave signals up to approxi-
mately 30 MHz. Requires a signal large enough to cause 2 cm
of deflection or an external signal of 2 V.
LOW-FREQUENCY REJECT
This position of the triggering mode switch prevents low-fre-
quency components, such as hum, from interfering with trig-
gering.
81
551
Dual-beam operation showing switching functions.
Dual-beam operation with dual-trace plug-in units.
EHSnnm
*/XB*mWMVMW£UMUrMKlMWMMf,
IffilrM
" (Aw*
rjc
m
MISCELLANEOUS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
Squarewave voltage available in 18 fixed voltage steps be-
tween 0.2 mV to 100 V peak to peak. Accuracy is ±3%.
Frequency is approximately 1 kHz.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
5" flat-faced tube with helical post-accelerating anode. 10-kV
accelerating potential. Linear 4x10 cm viewing area, each
beam, with at least 2-cm overlap. P2 phosphor normally
supplied. An opening in the side of the cabinet permits direct
connection to the CRT deflection plates.
FRONT PANEL OUTPUTS
+ Gate Output (-20 V.
Sawtooth hi 50 V.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
Edge-lighted 6 vertical by 10 horizontal divisions with 2 milli-
meter baseline divisions. Lighting controlled by front panel
knob.
BEAM POSITION INDICATORS
Indicator lights show the direction of each electron beam
when it is not on the screen.
PROBES
Four 10X attenuation low-capacitance probes are supplied
with the instrument. Input capacitance of the Type 551 -K
combination with probes is 7 pF. Excellent transient response
is retained, as the probes introduce no overshoot or ringing,
but frequency response is down an additional 1 dB at 25 MHz.
POWER REQUIREMENT
A separate unit supplies power to the Type 551 indicator unit
through an inter-unit cable. Wired for 117 V, 50 to 60 Hz,
the electronically-regulated power supplies permit a line-
voltage variation between 105 and 125 V. Changing trans-
former taps permits operation at 107, 127, 214, 234, or 254 V.
The Type 551 draws 850 watts, typically, with two Type CA
Plug-In Preamplifiers.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions for Indicator Unit are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13V 8 " wide
by 23 7 / 8 " long. Dimensions for the Power Unit are 10%"
high by 13V 2 " wide by 17'/ 2 " long.
Net Indicator Unit weight is 52'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight
is 74 pounds, approx. Net Power Unit weight is 44'/ 4 pounds.
Shipping weight is 52 pounds, approx.
TYPE 551, without plug-in units $1850
Each instrument includes: 4 — P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1 — inter-unit
cable (012-0032-00); 1— power supply for Type 551; 1—3 to 2-wire
adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1—
smoke gray filter .(378-0567-00); 2— patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18"
(012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, BNC-to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00);
1— post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0245-00).
RACK MOUNT ADAPTER
A cradle mount to adapt the Type 551 Oscilloscope and its
power supply for rack mounting is available. It consists of
two cradles and two masks. The cradles, one each for the
indicator and power supply units, support the instruments in
any standard 19" relay rack. The two masks fit around the
regular instrument panels of the two units. Rack height require-
ments; Indicator mask 17 1 //', Power Supply mask 12V 4 ". Tek-
tronix blue vinyl finish.
Order Part Number 040-0279-00 $75.00
SCOPE-MOBILE CARTS
TYPE 202-1 TILT-LOCK CART with storage drawer and locking
front wheels $1 20
TYPE 202-2 TILT-LOCK CART with storage drawer, plug-in unit
carrier, and locking front wheels $1 30
See Catalog accessory pages for complete information.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
82
DC-to-33 MHz DUAL BEAM
OSCILLOSCOPE with sweep delay
Type
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
ACCEPTS AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM ANALYZER,
AND SPECIAL-PURPOSE PLUG-INS
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
DUAL-BEAM DISPLAYS
The Type 555 Oscilloscope is a dual-beam laboratory
instrument for accurate measurements in the DC fo 33 MHz
range. Two complete horizontal-deflection systems and
two independent vertical amplifiers provide for completely
independent deflection of the two beams.
Either of two plug-in time base units can control the
sweep of either or both electron beams. In addition, a
continuously-variable calibrated sweep delay allows expan-
sion of a selected portion of the undelayed sweep for
precise time measurements. Delayed and undelayed
sweeps can be presented simultaneously.
The wide-band main amplifiers in the Type 555 are de-
signed to accept Letter-Series and ISeries Plug-In Units
for a high degree of signal-handling versatility.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICALS
2 identical vertical-deflection systems
Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units offer wide selection of
vertical-deflection characteristics for both beams.
HORIZONTALS
2 independent horizontal-deflection systems
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 /is/cm to 5s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends sweep range to 0.02/is/cm.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 0.1 ps to 50 s.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-cm deflection to 33
MHz.
External: 0.5 V to 10 MHz, 1.5 V
to 33 MHz.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 to 20 V/cm; DC to 350 kHz; 1 meg-
ohm, 47 pF (approx).
CRT
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
DISPLAY AREA— 4x10 cm (each beam), 2-cm overlap.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-kHz square-
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V, or 210 to 250 V, 50
to 60 Hz, 1050 watts maximum.
83
555
VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
(Bandwidth is specified at — 3 dB.)
PLUG-IN UNIT
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 33 MHz
10.5 ns
5 mV/cm
DC to 23 MHz
15 ns
~500 juV/cm
2 Hz to 14 MHz 25 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 33 MHz 10.5 ns
CA Dual-Trace
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 24 MHz 15 ns
M Four-Trace
20mV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz 17 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50/iV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
5 mV/cm to 50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
K
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
L
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
5mV/cm to 2 V/cm
3 Hz to 24 MHz
15 ns
For Differential Input Applications
1A7 High-Gain 1 10^V/cm to lOV/cm
DC to 500 kHz
0.7 /is
D High Gain
1 mV/cm (to
50 mV/cm)
DC to 300 kHz
(DC to 2 MHz)
E Low-Level
50/xV/cm (to
lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to 20
kHz
(20 kHz to 60
kHz)
G Wide-Band
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover 1-1 0,500 MHz
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear and
Non-Linear Uses
O Operational
Amplifier
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
14 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10^-strain/div to 10 k
/tstrain/div
DC to 6 kHz
60 [is
For Transistor-Risefime Checks
R
0.5 m A/cm to 100
mA/cm
12 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and 0.5
V/cm
12 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back
W
1 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
DC to 8 MHz to |44 ns to
DC to 23 MHz 15 ns
z
50 mV/cm to 25 V/cm
DC to 13 MHz 27 ns
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Equiv to
1.0 GHz
350 ps
1S2
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
Equiv to
3.9 GHz
90 ps
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
IDENTICAL MAIN AMPLIFIERS provide 10.5-ns risetime and
DC-to-33MHz (3-dB down) when used with the Type 1A1 or
1A2 Plug-In Units. In addition, any Tektronix Letter-Series or
Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Units can be used in the Type 555
Oscilloscope.
PASSIVE PROBES supplied with the Type 555 reduce loading
on the circuit under test and attenuate the signal by a factor
of 10. Input RC becomes 10 megohms paralleled by approxi-
mately 7pF with Type 555 and Type 1A1 or 1A2 Unit. Excellent
transient response is retained, as the probes introduce no over-
shoot or ringing, but frequency response is down an additional
1 dB at 33 MHz.
SIGNAL DELAY permits observation of the leading edge
of the waveform that triggers the sweep. A 0.2 /is delay is
introduced into each channel by the balanced (push-pull) delay
networks.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
PLUG-IN TIME-BASE UNITS incorporate Miller runup type
sweep generators and inverse feedback in the timing circuits
to assure excellent sweep linearity. The plug-in design of the
Type 21 A and 22A Time-Base Units provides easy access to
all components for ease in maintenance. The Type 22A Time
Base is identical to the Type 21 A Time Base except for addi-
tional sweep-delay capabilities.
SWEEP RANGE from 0.1 /xs/cm to 5 s/cm is in 24 calibrated
steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is typically within 1% of
full scale, and in all cases within 3%. Sweep range is con-
tinuously variable uncalibrated from 0.1 ju.s/cm to 12 s/cm. An
indicator light warns the operator when the sweep is uncali-
brated.
5X SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands the center 2-cm portion of
the normal display to fill 10 cm, and can be used to increase
the calibrated sweep time to 0.02 /.is/cm. Any one-fifth of the
magnified sweep can be displayed. Accuracy is within 5% of
the displayed portion of the magnified sweep.
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic re-
cording of waveforms. A RESET pushbutton arms the sweep to
fire on the next received trigger. After firing once the sweep
is locked out until rearmed by pressing the RESET button. The
READY light indicates when the sweep is armed to fire on the
next received trigger.
AUTOMATIC BASELINE SWEEP MODE provides a bright
reference trace (regardless of sweep speed) when no input signal
is applied, or when the input signal repetition rate is less than
20 Hz. Above 20 Hz, the time base is triggered at the repeti-
tion rate of the incoming trigger signal to achieve jitter-free
displays to beyond 33 MHz.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUTS provide for horizontal
deflection of either beam with an external source. Inputs are
at the rear of the oscilloscope. Horizontal deflection factor
is continuously variable from 0.2 V/cm to approximately 20
V/cm. Bandwidth is DC to 350 kHz at minimum deflection
factor. Input RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately
47 pF.
TRIGGER
TRIGGER LEVEL adjusts to allow sweep triggering at any
selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the
waveform. Main level control operates over a ±10 V range;
fine control adjusts over ±1 V range.
84
555
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal, external, or line, and
can be AC or DC coupled. Internally, either sweep can be
triggered from the upper or lower beam, or directly from either
vertical plug-in unit. The latter permits direct triggering from
a single channel of Types 1A1 and 1A2 Tektronix multi-trace
plug-in units.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENT is 0.5-cm deflection for internal
signals from DC to 5 MHz (approx 20 Hz to 5 MHz using auto-
matic baseline, 2-cm deflection to 33 MHz (using Type 1A1
or 1A2 Plug-In Preamplifier). For external signals, 0.5 V is
required for reliable triggering to 5 MHz and 1.5 V is required
to 33 MHz. When AC-coupled, the low-frequency 3-dB point
is approximately 160 Hz.
SWEEP DELAY
CALIBRATED DELAY RANGE from 0.1 i* to 50 s is
derived from the TIME BASE A Plug-In Unit and can be used to
delay the start of any TIME BASE B sweep. The 24 calibrated
steps are those described for the Type 21 A and 22A Time Base
Units, and are accurate within 3% of panel reading and within
3% of each other. A ten-turn precision potentiometer permits
calibrated delay-time adjustments to any value from 0.1 /is to
50 s with accuracy within 3%. Incremental accuracy of this
control is within 0.2% on all ranges. For extreme accuracy, any
of the calibrated steps can be adjusted to the accuracy of an
external standard.
TRIGGERED OPERATION holds off the start of the delayed
sweep until the arrival of the first trigger signal following the
selected delay time. Because the delayed sweep is actually
triggered by the signal under observation, the display is com-
pletely jitter free. A steady display is thus provided for time-
modulated pulses and signals with inherent jitter.
CONVENTIONAL OPERATION holds off the start of the de-
layed sweep for the precise amount of selected delay time.
Any time-modulation or jitter on the signal will be magnified
in proportion to the amount of sweep expansion.
The time jitter in the delayed trigger or delayed sweep will
not exceed one part in 20,000 of maximum available delay
interval (where this interval is 10 times the Time /cm or Delay-
Time setting).
HIGH SWEEP MAGNIFICATION is readily accomplished
when TIME BASE B is operated at a faster rate than TIME
BASE A. For example, if TIME BASE A is operating at 50 /is/
cm and TIME BASE B is operating at 1 /ts/cm, the magnifica-
tion is 50 times. Both the original and magnified displays can
be viewed simultaneously when the signal is introduced into
both vertical channels, so that both beams are deflected.
TRACE BRIGHTENING indicates the exact portion appearing
on the magnified display, and shows the point-in-time re-
lationship of the magnified display to the original display.
DELAYED TRIGGER used to start the delayed sweep is
available at the front panel, and can be used to trigger exter-
nal equipment at any delay from 0.1 /ts to 50 s. Amplitude
is approximately 5 V.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX DUAL-BEAM CRT is a 5" metalized tube with
separate vertical and horizontal deflection plates for each
beam. Each beam has a linear display area of 4 by 10 cm,
with at least 2-cm overlap. For best results over the wide sweep
range of the Type 555, a P2 phosphor is normally supplied. 10-
kV accelerating potential assures bright displays when using fast
sweeps at low repetition rates, and in single-sweep applica-
tions.
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE is edge lighted
and is marked in 6 vertical and 10 horizontal centimeters.
CRT CONTROLS include separate focus and intensity adjust-
ments for each beam. A screw-driver adjustment is provided
for magnetic alignment of the traces to the graticule.
BEAM POSITION INDICATORS light to show the direction
of each electron beam when it is not on the screen.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE with variable edge lighting is
accurately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing area is 6 by
10 cm. Vertical and horizontal centerlines for each beam are
further marked in 2-mm divisions for convenience in making time
and amplitude measurements.
MULTI-TRACE BLANKING eliminates switching transients
from the display when a multiple-trace plug-in unit is operated
in its chopped mode. The blanking voltage can be applied to
the CRT cathode by means of a switch located at the rear
of the oscilloscope.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 18 squarewave voltages
at the front panel. Peak to peak amplitude from 0.2 mV to 100
V is in 1-2-5 sequence and accurate within 3%. Squarewave
frequency is approximately 1 kHz.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS available at the front panel include
2 positive gates of approximately 20 V, 2 positive-going saw-
tooths of approximately 1 50 V, and a delayed trigger of approx-
imately 5 V.
POWER REQUIREMENT— A separate unit supplies power to
the Type 555 Indicator Unit through an inter-unit cable. Wired
for 117 V, 50 to 60 Hz, the electronically-regulated power sup-
plies permit a line-voltage variation between 105 and 125 V.
Changing transformer taps permits operation at 107, 127, 214,
234, or 254 V. All heaters in the indicator unit and amplifier
heaters in the power supply are regulated for stable operation
and long tube life. The Type 555 draws 1050 watts, maximum.
INDICATOR UNIT is 20V 8 " high by 13V 8 " wide by 24"
deep. Net weight is 66 pounds. Shipping weight is 89 pounds,
approx.
POWER SUPPLY UNIT is 10%"high by 13V 2 " wide by 17V 2 "
deep. Net weight is 50y 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 61
pounds, approx.
TYPE 555, without preamplifier plug-in units .... $2650
Each instrument includes: 1 — Type 21A Time-Base Plug-In Unit; 1 —
Type 22A Time-Base Plug-In Unit; 4— P6006 probe (010-0127-00); 1—
Inter-unit cable (012-0032-00); 1— Power Supply for Type 555; 1 —
Time base extension (013-0013-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-
00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1 — Smoke gray filter
(378-0567-00); 1— Plate, Protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 2— Patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana
plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruc-
tion Manual (070-0403-00).
EXTRA TIME-BASE PLUG-IN UNITS
Net weight of each Type 21 A and Type 22A Time Base Unit
is 474 pounds, shipping weight of each is 6 pounds, approx.
TYPE 21 A TIME-BASE UNIT $275
TYPE 22A TIME-BASE UNIT $285
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
85
Type
DC-to-50 MHz DUAL BEAM
OSCILLOSCOPE WITH SWEEP DELAY
N
E
W
_%. ©
r —
*V W
i i m
J&l _0fe i! SSSk ^__ ^
TYPE 1S1 SAMPLING I
Lt*#*
,..., *'^;-
TYPt BBS DUAL-I
TWO VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
SYSTEMS
ACCEPTS TWO AMPLIFIER, SPECTRUM
ANALYZER, OR SPECIAL PURPOSE
PLUG-INS
OVER 50 DISPLAY MODES
ONE PROBE— DUAL BEAM DISPLAY-
NORMAL OR SINGLE-SWEEP
FULL-BANDWIDTH TRIGGERING
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
—6x TO-cm SCAN PER BEAM
The Type 556 and R556 are dual-beam laboratory instruments
for accurate measurement in the DC to 50 MHz range. Features
include independent vertical and horizontal deflection systems,
trigger severability for cross triggering, and uniform-focus CRT
with 6xl0-cm scan per beam.
Unique display capability allows simultaneous display of one
signal at two different sweep times, using only one probe for
minimum circuit loading.
86
1
rrw Mi_.euw.auGi mug-in n»i *
# #■'■
>>
@v": j)
t
CHANNEL a
___
CHANNtL I
■'
0-
LZiJ
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
2 identical vertical-deflection systems
Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units offer wide selection of
vertical-deflection characteristics for both beams.
HORIZONTAL
2 independent horizontal-deflection systems
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 0.1 ^s/cm to 5s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— XI 0, extends sweep range to lOns/cm.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 0.1 ps to 50 s.
MINIMUM TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS—
Internal: 2 mm deflection (60 Hz to 10 MHz)
1 cm deflection (to 50 MHz).
External: 0.2 V (DC to 10 MHz)
0.4 V (to 50 MHz).
EXTERNAL INPUT— <0.1 V/cm to approx 10V/cm ; DC to
>400kHz.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA — 6 x 10 cm per beam, 4-cm overlap.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 10 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE— Meets MIL-I-6181D, Ra-
diated: 150 kHz to 1 GHz; Conducted: 150 kHz to 25 MHz.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 1 -kHz squarewave; 0.2 mV to
100 V; 100 VDC; 5 mA, 1-kHz squarewave; 5 mA DC.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 90 to 117 V, 100 to 130 V, 180 to
234 V, or 200 to 260 V; 50 to 60 Hz ; approx 840 watts, 1 kVA
(maximums).
N
E
W
VERTICAL-PLUG-IN UNITS
Bandwidth specifications are at 3-dB down.
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION
PLUG-IN UNIT FACTOR BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Wide-Band, Multiple Trace Applications
1A1 Dual-Trace
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 50 MHz
7 ns
5 mV/cm
DC to 28 MHz
12.5 ns
~500 /j.V/cm
2 Hz to 15 MHz
23 ns
1A2 Dual-Trace 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 50 MHz
7 ns
CA Dual-Trace 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 24 MHz
15 ns
M Four-Trace 20 mV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
17 ns
For Wide-Band Applications
B
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
5 mV/cm to 20 mV/cm
2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
K
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12 ns
L
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
12ns
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm 3 Hz to 24 MHz
15ns
For High DC Sensitivity Applications
H Wide-Band
5mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
For Differential Input Applications
D High-Gain
1 mV/cm DC to 300 kHz
(to 50 mV/cm) (DC to 2 MHz)
0.18 /is
E Low-Level 50 pN /cm
(to lOmV/cm)
0.06 Hz to
20 kHz
(to 60 kHz)
6 /as
G Wide-Band , 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
1A7 High-Gain 10/tV/cm to 10 V/cm
DC to 500 kHz
Selectable
0.7 /as
PLUG-IN UNIT
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH
RISETIME
For Integration, Differentiation, Function Generation, Linear and
Non-Linear Uses
O Operational
Amplifier
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
14 ns
For Transducer and Strain Gage Uses
Q
10 iistrain/div to
10 k /istrain/div
DC to 6 kHz
60 /.is
For Transistor-Risetime Checks
R 0.5mA/cm to
100 m A/cm
12 ns
For Diode Recovery Time Measurements
S
0.05 V/cm and
0.5 V/cm
12 ns
For Precise Amplitude Measurements Via Slide-Back
W
1 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
DC to 8 MHz to
DC to 23 MHz
44 ns to
15 ns
Z 50 mV/cm to 25 V/cm
DC to 13 MHz
27 ns
For Spectrum Analysis
1L10, 1L20, 1L30 Units cover l-10,500MHz.
High-Frequency Sampling Applications
1S1
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
Equiv to 350 ps
1.0 GHz
1S2
5 mV/cm to
500 mV/cm
Equiv to 90 ps
3.9GHz_l
87
556
R556
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
2 identical systems
BANDWIDTH
DC to >50MHz at 3-dB down with Type 1A1 or 1A2 Plug-In
Unit. Accepts all other "1" Series and Letter-Series Units.
SIGNAL DELAY
Approx 170-ns delay line requires no tuning.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
2 identical systems
SWEEP RANGE
0.1 fis/cm to 5s/cm in 24 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accuracy within ±3%. Uncalibrated continuous variation
between steps and to approx 12.5s/cm. Warning light indi-
cates uncalibrated setting.
X10 MAGNIFIER
Extends fastest sweep to lOns/cm. Accuracy of magnified
sweep within ±5%.
SWEEP MODES
Time Base A — Normal and Single Sweep.
Time Base B — Normal, B delayed by A, and Single Sweep.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
0.1 /.is to 50 s, continuously variable and calibrated, accuracy
within ±1%. Uncalibrated delay to approx 120s. Incre-
mental delay linearity within ±1% of indicated delay ±2
minor dial divisions on Delay-Time Multiplier (±5 minor divi-
sions from 0.1 /is/cm to 0.5 fis/cm) + <150-ns fixed delay in
system. Short-term jitter <1 part in 20,000 of the available
delay time.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
<0.1 V/cm with X10 Display Mag, <1 V/cm with XI Display
Mag, continuously variable from <0.1 V/cm to approx 10 V/
cm. DC to >400 kHz at 3-dB down. 50-V maximum (DC +
peak AC).
TRIGGER
2 identical systems
TIME BASE A & B TRIGGER SENSITIVITY
TRIGGER
COUPLING
TO 10 MHz
TO 50 MHz
INTERNAL
AC
EXTERNAL
<2-mm display above
60 Hz
<0.2V above 60 Hz
1-cm display
<0.4V
INTERNAL
DC
EXTERNAL
<3.5-mm display
<0.2V
2-cm display
<0.4V
AC HF REJECT
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
<2-mm display from
60 Hz to 60 kHz, 3 cm
at 2 MHz
<0.2V from 60 Hz to
60 kHz, 2 V at 2 MHz
AC LF REJECT
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
<2-mm display above
2.5 kHz
<0.2 V above 2.5 kHz
1-cm display
<0.4V
SOURCES
Internal from left or right vertical amplifier, left or right plug-
in, external, or line. External trigger input RC approx 1 meg-
ohm paralleled by approx 30 pF. 50-V maximum external
input (DC + peak AC). Internal source selectable from the
oscilloscope vertical amplifier, or direct from a single channel
of Type 1A1 and 1A2 Plug-In Units. The latter mode dis-
plays the true time relationship between signals when plug-in
units are in chopped or alternate operation.
MODES
Triggered and Auto Stability. Latter mode free runs sweep
in absence of triggering signal, triggers on signals >20Hz.
TRIGGERING LEVEL
Permits triggering on rising or falling portion of signals >2V
(or >20V with LEVEL knob pulled outward).
DISPLAY LOGIC
UPPER BEAM
Signals from left or right plug-in unit may be displayed with
either A or B Time Base, or an external signal (Ext Horiz In);
triggered from either plug-in unit (single channel or composite
signal), externally or from line.
LOWER BEAM
Signals from right plug-in unit may be displayed with either
Time Base B or an external signal; triggered from either
plug-in unit (single channel or composite signal), externally
or from line.
SIMULTANEOUS DISPLAY CAPABILITIES
UPPER BEAM LOWER BEAM TYPE OF DISPLAY
Plug-in
Unit
Horizontal
Deflection
Plug-in
Unit
Horizontal
Deflection
left
A sweep
right
B sweep
Independent deflec-
tion systems.
right
A sweep
right
B sweep
Same signal at 2 dif-
ferent sweep time/
cm settings, mini-
mizes circuit load-
ing.
left
B sweep
right
B sweep
2 signals, common
sweep time/cm set-
ting.
right
external
right
B sweep
X-Y and Y-T displays.
left
external
right
B sweep
left
A sweep
right
external
right
A sweep
right
external
left
B sweep
right
external
right
B sweep
right
external
left
external
right
external
Dual-beam X-Y dis-
plays.
15 additional single-sweep combinations.
4 additional delay-sweep combinations.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX DUAL-BEAM CRT g-^
5-inch round tube, 8x10 cm display area; >6xl0cm per^
beam with 4-cm overlap. Spot size, focus uniformity and
geometry equivalent to our finest single-beam tubes. Alum-
inized construction, helical post acceleration. P31 phosphor.
88
Kmli
I HI
iBllNH
UHflKlIfl
SINGLE-INPUT DUAL-BEAM DISPLAYS (Above left)
Upper beam shows bursts of 2.5 MHz pulses on Time Base A with
time variation between bursts. This shows up as increasing time-jitter
between the first and successive bursts. The lower beam shows Time
Base B (0.1 fu/cmj delayed by Time Base A and triggered on the
second puke of the last burst to provide a jitter-free expanded display
of the A Sweep intensified zone. The use of only one probe and
one plug-in input simplifies signal connection and provides minimum
loading on the signal source.
SIMULTANEOUS SINGLE-SHOT DISPLAYS (Above right)
Current versus voltage display of a 0.75 ampere, fast-blow fuse
during destructive overload. Both beams are driven by 8 Time Base
(50 /.is/cm) which is delayed by pre-triggered A Time Base to provide
base reference lines before and after the event. The upper beam
shows the current through the fuse at 30 A/cm while the lower beam
shows the corresponding voltage across the fuse at 1 00 V /cm.
IWf
Ttfum
■»■
■nil
■
■
■
■1
ii
i
111
m
■
■
m
u
:
TIME AND FREQUENCY DISPLAYS (Above left]
Upper beam shows the spectral output of a 200-MHz gated oscil-
lator applied as IF leedthrough to a Type 1L20 Spectrum Analyzer;
the calibrated dispersion is 1 MHz/cm. The lower beam shows a
real-time display of the 10-Mz gating pulse (0.5 jxs/cm).
SAMPLING AND REAL-TIME DISPLAYS (Above right)
Upper beam shows a squarewave at 1 /is/cm, as applied to a Type
1A2 Plug-In. The lower beam shows the leading-edge of the some
waveform at 1 ns/cm, as applied to a Type 1S1 Wide-Band Sampling
Plug-In.
INTERNAL GRATICULE
Variable edge lighting. Vertical
marked in 2-mm divisions.
and horizontal centerlines
DISPLAY CONTROLS
Separate intensity, focus and astigmatism controls for each
beam, intensity contrast between A sweep and non-intensified-
B-zone of A sweep, trace rotation (screwdriver adjustment),
and trace separation. BEAM FINDER button functions in both
X-Y systems, indicates direction of off-screen signals.
Z-AXIS INPUT
<-f 15-V peak to peak causes noticeable modulation at nor-
mal intensity. Input R at DC is 1 megohm ±10%.
556
*556
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
ELECTROMAGNETIC INTERFERENCE
Meets interference specifications of MIL-I-6181D over the fol-
lowing frequency ranges: Radiated (with CRT mesh filter in-
stalled) —150 kHz to 1 GHz; conducted (power line) —150 kHz
to 25 MHz.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
0.2 mV to 100 V in 18 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence), accu-
racy within ±2%. 50-fi source resistance from 0.2 mV to
0.2 V. <1.5-yus risetime; 1-kHz ±25% repetition rate; 45%
to 55% duty cycle. 100-V DC output also provided. Front-
panel current loop for 5 mA ±2%, squarewave or DC.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
A Gate: > + 10V, B Gate: > + 10V, Delayed Trigger: >7V,
A Sawtooth: >9V/cm, B Sawtooth: >9V/cm.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
Wired for 100 to 130 V RMS, 50 to 60 Hz source having less
than 2% harmonic distortion. Quick-change transformer taps
allow 4 regulation ranges and do not require soldering. The
following table describes the power source requirements for
the Type 556 and R556. Power consumption: approx 840 W
max and approx 1 kVA max.
<2% HARMONIC
DISTORTION
90 to 117 V RMS
100 to 130 V RMS
180 to 234V RMS
200 to 260 V RMS
>2% HARMONIC
DISTORTION*
127 to 165 V Peak
142 to 183 V Peak
254 to 330 V Peak
284 to 366 V Peak
*Peak V
RMS V
between 1.2 and 1.414
COOLING
Filtered forced-air cooling.
CABINET MODEL
Type 556 is 15" high, 17" wide, 24" long. Net weight is
81 pounds without plug-in units; shipping weight is approx
1 1 1 pounds.
RACK MODEL
Type R556 mounts on tilting slide-out tracks to standard 19"
rack. Dimensions are 14" high, 19" wide, 22%" long. Net
weight is 86 pounds without plug-in units, shipping weight
approx 126 pounds.
TYPE 556 OSCILLOSCOPE $3150
Each instrument includes: 4 — P6008 10X probe (010-0129-00); 1— CRT
mesh filter, installed (378-0572-00); 1— graticule cover (200-0382-00);
18— BNC caps (016-0088-00); 1— clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-
00); 1 — smoke gray light filter (378-0567-00); 1 — 3-conductor power
cord (161-0030-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2— instruc-
tion manual (070-0511-00).
TYPE R556 OSCILLOSCOPE $3250
Each instrument includes: 4 — P6008 10X probe (010-0129-00); 1— CRT
mesh filter, installed (378-0572-00); 1— graticule cover (200-0382-00);
18— BNC caps (016-0088-00); 1— clear CRT protector plate (387-0918-
00); 1 — smoke gray light filter (378-0567-00); 1 — 3-conductor power
cord (161-0030-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— set mount-
ing hardware; 1 — pr mounting tracks (351-0086-00); 2 — instruction
manual (070-0511-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
89
Type
IDE-BAND HIGH-GAIN UNIT
5 mV/cm to
CALIBRATED
20 V/cm
DEFLECTION FACTOR
DC-TO-20MHz BANDWIDTH
The Type B Plug-In Preamplifier meets the requirements of
many wide-band applications. Wide bandwidth, excellent
transient response, DC-coupling, and calibrated deflection fac-
tors are qualities most users require in an oscilloscope vertical
amplifier. The Type B gives all of these qualities to Tektronix
Type 530, 540, 550 and 580* Series Oscilloscopes.
Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to
operate this plug-in unit outside an oscilloscope. See descrip-
tion of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
in 12 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy is ±3%. A
variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment between
ranges and to approx 50 V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC to 50 mV/cm, and
AC only to 5 mV/cm. With AC, the low frequency —3 dB
point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
WEIGHT: Net — 4 pounds. Shipping — 6 pounds, approx.
TYPE B PLUG-IN UNIT $145
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0219-00).
For low-capacitance accessory probes, please see the Catalog
Accessory Pages.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
TRANSIENT RESPONSE
CHARACTERISTICS
TYPE B UNIT
AND
OSCILLOSCOPE
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
BANDWIDTH
(at 3-dB down)
RISETIME
531 A, 533A, 535A
50mV/cm to
20 V/cm
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
5 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 10 MHz
35 ns
536
50mV/cm to
20 V/cm
DC to 10 MHz
35 ns
5 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 9 MHz
40 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B,
544, 545A, 545B,
546, 547, 549, 555,
556, 581 A*, 585A*
50mV/cm to
20V/cm_
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
5 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
551
50mV/cm to
20 V/cm
DC to 18 MHz
20 ns
5 mV/cm to
50 mV/cm
2 Hz to 12 MHz
30 ns
90
DUAL-TRACE DC UNIT Type
DUAL-TRACE VERSATILITY
5 OPERATING MODES
DC-TO-24MHz BANDWIDTH
CMRR 20:1 to 24 MHz
TYPICAL DUAL-TRACE DISPLAY using Chopped Mode of Type CA
Unit. The waveform depicts a display of the response of two ringing
circuits to the same pulse. In this mode, transients as small as 1 ms
can be observed and measured readily.
The Tektronix Type CA Unit contains two identical input
channels. Either channel can be operated separately. The
two channels can be electronically switched, either at a chop-
ped rate of about 100 kHz, or triggered by the oscilloscope
sweep. In addition both channels can be combined at the
output, adding or subtracting according to the settings of the
polarity switches.
When operated A — B or B — A, common-mode rejection
ratio (CMRR) is at least 20 to 1 over the entire bandwidth for
signals up to 1-V amplitude. Rejection can be improved, espe-
cially at low frequencies, by adjusting the vernier attenuator
controls and/or the GAIN ADJ controls. Separate attenuator
controls for each channel permit rejection of a common-mode
signal of a different amplitude.
Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip-
tion of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
(Identical for each Channel)
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy is ±3%. A
variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment between ranges
and to approx 50 V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. With AC, the low
frequency — 3-dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF.
OPERATING MODES are: Channel A only; Channel B only;
Electronic switching at 100-kHz rate (chopped); Electronic switch-
ing on alternate sweeps; Both channels added algebraically
(±A±B).
In chopped operation, successive 5-/xs segments of each chan-
nel are displayed at an approx 100-kHz rate per channel.
Chopped transient blanking is provided, except when Type CA
is used in the Type 536, 551, 581 A, and 585A Oscilloscope.
POLARITY of either channel can be inverted (front-panel
control) for comparisons of signals 180 degrees out of phase,
and for A — B or A -f- B mixing.
WEIGHT: Net — 4 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping — 9 pounds, approx.
TYPE CA PLUG-IN UNIT $260
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0318-00).
TRANSIENT RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
TYPE CA UNIT
AND OSCILLOSCOPE
BANDWIDTH
(at -3dB)
RISETIME
531 A, 533A, 535A
DC to 13.5 MHz
26 ns
536
DC to 10 MHz
35 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B, 544,
545A, 545B, 546, 547, 549,
555, 556, 581 A*. 585A*
DC to 24 MHz
15ns
551
DC to 22 MHz
16 ns
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page
91
Type
HIGH-GAIN DC DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
7 mV/cm TO 50 V/cm
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
CMRR 70,000:7
HIGH DC STABILITY
The Type D equips Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 and 580*
Series Oscilloscopes for work requiring DC-coupling at a deflec-
tion factor of 1 mV/cm. Differential input with high rejection
ratio for in-phase signals permits cancellation of unwanted
or interfering signals.
The Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available
to operate this plug-in unit outside an oscilloscope. See the
description of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 1 mV/cm to 50 V/cm
in 6 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence, and 4 calibrated decade
ranges; accuracy is ±3%. A variable control permits uncali-
brated adjustment between ranges and to approx 125 V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. With AC, the low
frequency — 3 dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
INPUT SELECTOR SWITCH provides for use of either input
separately, or both together differentially, either AC or DC-
coupled.
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT provides a mode of operation as a
differential amplifier whose output is proportional to the dif-
ference between signals applied to input A and input B. The
differential feature is useful in making voltage measurements
between two above-ground points, and for cancelling in-phase
signals such as hum pickup in connecting leads.
COMMON MODE REJECTION RATIO (CMRR) is 10,000-to-l
for in-phase signals up to 20 kHz at all positions of the mV/cm
MULTIPLIER switch. Common-mode signal should not exceed
5 volts at the input grid. Thus, at lOmV/cm and lOOmV/cm,
it should not exceed 50 volts and 500 volts respectively.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
STABILITY is from 2 to 5 mV/h (normal drift).
BANDWIDTH is DC to 300 kHz at 1 mV/cm, increasing to
DC to 2 MHz at 50 mV/cm and greater. (Bandwidth is speci-
fied at — 3dB.) The mV/cm MULTIPLIER switch indicates band-
width for each position.
REGULATED HEATER VOLTAGE is supplied for all electron
tubes in the Type D Unit, derived from the regulated DC volt-
age supplies in the associated oscilloscope.
WEIGHT: Net — 4y 2 pounds. Shipping — 8 pounds, approx.
TYPE D PLUG-IN UNIT $1 70
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0228-00).
VARIABLE ATTENUATION PROBE
The P6023 10X Probe compensates for normal attenuator
differences between two channels. An adjustable potentiometer
compensates the 10:1 attenuation ratio, and two adjustable
capacitors compensate for input capacitances between 20 pF
and 47 pF.
Order Part Number 01 0-01 67-00 $40
For other probes, please refer to the Catalog Accessory pages.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
LOW-LEVEL AC DIFFERENTIAL UNIT Type
!
50[^V/cm to lOmV/cm
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
LOW NOISE
CMRR 50,000:1
SELECTABLE BANDWIDTH
CHARACTERISTICS
The Type E Plug-In Unit provides Tektronix Type 530, 540,
550 and 580* Series Oscilloscopes with a calibrated deflection
factor of 50 /uV/cm for low-level applications. Separate high-
frequency and low-frequency response controls permit restrict-
ing the bandwidth to increase the signal-to-noise ratio.
The Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to
operate this plug-in unit outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip-
tion of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 10^V/cm to 10 mV/
cm in 8 calibrated steps, 1-2-5, sequence; accuracy is ±3%.
A variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment between
ranges and to approx 25 mV/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is AC only, with a low frequency — 3-dB
point of 0.06 Hz.
INPUT RC is 10 megohms paralleled by approx 50 pF for
single-ended applications, and 20 megohms paralleled by
approx 50 pF for differential applications.
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT feature permits measurements in which
the plug-in output is proportional to the difference between
signals applied to the two signal input connections. (A shielded
2-conductor cable and connector are supplied with the instru-
ment.) Differential operation is useful for cancelling in-phase
signals such as hum pickup at the signal source.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO (CMRR) is 50,000-
to-1 for in-phase signals up to 1 kHz with amplitudes of ±2 V
(peak to peak) or less. This figure holds true at all settings of the
MILLIVOLTS/cm control. Input to grid is DC-coupled to pro-
vide good rejection at low frequencies.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
COMBINED NOISE AND HUM is 5 //.V, RMS (maximum) with
input grids grounded at the input connector.
BANDWIDTH (at — 3dB) is 0.06 Hz to 20 kHz at 50 tiV/cm,
increasing to 60 kHz at 0.5 mV/cm and greater. The MILLI-
VOLTS/cm switch indicates bandwidth for each position.
BANDWIDTH CONTROLS permit selection of the high-fre-
quency and low-frequency — 3 dB points. The high-frequency
switch provides 5 steps at 60, 10, and 1 kHz; 250 and 50 Hz.
The low-frequency switch provides 5 steps at 0.06, 0.2, 0.8,
8, and 80 Hz. Restricting the bandwidth to the requirements
of the particular application will provide an increase in the
signal-to-noise ratio.
TRACE RESTORER button provides a means of returning the
trace to its normal position immediately if the trace should be
driven from the screen by a large transient.
WEIGHT: Net — 4'/ 4 pounds. Shipping— 8 pounds, approx.
TYPE
E PLUG-IN UNIT $190
Each instrument includes: 1— 2-conductor cable (012-0022-00); 2-
instruction manual (070-0226-001 .
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
-
93
Type
WIDE-BAND DC DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
700:7 CMRR AT 20 MHz AND 50 mV/cm
50mV/cm TO 20 V /cm
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
DC-TO-20 MHz BANDWIDTH
The Type G Plug-In Unit equips Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550
and 580* Series Oscilloscopes for wideband differential-input
applications. Common-mode rejection is better than 100 to 1
for the entire bandwidth at full gain. Independent step attenua-
tors in each input with 80-dB isolation permit mixing signals
of wide amplitude difference. Either input can be used sep-
arately, INPUT B giving a polarity-inverted display.
Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip-
tion of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE (each input) is from 50 mV/
cm to 20 V/cm in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy
is ±3%. A variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment
between ranges to approx 50 V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC-coupled. With AC,
the low frequency —3 dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X
probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
INPUT SELECTOR SWITCH provides for use of either input
separately, or both together differentially, AC or DC-coupled.
A-B (DIFFERENTIAL) provides a mode of operation as a
differential amplifier whose output is proportional to the dif-
ference between signals applied to input A and input B. This
is useful in making voltage measurements between two above-
ground points, and for cancelling in-phase signals such as
hum pickup in connecting leads or at the signal source. (See
Type 536 for other applications.)
COMMON MODE REJECTION RATIO (CMRR) is better
than 100 to 1 at 20 MHz and 50 mV/cm, and better than 300
to 1 at 60 Hz. Common-mode signal should not exceed 2 volts
(peak to peak) between input grids. At 0.5 V/cm and 5 V/cm,
the input signal should not exceed 20 volts and 200 volts
respectively.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
WEIGHT: Net — 4y 4 pounds. Shipping — 6 pounds approx.
TYPE G PLUG-IN UNIT $190
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0241 -00).
TRANSIENT RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
TYPE G UNIT
AND OSCILLOSCOPE
BANDWIDTH
(at -3dB)
RISETIME
531 A, 533A, 535A
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
536
DC to 10 MHz
35 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B, 544,
545A, 545B, 546, 547, 549,
555, 556, 581 A*, 585A*
DC to 20 MHz
18 ns
551
DC to 18 MHz
20 ns
VARIABLE ATTENUATION PROBE
Type P6023 10X Probe compensates for normal attenuator
differences between two channels. An adjustable potentiom-
eter compensates the 10:1 attenuation ratio, and two adjust-
able capacitors compensate for input capacitances between 20
pF and 47 pF.
Order Part Number 01 0-01 67-00 $40
For other probes, please refer to the Catalog Accessory pages.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
94
WIDE-BAND HIGH-GAIN DC UNIT Type
5mV/cm TO 20 V /cm DC
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
DC-TO-T5MHz BANDWIDTH
The Type H is a wide-band preamplifier with DC coupling
over its full deflection-factor range. It provides a maximum
deflection factor of 5 mV/cm, DC-coupled, in Types 530, 540,
550, and 580* Oscilloscopes, with excellent transient-response
characteristics.
Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the description
of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 5 mV/cm to 20V/cm
in 12 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy ±3%. A
variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment between
ranges and to approx 50 V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. With AC, the low
frequency — 3 dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
WEIGHT: Net — 4 pounds. Shipping — 9 pounds, approx.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
TYPE H PLUG-IN UNIT $1 85
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0272-00).
For probes, please see the Catalog Accessory pages.
TRANSIENT RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
TYPE H UNIT
AND OSCILLOSCOPE
BANDWIDTH
(at -3dB)
RISETIME
531 A, 533A, 535A
DC to 11 MHz
31 ns
536
DC to 9.5 MHz
37 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B, 544,
545A, 545 B, 546, 547, 549,
555, 556, 581 A*, 585A*
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
551
DC to 14 MHz
25 ns
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
■
95
Type
FAST-RISE DC UNIT
DC-TO-30MHz BANDWIDTH
50 mV/cm TO 20 V/cm
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
The Type K Fast-Rise Unit provides Types 540, 550, and 580*
Series Oscilloscopes with calibrated deflection factors at low
input capacitance, taking maximum advantage of the excellent
transient response and wide frequency range of the oscilloscope
vertical-deflection system. The Type K combined with a fast-
rise oscilloscope makes a 12-nanosecond risetime combination,
ideal for applications involving fast-rising waveforms.
Type 127, 132, and 133 Power Supplies are available to
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the description
of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
in 9 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy is ±3%. A
variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment between
ranges and to approx 40 V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. With AC, the low
frequency — 3 dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF.
WEIGHT. Net — 3 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping — 8 pounds approx.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
TYPE K PLUG-IN $145
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0230-00).
For probes, please see the Catalog Accessory pages.
TRANSIENT RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
TYPE K UNIT
AND OSCILLOSCOPE
BANDWIDTH
(at -3dB)
RISETIME
531 A, 533A, 535A
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
536
DC to 1 1 MHz
31 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B, 544,
545A, 545B, 546, 547, 549,
555, 556, 581 A*, 585A*
DC to 30 MHz
12ns
551
DC to 25 MHz
14 ns
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
96
FAST-RISE HIGH-GAIN UNIT Type
5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
DC-TO-30MHz BANDWIDTH
The Type L Fast-Rise High-Gain Unit duplicates the per-
formance of the Type K and offers an extended deflection
factor to 5 mV/cm, AC-coupled. An AC-coupled amplifier pro-
vides a gain of 10X with slightly reduced bandwidth and
increased risetime. When used with Type 530-Series Oscillo-
scopes, the unit has somewhat reduced bandwidth and
increased risetime.
Type 127, 132, and 133 power supplies are available to
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip-
tion of these instruments for details.
CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR RANGE is from 50 mV/cm to 20
V/cm in 9 calibrated steps; accuracy is ±3%. With the addi-
tional amplifier stage switched in, the range is 5 mV/cm to
2 V/cm. A variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment
between ranges.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC to 50 mV/cm, and
AC only to 5 mV/cm. With AC, the low frequency — 3-dB
point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 20 pF.
WEIGHT: Net — 4'/ 2 pounds. Shipping — 8 pounds, approx.
TYPE L PLUG-IN UNIT $210
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0336-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
TRANSIENT RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
TYPE L UNIT
AND DEFLECTION
OSCILLOSCOPE FACTOR
BANDWIDTH
(at 3-dB down)
RISE-
TIME
531 A, 533A, 535A
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm
DC to 15 MHz
3 Hz to 15 MHz
23 ns
23 ns
536
50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm
DC to 1 1 MHz
3 Hz to 10 MHz
31 ns
35 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B,
544, 545A, 545B,
546, 547, 549,
555, 556, 581 A*,
585A*
50mV/cm to 20 V/cm
5 mV/cm to 2 V/cm
DC to 30 MHz
3 Hz to 24 MHz
12 ns
15ns
551
50 mV/cm fo 20 V/cm
5mV/cm to 2 V/cm
DC to 25 MHz
3 Hz to 22 MHz
14 ns
16 ns
*Requires a Type 81 Adapter
For /ow-capaa'fance accessory probes, please see the Catalog
Accessory Pages.
97
Type FOUR-TRACE UNIT
ELECTRONIC SWITCHING
DC TO 20 MHz BANDWIDTH
20mV/cm TO lOV/cm
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
In a Tektronix Oscilloscope that accepts letter-series plug-ins,
the Type M Four-Trace Unit provides four channels for view-
ing one to four signals, separately or in any combination. The
Type M Unit can be used in Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550, or
580*-Series Oscilloscopes. When a Type M Unit is used in a
Tektronix Plug-In Unit Power Supply, such as a Type 127, 132,
or 133, the output can be used to provide most oscilloscopes
with multiple-channel displays at increased gain.
Each of the four channels has identical characteristics.
DEFLECTION FACTOR is from 20 mV/cm to lOV/cm in 9
calibrated steps; accuracy is 3%. A variable control permits
uncalibrated adjustment from 20 mV/cm to 25V/cm.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. With AC, the low
frequency 3-dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
POLARITY of the signal from each channel can be inverted
by a front-panel switch.
OPERATING MODES include: any one of the four channels
separately; Alternate — any combination of two or more chan-
nels switched electronically on alternate sweeps; Chopped — In
chopped operation, successive l-,u.s (approx) segments of each
channel are displayed at an approx rate per channel of: 500
kHz when using two channels; 333 kHz when using three chan-
nels; and 250 kHz when using four channels.
CHANNEL A SIGNAL available at front panel can be con-
nected to oscilloscope external trigger input for stable trigger-
ing in the Chopped or Alternate Mode — enabling display of all
input signals in true time or phase relationship.
MULTI-TRACE TRANSIENT blanking is provided in all Tek-
tronix Oscilloscopes that accept letter-series plug-in units, except
Type 532, 536, 551, 581, 581 A, 585, and 585A.
WEIGHT: Net — 5'/4 pounds. Shipping — 8 pounds, approx.
TYPE M PLUG-IN UNIT $525
Each instrument includes: A — BNC-to-binding post adapters (103-
0033-00}; 1— BNC-fo-BNC, 18" red patch cord (012-0087-00); 1— BNC-
to-banana plug, 1 8" red patch cord (01 2-0091 -00) ; 2— instruction
manual (070-0295-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
TRANSIENT RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
Type M Unit
and
Oscilloscope
Bandwidth
(at 3-dB down)
Risetime
531 A, 533A, 535A,
DC — 14 MHz
25 ns
536
DC — 10 MHz
35 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B, 544,
545A, 545B, 549, 546,
547, 581 A*, 585A*, 555,
556
DC — 20 MHz
17 ns
551
DC — 19 MHz
18 ns
^Requires a Type 81 Adapter
98
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER UNIT Type
TWO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
INTEGRATION, DIFFERENTIATION AND
FUNCTION GENERATION
INTERNAL PRECISION INPUT AND
FEEDBACK COMPONENTS
EXTERNAL INPUT AND
FEEDBACK IMPEDANCE JACKS
Designed for Tektronix Oscilloscopes that accept letter-
series plug-ins, the Type O Operational Amplifier Unit per-
forms precise operations of integration, differentiation, func-
tion generation, linear and nonlinear amplification. The results
can be displayed on the oscilloscope CRT or fed to other cir-
cuitry.
The Type O Unit can be used in any Type 530, 540, 550,
or 580*-Series Oscilloscope. For applications that do not
require the CRT display, the unit can be operated in a Type
127, 132, or 133 Plug-In Power Supply.
DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER
Frequency specifications are at 3-dB down.
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME depend upon the oscilloscope
used. With Type 540, 550, and 580-Series, the bandwidth is
DC to 25 MHz, and the risetime is 14 ns (except Type 551,
DC to 23 MHz, 16 ns). With Type 530-Series, the bandwidth
is DC to 14 MHz and the risetime is 25 ns (except Types 532
and 536).
DEFLECTION FACTOR is 50 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 9 cali-
brated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is within 3%. A variable
control permits continuous adjustment from 50 mV/cm to 50
V/cm (uncalibrated).
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
SWITCHING FACILITIES permit the deflection amplifier
to be used independently or to monitor the output of either
operational amplifier.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
OPEN-LOOP DC GAIN is 2500 minimum. With external in-
put and feedback components, the gain is governed by the
ratio of feedback to input values.
OPEN-LOOP GAIN-BANDWIDTH PRODUCT is 15 MHz or
greater. (Checked at 10 MHz for open-loop gain greater than
1.5.)
CLOSED-LOOP BANDWIDTH is 750 kHz or more at unity
gain with internal input and feedback resistors, and to 10 MHz
with external compensation.
* A Type 81 Adapter is required.
OUTPUT RANGE is ±50 V, ±5mA.
OUTPUT DC LEVEL can be adjusted to ground potential
from front panel.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE is approximately 30 ohms at 1 MHz
for compensated unity-gain amplifier.
NOISE is typically less than 0.5 mV peak to peak (equiva-
lent input noise), approximately 3 mV peak to peak additional
output-noise when R f = 1 megohm.
INPUT IMPEDANCES can be selected from the following: 5
resistance values — 10, 100, 200, 500 kilohms, and 1 megohm;
6 capacitance values from 10 picofarads to 1 microfarad, in
decade steps. All values within ±1%, except for 10 pF and
100 pF values, which are adjustable.
FEEDBACK IMPEDANCES can be selected from the same
range of values as the input impedances.
EXTERNAL COMPONENTS can be used independently or
in combination with the internal resistor-capacitor combinations.
POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE FEEDBACK is possible.
VOLTAGE REJECTION (with 1 kHz squarewave) is at least
300 to 1 between operational amplifiers.
GRID CURRENT is less than 0.5 nanoampere for each input
grid. Can be adjusted to less than 0.3 nanoampere for —grid
and less than 0.15 nanoampere for + grid.
DRIFT is typically less than lOmV/hour, referred to input,
after warmup.
99
o
LOW FREQUENCY REJECTION for repetitive integration is
possible at either 1 Hz or 1 kHz, approximately, and can be
switched in or out as desired.
WEIGHT: Net— 5% pounds.
Shipping — 9 pounds, approx.
TYPE O OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER UNIT $525
Each instrument includes: 2 — terminal adapter assemblies (013-0048-
00); 2— terminal shields (013-0049-00]; 2— BNC to binding-post adapt-
ers (103-0033-00); 2— BNC-to-BNC, 18" red patch cords (012-0087-00);
2— instruction manuals (070-0323-00).
BASIC OPERATING MODES
AMPLIFICATION is determined by the ratio of input to
feedback resistors. This provides convenient signal step-up or
step-down, with low output impedances, to over 750 kHz. Use
of external compensation extends the closed-loop gain-band-
width product to 10 MHz or more.
INTEGRATION is obtained by placing a capacitor in the
feedback loop. Unlike the RC integrator, this circuitry permits
loading of the output, and integration without loss of signal
level. Integration at repetition rates of approximately 5 MHz
is possible. Low-frequency rejection allows drift-free repetitive-
waveform integration.
DIFFERENTIATION is accomplished by placing a capacitor in
the input circuit. The unique characteristic of differentiation is
its ability to extract higher frequency waveform components.
It can advantageously detect minute information such as tran-
sients and slope changes. Differentiation of waveforms with
significant components as high as 1 .5 MHz is possible.
i%; r
*^r ' n
• -
'""1
££>"
*""u
m | 1
m»BB*
>ga*
., >.,r
LOG ADAPTER
The Log Adapter with the Type O Plug-In Unit allows the
display and measurement of high-amplitude signals mixed with
low-amplitude signals. Pulses and transient waveforms differing
in amplitude by up to 1000 to 1 can be displayed and meas-
ured on the same trace.
The Log Adapter is a logarithmic feedback network that
converts the A or B operation amplifier in a Type O Plug-In
Unit from a linear amplifier to essentially a logarithmic ampli-
fier. The adapter can be plugged directly into the jacks on
the front panel of the Type O Plug-In Unit.
Order Part Number 013-0067-00 $75
COMPENSATING ADAPTER
The Compensating Adapter extends the high-frequency per-
formance of either operational amplifier of the Type O Plug-In ^
Unit when the internal Z, and Z f resistors are used in any
combination for either gain or attenuation.
Without the Compensating Adapter, stray capacitance as-
sociated with the internal Z\ and Z f resistors limits the opera-
tional amplifiers high-frequency performance. The adapter can
be plugged into the front panel of the Type O Plug-In Unit.
Order Part Number 013-0081-00 $35
GATING ADAPTER
The Gating Adapter allows repetitive signals with an in-
tegral other than zero to be integrated and displayed using
the Type O Plug-In Unit. Without the Gating Adapter, true
integration of such repetitive signals is impossible since the
integral will accumulate to a voltage beyond the range of
the Type O Plug-In Unit.
The adapter can be plugged directly into the jacks on the
front panel of the Type O Plug-In Unit.
Order Part Number 013-0068-00 $75
LEAKAGE CURRENT ADAPTER
Used with the Type O Plug-In Unit, the Leakage Current
Adapter provides the facility for measuring leakage current
of semiconductor diodes and small signal transistors.
The adapter plugs into the operational jacks located on
the front panel of the Type O Unit. A positive-going saw-
tooth voltage is required for driving the adapter. Tektronix
Oscilloscopes that accept the Type O Plug-In Unit have a Saw-
tooth or Sweep-Out jack conveniently located on the front
panel for supplying the required sawtooth voltage.
Order Part Number 013-0086-00 $85
Please refer to the catalog accessory pages for complete
information on the above adapters.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
100
TRANSDUCER & STRAIN GAGE UNIT Type
HIGH GAIN
LOW NOISE
ESSENTIALLY DRIFT FREE
The Type Q Plug-In Unit permits any Tektronix Type 530,
540, 550, or 580* Series Oscilloscope to be operated with
strain gages and other transducers. Designed to measure any
mechanical quantity that can be converted to a change in
resistance, capacitance, or inductance — through use of a suit-
able transducing device — this versatile unit provides high
gain, low noise, and extremely low drift. Suppressed-carrier
amplitude modulation is produced by unbalancing an AC
bridge with the strain gages or other transducers. Phase-
sensitive demodulation produces the proper deflected-trace
direction.
Requiring no external equipment other than the strain gages
or transducers operated with it and the associated oscillo-
scope, the Tektronix Type Q Plug-In Unit bridges the gap
between mechanical engineering and electronic instrumenta-
tion. Total range of applications is as broad as the mechani-
cal field itself. Applications include stress analysis, vibration
studies, and fatigue tests. Typical quantities that can be meas-
ured with the unit are force, displacement, acceleration, and
strain.
Type 127, 132, and 133 power supplies are available to
operate this plug-in outside an oscilloscope. See the descrip-
tion of these instruments for details.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is 10 /istrain/div to
10,000 fistrain/div (microinches per inch/div) in 10 steps when
used with a single strain gage having a gage factor of approx
2. With four active arms and a gage factor of 2, deflection
factor extends to 2.5 /istrain/div. An uncalibrated control
permits continuous adjustment between ranges and to approx
25,000 |iistrain/div.
ATTENUATOR ACCURACY, when set accurately in any one
step, is within 2% on all other steps.
GAGE FACTORS from 1 to 6 are usable without chang-
ing steps of the ,u,strain/div control. This range of factors is
compensated for by adjusting the Gain Adj Control.
EQUIVALENT DC SENSITIVITY in a comparable DC ampli-
fication system would require a deflection factor of approx
MO/iV/div for the same amount of power applied to the input
bridge.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 6 kHz.
RISETIME is 60 fis (approx).
NOISE is typically equivalent to an input of 1.5/xstrain
(peak to peak) at 10 /xstrain/div deflection factor. This approxi-
mates an RMS noise of 0.5 /xstrain.
DRIFT of the over-all system is primarily a function of the
transducer stability. The Type Q amplification system is essenti-
ally drift free.
INPUT is to an AC bridge with 25-kHz excitation voltage.
One or more of the four bridge arms can have transducers
attached to them. Total bridge voltage is approx 5 V RMS,
regulated.
CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCERS used in conjunction with a
four-arm resistive bridge results in the following maximum
deflection capabilities: 120-ohm bridge (available internally),
1 pF/div; 1000-ohm bridge, 0.2 pF/div; useful deflection capa-
bilities are slightly lower when using long cables.
INDUCTIVE TRANSDUCERS must have characteristics com-
patible with the 25-kHz carrier frequency to function properly.
Linear-variable-differential transformers designed for carrier
frequencies of 2 kHz and higher usually operate satisfactorily
without additional circuitry.
TRANSDUCER CABLE consisting of 3-wire or 4-wire shielded
microphone cable gives the best results.
CAPACITANCE BRIDGE BALANCE has a range of control
that allows compensation for an unbalance of up to 250 pF
across any external resistive arm of the input bridge.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
101
Q
C
A
P
A
Dynamic
plot of
the
C
depletion
- layer
ca-
1
pacitance
of a back-
biased diode.
A
N
c
Pressing force can be
accurately controlled
by using the Type Q
Unit.
VUUA(_7t
IIMt
RESISTANCE BRIDGE BALANCE has sufficient range to
compensate for most standard transducers and strain gages.
GAGE RESISTANCE RANGE is useful with cable lengths
to 100 feet and extends from approx 50 ohms to 2000 ohms.
For optimum performance, the recommended range is between
120 ohms and 500 ohms.
PHASE ADJUSTMENT permits either resistive or reactive
transducer applications to be displayed.
POLARITY INVERSION allows the display to appear normal
or inverted for convenience in reading the display.
CALIBRATE SWITCH connects a calibration resistor across
the strain gage electrically to simulate an external mechani-
cal strain. The calibration resistor supplied with the Type Q
Unit simulates a — 400-/.istrain unbalance of the bridge, suit-
able for most strain gage applications. As with the 120-ohm
internal bridge resistor, the 150-kfi calibration resistor is
mounted on a plug-in receptacle.
To aid in calibration, a nomograph is included in the instruc-
tion manual. This nomograph relates calibration of the sup-
plied resistor to gage factors and strain gage resistances.
To include the gage factor in the calibration, merely increase
or decrease the amplifier gain proportionally.
CAPACITANCE MEASUREMENTS can be read directly in
capacitance from 1 pF/div to lOOOpF/div without using a
correction curve by calibrating the Type Q in capacitance.
Using a correction curve, the range can be extended to ^^
10,000 pF/div. These specifications apply when using the inter- B
nal 120-ohm bridge circuit. With a 1000-ohm external circuit,
the lower limit can be extended to 0.2 pF/div. Please note that
the standard capacitor and test jig are not supplied with the
unit.
WEIGHT: Net — 5 1 /, pounds. Shipping — 8 pounds (approx).
TYPE Q PLUG-IN UNIT $325
Each instrument includes: 1 — 1 20-12 resistor assembly (013-0025-00];
1 — 150-kS2 plug-in resistor board (013-0078-00); 1 — 4-wire 15' shielded
connecting cable (012-0040-001; 2— instruction manual (070-0199-00).
U.S. Sales Price t.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
102
TIME-BASE GENERATOR UNIT Type
WIDE SWEEP RANGE
VERSATILE TRIGGERING
5X MAGNIFIER
The Type T Time-Base Generator Plug-In Unit is intended to
provide sawtooth sweep voltages to drive the horizontal-deflec-
tion system and the unblanking gate for the CRT in the Type
536 Cathode-Ray Oscilloscope. This plug-in can also be used
in the vertical-deflection system of any of the Tektronix Type
530, 540, 550, and 580*-Series Oscilloscopes for some applica-
tions requiring a raster-like display.
CHARACTERISTICS
SWEEP RANGE is from 0.2 /xs/div to 2s/div in 22 calibrated
steps; 1-2-5 sequence. A variable control permits uncalibrated
adjustment between ranges and to approx 6s/div. Accuracy
of fixed steps is within 3%.
5X MAGNIFIER extends calibrated sweep range to 0.04 /is/
div, expanding the center two-division portion of the normal
sweep to fill ten divisions.
TRIGGER FACILITIES include External, Line; Triggering-Level
Selection; AC or DC coupling; AC LF Reject; Automatic or HF
Sync; Stability Preset; zbSlope.
TRIGGERING LEVEL selection permits triggering the sweep
at a selected amplitude on the triggering waveform, either on
the rising or falling slope of the waveform.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING provides stable operation with-
out triggering level control adjustment for most applications.
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
Range of operation is between 60 Hz and 2 MHz approximately.
In the absence of a triggering signal, a reference trace is dis-
played at approx 50 Hz.
HF SYNC assures a stable display of sinewave signals up to
approx 15 MHz. Requires an external signal of about 2 V.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for normal triggering is a signal
of 0.2 V to 10 V.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS include a positive-gate waveform
(approx 20 V) of the same duration as the sweep, and a positive-
going sawtooth (approx 150 V). Both waveforms are available
at front-panel connectors.
WEIGHT: Net — 4% pounds. Shipping — 7 pounds, approx.
TYPE T PLUG-IN UNIT $240
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0337-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
■
103
Type HIGH-GAIN DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR
UP TO 23-MHz BANDWIDTH
20,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION
11,000 cm EFFECTIVE SCREEN HEIGHT
The Type W High-Gain Differential Comparator adds to
the measurement capabilities of all Tektronix Oscilloscopes
using Letter-Series and 1 -Series Plug-In Units. Used with Type
127, 132 or 133 Power Supply, the Type W can drive record-
ing equipment, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, or other indicators.
As a differential input preamplifier, the dynamic range of
the W Unit permits common-mode signals up to ±15 volts in
amplitude to be applied to the amplifier without attenuation.
With a rejection ratio of 20,000 to 1 for DC or low-frequency
signals, signals of 1 mV or less on large common-mode sig-
nals can be measured. A front-panel attenuator permits the
acceptance of common-mode voltages up to 500 V.
As a differential comparator, voltage measurements using
the slide-back technique can be made with this unit. The high
accuracy and stability of the DC comparison voltage added
differentially to the input signal makes precise voltage meas-
urements possible. Using this mode of operation, the W Unit
has an effective screen height of ±11,000 cm. This is equiva-
lent to a ±ll-volt dynamic signal range at a deflection factor
of 1 mV/cm. Within this range, calibrated ±DC comparison
voltages can be added differentially to the input signal to
permit a maximum of about 0.001% or 100/iV per mm to be
resolved.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
1 mV/cm to 50V/cm, depending on millivolts/cm and atten-
uator settings. Accuracy of millivolts/cm positions is ±3%.
Uncalibrated continuous variation between steps and to
approximately 125V/cm.
ATTENUATORS
4 decade steps covering range of 1 to 1,000. XI position
accurate within ±0.05%; X100 within ±0.15%; X1000 within
±3%.
CONVENTIONAL PREAMPLIFIER
OSCILLOSCOPE DEFLECTION RAkiriU/lrY m Lccruar 1
TYpE FACTOR BANDWIDTH RISETIME
531 A ; 535 A
1 mV
50 mV
7 MHz
13.5 MHz
50 ns
26 ns
536
1 mV
50 mV
6.5 MHz
10.5 MHz
54 ns
34 ns
543A; 543B;
544; 545A; 545B;
546; 547; 549; 555;
556; 581 A* ; 585A*
1 mV
50 mV
8 MHz
23 MHz
44 ns
15 ns
551
50 mV
1 mV
20.5 MHz
8 MHz
17 ns
44 ns
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
INPUTS
DC or AC-coupled. Low-frequency response in AC mode is
down no more than 3 dB at 2 Hz. INPUT RESISTANCE is 1
megohm paralleled by 20 pF (except in additional XI attenu-
ation position (R ~ co) where R > 10,000 megohm). Input
resistance of XI and XI attenuators is matched within
±0.1%.
DIFFERENTIAL-INPUT PREAMPLIFIER
COMMON-MODE REJECTION
At least 20,000:1 at DC to 20 kHz with 30-V peak to peak,
DC-coupled. AC COMMON-MODE REJECTION: at least
1000:1 at 60 Hz, with 30-V peak to peak, AC-coupled.
MAXIMUM PEAK INPUT
±15 volts, increasing to ±150 volts with XI attenuation
and +500 volts with X100 or X1000 attenuation.
104
w
CALIBRATED DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR
(0.15% of in-
COMPARISON VOLTAGE
to ±1.1 V, or to ±11 V. Accuracy
dicated value plus 0.05% of Vc range].
Vc SUPPLY RESOLUTION
to ±1.1 V range: 100 //,V per minor dial div ; to ±11 V
range: 1 mV per minor dial div.
MAXIMUM PEAK INPUT
Same as for Differential-Input.
OVERDRIVE RECOVERY
Recovers to within lOmV of reference signal within 300 ns
after the signal returns to the screen. Certain overdrive sig-
nals can cause an additional slow (thermal) shift of up to 5
mV in the reference level.
WEIGHT
Net — 5 pounds, shipping — 7 pounds, approx.
Type W PLUG-IN UNIT $575
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0432-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
HIGH-RESOLUTION VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT
using the slide-back technique
A 150-volt sawtooth waveform is applied and clipped with
a zener diode, shown in Figure J. The knee of the curve is
shown expanded vertically and horizontally in Figures 2 and 3.
This resolution is made possible in the Type W Unit by using
the slide-back technique. Figure 3 clearly shows zener noise.
10X more "vertical magnification", to 1 mV/cm, could be used,
if desired.
_—
Figure I — 50 V /cm, 5ms/cm.
Figure 3— (Single sweep), WmV/cm, 100/ts/cm.
105
Type WIDE-BAND DUAL-TRACE DC UNITS
Here are two wide-band dual-trace plug-in units for Tektronix
Type 530, 540, 550, and 580*-Series Oscilloscopes. Both Types
1A1 and 1A2 provide optimum bandwidth capabilities in the
Type 544, 546, 547, and 556 Oscilloscopes, and also extend
the measurement capabilities of all other Tektronix Oscillo-
scopes that accept Letter-Series Plug-In Units. The Type 1A1
offers these outstanding additional features: 5 mV/cm deflection
factor (DC coupled), and front-panel signal output. This Chan-
nel 1 Output, when cascaded into Channel 2, provides approxi-
mately 500-,uV/cm deflection factor (AC coupled).
+2db
TYPICAL FREQUENCY
RESPONSE
(Mb
2db
\V \\
S \
544
546
547
556
-3db
\
V
-4db
\
\
\
A
\\\
-AHU
■W \
-8db
547A
5436
5456
555
T
w
\
Type
20 ill
J/W or U
m. Type
2 Unit at 50 n
Al Unit at 5n
v/cm to
iv cm.
\\
\
l?rfh
531A
533A
535A
;
2 3 5 10 20 30
Frequency in Megahertz
*Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes require a Type 81 Adapter.
50 70 100
COMMON CHARACTERISTICS
TWO SIGNALS can be added algebraically, displayed
singly, or together, using either chopped or alternate-trace
modes. To extend the usefulness of chopped mode at faster
sweep rates, chopping in the Type 1A1 occurs at an approx 1-
MHz rate to show successive 500-ns segments of each trace.
In the Type 1A2, electronic switching occurs at an approximate
220-kHz rate to show successive 2-^is segments of each trace.
Chopped transient blanking is provided in all Type 530, 540,
and 550-Series Oscilloscopes except Type 536 and 551. When
either plug-in unit is used with the Type 547 or RM547, the
alternate switching circuit in the plug-in can be slaved to the
Display Switching circuit in the oscilloscope, thus locking Chan-
nel 1 to Time Base A and Channel 2 to Time Base B. For many
applications, this provides equivalent dual-beam operation with-
out the additional complexity and cost of a dual-beam oscillo-
scope.
POLARITY INVERSION can be used to closely compare sig-
nals 180° out of phase.
AC OR DC COUPLING or grounding of the input is conven-
iently controlled at the front panel. With AC coupling the low-
frequency — 3-dB point is 2 Hz direct, 0.2 Hz with a 1 OX Probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 1 5 pF.
P6008 10X Passive Probes (included with the Type 544, 546,
547, and 556 Oscilloscopes) increase the input resistance to
10 megohms and decrease the input capacitance to approxi-
mately 7.5 pF.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is 600 volts (DC plus peak AC).
TYPE 1A1
DEFLECTION FACTOR from 5 mV/cm to 20 V/cm is in 12
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%. An
uncalibrated control permits continuous adjustment between
steps and to approximately 50 V/cm.
106
CHANNEL 1 SIGNAL OUTPUT is available at the front panel
with up to 10X amplification. Output is at a source impedance
of ~50 0. The Channel 1 output may be AC coupled into
Channel 2, providing approximately 500-^.V/cm deflection
factor at bandwidths indicated in the chart. A suitable noise
or frequency filter can be inserted between channels, if desired.
Bandwidth of the Channel 1 output alone is DC to 35 MHz.
CHANNEL 1 TRIGGER OUTPUT is available at the front
panel and also at the rear plug-in connector* Triggering
directly from Channel 1 conveniently permits viewing the true
time relationship between two signals when using either alter-
nate or chopped mode.
NET WEIGHT is 5V 2 pounds. Shipping weight is approx-
imately 10 pounds.
TYPE 1A1 DUAL-TRACE PLUG-IN UNIT $600
Each instrument
(012-0076-00); 2-
includes: 1 — 50-S7 mole BNC to male BNC
-instruction manual (070-0378-01).
:able
TYPE 1A2
DEFLECTION FACTOR from 50mV/cm to 20V/cm is in 9
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%. An
uncalibrated control permits continuous adjustment between
steps and to approximately 50V/cm.
TRIGGER OUTPUT is available at the front panel and also
at the rear plug-in connector*. The output can be taken from
either Channel 1 or Channel 2. Triggering directly from one of
the channels conveniently permits viewing the true time rela-
tionship between two signals when using either alternate or
chopped mode.
TYPICAL TRIGGER OUTPUT
Output 2.5
volts
P to P ,.
1 2 4 6
Frequency in Megahertz
*The internal output is utilized in Type 544, 546, 547, 549 and 556 Oscilloscopes.
1A1
1A2
COMMON-MODE REJECTION is at least 20:1 throughout
the full instrument bandwidth for signals up to 0.5 V peak to
peak amplitude (measured at 50 mV/cm with variable attenua-
tor in calibrated position).
NET WEIGHT is 4'/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight is approx-
imately 8 pounds.
TYPE 1A2 DUAL-TRACE PLUG-IN UNIT $325
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0430-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
CLEAN HIGH-FREQUENCY RESPONSE
A significant improvement in built-in step attenuator design
is realized in the Type 1A1 and IA2 Dual-Trace Units. The
severest test of any step attenuator is at its maximum setting
where feed through, lead inductance and inadequate grounding
techniques have the most effect.
Response of the Types 1A2/547 to the output of a Tektronix
Type 109 Pulse Generator (risetime less than 0.25 ns) indicates
no appreciable change between minimum (50mV/cm) and
maximum (20 V /cm) calibrated attenuator settings.
MAXIMUM
ATTENUATION
(20 V/cm),
20 ns/cm
sweep rate.
MINIMUM
ATTENUATION
(50 mV/cm),
20 ns/cm
sweep rate.
GAIN/BANDWIDTH CHARACTERISTICS
OSCILLOSCOPE TYPE
TYPE 1A1 Only
Type 1A1 and 1A2
Single-Channel Bandwidth
and Risetime at 500 /xV/cm
Dual-Channel Bandwidth
and Risetime at 5 mV/cm
Dual-Channel Bandwidth
and Risetime at 50 mV/cm
544, 546, 547, 556
2 Hz to 15 MHz, 23 ns
DC to 28 MHz, 12.5 ns
DC to 50 MHz**, 7 ns
541 A, 543A, 543B, 545A,
545B, 555, 581 A*, 585A*
2 Hz to 14 MHz, 25 ns
DC to 23 MHz, 15 ns
DC to 33 MHz, 10.5 ns
549
2 Hz to 14 MHz, 26 ns
DC to 23 MHz, 1 5 ns
DC to 30 MHz, 1 2 ns
551
2 Hz to 13 MHz, 26 ns
DC to 21 MHz, 16.5 ns
DC to 27 MHz, 13 ns
531 A, 533A, 535A
2 Hz to 10 MHz, 35 ns
DC to 14 MHz, 25 ns
DC to 15 MHz, 23 ns
536
2 Hz to 8 MHz, 44 ns
DC to 10.5 MHz, 33 ns
DC to 11 MHz, 31 ns
♦Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes require a Type 81 Adapter.
••Bandwidth with P6008 10X Passive Probes (included with the Type 544, 546, 547 and 556) is 45 MHz or greater at 3-dB down. Risetime is approximately 8 ns.
107
Type
HIGH-GAIN DC DIFFERENTIAL UNIT
DC TO 500 kHz SELECTABLE
BANDWIDTH
10iiV/cm TO 10 VI cm DEFLECTION
FACTOR
LOW DC DRIFT, LOW NOISE
> 50,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION
300 mV DC DIFFERENTIAL OFFSET
DC-COUPLED FRONT-PANEL SIGNAL
OUTPUT
This general-purpose plug-in unit can be used with any
Tektronix 530, 540, 550, or (with adapter) 580-Series Oscillo-
scope. Used with Type 127, 132 or 133 Power Supply, the
Type 1A7 can drive recording equipment, X-Y plotters, oscillo-
scopes or other indicators. Featuring simplified DC balancing,
high sensitivity, and selectable upper and lower 3-dB points,
the Type 1A7 offers previously unavailable measurement capa-
bilities. Capable of differential measurements with simultaneous
DC offset, the Type 1A7 allows observation of very small dif-
ferential signals which may have a considerable difference in
DC potential. Common-mode rejection is 50,000:1 for signals
up to 20 volts peak to peak, and up to 100 kHz. It can be
adjusted to >310,000:1 for signals from DC to 20 kHz.
The DC to 500 kHz bandwidth is constant from 10/j.V/cm
to lOV/cm. Drift <200/xV/h with ambient temperature and
line voltage constant; <150/iV/°C. Input noise is 3.3-/J.V
RMS, maximum (not including drift). Equivalent to 800-11 short-
circuit noise resistance (wide-band).
DEFLECTION FACTOR
10/iV/cm to lOV/cm in 19 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Uncalibrated continuous variation between steps and to
approx 25 V/cm.
BANDWIDTH
DC to 500 kHz; bandwidth independent of deflection factor.
Selectable high and low-frequency 3-dB points.
HIGH-FREQUENCY 3-dB POINTS
500 kHz, 100 kHz, 30 kHz, 10 kHz, 3 kHz, 1 kHz, 300 Hz and
100 Hz.
LOW-FREQUENCY 3-dB POINTS
DC, 0.1 Hz, 1 Hz, 10Hz, 100Hz, 1 kHz and 10kHz.
DC DRIFT
With time: <200/xV/h, averaged over lOh, with ambient
temperature and line voltage constant. With temperature:
<150fiV/"C
DEFLECTION FACTOR AND DC OFFSET
V/CM
ACCURACY
CALIBRATED
DEFLECTION FACTOR
MAX DC OFFSET
(approx)
2%
10/xV/cm, 20/x.V/cm, and
50 juV/cm
±300 mV
1.5%
100/iV/cm to 10 mV/cm,
in 1-2-5 sequence
±300 mV
2%
20mV/cm, 50mV/cm, and
0.1 V/cm.
±3V
2%
0.2 V/cm, 0.5 V/cm, and
1 V/cm
±30 V
2%
2 V/cm, 5 V/cm and 10
V/cm
±300 V
INPUT NOISE
3.3 /iV, RMS, maximum (not including drift). Equivalent to
800-Q short-circuit noise resistance (wideband).
BALANCE CONTROLS
One front-panel control balances entire instrument. A non-
interacting coarse control provides the proper operating
range of the step attenuator DC BALANCE control. When
instrument amplifier frequency response is limited by the
LOW FREQ 3 dB POINT control, DC drift is eliminated, and
DC balance controls are inoperative.
FRONT-PANEL SIGNAL OUTPUT
34 mV ±10%, per displayed cm. DC-coupled, internally
adjustable to ground reference.
108
1A7
COMMON-MODE
REJECTION RATIOS*
FREQUENCY
REJECTION
RATIO
SINEWAVE
AMPLITUDE
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
DC to 20 kHz
> 31 0,000:1
(110dB)t
<20V P to P
10/xV/cm to
lOmV/cm
DC to 1 00 kHz
> 50,000:1
<20V P to P
10 juV/cm to
lOmV/cm
DC to l kHz
> 5,000:1 1
<200V P to P
20mV/cm to
lOV/cm
I kHz to
I 00 kHz
> 500:1 1
<200V P to P
20mV/cm to
lOV/cm
60 Hz, AC-
coupled at
input
> 2000:1
20 V P to P
10/i.V/cm to
10 mV/cm
200 V P to P
20mV/cm to
lOV/cm
•At 25° C amb
tWith internal
ient, with no
adjustment.
DC offset.
P6023 10X PROBE
' B 1 I
DIFFERENTIAL OVERLOAD LIGHT
When lit, indicates excessive differential drive to input of
amplifier.
INPUT RC
1 megohm, paralleled by 47 pF.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE
200 V, combined DC and peak AC (60 Hz) from 10/xV/cm
to 10 mV/cm. 600 V, combined DC and peak AC (60 Hz) from
20mV/cm to lOV/cm.
INPUT COUPLING
May be switched to AC, GND, or DC. Input coupling capac-
itor is automatically charged to proper voltage through a
1 -megohm resistor when switch is in GND position.
WEIGHT
Net — 4V 2 pounds. Shipping — 9 pounds, approx.
TYPE 1A7 DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER UNIT $425
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0379-00).
The P6023 low-capacitance probe is well suited for use with
most Tektronix differential units.
The probe can be adjusted to match plug-in unit input capac-
itance ranging from 20 pF to 50 pF. The X10 attenuation ratio
is adjustable over a ±2.5% range to compensate for differ-
ences in the input resistance of the plug-in unit. When two
P6023 probes are used to drive the two inputs of a differential
amplifier, the ability to change the attenuation ratio of one
probe versus the other helps to maintain the common-mode
rejection ratio of the system.
ATTENUATION RATIO
10X, adjustable ±2.5%.
INPUT RESISTANCE
8 Ma
INPUT CAPACITANCE
Approximately 1 2 pF when used with an instrument having a
20 pF or 47 pF input capacitance.
PROBE RISETIME
Less than 7 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING
1000 V DC or AC peak to peak.
CABLE
3.5' terminated with a locking BNC connector.
P6023 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0167-00) $40
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverron, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
109
SPECTRUM
Present users of Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 and
(with adapter) 580-Series Oscilloscopes* can now
achieve high-quality spectrum analysis at a fraction of
the cost of other analyzers. A plug-in analyzer and
oscilloscope offer several advantages over ordinary spec-
trum analyzers. The oscilloscope's calibrated time base
and versatile triggering allow direct measurement of
pulse repetition rate and provide stable displays even
in the presence of interference. The oscilloscope also
powers the analyzer, and displays the spectrum on its
CRT. One oscilloscope then serves two functions: oper-
ates in the conventional time-based mode using Letter-
Series or 1 -Series Plug-In Units (or the analyzer's video
input), operates in a frequency-based mode with the
Type 1 LI l-to-36MHz Analyzer, Type 1 L20 10-to-4200
MHz Analyzer or Type 1 L30 925-to-l 0500 MHz Analyzer.
Typically, the Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit selects a
portion of the electromagnetic spectrum — as wide as 100
MHz, for example — and displays visually on the oscillo-
scope CRT all the radio activity occurring there. Within
the portion of the spectrum that concerns you, any sig-
nal, amplitude or frequency modulated, pulsed carriers,
etc. — is displayed as a series of "pips" on the CRT.
CALIBRATED DISPERSION permits detailed study of the
signal, with frequency difference read directly from the
CRT. Signals separated by 1 Hz can be resolved with
the Type 1L10; signals separated by 1 kHz can be
resolved with the Type 1 L20 or 1L30.
The dynamic range capability of the Tektronix Spectrum
♦Type 3L10 l-to-36 MHz Analyzer fits Type 561A and Type 564 Oscilloscopes.
Analyzers is greatly increased by the inclusion of square-
law and logarithmic detection modes as well as a linear
mode. The ability to compress or expand signals greatly
enhances the versatility of these instruments. Signals of
very nearly the same amplitude can be displayed in the
SQUARE-LAW MODE which expands the small difference
to a proportion that facilitates measurements. Conversely,
signals of greatly different amplitude (40 dB, for ex-
ample) can be displayed in the LOG MODE which com-
presses the difference between them. In addition, the
Analyzer's VIDEO INPUT allows conventional time-based
displays from <16Hz to > 10 MHz.
The units manufactured by Tektronix are extremely
sensitive and will give usable displays with inputs lower
than — lOOdBm. This represents a power level of 10~ 13
watts, using the conventional reference level of dBm
= one milliwatt.
The usefulness of Tektronix Spectrum Analyzers extends
into many measurement areas. They are used by Govern-
ment Agencies to check the sidebands of radio-transmitting
devices. Telephone companies find transmission-line carrier
measurements quick and accurate, often providing data
not obtainable by other means. Spectrum Analyzers are
finding increased use in missile projects and the explora-
tion of outer space, especially in association with the main-
tenance and trouble-shooting of telemetry equipment. They m
are indispensable to recently developed techniques of ^^
servicing radar and microwave equipment. You are
encouraged to discuss your measurement and test prob-
lems with your Tektronix Field Engineer or Distributor.
500-Hz
Modulation
of 450-MHz
Signal
Log Defection Mode
200-MHz
Pulsed
RF
Linear Detection Mode
pnnniM Minn
1 Hill
in
ii
nun
■ MM
mi
ii
mm
!!!■»■
in
ii
nun
■linn
in
ii
mmi
Repetition-Rate lines evident at 5 ms/cm
(Note: CW Feedthrouqh)
110
Repetition-Rate measurement at 0.5 ms/cn
ro Dispersii
1-to-36 MHz SPECTRUM ANALYZER Type
• CALIBRATED DISPERSION
• COUPLED RESOLUTION
• CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED SWEPT OSCILLATOR
• IMAGE REJECTION
• RECORDER OUTPUT
• STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAYS
with Type 549 Oscilloscope
l to 36-Mc spectral displays can now be viewed on any
Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 or (with adapter) 580-Series
Oscilloscope. The new Type 549 Oscilloscope adds further
convenience to spectrum analysis — allowing storage and simul-
taneous comparison of spectral displays.
CALIBRATED DISPERSION from lOcps/cm to 2 kc/cm makes
frequency measurement as easy and accurate as time meas-
urement. Frequency differences can be read directly from the
CRT. The SEARCH MODE permits rapid location of signals for
analysis.
COUPLED RESOLUTION from lOcps to l kc greatly simpli-
fies operation, providing narrow resolution bandwidth at nar-
l row dispersion and wide resolution bandwidth at wide dis-
'persion. Dispersion and resolution controls can be uncoupled
and operated separately if desired, for optimized viewing of
a particular signal.
IF stability is achieved through use of CRYSTAL-CON-
TROLLED OSCILLATORS. Even the swept local oscillator is
controlled through a crystal discriminator. An external, front-
end crystal-operated oscillator can be connected through a
front-panel patch arrangement to provide added stability to
spectral displays within or outside the normal l to 36-Mc
range of the Type ILIO.
IMAGE REJECTION is achieved through use of a 60-Mc
first IF amplifier which places images at more than twice
the upper tuning frequency of the Type ILIO.
FREQUENCY RANGE
l to 36 Mc, fine and coarse tuning.
Dial Accuracy within ± (lOOkc + l% of reading).
SENSITIVITY (50 Q INPUT)
— lOOdbm, measured at 2 kc/cm dispersion and l kc (cou-
pled) resolution.
FREQUENCY STABILITY
IF within 2 p/m per °F change, I p/m per I V line change.
LO within 1 50 p/m per °F change, lOp/m per 1 V line
change.
MAXIMUM FM
IF within 5 cps.
LO within 25 cps + 1 cps/Mc dial frequency.
CALIBRATED DISPERSION
0.01 kc/cm to 2 kc/cm, 8 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy within ±3% when adjusted for individual oscillo-
scope, within ±7% without adjustment. Dispersion linearity
within ±5%. Search position (uncalibrated) — minimum 20
kc + 1 kc/Mc dial frequency full scale (10 cm).
COUPLED RESOLUTION
10 cps to 1 kc, coupled with calibrated dispersion positions,
and separately switchable. Search position — approximately
lOkc.
DISPLAY FLATNESS
±1 db.
INPUT IMPEDANCE
Approx 50 Q and approx 600 Q.
MAXIMUM INPUT POWER
-f24dbm at full RF attenuation, — 20dbm without RF atten-
uation.
RF ATTENUATOR
51 db ±0.1 db/db in 1-db steps.
V 2 watt maximum power-handling capability.
IF GAIN CONTROL
>60 db range.
VERTICAL DISPLAY
Log — 50-db dynamic range over 6 cm.
Linear — 26-db dynamic range over 6 cm.
Linear XI — 26-db dynamic range over 6 cm.
Video — lOOmV/cm (variable), < 16 cps to >10Mc, approx
50-Q input resistance.
RECORDER OUTPUT
DC-coupled, approx 600-Q source resistance, 15mV/cm dis-
play in Linear mode, output linear with voltage.
WEIGHT
Net — 6 pounds, shipping — 10 pounds, approx.
TYPE 1L10 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1100
Each instrument includes: 1 — cable assembly, BNC to BNC, 2 T / 2 "
(012-0097-001; 1— cable assembly, BNC to banana plug, 24" {012-
0096-00); 1— tini-plug (134-0052-00); 2— instruction manual (070-
0510-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
111
Type
If
m M
ULTI-BAND SPECTRUM ANALYZERS
TYPE 1L20 covers TO MHz to 4.2 GHz.
Type 1L30 covers 925 MHz to 10.5 GHz
PHASE LOCK
for stability at minimum dispersion
CALIBRATED DISPERSION
from 1 kHz/cm to 10 MHz/cm
COUPLED RESOLUTION
1 kHz to 100 kHz
±1.5 dB DISPLAY FLATNESS
over 100 MHz dispersion
RECORDER OUTPUT
for chart recorders
STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAYS
with Type 549 Oscilloscope
New operating convenience and state-of-the-art performance
is now offered in multi-band plug-in units for all present Tek-
tronix Type 530, 540, 550, or (with adapter) 580-Series Oscil-
loscopes. The new Type 549 Oscilloscope adds further con-
venience to spectrum analysis — allowing storage and simul-
taneous comparison of spectral displays.
BUILT IN PHASE LOCK circuit synchronizes the analyzer
local oscillator with a stable reference frequency (internal
1 MHz or external 1 to 5 MHz). When the local oscillator
is locked in phase to the reference frequency, the local oscil-
lator stability approaches that of the reference frequency.
This allows very narrow dispersion at high frequencies where
the analyzer would normally be limited by oscillator drift,
microphonics, and other perturbations. Phase lock can be used
to view any signal within the tuning range of the analyzer.
CALIBRATED DISPERSION from 1 kHz/cm to 10 MHz/cm
makes frequency measurement as easy and accurate as time
measurement. Frequency differences can be read directly
from the CRT.
COUPLED RESOLUTION from 1 kHz to 100 kHz greatly
simplifies operation, providing narrow resolution bandwidth
at narrow dispersion and wide resolution bandwidth at wide
dispersion. Dispersion and resolution controls can be uncoupled ^^
and operated separately if desired, for optimized viewing of \J
a particular signal.
112
CHARAC-
TERISTICS
BAND
TYPE 1L20
TYPE 1L30
FREQUENCY
RANGE
(MHz)
1
2
3
4
5
10 to 275
275 to 900
850 to 2000
1950 to 3100
3000 to 4200
925 to =2000
=2000 to 4100
4100 to 6250
6200 to 8400
8300 to 10,500
SENSITIVITY
measured at 5
kHz/cm disper-
sion, 1 kHz res-
olution
1
2
3
4
5
— lOOdBm
— llOdBm
— lOOdBm
-95dBm
-90 dBm
-105 dBm
-100 dBm
-95 dBm
-90 dBm
-75 dBm
DIAL ACCURACY
± (2 MHz + 1% of dial reading).
IF CENTER FREQUENCY
+ and — , 5 turn Coarse and a Fine control, ±25 MHz
windowing (from center frequency) from 5 MHz/cm to 0.2
MHz/cm dispersion positions, ±2.5 MHz windowing from
500 kHz/cm to 1 kHz/cm dispersion positions.
CALIBRATED DISPERSION
1 kHz/cm to 10 MHz/cm in 1-2-5 sequence, 2 ranges (kHz/
cm — MHz/cm). Accuracy of 10-cm display, throughout full
range of IF center frequency control, within ±3% except
at 2 MHz/cm (±5%) and 1 MHz/cm (±7%). Accuracy
can be increased using internal 1-MHz crystal markers for
calibration. Dispersion linearity within ±3%. Zero disper-
sion useful for PRF measurements.
COUPLED RESOLUTION
1 kHz to 100 kHz, coupled with calibrated dispersion posi-
tions but separately switchable.
DISPLAY FLATNESS
±1.5 dB over 100-MHz dispersion, except over ±25 MHz
for Band 1 of Type 1 L20.
INCIDENTAL FM
Less than 300 Hz at fundamental, with Phase Lock.
1L20
1L30
FREQUENCY STABILITY
kHz/cm dispersion range — ±10 kHz from 103.5 to 126.5 VAC
after 1 minute; ±5kHz/°C. MHz/cm dispersion range —
±200 kHz from 103.5 to 126.5 VAC after 1 minute; ±20 kHz/
°C. 1 MHz internal markers— 0.01 % (100Hz).
PHASE LOCK
Internal 1-MHz reference accurate within 0.01%. External
input accepts 1-MHz to 5-MHz signals from 1 V to 5 V peak
to peak.
INPUT IMPEDANCE
Approx 50 Q.
MAXIMUM INPUT POWER
—30 dBm for linear operation.
IF ATTENUATOR
51 dB in 1-dB steps, ±0.1 dB/dB.
IF GAIN CONTROL
>50dB range.
VERTICAL DISPLAY (6 CM)
Log — >40-dB dynamic range.
Linear — >26-dB dynamic range.
Square Law — >13-dB total dynamic range.
Video — <16Hz to >10MHz, approx 50-Q input resistance.
RECORDER OUTPUT
1.5mV/cm in Linear Display,
source resistance.
DC-coupled, approx 600-f>
+ 10V DC OUTPUT
Provides external accessory power, +10 V ±5%, 20 mA
maximum.
WEIGHT
Net weight approx 7V 2 pounds for Type 1 L20, approx 7
pounds for Type 1L30. Snipping weight approx 11 pounds
each.
TYPE 1L20 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1825
Each instrument includes: 1— patch cord, BNC to banana (01 2-0091 -
00); 1— protector plug (134-0076-00); 1— tini-plug (134-0052-00); 2—
instruction manual (070-0519-00).
TYPE 1L30 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1825
Each instrument includes: 1 — patch cord, BNC to banana (012-0091-
00); 1— protector plug (134-0076-00); 1— tini-plug (134-0052-00); 2—
instruction manual (070-0520-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
113
Type
WIDE-BAND SAMPLING UNIT
INTERNAL TRIGGERING
INTERNAL DELAY LINE
DIRECT-READING MAGNIFIER
LOW DISPLAY NOISE
Used with any of the Type 530, 540, 550 or 580*-Series
Oscilloscopes, the Type 1S1 Sampling Unit extends the measur-
ing capabilities to 1 gigahertz. Operation is like a conventional
oscilloscope — but with a combination of bandwidth and sensi-
tivity possible only through sampling.
The Type 1S1 features internal triggering with a built-in delay
line — no need for pretriggers or external delay lines. The tun-
nel-diode trigger circuit assures stable triggering through 1
gigahertz. Calibrated sweep ranges are from lOOps/cm to
50/ts/cm. A single control is used to select the sweep range
and magnify the display up to XI 00 when desired. This single-
control feature allows direct read-out of the sweep range even
when magnified.
Calibrated vertical deflection factors range from 2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm. Noise in the display is less than 1 mV, and can be
reduced by a smoothing control. A DC-offset control permits
observation of millivolt signals in the presence of up to ±1
volt input levels. Output signals are available at the front panel
for driving chart recorders.
VERTICAL SYSTEM
RISETIME
Less than or equal to 0.35 ns.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
7 calibrated steps from 2 mV/cm through 200 mV/cm. Vari-
able between steps, extending to 500 juV/cm (uncalibrated)
NOISE
Less than 1 mV. Can be reduced to less than 500 /tV with
smoothing control.
INPUT IMPEDANCE
50 Q nominal.
DYNAMIC RANGE
±2 V. Deflection factors to 2 mV/cm can be used with sig-
nals up to ±2 volts in amplitude. Safe overload is =h5V
(higher with reduced duty factor).
DC OFFSET
Range is ±1 V. OUTPUT: (for monitoring the DC-offset
level) ten times actual offset through 10kQ.
VERTICAL OUTPUT
200 mV per displayed centimeter through 10 kO.
*Type 81 Plug-In Adapter required.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM
SWEEP RANGES
18 calibrated steps from lOOps/cm to 50/is/cm. ACCURACY:
±3% normal or magnified. Variable between steps, extend-
ing sweep range to 33 ps/cm (uncalibrated).
MAGNIFIER
Allows display to be magnified around a fixed time-reference
point while maintaining a constant number of samples/cm.
Provides magnification up to XI 00. Sweep range has direct
read-out even when magnified.
TIME POSITION
Moves the displayed time window and positions the time-
reference point for magnification. Range is 500 /is to 50 ns
in 5 decade steps. Time position variables provide adjustment
of delay from zero to the range step selected.
SAMPLES/CM
Continuously variable, allowing optimum adjustment of dis-
play rate and dot density.
TRIGGERING
3 trigger modes, AC-coupled: dzinternal, zbexternal, and
free run. EXTERNAL SENSITIVITY: 5 mV to 200 mV. RE-
SPONSE: Sinewave triggering or synchronizing from 100 Hz
through 1 GHz. Pulse triggering down to lOp/s.
DISPLAY MODES
Repetitive, single display, manual scan, or external scan.
Front-panel START button for single-display operation.
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
1 V per displayed centimeter; 10kn source impedance.
114
1S1
PROBE POWER OUTPUT
Front-panel connector for use with cathode-follower type
probes, Type 281 TDR Pulser, and Type 282 Adapter for high-
impedance probes.
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Dimensions — ll '/ 2 " long by 5 7 / 8 " wide by 6 ]5 / u " deep.
Net weight — 8 lbs. Shipping weight — ll lbs, approx.
TYPE 1S1 SAMPLING UNIT $ l 1 00
Each instrument includes: l — cable, 5 ns, RG213 with GR connectors
(017-0502-00); 1— cable, 50-12 10 ns, RG-58 with GR connectors (017-
0501-00); 1— patch cord, 18" with banana connectors (012-0039-00);
2— attenuator, 10X, 50-J2 (017-0078-00); 1— adapter, GR-to-BNC female
(017-0063-00); 1— adapter, GR-to-BNC male (017-0064-00); 2— instruc-
tion manual (070-0475-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
THE WAVEFORM PHOTOGRAPHS BELOW ILLUSTRATE THE PERFORMANCE CAPABILITIES OF THE TYPE TS7 SAMPLING
UNIT. THESE INCLUDE LOW INHERENT DISPLAY NOISE, STABLE TRIGGERING, REAL-TIME SAMPLING, PLUS TYPICAL
TIME-DOMAIN REFLECTOMETRY MEASUREMENTS.
*
TANGENTIAL NOISE
-mV, 2-ns wide pulse externally (Tig-
ered. Upper waveform is unsmoothed.
The lower is smoothed.
Vert: 2mV/cm
Horiz: I ns/cm
TRIGGERING AT 1 GHz
-GHz sinewave; internally triggered.
Vert: lOOmV/cm
Horiz: 0.5 ns/cm
PULSE TRIGGERING
A 50-mV, 2-ns wide pulse; internally trig-
gered.
Vert: lOmV/cm
Horiz: 0.5 ns/cm
REAL-TIME SAMPLING DISPLAY
A 100-Hz sinewave,- Internal Main Frame
triggering.
Vert: 100 mV / cm
(free running sampler)
Horiz-. 0.5 ms/cm
(realtime — main frame)
TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETRY
The display shows a 50-Q system with a
transition to a 25-0 system, terminated
with an inductive load.
Vert: lOOmV/cm
Horiz: 5 ns/cm
TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETRY
The display shows a 50-fi system with a
transition to a 25-Q system, terminated
with a capacitive load.
Vert: lOOmV/cm
Horiz: 5 ns/cm
_ E,
li
1 +
115
T yP e CB
REFLECTOMETER AND
WIDEBAND SAMPLING UNIT
• VERTICAL CALIBRATION IN RHO (p)
OR VOLTAGE
• HORIZONTAL CALIBRATION IN TIME
OR DISTANCE
• TWO INTERNAL PULSE SOURCES
• LIGHTED READOUT OF HORIZONTAL SCALE
FACTOR
• 90-ps GENERAL-PURPOSE SAMPLER
Time-domain reflectometry measurements are easier than
ever to make! The Type 1S2 in any Tektronix Oscilloscope that
accepts Letter and 1 -Series Plug-Ins is a complete TDR measure-
ment system.
The <90-ps risetime, 5-mV/div deflection factor and built-in
triggering capability make the Type 1S2 useful in many other
sampling measurements.
SYSTEM PERFORMANCE AS REFLECTOMETER
VERTICAL
SYSTEM RISETIME
<140ps, for the displayed reflection from an open-circuited
20-cm air line.
VERTICAL SCALE
Calibrated in p (rho) and volts: 0.005 p/div to 0.5 p/div or
5 mV/div to 500 mV/div in 7 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accuracy within ±3%. Continuously variable between steps,
uncalibrated.
RESOLUTION
Reflection coefficients as small as 0.001 can be observed.
OFFSET RANGE
±2-V offset, monitorable at front panel, permits ±1%
accuracy for slide-back measurements of either p or voltage.
VERTICAL OUTPUT
1 V for each major division of displayed signal, 10 kQ ±1%
source impedance.
HORIZONTAL
HORIZONTAL SCALE
Calibrated in distance and time: full-scale, 10-div display
(without magnification) of 10 m, 100 m, or 1 km; 100 ns, 1 p.s,
or 10p.s. Accuracy is ±3% with or without magnification.
MAGNIFIER
XI to XI 00 in 7 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence). Contin-
uously variable between steps. Allows display to be mag-
nified from a fixed on-screen reference point: 1 major division
from the left edge of the graticule.
UNITS/DIV CALCULATOR
Horizontal scale factor (combination of horizontal range and
magnification settings) readout directly at front panel, indi-
cates either distance or time/div.
DISTANCE OR TIME POSITION
Ten-turn dial directly reads one-way distance or round-trip
time to test-line discontinuity. Round-trip time readings are
accurate to within ±2%. Range of 10-turn dial is the same
as the full-scale, 10-div display without magnification.
JITTER
<20ps with internal pulse sources.
DIELECTRIC
Calibrated for air, Teflon*, and polyethylene lines. Preset
mode adjustable for lines with velocity of propagation from
0.6 to 1.0X velocity of light.
DISPLAY MODES
Repetitive or single sweep, manual or external scan.
HORIZONTAL OUTPUT
1 V for each major division of displayed signal, 10 kQ ±1%
source impedance.
PULSE SOURCES
FAST-RISE OUTPUT
Approximately 50-ps risetime at approximately 250 mV, 50 Q
±1% (reverse terminated).
LARGE-AMPLITUDE OUTPUT
Approximately 1-ns risetime at approximately 1 .0 V, 50 Q ^^k
±1% (reverse terminated). ^^^
*Regisrered Trade-Mark E.I. du Pont de Nemours & Co.
116
1S2
PERFORMANCE AS GENERAL-PURPOSE SAMPLER
RISETIME
<90 ps.
TRIGGERING
±Pulses: 10 Hz to 5 GHz, 50 mV to l V. Sinewaves: 100 kHz
to 5 GHz, 50 mV to l V.
DYNAMIC RANGE
±2V, ±5V safe overload.
NOISE
Less than 2 mV.
TYPE 1S2 SAMPLING UNIT $1300
Each instrument includes: 2— GR elbows (017-0070-001; 1 — 5X atten-
uator (017-0079-00); 1— 2X attenuator (017-0080-00]; 1— 50-J2 termina-
tion (017-0081-00); 1— 20-cm airline (017-0084-00); 1— 5-ns RG 8/AU
(017-0502-00); 1—18" patch cord (012-0031-00); 2— instruction manual
(070-0543-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
HOW THE MEASUREMENT IS MADE
Two methods may be used to determine the time or distance
between the incident pulse and a discontinuity in the line.
First, the dielectric selector and range selector are set for the
particular line to be tested (in this case air and 10 m respec-
tively}. With the calibrated 10-turn position control set at zero,
the incident pulse (the Type 1S2 has 2 internal pulse sources)
is automatically aligned with the graticule reference line 1 major
division from the left edge of the display. This is still true if
another range is selected. A discontinuity is observed approxi-
mately 3.5 div to the right of the incident pulse (Fig 1). Since
this discontinuity is quite short, X2 magnification is used for
more detailed examination (Fig 2).
The first method utilizes the horizontal units/div calculator
on the front panel. The 50 cm/div indication takes into consid-
eration the 10-m full scale range (1 m/div) and X2 magnifica-
tion. The CRT now indicates the discontinuity approximately
7 div to the right of the incident pulse. At 50 cm/div, the dis-
continuity is located about 350 cm down the line.
The second method allows measurement accuracy to within
±2%, utilizing the calibrated 10-turn control. As this control is
turned from its zero setting, the entire display (incident pulse
and discontinuity) moves to the left (Fig 3). When the discon-
tinuity is aligned with the graticule reference line, the position
control directly reads position as a percentage of position range
(amount of delay). The position control in our example now
reads 0.36, indicating the discontinuity at 360 cm..
There are also two methods of determining the reflection
coefficient or voltage amplitude of the discontinuity. The meas-
urement can be made directly from the CRT (divisions of deflec-
tion times vertical units/div control setting). A more accurate
method utilizes the ±2-V offset and offset output. With a null
volt-meter connected to the front-panel offset output, the base-
line just preceding the reflection is aligned with a graticule line;
the meter reading is then noted (Fig A). The reflection is then
repositioned (using the offset control) to align the peak of the
reflection with the same graticule line (Fig 5). The difference
between the present meter reading and the preceding one is
the actual amplitude of the reflection. The meter reading in
volts is equivalent to the numerical value of p when the p —
volts switch on the Type 1S2 is in the p position; the meter read-
ing is in volts with the switch in the volts position.
Fig 1 Vertical: p = 0.:
Horizontal: 100 cm/div
Fig 5 Vertical: p = 0.05/div Horizontal: 20 cm/div
117
Type
561
m
OSCILLOSCOPE
R & D TO PRODUCTION APPLICATIONS
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS OR AUTOMATIC
DC-T5MHz SYSTEMS BY PLUG-IN
VERSATILITY
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
X-Y DISPLAYS
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflecfion characteristics are extremely flexible through
use of 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
Horizontal deflection characteristics are extremely flexible
through use of versatile time-base units and amplifiers of
the 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3.5 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V (561 A), 10 V to
100 V (RM561A), and 0.1 V into 50 Q, power line frequency.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 50
to 400 Hz (561A), 50 to 60 Hz (RM561A), 240 watts maximum.
118
561A
RM561A
High in performance, low in cost, the Type 561A and Type
RM561 A Oscilloscopes represent an advance in value and
versatility in the Type 560-Series Oscilloscopes.
Conventional operation extends to the 1 5-MHz range, with
sub-nanosecond capabilities available, through the use of
sampling plug-in units.
The Type 561A and RM561A use plug-in units for both the
vertical and horizontal deflection systems. New plug-in units
have extended the capability of these instruments to spectrum
analysis, operational amplifiers, and automatic seeking ampli-
fier-time base combinations.
Both the Type 561A and the Type RM561 A use a cathode-
ray tube that features an internal graticule with controllable
illumination. Thus, you can take photographs with the same
ease, but without the parallax of the external graticule.
Occupying only 7 inches of rack height, the Type RM561A
bolts directly to the rack but may be ordered with optional
slide-out tracks at additional cost.
CONVENTIONAL DISPLAYS
A wide range of non-sampling bandwidths and deflection
factors are available in the selection of 2-Series and 3-Series
Amplifier Plug-In Units. These include both single-trace and
multi-trace units. The Types 2A61, 2A63, 3A3, and 3A7 are
differential amplifier units while the Type 3C66 is useful
for strain-gage and similar transducer operations.
Normal sweep, single sweep, magnified or delayed sweep
is available with the group of 2-Series and 3-Series time-base
plug-in units.
AUTOMATIC SEEKING
The Types 3A5 Amplifier (DC — 15 MHz) and 3B5 Time-Base
are automatic-seeking plug-in units. These units, when com-
manded, have the ability to sense voltage levels and time
changes and adjust their circuitry to present calibrated on-
screen displays.
SAMPLING DISPLAYS
The Type 2177k and 3T4 Sampling Sweep Units with either
a Type 3S3 or Type 3S76 Amplifier Unit give a dual-trace
sampling system with risetimes in the subnanosecond region.
The Type 3S3 provides a system with a high-impedance
low-capacity input while the Type 3S76 provides a 50-ohm
input system.
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
The Type 3L10 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit covers the
1-36 MHz range. This plug-in unit with a sensitivity of — 100
dBm and calibrated dispersion allows the display of RF
signals with a resolution of 10 Hz to 1 kHz.
X-Y DISPLAYS
The Types 2A60, 2A63, 3A3, 3A72, 3A74, and 3A75 Ampli-
fier Plug-In Units operate equally well in the vertical and
horizontal compartments of the Type 561 A and RM561A
permitting X-Y displays using any combination of these
plug-in units. Plug-In units other than these listed above are
not recommended for X-Y displays.
For medium and high-frequency X-Y operation, use of two
units of the same type is recommended. Deflection-circuit
capacitances of the Type 561 A and RM561A are carefully
standardized to minimize high frequency phase-shift between
two plug-ins of the same type when operated X-Y.
MULTIPLE X-Y DISPLAYS
Using two type 3A72 or two Type 3A74 Plug-In Units, both
synchronization and automatic pairing are provided. With
two 3A72's operated X-Y in the dual-trace mode, Channel
1 of the left-hand plug-in is always plotted against Chan-
nel 1 of the right-hand plug-in. With two Type 3A74's, two,
three, or four independent displays may be obtained, prop-
erly paired: Channel 4 versus Channel 4, Channel 3 versus
Channel 3, etc. . . .
Using two Type 3A1 or two Type 3A6 Plug-In Units, dual-
trace switching is not synchronized. Dual X-Y displays within
the center 8 cm x 8 cm area of the graticule may be obtained,
but one plug-in or the other must usually be limited to single-
trace operation unless four displays are wanted.
Using two Type 3A3 Plug-In Units, dual-trace switching
is synchronized, so one Y Channel remains plotted against
the same X Channel once the display is set up. There is
no provision for consistent pairing each time the system
is operated.
As with single X-Y displays, two plug-ins of the same
type should always be used where X-Y phase relationships
are to be preserved.
RASTER GENERATION
A raster display can be presented by using two time-base
plug-in units, one in each compartment. Signal modulation
can be achieved through the Z-axis of the CRT.
TYPE 561 A CHARACTERISTICS
PLUG-IN COMPARTMENTS
Accepts all 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier and Time-Base
Units.
TEKTRONIX CRT
Flat-faced rectangular 5" tube with internal "no parallax"
graticule, controllable edge-lighting, 3.5-kV monoaccelera-
tor, beam-deflection unblanking. A P31 Phosphor is normally
supplied.
DISPLAY CONTROLS
Front-panel controls include Focus, Intensity, and Scale
Illumination (of the 8-cm by 10-cm display area), in addi-
tion to screwdriver adjustments for Astigmatism and Trace
Alignment.
ILLUMINATED INTERNAL GRATICULE
Edge lighted graticule marked in 8 vertical and 10 horizontal
cm divisions. The centerlines are marked every 2 mm. Illumi-
nation is controlled by a front-panel knob.
Z-AXIS INPUT
Accessible through a terminal at the rear of the instrument
permits external modulation of the CRT cathode.
CALIBRATOR
18 calibrated squarewave voltages available, from 0.2 mV
to 100 V, peak to peak — approximately 5-/xs risetime, at
line frequency. For 50 Q systems the 0.5 V position provides
0.1 V into 50 ohms for convenient amplitude calibration of
sampling units.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED SUPPLIES
All voltages required for proper operation of the indicator
and the plug-in units are regulated. DC-supply operates
with line voltage between 105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V,
50 to 400 Hz . . . provides 85 watts for powering the 2-Series
and 3-Series Plug-In Units. Supplies operate normally with
or without plug-ins.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V, 50 to 400 Hz; 240 watts maximum. Unit fac-
tory wired for 117 V.
119
561A
RM561A
2-SERIES AND 3-SERIES AMPLIFIER PLUG-IN UNITS
Type
2A60 — Single Trace
2A61 — Differential
(low level)
2A63 — Differential
(50:1 rejection ratio)
3A1 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A3 — Dual Trace
Differential
3A5 Automatic/
Programmable
3A6 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A7 — Differential
Comparator
3A8 — Operational
Amplifier
3A72 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A74 — Four Trace
(identical channels)
3A75 — Single Trace
INPUT RC
(AC or DC coupled)
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 V max
10 megohm — 50 pF,
±5 V (AC-coupled only)
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
BANDWIDTH
(-3dB)
DC— 1 MHz
0.06 Hz-
300 kHz
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
50 mV/div — 50 V/div, 4 decade steps,
with variable control.
10/iV/div— 20mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
megohm — 24 pF
DC— 300 kHz
DC— 10 MHz
DC— 500 kHz
DC— 15 MHz
1 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOOjuV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
1 megohm — 20 pF
3C66 — Carrier
Amplifier
3L10 — Spectrum
Analyzer
3S3 — Dual Trace
Sampling (for use
with 3T77A)
3S76 — Dual Trace
Sampling (for use
with 3T77A)
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
DC— 1 MHz
(has delay line)
DC— 10 MHz
DC— 3.5 MHz
DC— 650 kHz
DC— 2 MHz
DC— 4 MHz
1 mV/div — 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
1 mV/div — 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
0.2 V/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOmV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
20mV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
120-n strain-
gage bridge
approx 50 Q
approx 600 Q
lOOkfi — 2pF,
±3 volts max
50 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
50 ohms
DC-coupled
TYPE
2B67
3B1
3B3
3B4
SWEEP RANGE
1 ,us/div to 5 s/div
equivalent
DC— 1 GHz
(0.35 ns risetime)
equivalent
DC— 875 MHz
(0.4-ns risetime)
TIME-BASE UNITS
MAGNIFIER
5X
5 mV/div — lOOmV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
2 mV/div— 200 mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
PRICE
$105
385
150
450
790
760
540
635
600
275
590
175
DC— 5 kHz 10 /tstrain/div— 10,000 ^.strain/div, 1-2-5
(70fis risetime) sequence, with variable control.
1—36 MHz sensitivity — lOOdBm 1200
1500
(with
probes)
1100
FEATURES
0.5 fis/div to 1 s/div
Single sweep — triggering is internal, external, line,
auto or free run.
PRICE
$210
0.2/i.s/div to 1 s/div
3B5 Automatic/ 0.1 /xs/div to 5 s/div
Programmable
3T4 equiv to 1 ns/div to
Programmable 200/j.s/div
Sampling
3T77A
Sampling
5X 3B1— Delayed sweep.
3B3 — Calib Delayed sweep, single sweep.
IX to Single sweep — triggering is internal, external, line,
50X auto or free-run.
10X Calibrated delay magnifier automatic-seeking pro-
100X grammable.
10X Programmable sweep range, single sweep, manual
scan, calibrated delay.
535
585
400
890
1300
equiv to 0.2 ns/div to
10 fis/div
10X
Single sweep, manual scan, sweep delay.
650
120
561A
rm561A
PARALLAX-FREE MEASUREMENTS—'
The internal graticule eliminates parallax, a common cause
of erroneous readings. Parallax is an apparent displacement
of the trace in relationship to the graticule. It occurs when
the trace is on a different plane than the graticule and is not
viewed from exactly the same angle for all parts of the display.
When the trace and graticule are on the same plane, as
on the cathode-ray tube of the Type 561A and RM561A Oscillo-
scope, parallax is eliminated.
CONVENIENT PHOTOGRAPHY—
Controllable illumination of the internal graticule enables
you to easily take waveform photographs in which the graticule
rulings are sharply delineated. This was formerly possible only
with oscilloscopes using external graticules.
Adding to the convenience of operation the Type RM561A
has numbered settings of the illumination control that serve
as an approximate exposure guide.
SAMPLING
Transistor turn-on and turn-off (upper trace).
pulse lower trace|.
Driving
SPECTRUM ANALYZER
Waveform showing center frequency and two sidebands.
DELAYING SWEEP (Double exposure]
Intensified portion of waveform (upper trace) expanded
(lower trace) by means of delayed sweep.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS (561A)
14'/ 2 " high, 10" wide, 21%" deep. Net weight is 28 pounds.
Shipping weight is 39 pounds, approx.
TYPE 561 A, without plug-in units $500
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-
conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1— plate, protector, CRT, clear
(387-0935-00); 1— filter, smoke gray (installed) (378-0560-00); 1— patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18", red (012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, BNC-to-
banana plug, 18", red (012-0091-00); 1— post jack, BNC, red (012-
0092-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0342-00).
RACK MOUNT MODEL
TYPE RM561A is electrically identical to the Type 561 A
except the calibrator range is from 1 mV to 100 V and the line
frequency range is 50 to 60 Hz. The RM561A mounts on a stand-
ard 19" rack; is 7" high and 18 3 / 8 " deep. (Additional mount-
ing information on the Catalog Instrument Dimensions page.)
Net weight is 30'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 54 pounds,
approx.
TYPE RM561A, without plug-in units $550
Each instrument includes: 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1—3-
conductor power cord (161-0024-00); 1 — plate, protector, CRT, clear
(387-0935-00); 1— filter, smoke gray (installed) (378-0560-00); 1— patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18", red (012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, BNC-to-
banana plug, 18", red (012-0091-00); 1— post jack, BNC, red (012-0092-
00); 1 — set mounting hardware; 2 — instruction manual (070-0352-00).
TYPE RM561A WITH SLIDE-OUT TRACKS
A slide-out track kit can be used to mount the RM561A to
a standard 19" rack. When mounted this way, the RM561A
can be pulled out from the rack, tilted, and locked in any
of 7 positions for convenient servicing. An RM561A with a
slide-out track kit attached is available as MOD 171 A. Slide-out
track kits can also be ordered separately.
TYPE RM561A MOD 171 A, without plug-in units . . $600
Each instrument includes: 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1—3-
conductor power cord (161-0024-00); 1— plate, protector, CRT, clear
(387-0935-00); 1— filter, smoke gray (installed) (378-0560-00); 1— patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18", red (012-0087-00); 1— patch cord, BNC-to-
banana plug, 18", red (012-0091-00); 1— post jack, BNC, red (01 2-
0092-00); 1 — set mounting hardware; 1 — pr mounting tracks (315-0027-
00); 2— instruction manual (070-0352-00).
SLIDE-OUT TRACK KIT (Part Number 351-0050-00) $45
PROBES
Attenuator probes are not included with the Type 561 A
or RM561A Oscilloscopes. Tektronix probes are recommended
when minimum loading of the circuit is required.
The following probes are recommended for use with most
Type 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier Plug-In Units.
See Accessory pages for further information on probes.
STANDARD PROBES
Use
Input Inductance
R C
Rating
Probe
Number
Price
1 :1 Attenuator
1 MP.
97 pF
600 V max
P6028
$ 12.50
10:1 Attenuator
10 MI2
9.5 pF
600 V max
P6006
22.00
1000:1 High Voltage
100 Mfi
3 pF
12 kV max
P6013
75.00
1000:1 High Voltage
100 MP
2.7 pF
40 kV max
P6015
200.00
Current
15 A max
P6019
75.00
SAMPLING PROBES
Use
Input In
R
ductance
C
Rating
Probe
Number
Price
10:1 Attenuator
500 12
0.7 pF
16 VDC
500 VAC
P6034
$ 35.00
100:1 Attenuator
5 kJ2
0.6 pF
50 VDC
500 VAC
P6035
35.00
10:1 to 1000:1 CF
10 MJ2
varies
varies
P6032
220.00
Current
5Q0 mA
CT1/P6040
31.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
121
Type
STORAGE OSCILLOSCOPE
[fl
• SPLIT SCREEN STORAGE
• STORED DISPLAY TO ONE HOUR
• PLUG-IN VERSATILITY
• SPECTRUM ANALYSIS AND SAMPLING
STORAGE
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible through
use of 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units. Full bandwidth
capabilities of plug-in units available in conventional use.
HORIZONTAL
Horizontal deflection characteristics are extremely flexible
through use of versatile Time-Base Units and Amplifiers of
the 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units.
STORAGE CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 8x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 3.5 IcV.
SPLIT SCREEN STORAGE— Store on either upper or lower half
of screen with non-storage on other half; store on entire
screen; or non-store on entire screen.
STORAGE TIME— Up to one hour.
ERASE TIME— Approximately 0.25 second.
WRITING SPEED— 500 cm/ms.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 m V to 100 V (564), 1.0 mV to
100 V (RM564), and 0.1 V into 50 n, power line frequency.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V.
122
564
rm564
STORAGE OPERATION
Features of the Type 564 as a storage oscilloscope include —
Long-term storage with short-time erasure.
Storage of single shot signals.
Split-screen with individual controls for each half.
SOME THINGS YOU CAN DO WITH
TYPE 564 STORED DISPLAYS
1. Observe single-shot phenomena.
2. Study, for long periods of time, a waveform without
having to photograph it. (Stored brightness and con-
trast remain essentially constant for up to an hour.)
3. Photograph only those stored waveforms you want.
4. Compare changing waveforms to a stored waveform,
each displayed on half of the CRT face.
5. Change the stored standard while viewing other wave-
forms on the non-stored half.
6. Photograph a multi-event stored display with only one
exposure.
7. Store fast recurrent phenomena by using the integrate
feature.
8. Store X-Y displays.
AVAILABLE DISPLAYS
With the wide-range sensitivity and bandwidth of the Type
564, several storage and conventional operation displays are
obtainable. The range of signals which may be stored is limited
by stored-mode writing characteristics of the CRT.
SINGLE-TRACE AND MULTI-TRACE
These displays are obtained by selecting either sampling or
non-sampling amplifier plug-in units. Selection of the Type
2A61, 2A63, or 3A3, gives differential amplifier operation, while
strain gage and other transducer operations are available with
the Type 3C66.
SAMPLING
Risetimes in the sub-nanosecond region are obtained by
using Type 3T77A, or 3T4, Sampling Sweep Unit with either
a Type 3S3 or Type 3S76 Amplifier Unit. Either combination
will provide a dual-trace display or a single display. The Type
3S3 provides a system with a high-impedance low-capacitance
input while the Type 3S76 provides a 50-Q input system.
SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
The Type 3L10 Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In Unit covers the 1
—36 MHz range. This plug-in unit with a sensitivity of —100
dBm and calibrated dispersion allows the display of RF signals
with a resolution of 10 Hz to 1 kHz.
SINGLE X-Y
X-Y display can be obtained by using any combination of the
Type 2A60, 2A63, 3A3, 3A72, 3A74, and 3A75 Units in both the
vertical and horizontal compartments of the Type 564.
For medium and high-frequency X-Y operation, however, use
two units of the same type. Careful standardization of deflec-
tion-circuit capacitance in the Type 564, minimizes high fre-
quency phase-shift between two of the same type plug-in units
when operated X-Y.
MULTIPLE X-Y
Using two Type 3A72 or two Type 3A74 Plug-In Units, both
synchronization and automatic pairings are provided. With two
3A72's operated X-Y in the dual trace mode, Channel 1 of the
left-hand plug-in is always plotted against Channel 1 of the
right-hand plug-in. With two Type 3A74's, two, three, or four
independent displays may be obtained, properly paired: Chan-
nel 4 versus Channel 4, Channel 3 versus Channel 3, etc. . . .
Using two Type 3A1 or two Type 3A6 Plug-In Units, dual-
trace switching is not synchronized. Dual X-Y displays within
the center 8 cm x 8 cm area of the graticule may be obtained,
but one plug-in or the other must usually be limited to single-
trace operation unless four displays are wanted.
Using two Type 3A3 Plug-In Units, dual-trace switching is
synchronized, so one Y Channel remains plotted against the
same X Channel once the display is set up. There is no pro-
vision for consistent pairing each time the system is operated.
As with single X-Y displays, two plug-ins of the same type
should always be used where X-Y phase relationships are to
be preserved.
■9
■ :■
II
mHMfl l HHMH
NlliHl
SHOCK TEST
Display shows ability of the Type 564 to
store consecutive events for comparison or
photography. Waveforms indicate shock
imparted by dropping sub-table weight of
5 lbs from different heights. Drop of 5" =
50.5 gs, 10" = 92.5 gs, 15" = 142 gs ; 20"
= )81 g's ; 25" = 214 gs. Sweep Rate is 2
ms/ cm.
LOW-REPETITION RATE SAMPLING
Display shows ability of the Type 564 (with
sampling plug-in units) to record complete
sampling waveforms at low repetition rates.
Upper trace is stored. Lower trace is not
stored. This capability for storing low-repeti-
tion-rate waveforms allows observation and
analysis of the entire sampled display at one
STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAY
Stored waveform showing center frequency
with two sidebands. Using single-sweep and
storage allows measurement of frequency drift
with the spectrum analyzer unit.
123
564
rm564
Type
2A60 — Single Trace
2A61 — Differential
(low level)
2A63 — Differential
(50:1 rejection ratio)
3A1 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A3 — Dual Trace
Differential
3A5 Automatic/
Programmable
3A6 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A7 — Differential
Comparator
3A8 — Operational
Amplifier
3A72 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A74 — Four Trace
(identical channels)
3A75 — Single Trace
3C66 — Carrier
Amplifier
3L10 — Spectrum
Analyzer
3S3 — Dual Trace
Sampling (for use
with 3T77A)
3S76 — Dual Trace
Sampling (for use
with 3T77A)
2-SERIES AND 3-SERIES AMPLIFIER PLUG-IN UNITS
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACT
INPUT RC
(AC or DC coupled)
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 V max
BANDWIDTH
(-3 dB)
DC— 1 MHz
10 megohm — 50 pF,
±5V (AC-coupled only)
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
0.06 Hz-
300 kHz
DC— 300 kHz
1 megohm — 24 pF
DC— 10 MHz
DC— 500 kHz
DC— 15 MHz
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
1 megohm — 20 pF
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
DC— 1 MHz
(has delay line)
DC— 10 MHz
DC— 3.5 MHz
DC— 650 kHz
120-fi strain-
gage bridge
approx 50 fi
approx 600 Q
lOOkQ — 2pF,
±3 volts max
50 ohms
DC-coupled
DC— 2 MHz
DC— 4 MHz
DC— 5 kHz
(70 |iis risetime)
1—36 MHz
equivalent
DC— 1 GHz
(0.35 ns risetime)
TYPE
2B67
3B1
3B3
3B4
SWEEP RANGE
equivalent
DC— 875 MHz
(0.4-ns risetime)
TIME-BASE UNITS
MAGNIFIER
50 mV/div — 50 V/div, 4 decade steps,
with variable control.
lG>V/div— 20mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
1 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOO^V/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
1 mV/div — 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
1 mV/div — 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
0.2 V/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
lOmV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
20mV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
50 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
5mV/div— lOOmV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
2mV/div— 200 mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
FEATURES
PRICE
$105
385
150
450
790
760
540
635
600
275
590
175
10,ustrain/div— 10,000 ^strain/div, 1-2-5 400
sequence, with variable control.
sensitivity — lOOdBm
1500
(with
probes)
1100
1 jus/div to 5s/div 5X
0.5/is/div to 1 s/div 5X
0.2/xs/div to 1 s/div
Single sweep — triggering is internal, external, line,
auto or free run.
3B1 — Delayed sweep.
3B3 — Calib Delayed sweep, single sweep.
PRICE
$210
535
585
IX to Single sweep — triggering is internal, external, line,
50X auto or free-run.
400
3B5 Automatic/ 0.1 /^s/div to 5 s/div
Programmable
3T4 equiv to 1 ns/div to
Programmable 200 /xs/div
Sampling
3T77A
Sampling
10X Calibrated delay magnifier automatic-seeking pro-
100X grammable.
10X
Programmable sweep range, single sweep, manual
scan, calibrated delay.
890
1300
equiv to 0.2 ns/div to
10 /ts/div
10X
Single sweep, manual scan, sweep delay.
650
124
M
564
rm564
CRT PERFORMANCE
There are two storage tubes available for use in the Type
564 Oscilloscope. Both tubes exhibit characteristics of a con-
ventional CRT when used in the non-stored mode. One tube,
the Type T5640-200, has the brighter stored display. The other
tube, the Type T5640-201, has the faster writing speed.
By selecting the proper tube, you can obtain optimum oscillo-
scope performance for your particular application. Such selec-
tion is important because each tube has its own maximum writ-
ing speed and brightness for stored-mode operation. The bright-
ness of a stored display for an individual tube is one value
regardless of the intensity of the beam that generated it.
The brightness curves on the graph represent values measured
with a Spectra Spot Brightness Meter at operating level with
the entire screen faded positive. The writing speed curve was
obtained with a CRT beam current of 30 pA. The hours shown
are the actual hours the CRT is used in the stored mode with
repetitive writing, storing, and erasing.
It should be noted that non-storage operation of the CRT
has little effect on the stored-mode brightness and writing
speeds shown. Therefore to obtain maximum CRT performance
and service, the oscilloscope should be in the non-stored mode
when stored displays are not needed.
TYPICAL LIFE CHARACTERISTICS
CRT
CD
1 2
T5640-200
Ml<
"•NESS ■"■
. WRIT
*S SPE ED
CONTRAST RA
no
o
cr
*
500 1000 1500 2000
HOURS OF OPERATION ( STORED MODE )
il
t- cr
1
T5640-201
_ »""Tlivs |
fEED
CONTRAST
RATIO
BRIGHTNESS
5 o
500 1000 1500 2000 2500
HOURS OF OPERATION (STORED MODE)
The CRT is a Tektronix Type T5640, flat-faced bistable storage
tube with beam-deflection blanking and an accelerating volt-
age of 3.5 kV. It has an 8 x 10 cm storage target divided
into two 4x10 cm areas, individually controllable for storage
and erasure.
WARRANTED MINIMUM CHARACTERISTICS
Characteristics T5640-200* T5640-201t
6 foot-lamberts 2 foot-lamberts
Minimum Initial Brightness
Typical Brightness at
1000 hours
(% of initial)
Writing Speed,
Initial Minimum
70%
Writing Speed at
1000 hours,
(% of initial)
25 cm/ms
25%
80%
lOOcm/mstt
90%
*Supplied with Type 564
tSupplied with Type 564 MOD 08
ttSpecification holds true for middle 7 x 9 cm area.
STORAGE CHARACTERISTICS
STORAGE TIME
Displays can be stored for up to 1 hour. Longer times may
be obtained but tend to reduce target sensitivity in the stored
areas.
ERASURE TIME
Approximately 0.25 second.
STORED WRITING-SPEED ENHANCEMENT
This feature controls the single-sweep storage capabilities of
the storage CRT. Through adjustment of the front-panel
Writing-Rate Increase control, single-trace spot velocities up
to 250 cm/ms using the T5640-200 CRT or up to 500 cm/ms
using the T5640-201 CRT can be stored with minimal loss of
resolution and contrast in the center 7x9 cm.
SINGLE SHOT SIGNALS
At slow or medium speeds, single-shot signals are easily
stored for extended viewing time (within writing-speed capa-
bilities of CRT selected).
INTEGRATE MODE
Increases the effective writing speed for repetitive fast signals
with repetition rates that are too low for effective storage,
but which may be too fast for satisfactory single-shot storage
with enhancement.
TYPE 564 CHARACTERISTICS
PLUG-IN COMPARTMENTS
The instrument accepts 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier and
Time-Base Units.
LOCATE BUTTON
This button, when depressed, causes a spot or spots to appear
at the left of the CRT screen at the vertical position of the
next sweep.
GRATICULE
The graticule is edge lighted and is marked in 8 vertical and
10 horizontal cm divisions. The centerline is marked every
2 mm. Illumination is controlled by a front-panel knob.
Z-AXIS INPUT
Accessible through a terminal at the rear of the instrument
permits external modulation of the CRT cathode.
125
rm564
CALIBRATOR
There are 18 amplitude-calibrated squarewave voltages
available, from 0.2 mV to 100 V, peak to peak; approximately
5-/iS risetime, at line frequency. For 50-Q systems, the 0.5-V
switch position provides 0.1 V (peak to peak) into 50 ohms,
for convenient calibration of sampling units.
ELECTRONICALLY REGULATED SUPPLIES
Regulated power supplies furnish all voltages required for
proper operation of the Indicator and the plug-in units.
Regulated DC supplies operate with line voltage between
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 400 Hz ... max 240
watts, approx. Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL
Dimensions of 13'/ 2 " high by 9 3 / 4 " wide by 21 '/ 2 " deep. Net
weight is 33 pounds. Shipping weight is 41 pounds, approx.
ORDERING INFORMATION
The Type 564 has the storage tube T5640-200 (stored display
of highest intensity).
TYPE 564 (without plug-in units) $875
Each instrument includes: 1 — Polarized viewer (016-0039-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00]; 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00);
2 — Instruction manual (070-0351 -00).
The Type 564 MOD 08 has the storage tube T5640-201
(fastest stored writing speed).
TYPE 564 MOD 08 (without plug-in units) $875
Each instrument includes: 1— Polarized viewer (016-0039-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00);
2 — Instruction manual (070-0351-00).
RACK MOUNT MODEL
The Type RM564 Oscilloscope, only 7" in height, is suited
for applications where panel space might be at a premium.
The Type RM564 is electrically identical to the Type 564 except
the amplitude calibrator range is from 1.0 mV to 100 V and
the instrument operates on power line frequency of 50 to 60 Hz.
The Type RM564 provides for remote erase of the stored wave-
form on either or both halves of the split screen storage tube.
The Type RM564 mounts in a 19" rack, is 7" high, and is 18%"
deep. (Additional mounting information on the catalog instru-
ment dimension page.) Net weight is 31 pounds. Shipping
weight is 41 pounds, approx.
ORDERING INFORMATION
The Type RM564 has the storage tube T5640-200 (stored dis-
play of highest intensity).
TYPE RM564 (without plug-in units) $960
Each instrument includes: 1— Polarized viewer (016-0039-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-00);
1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-bonana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00);
1 — Set mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction manual [070-04 15-00).
The Type RM564 MOD 08 has the storage tube T5640-201
(fastest stored writing speed).
TYPE RM564 MOD 08 (without plug-in units) $960
Each instrument includes: 1 — Polarized viewer (016-0039-00); 1 3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-00);
1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post iack, BNC (012-0092-00);
1 — Set mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction manual (070-0415-00).
TYPE RM564 WITH SLIDE-OUT TRACKS
RM564 or RM564 MOD 08 with slide-out track kit can be
used to mount the RM564 or RM564 MOD 08 in a standard
19" rack to allow the instrument to be pulled out from the
rack, tilted and locked in any of 7 positions for convenient
servicing. An RM564 or RM564 MOD 08 is available with the
track kit installed as MOD 171Aor the tracks may be ordered
separately (below). A cradle assembly 040-0344-00 should be
ordered separately if the instrument is to be mounted on slide-
out tracks in a backless rack.
RM564 MOD 171Aor RM564 MOD 08, MOD 171A . $1,010
Each instrument includes: 1— Polarized viewer (016-0039-00); 1 — 3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-00);
1— Patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-
to-banana plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00);
1 — Set mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction manual (070-0415-00).
RM564 ACCESSORIES
Slide-out Track Kit (Part Number 351-0050-00) $45
Cradle Assembly — For use when slide-out tracks are in-
stalled in a rack without rear-support rails (not required when
slide-out tracks are not used).
Cradle Assembly (Part Number 040-0344-00) $1 1 .45
Remote-Erase Connector — Mates with connector on RM564 —
Cable not included (Part Number 134-0049-00) $4.00
ACCESSORIES
PROBES
Attenuator probes are not included with the Type 564 Oscil-
loscope. Tektronix probes are recommended when minimum
loading of the circuit is required.
The following probes are recommended for use with the
Type 2-Series and 3-Series Amplifier Plug-In Units. See Catalog
Accessory pages for complete information on the probes.
STANDARD PROBES
Input 1
lductance
Probe
Use
R
C
Rating
Number
Price
1:1 Attenuator
1 Mil
97 pF
600 V max
P6028
$ 12.50
10:1 Attenuator
10 Mil
9.5 pF
600 V max
P6006
22.00
1000:1 High Voltage
100 Mil
3 pF
12 kV max
P6013
75.00
1000:1 High Voltage
100 Mil
2.7 pF
40 kV max
P6015
200.00
Current
15 A max
P6019
75.00
SAMPLING PROBES
Input Inductance
Probe
Use
R
C
Rating
Number
Price
10:1 Attenuator
500 12
0.7 pF
16 VDC
500 VAC
P6034
$ 35.00
100:1 Attenuator
5 kS2
0.6 pF
50 VDC
500 VAC
P6035
35.00
10:1 to 1000:1 CF
10MS2
varies
varies
P6032
220.00
Current
500 mA
CT1/
P6040
31.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
126
TWO INDEPENDENT BEAMS
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
TWO INDEPENDENT SWEEP SYSTEMS
PLUG-IN VERTICAL AMPLIFIERS
DELAYING-SWEEP OPERATION
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION
REAR-PANEL OUTPUT CONNECTORS
A Type 565 — or rack-mounf counterpart, Type RM565
— is essentially two single-beam oscilloscopes sharing a
common cathode-ray tube, power supply and housing. Each
beam has separate vertical and horizontal deflection sys-
tems, focus, and intensity controls.
The vertical amplifiers can be any of the 2-Series or
3-Series Plug-In Units, except Sampling Units.
The horizontal amplifiers are built-in and can be driven
by either of two sweep systems, simultaneously or inde-
pendently, or from their external inputs. Front-panel con-
trols permit using "A" sweep as a delaying sweep and
"B" as the delayed sweep. In this mode of operation the
upper beam is intensified for the duration of the "B"
sweep. "B" sweep may also be used for single-sweep
operation.
There are rear-panel outputs of: Vertical Signals, Hori-
zontal Signals, +Gate, Delayed Trigger, and Auxiliary
Power.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible
through use of 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— 1 /xs/div to 5 s/div.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER — 10X, extends sweep range to 0.1
jus/div.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS —
Internal: 2 minor divisions of deflection up to 50 kHz,
increasing to 1 major division at 2 MHz.
External: 0.5 V up to 50 kHz, increasing to 1 V at 2 MHz.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY — 10^s to 50 s, continuously
variable.
EXTERNAL INPUT— Approx 100 mV/div to 300 V/div: DC
to 350 kHz; input resistance 100 kilohms, ±20%.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA — 10 x 10 cm (each beam scans 8 cm ver-
tical, overlap of the two beams is 6cm). Major grati-
cule division equals 1 cm, minor division equals 2 mm.
Illuminated no-parallax graticule.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR — 1 mV to 1 00 V, 1-kHz square
wave, in six steps.
REAR-PANEL SIGNAL OUTPUTS — Output impedance
approx 500 ohms; max load 2 mA.
POWER REQUIREMENTS — 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V,
600 watts.
127
VERTICAL DEFLECTION SYSTEMS
Characteristics of the two vertical systems depend upon the
2-Series or 3-Series Amplifier Units used. Please refer to the
plug-in chart for more information on these vertical amplifier
units. (The 565 does not use Sampling Plug-In Units.)
TRIGGER
SENSITIVITY— 0.5 volts or 2 minor divisions up to 50 kHz,
decreasing to 1 volt or 1 div at 2 MHz.
"AC" coupling time constant — approx 10" 2 s (0.01 /xF and
1 MQ).
"AC FAST " coupling time constant— 10" 5 s (lOOpFand 100 k).
HORIZONTAL SWEEP GENERATORS
RANGE— 1 ,us/div to 5s/div in 21 calibrated steps, 1-2-5
sequence. Accuracy ±3%.
VARIABLE — Control permits continuous adjustment (uncali-
brated) from 1 jus/div to 1 2 s/div.
MAGNIFIER — 10X Magnifier permits expanding any 1 divi-
sion portion of the display a full 10 divisions, accuracy
±5%. The magnifier can be used to extend the sweep
rate to 0.1 /xs/div.
HORIZONTAL AMPLIFIERS
DEFLECTION FACTOR— Approximately lOOmV/div to 300 V/
div, continuously adjustable. Maximum input voltage:
300 V RMS
INPUT RESISTANCE— 100 kilohms, ±20%.
BANDWIDTH— DC-to-350 kHz, at maximum sensitivity. Band-
width is specified at — 3 dB.
DELAY INTERVAL
RANGE — 10/j.s to 50 s calibrated and continuously adjustable.
INCREMENTAL ACCURACY— ±0.5%.
JITTER— 1 part in 20,000.
CALIBRATOR
RANGE — 1 mV to 100 V peak to peak in 6 decade steps,
positive-going square wave.
ACCURACY— ±3%.
FREQUENCY— Approximately 1 kHz.
REAR-PANEL OUTPUTS
VERTICAL SIGNAL OUT (both upper and lower)— Signal
amplitude, DC level, and transient response depend on the
vertical plug-in unit used. Typical signal amplitude: 2 V/div
to 4 V/div of display; DC level ±20 V. Output impedance:
approx 500 ohms; maximum load current 2 mA.
HORIZONTAL OUTPUTS (both upper and lower)— Signal
amplitude, at least 50mV/div of display in External posi
tion and 0.5 V/div of display in Sweep position. DC leve^ -
to +5 volts. Output impedance: approx 500 ohms;
maximum load current 2 mA.
128
565
rm565
2-SERIES AND 3-SERIES AMPLIFIER PLUG-IN UNITS*
Type
INPUT RC
(AC or DC coupled)
BANDWIDTH
(-3 dB)
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
PRICE
2A60 — Single Trace
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 V max
DC— 1 MHz
50mV/div — 50V/div, 4 decade steps,
with variable control.
$105
2A61 — Differential
(low level)
10 megohm — 50 pF,
=h5 V (AC-coupled only)
0.06 Hz—
300 kHz
lO^V/div — 20mV/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
385
2A63 — Differential
(50:1 rejection ratio)
DC— 300 kHz
1 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
150
3A1— Dual Trace , me gohm— 47 pF,
(identical channels) A00 vdts max
DC— 10 MHz
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
450
3A2**— Dual Trace
DC— 500 kHz
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
500
3A3 — Dual Trace
Differential
DC— 500 kHz
100/xV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
790
3A5 Automatic/
Programmable
1 Megohm — 24 pF
DC— 15 MHz
1 mV/div— 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
760
3A6 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
1 megohm — 47 pF,
600 volts max
DC— 10 MHz
(has delay line)
lOmV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
540
3A7 — Differential
Comparator
DC— 10 MHz
1 mV/div— 50 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
635
3A8 — Operational
Amplifier
3A72 — Dual Trace
(identical channels)
3A74 — Four Trace
(identical channels)
3A75 — Single Trace
DC— 3.5 MHz
20mV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
600
DC— 650 kHz
lOmV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence, 275
with variable control.
DC— 2 MHz
20mV/div— 10 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
590
DC^l MHz
50 mV/div— 20 V/div, 1-2-5 sequence,
with variable control.
175
3C66 — Carrier
Amplifier
120-fi strain-
gage bridge
DC— 5 kHz
(70 jjls risetime)
1 /xstrain/div— 1 0,000 ^.strain/div, 1 -2-5
sequence, with variable control.
400
*For 3-Series Spectrum Analyzer Plug-In operation, consult your Tektronix Field Office or Spectrum Analyzer Manual. 2 and 3-Series Time Base
Plug-Ins can be used for raster generation.
"Designed primarily for the Type 567 Digital Readout Oscilloscope.
OPERATIONAL FEATURES
(pertain to both sweep systems except as indicated for "B" sweep)
A AND 8 +GATES— Pulse height 20 V minimum; DC level
zero volts. Output impedance: approx 500 ohms; maximum
load current 2 mA.
DELAYED TRIGGER— Fast-rise pulse amplitude +8V mini-
mum; DC level zero volts. Output impedance: approx 50
ohms; maximum load current 2 mA.
REAR-PANEL AUXILIARY POWER PLUG
OUTPUTS — Power supply outputs for future accessories.
POWER REQUIREMENT
OPERA T/ON— 105 V to 125 V, 50 to 60 Hz.
VOLTAGE— 99 V to 132 V or 198 V to 265 V (through use of
selectable transformer taps).
WATTAGE — 600 watts maximum (depends upon plug-in com-
bination).
TRIGGER FACILITIES
Trigger selection is accomplished by slide-switch logic. This
arrangement allows quick selection and quick visual checks.
Sequence is as follows:
1. EXTERNAL, INTERNAL (upper or lower beam), or LINE
frequency triggering.
2. COUPLING can be AC, AC FAST, or DC.
3. SLOPE can be + or — for triggering on the positive-going
or negative-going portion of the selected waveform.
4. The Level control permits triggering on the desired portion
of the waveform. At the CCW stop of this control, the trig-
ger is in the Automatic Mode. The sweep free runs at about
a 50-Hz rate (in the absence of a signal) giving a refer-
ence trace but will automatically trigger on incoming
trigger signals of a higher frequency. At the CW stop of
this control, the sweep free runs.
129
565
rm565
The Type 565 is used in exploring methods of measuring
blood flow by angiography. Investigators initiate and evalu-
ate angiographic injectors in a wide variety of exploratory tech-
niques with artificial arteries and photography. The dual-beam
capability of the Type 565 and multi-channel plug-in units per-
mit investigators to monitor injection time and injection pres-
sure in addition to most parameters of interest in the artificial
artery such as flow, EKG, pulse, and pressure.
Waveform display shows first and second traces on the
upper beam and third through sixth traces on the lower beam.
Upper Beam sweep rate is 0.15s/div. Lower Beam sweep
rate is 0.5s/div. The configurations show:
1. Arterial Pressure at 50mm Hg/div
2. Simulated R wave of EKG
3. Artificial Arterial Pressure
4. Injection Pressure
5. Simulated EKG with delayed camera pulse
6. Delay and duration of injector solenoid
SWEEP GENERATORS "A" AND "B"
Independent operation of the two generators; delaying sweep
operation; single-sweep operation on "B" time base only,
single control selection of sweep Time/Div in a 1-2-5 sequence,
Variable control, light indicating "uncalibrated" sweep, and
a 10X Magnifier.
"B" time base mode switch positions: (1) Manual Trigger,
(2) Starts After Delay Interval, (3) Triggerable After Delay In-
terval, (4) Normal Trigger, (5) Single Sweep.
With the "B" time base switch in the "Normal Trigger" posi-
tion, each sweep operates independently. In the "Starts After
Delay Interval" and "Triggerable After Delay Interval" posi-
tions, time base "A" operates as a delay timing sweep and
time base "B" operates as the delayed sweep. The upper beam
is intensified for the duration of the "B" sweep.
In the "Single-Sweep" position, the "B" sweep is armed
by pressing a button. A ready light shows that the sweep
is ready for the first incoming trigger. Single-sweep operation
facilitates photographic recording of waveforms.
HORIZONTAL DISPLAY SWITCH (horizontal amplifier input 1
selector).
Positions include those for external horizontal input, "A"
sweep, and "B" sweep. In the external horizontal input posi-
tion, the horizontal amplifier is connected to the front panel
input connector through the Ext Horiz Gain control. In the
other two positions, the amplifier is connected to the output
of either sweep generator.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
CATHODE-RAY TUBE— Round, flat-faced aluminized 5-inch
dual-beam tube with an illuminated, internal, no-parallax
graticule. Accelerating potential is 4 kV.
VERTICAL SCAN — 8 cm (each beam), overlap of the two
beams is 6 cm.
HORIZONTAL SCAN— 10 cm.
CONTROLS — Focus, Intensity, and Astigmatism (separate con-
trols for each beam).
INTERNAL CONTRAST CONTROL— for the intensified section
of the "A" sweep. (Internal adjustment)
DEFLECTION-AXIS ROTATER— (front panel screw driver
adjustment) for electro-magnetically rotating the deflection
axis to match the graticule lines.
SCALE ILLUMINATION CONTROL— With controllable edge
lighting.
PHOSPHOR — P2 is normally supplied. See phosphor chart
for others available.
RETRACE BLANKING— DC coupled.
Z-AXIS MODULATION— Of both CRT beam grids through
rear panel connector. Time constant 3.5 milliseconds,
nominally.
CHOPPED TRACE BLANKING
CABINET MODEL
TYPE 565— Dimensions are 13'/j" high by 17" wide by
28%" deep. Net weight is 62 pounds. Shipping weight
is 92 pounds, approx.
RACK-MOUNT MODEL
TYPE RM565 — Mounts on tilt-lock slide-out tracks to a standard
19" rack. Dimensions are 12 1 /," high by 19" wide by 22"
deep. Net weight is 67 pounds. Shipping weight is 101
pounds, approx. For more mounting information, please
refer to the Mounting Dimension page in the catalog.
TYPE 565, without plug-in units $1400
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-001;
1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00]; 1 — smoke gray filter
(installed) (378-0567-00]; 1— plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00);
2— patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— post jack, BNC
(012-0092-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0269-00).
TYPE RM565, without plug-in units $1500
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00);
1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0024-00); 1 — smoke gray filter
(installed) (378-0567-00); 1— plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00);
2— patch cord, BNC-to-BNC 18" (012-0087-00); 1— post jock, BNC
(012-0092-00); 1— pair mounting slides (351-0086-00); 2— instruction
manual (070-0353-00).
SUPPORTING CRADLES
When the Type RM565 is used in a backless rack, these
supporting cradles are necessary for rear-slide support.
Order Part Number 040-0346-00 $1 1 .45
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
130
DIGITAL READOUT OSCILLOSCOPE Type
DIGITAL READOUT PLUS ANALOG DISPLAYS
DIGITAL READOUT OF RISETIME,
AMPLITUDE AND TIME DIFFERENCES
SELECTABLE HIGH AND LOW NO-GO LIMITS
EXTERNALLY PROGRAMMABLE
DIGITAL AND GO/NO-GO OUTPUTS
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
The Type 567 Readout Oscilloscope introduces a new concept
in oscilloscopes — DIGITAL READOUT of signal information in
addition to a conventional cathode-ray oscilloscope display.
With the Type 567 and associated Plug-In Units you can
make measurements with greater accuracy, speed, and con-
venience than possible when interpreting just a cathode-ray
oscilloscope display.
To make measurements, you select regions on the displayed
waveform, then read data directly in four-digit resolution.
Decimal point and unit of measure (ns, /j.s, ms, s, mV, V) are
automatically presented when time/div, amplitude/div, or pro-
gram is changed. Indicator lights show instantly whether a
measurement is WITHIN, LESS THAN, OR GREATER THAN
set limits.
Many accessories and associated instruments are available
to add to the operational versatility of the system. For example,
with the Tektronix Type 262 Programmer you can conveniently
externally program the Type 567 — with completely automatic
or manual sequencing of measurement parameters.
On a production line or in a laboratory, the Type 567 Read-
out Oscilloscope can speed-up and simplify your test and
measurement applications.
131
567
HOW THE TYPE 567 READOUT OSCILLOSCOPE AND TYPE 6RIA DIGITAL UNIT FUNCTION
SAMPLING PROCESS (SAMPLING UNITS)
With each repetition of a signal, sampling units strobe
(sample) one point at a time a little later than the previous
sample. This process of advancing the sampling instant in
fixed increments is called strobing. A reconstructed replica,
much slower than the original signal, is reproduced on the
CRT as an amplitude vs time, point-to-point graph.
HOW THEY INDICATE TIME
The equivalent time between each sample depends upon the
number of samples per centimeter and the sweep time per
centimeter. For instance, 1 ns/div and 100 samples /div =
lOps/sample. By counting the number of samples between
two selected portions of a waveform, the time between these
portions can be determined. Counter circuits drive NIXIE
indicator tubes which display the measured interval.
AUTOMATIC REFERENCE ZONES
Two intensified portions of each trace identify 0% and 100%
zones. Each zone can be positioned to cover any point on
the display. Amplitudes corresponding to the zones are
stored in voltage memory circuits. Changes in amplitude,
vertical position, or waveform automatically reestablish cor-
responding 0% and 100% memory amplitudes. There are
two voltage memory circuits for each signal input channel,
making a total of four. Each of the two traces displays its
own intensified zones.
START-STOP CIRCUITS
In a typical measurement, voltage divider taps between the
0% and 100% memory voltages are set for start and stop
timing at selected percentage points such as 10, 20, 27,
50, 73, 80, and 90% of either waveform. Coincidence of
the input waveform amplitudes with the selected percentage
reference amplitudes is sensed by comparators which open
and close the clock gate to the digital counter. The traces
can be intensified for the duration of the measured interval
as a functional check. The number of clock pulses are read
out digitally in nanoseconds, microseconds, milliseconds, or
seconds (with decimal points included) on NIXIE display tubes.
HOW THEY INDICATE VOLTAGE
Start and stop comparators gate 1-MHz clock pulses for the
period of time that a linear ramp voltage is at values be-
tween the 0% and 100% amplitudes. The number of clock
pulses is proportional to the voltage between the selected
measurement points. Readout is in millivolts or volts, with
decimal points included on NIXIE display tubes.
TYPE 567 BLOCK DIAGRAM MEASURING TIME
TYPES 567/6R1A
BLOCK DIAGRAM
MEASURING VOLTAGE
A 0%
MEMORY
A SIGNAL
SAMPLED
OUTPUT
TYPES 567/6RIA
BLOCK DIAGRAM
MEASURING TIME
START
COMPARATOR I
CRT DISPLAY
LINEAR VOLTAGE RAMP
_J
V OLTAGE ,
3*1
TV.
j^jttlfc^i
1-MHz
CLOCK
CLOCK
GATE
A 100%
MEMORY I
GATED CLOCK TO COUNTER
VOLTAGE TO DIGITAL CONVERSION
_r
CLOSES
GATE
STOP
COMPARATOR
GATED
CLOCK
UUUL.
©O0©@
^L
I
3) (hi)
DIGITAL COMPARATORS
NUMBER OF CLOCK-PULSES PROPORTIONAL TO VOLTAGE
LINEAR RAMP
GENERATOR
TYPE 567 BLOCK DIAGRAM MEASURING VOLTAGE
^■■■MM^^^^^^^^^MHi
132
567
DIGITAL READOUT COMBINATIONS
"Digital plus analog displays are simultaneously presented on the Type 567 Oscilloscope and Type 6R1A Digital Unit. A Digital Readout
Combination consists of a Type 567/6R1A and any of 5 combinations of vertical and horizontal Plug-In Urnts; Type 3S3/3T77A, 3S/6/
3T77A, 3A2/3B2, 3S3/3T4, or 3S76/3T4. Other 2-Series and 3-Series Plug-In Units can be used for normal analog CRT display, but do
not provide digital readout.
X & Y
Plug-Ins
3S3/3T77A*
3S76/3T77A*
Risetime
0.35 ns
Calibrated De-
flection Factor
5 mV/cm to
lOOmV/cm
Input
RC
lOOkn, 2pF
3A2/3B2
0.4 ns
0.7 /is
2 mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
50 n
lOmV/cm to
lOV/cm
1 Mn, 47 pF
Calibrated
Sweep Time/cm
equiv 0.2 ns/
cm to 10 /is/
cm plus 10X
magnifier
Sweep
Delay
Digital
Resolution
Trigger
External
Through
approx
100 ns
2 /xs/cm
to 1 s/cm
5 /as to
10.5 s
10 or
100 dots
per cm
1 /is to 10 ms
clock rate
in decades
Internal
or
External
System
Price
$5450
(including 2
probes)
$5050
$4450
*The Type 3T4 Programmable Sampling Sweep can be programmed through a front panel connector. Programmable
functions include sweep rates (lns/cm to 200/is/cm), 3 calibrated sweep delay ranges (1 /is to 1ms), samples per
sweep (100 or 1000 or alternately 100 or 1000), and single display for real-time measurements. Type 3T4 .... $1300.
DUAL-TRACE DISPLAY
SHOWING TYPICAL MEASUREMENTS
MEASUREMENT
6R1A PROGRAM
Risetime A
Falltime A
Risetime B
Falltime B
Delay A to B
Storage A to B
Turn on A to B
Turn off A to B
Width A
Width B
Start
+ 10%A
-90% A
-10%B
+90%B
+ 10% A
-90% A
+ 10% A
-90% A
+50% A
-50%B
Stop
+90% A
-10% A
-90 %B
+ 10%B
-10%B
+90%B
-90% B
+ 10%B
-50% A
+50%B
MEASUREMENT CAPABILITIES
TIME MEASUREMENTS can be made between 2 points on
the same waveform, or between separate points on Channel
A and Channel B. Points are determined (1) as a percentage
of signal amplitude, (2) as a particular voltage level referenced
to the signal, or (3) at a desired interval during the sweep.
With the Types 3S3/3T77A or 3S76/3T77A time differences
ranging from 20 ps up to 100 /is can be displayed. With the
Types 3A2/3B2 time differences from a few /is to 10 s can be
displayed.
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS can be made between 2 points
on the waveform: (1) peak to peak, (2) average-to-peak, (3)
peak-to-average. Also, the average DC level occurring be-
tween positionable limits can be measured.
LIMIT SELECTION presets digital comparators for automatic
readings in three categories: (1) less than lower limit, (2) great-
er than upper limit, and (3) mid-zone — between upper and
lower limits.
PERMANENT RECORDS of each test can be made with ex-
ternal equipment. The Type 6R1A provides digital and go/
no-go outputs for use with (1) electric typewriters, (2) punch
cards, (3) perforated tape, and (4) numerical printers.
EXTERNAL PROGRAMMING with the Type 262 Programmer
permits rapid sequencing of measurements without changes
in the Type 6R1 A front-panel controls. Test parameters are set
up on program cards in the Type 262, and can be selected
manually by push button or automatically (with optional acces-
sory). See Type 262 for more details.
133
567
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR, provides front-panel selection of
squarewave outputs of 20 kHz, crystal-controlled, or 1 kHz,
RC time-constant controlled. Output voltages are 5 V and 0.5 V
into an impedance of 1 MQ, or greater, or 0.5 V and 0.05 V
into 50 CI. Both connectors are BNC.
DC-VOLTAGE SUPPLIES are electronically regulated to com-
pensate for widely varying line conditions. Separate regulated
heater supply is included.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V,
50 to 60 Hz, (approximately 405 watts with Type 3S76, 3T77A,
6R1A Units). A thermal cutout switch prevents overheating of
the instrument. Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE is a 5-inch rectangular CRT using
3.5-kV accelerating potential. A P2 phosphor is normally
supplied.
ILLUMINATED, NO-PARALLAX, INTERNAL GRATICULE has
controlled edge-lighting and is marked in 8 vertical and 10
horizontal cm divisions.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Dimensions are 13%"
high by 17" wide by 23" deep. Net weight is 49 pounds.
Shipping weight is 76 pounds, approx.
TYPE 567, without plug-in units $700
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-001:
1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1— Plate, protector, CRT,
clear (387-0935-00); 1— Filter, smoke gray (installed) (378-0567-00);
2— Instruction Manual (070-0322-01).
Type RM567 rack moun t
The Type RM567 Readout Oscilloscope is electrically identi-
cal to the Type 567 but adapted to rack mounting in a stand-
ard 19-inch rack. The instrument mounts to the rack on slide-
out tracks. For more mounting information, please refer to the
Mounting Dimension page in the catalog.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Dimensions are 12'/ 4 "
high by 19" wide by 22" deep. Net weight is 50y 2 pounds.
Shipping weight is 85 pounds, approx.
TYPE RM567, without plug-in units $800
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00);
1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1 — Plate, protector, CRT,
clear (387-0935-00); 1— Filter, smoke gray (installed) (378-0567-00);
1 — Pair mounting slides (351-0086-00); 1— Set mounting hardware;
2— Instruction Manual (070-0348-01).
SUPPORTING CRADLES: When Type RM567 is used in a
backless rack, these cradles are necessary for rear slide support.
Order Part Number 040-0346-00 $11 .45
MAINTENANCE of the Type 567 or RM567 and the plug-in
units will require these items:
Plug-In Extension for Sampling and Digital Units.
Order Part Number 012-0066-00 (24-pin extension)
Circuit-Board Extensions for Digital Unit
Order Part Number 012-0068-00 (20-pin extension)
Order Part Number 012-0067-00 (15-pin extension)
$23.00
$25.00
$20.00
These items are offered for the convenience of companies
with in-plant instrument maintenance facilities. If you intend
performing your own maintenance, please include 2 plug-in
extensions and 2 circuit-board extensions (one each of 15-pin
and 20-pin extensions). One set of 4 will usually be adequate
for maintenance of several instruments.
134
DIGITAL UNIT Type
PRESENTS OSCILLOSCOPE MEASUREMENTS IN DIGITAL FORM
s DIGITAL READOUT PARAMETERS
PULSE AMPLITUDE
PULSE RISE AND FALL
PULSE WIDTH
TIME INTERVAL
• PROVISIONS FOR EXTERNAL PROGRAMMING AND READOUT
LIMIT SETTINGS AND INDICATORS
NOTE: In this presentation, any reference to A or B Chan-
nel or A or B trace designates use of a dual-trace unit in the
vertical channel of the Type 567 Readout Oscilloscope (along
with a sweep unit in the horizontal channel).
The Type 6R1 A Digital Unit equips a Tektronix Type 567
or Type RM567 Oscilloscope for digital readout. Used with
vertical and timing units, the Type 6R1 A enables pres-
entation of digital data for a wide variety of repetitive-
pulse measurements. The digital presentations can desig-
nate voltage measurements, time-difference measurements
between similar pulses, and time-difference measurements
between percentages of pulse amplitudes. In addition,
the Type 6R1A has provision for external programming to
facilitate automatic sequential operations. The Type 6R1A
enables these time and amplitude measurements to be
read directly with up to 4 digit units of measurement.
Output connectors are provided on the rear panel to
permit recording of the displayed digits on a printer, card
punch, tape recorder, electric typewriter, etc.
The 6R1A contains the circuitry for the analog to dig-
ital and digital readout functions of the Type 567 Read-
out Oscilloscope. The characteristics are described by
giving the purpose of each front-panel control.
GO/NO-GO CONTROLS
LOWER LIMIT SET presets the lower limit. Any digital read-
ing less than the lower limit causes the LOWER LIMIT indicator
to light.
UPPER LIMIT SET presets the upper limit. Any digital read-
ing greater than the upper limit causes the UPPER LIMIT in-
dicator to light. Readings between the lower and upper limits
cause the MID-ZONE indicator to light.
135
6R1A
MODE SWITCH
The type of measurement to be made (time or voltage) is
selected by the Mode Switch.
TIME STOP ( — ) START sets the 6R1A to measure time
durations set between the start and stop of timing circuits.
VOLTAGE A sets the Type 6R1A to measure voltage between
A Channel 0% and 100% memory zones. Polarity is selected
by an adjacent slide switch.
VOLTAGE B sets the Type 6R1A to measure voltage between
B Channel 0% and 100% memory zones. Polarity is selected
by an adjacent slide switch.
EXTERNAL PROGRAM sets the Types 6R1A to accept pro-
gramming from an external source, such as the Tektronix Type
262 Programmer. The variety and flexibility of measurements
possible with external programming are even greater than those
possible through use of the Type 6R1A front-panel controls and
measurements and limits can be changed more rapidly.
RESOLUTION SWITCH
Time measurements are performed by gating clock-pulses
during the measurement interval. The clock in the case of
sampling is the samples per unit equivalent time. For in-
stance, sweep speed = lOns/div, samples/div = 100, then
equivalent time/sample = 0.1 ns. If a measurement inter-
val occupied 2.5 div, 250 samples would be registered in the
digital readout counter. Reading would be 25.0 ns on the
readout indicator.
AVERAGE 10 SWEEPS-LO minimizes random noise that
could be associated with a measurement. The digital readout
counter registers 10 timing intervals (sweeps) and automatically
divides the reading by 10. The unit's numerical readout indicator
is rendered inoperative so no reading shows even though its
scalar is operating. For sweep speed with multipliers of 2
or 5 the counter only registers 1 out of 2 or 5, respectively,
clock-pulses and repositions the decimal point to give the
correct reading.
AVERAGE 10 SWEEPS-HI permits obtaining reading to high
resolution using all four decades. Same as LO except that
the unit's numerical readout indicator is restored to operation.
ONE SWEEP-LO registers one sweep only in the digital read-
out counter.
ONE SWEEP-UNSCALED enables obtaining maximum res-
olution in just one sweep in the 2 and 5 multiplier positions.
Only one sweep is used to fill the digital counter. The reading
on the indicator will only be relative on the 2 and 5 multiplier
positions of the plug-ins. Decimal points and units of meas-
urement are not indicated in this position to show that read-
ings are only proportional to time.
DISPLAY TIME CONTROL
A control, continuously variable between approximately 5 s
and 0.1 s, holds the display for the time needed to observe
readings or operate peripheral equipment. (Can be modified
for variable control between 1 s and 10 ms for use with high-
speed automatic testing.)
MEMORY MODES
The Type 6R1A has 2 internally-selected memory modes:
averaging and peak to peak. The mode of operation is made
apparent by neon indicators on the front panel. When Types
3A2 and 3B2 Plug-In Units are used, digital readout of ampli-
tude requires an input waveform with constant amplitude for
at least 5^,s, in order to establish a 100% reference level.
AVERAGE MODE stores the average DC level of the signal
occurring during the 0% and 100% memory zones, to develop
TIMING START and TIMING STOP percentage levels. Zones
are adjustable in width and positionable on the sweep.
PEAK TO PEAK MODE stores the most negative and most
positive levels of the signal occuring during the 0% and 100%
memory zones, respectively. Zones are adjustable in width
from 0.1 div to 10 div and positionable on the sweep.
ZONE POSITIONING CONTROLS
A 0% and 100% controls position the 0% and 100% ref-
erences on the displayed waveform. Each zone representing
a selected portion of the total sweep is positionable through-
out 9 div or more of the A sweep.
B 0% and 100% controls duplicate on Channel B the
functions of A 0% and 100% positioning.
0% AND 100% INTENSIFICATION turns on and off two
intensity markers on each trace at 0% and 100% zones.
START-TO-STOP INTENSIFICATION turns on and off the
start-to-stop zone on the displayed waveform which allows
verifying start-to-stop interval.
START-TIMING CONTROLS
These controls program the initiation of timing.
+ SLOPE, — SLOPE selects which direction of the waveform
will be used to start the timing.
FIRST, SECOND (Cycle) allows selecting start-timing on
either the first or second cycle of the waveform through
the selected start-timing setting.
TIMING START provides 7 calibrated percentage steps at
10, 20, 27, 50, 73, 80 and 90% from either A or B trace (in
references to 0% and 100% zone amplitude). Automati-
cally starts timing at the selected percentage. The 27% and
73% positions are used for 1 time constant measurements and
are useful for TC readings (10% to 73% and 27% to 90%)
without resorting to slide rule.
MANUAL START enables start-timing at any point on the
waveform. Continuously variable over 9 div or more of the
sweep.
START VOLTAGE + OR — selects which polarity from 0%
zone the waveform will start timing after reaching the amplitude
as set by the START VOLTAGE 10-turn dial setting.
DELAY-TIME INTERVAL MEASUREMENT
Start: +50% A Trace Stop: +50% B Trace
136
6R1A
START VOLTAGE 10-turn dial permits start-timing continuous-
ly variable between 0-10 CRT divisions of amplitude from 0%
zone reference.
STOP-TIMING CONTROLS
Program the termination of the timing interval. Identical in
capability and operation to the start-timing controls in all other
respects.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
READOUT is in a numerical range from 0.0001 to 9999.
Display time is variable between approximately 5 s and O.l s.
Units of measure include: microvolts, millivolts, and volts;
nanoseconds, microseconds, milliseconds, and seconds.
DIGITAL READOUT ACCURACY of the 6R1A, in addition
to providing measurement results in fast, convenient digital
form, reduces the magnitude of measurement errors that are
attributable to the visual resolution difficulties of a cathode-
ray tube display. For assistance in determining system accuracy
in specific applications, consult your Field Engineer.
INPUT is internally connected from horizontal and vertical
plug-in units.
MECHANICAL FEATURES include an aluminum-alloy chassis
and anodized front panel. Net weight is l3 3 / 4 pounds. Ship-
ping weight is 21 pounds, approx.
TYPE 6R1A DIGITAL UNIT $2600
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0411-00).
EXTERNAL PROGRAMMING
See information on Type 261 Coaxial Switch, Type 262 Pro-
grammer, and associated accessories. For custom arrange-
ments, one or both of the following connectors will be
necessary.
41 -pin Connector for external programming and control.
Part Number 131-0239-00 $15.00
55-pin Connector for external read-out (limit lamps, etc.).
Part Number 131-0240-00 $18.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
TYPE 6R1A DIGITAL UNIT
BEK IS I
wr mm
Start: 50% A Trace
1st + slope
Stop: 50% A Trace
InA -l-clnnp
T/ME-CONSTANT MEASUREMENT
Start (from) Stop (to)
277- A Trace +73% A Trace
137
DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT
TIME-BASE UNIT
Tektronix Type 3A2 Dual-Trace Amplifier Unit and Type
3B2 Time-Base Unit enable low and medium frequency
digital read-out with the Type 567 Oscilloscope and Type
6RI A Digital Unit. They also provide analog displays when
used with Type 561 A or 564 Oscilloscopes.
TYPE 3B2 TIME-BASE UNIT
TYPE 3A2 DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT
OPERATING MODES are Channel 1, Channel 2, Added,
Alternate, or Chopped. In chopped operation, successive 12
fis segments of each channel are displayed at an approx 40
kHz rate per channel. Chopped transient blanking is provided.
DEFLECTION FACTOR is from lOmV/div to lOV/div in 10
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%.
An uncalibrated control permits continuous adjustment between
steps and to approximately 25 V/div.
AMPLIFIER BANDWIDTH is DC to 500 kHz for analog dis-
play.
SEPARATE CONTROLS include those for attenuation, inver-
sion, positioning, and AC or DC-coupling of each channel.
TRIGGERING can be from Channel 1, Channel 2, or from
the signal displayed on the screen.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm, paralleled by approximately 47 pF.
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE INPUT is 600 V (DC plus peak AC).
NET WEIGHT is 5'/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3A2 DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT $500
Each instrument includes: 1 — patch cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-
00); 2— instruction manual (070-0354-00).
TRIGGERING LEVEL operates over a ±12-volr range.
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal with 2-mm signal dis-
play, external with 0.4-V signal, or line.
TRIGGER COUPLING can be AC Slow, AC Fast, or DC;
± Slope.
SWEEP TIME/DIV from 2/is/div to 1 s/div is in 18 cali-
brated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%. Cali-
brated digital readout available from 1 s/div through 20
/As/dlv ranges.
DIGITAL RESOLUTION selects crystal-controlled clock rates
from 1.0 /as to 10 ms in 5 decade steps. Resolution can be
selected independently of sweep time, to increase readout
accuracy when the first significant digit is known. The front
panel indicates the maximum resolution (without possible
counter overflow) that can be attained for each sweep rate.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY can be switched in or out.
Delay time is continuously variable from 5 tis to 10.5 s, accu-
racy within 1 %.
OUTPUTS are available at front-panel BNC connectors.
The Delayed Trigger output is nominally +5 V; Sweep Gate
is nominally +15 V.
NET WEIGHT is 5 pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3B2 TIME-BASE UNIT $650
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0355-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
138
SAMPLING-PROBE DUAL-TRACE UNIT Type
• COMPACT PROBES
• DUAL-TRACE DISPLAYS
• 0.35 ns OR LESS RISETIME
• 100 k®, 2pF INPUT
• LOW NOISE
• RECORDER OUTPUTS
The Type 3S3 Sampling-Probe Unit is a low-noise dual-
trace amplifier employing extremely compact sampling
probes. It has two separate channels with identical char-
acteristics and can operate in any one of five modes
for a variety of single, dual-trace and X-Y displays. The
Type 3S3 is designed to operate in conjunction with a
Type 3T77A or Type 3T4 Sampling Sweep Unit in the Type
561 A, 564, or 567 Oscilloscopes. In the Type 567, infor-
mation can be presented in digital as well as analog form.
OPERATING MODES include Channel A only; Channel B
only; Dual Trace— Channels A and B switched electronically;
A + B Outputs of Channel A and B added algebm ica'
ly; A Vertical /B Horizontal —
Channel A deflected vertically and
B horizontally for X-Y displays. Independ-
ent controls for each channel provide for trace
positioning and polarity inversion.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is 5 mV/div, lOmV/div,
20mV/div, 50mV/div, and lOOmV/div; accuracy within 3%.
An uncalibrated continuous control extends the deflection factor
to approximately 2 mV/div.
RISETIME AND SMOOTHING controls, while maintaining
correct dot transient response, adjust the instrument for: least
noise, best risetime, or a compromise of the two, with signal
source from below 25 ohms to beyond 300 ohms. A Fast-RT/
Low-Noise switch in conjunction with the Smoothing control
allows the operator to select optimum risetime at a sacrifice
in noise level. Or, he may elect for a low noise level at some
sacrifice in risetime.
At low signal repetition rates the trace may take up to
several seconds to traverse the CRT screen. A Type 3S3 in a
Type 564 Storage Oscilloscope offers the most advantageous
combination for visually displaying these signals.
RISETIME (with a 50-ohm input source impedance) is 0.35
ns with the switch set at the FAST RT position and 1 ns at
the LOW NOISE position.
RANDOM NOISE (with 50-ohm-input source impedance) can
be adjusted to a minimum value equal to an input signal
of less than 0.5 mV peak to peak.
CORRECT DOT TRANSIENT RESPONSE can be achieved
with source impedances from 25 ohms to 300 ohms.
INPUT RC is 100kn paralleled by approx 2 pF.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±1.5 V with Risetime control set to
LOW NOISE and ±3 V when the control is set to FAST RISE-
TIME. Safe overload is ±10 V.
EXTERNAL TRIGGER is required, at least 50 ns prior to
signal. Minimum repetition rate is 50 Hz.
RECORDER SIGNAL OUTPUT of Channel A, Channel B, or
Channel (A + B) is ^1 V/div (through 10 kilohms), DC-coupled
at +10 volt level.
DC OFFSET provides a means of displaying selected por-
tions of signals having off-screen amplitudes, or for displaying
signals riding on a DC voltage as high as ±0.5 V.
TRACE FINDER button returns the trace to CRT screen to
aid in vertical positioning when the trace is driven off the
screen by a large signal.
PROBES (Type P6038) used with the Type 3S3 are ex-
tremely compact. The sampling bridge is contained in the
probe head to obtain optimum results with an input RC of
lOOkQ paralleled by 2 pF. Probe can be changed from chan-
nel to channel with only minor recalibration.
NET WEIGHT is 6 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 9 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3S3 SAMPLING PROBE UNIT
(with two Type P6038 Probes) $1500
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0374-00): 2 —
P6038 Probe Package (010-0156-00), which includes; 1— P6038 probe
010-0157-00); 1— Response normalizer (011-0070-00); 1— X10 attenuator
(011-0071-00); 2— Test point jack (131-0258-00); 1— Coupling capacitor
(011-0072-00); 1— Hook tip assembly (206-0114-00); 1— Ground clip
(175-0249-00); 1 — Probe holder (352-0068-00); 1 — Bayonet ground
assembly (013-0085-00); 1— Instruction Manual (070-0400-00).
REPLACEMENT P6038 PROBE PACKAGE (Part Number 010-
0156-00) $225
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
139
Type DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT
Internal Triggering and Delay Lines
0.4-ns or Less Risetime
2 Identical Channels
5 Operating Modes
Recorder Outputs
The Type 3S76 Sampling Unit is a dual-trace amplifier
containing two separate channels which possess identical
characteristics. The unit can perform in any of five operat-
ing modes for a variety of single, dual-trace and X-Y dis-
plays. It is designed to operate in conjunction with a
Type 3T4 or Type 3T77A Sampling Sweep Unit in Type
561 A, 564 and 567 Oscilloscopes. In the Type 567, infor-
mation will be presented in digital as well as analog form.
OPERATING MODES include Channel A only; Channel B
only; Dual-Trace — Channels A and B switched electronically
on alternate samples; A+B — outputs of Channels A and B add-
ed algebraically; A Vertical/B Horizontal — Channel A de-
flected vertically and B horizontally for X-Y displays. Inde-
pendent controls for each channel provide for trace posi-
tioning and polarity inversion.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is from 2 mV/div to
200 mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, accuracy within 3%, except
on the 2 mV/div and 5 mV/div steps, which have accuracy
within 5%. A variable control permits continuous adjustment
between steps.
BANDWIDTH is equivalent to DC to 875 MHz.
RISETIME is 0.4 ns or less, with less than ±3% peak over-
shoot.
RANDOM NOISE is equivalent to an input signal of less
than 2 mV peak to peak with Smooth-Normal Switch in NOR-
MAL position and 1 mV peak to peak with Smooth-Normal
Switch in SMOOTH position.
DC OFFSET is ±1 V, referred to input, and monitorable at
the front panel at 100X magnitude. Can be used to permit
viewing of signals with off-screen amplitudes or signals riding
.on a DC voltage up to ±1 V.
INPUT IMPEDANCE is 50 ohms.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±2 V. Full sensitivity can be used
with signals up to ±2 V in amplitude. Momentary overload
limit is ±5V.
SIGNAL DELAY through 55-ns internal delay line for each
channel allows viewing of leading edge of input waveform.
TRIGGER SOURCE selects built-in trigger takeoff signal from
either channel.
RECORDER SIGNAL OUTPUT is 1 V/div (through 10 kilohms)
DC-coupled at +10 volt level, both channels.
PROBE POWER is provided on both channels for cathode-
follower probes (see P6032), Type 281 TDR Pulser, and Type
282 Adapter for high-impedance probes.
NET WEIGHT is 7'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 12 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3S76 DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT $1 100
Each instrument includes: 2 — 10X attenuator, 50 12 (017-0078-00);
2— 5-ns cable (017-0502-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0332-00).
PROBES
The following Tektronix probes are recommended for use
with the Type 3S76. See Catalog Accessory pages for complete
information on the probes.
Input Im
pedance
Use
R
C
Rating
Probe No.
Price
10:1 Attenuator
500 n
0.7 pF
16 VDC, 500 VAC
P6034
$ 35
100:1 Attenuator
5kfl
0.6 pF
50 VDC, 500 VAC
P6035
35
Selectable Attenuator
10MS2
varies
varies
P6032
220
Current
—
—
500 mA
CT1/P6040
31
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
140
PROGRAMMABLE SAMPLING UNIT Type
• CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGES
• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
• 700 OR 7000 SAMPLES PER SWEEP
• NORMAL OR SINGLE DISPLAY
• SINGLE DISPLAY START
The 3T4 Sampling Unit extends the convenience of oper-
ation of the Type 567 Digital Readout System by providing
remote control of the horizontal time base. This unit is com-
patible with the following equipment: 3S76, 3S3, and other
3-series sampling units; 561 A, 564, and 567 Indicator Units;
6R1 and 6R1A Digital Units, and the 262 Programmer.
The multiple-pin connector on the front panel affords ex-
ternal control of equivalent-time sweep steps, delay time, sam-
ples per sweep, normal or single-display modes, and single-
display start. These operations are obtained through the
grounding of certain pins of the front-panel connector. Delay
time is determined by the value of resistors added externally.
Front-panel outputs are TRIGGER OUT, which provides a
500-mV, negative pulse coinciding with the input trigger, and
SWEEP OUTPUT which provides a staircase ramp. The unit
also can be triggered internally and responds to input signals
up to 1000 MHz. The SINGLE DISPLAY feature permits photo-
graphic trace recording. The 10X MAGNIFIER extends the
on-screen calibrated sweep range. A dual-purpose front-panel
control permits manual or external scanning of the display,
thus providing convenient operation of either X-Y or Y-T
recorders.
SWEEP TIME/DIV
Equivalent-Time Sampling — 1 ns/div to 200 /xs/div, ±3%,
in 2-5-10 sequence.
Real-Time Sampling — External clock, trigger, and single-dis-
play start inputs are required.
DELAY RANGE
1. ns/div through 0.1 /is/div — 1000 ns delay range.
0.2/xs/div through 10/is/div — lOO^us delay range.
20/xs/div through 100/is/div — 1000/xs delay range.
(No delay range for 200 ^s/div sweep range, or in real-time
sampling mode.)
SWEEP MODES
-^External Input — Scanning accomplished by external signal.
Deflection factor adjustable from 5 to 20 volts/horizontal
division.
Manual Scan — Display scanned by front-panel control.
Normal — Repetitive sweep.
Single Display — One sweep each time START button is de-
pressed.
OTHER SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Samples per sweep — 100 or 1000.
Magnification of CRT display — XI and XI 0.
Front-panel sweep output — Staircase ramp, 1 volt/horizontal
division.
TRIGGERING
Trigger Inputs — Internal or External + and — . Trigger re-
sponds to inputs up to 1 000 MHz.
Trigger Output — 500 mV, negative polarity.
REMOTELY PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
Equivalent-Time Sweep Ranges.
Delay Time.
Samples per Sweep (digital read-out decimal information cor-
rect only on 1000 samples/sweep).
Normal or Single-Display Modes.
Single-Display Start (when remotely programmed for SINGLE
DISPLAY)
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Instrument is 16V 2 " long by 4V 4 " wide by 6'/ 4 " high. Net
weight is 5 3 / 4 lbs; shipping weight is ll 3 / 4 lbs.
TYPE 3T4 SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT $1300
Each instrument includes: 2— Instruction Manual (070-0439-001 .
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Connector, 19-Pin, Male, Miniature. Mates with front-panel
connector of 3T4 Unit for external programming.
(131-0388-00) $32.50
Extender Card, 56-Pin (Modified 262). The card is a rigid
extension which enables the printed-circuit cards to operate
out of the Type 3T4 for servicing convenience.
(012-0078-00) $20.00
Remote Program Cable, 10 ft long, 19-Pin Miniature Con-
nector, Male to 36-Pin Male Miniature Connector.
(012-01 01 -00) $85.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please lefer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
141
Type SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT
Triggering Through I Gigahertz
TO ^s/ div to 0.02 ns/div Sweep Range
Variable Sweep Delay
Single-Display Provision
• Recorder Output
The Type 3T77A is a Sampling Sweep Unit. It provides
subnanosecond capabilities when used in conjunction with
a Type 3S3 or 3S76 Sampling Unit in a Type 561 A, 564
or 567 Oscilloscope. In the Type 567, information can
be presented in digital as well as analog form.
TRIGGERING CHARACTERISTICS
SINEWAVE TRIGGERING
FREQUENCY RANGE is from 100 kHz through 1 GHz.
AMPLITUDE RANGE is from lOmV to 800 mV peak to peak
for external triggering. Five times more trigger amplitude is
required for equivalent internal triggering. Optimum trigger
amplitude for least jitter depends on frequency. Damaging
overload can occur at 5 V or greater.
JITTER varies with trigger amplitude, frequency and TIME/
DIV setting. Typical figures are less than 50 ps jitter for lOOmV
peak to peak 30 MHz to 50 MHz sinewave. A special synchro-
nizing mode may be used above 30 MHz for extra stability.
PULSE TRIGGERING
REPETITION RATE RANGE is from 30 p/s (limited by mem-
ory drift in the vertical plug-in) through 10 9 p/s (1 GHz).
AMPLITUDE RANGE is from lOmV to 800 mV peak to peak
for external triggering. Minimum trigger rise rate is approx
150mV/^.s. Optimum trigger amplitude for least jitter depends
on rise rate and rep rate. Damaging overload can occur at
5 V or greater.
JITTER is typically 50 ps or 0.1% of fast ramp duration
whichever is greater for pulses of 50 mV amplitude, 2 ns width
(or lOmV, 10ns width).
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
DOT DENSITY can be either 10 or 100 dots/div.
CALIBRATED SWEEP TIME/DIV is from 0.2 ns/div to 10 ps/
div in 15 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is within
3%. A variable control permits continuous adjustment uncali-
brated between calibrated ranges.
TIME EXPANDER provides XI expansion that maintains
a constant number of samples per centimeter. Extends cali-
brated sweep range to 0.02 ns/div.
MANUAL OR EXTERNAL SCANNING of the display pro-
vides convenient operation of remote recorders. At least 5 V/
div (positive-going) is required for an external sweep.
SINGLE DISPLAYS useful for photography or storage can
be initiated by a reset button.
RECORDER SWEEP OUTPUT is at} V/div (through 10
kilohms), useful for driving recorders and other devices.
TIME POSITION provides a sweep delay range of at
least one full horizontal scale, unexpanded, and at least ten
scales (100 div) when expanded.
NET WEIGHT is 5y 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 9 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3T77A SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT $650
Each instrument includes: 2—1 OX attenuator, 50 fi (017-0078-00);
1— Adapter, BNC-to-GR (017-0064-00); 2— 10-ns GR cable (017-
0501-00); 1— Adapter, BNC-to-UHF (103-0032-00); 2— Instruction Manual
070-0546-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
142
• FOR 567/6R1A DIGITAL READOUT COMBINATION
• UP TO 8 DIFFERENT MEASUREMENTS FOR EACH TYPE 262
• UP TO 3 TYPE 262's OPERATE TOGETHER FOR 24 MEASUREMENTS
• UP TO 8 MEASUREMENTS PER SECOND
• PUSH BUTTON MEASUREMENT SELECTION OR
• OPTIONAL AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF MEASUREMENTS*
• OPTIONAL SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL OF OTHER EQUIPMENT
The Type 262 Programmer makes it possible to remotely
control the measurement and readout capabilities of the 6R1A
Digital Unit. Any set of up to eight different pre-selected
time or voltage measurements can be made with each Type
262 used. The measurements are made from the same signal
as is displayed on the Type 567 cathode-ray-tube screen, using
plug-in units that furnish digital data to the 6R1A Digital Unit.
The kind of measurement selected is determined by the cir-
cuits on each of eight plug-in circuit cards that are plugged
into the Type 262 during operation. Other plug-in program
cards may be interchanged for a different set of measurements
when different measurements are required.
* Automatic sequencers are required.
Up to three Type 262's may be used together at any one
time to make up to 24 different tests or measurements without
interchanging program cards.**
When a Type 6R1A is under the control of a Type 262
the circuits on the program cards take the place of circuits
otherwise selected from the front panel of the 6R1A. Each
wired program card represents a particular combination of
some front panel control settings on the 6R1A.
PROGRAM CARDS
Plug-in program cards come ready for wiring. Cards are
wired by soldering in appropriate jumpers and resistors accord-
ing to instructions in the manual for the 262.
Each card is wired for a particular time or amplitude meas-
urement. Examples are: risetime, delay time, pulse duration,
pulse amplitude, time interval between two pulses. Upper and
lower test limits can also be selected by wiring the cards as
instructed.
If a change of measurement is desired, the plug-in program
cards can be removed and other pre-wired cards inserted in
a matter of seconds. Or the cards can be easily rewired.
AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT CONTROL
The Type 262 also accommodates 8 auxiliary equipment plug-
in programming cards. The connectors from the auxiliary cards
have parallel connections to 54 control lines available at the
rear-panel of the Type 262 for controlling signal attenuators,
signal generators, trigger source switches, signal switches,
power supplies, etc., in step with the 6R1A measurement
sequence.
* Cable capacitance and environmental noise limit the number of program-
ners that can be used in series.
143
262
MANUAL CONTROL
Front-panel push-buttons allow manual selection of measure-
ments. The sequence is determined by the operator and any
step in a program can be held for as long a period as needed.
The measurement rate is determined by the Type 6R1A.
EXTERNAL CONTROL
Measurements can be selected externally through control
lines available at the rear-panel connector. Selection is by
contact closure to ground.
AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE CONTROL
The Type 262 is pre-wired to facilitate the installation of an
Automatic Sequencer consisting of a synchronizer board and
a counter board. This accessory will automatically control
sequence of up to 8 measurements per Type 262.
Front-panel switches allow an automatic sequence to be
interrupted in accordance with pre-established upper and
lower limits. Any combination of the upper, middle, or lower
limits can be used.
The position of the boards can be interchanged to achieve
any particular sequence of measurements wanted.
The Automatic Sequencer can be synchronized with data
recording devices such as printers, card punches, or with
various test fixtures.
Both manual push-button control and external control are
still available when the Automatic Sequencer is installed.
Up to three Type 262 Programmers can be used in series
for a total of 24 different measurement programs. For auto-
matic sequencing, each individual Type 262 requires an Auto-
matic Sequencer accessory.
MEASUREMENT RATE
WITHOUT AUTOMATIC SEQUENCER
The measurement rate is governed by the Type 6R1A dis-
play time of 0.1 to 6 seconds, and is also dependent upon
the sweep time.
WITH AUTOMATIC SEQUENCER
With the Automatic Sequencer installed, the measurement
rate can be synchronized with auxiliary equipment or can
be determined by the Type 567 and Type 262.
In a non-synchronized mode of operation, the measurement
rate is determined by the sum of the Type 6R1A display time
and the Type 262 display time. Display time of the Type 262
is continuously variable within the range of 50 to 500 milli-
seconds. In this mode, up to 8 measurements per second can
be made.
In a synchronized mode of operation, the display is held,
upon completion of a measurement, until an external comple-
tion pulse is received. In the synchronized mode, up to 6 meas-
urements per second can be made.
MECHANICAL FEATURES
The Type 262 mounts in a standard 19" rack and occupies
only 5 1 /,," of rack height. It has slide-out tilt-lock tracks that
permit it to be pulled forward, tilted, and locked in any of five
positions for convenient programming and servicing. Cabinet
feet are included for installation when not rack-mounted.
TYPE 262 PROGRAMMER $1350
Each instrument includes: 1 — Cabinet feet kit (016-0052-00); 4 — Washer
(210-0833-00); 4— Washer (210-0917-00); 4— Screw (212-0512-00); 4—
Screw (212-0561-00); 1— Pr Mounting tracks (351-0085-00); 1— Power
cord (161-0022-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 6R1A to
262 cable (012-0081-00)*; 2— Instruction Manual (070-0399-00).
*lf the Type 262 is to be used with another Type 262, indicate
on your order that you need a 262/262 cable (012-0082-00) rather
than a 262/6R1A cable (012-0081-00).
NECESSARY ACCESSORIES FOR BASIC OPERATION
For basic operation of the Type 262, at least one program
card is required.
PROGRAM CARD (Part Number 018-0007-00) each ... $25,
PROGRAM CARD EXTENSION
A 56-pin rigid extension enables the program cards to
operate out of the Type 262 housing for servicing convenience.
56-PIN RIGID CARD EXTENSION
(Part Number 012-0078-00) $20
OPTIONAL RESISTOR KIT
A resistor kit containing 176, y 4 W, 1% resistors is available
for use with program cards.
RESISTOR KIT (Part Number 016-0056-00) $50
Complete instructions to program the cards are included in
the instruction manual.
AUTOMATIC SEQUENCER ACCESSORY
A sequencer, composed of a synchronizer board and a counter
board, provides for automatic scan of up to 8 programs per
Type 262.
AUTOMATIC SEQUENCER (Part Number 040-0331-00) . $215
SYNCHRONIZER BOARD Only
(Part Number 018-0005-00) $95
COUNTER BOARD Only (Part Number 018-0006-00) . . $120
AUXILIARY PROGRAMMING CARDS (not furnished with
Type 262)
The Type 262 accommodates 8 auxiliary plug-in program-
ming cards. Each card has gold, through-hole plating for
best possible electrical contact.
CARD with 1 1 reed relay assembly ^^
(Part Number 018-0003-00) $25 I ^
CARD only (Part Number 018-0004-00) $18
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
144
SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
The usefulness of the Type 567 and Type RM567 Oscillo-
scope is further augmented by a wide range of accessories
and associated instruments. Brief descriptions of some
of these are given here. For full specifications, please
refer to each instrument on the page listed in the index.
TYPE 109 PULSE GENERATOR
Produces 0.25-ns risetime pulses of either equal or alternately
different time duration. Pulse width is 0.5 to 100 ns at full
repetition rate of 550 to 720 p/s; and to 300 ns at half repeti-
tion rate.
Pulse amplitude is variable from V through 50 V, accuracy
within 3%. Polarity can be either positive or negative.
External DC charge voltage inputs permit alternate pulses
of different amplitudes and/or polarity.
TYPE 1 09 PULSE GENERATOR $360
TYPE 1 1 1 PULSE GENERATOR
The Type 111 is a high-repetition rate, fast-rise pulse gen-
erator that provides two pulse outputs:
OUTPUT PULSE has a risetime < 0.5 ns for positive and
negative polarity. Repetition rate is variable from 10 p/s to
100 kHz. Pulse duration is 2 ns to 1500 ns with an external
charge line. Pulse amplitude is ±10 V.
PRETRIGGER PULSE amplitude is =;10V, duration is 250 ns,
and half-amplitude risetime is 5 ns (approx).
Time delay between pretrigger and output pulse is variable
from 30 ns to 250 ns.
'TYPE 111 PULSE GENERATOR $365
TYPE 113 DELAY CABLE
The Type 113 Delay Cable provides 60-ns delay so trigger
signals can arrive ahead of the vertical deflection signal.
The Type 113 has a to 50% risetime of about 0.0025 ns,
and 10 to 90% risetime of better than 0.1 ns. Impedance is
50 Q ±1%.
TYPE 113 DELAY CABLE $250
TYPE 280 TRIGGER COUNTDOWN UNIT
The Type 280, used with the Type 3T77A or Type 3T4, allows
synchronization on frequencies up to 5 GHz. The Type 280
can be used to lower the frequency of the triggering signals
to within a range of 15 to 45 MHz. This permits the trigger
circuit of the sampling system to lock in solidly with a much
higher input signal frequency.
Input frequency is from 30 MHz to 5 GHz; input signal range
is 50 mV to 4 V, peak to peak. Output repetition rate is con-
tinuously variable from 15 to 45 MHz. Fast-rise trigger output
is 150mV with less than 0.4-ns risetime and 1.5 V with less
than 4-ns risetime.
TYPE 280 TRIGGER COUNTDOWN UNIT $265
TYPE 281 TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETRY PULSER
Type 281 is a compact current source designed for use with
Type 3S76, 4S1, and 1S1 50-Q Sampling Units; power is
obtained from their probe power connectors.
PULSE AMPLITUDE is approx 18.5 mA; RISETIME < 0.75 ns
at leading negative transition; WIDTH >5/is from negative-
going edge to positive-going edge, at 50% amplitude points;
'FLATNESS ±2% overshoot and ringing following negative-
going edge for first 10 ns, 0.5% thereafter; LOADING EFFECT
on 50-Q SYSTEM <10% reflection (capacitive).
TYPE 281 TDR PULSER $95
TYPE 292 SEMICONDUCTOR TESTER POWER SUPPLY
The Type 292 supplies DC power and connection for a sub-
nanosecond environment test fixture. The fixture can be wired
for measuring time and charge characteristics of diodes and
transistors.
The Type 292 is normally used between a sub-nanosecond
pulse generator and a 50-Q input sampling oscilloscope. Signal
connections are made directly to the test fixture through minia-
ture coaxial cables.
Test voltage range is from 1 to 20 V; bias current is from
0.1 to 200 mA. External supplies may be used for other volt-
ages and currents, limited to 1 A maximum.
TYPE 292 $325
OPTIONAL TEST FIXTURES AVAILABLE:
DIODE TEST JIG (Part Number 013-0080-00) $40
ADAPTER FOR DIODE TEST JIG (Part Number 016-0059-00) $25
TYPE CT-1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
Type CT-1 provides a means for accurate measurement of
current flow in a circuit, while keeping loading effects to a
minimum. TYPE P6040 serves as an inter-connecting cable
between the CT-1 and an oscilloscope. SENSITIVITY is 5 mV/
mA into a 50-O load. BANDWIDTH is 35 kHz to 1 GHz.
RISETIME for pulse response is less than 0.35 ns. DECAY TIME
CONSTANT is 5jtts ( approximated by 1% per 50 ns; limit,
1 /is. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE is 1000 V, DC. CURRENT RATINGS
are 500 mA maximum RMS, 100 A peak pulse.
CT-1 (ORDER PART NUMBER 015-0040-00) $17
P6040 PROBE (ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0133-00) $14
TYPE CT-1 AND P6040 (ORDER PART NUMBER 015-0041-00) $31
TYPE CT-2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND P6041 PROBE
Type CT-2 and probe are similar to CT-1 with probe, except
for lower bandwidth limits, higher RMS current rating, and
reduced sensitivity. SENSITIVITY is 1 mV/mA into a 50-Q
load. BANDWIDTH is 30% down at 1.2 kHz to 7% down at
200 MHz. RISETIME is approximately 0.5 ns. DECAY TIME
CONSTANT is 125 /is, approximated by 1% per 1 .25 jus;
limit, 25 jus. CURRENT RATINGS are 2.5 A maximum RMS,
100 A peak pulse. Though designed primarily for conventional
oscilloscopes, the longer decay time constant and higher RMS
current rating make Type CT-2 useful for some sampling oscillo-
scope applications. (Requires BNC to GR adapter).
CT-2 (ORDER PART NUMBER 015-0046-00) $17
P6041 PROBE (ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0164-00) $12
BNC to GR ADAPTER (Part Number 017-0063-00) .... $4.75
TYPE CT-3 50-OHM SIGNAL PICKOFF
The Type CT-3 provides a convenient means of picking off
a signal in a 50-Q system. Used with a Tektronix Sampling
Instrument, the CT-3 provides the link for uses as a trigger
source.
Sensitivity is 10% of the voltage under test, into a 50-Q
load. Risetime is less than 0.4 ns. Insertion impedance with
a 50-Q termination is 1 Q shunted by 4.5 /tH; or 2 Q shunted
by 4.5 /aH without 50 Q termination. VSWR approx 1.2 at
1.5 GHz.
ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0061-00 $30.00
145
SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
TYPE P6032 CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE
Type P6032 with a bandwidth of greater than 800 MHz,
permits accurate measurements of high-speed repetitive pulses.
The DC-coupled probe uses 7 plug-in attenuator heads (10X
to 1000X). Risetime is typically 0.4 ns for probe and attenuator
head. Maximum output is ±150 mV into a 50-Q load. Signal
delay is approximately 10 ns.
ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0108-00 $220
MINIATURE PASSIVE PROBES
Type P6034 permits accurate measurement of high-speed
pulses. Attenuation ratio is 10X. Input resistance is 500 Q at
DC and approximately 300 Q at 1.0 GHz with an input capaci-
tance of 0.7 pF ±0.1 pF at 1.0 MHz to 1.0 GHz. Risetime is
less than lOOps. Maximum DC input, DC-coupled, is 16 V
and, AC-coupled, is 500 V. Ringing and overshoot is <2%
on pulses >25Q source.
ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0110-00 $35
Type P6035 is similar to P6034, except that attenuation is
100X. Input resistance is 5000 Q at DC and approximately
1500Q at 1.0GHz. Input capacitance is 0.6 pF ±0.1 pF at
1.0 MHz to 1.0 GHz. Risetime is less than 200 ps. Maximum
DC input, DC-coupled, is 50 V and, AC-coupled, is 500 V.
ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0111-00 $35
Various probe nose adapters are available to facilitate
connecting to BNC, GR, etc. (See Accessory Section for details.)
VOLTAGE PICKOFF
The VP-1 and VP-2 are 50 Q "T" type voltage pickoffs for
use with Tektronix probes while introducing minimum disturb-
ance of the equipment under test. VP-1 fits the P6034 and
P6035 probes, while VP-2 fits the P6038 probe.
VP-1— ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0073-00 $25
VP-2— ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0077-00 $30
TYPE 282 ADAPTER FOR HIGH-IMPEDANCE PROBES
This accessory permits the use of conventional high-imped-
ance probes with 50-fi sampling plug-ins units, such as Types
1S1, 4S1, 4S2A, and 3S76. Now, with a wide-range sampling
timing unit (Types 1S1 or 5T3), one oscilloscope can cover
nearly the entire range of signal measurement (from power-
supply ripple to sub-nanosecond events).
Other advantages include: voltage offset, smoothing, and
overload-recovery features of sampling not normally available
with a conventional oscilloscope; no loss of DC stability with
sampling units; and excellent linearity over entire dynamic
range.
The adapter is recommended for use with P6008 or P6009
Probes. It can also be used with P6010 or P6011.
TYPE 282 PROBE ADAPTER $95
MISCELLANEOUS SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
A variety of items are available to facilitate inter-connection
between sampling plug-in units and other related devices.
Examples are: GR, UHF, BNC, TYPE C and TYPE N adapters;
50-ohm connecting cables (GR-TYPE CONNECTORS) of various
lengths; and attenuators, terminations, 50-ohm T and L fittings,
etc. (See Accessory Section for descriptions.)
GENERAL RADIO 50-Q POWER DIVIDER, TYPE 874-TPD
This divider is designed for use in broad-band 50-Q systems
where the mismatch introduced by ordinary "Tee" connectors is
undesirable. It is especially useful in a time-domain reflecto-
meter set-up where test line, pulser, and oscilloscope must be
coupled with a minimum of reflection-producing discontinuities
DIMENSIONS: Height — 2 5 / 16 ", width— 4", depth— "/m"-
NET WEIGHT: 5 ounces
TYPE 874-TPD POWER DIVIDER
ORDER PART NUMBER 01 7-0082-00 $70
MAINTENANCE AIDS
These items are offered for the convenience of companies
with in-plant instrument-maintenance facilities. If you intend
performing your own maintenance, please include 2 plug-in
extensions (one each for the dual-trace and timing units), 1
circuit-board extension, and 2 coaxial trigger cables with your
initial instrument order. One set of 5 will usually be adequate
for maintenance of several instruments.
FLEXIBLE EXTENSION — 30" long, permits Type 3S76 and
Type 3T77A Sampling Plug-In Units to be operated away from
oscilloscope.
ORDER PART NUMBER 012-0066-00 $23 /" >
15-PIN PLUG-IN EXTENSION CARD — Allows protrusion
of Type 6R1A 15-pin etched-circuit boards.
ORDER PART NUMBER 01 2-0067-00 $20
20-PIN PLUG-IN EXTENSION CARD — Allows protrusion
of Type 6R1A 20-pin etched-circuit boards.
ORDER PART NUMBER 012-0068-00 $25
56-PIN PLUG-IN EXTENSION CARD— Allows protrusion of
Type 3T4 56-pin etched-circuit boards. Also used for extend-
ing Type 262 Programmer cards.
ORDER PART NUMBER 012-0078-00 $20
TYPE 3S3 SUB-CHASSIS EXTENSION — Allows mainte-
nance of Type 3S3 sub-chassis when 3S3 is extended out of
oscilloscope.
ORDER PART NUMBER 012-0077-00 $25
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beoverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
146
DC-to-1 MHz AMPLIFIER UNIT Type
The Type 2A60 is a general purpose plug-in unit. It may
be used in the Type 561A, Type 564, Type 565, or Type 567
Oscilloscope. However, in the Type 567, the measurements
will not be presented in digital form. Used with the Type 129
Power Supply, the Type 2A60 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters,
oscilloscopes, and other indicators.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is 0.05V/div, 0.5 V/div,
5V/div and 50 V/div; accuracy is ±3%. Uncalibrated con-
tinuous control from 0.05 V/div to 500 V/div.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 1 MHz. Bandwidth is specified at
-3dB.
RISETIME is 0.35 jus.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is 600 volts.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 47 pF.
NET WEIGHT is 3 pounds. Shipping weight is 4 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 2A60 AMPLIFIER UNIT $1 05
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0263-00).
The Type 2A61 is a high-gain AC Differential Amplifier with
excellent common-mode rejection and other features that have
been optimized for low-level applications. It may be used in
the Type 561 A, Type 564, Type 565, or Type 567 Oscilloscope.
However, in the. Type 567, the measurements will not be pre-
sented in digital form. Used with the Type 129 Power Supply,
the Type 2A61 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes,
and other indicators.
OPERATING MODES include Input A only; negative Input
B only; Input A minus Input B; and CM (common mode) — for
checking differential rejection ratio.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is from 0.01 mV/div to
20mV/div in 11 steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy ±5%. Uncali-
brated continuous control from 0.01 mV/div to 50 mV/div.
BANDWIDTH is 0.06 Hz to approximately 0.3 MHz decreas-
ing to 0.1 MHz at 0.01 mV/div. Bandwidth is specified at
-3dB.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE CONTROL selects high-frequency
and low-frequency —3 dB points thus restricting the band-
width to improve the signal-to-noise ratio.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO is 50,000 to 1 below
10 kHz with a 5-V common-mode input.
LINE-FREQUENCY NOISE FILTER is a notch filter that pro-
vides better than 50 to 1 rejection of 60 Hz line-frequency noise.
Filters for 50 Hz and 400 Hz are also available.
EQUIVALENT INPUT NOISE is less than 20 /xV peak to
peak (3.5 juV RMS) at maximum bandwidth.
TRACE RESTORER button returns the trace to its normal
vertical position after the trace has been driven off the screen.
INPUT RC is 10 megohms paralleled by approx 50 pF.
NET WEIGHT is 4V 4 pounds. Shipping weight is approx
5 pounds.
TYPE 2A61 AMPLIFIER UNIT $385
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0328-00); 1 — input
cable (012-0072-00).
LOW- LEVEL
DIFFERENTIAL Type
AMPLIFIER
■JTIAL AMPLIFIER ^Jw
• #^7
^ .gin ro rcstobe ^^^M
-"«—»» «■'«-■»■»» I I JHI
POSITION
e F
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
147
Type
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER UNIT
The Type 2A63 is a differential-input amplifier plug-in unit
that can be used to make voltage measurements between two
above-ground points while at the same time cancelling in-
phase signals such as hum pickup in the connecting leads.
The Type 2A63 may be used in the Type 561 A, Type 564,
Type 565, or Type 567 Oscilloscope. However, in the Type
567, the measurements will not be presented in digital form.
Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 2A63 can
drive recorders, X-Y plotters,-oscilloscopes, and other indicators.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is from 1 mV/div to
20V/div in 14 steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy within 3%.
Uncalibrated continuous control from 1 mV/div to 50 V/div.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 300 kHz. Bandwidth is specified at
-3dB.
RISETIME is 1 jus (approx).
DIFFERENTIAL INPUT has better than 50-to-l CMR (Common
Mode Rejection) at 0.2 V/div with 50 kHz sine wave.
PHASE SHIFT between two Type 2A63 units used for X-Y
displays is nominally less than 1 ° at 50 kHz.
INTER-STAGE AC COUPLING reduces drift at high gain.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 47 pF.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is 600 volts.
NET WEIGHT is 3% pounds. Shipping weight is 5 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 2A63 AMPLIFIER UNIT $150
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0266-00).
Type
TIME-BASE
UNIT
The Type 2B67 is a Time-Base Plug-In Unit that may be used
to generate a sweep in the Type 561 A, Type 564, Type 565
(raster generation), or Type 567 Oscilloscope. However, in the
Type 567, the measurements will not be presented in digital
form. The Type 2B67 also has facilities for an external input
to the sweep amplifier.
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE is from 1 /xs/div to 5s/div
in 21 steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy 3% — with magnifier 5%.
Uncalibrated continuous control from 1 jus/div to 1 2 s/div.
5X MAGNIFIER extends sweep rate to 0.2 /j.s/div.
SINGLE SWEEP for one-shot waveform photography and
storage applications.
TRIGGER FACILITIES include Internal, External, Line; Ampli-
tude-Level Selection; AC or DC Coupling; Automatic or Free
Run; drSlope.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENT for internal is 2 minor graticule
divisions of deflection; for external, minimum is from 0.5 V at
DC to 2.0 V at 2 MHz.
EXTERNAL INPUT TO SWEEP AMPLIFIER has a bandwidth
of DC to 750 kHz and a deflection factor of about 1 V/div.
NET WEIGHT is 4V 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 5 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 2B67 TIME-BASE UNIT $210
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0366-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
148
DUAL-TRACE DC-to-10 MHz UNIT Type
The Type 3Al and Type 3A6 Amplifiers are general-purpose
dual-trace plug-in units. Performance of the two units is the
same except that the Type 3Al does not have a signal-delay
line. The Type 3A6 does contain an internal 260-nanosecond
signal-delay line that allows viewing of the leading edge of
the sweep-triggering waveform when using a high-speed time
base such as the Type 3Bl, 3B3, 3B4, and 3B5 Time-Base
Units.*
Both units have two separate channels, each with identical
characteristics. The units can operate in one of five modes
for a variety of single and dual-trace displays. Two Type
3Al's or two Type 3A6's may be used in the chopped mode
for X-Y curve tracing, but there is no provision for synchronized
switching or channel pairing. Because of its delay line, the
Type 3A6 Amplifier will show marked phasing error above
the audio range if used X-Y with other than another Type
3A6 Amplifier. Either instrument can be used in the Type
561A, Type 564, and Type 565 Oscilloscopes. They may also
be used in the Type 567 Readout Oscilloscope when digital
readout is not required. Linear scan is 8 cm.
OPERATING MODES include Channel l only; Channel 2
only; Alternate-Channel l and 2 switched electronically on
alternate sweeps; Chopped — In chopped operation, successive
4-/u.s (approx) segments of each channel are displayed at an
approx 125 kHz rate per channel (chopped transient blanking
is provided); and Added — outputs of Channel 1 and 2 added
algebraically.
POLARITY of Channel 1 can be changed to provide 180°
inversion. No polarity inversion on Channel 2.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is lOmV/div to 10
V/div in 18 steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy within 3%. Uncal-
ibrated continuous control from lOmV/div to 25 V/div.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 10 MHz. Bandwidth is specified at
-3dB.
RISETIME is approximately 35 ns.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. AC-coupled low
frequency — 3 dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF.
INTERNAL TRIGGER SIGNAL (for the time base) is selectable
either from the output of Channel 1 only, or from the combined
output of the unit.
NET WEIGHT: Type 3A1, 6 pounds; Type 3A6, 6 pounds.
Shipping weight: Type 3A1, 8 pounds (approx); Type 3A6, 8
pounds (approx).
TYPE 3A1 AMPLIFIER UNIT $450
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0343-00].
TYPE 3A6 AMPLIFIER UNIT $540
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0419-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
*The Type 3A1 and Type 3A6 can be used with a Type 2867
or Type 382 Time-Base Units, but it will not usually be possible
to view the entire leading edge of the triggering waveform
when used in conjunction with these time bases or the Type
565 and RM565 Oscilloscopes.
149
Type
DUAL-TRACE DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
100/xV/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR
DIRECT COUPLED
50,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION
CONSTANT BANDWIDTH
AT ALL DEFLECTION FACTORS
HI OR LO BANDWIDTH SELECTION
AC STABILIZATION
The Type 3A3 Dual-Trace Differential Amplifier is designed
to use in the Type 561 A, Type 564, Type 565, or Type 567
Oscilloscope. However, in the Type 567, the measurements
will not be presented in digital form. Used with the Type 129
Power Supply, the Type 3A3 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters,
oscilloscopes, and other indicators. The Type 3A3 contains
two independent high-gain amplifier channels. Either chan-
nel may be used to produce a display, or the two channels
may be electronically switched to produce dual-trace displays.
The Type 3A3 has high sensitivity with direct-coupled inputs
and a high degree of common-mode rejection.
DEFLECTION FACTOR from 100>V/cm to lOV/cm is in
16 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and is accurate within
3%. Continuously adjustable (uncalibrated) from lOO^V/cm
to at least 25 V/cm.
BANDWIDTH for both channels is selected at the front
panel. Either HI (DC to greater than 500 kHz at — 3 dB) or
LO (DC to 5 kHz at — 3 dB) bandwidth is available. The
selected bandwidth remains constant at all deflection factors.
AC STABILITY for each channel provides virtually drift-
free operation in the 4 most sensitive ranges. With AC sta-
bility, and direct input coupling, the low-frequency —3 dB
points are approximately 0.15 Hz at 1 mV/cm, 0.3 Hz at 0.5
mV/cm, 0.75 Hz at 0.2 mV/cm, and 1.5 Hz at 0.1 mV/cm.
DISPLAY MODES include CH 1, CH 2, or dual-trace with
either chopped or alternate switching. In chopped operation,
electronic switching occurs at approx a 250-kHz rate to show
successive 2-,as segments of each trace. Chopped transient
blanking is provided.
NOISE with grounded input is less than 10^V peak to peak
with LO bandwidth, less than 40 ^V peak to peak with HI
bandwidth.
DRIFT is typically less than 500/xV/hour after 30-minute
warm-up.
PHASE SHIFT is less than 2° from DC to 100 kHz between
any 2 Type 3A3 Amplifiers used in X-Y operation. Phase shift
can be adjusted to 0° at any particular deflection factor.
MULTIPLE X-Y DISPLAYS can be obtained with two Type
3A3 Plug-In Units. Dual-trace switching is synchronized, so
that one Y-channel remains plotted against the same X-channel
once the display is set up. There is no provision for consist-
ent pairing each time the system is operated.
INPUT COUPLING can be AC or DC, and is individually
selected for each input (2 per channel). Amplifier input grids
can be grounded with these same controls. With AC coupling,
the low-frequency — 3dB point is approximately 2 Hz direct,
or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF. The input R
can be disconnected by removing internal wire link.
TRIGGER PICKOFF is internally coupled, and can be
selected from CH 1, CH 2, or the composite signal after switch-
ing.
i
150
3A3
IMPACT STUDY
Chopped display of displacement and acceleration of a body
at rest being struck by a solenoid plunger. Strain gage is
differentially connected to upper channel at )00/iV/cm (DC
coupled). Accelerometer is connected single-ended to the
lower channel at 200 /iV/cm (DC coupled).
DIFFERENTIAL CF OUTPUTS are available at the plug-in
unit rear connecting pins. These ground-referenced outputs
can be used to drive recorders with high input impedance, or
other equipment. Output from CH 1 or CH 2 is a differential
~2.5-volt signal for each centimeter of displayed signal. Out-
put from the common output amplifier is a differential ~5-volt
signal for each centimeter of displayed signal. Bandwidth is
DC to ~500 kHz with a non-capacitive load. Jacks can be
easily installed at the rear of the oscilloscope to provide access
to these outputs.
INTERCHANNEL ISOLATION
ELECTROSTATIC ISOLATION is 10 6 :1 (120dB) or better
referred to input signal levels.
SWITCHING ISOLATION in chopped operation is 100:1
or better referred to centimeters of display. The switching
circuit introduces negligible interaction in all other operating
modes.
TYPE 3A3 DUAL-TRACE DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER . . $790
Each instrument includes: 4 — BNC-to-binding-post adapters (103-0033-
00); 2— BNC-to-BNC 18" red patch cords (012-0087-001; 2— Instruction
Manual (070-0408-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION
0.1 mV/cm to 10 mV/cm B
Referred to Input Connectors Referred to Input of Properly
Adjusted P6023 Probes
DC-Coupled
Input
AC-Coupled Input
With Low-Z Source
DC-Coupled
Input
AC-Coupled Input
With Low-Z Source
DC to 100 kHz 50,000:1
500 kHz
1,000:1
1,000:1
DC to 10 Hz
50,000:1
15 Hz
500:1
60 Hz
2,000:1
100 Hz
10,000:1
1 kHz to 10 kHz
1,000:1
1,000:1
100 kHz
50,000:1
500:1
500:1
20 mV/cm to 10V/cm c
(Equal to, or adjustable to, the following CMR ratios.)
DC to 1 kHz
10,000:1
DC to 100 kHz
1,000:1
500 kHz 500:1
500:1
15 Hz
500:1
60 Hz
2,000:1
A For ground-referenced sine-wave con
B With 10 volts peak to peak or less
c With common-mode amplitude at
0.1 V/cm, and with 600 volts Deak t<
imon-mode signals.
n common mode at input connectors.
nput connectors of 100 volts peak to peak or less from 20 mV/cm to
> peak or less from 0.2 V/cm to 10 V/cm.
These common-
0.1 mV/cm to 1
20 mV/cm to
0.2 V/cm to 10
mode signals
OmV/cm, ±7
1 V/cm, ±20
V/cm, ±600
will not overdrive the amplifier:
V from ground (40 V peak to peak AC)
]V from ground (400 V peak to peak AC)
V from ground (1200 V peak to peak AC)
151
Type
AUTOMATIC /PROGRAMMABLE
AMPLIFIER UNIT
AUTOMATIC SENSITIVITY "SEEKING"
PROGRAMMABLE FRONT-PANEL FUNCTIONS
DIGITAL INDICATION OF CONTROL SETTINGS
STABLE DISPLAYS
You can make measurements faster and easier with this
new high-performance plug-in unit*. Press the "seek" button
on the special 10X probe and the instrument automatically
selects the volts/division setting for a convenient display size.
This "seek" feature is ideal for applications where the instru-
ment is located out of reach, or for production-line testing
that would normally require continuous readjustment of the
volts/division control.
Upon receipt of the "seek" command, the deflection factor
is automatically readjusted so that neither peak of the dis-
played waveform extends more than 3 divisions from the
graticule center, thus establishing the display within the CRT
viewing area. Large, lighted indicators in the front-panel
window tell you at a glance the volts/division setting, input
coupling, and when the manual variable volts/division con-
trol is in the uncalibrated position.
The Type 3A5 can be operated manually for applications
that do not require the automatic features. In addition, the
automatic functions are overridden whenever the manual V/div
setting is changed. The plug-in can also be operated remotely
using the Type 263 External Programmer. Both the "seek"
feature and manual operation of the control settings are over-
ridden when the instrument is programmed externally.
Other features of the Type 3A5 include a special "AC Trace
Stabilized" circuit that minimizes trace drift. This feature is
particularly useful when the instrument is operated at high
sensitivity or when long term trace-stability is required. An
internal signal delay line insures the display of the leading
edge of the waveform.
OPERATING MODES
SEEK, MANUAL AND EXTERNAL
Seek operation selected by front-panel push button or push
button on the P6030 Probe. Manual or external operation
selected by front-panel push buttons.
SEEKING CHARACTERISTICS
DEFLECTION FACTOR
lOmV/div to 50 V/div without probe; 0.1 V/div to 500 V/div
with probe.
SEEKING TIME
<200 ms. (Time required to complete one "seek" operation.)
CYCLING TIME
2 to 4 s (interval between seek operations with "seek" com-
mand button held down continuously).
LOGIC CIRCUIT RESPONSE
Seeking circuitry functions for signal rep-rates up to 20 MHz.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
READOUT FACILITY
Bulb-and-film digits V 2 " high. Readout information includes
1 mV/div to 50 V/div (lOmV/div to 0.5 kV/div when special
10X probe activates the 10X circuit); "AC" or "DC" input
coupling, "with probe" indication, and "uncal" indication
of the variable manual V/div control.
*Recommended for use with the Type 561A Oscilloscope or Type
564 Storage Oscilloscope.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
12 calibrated steps from lOmV/div to 50 V/div, 1, 2, 5
sequence. Accuracy is ±3% with gain set to match indica-
tor. Additional steps of 1, 2 and 5 mV/div in manual opera-
tion only; accurate to ±5%. A manual control provides
variable V/div settings between all steps in all modes of
operation (uncalibrated).
BANDWIDTH (3-dB down)
DC to >15MHz, from lOmV/div to 50 V/div (all modes).
5 MHz at 1, 2 or 5 mV/div (manual mode only).
RISETIME
<23ns at a deflection factor of 10 mV to 50 V/div.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by approx 24 pF.
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
V/div setting, 10X probe attenuation factor, AC or DC input
coupling, AC Trace Stabilization, by contact closure to
ground. Vertical positioning by analog current.
P6030 PROBE
10X probe with "seek" command button and 6' cable. Sup-
plied with the instrument.
NET WEIGHT
5 1 /, lbs. Shipping weight, approx 8 lbs.
TYPE 3A5 AUTOMATIC/PROGRAMMABLE AMPLIFIER
UNIT $760
Each instrument includes: 1 — P6030 Probe (010-0195-001; 1 — connector,
37 pin (131-0422-00); 1— cover, connector (200-0o60-02) ; 2— instruction
manual (070-0500-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
152
FOR A PROGRAMMABLE SYSTEM, SEE THE TYPE 263 EXTERNAL PROGRAMMER
AUTOMATIC/ PROGRAMMABLE T
TIME-BASE UNIT yp
AUTOMATIC TIME-BASE "SEEKING"
PROGRAMMABLE FRONT-PANEL FUNCTIONS
DIGITAL INDICATION OF CONTROL SETTINGS
DELAYED-SWEEP MAGNIFIER
Used in association with the Type 3A5 Amplifier and P6030
Probe, the Type 3B5 automatically establishes a triggered
time-base display upon receipt of the "seek" command from
the probe. The time/division setting is automatically selected
to provide a convenient display of 2 to 6 cycles. Lighted
indicators in the front-panel window show the selected time/
division setting. They also indicate when the time base is not
triggered and when the manual variable time/division con-
trol is in the uncalibrated position.
The Type 3B5 features a delayed-sweep magnifier for
expanding the display by XI or XI 00. A calibrated delay
control permits any portion of the magnified display to be
viewed. When the sweep magnifier is in operation, the time/
division readout is automatically corrected to indicate the
magnified setting, and a "magnified sweep" indication lights
up in the readout window.
The automatic "seek" feature of the Type 3B5 is over-
ridden when the manual time/division control is used. Both
the "seek" feature and manual operation of the control set-
ting are overridden when the instrument is programmed
remotely using the Type 263 External Programmer.
OPERATING MODES
SEEK, MANUAL AND EXTERNAL
Manual or external operation selected by front-panel push
buttons. Seek operation selected by front-panel push button
or push button on the P6030 Probe supplied with the Type
3A5 Amplifier.
SEEKING CHARACTERISTICS
SWEEP RANGE
5s/div to 0.1 /xs/div.
SEEKING TIME
<500ms (time required to complete one "seek" operation).
CYCLING TIME
2 to 4 s ("seek" command button held down continuously).
LOGIC CIRCUIT RESPONSE
Seeking circuitry functions for signal rep-rates from 30 Hz
to 20 MHz.
GENERAL CHARACTERISTICS
READOUT FACILITY
Bulb-and-film digits V 2 " high. Readout information includes
5s/div to lOns/div sweep times, plus "Magnified Sweep,"
"Not Triggered," and "Uncalibrated" indications.
SWEEP RANGE
27 calibrated steps from 5s/div to lOns/div, 1-2-5 sequence.
Accuracy is ±3% from 0.5s/div to 0.1 /xs/div. ±5% at
1, 2 or 5 s/div, and at 50, 20, lOns/div. A manual control
provides variable time/div settings between all steps in all
modes of operation (uncalibrated).
DELAYED SWEEP MAGNIFIER
Expands the display by a factor of XI or XI 00. XI range
magnifies time/division settings from 5 s/div to 1 tis/div.
XI 00 range magnifies time/division settings from 5 s/div to
lOiis/div. Accuracy is ±3% for all magnified sweep times
except the 5, 2, or 1 s/div (±5%). VARIABLE DELAY: 10-
turn control determines portion of sweep to be magnified.
TRIGGER MODES
Internal: AC-coupled or Auto. External: AC-coupled or
DC-coupled.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Internal AC: 0.2 div of signal displayed, 50 Hz to 20 MHz.
Internal Auto: 0.5 div of signal displayed, 50 Hz to 20 MHz.
External AC: 0.5 V to 40 V peak to peak, 50 Hz to 20 MHz.
External DC: 1 V to 40 V peak to peak, DC to 20 MHz.
PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
Time/div, magnifier range, trigger-mode, slope, and coupling,
by contact closure to ground. Horizontal positioning, trigger
level, and magnifier delay by analog current.
TYPE 3B5 AUTOMATIC/PROGRAMMABLE TIME BASE UNIT
$890
Each instrument includes: 1 — connector, 37 pin (131-0422-00); 1 — cover,
connector (200-0660-01]; 2 — instruction manual (070-0538-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
AUTOMATIC SEEKING OSCILLOSCOPE SYSTEM
The Type 3A5 and 3B5 Plug-In
Units, combined with a Type 56IA
Oscilloscope or Type 564 Storage
Oscilloscope, offer a new automatic
system for making amplitude and
time measurements. By simply press-
ing the "seek" button on the special
probe, the control functions of both
plug-in units are automatically estab-
lished. This new "seek" feature
speeds up laboratory or production
measurements by eliminating fre-
quent readjustment of the front-
pane/ controls.
1 "■
t-. " • • *
1 "• - * ■*.-* ^
FOR A PROGRAMMABLE SYSTEM, SEE THE TYPE 263 EXTERNAL PROGRAMMER
153
Type
DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR UNIT
• UP TO TO MHz BANDWIDTH
• 20,000:1 COMMON-MODE REJECTION
• 11,000 cm EFFECTIVE SCREEN HEIGHT
The Type 3A7 High-Gain Differential Comparator adds to
the measurement capabilities of Type 561 A, 564, and 565
Oscilloscopes. It can also be used in Type 567 Oscilloscopes,
but does not provide digital readout. Used with Type 129
Power Supply, the Type 3A7 can drive recording equipment,
X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, or other indicators.
As a differential input amplifier, the dynamic range of the
3A7 Unit permits common-mode signals up to ±15 volts in
amplitude to be applied to the amplifier without attenuation.
With a rejection ratio of about 20,000 to 1 for DC or low-
frequency signals, differential signals of 1 mV or less on large
common-mode signals can be measured. A front-panel atten-
uator permits the acceptance of common-mode voltages up
to 500 V.
As a differential comparator, voltage measurements using
the slide-back technique can be made with this unit. The high
accuracy and stability of the DC comparison voltage, added
differentially to the input signal, makes precise voltage meas-
urements possible. Using this mode of operation, the 3A7
Unit has an effective screen height of ±11,000 cm. This is
equivalent to a ±11 -volt dynamic signal range at a deflection
factor of 1 mV/cm. Within this range, calibrated ±DC com-
parison voltages can be added differentially to the input signal
to permit a maximum of about 0.001% or IOOjuV per mm to
be resolved.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
1 mV/div to 50V/div, depending on millivolts/div and
attenuator settings. Accuracy of millivolts/div positions is
±3%. Uncalibrated continuous variation between steps and
to approx 125 V/div.
BANDWIDTH
MV/DIV
FREQUENCY
RISETIME
50mV/div
DC to > 10 MHz
< 35 ns
20 mV/div
DC to > 10 MHz
< 35 ns
lOmV/div
DC to > 10 MHz
< 35 ns
5mV/div
DC to > 8 MHz
< 44 ns
2mV/div
DC to > 6- MHz
< 58 ns
1 mV/div
DC to > 4 MHz
< 88 ns
INPUT CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT
ATTEN
MAX PEAK INPUT VOLTS MAX INPUT
Common or Differential Mode ATTEN ERROR
R ~ oo
±15V
*
IX
±15V
**
10X
±150V
±0.05%
100X
±500V
±0.15%
1000X
±500 V
±3%
*10 to 50 Mn input R.
**1X input R within ±0.1% of 10X input R.
INPUTS
Direct or AC coupled. Low-frequency response in AC mode
down no more than 3 dB at 2 Hz. Input RC: 1 megohm
paralleled by approx 20 pF.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO AT 1 mV/div
DC COUPLED >20,000:1 with ±15VDC or 30 V P to
1 P AC, DC to 20 kHz
AC COUPLED
> 1000:1 with 30 V P to P at 60 Hz, to
> 20,000:1 at 20 kHz
HF (AC OR DC
COUPLED)
> 500:1 with 30 V P to P at 500 kHz
1
COMPARISON VOLTAGE
to ±1.1 V, or to ±11 V. Accuracy: ± (0.15% of indi-
cated value plus 0.05% of V c Range).
OVERDRIVE RECOVERY
Recovers to within lOmV of reference signal within 300 ns
after the signal returns to the screen. Certain overdrive
signals can cause an additional slow (thermal) shift of up
to 5 mV in the reference level.
WEIGHT
Net weight is 5'/, lbs. Shipping weight approx 9 lbs.
TYPE 3A7 DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR $635
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0477-00).
U.S. Sales Prices t.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
154
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER UNIT Type
OSCILLOSCOPE DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER
20 mV/div- lOV/div.
DC to 3.5 MHz.
TWO OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
> 15,000 Open-loop gain.
> 10 MHz Gain-bandwidth product.
Output: ±25V, ±7.5 mA.
INTEGRAL PRECISION INPUT AND FEEDBACK
COMPONENTS
The Type 3A8 Operational Amplifier performs precise inte-
gration, differentiation, function generation, linear and non-
linear amplification. The unit can be used in any Tektronix
560-Series Oscilloscope including the Type 561 A, 564, 565
or 567 (without digital readout). Not for use with the Type
560. Signals from the operational amplifiers can be displayed
on the oscilloscope and/or fed to other devices.
Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the Type 3A8 can
drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes, and other indicators.
DEFLECTION AMPLIFIER
BANDWIDTH
DC to >3.5MHz (3-dB down).
RISETIME
<100ns.
DEFLECTION FACTOR
20 mV/div to lOV/div in 1-2-5 sequence. Nine calibrated
steps, accurate to within 3% after adjustment at 0.02 V/div.
A variable control permits continuous uncalibrated adjust-
ment from 20mV/div to approx 25 V/div.
INPUT RC
1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF.
SWITCHING FACILITIES
Signal source selection from either operational amplifier
or an external signal. AC or DC coupling. The display can
be inverted to provide the desired deflection polarity.
OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIERS
OPEN-LOOP GAIN
> 15,000 at DC.
OPEN-LOOP GAIN-BANDWIDTH PRODUCT
> 10 MHz.
OUTPUT RANGE
±25 V, ±7.5 mA. Protected against shorts to ground.
INPUT OFFSET
Voltage: adjustable to zero
Current: adjustable to zero
DRIFT
500 /uV (front-panel control).
50 pA (calibration control).
Typically <0.5mV/hour referred to input (after warmup),
averaged over 10 hours.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
<30fi at 1 MHz for compensated unity-gain amplifier.
FEEDBACK
Provisions for negative and/or positive feedback. Negative
feedback utilizes internal and/or external impedances; posi-
tive feedback utilizes external impedances only.
SELECTABLE INPUT AND FEEDBACK COMPONENTS
Front-panel switches allow independent selection of the fol-
lowing resistors and capacitors in any combination as Z-,
and Z,: 0.01, 0.1, 0.2, 0.5 and 1 megohm; lOpF, lOOpF,
0.001, 0.01, 0.1 and 1 /xF. All values are ±1% except 10 pF
and lOOpF which are adjustable.
INTEGRATION LOW-FREQUENCY REJECT
An RC network which rejects integration below approx 1 Hz
(voltage or current offset drift) can be switched in or out
as needed. Other networks can be connected externally.
155
3A8
TWO SHIELDED TERMINAL ADAPTERS are included for
construction of external circuitry for custom applications. Over
one hundred suggested circuits for special applications are
shown in the instruction manual.
NET WEIGHT
Approx 4 1 /, lbs. Shipping weight approx 10 lbs.
TYPE 3A8 OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER UNIT $600
Each instrument includes: 2 — terminal adapter (013-0048-01]; 2 —
terminal shield (013-0049-01 1; 2— BNC to binding post adapter (103-
0033-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0507-00).
BASIC OPERATING MODES
AMPLIFICATION is determined by the ratio of R f to R, due
to the high open-loop gain. This provides convenient signal
step-up or step-down with low output impedance. External
compensation extends the closed-loop gain-bandwidth (see
Compensating Adapter).
INTEGRATION is obtained by placing a capacitor in the feed-
back loop. Unlike the RC integrator, this circuit permits out-
put loading. Typical applications include magnetic core B-H
loop studies.
DIFFERENTIATION is accomplished by placing a capacitor
in the input circuit. The unique characteristic of this circuit
is the extraction of higher frequency signal components with-
out loss of signal level. It can detect minute information such
as transients and slope changes.
THREE ADAPTERS FOR THE TYPE 3A8
The adapters plug into the jacks on the Type 3A8 front
panel.
LOG ADAPTER
Mixed low- and high-amplitude signals can be measured
using the Log Adapter. Pulses and transient waveforms span-
ning three voltage decades to plus 100 volts or minus 100
volts can be displayed and measured on the same trace.
Order Part Number 013-0067-00 $75
GATING ADAPTER
With the Gating Adapter, repetitive signals with a net
integral other than zero can be integrated and displayed.
The adapter uses Operational Amplifier "2" of the Type 3A8
to gate amplifier "1" on and off in response to an external
gating signal, such as the +Gate signal from a Type 3B4 Time
Base Plug-In Unit. The signal applied to amplifier "1" is then
amplified, integrated, or differentiated only during the "on"
time.
Order Part Number 013-0068-00
COMPENSATING ADAPTER
$75
For extending the high-frequency performance of either
operational amplifier when the internal Z ; and Z f resistors
are used in any combination for gain or attenuation. The
adapter compensates for stray capacitance associated with
the internal resistors, providing an adjustment for optimum
HF response.
Order Part Number 013-0081-00 $35
Please refer to the catalog accessory pages for complete
information on the above adapters.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
156
DUAL-TRACE DC-to-650 kHz UNIT Type
The Type 3A72 Amplifier is a general purpose dual-irace
plug-in unit that has two separate channels, each with
identical characteristics. The unit can operate in any of
five operating modes for a variety of single and dual-
trace displays. This unit can be used in the Type 561 A,
Type 564, Type 565 or Type 567 Oscilloscope. However,
in the Type 567, the measurements will not be presented
in digital form.
OPERATING MODES include Channel 1 only (normal or
inverted); Channel 2 only; Alternate — Channel 1 and 2 switched
electronically on alternate sweeps; Chopped — successive 16-/iS
segments of each channel are displayed at an approx 30-kHz
rate per channel. Chopped transient blanking is provided;
Added — outputs of Channel 1 and 2 algebraically added.
MULTIPLE X-Y DISPLAYS can be obtained with two Type
3A72 Plug-In Units; both synchronization and automatic pairing
are provided. With two Type 3A72's operated in the dual-
trace mode, Channel 1 of the left-hand unit is always plotted
against Channel 1 of the right-hand unit.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is lOmV/div to 20
V/div in 11 steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy within 3%. Uncali-
brated continuous control from lOmV/div to 50 V/div.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 650 kHz. Bandwidth is specified
at —3 dB.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is 600 volts.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by 47 pF.
NET WEIGHT is 5 pounds. Shipping weight is 6 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3A72 AMPLIFIER UNIT $275
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0274-00).
The Type 3A75 Amplifier is a general purpose wide-
band plug-in unit. It may be used in the Type 561 A, Type
564, Type 565, or Type 567 Oscilloscope. However, in
the Type 567, the measurement will not be presented in
digital form. Used with the Type 129 Power Supply, the
Type 3A75 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters, oscilloscopes,
and other indicators.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is 50 mV/div to 20
V/div in 9 steps, 1-2-5 sequence; accuracy within 3%. Uncali-
brated continuous control from 50 mV/div to 50 V/div.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 4 MHz. Bandwidth is specified at
-3dB.
RISETIME is approximately 0.09 fix.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is 600 volts.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 47 pF.
NET WEIGHT is 3V 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3A75 AMPLIFIER UNIT $175
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0275-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
157
Type
FOUR-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT
^■pssnml
The Type 3A74 Amplifier is a general purpose multi-trace
plug-in unit that has four separate channels, each with
identical characteristics. The unit can operate in a number
of modes for a variety of single and multi-trace displays.
The Type 3A74 can be used in the Type 561 A, Type 564,
Type 565, or Type 567 oscilloscope. However, in the Type
567, the measurements will not be presented in digital
form.
OPERATING MODES include any one of the four channels
separately (normal or inverted); Alternate — any combination
of two or more channels switched electronically on alternate
sweeps; Chopped — successive 2-jts segments of each channel
are displayed at an approx rate per channel of: 250 kHz when
using two channels; 167 kHz when using three channels; and
125 kHz when using four channels. Chopped transient blanking
is provided.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is 0.02 V/div to
lOV/div in 9 steps, 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%.
Uncalibrated continuous control from 0.02 V/div to 25 V/div.
MULTIPLE X-Y DISPLAYS can be obtained with two Type
3A74 Plug-In Units; both synchronization and automatic pair-
ing are provided. With two Type 3A74's, two, three or four
independent displays may be obtained, properly paired: Chan-
nel 4 of the left-hand unit is always plotted against Channel
4 of the right-hand unit, Channel 3 versus Channel 3, etc.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 2 MHz. Bandwidth is specified at
-3dB.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approx 47 pF.
RISETIME is approximately 0.1 7 /xs.
INPUT COUPLING is either AC or DC. AC-coupled low
frequency — 3dB point is 2 Hz direct or 0.2 Hz with 10X probe.
INTERNAL TRIGGER SIGNAL (for the time-base) is from
one of two sources as selected; either from the output of
Channel 1 only or the combined output of the amplifier.
NET WEIGHT is 6'/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 7 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3A74 AMPLIFIER UNIT $590
Each instrument includes: 2— instruction manuals (070-0347-00], 4
BNC to binding-post adapters (103-0033-00).
BNC ADAPTERS
Adapter, BNC to Binding Post
Order Part Number 1 03-0033-00 $1 .60
Adapter, BNC to UHF
Order Part Number 1 03-0032-00 $1 .70
For BNC probes, cables, and accessories, please refer to
Catalog Accessory Section.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page-
158
TIME-BASE UNIT Type
m
NORMAL AND DELAYED SWEEPS
FLEXIBLE TRIGGERING
5X MAGNIFICATION
The Type 3B1 Time-Base Unit is used to generate nor-
mal and delayed-sweeps. Flexible triggering facilities are
similar for both the normal sweep and the delayed sweep.
The unit can be used with the Type 561 A, Type 564, Type
565, (raster generation), or Type 567 Oscilloscope. How-
ever, in the Type 567, the measurements will not be pre-
sented in digital form.
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE for both normal and delayed
sweeps is 0.5 /xs/div to 1 s/div in 20 steps, 1-2-5 sequence;
accuracy is within 3%. Sweep rates can also be varied con-
tinuously (uncalibrated) between steps and to 2.5 s/div. The
Variable control operates with the normal sweep in the normal
display mode, and with delayed sweep in all other display
modes.
5X MAGNIFIER increases the calibrated sweep rate to 0.1
iiis/div-
SWEEP DELAY permits operation of the delayed sweep
after a delay interval of 0.5 ^.s to 10 s, continuously variable
in 20 ranges. After the delay range is selected, pulling the
Time/Div knob disengages the ganged controls to allow in-
dependent setting of the delayed sweep time/div. Delay time
is continuously variable (uncalibrated) from IX to 10X the delay
range setting by means of the Delay Time and Vernier controls.
The normal sweep generator operates as the display time
base in (1) the NORMAL position, (2) the INTENSIFIED posi-
tion — where the delayed-sweep generator intensifies a portion
of the normal sweep trace, indicating the time during which
the delayed sweep operates— and (3) the TRIGGERED INTENSI-
FIED position — where the delayed sweep is armed at the end
of the delay time and starts by the delayed sweep trigger . . .
intensifying a segment of the normal sweep trace as above.
The delayed-sweep generator operates as the display time
base in (1) the DELAYED SWEEP position— displaying the por-
tion of the trace which was intensified in the INTENSIFIED
position . . . with time-jitter less than 1 part in 20,000 of the
maximum available delay interval — and (2) the jitter-free TRIG-
GERED, DELAYED SWEEP position— displaying the portion of
the trace which was intensified in the TRIGGERED, INTENSI-
FIED position.
TRIGGER FACILITIES include the following:
Normal Sweep Trigger Modes — Internal, External; AC or
DC Coupling; Automatic; ±Slope.
Delayed Sweep Trigger Modes — Internal or External; AC
or DC Coupling; ztSlope.
External Triggering — 2 Ranges from 0.5 to 15 V and 5 to
150 V, plus or minus polarity.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for both sweeps:
Internal Triggering — 0.4 major graticule divisions from DC
to 5 MHz, increasing to 1 major division at 10 MHz.
External Triggering— 0.5 V from DC to 5 MHz, increasing to
1.25 V at 10 MHz.
NET WEIGHT is 5 1 /, pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3B1 TIME-BASE UNIT $535
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0344-00).
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
159
Type
TIME-BASE UNIT
NORMAL AND DELAYED SWEEPS
PRECISION DELAY INTERVAL
FLEXIBLE TRIGGERING
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION
The Type 3B3 Time-Base Unit is used to generate normal
and delayed-sweeps. Flexible triggering facilities are similar
for both the normal sweep and delayed sweep. Calibrated
sweep delay enables accurate delay intervals to be set and
measured. The unit can be used with the Type 561 A,
Type 564, Type 565 [raster generation), or Type 567
Oscilloscope. However, in the Type 567 the measurements
will not be presented in digital form.
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE for both normal and delayed
sweeps is 0.5 ps/div to 1 s/div in 20 steps, 1-2-5 sequence;
accuracy is within 3%. Sweep rates can also be varied con-
tinuously (uncalibrated) between steps and to 2.5 s/div. The
Variable control operates with the normal sweep in the normal
display mode, and with delayed sweep in all other display
modes.
5X MAGNIFIER increases the calibrated sweep rate to 0.1
^us/div.
SINGLE SWEEP operation facilitates photographic recordings
of waveforms.
SWEEP DELAY operation permits accurate setting and meas-
uring of delay intervals from 0.5 {is to 10 s. One control can
select both the normal and delayed sweeps simultaneously
or the delayed sweep rate can be selected independent of the
normal sweep. Delay accuracy is ±1% of full scale reading
and delay time linearity is within ±0.2% of full scale from
5 /as to 2 s of delay.
The normal sweep generator operates as the display time
base in (1) the NORMAL position, (2) the INTENSIFIED position-
where the delayed-sweep generator intensifies a portion of the
normal sweep trace, indicating the time during which the de-
layed sweep operates— and (3) the TRIGGERED, INTENSIFIED
position — where the delayed sweep is armed at the end of
the delay time and starts by the delayed sweep trigger . . .
intensifying a segment of the normal sweep trace as above.
The delayed-sweep generator operates as the display time
base in (1) the DELAYED SWEEP position— displaying the por-
tion of the trace which was intensified in the INTENSIFIED posi-
tion. . .with time-jitter less than 1 part in 20,000 of the maximum
available delay interval— and (2) the jitter-free TRIGGERED,
DELAYED SWEEP position — displaying the portion of the trace
which was intensified in the TRIGGERED, INTENSIFIED position.
TRIGGER FACILITIES include the following:
Normal Sweep Trigger Modes— Internal, External, or Line; AC
or DC Coupling; Automatic; ± Slope.
Delayed Sweep Trigger Modes— Internal or External; AC or DC
Coupling; ± Slope.
External Triggering— 2 ranges from 0.5 to 15 V and 5 to 150 V,
plus or minus polarity.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for both sweeps:
Internal Triggering— 0.4 major graticule division from DC to
5 MHz, increasing to 1 major division at 10 MHz.
External Triggering— 0.5 V from DC to 5 MHz, increasing to
1.25 V at 10 MHz.
NET WEIGHT is 6 pounds. Shipping weight is 7 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3B3 TIME-BASE UNIT $585
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0365-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
160
TIME-BASE UNIT Type
J
»
DIRECT READING MAGNIFIER
FLEXIBLE, HI-SPEED TRIGGERING
CALIBRATED EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION
The Type 3B4 Plug-In Unit is a wide-range time base with
flexible, high-speed triggering facilities, and a wide-range,
direct-reading magnifier. Can be used in the Type 561 A, Type
564, Type 565 (raster generation), or the Type 567*. The Type
3B4 is recommended over the Type 2B67 for operation with
Types 3A1, 3A6 and other wideband (>5MHz) vertical ampli-
fier plug-in units.
In addition to time base facilities, the 3B4 provides a DC-
coupled external input amplifier with calibrated deflection
factors from 0.2 to 5 V/div.
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE is 0.2 jus/div to 5 s/div in
23 calibrated steps in a 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is ±3%
from 0.2 /us/div to 2 s/div ; ±5% at 5 s/div. Sweep rates are
continuously variable (uncalibrated) between steps and also
to 12.5 s/div.
DIRECT READING MAGNIFIER provides sweep expansion
up to X50 and extends the fastest sweep rate to 50 ns/div.
The MAGNIFIER control is concentric with the TIME/DIV con-
trol, providing a direct indication of both the sweep rate be-
ing magnified and the magnified time/div rate. Up to 5
magnification steps are provided, to X40 or X50, depending
on the TIME/DIV control setting before magnification. Mag-
nified sweep rates are confined to the time/div steps on the
panel, so there are no 'forbidden' (uncalibrated) combinations.
Magnified sweep accuracy is ±5%.
The MAGNIFIER control is also used to set the external
input deflection factor when the TIME/DIV control is in the
"Ext Input" position.
SINGLE SWEEP operation facilitates waveform photogra-
phy, and operation in the Types 564 and RM564 storage
oscilloscopes.
*ln the Type 567 or RM567, the 3B4 may be used as a display
time-base, but does not activate the digital readout circuitry.
In the Type 565 or RM565 (having integral time-bases) the
Type 3B4 may be used to provide a vertical time-base for
raster applications, but does not provide retrace blanking.
TRIGGER FACILITIES include:
TRIGGERING Free-Run, Automatic (with bright base-line
MODES — in the absence of a trigger), Normal,
Single Sweep.
SOURCE — Internal, Line, External, External 4- 10.
COUPLING— AC, AC LF Reject, DC.
TRIGGER POINT— ±Slope, ± Level: Two effective level
ranges for external triggering — ±15V
(Ext) or ±150V (Ext -r- 10).
AMPLITUDE 1 minor graticule division Int or 0.2 V Ext
REQUIRED— (2 V in Ext 4- 10). DC to 20 MHz.
FREQUENCY Essentially DC to 20 MHz with reduced
RANGE — sensitivity above 20 MHz.
TRIGGER LIGHT— A front panel light indicates when the
sweep is receiving a triggering signal —
especially convenient when using an ex-
ternal trigger.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT is calibrated in 5 steps
from 0.2 V/div to 5 V/div (max input ±20 V); accuracy, when
plug-in unit is matched to oscilloscope, is within 3%. The Ex-
ternal Input Amplifier is DC coupled.
NET WEIGHT is 4'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 6 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3B4 TIME BASE UNIT $400
Each instrument includes: 2 instruction manuals (070-0431-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
161
Type
A
CARRIER AMPLIFIER
HIGH GAIN
LOW NOISE
ESSENTIALLY DRIFT FREE
RECORDER OUTPUT
The Type 3C66 Carrier Amplifier with suitable trans-
ducer measures mechanical quantities that can be con-
verted to a change in resistance, capacitance, or induc-
tance. This unit may be used in the Type 561 A, Type
564, Type 565, or Type 567 Oscilloscope. However in
the Type 567 and RM567, the measurements will not be
presented in digital form. Used with the Type 129 Power
Supply, the Type 3C66 can drive recorders, X-Y plotters,
oscilloscopes, or other indicators.
The gap between mechanical engineering and electronic
instrumentation is bridged with the Type 3C66 and suit-
able transducers. The total range of applications is as
broad as the mechanical field itself and includes stress
analysis, vibration studies, and fatigue tests. Typical
quantities measured are force, displacement, acceleration,
and strain.
The Type 3C66 operates on an AC carrier principle. It
uses an AC bridge at the input to convert transducer sig-
nals into an amplitude-modulated carrier signal. The car-
rier signal is amplified by a high-gain AC amplifier and
then demodulated to obtain the CRT deflection voltages.
Advantages of the 3C66 Carrier Amplifier include:
1. Desirable high gain with essentially no drift resulting
from input signal conversion to carrier modulation
followed by AC amplification.
2. Both static and dynamic strain are measured because
of the DC to 5-kHz bandwidth.
3. Most of the undesired pickup from the input is eliminat-
ed because of selective filtering.
4. Reactive transducers (including some differential trans-
formers) as well as capacitive and resistive transduc-
ers can be used with the unit.
5. Up to four simultaneous signals to the input bridge are
possible.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is from 10 microstrain/
div (micro-inches per inch/div) to 10,000 microstrain/div when
the Type 3C66 is used with a single strain gage having a gage
factor of approximately 2. Uncalibrated continuous control
from 10 microstrain/div to 25,000 microstrain/div.
ATTENUATOR ACCURACY, when set accurately in any one
step, is within 2% on all other steps.
GAGE FACTORS from 1 to 6 are usable without changing
the steps of the sensitivity control. This range of factors is
compensated for by adjusting the Gain Adjust Control.
EQUIVALENT DC SENSITIVITY in a comparable DC ampli-
fication system would require approximately 10 microvolts/div
sensitivity for the same amount of power applied to the Type
3C66.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 5 kHz.
RISETIME is 70 microseconds, approx.
NOISE is typically equivalent to an input of 2.0 microstrain
(peak to peak) at maximum calibrated sensitivity. This approx-
imates an RMS noise of 0.5 microstrain.
DRIFT of the over-all system is primarily a function of the
transducer stability. The Type 3C66 Amplifier system is essenti-
ally drift free.
INPUT is to an AC bridge with 25-kHz excitation voltage.
One or more of the four bridge arms can have transducers
attached to them. Total bridge voltage is approximately 5 V
RMS, regulated.
162
3C66
CAPACITIVE TRANSDUCERS used in conjunction with a four-
arm resistive bridge results in the following maximum useful
sensitivities: 120-ohm bridge, 1 pF/div; 1000-ohm bridge, 0.2
pF/div; useful sensitivities are slightly lower when using long
cables.
INDUCTIVE TRANSDUCERS must have characteristics com-
patible with the 25-kHz carrier frequency to function properly.
Linear-variable-differential transformers designed for nominal
carrier frequencies of 2 kHz and higher usually operate satis-
factorily without additional circuitry.
TRANSDUCER CABLE consisting of either 3-wire or 4-wire
shielded microphone cable gives the best results in most appli-
cations.
CAPACITANCE BRIDGE BALANCE has a range of control
that allows compensation for an unbalance of up to 250 pF
across any external resistive arm of the input bridge.
RESISTIVE BRIDGE BALANCE has sufficient control to com-
pensate for most standard transducers and strain gages.
GAGE RESISTANCE RANGE is useful with cable lengths
to 100 feet and extends from approximately 50 ohms to 2000
ohms.
PHASE ADJUSTMENT permits either resistive or reactive
transducer applications to be displayed (thus making the Type
3C66 very versatile).
CALIBRATION rotary switch connects a calibration resistor
across the strain gage electrically to simulate an external me-
chanical strain. The calibration resistor supplied with the Type
3C66 Unit simulates a —400 microstrain unbalance of the
bridge and is suitable for most strain gage applications. The
calibration resistor is mounted on a handy plug-in receptacle.
No special gage dial is necessary for the unit.
To aid in calibration, a nomograph is included in the in-
struction manual. This nomograph relates calibration of the
supplied resistor to gage factors and strain gage resistances.
To include the gage factor in the calibration, merely increase
or decrease the amplifier gain proportionally.
SYNC IN AND OUT CONNECTORS are used for synchro-
nizing oscillators of two units thus eliminating low frequency
beat notes which sometimes occur when two units are used
in the same indicator at high sensitivities.
TRANSDUCER
INPUT
AC
AMPLIFIER
RECORDER SIGNAL OUTPUT is DC coupled and has an
output of about 3 V for each major division of CRT display.
DC level is adjustable to V by an internal control.
NET WEIGHT is 5 1 /, pounds. Shipping weight is 7 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3C66 AMPLIFIER UNIT $400
Each instrument includes: 1 — synchronizing cable, RG174/U (012-0063-
00); 1— 4-wire 15' shielded connector cable (012-0040-00); 2— instruc-
tion manuals (070-0357-00).
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
TYPE 3C66 CARRIER AMPLIFIER BLOCK DIAGRAM
The input circuit for the unit is an AC bridge that has an
external transducer connected into one or more of the bridge
arms. Excitation voltage for the bridge is obtained from the
25-kHz oscillator.
In operation, the transducer signals unbalance the bridge to
modulate the 25-kHz signal to produce an amplitude modulated
suppressed-carrier output. The amplitude of the signal from
the bridge is determined by amount of unbalance produced by
the transducer signal. With no signal from the transducer, the
carrier is suppressed. The phase of the bridge output is deter-
mined by the direction and type of unbalance.
The suppressed-carrier output of the bridge circuit is applied
to the AC amplifier where the desired modulation sidebands
are amplified while unwanted frequencies are rejected. An
attenuator and gain control located in the amplifier determine
the overall sensitivity of the unit.
The amplified modulation sidebands are applied to the
phase-sensitive demodulator where a carrier is added in proper
phase. The carrier permits only the desired phase to be de-
modulated.
The output of the demodulator circuit is applied to a filter
network where the undesirable modulation components are
eliminated. The output from the filter is then applied to the
associated oscilloscope through the interconnecting plug. The
signal applied to the oscilloscope corresponds exactly to the
signal applied to the input bridge circuit by the external trans-
ducer.
PHASE-
SENSITIVE
DEMODULATOR
FILTER
. TO
OSCILLOSCOPE
25 KC
OSCILLATOR
163
Type
1-to-36 MHz SPECTRUM ANALYZER
CALIBRATED DISPERSION
COUPLED RESOLUTION
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED SWEPT
OSCILLATOR
IMAGE REJECTION
RECORDER OUTPUT
STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAYS
This l-to-36MHz Analyzer permits low-cost spectrum analysis
with the compact Type 561A Oscilloscope, and stored or non-
stored displays with the equally-compact Type 564 Oscillo-
scope. The Type 3L10 can be used with a Type 2B67, 3Bl,
3B3, 3B4 or 3B5 Time Base Unit.*
CALIBRATED DISPERSION from lOHz/div to 2 kHz/div makes
frequency measurement as easy and accurate as time measure-
ment. Frequency differences can be read directly from the
CRT. The SEARCH MODE permits rapid location of signals
for analysis.
COUPLED RESOLUTION from 10 Hz to l kHz greatly simpli-
fies operation, providing narrow resolution bandwidth at nar-
row dispersion and wide resolution bandwidth at wide disper-
sion. Dispersion and resolution controls can be uncoupled
and operated separately if desired, for optimized viewing
of a particular signal.
IF stability is achieved through use of CRYSTAL-CONTROL-
LED OSCILLATORS. Even the swept local oscillator is controlled
through a crystal discriminator. An external front-end oscillator
can be connected through a front-panel input to provide still
greater stability to spectral displays within or outside the
normal l-to-36MHz range of the Type 3L10.
IMAGE REJECTION is achieved through use of a 60-MHz
first IF amplifier, which places images at more than twice the
upper tuning frequency of the Type 3L10.
Analyzer familiarity is soon achieved, since operation is
similar to that of the oscilloscope — with dispersion calibrated
in kHz/div. Dispersion accuracy is quickly verified with crystal-
controlled frequency markers available at the push of a button.
This feature is especially convenient where the Analyzer is
used with more than one oscilloscope.
•Time Base Units with serial numbers under those listed require a simple
modification to provide a sweep signal to the Analyzer. Type 2B67: 15180,
Type 3B1: 4040, Type 3B3: 4270, Type 3B4: 740.
FREQUENCY RANGE
1 to 36 MHz.
Dial Accuracy within ± (100 kHz + 1% of dial reading).
SENSITIVITY (50-n INPUT)
— lOOdBm, measured at 2 kHz/div dispersion and 1 kHz
(coupled) resolution.
FREQUENCY STABILITY
IF within 2 p/m per °F change, 1 p/m per 1-V line change.
LO within 150 p/m per °F change, 10 p/m per 1-V line
change.
MAXIMUM FM
IF within 5 Hz.
LO within 25 Hz + 1 Hz/MHz dial frequency.
CALIBRATED DISPERSION
lOHz/div to 2 kHz/div, 8 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy
within ±3% when calibrated with internal calibrator. Dis-
persion linearity within ±5%. Search position (uncalibrated)
— minimum 20 kHz -f 1 kHz/MHz of indicated frequency
full scale (lOdiv).
DISPERSION CALIBRATOR
10.7-MHz carrier, 4-kHz crystal-controlled side-bands with
±0.1% accuracy.
COUPLED RESOLUTION
10 Hz to 1 kHz, coupled with calibrated dispersion positions,
and separately switchable. Search position — approximately
10 kHz.
DISPLAY FLATNESS
±1 dB.
164
3L10
INPUT IMPEDANCE
Approx 50 Q and approx 600 Q.
MAXIMUM INPUT POWER
+24 dBm at full RF attenuation, —20 dBm without RF atten-
uation.
RF ATTENUATOR
51 dB ±0.1 dB/dB in 1-dB steps.
V 2 watt maximum power-handling capability.
IF GAIN CONTROL
>60-dB range.
VERTICAL DISPLAY
Log — 50-dB dynamic range over 8 div.
Linear — 20-dB dynamic range over 8 div.
Video— 100 mV/div (variable) DC to 50 kHz, approx 50-il
input resistance.
RECORDER OUTPUT
DC-coupled, approx 600-Q source resistance, 15mV/div
display in Linear mode, output linear with voltage.
WEIGHT
Net — 6 'A pounds, shipping — 11 pounds, approx.
TYPE 3L10 SPECTRUM ANALYZER UNIT $1200
Each instrument includes: 1 — fini-plug (134-0052-00); 2 — instruction
manual (070-0521-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
STORED SPECTRAL DISPLAY
with Type 564 Oscilloscope
Using the single-shot capabilities of the Type 2B67, and the storage
capabilities of the Type 564, we are able to measure the drift of a 60-MHz
crystal oscillator, as supplied to the IF of the Type 3L10.
Temperature variation shows as a drift of approx 4 Hz between sweeps.
Dispersion is 10 Hz/div.
165
Type
SAMPLING-PROBE DUAL-TRACE UNIT
COMPACT PROBES
DUAL-TRACE DISPLAYS
0.35 ns OR LESS RISETIME
lOOktt, 2 P F INPUT
LOW NOISE
RECORDER OUTPUTS
The Type 3S3 Sampling-Probe Unit is a low-noise dual-
trace amplifier employing extremely compact sampling
probes. It has two separate channels with identical char-
acteristics and can operate in any one of five modes
for a variety of single, dual -trace and X-Y displays. The
Type 3S3 is designed to operate in conjunction with a
Type 3T77A or Type 3T4 Sampling Sweep Unit in the Type
561 A, 564, or 567 Oscilloscopes. In the Type 567, infor-
mation can be presented in digital as well as analog form.
OPERATING MODES include Channel A only; Channel B
only; Dual Trace — Channels A and B switched electronically;
A + B Outputs of Channel A and B added algebraical
ly ; A Vertical/B Horizontal-
Channel A deflected vertically and
B horizontally for X-Y displays. Independ-
ent controls for each channel provide for trace
positioning and polarity inversion.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is 5 mV/div, lOmV/div,
20mV/div, 50mV/div, and lOOmV/div; accuracy within 3%.
An uncalibrated continuous control extends the deflection factor
to approximately 2 mV/div.
RISETIME AND SMOOTHING controls, while maintaining
correct dot transient response, adjust the instrument for: least
noise, best risetime, or a compromise of the two, with signal
source from below 25 ohms to beyond 300 ohms. A Fast-RT/
Low-Noise switch in conjunction with the Smoothing control
allows the operator to select optimum risetime at a sacrifice
in noise level. Or, he may elect for a low noise level at some
sacrifice in risetime.
At low signal repetition rates the trace may take up to
several seconds to traverse the CRT screen. A Type 3S3 in a
Type 564 Storage Oscilloscope offers the most advantageous
combination for visually displaying these signals.
RISETIME (with a 50-ohm input source impedance) is 0.35
ns with the switch set at the FAST RT position and 1 ns at
the LOW NOISE position.
RANDOM NOISE (with 50-ohm-input source impedance) can
be adjusted to a minimum value equal to an input signal
of less than 0.5 mV peak to peak.
CORRECT DOT TRANSIENT RESPONSE can be achieved
with source impedances from 25 ohms to 300 ohms.
INPUT RC is lOOkfi paralleled by approx 2 pF.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±1.5 V with Risetime control set to
LOW NOISE and ±3 V when the control is set to FAST RISE-
TIME. Safe overload is ±10 V.
EXTERNAL TRIGGER is required, at least 50 ns prior to
signal. Minimum repetition rate is 50 Hz.
RECORDER SIGNAL OUTPUT of Channel A, Channel B, or
Channel (A + B) is ggl V/div (through 10 kilohms), DC-coupled
at +10 volt level.
DC OFFSET provides a means of displaying selected por-
tions of signals having off-screen amplitudes, or for displaying
signals riding on a DC voltage as high as ±0.5 V.
TRACE FINDER button returns the trace to CRT screen to
aid in vertical positioning when the trace is driven off the
screen by a large signal.
PROBES (Type P6038) used with the Type 3S3 are ex-
tremely compact. The sampling bridge is contained in the
probe head to obtain optimum results with an input RC of
100 kQ paralleled by 2 pF. Probe can be changed from chan-
nel to channel with only minor recalibration.
NET WEIGHT is 6 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 9 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3S3 SAMPLING PROBE UNIT
(with two Type P6038 Probes) $1500
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0374-00); 2 —
P6038 Probe Package (010-0156-00), which includes; 1— P6038 probe
010-0157-00); 1— Response normalizer (011-0070-00); 1— X10 attenuator
(011-0071-00); 2— Test point jack (131-0258-00); 1— Coupling' capacitor
(011-0072-00); 1— Hook tip assembly (206-0114-00); 1— Ground clip
(175-0249-00); 1— Probe holder (352-0068-00); 1— Bayonet ground
assembly (013-0085-00); 1— Instruction Manual (070-0400-00).
REPLACEMENT P6038 PROBE PACKAGE (Part Number 010-
0156-00) $225
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverron, Oregon
Please refer lo Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
166
DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT Type
Internal Triggering and Delay Lines
0.4-ns or Less Risetime
2 Identical Channels
5 Operating Modes
Recorder Outputs
The Type 3S76 Sampling Unit is a dual-trace amplifier
containing two separate channels which possess identical
characteristics. The unit can perform in any of five operat-
ing modes for a variety of single, dual-trace and X-Y dis-
plays. It is designed to operate in conjunction with a
Type 3T4 or Type 3T77A Sampling Sweep Unit in Type
561 A, 564 and 567 Oscilloscopes. In the Type 567, infor-
I motion will be presented in digital as well as analog form.
OPERATING MODES include Channel A only; Channel B
only; Dual-Trace — Channels A and B switched electronically
on alternate samples; A+B — outputs of Channels A and B add-
ed algebraically; A Vertical/B Horizontal — Channel A de-
flected vertically and B horizontally for X-Y displays. Inde-
pendent controls for each channel provide for trace posi-
tioning and polarity inversion.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR is from 2 mV/div to
200 mV/div in 7 calibrated steps, accuracy within 3%, except
on the 2 mV/div and 5 mV/div steps, which have accuracy
within 5%. A variable control permits continuous adjustment
between steps.
BANDWIDTH is equivalent to DC to 875 MHz.
RISETIME is 0.4 ns or less, with less than ±3% peak over-
shoot.
RANDOM NOISE is equivalent to an input signal of less
than 2 mV peak to peak with Smooth-Normal Switch in NOR-
MAL position and 1 mV peak to peak with Smooth-Normal
Switch in SMOOTH position.
DC OFFSET is ±1 V, referred to input, and monitorable at
the front panel at 100X magnitude. Can be used to permit
viewing of signals with off-screen amplitudes or signals riding
on a DC voltage up to ±1 V.
INPUT IMPEDANCE is 50 ohms.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±2 V. Full sensitivity can be used
with signals up to ±2V in amplitude. Momentary overload
limit is ±5V.
SIGNAL DELAY through 55-ns internal delay line for each
channel allows viewing of leading edge of input waveform.
TRIGGER SOURCE selects built-in trigger takeoff signal from
either channel.
RECORDER SIGNAL OUTPUT is 1 V/div (through 10 kilohms)
DC-coupled at +10 volt level, both channels.
PROBE POWER is provided on both channels for cathode-
follower probes (see P6032), Type 281 TDR Pulser, and Type
282 Adapter for high-impedance probes.
NET WEIGHT is 7y 2 pounds. Shipping weight- is 12 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3S76 DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT $1 100
Each instrument includes: 2—1 OX attenuator, 50 SI (017-0078-001;
2— 5-ns cable |01 7-0502-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0332-00).
PROBES
The following Tektronix probes are recommended for use
with the Type 3S76. See Catalog Accessory pages for complete
information on the probes.
Input Im
pedance
Use
R
C
Rating Probe No.
Price
10:1 Attenuator
500 n
0.7 pF
16VDC, 500 VAC P6034
$ 35
100:1 Attenuator
5kI2
0.6 pF
50 VDC, 500 VAC P6035
35
Selectable Attenuator
lOMfi
varies
varies P6032
220
Current
—
—
500 mA CTI/P6040
31
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverfon, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
167
Type
PROGRAMMABLE SAMPLING UNIT
• CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGES
• CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
• 100 OR 1000 SAMPLES PER SWEEP
• NORMAL OR SINGLE DISPLAY
• SINGLE DISPLAY START
The 3T4 Sampling Unit extends the convenience of oper-
ation of the Type 567 Digital Readout System by providing
remote control of the horizontal time base. This unit is com-
patible with the following equipment: 3S76, 3S3, and other
3-series sampling units; 561 A, 564, and 567 Indicator Units;
6R1 and 6R1A Digital Units, and the 262 Programmer.
The multiple-pin connector on the front panel affords ex-
ternal control of equivalent-time sweep steps, delay time, sam-
ples per sweep, normal or single-display modes, and single-
display start. These operations are obtained through the
grounding of certain pins of the front-panel connector. Delay
time is determined by the value of resistors added externally.
Front-panel outputs are TRIGGER OUT, which provides a
500-mV, negative pulse coinciding with the input trigger, and
SWEEP OUTPUT which provides a staircase ramp. The unit
also can be triggered internally and responds to input signals
up to 1000 MHz. The SINGLE DISPLAY feature permits photo-
graphic trace recording. The 10X MAGNIFIER extends the
on-screen calibrated sweep range. A dual-purpose front-panel
control permits manual or external scanning of the display,
thus providing convenient operation of either X-Y or Y-T
recorders.
SWEEP TIME/DIV
Equivalent-Time Sampling — 1 ns/div to 200 /ts/div, ±3%,
in 2-5-10 sequence.
Real-Time Sampling — External clock, trigger, and single-dis-
play start inputs are required.
DELAY RANGE
1 ns/div through 0.] /xs/div— 1000 ns delay range.
0.2 /.is/div through 1 its/div— lOOiis delay range.
20tis/div through lOOits/div — lOOOiis delay range.
(No delay range for 200 tis/div sweep range, or in real-time
sampling mode.)
SWEEP MODES
+ External Input — Scanning accomplished by external signal.
Deflection factor adjustable from 5 to 20 volts/horizontal
division.
Manual Scan — Display scanned by front-panel control.
Normal — Repetitive sweep.
Single Display — One sweep each time START button is de-
pressed.
OTHER SWEEP CHARACTERISTICS
Samples per sweep — 100 or 1000.
Magnification of CRT display — XI and XI 0.
Front-panel sweep output — Staircase ramp, 1 volt/horizontal
division.
TRIGGERING
Trigger Inputs — Internal or External + and — . Trigger re-
sponds to inputs up to 1000 MHz.
Trigger Output — 500 mV, negative polarity.
REMOTELY PROGRAMMABLE FUNCTIONS
Equivalent-Time Sweep Ranges.
Delay Time.
Samples per Sweep (digital read-out decimal information cor-
rect only on 1000 samples/sweep).
Normal or Single-Display Modes.
Single-Display Start (when remotely programmed for SINGLE
DISPLAY).
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHT
Instrument is 16'/ 2 " long by 4'/," wide by 6'/," high. Net
weight is 5 3 / 4 lbs; shipping weight is 1 1 3 / 4 lbs.
TYPE 3T4 SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT $1 300
Each instrument includes: 2 — Instruction Manual (070-0439-00).
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
Connector, 19-Pin, Male, Miniature. Mates with front-panel
connector of 3T4 Unit for external programming.
(131-0388-00) $32.50
Extender Card, 56-Pin (Modified 262). The card is a rigid
extension which enables the printed-circuit cards to operate
out of the Type 3T4 for servicing convenience.
(012-0078-00) $20.00
Remote Program Cable, 10 ft long, 19-Pin Miniature Con- ^^
nector, Male to 36-Pin Male Miniature Connector.
(012-0101-00) $85.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
168
SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT Type
Triggering Through 1 Gigahertz
10 [is/ div to 0.02 ns/div Sweep Range
Variable Sweep Delay
Single-Display Provision
Recorder Output
The Type 3T77A is a Sampling Sweep Unit. It provides
subnanosecond capabilities when used in conjunction with
a Type 3S3 or 3S76 Sampling Unit in a Type 561 A, 564
or 567 Oscilloscope. In the Type 567, information can
be presented in digital as well as analog form.
TRIGGERING CHARACTERISTICS
SINEWAVE TRIGGERING
FREQUENCY RANGE is from 100 kHz through 1 GHz.
AMPLITUDE RANGE is from 10 mV to 800 mV peak to peak
for external triggering. Five times more trigger amplitude is
required for equivalent internal triggering. Optimum trigger
amplitude for least jitter depends on frequency. Damaging
overload can occur at 5 V or greater.
JITTER varies with trigger amplitude, frequency and TIME/
DIV setting. Typical figures are less than 50 ps jitter for 100 mV
peak to peak 30 MHz to 50 MHz sinewave. A special synchro-
nizing mode may be used above 30 MHz for extra stability.
PULSE TRIGGERING
REPETITION RATE RANGE is from 30 p/s (limited by mem-
ory drift in the vertical plug-in) through 10' p/s (1 GHz).
AMPLITUDE RANGE is from 10 mV to 800 mV peak to peak
for external triggering. Minimum trigger rise rate is approx
150mV/^s. Optimum trigger amplitude for least jitter depends
on rise rate and rep rate. Damaging overload can occur at
5 V or greater.
JITTER is typically 50 ps or 0.1% of fast ramp duration
whichever is greater for pulses of 50 mV amplitude, 2 ns width
k (or lOmV, 10 ns width).
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
DOT DENSITY can be either 10 or 100 dots/div.
CALIBRATED SWEEP TIME/DIV is from 0.2 ns/div to 10 jus/
div in 15 calibrated steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is within
3%. A variable control permits continuous adjustment uncali-
brated between calibrated ranges.
TIME EXPANDER provides XI expansion that maintains
a constant number of samples per centimeter. Extends cali-
brated sweep range to 0.02 ns/div.
MANUAL OR EXTERNAL SCANNING of the display pro-
vides convenient operation of remote recorders. At least 5 V/
div (positive-going) is required for an external sweep.
SINGLE DISPLAYS useful for photography or storage can
be initiated by a reset button.
RECORDER SWEEP OUTPUT is e*1 V/div (through 10
kilohms), useful for driving recorders and other devices.
TIME POSITION provides a sweep delay range of at
least one full horizontal scale, unexpended, and at least ten
scales (100 div) when expanded.
NET WEIGHT is 5Y 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 9 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 3T77A SAMPLING SWEEP UNIT $650
Each instrument includes: 2— 10X attenuator, 50 U (017-0078-00);
1— Adapter, BNC-to-GR (017-0064-00); 2— 10-ns GR cable (017-
0501-00); 1— Adapter, BNC-to-UHF (103-0032-00); 2— Instruction Manual
070-0546-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverfon, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
169
Type
TRANSISTOR-CURVE TRACER
HIGH-CURRENT ADAPTER
SINGLE OR REPETITIVE DISPLAYS
DIRECT COMPARISON OF TRANSISTOR
CHARACTERISTICS
SELECT CIRCUIT PARAMETERS
WITH FRONT PANEL CONTROLS
MAKE TOTAL DIODE MEASUREMENTS
In most instances the operation
of the Type 175 is the
same as that of the Type 575.
The added capabilities
of the Type 575 when used with
the Type 175 are shown
in color.
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
SEMI-CONDUCTOR DRIVING CAPABILITIES
BASE OR EMITTER STEP GENERATOR—
Stepping Rate — 2 or 4 times line frequency.
Number of Steps — Continuously variable from 4 to 12 steps
per family of characteristic curves.
Single or Repetitive — Stops after a single family of curves
is generated, or repeatedly generates the family of curves.
Type of Steps — Steps are increments of voltage or current
and are either positive or negative.
Voltage Increments — Selectable values from 0.01 V/step to
0.2V/step ±3% with 2.4-A current capability. —Selectable
values from 0.02 V/step to 0.5 V/step with 12-A current
capability.
Current Increments — Selectable values from 0.001 mA/step to
200mA/step, ±3%. —Selectable values from 1 mA/step
to 1000 mA/step.
COLLECTOR SWEEP GENERATOR—
Frequency — 2 times line frequency.
Peak Sweep Voltage — Continuously variable from V to 20 V
minimum with 10-A current capability and from V to 200 V
minimum with 1-A current capability. — Continuously variable
from V to 20 V with 200-A current capability and V to
100 V with 40-A current capability.
POLARITY— Positive or negative.
170
VERTICAL DISPLAY
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR—
Transistor Collector Current — 0.001 mA/div to lOOOmA/div,
±3%. — 0.005 A/div to 20A/div.
Transistor Base or Emitter Current — 0.001 mA/div to 200 mA/
div, ±3%.
Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 0.5V/div,
±3%.
Base or° Emitter Source Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 0.2 V/div, ±3%.
HORIZONTAL DISPLAY
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR—
Transistor Collector Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 20 V/div, ±3%.
—0.1 V/div to 10 V/div.
Transistor Base or Emitter Current — 0.001 mA/div to 200 mA/
div, ±3%.
Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 0.5 V/div,
±3%. —0.1 V/div to 2 V/div.
Base or Emitter Source Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 0.2 V/div, ±3%.
CRT
DISPLAY AREA— 10x10 div ( 5 / u " per div).
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 4 kV.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
COMPARISON SWITCH— Switch allows switching between
two semi-conductors for comparison.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V, 50
to 60 Hz, 410 watts max. —105 to 125 V, 50 to 60 Hz
1100 watts max.
J
575
175
The Type 575 Transistor-Curve Tracer displays the dynam-
ic characteristic curves of both NPN and PNP transistors on
the screen of a 5-inch cathode-ray tube. Several different
transistor characteristic curves may be displayed, including
the collector family in the common-base and common-emitter
configuration. In addition to the transistor characteristic
curves, the Type 575 is used to display dynamic charac-
teristics of a wide range of semi-conductor devices.
Transistors under test are inserted into either a common-base
or common-emitter test circuit. The transistor collector has a
sweep voltage applied to it while a step voltage or current
is applied to either the base or emitter (whichever is unground-
ed). Voltage, for the collector, sweeps between zero and a
selectable value and is generated by the Collector Sweep
Generator. The Base or Emitter Step Generator applies steps
to the base or emitter that start at zero and build up to a
value determined by the number of steps and value of each
step as selected with front-panel controls. Each sequence of
steps, from zero to the maximum attained value, in conjunction
with the sweep voltage on the collector produces one family of
characteristic curves.
Signals used for vertical and horizontal deflection on the CRT
are either current or voltage values selected from various points
in the transistor test circuit. Thus, a selected vertical signal can
be plotted against a selected horizontal signal to trace the
desired semi-conductor characteristic curve. Selection of the
deflection signal source is accomplished with front panel con-
trols. Vertical deflection signal sources include: transistor collec-
tor current, transistor base or emitter current, transistor base
or emitter voltage, and source voltage for the base or emitter.
Horizontal deflection signal sources include: transistor collector
voltage, transistor base or emitter current, transistor base or
emitter voltage, and source voltage for the base or emitter.
The Type 175 Transistor-Curve Tracer High-Current
Adapter enables the Type 575 to plot and display charac-
teristic curves of high-current semi-conductors. Basically the
Type 175 contains a high-current Collector Sweep Genera-
tor, a high-current Base or Emitter Step Generator and high-
current test circuits that are used in place of those in the
Type 575. The 175 also contains the necessary circuits to
convert these high currents into deflection signals suitable
for display on the Type 575 CRT. There is one source for
the vertical deflection signal: the transistor collector current.
There are two sources for the horizontal deflection signal:
transistor collector voltage and transistor base or emitter
voltage.
TYPE 575 MOUNTING
The Type 575 can be secured atop the Type 175 with two
hinge bolts. A brace attached to the top rear of the Type 175
allows the Type 575 to be raised lor more convenient viewing.
171
575
175
BASE OR EMITTER STEP GENERATOR
The Step Generator develops current or voltage steps to
drive the base or emitter (whichever is ungrounded) of the
transistor under test. These steps are used to generate either
repetitive or single-family (as selected) characteristic curves
for display. The steps are adjustable in number from 4 to
12 and move in a positive or negative direction depending on
the polarity switch setting. Step repetition rate is selectable
as either 120 steps/s or 240 steps/s (values equal to 2X or
4X the line frequency). A control is available to set the start-
ing point of a series of steps to zero.
Each step has a rise that is selected as either a value of
current or a value of voltage. The value of each step rise in
current ranges from 0.001 mA/step to 200 mA/step and is se-
lected from 17 values that are in a 1-2-5 sequence. The value
of each step rise in voltage is from 0.01 V/step to 0.2 V/step
and is selected from 5 values that are in a 1-2-5 sequence.
Also a switch is provided for grounding the transistor input
to give a zero drive-voltage reference check, and opening the
transistor input to give a zero drive-current reference check.
The driving resistance of the step generator, when devel-
oping voltage steps, is selected from 24 values that range
from 1 ohm to 22 kilohms ±10%. Any other value can be
added externally.
The Type 175 Step Generator output is basically the same as
that of the Type 575. However, the current steps are selected
from 10 values ranging from 1 mA/step to 1000 mA/step and
the voltage steps are selected from 5 values ranging from 0.5
V/step to 10 V/step. In addition, the driving resistance is
selected from 11 values ranging from 0.5 ohm to 1 kilohm.
Any other resistance value can be added externally.
COLLECTOR SWEEP GENERATOR
The Collector Sweep Generator provides the sweep voltages
that drive the collector of the transistor under test. These volt-
ages sweep between zero and a peak value selected with a
front-panel control. The peak voltage is either positive or
negative depending on the setting of the polarity switch to
allow the collector voltages to sweep between zero and posi-
tive peak values or zero and negative peak values. The repeti-
tion rate of the sweep is 2 times the line frequency; thus the
collector voltage sweeps between zero and the peak value
at least once for each step applied to the transistor base or
emitter.
The peak sweep voltage is continuously adjustable from
zero to 20 V with 10-A capability or from zero to 200 V with
1-A current capability.
The collector current limiting resistance is selected from 16
values ranging from 1 ohm to 100 kilohms ±5%.
The Type 175 Collector Sweep Generator output is basically
the same as that of the Type 575. However, the peak sweep
voltage is continuously adjustable from zero to 20 V with
200-A capability of from zero to 100 V with 40-A capability.
Also, in the 0-1 00 V range a 300-ohm collector current-limiting
resistor can be switched in. Any other desired resistance can
be added externally.
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Signals used for vertical deflection are selected from various
points in the transistor test circuit. Each point has several
selectable deflection factors available.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
TRANSISTOR COLLECTOR CURRENT— 0.01 mA/div to 1000
mA/div in 16 steps, 1-2-5 sequence. Push buttons are pro-
vided for multiplying each step by 2 or 0.1 thus extending
the deflection factor from 0.001 mA/div to 2000 mA/div.
—0.005 A/div to 20A/div in 12 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
TRANSISTOR BASE OR EMITTER CURRENT— 0.001 mA/div to
200 mA/div in 17 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
-0.01 V/div to
TRANSISTOR BASE OR EMITTER VOLTAGE-
0.5 V/div in 6 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
BASE OR EMITTER SOURCE VOLTAGE— 0.01 V/div to 0.2
V/div in 5 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Signals used for horizontal deflection are selected from
various points in the transistor rest circuit. Each point has
several selectable deflection factors available.
n
m
m
m
m
W
PNP TRANSISTOR
Collector current vs collector voltage with base
grounded and constant-current emitter steps. Col-
lector sweep is to 120 V through a 5 k load
resistor, emitter current 1 mA/step. Vertical de-
flection is 1 mA/div, horizontal deflection 10
V/div.
II
II
W/jWM
maim
BMC
PNP TRANSISTOR
Collector current vs collector voltage with base
grounded and constant-current emitter steps. Col-
lector sweep is to 1.5 V, emitter current 200
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 200 mA/div,
horizontal deflection 0.1 V/div.
NPN TRANSISTOR
Collector current vs collector voltage
with constant-voltage base steps. Col-
lector sweep is to 2 V, base voltage
0.02 V/step, vertical deflection is 5 mA/
div, horizontal deflection 0.2 V/div.
172
575
175
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR
Transistor Collector Voltage— 0.01 V/div to 20 V/div in ll
steps, I -2-5 sequence.
— O.l V/div to 1 V/div in 7 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Transistor Base or Emitter Current — 0.001 mA/div to 200
mA/div in 17 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Transistor Base or Emitter Voltage — 0.01 V/div to 0.5 V/div
in 6 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
—0.1 V/div to 2 V/div in 5 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
Base or Emitter Source Voltage — 0.01 V/div to 0.2 V/div in
5 steps, 1-2-5 sequence.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
TRANSISTOR TEST PANEL— The transistor test panel has
provisions for two transistors at the same time. Two sockets
accept low-power transistors with short leads and three binding
posts along side the sockets accept other transistor and semi-
conductors. One switch will change the sockets from the com-
mon-emitter to the common-base test circuit configuration.
A second switch allows two transistors inserted into the test
circuit to be rapidly compared by switching the test conditions
from one to the other.
The Type 175 Transistor Test Panel is basically the same
as that of the Type 575. Special connectors and cables are
provided for high-current applications and for eliminating meas-
urement errors due to voltage drops in high-current carrying
leads.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE— The CRT used has an accelerating
voltage of 4 kV and is supplied with a P31 phosphor unless
another phosphor is requested.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE— The 3Ve"x3V 8 " edge-lighted
graticule is marked in 10 by 10 5 /, 6 " divisions, with centerlines
marked every one-fifth of a division. Illumination is controlled
by a front-panel knob.
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY— Electronic voltage regulation
is used to compensate for line-voltage changes and for varia-
tions in loading. All voltages affecting calibrations are fully
regulated.
POWER REQUIREMENT— The Type 575 is wired for 117 V,
50 to 60 Hz. The electronically-regulated power supplies per-
mit a line-voltage variation between 105 and 125 V. Chang-
ing transformer taps permits operation at 107, 127, 214, 234,
or 254 V. The Type 575 draws 220 watts standby, 410 watts
maximum. The Type 175 requires 117 V, 50 to 60 Hz, and reg-
ulates between 105 and 125 V. It draws 1100 watts maximum.
s'j
■IB ei
PNf 1KAN3I5H-'K
Collector current vs collector voltage
with conslant-current base steps. Col-
lector sweep is to 5 V with a 0.25-
ohm load, base current is 50 mA/step.
Vertical deflection is 1000 mA/div, hori-
zontal deflection 0.5 V/div.
mmmn
■■■HI
■■Ml
■Ml
r-|
■Ml
■'J!
IPJH
z*m
I RrtiNOioi wr
Base current vs base voltage with
constant-current base steps. Collector
sweep is to 1 V, base current 0.1
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 0.1 mA/
div, horizontal deflection 0.05 V/div.
Dots represent equal increments of base
current. Dynamic base impedance can be
determined from this display.
■■■■riii
■■■K.llll
■■£1
IK
53KSISHS
NPN TRANSISTOR
Collector current vs base current with
constant-current base steps. Collector
sweep is to 1.5 V, base current 0.1
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 5 mA/
div collector current, horizontal deflec-
tion 0.1 mA/div base current. Incre-
mental and DC current gain can be de-
termined from this display.
■■■■■■I
■■■■■■1
■■■■■■■■I
■rs=="ll
r #==i==~..ii
,2££S£»~*tf
i/dMHBMkM
■■1 »■
Siiiifl ■■
NPN TRANSISTOR
Base voltage vs collector voltage with
constant-current base steps. Collector
sweep is to 1 V, base current 0.1 mA/
step. Vertical deflection is 0.05 V/div
base voltage, horizontal deflection 0.1
V/div collector voltage.
NPN TRANSISTOR
Collector current vs collector voltage
with constant-current base steps. Collec-
tor sweep is to 2 V, base current 0.01
mA/step. Vertical deflection is 0.5 mA/
div, horizontal deflection 0.2 V/div.
NPN TRANSISTOR
Collector current vs base voltage with
constant-voltage base steps. Collector
sweep is to 1.5 V, base voltage 0.05
V/step with a 1 -ohm source impedance.
Vertical deflection is 0.5 mA/div, hori-
173
575
175
MECHANICAL— Dimensions are l6 7 / 8 " high by 13%" wide
by 23 3 / a " deep. Net weight is 66 pounds. Shipping weight is
85 pounds, approx. Type 175 — Dimensions are 12'/," high by
15 1 /," wide by 23%" deep. Net weight is 93 pounds. Shipping
weight is 118 pounds, approx.
TYPE 575 TRANSISTOR CURVE-TRACER $1075
Each instrument includes: 2 — Transistor adapter, long (013-0069-00);
2— Transistor adapter, TO-3 (013-0070-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter
(103-0013-00); 2— 2N1381 transistor (151-0039-00); 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 2—
Instruction Manual (070-0255-00).
TYPE 175 HIGH CURRENT ADAPTER $1475
Each instrument includes: 2— Black output lead (012-0014-00); 2— Red
output lead (012-0015-00); 1— Interconnecting cable (012-0042-00); 2—
Red test cable (012-0043-00); 2— Black test cable (012-0044-00); I—
575 adapter cable (012-0045-00); 2— Blue test lead (012-0056-00); I—
3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord, 20" (161-0014-00); 2— Lock
washer (210-0010-00); 2— Nut (210-0410-00); 2— Screw (212-0520-00);
2— Bolt hinge (214-0152-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0255-00).
INCREASED COLLECTOR VOLTAGE
Although similar to the Type 575 Transistor Curve-Tracer,
a special model, Type 575 MOD 122C, provides much higher
diode breakdown test voltage (variable from zero to 1500 V,
maximum short circuit current of 1 mA) and also much higher
Collector Supply (up to 400 V, at 0.5 A).
TYPE 575 MOD 1 22C $1325
Each instrument includes: 2— Transistor adapter, long (013-0069-00);
2— Transistor adapter, TO-3 (013-0070-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter
(103-0013-00); 2— 2N1381 transistor (151-0039-00); 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (378-0567-00); 2—
Instruction Manual (070-0255-00).
RACK MOUNT ADAPTER
A cradle mount to adapt the Type 575 Transistor-Curve
tracer for rack mounting is available. It consists of a cradle
to support the instrument in any standard 19" relay rack and
a mask to fit around the regular instrument panel. Tektronix
blue vinyl finish. Rack height requirements 17%".
Order Part Number 040-0281-00 $45
TYPE 175 MOD 167C
Modified Type 175 operates from 210 V to 250 V 50 to
60 Hz.
TYPE 175 MOD 167C HIGH CURRENT ADAPTER . . $1475
Each instrument includes: 2— Black output lead (012-0014-00); 2 Red
output lead (012-0015-00); 1— Interconnecting cable (012-0042-00); 2—
Red test cable (012-0043-00); 2— Black test cable (012-0044-00); 1 —
575 adapter cable (012-0045-00); 2— Blue test lead (012-0056-00); 1 —
3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord, 20" (161-0014-001; 2— Lock
washer (210-0010-00); 2— Nut (210-0410-00); 2— Screw (212-0520-00);
2— Bolt hinge (214-0152-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0255-00).
TYPE 575 OPTIONAL TEST BOARDS
013-0072-00
013-0073-00
013-0074-00
013-0079-00
DIODE TEST JIG (013-0072-00)— holds axial-lead diodes $5.00
ADAPTER BOX (013-0073-00)— allows you to mount your own
semiconductor socket on the box 4.00
POWER TRANSISTOR JIG (013-0074-00)— for power transistors
with hook leads 5.00
DIODE TEST JIG (013-0079-00)— production test jig for rapid
handling 25.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
CHARACTERISTIC CURVE DISPLAYS WITH TYPE 175
killllllll
!■■■«■■■■
Collector current vs collector voltage
(emphasis on saturation resistance). Verti-
cal deflection is lOA/div, horizontal de-
flection is 0.2 V/div. Base drive is 500
m A/step (top curve is 2.5 A) .
Collector current vs base voltage (col-
lector sweep voltage is 4.2 V). Vertical
deflection is lOA/div, horizontal deflec-
tion is 0.1 V/div. Base drive is 500 mA/
step.
Collector current vs collector voltage.
Vertical deflection is lOA/div, horizontal
deflection is 1.0 V/div. Base drive is 500
mA/step (top curve is 2.5 A) .
174
DC-to-85 MHz
OSCILLOSCOPE
Type
All information in color describes the additional capabili-
ties of the Type 585 A and RM585A.
Dual-trace DC to 85 MHz (approx 3-dB down) displays at
lOOmV/cm or DC to 80 MHz (approx 3-dB down) displays at
lOmV/cm are now available with the Type 82 Dual-Trace
Plug-In Unit.
The Type 585A, and RM585A incorporate all the features
of the Type 581 A, but have an additional time base and the
capability of calibrated sweep delay.
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE
TUNNEL DIODE TRIGGERING TO BEYOND 1 50 MHz
SYNCHRONIZATION TO 250 MHz
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
SINGLE-SWEEP PHOTOGRAPHY AT 1 its/ em
2 FAST-RISE VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
21 OTHER VERTICAL PLUG -IN UNITS (with adapter)
SMALL BRIGHT CRT SPOT
CHARACTERISTIC SUMMARY
VERTICAL
Vertical deflection characteristics are extremely flexible through
use of a wide selection of plug-in units.
HORIZONTAL
CALIBRATED SWEEP RANGE— Time Base A: 0.05/is/cm to
2s/cm; Time Base B (Type 585A and RM585A only): 2 /us/cm
to 1 s/cm.
SWEEP MAGNIFIER— 5X, extends Time Base A sweep range
to 0.01 jits/cm.
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY— 2 ^s to 10 s, continuously vari-
able.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS— Internal: 2-mm deflection, AC-
coupled. External: 0.2 V to ±15 V, AC or DC-coupled.
EXTERNAL INPUT— 0.2 V/cm to 15V/cm ; DC to 350 kHz; 1
megohm, approx 47 pF.
CRT
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX INTERNAL GRATICULE
DISPLAY AREA— 4x10 cm.
ACCELERATING VOLTAGE— 1 kV.
175
581A
585A
RM585A
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR— 0.2 mV to 100 V l-kHz square-
wave.
POWER REQUIREMENT— 1 05 to 125 V or 21 to 250 V, 50
to 60 Hz, 560 watts maximum for Type 581 A, 630 watts
maximum for Type 585A.
TYPE 80-SERIES VERTICAL PLUG-IN UNITS
Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.
HIGH GAIN DUAL TRACE-
TYPE 82 DUAL-TRACE UNIT— DC to 80 MHz at lOmV/cm,
DC to 85 MHz at lOOmV/cm. Risetime at lOOmV/cm is
nominally 4ns, always less than 4.2 ns. Risetime at lOmV/cm
is nominally 4.3 ns, always less than 4.5 ns.
HIGH GAIN SINGLE TRACE-
TYPE 86 PLUG-IN UNIT— DC to 80 MHz at lOmV/cm, DC
to 85 MHz at lOOmV/cm. Risetime at lOOmV/cm is nom-
inally 4ns, always less than 4.2ns. Risetime at lOmV/cm
is nominally 4.3 ns, always less than 4.5 ns.
RISETIME and BANDWIDTH depend on the plug-in unit
and probe used with the oscilloscope.
Oscilloscope used with
Risetime
Bandwidth
at —3 dB
approx
nominally
always
less than
Type 82 or 86 Plug-In
Unit at lOmV/cm
4.3 ns
4.5 ns
80 MHz
Type 82 or 86 Plug-In
Unit at lOOmV/cm
4.0 ns
4.2 ns
85 MHz
Risetime of the Oscilloscope, Type 82 or 86 Plug-In Unit, and
supplied probe, at an overall deflection factor of 0.1 V/cm, is
approx 4.5 ns.
TYPE 81 ADAPTER equips the oscilloscope to accept any
Tektronix Letter-Series Plug-In Unit. Applications include sam-
pling . . . transistor-risetime test . . . semiconductor-diode
recovery-time studies . . . strain gage and other transducer
measurements . . . differential-comparator displays . . . opera-
tional amplifier functions . . . multi-trace work . . . spectrum
analysis, as well as many other general-purpose laboratory
measurements.
SWEEP DELAY APPLICATIONS
In addition to the usual applications of the DC-to-85
MHz Type 58 1 A Oscilloscope, the calibrated sweep delay of
the Type 585A and RM585A Oscilloscopes enables the
user to:
1 . Make accurate incremental measurements along a
complex waveform.
2. Display separate channels of a PTM system, with
effects of time jitter removed, determining pulse
amplitude and shape under modulation conditions.
3. Measure pulse-to-pulse intervals and amount of jitter
on computer signals or any train of pulses.
4. Determine accurate time-difference measure-
ments between amplifier input and output pulses.
5. Select any individual line of a television composite
signal.
6. Show time displacement, wave shape, and amplitude
of individual channels in a telemetering system.
7 . Utilize effective calibrated sweep magnification up to
the highest practical limit. Actual magnification is the
ratio of Time Base B TIME/CM to Time Base A TIME/
CM.
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
DC-COUPLED MAIN AMPLIFIER consists of a two-stage
distributed amplifier, a balanced fixed delay line, and a twin-
pentode output stage.
BALANCED DELAY NETWORK permits observation of the
leading edge of the waveform that triggers the sweep.
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
TIME BASE A SWEEP RANGE from 50 ns/cm to 2 s/cm
is in 24 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is
within 3% of panel reading. Sweep speed is continuously f"V
variable uncalibrated from 50 ns/cm to over 5 s/cm.
TIME BASE B SWEEP RANGE from 2 ,^/cm to 1 s/cm is
in 18 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Accuracy is within
3% of panel reading. A control for varying the sweep length
from 4 to 10 cm permits Time Base B to be used as a repetition-
rate generator from 0.1 Hz to 40 kHz.
5 DISPLAY MODES include Time Base A normal, Time Base B
normal, Time Base A single sweep, Time Base A delayed by
Time Base B, and Time Base B with trace brightening during the
period that Time Base A runs.
5X SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands the center 2-cm portion of
the normal display to fill 10 cm and operates on all ranges
for both time bases. It can be used to extend the calibrated
sweep time of Time Base A to 10 ns/cm, and Time Base B to
0.4/j.s/cm. Any one-fifth of the magnified sweep can be dis-
played. Accuracy of the displayed portion of the magnified
sweep is within 5% of the figured sweep rate.
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic re-
cording of waveforms. The time base can be made to run
immediately when the RESET button is pressed, or can be made
to wait after the button is pressed until a proper trigger signal
occurs. The READY light indicates when the sweep is armed to
fire on the next received trigger. Using a Tektronix C-27
Camera with a 1:0.5, f/1.3 lens and Polaroid Type 410 film,
writing speeds of 340 (is/cm, displayed on P31 phosphor, can
be recorded. With an optional PI 1 phosphor, writing speeds
of 400 /xs/cm can be recorded.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT provides for horizontal
beam deflection with an external source. Horizontal deflection
factor is continuously variable from 0.2 V/cm to over 15 V/cm.
Bandwidth is DC to 350 kHz or better at maximum gain. Input
impedance is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 47 pF.
176
TRIGGER
TRIGGER LEVEL adjusts to allow sweep triggering at any
selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the wave-
form, and up to ± 15 V (external) in amplitude.
TRIGGER STABILITY can be locked at an optimum triggering
point to eliminate further adjustment.
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal, external, or line. Internal
sources are AC coupled; external sources can be AC or DC
coupled.
HIGH-FREQUENCY SYNC provides steady displays of
signals from 5 MHz to 250 MHz, with a fraction of a cm of dis-
played amplitude. This mode operates from internal and'exter-
nal sources on the Type 581 A, and Time Base A of the Type
585A and RM585A.
LOW-FREQUENCY REJECT operates above 15 kHz to pre-
vent low-frequency components, such as 60-hertz hum, from
interfering with stable triggering. This mode also allows bright
trace displays when a multiple-channel plug-in unit is operated
in its alternate mode.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for Type 581 A and Time Base A
and RM585A are as follows:
FREQUENCY
INTERNAL
EXTERNAL
AC
AC
LF REJ
HF
SYNC
AC/
DC
HF
SYNC
15 Hz to 15 kHz
2 mm
—
—
0.3 V
—
15 kHz to 5 MHz
2 mm
2 mm
—
0.3 V
—
5 MHz to 10 MHz
4 mm
4 mm
4 mm
0.3 V
0.2 V P to P
10 MHz to 50 MHz
1 cm
1 cm
4 mm
0.5 V
0.2 V P to P
50 MHz to 100 MHz
2 cm
2 cm
4 mm
1.5 V
0.2 V P to P
100 MHz to 150 MHz
3 cm
3 cm
4 mm
2.0 V
0.2 V P to P
150 MHz to 250 MHz
—
—
4 mm
—
0.2 V P to P
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for Time Base B of Type 585A
and RM585A are as follows:
INTERNAL E
XTERNAL
FREQUENCY AC AC LF REJ
AC/DC
15 Hz— 15 kHz
4 mm
- 0.5 V P to P
15kHz— 1 MHz 4mm 4mm 0.5 V P to P
1 MHz— 5 MHz 2 cm 2 cm 1 .5 V P to P
INTERNAL TRIGGERING
CHARACTERISTICS AND
FREQUENCY RESPONSE
J
^
581A
585A
RM585A
SWEEP DELAY
Waveforms above are brightened portions (expanded) of wave-
forms below. Waveforms above are displayed in the 'A' DFL'D
BY 'B' mode. Waveforms below are displayed in the 'B' IN-
TENSIFIED BY 'A' mode.
SWEEP DELAY
CALIBRATED DELAY RANGE from 2 M s to 10 seconds can
be used to delay the start of any Time Base A sweep. Time
Base B provides accurate time delay and Time Base A presents
normal sweep at the end of the delay period. Accuracy of the
15 calibrated delay steps from 2 /xs to 0.1s is within 1%
of the indicated delay. Accuracy of the 3 remaining calibrated
steps from 0.2 s to 1 s is within 3% of the indicated delay.
A 10-turn precision potentiometer permits calibrated delay-time
adjustments to any value from 2 /j.s to 10 seconds. Incremental
accuracy of this control is within 0.2% of the indicated setting.
TRIGGERED OPERATION holds off the start of the delayed
sweep until the arrival of the first trigger signal following the
selected delay time. Because the delayed sweep is actually
triggered by the signal under observation, the display is com-
pletely jitter free. A steady display is thus provided for time-
modulated pulses and signals with inherent jitter.
CONVENTIONAL OPERATION holds off the start of the de-
layed sweep for the precise amount of the selected delay time.
Any time-modulation or jitter on the signal will be magnified in
proportion to the amount of sweep expansion.
The time jitter in the delayed trigger or delayed sweep will
not exceed one part in 20,000 of the maximum available delay
interval (where this interval is 10 times the Time/cm or Delay-
Time setting).
SWEEP MAGNIFICATION is readily accomplished when
Time Base A is operated at a faster rate than Time Base B. For
example, if TIME BASE A is operating at 1 fis/cm and TIME
BASE B is operating at 50/xs/cm, the magnification is 50 times.
TRACE BRIGHTENING indicates the exact portion appearing
on the magnified display, and shows the point-in-time rela-
tionship of the magnified display to the original display.
FREQUENCY IN MEGAHERTZ
177
581A
585A
RM585A
mmmmvmmvimm
mwmmmmmm
WBKmWSiWBIMl
PHASE COMPARISON
Dual-trace display of TOO MHz sinewaves at lOns/cm. Phase
difference is approximately 55 degrees. Phase comparison
and similar measurements are possible with the stable high-
frequency triggering system of the Type 581A and 585A.
TIME COINCIDENCE
Dual-trace display of input and output pulses of o transistor
amplifier at 10 ns/cm. Lower trace delayed I ns by the
amplifier under observation. Note time resolution. The Type
58! A or 585A Oscilloscope — with 82 Unit — can display time
coincidence between input channels with no measurable dif-
ference at 10 ns/cm.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX 5" CRT is a metalized, lumped constant travel-
ing wave tube incorporating a helical post accelerating anode
and achieving a small, bright spot. Accelerating potential is
lOkV. A P3l phosphor is normally supplied.
BEAM POSITION INDICATORS light to show the direction
of the beam when it is not on the screen.
ILLUMINATED NO-PARALLAX GRATICULE with variable
edge lighting is accurately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing
area is 4 by 10 cm. Vertical and horizontal centerlines are
further marked in 2-mm divisions.
UNBLANKING WAVEFORM is DC coupled to the CRT grid.
This assures uniform beam intensity for all sweep speeds and
repetition rates at any setting of the intensity control.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR provides 18 squarewave voltages
at the front panel. Peak to peak amplitudes from 0.2 mV/cm
to 100 V are in 1-2-5 sequence and accurate to ±3%. Square-
wave frequency is approximately 1 kHz.
DELAYED TRIGGER used to start the delayed sweep is
available at the front panel. This can be used to trigger
external equipment at any delay from 0.05 /xs to 10 s. When
used with the delayed sweep, the resulting waveform can be
observed. Amplitude is approximately -f-5 volts. A positive
gate of the same duration as B sweep (approximately 20 volts)
is also available at the front panel.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS available at the front panel vial
cathode followers are a positive gate of approximately 20 V,
and a positive-going sawtooth of approximately 150 V.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES insure stable
operation between 105 and 125 V, or 210 and 250 V. Heaters
in the vertical plug-in unit and in the oscilloscope vertical
amplifier are regulated for stable operation and long life.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V,
50 to 60 Hz. Maximum power consumption is 560 watts for the
Type 581 A, and 630 watts for the Type 585A and RM585A.
Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
CABINET MODEL dimensions are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13%"
wide by 23%" deep. Type 581 A net weight is 71 pounds.
Shipping weight is 80 pounds, approx. Type 585A net weight
74 pounds. Shipping weight 84 pounds, approx.
RACK-MOUNT MODEL dimensions are 14" high by 19"
wide by 22 3 / 4 " deep. Type RM585A net weight is 81 pounds.
Shipping weight is 1 10 pounds, approx.
TYPE 581A, without plug-in units $1425
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1—3-
conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (installed)
(378-0567-00); 1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 1— Patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana
plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruc-
tion Manual (070-0390-00).
TYPE 585A, without plug-in units $1725
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1—3-
conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1— Smoke gray filter (installed)
(378-0567-00); 1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 1— Patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana
plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 2— Instruc-
tion Manual (070-0391-00).
TYPE RM585A, without plug-in units $1825
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-
conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1 — Smoke gray filter (installed)
(378-0567-00); 1— Plate, protector, CRT, clear (387-0918-00); 1— Patch
cord, BNC-to-BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— Patch cord, BNC-to-banana
plug, 18" (012-0091-00); 1— Post jack, BNC (012-0092-00); 1— Set
mounting hardware; 2 — Instruction Manual (070-0392-00).
MAINTENANCE AIDS
Please refer to catalog accessory pages
for more-complete information
TU-5 PULSER generates a flat-top square wave to aid in ad-
justment of transient response of the Type 80-Series Plug-In
Units. The TU-5 connects between the Type 581A/585A cali-
brator output and the plug-in unit. Risetime is 1.0 ns, maximum.
Order Part Number 015-0043-00 (includes accessories) .. $46.50
Order Part Number 015-0038-00 (TU-5 only) $25.00
6" PLUG-IN EXTENSION allows a Type 82 or 86 Plug-In
Unit to be serviced while partially removed from the oscillo-
scope.
Order Part Number 013-0055-00 $14.50
RACK-MOUNT ADAPTER
A cradle mount adapts the Type 581 A or Type 585A Oscillo-
scope for rack mounting. It consists of a cradle to support the
instrument in any standard 19" relay rack, and a mask to fit
around the regular instrument panel. Finish is blue vinyl. Rack '
height requirement is YJ^Ii" .
Order Part Number 040-0281 -00 $45.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
178
PLUG -IN ADAPTER Type
The Tektronix Type 81 Adapter makes possible the use of
any Tektronix Letter-Series Plug-In Unit with any Type 580-
Series Oscilloscope. The Type 81 Adapter and appropriate
plug-in unit expand the versatility of the 580-Series Oscillo-
scopes to fields including differential-comparator displays,
sampling, stress analysis, transistor-risetime studies, semicon-
ductor-diode-recovery-time studies, operational amplifiers, spec-
trum analysis, multiple-trace displays, as well as other general
and special-purpose applications.
The Type 81 Adapter is extremely easy to use. The Adapter
is simply inserted into the Type 580-Series plug-in compartment.
The Letter-Series Unit is then plugged into the Adapter. No
cabling or switching is required.
Dimensions are 6y 2 '
weight is 4 pounds.
high by 5'/ 2 " wide by 12'/ 2 " deep. Net
Shipping weight is 6 pounds, approx.
TYPE 81 PLUG-IN ADAPTER $135
Each Adapter includes: 7 — instruction manuals (070-0232-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
EXTEND CAPABILITIES OF TYPE 580-SERIES OSCILLOSCOPES TO THESE AREAS
(Bandwidth is specified as —3 dB j
FOR MULTIPLE-TRACE OPERATION
TYPE 1A1 DUAL-TRACE UNIT— DC to 33 MHz, 10.5-ns risetime
at 50mV/cm to 50 V/cm— DC to 23 MHz, 15-ns risetime at
5 mV/cm increasing to 33 MHz at 50mV/cm.
TYPE 1A2 DUAL-TRACE UNIT— DC to 33 MHz, 10.5-ns risetime
at 50mV/cm to 50 V/cm.
TYPE CA DUAL-TRACE UNIT— DC to 24 MHz, 15-ns risetime
at 50mV/cm to 50 V/cm.
TYPE M FOUR-TRACE UNIT— DC to 20 MHz, 17-ns risetime at
20mV/cm to 25 V/cm.
FOR WIDE BAND APPLICATIONS
TYPE B WIDE-BAND UNIT— DC to 20 MHz, 18-ns risetime at
50mV/cm to 50 V/cm— 2 Hz to 12 MHz, 30-ns risetime at 5
mV/cm to 50mV/cm.
TYPE K FAST-RISE UNIT— DC to 30 MHz, 12-ns risetime at 50
mV/cm to 40 V/cm.
TYPE L FAST-RISE UNIT— DC to 30 MHz, 12-ns risetime at 50
mV/cm to 40 V/cm— 3 Hz to 24 MHz, 15-ns risetime at 5
mV/cm to 4 V/cm.
FOR SPECTRUM ANALYSIS
TYPE 1L10, 1L20, 1L30 UNITS— cover l-10,500MHz.
FOR DIFFERENTIAL INPUT APPLICATIONS
TYPE 1A7 HIGH-GAIN UNIT— DC to 500 kHz at lO^V/cm.
'TYPE D HIGH-GAIN UNIT— DC to 300 kHz at 1 mV/cm increas-
ing to 2 MHz at 50 mV/cm.
TYPE E LOW-LEVEL UNIT— 0.06 Hz to 20 kHz at SOjuV/cm,
increasing to 60 kHz at 0.5 mV/cm to 25 mV/cm.
TYPE G WIDE-BAND UNIT— DC to 20 MHz, 18-ns risetime at
50mV/cm to 50 V/cm.
FOR HIGH DC DEFLECTION FACTOR
TYPE H WIDE-BAND UNIT— DC to 15 MHz, 23-ns risetime at
5 mV/cm to 50 V/cm.
FOR OPERATIONS OF INTEGRATION, DIFFERENTIATION,
FUNCTION GENERATION, AND LINEAR OR NONLINEAR
AMPLIFICATION
TYPE O OPERATIONAL AMPLIFIER— DC to 25 MHz, 14-ns rise-
time at 50mV/cm to 50 V/cm.
FOR TRANSDUCER AND STRAIN GAGE APPLICATIONS
TYPE Q UNIT— DC to 6 kHz, 60 ps risetime at 10 /xstrain/div
to 10,000 /istrain/div.
FOR TRANSISTOR-RISETIME CHECKING
TYPE R UNIT— 12-ns risetime.
FOR DIODE RECOVERY-TIME MEASUREMENTS
TYPE S UNIT— 12-ns risetime.
FOR PRECISE AMPLITUDE MEASUREMENT VIA THE SLIDE-
BACK TECHNIQUE
TYPE W DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR UNIT— DC to 23 MHz,
at 50mV/cm, decreasing to 8 MHz at 1 mV/cm. 15-ns rise-
time at 50mV/cm, increasing to 44-ns at 1 mV/cm.
TYPE Z DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR UNIT— DC to 13 MHz,
27-ns risetime at 50 mV/cm to 25 V/cm.
FOR HIGH-FREQUENCY SAMPLING APPLICATIONS
TYPE 1S1 SAMPLING UNIT— 350-ps risetime.
TYPE 1S2 TDR SAMPLING UNIT— 90-ps risetime.
179
Type
DUAL TRACE UNIT
With the Type 82 Plug-In Unit, a 580-Series Oscilloscope
can display the time difference between two signals, the re-
sponse of two circuits to the same pulse, the input and output
waveforms of a circuit, and many other dual-trace operations
— quickly and easily.
RISETIME of the Type 82 with Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes
is approximately 4 ns at lOOmV/cm, always less than 4.2 ns.
At lOmV/cm, using the X10 Amplifier, risetime is approxi-
mately 4.3 ns, always less than 4.5 ns. lOOmV/cm — 1 2 dB
point is approximately 150 MHz.
4 OPERATING MODES include Channel A only, Channel B
Only, Alternate (triggered electronic switching between chan-
nels, at the end of each sweep), and chopped. In chopped
operation, successive 5-^is segments are displayed at an approx-
imate 100-kHz rate per channel, or 500-ns segments at an
approximate 1-MHz rate per channel.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR from lOOmV/cm to 50
V/cm is in 9 steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and is accurate within
3%. A variable control permits uncalibrated adjustment from
lOOmV/cm to approximately 100 V/cm.
10X AMPLIFIER, DC-coupled, extends deflection factor to
lOmV/cm. Deflection factor is then in 9 calibrated steps from
lOmV/cm to 5 V/cm, 1-2-5 sequence. The variable control
provides uncalibrated adjustment from lOmV/cm to approx-
imately 10 V/cm.
POLARITY INVERSION can be used to compare signals
180° out of phase.
AC OR DC COUPLING is possible. When AC-coupled, the
low-frequency — 3 dB point is 1.6 Hz direct or 0.16 Hz with
the P6008 10X Probe.
*Approximate — 3 dB points.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 1 5 pF.
P6008 10X PASSIVE PROBES increase the input resistance
to 10 megohms and decrease the input capacitance to approx-
imately 7 pF. The risetime of a Type 580-Series Oscilloscope,
a Type 82 Plug-In Unit, and a P6008 Probe, at an overall deflec-
tion factor of lOOmV/cm is approximately 4.5ns.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Net weight is 4 3 / 4 pounds.
Shipping weight is 10 pounds, approx.
TYPE 82 DUAL-TRACE PLUG-IN UNIT $650
Each instrument includes: 2 — P6008 probe (010-0129-00); 2 — instruction
manual (070-0349-01).
MODIFICATION FOR EARLY INSTRUMENTS
TYPE 581/585 VERTICAL STANDARDIZATION MOD KIT
improves and standardizes the transient response of early
Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes. The Mod Kit is essential for the
use of a Type 82 Plug-In Unit in the early instruments and also
improves the performance of these instruments when used with
the Type 80/P80 combination.
Tektronix Type 580-Series Oscilloscopes with serial numbers
prior to #950 for Type 581 and #2585 for Type 585 may
require this modification. Please consult your Field Engineer.
Each kit includes components to change delay-line imped-
ance, standardize CRT termination, modify CRT and distributed J^L
amplifier circuitry, and modify Type 80/P80 combination.
Order Part Number 040-0275-00 $25
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
180
PLUG-IN UNIT Type
10mV/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR
DC TO 85 MHz AT 100 mV/cm*
DC TO 80 MHz AT 10 mV/cm*
RISETIME of the Type 86 and Type 580-Series Oscilloscope
is approximately 4 ns at lOOmV/cm, always less than 4.2 ns.
At lOmV/cm, using the XI Amplifier, risetime is approxi-
mately 4.3ns, always less than 4.5ns. lOOmV/cm — 12dB
point is approximately 150 MHz.
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION FACTOR from lOOmV/cm to
50V/cm is in 9 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy
within 3%. A variable control permits uncalibrated adjust-
ment from lOOmV/cm to approximately lOOV/cm.
10X AMPLIFIER, DC-coupled, extends deflection factor to
lOmV/cm. Deflection factor is then in 9 calibrated steps from
lOmV/cm to 5 V/cm, 1-2-5 sequence. The variable control
provides uncalibrated adjustment from lOmV/cm to approxi-
mately 10 V/cm.
INPUT can be AC or DC-coupled. When AC-coupled, the
low-frequency — 3 dB point is 1.6 Hz direct or 0.1 6 Hz with the
P6008 10X Probe.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 15pF.
*Approximate — 3 dB points.
P6008 10X PASSIVE PROBE increases the input resistance
to 10 megohms and decreases the input capacitance to approxi-
mately 4 pF. The risetime of a Type 580-Series Oscilloscope,
a Type 86 Plug-In Unit, and a P6008 Probe, at an overall
deflection factor of lOOmV/cm is approximately 4.5ns.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Net weight is 3'/, pounds.
Shipping weight is 7 pounds, approx.
TYPE 86 PLUG-IN UNIT $350
Each instrument includes: 1 — P6008 probe (010-0129-00): 2— instruction
manual (070-0364- 01 1 .
MODIFICATION FOR EARLY INSTRUMENTS
TYPE 581/585 VERTICAL STANDARDIZATION MOD KIT
improves and standardizes the transient response of early Type
580-Series Oscilloscopes. The Mod Kit is essential for the use
of a Type 82 or 86 Plug-In Unit in the early instruments and also
improves the performance of these instruments when used with
the Type 80/P80 combination.
Tektronix Type 580-Series Oscilloscope with serial numbers
prior to #950 for Type 581 and #2585 for Type 585 may require
this modification. If in doubt about instrument modification,
please consult your Field Engineer.
Each kit includes components to change delay-line imped-
ance, standardize CRT termination, modify CRT and distributed-
amplifier circuitry and modify Type 80 Plug-In Unit/Type P80
Probe combination.
Order Part Number 040-0275-00 $25
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
181
Type
DC-to-50 MHz OSCILLOSCOPES
The Type 647 and RM647 Oscilloscopes are the result
of research and design toward compact, high-performance
instruments capable of accurate measurement in severe
environments ( — 30°C to +65°C) and offering an extra
margin of dependability and even greater accuracy in
normal environments (0°C to +40°C).
Design goals placed these "most wanted" features in a
ruggedized oscilloscope: vertical plug-ins for DC to 50 MHz
(dual-trace or wide-band differential comparator opera-
tion), choice of horizontal plug-ins for calibrated sweep
delay or wide-range magnification, bright 6x10 cm no-
parallax displays, low power requirements, ease of mainten-
ance . . . all in a compact easily-handled package.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION
VERTICAL SYSTEM accepts a 10-Series Plug-In Unit.
SIGNAL DELAY permits observation of the leading edge of
the waveform that triggers the sweep. The delay line requires
no tuning.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM accepts an 11 -Series Plug-In Unit.
CRT AND DISPLAY FEATURES
TEKTRONIX CRT is a rectangular flat-faced tube. Accel-
erating potential is 14 kV. A P31 phosphor is normally sup-
plied.
INTERNAL GRATICULE with variable edge lighting is ac-
curately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing area is 6x10 cm.
Vertical and horizontal centerlines are marked in 2-mm
divisions.
TRACE FINDER attenuates both horizontal and vertical
voltages to aid in positioning the display.
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING to the CRT grid assures
uniform beam intensity for all sweep speeds and repetition
rates at any setting of the intensity control.
EXTERNAL CRT INPUTS are located at the rear of the
oscilloscope. Unblanking amplifier bandwidth (for small sig-
nals) is DC to 10 MHz. Gain is 1.5. Cathode Z-axis input
is AC coupled (0.01 5 //.F and 22 kQ).
182
rm647
ENVIRONMENTAL CHARACTERISTICS
•
TEMPERATURE
VIBRATION*
OPERATING
Type RM647: -30 °C to +65° C.
Type 647: — 30°C to +65°C, continuous, when instrument
is not tipped more than 20° in any direction from level posi-
tion. When instrument is operated vertically (with front panel
up), the maximum ambient temperature is +55°C.
NON-OPERATING
-55 °C to +75 °C.
OPERATING AND NON-OPERATING
0.025 inch peak to peak, 10 to 55 to 10 Hz in 1 minute sweeps
(4G's) for 15 minutes on each axis. 3 minute vibration at
resonance or 55 Hz (each axis).
ALTITUDE
OPERATING
15,000 feet maximum. Maximum operating temperature of the
Type 647 at 130 V line reduced by 10°C.
NON-OPERATING
50,000 feet, maximum.
SHOCK
NON-OPERATING
20 G's, one-half sine, 1 1 -millisecond duration. Two shocks each
direction along each of the three major axes; total of 12 shocks.
HUMIDITY NON-OPERATING
Meets electrical performance specifications after exposure to
i five cycles (120 hours) of Mil-Std-202B, method 106A (omit
freezing and vibration, and allow 24-hour post-test drying
period before operating).
•
TRANSPOR- NON-OPERATING
TATION Meets National Safe Transit test when factory-packaged: Vibra-
tion for one hour at slightly greater than one G. 30-inch drops
on one corner, the three edges radiating from that corner,
and all flat surfaces; total of 10 drops.
^Applicable to RM647 when mounted in a rock with rear support kit 040-
0394-00.
183
647
rm647
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
1-kHz CALIBRATOR provides 18 squarewave voltages from
0.2 mV to 100 V, 1-2-5 sequence.
AMPLITUDE
ACCURACY 0°C to + 40°C — 30°Cto+65°C
100 V and lOOmV ±1% ±1.5%
All other positions ±2% ±3%
Frequency is crystal controlled, and is accurate within ±0.1 %
from — 30°C to +65°C. Output resistance is 50 ohms from
0.2 mV to 0.2 V. Squarewave symmetry is accurate within
±0.1%. Risetime is less than 1 /xs. The calibrator also pro-
vides a 100 V DC output. For Current Probe calibration, a
5-mA squarewave output is available through a front panel
loop.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED DC SUPPLIES insure stable,
low-drift operation. All supplies are protected against ac-
cidental short circuit. Supply voltages are available at the
rear panel for external application. 45 to 440-Hz line fre-
quency can be used with either 100 to 130 V AC, or 200 to
260 V AC line. A multi-tap transformer provides a selection of
operating voltages within these ranges. Power consumption
is approximately 185 watts at 117 V AC (with Type 10A2 and
11B2 Units). Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
SINGLE-SHOT at Wns/cm
High writing-rate index of the new 16470-3) -I CRT allows
permanent records of fast single-shot displays. Photographed
with Tektronix C-27 Camera and Polaroid * Land 10,000 speed
film. l*Registered Trade-Mark, Polaroid Corporation)
CONVECTION COOLING provides adequate ventilation to
+65°C, when the Type 647 is not tipped by more than 20°
on any axis from the normal position. A thermal cutout protects
the instrument from overheating.
DIMENSIONS are 14'/," high by 10" wide by 23" deep.
Net indicator weight is 40y 2 pounds. Net weight with Type
10A2 and 11B2 Plug-In Units is 52 pounds.
TYPE 647 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units ... $1350
Each instrument includes: 1 — smoke grey light filter, installed (378-
0548-00], 1— clear implosion shield (337-0573-00), 1— 20-inch 50-O
cable, BNC male to BNC male (012-0076-00), 1— 18-inch patch cord,
BNC to BNC (012-0087-00), 1— 18-inch patch cord, BNC to banana
plug (012-0091-00), 1— post jack, BNC (012-0092-00), 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0022-00), 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00), 2—
instruction manuals (070-0370-00).
RUGGED RACK MOUNT
The Type RM647 Oscilloscope provides the electrical and
environmental capabilities of the Type 647 in only 7" of rack
height. The instrument mounts on slide-out tracks to a standard
19" rack. Depth is 19". Power consumption is approximately
200 watts at 117 volts (with Type 10A2 and 1 1 B2 Plug-In Units).
The Type RM647 is forced-air cooled.
The standard model operates from a 50 to 60-hertz line
(100 to 130 volts or 200 to 260 volts). An extra-cost option
(MOD 101K) allows operation from 50 to 60 and 400-hertz
line. Net indicator weight (with track assembly) is 50 pounds.
Net weight with Type 10A2 and 1 1 B2 Plug-In Units (and track
assembly) is 61 '/j pounds.
TYPE RM647 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1500
Each instrument includes: 1 — smoke grey light filter, installed (378-
0548-00), 1— clear implosion shield (337-0573-00), 1— 20-inch 50-12
cable, BNC male to BNC male (012-0076-00), 1— 18-inch patch cord,
BNC to BNC (012-0087-00), 1— 18-inch patch cord, BNC to banana
plug (012-0091-00), 1— post jack, BNC (012-0092-00), 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0022-00), 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00), 1
set — mounting tracks (351-0085-00) and hardware, 2 — instruction man-
uals (070-0435-00).
RACK MOUNT REAR SUPPORT KIT
The kit is recommended where maximum resistance to vibra-
tion and shock are desired in a rack installation. It -rigidly
secures the rear of the Type RM647 to the rear rack mem-
bers, to minimize amplification of vibration and shock forces,
yet through use of a guide-pin system, allows easy with-
drawal on the slide-out tracks.
Order Part Number 040-0394-00 $ 1 2
U,5. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
184
HIGH-GAIN
DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR Type
GHI
-
A CONVENTIONAL AMPLIFIER
DC to 45 MHz at 5 mV/cm
DC to 35 MHz at 1 mV/cm
A DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
20,000:1 CMR to 100 kHz
10,000:1 CMR to 1 MHz
1,000:1 CMR to 10 MHz
A CALIBRATED COMPARATOR
6, 60 and 600-volt equivalent Vc range
6,000-cm slide-back scale
± {0.1% + 5 mV) Vc accuracy
The Type 7 0A7 combines high-gain DC, differential, wide-
band, and calibrated comparator features in a single high-
performance plug-in unit for Type 647 and RM647 Oscillo-
scopes. With DC fo 35-MHz bandwidth at 7 mV/cm (DC to
45 MHz at 5mV/cm) the Type 70A7 provides the greatest
1 mV/cm real-time bandwidth presently available in the
I Tektronix line. Rapid recovery from large differential over-
load allows detailed study of pulse-top flatness, as well as
comparator measurement of transient amplitudes. Its ef-
fective 6,000 cm slideback scale and 20,000: 7 common-
mode rejection ratio permit high-accuracy measurements
and comparisons; rugged design insures accuracy even out-
side the laboratory, where environmental extremes often
preclude accurate results.
CONVENTIONAL AMPLIFIER
DEFLECTION FACTOR from 1 mV/cm to 20V/cm is in 14
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence. An uncalibrated vernier
allows continuous variation between steps and to at least 50
V/cm. DEFLECTION FACTOR at any one step can be adjusted
to zero error with the front-panel gain control. When gain
has been accurately adjusted at 5mV/cm, accuracies are as
follows:
VOLTS/CM ACCURACY
DEFLECTION FACTOR
0°C to
+40 "C
-30 °C to
+65°C
1 mV/cm (also lOmV/cm
and 0.1 V/cm with Vc
range extended)
±2.5%
±4%
2 mV/cm through 2 V/cm
(except lOmV/cm and
0.1 V/cm and Vc range
extended)
±1.5%
±2.5%
5 V/cm through 20 V/cm
±3%
±4%
BANDWIDTH/RISETIME performance is given for the Type
10A1 installed in a Type 647 or RM647 Oscilloscope. Band-
width is specified at —3 dB; risetime is measured between
the 10% and 90% amplitude points. Bandwidth can be limited
to 1 MHz ±10%, when desired, for noise reduction at higher
sensitivities.
BANDWIDTH/RISETIME CAPABILITIES
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
0°C to
+40° C
-30 °C to
+65°C
5mV/cm to
20 V/cm
> 45 MHz
< 7.8 ns
> 40 MHz
< 8.7 ns
1 mV/cm and
2 mV/cm
> 35 MHz
< 10 ns
> 35 MHz
< 11.7 ns
INPUTS are direct or AC coupled. Low-frequency response
with AC coupling is — 3dB at 2 Hz.
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by 20 pF.
STABILITY
0°C to
+40°C
-30 °C to
+65 °C
DC Thermal
Drift
< 0.5 mV/degree
< 0.5 mV/degree
Thermal Gain
Variations
< ±3%
< ±5%
185
10A1
DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER
COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIOS apply throughout
the range of 0°C to +40°C. DEFLECTION FACTOR is 1 mV/cm
for all values in the chart. At lOmV/cm, using the internal
10X attenuator, CMR > 2,000:1 for a 20-V peak to peak 10-
kHz- sinewave.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION
FREQUENCY
REJECTION
RATIO
SINEWAVE
AMPLITUDE
DC to 100 kHz
> 20,000:1
10 V P to P
100 kHz to 1 MHz
> 10,000:1
10 V P to P
1 MHz to 10 MHz
> 10,000:1
frequency in MHz
10V
frequency in MHz
20 MHz
> 100:1
1 V P to P
60 Hz
AC coupled
> 2,000:1
10 V P to P
INPUT VOLTAGE
DEFLECTION
LINEAR
MAXIMUM
FACTOR
DYNAMIC
COMBINED DC
RANGE and
AND PEAK AC
EQUIVALENT
Vc RANGE
1 mV/cm
through
±6V
±20 V
20 mV/cm
lOmV/cm
through
±60 V
-1-600 V
0.2 V/cm
0.1 V/cm
through
±600 V
±600 V
20 V/cm
RECOVERY TIME after differential offset < 0.3 /xs for a
return to within ±2 mV. Recovery DC error < 0.5 mV after
1-ms recovery time. Characteristics apply from 0°C to +40°C.
CALIBRATED DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR
COMPARISON VOLTAGE (Vc) can be used to offset
the input waveform via the slideback technique. The internal
Vc source allows measurement of signals up to 600 volts in
amplitude, with 4-digit resolution. Equivalent Vc range is
selected simultaneously with deflection factor, unless the
operator chooses to extend the Vc range for a limited number
of steps. Bandwidth/risetime in the extended positions is the
same as at 1 mV/cm and 2 mV/cm.
Vc CHARACTERISTICS
EQUIVA-
LENT Vc
RANGE
SLIDEBACK
MEASUREMENT
ACCURACY
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
0°C to
+40 o C
-30 °C to
+65 "C
6 volts
±(0.1%
+ 5mV)
±(0.15%
+ 8mV)
1 mV/cm
through
20 mV/cm
60 volts
±(0.225%
+ 50 mV)
±(0.4%
+ 80 mV)
lOmV/cm
through
0.2 V/cm*
600 volts
±(0.35%
+ 0.5 V)
±(0.65%
+ 0.8 V)
0.1 V
through
20 V/cm*
*Pull knob to retain Vc range at two lowest deflection
factors.
Vc OUTPUT is available at the front panel as well as inter-
nally. Output is continuously variable from to ±6 volts (0
to ±0.6 volts when V/cm is set to 5, 10, or 20 V/cm). Ac-
curacy is within ±(0.1% + 5mV) from 0°C to +40°C and
within ±(0.15% + 8mV) from -30°C to +65°C. (Open
circuit values)
Vc CHARACTERISTICS WITH P6023 PROBE
EQUIVA-
LENT Vc
RANGE
SLIDEBACK
MEASUREMENT
ACCURACY
0°C to
+40 °C
60 volts
±(0.225%
+ 50 mV)
600 volts
6000 volts**
±(0.5%
+ 0.5V)
-30 °C to
+65°C
±(0.4%
+ 80 mV)
DEFLECTION
FACTOR
+ d%
+ 5 V)
±(0.95%
+ 0.8 V)
±(2%
+ 8 V)
lOmV/cm
through
0.2 V/cm
0.1 V/cm
through
0.2 V/cm*
1 V/cm
through
200 V/cm*
*Pull knob to retain Vc range at two lowest deflection
factors.
**Probe rating is 1000 volts maximum.
WEIGHT: Net — 4% pounds, shipping— 11 pounds, approx.
TYPE 10A1 DIFFERENTIAL AMPLIFIER $900
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manuals (070-0464-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
186
DUAL-TRACE AMPLIFIER UNIT Type
DC TO 50 MHz BANDWIDTH
5 OPERATING MODES
lOmV/cm DEFLECTION FACTOR
CHANNEL 2 OUTPUT
TRIGGER SELECTION
The Type 10A2 Amplifier is a ruggedized, dual-trace plug-
in unit, giving the Type 647 Oscilloscope a DC to 50 MHz
bandwidth. Solid-state design has made possible the con-
struction of this compact high-performance unit. The Type
10A2 is environmentalized to operate under adverse extremes,
and provides even greater reliability under normal operat-
ing conditions.
IDENTICAL CHANNELS can be added algebraically, oper-
ated singly with either polarity, or dual-trace with either alter-
nate or chopped switching. In alternate operation, electronic
switching occurs at the end of each sweep. In chopped oper-
ation, successive 500-ns segments of each channel are dis-
played at a 1-MHz (±20%) rate per channel. Chopped tran-
sient blanking is provided.
BANDWIDTH with the Type 647 Oscilloscope is DC to
at least 50 MHz (3-dB down) from 0°C to +40°C.
RISETIME with the Type 647 Oscilloscope is less than 7
ns from 0°C to +40 "C.
DEFLECTION FACTOR from lOmV/cm to 20V/cm is in 11
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Deflection factor at any
one position can be adjusted to the accuracy of the standard
used, plus limits of resolution, with the front-panel gain adjust-
ment. Attenuator accuracy at all other positions is within ±2%
from — 30° C to +65° C. A variable control permits continuous
uncalibrated adjustment from lOmV/cm to 50V/cm.
POLARITY INVERSION for both channels can be used to
compare signals 180° out of phase.
COMMON MODE REJECTION in the added-algebraically
mode is at least 20:1 up to 25 MHz for common-mode signals
up to 10 cm.
CHANNEL ISOLATION is at least 80-dB up to 25 MHz.
INTERNAL TRIGGER is obtained from the common output
amplifier, or can be switched to Channel 2 only. Triggering
from Channel 2 provides the correct time relationship between
^channels in Alternate and Chopped operation.
CHANNEL 2 OUTPUT is available at the front panel for
external triggering or driving other equipment. This >10X
output, when fed into Channel 1, provides 1 mV/cm deflec-
tion factor at a DC to 20 MHz bandwidth.
AC OR DC COUPLING or grounding of the input is con-
trolled from the front panel. With AC coupling, the low-fre-
quency — 3-dB point is <2 Hz.
MAXIMUM INPUT is 600 volts (DC + peak AC).
INPUT RC is 1 megohm paralleled by 20 pF.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS: Net weight is 5 pounds.
Shipping weight is 7 pounds, approx.
ENVIRONMENTAL
CHARACTERISTICS
0° C to +40° C
-30° C to +65° C
AC Gain Stability
Display Signal
CH 2 OUT Signal
±1.5%
±1%
±3%
±2%
—3-dB Bandwidth 50 MHz, minimum
40 MHz, minimum
DC Trace 1 cm/20° C
Displacement
TYPE 1 0A2 AMPLIFIER $725
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0376-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
187
Type
TIME-BASE UNIT
WIDE SWEEP RANGE
DIRECT-READING MAGNIFIER
FLEXIBLE TRIGGERING
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION
The Type 11 Bl is a ruggedized time-base unit for the
Type 647 Oscilloscope. It features a single wide-range
time base and a direct-reading IX to 50X sweep magnifier.
SWEEP RANGE from 0.1 /is /cm to 2 s/cm is in 23 cali-
brated steps with 1-2-5 sequence. Sweep range is continuously
variable uncalibrated from 0.1 /xs/cm to approx 5 s/cm. A
front-panel lamp indicates uncalibrated sweep range.
DIRECT-READING SWEEP MAGNIFIER provides up to 50X
expansion, depending on the basic sweep time/cm. The mag-
nifier knob indicates directly the time/cm of the magnified
sweep. With the magnifier, the calibrated sweep time/cm
can be extended to 10 ns/cm.
ACCURACIES
0°C
to
+ 40°C
-30°C
to
+ 65°C
2 s/cm to 0.1 s/cm
±3%
+4%, -6%
50 ms/cm to 0.1 /ts/cm
±1.5%
±2.5%
Magnifier additional:
Up to 50 ns/cm
20 or 10 ns/cm
±1%
±2%
±1.5%
±2.5%
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic re-
cording of waveforms. A Reset pushbutton arms the sweep to
fire on the next received trigger. The sweep can also be re-
motely reset, through a rear-panel jack on the Type 647 or
RM647 Oscilloscope. After firing once, the sweep is locked
out until rearmed by pressing the Reset button. The button
lights to indicate when the sweep is armed to fire on the next
received trigger.
VARIABLE
TIME/CM or
HORIZONTAL VOLTS/CM
MSEC
EXT HORIZ INPUT
O >
*0 nSEC
^(MAG ONLY)
CALIB *S
188
11 B1
+ GATE and SAWTOOTH OUTPUTS are available at
the front panel. Output is at 15 volts from the + gate and
at +10 volts from the sweep.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT provides for horizontal
beam deflection with an external source. Horizontal deflec-
tion factor is 0.1 V/cm to 2 V/cm in 5 steps, accuracy within
±2%, or 1 mV/cm to 20 V/cm in 5 steps, accuracy within
±5% using the -HO input attenuator. Deflection factor
is continuously variable uncalibrated between steps. Band-
width is DC to at least 3 MHz (3-dB down). With AC coupling
the low-frequency — 3-dB point is approximately 16 Hz. With
AC Low-Frequency Reject the low-frequency — 3-dB point is
17 kHz. Input RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately
35 pF in the "Ext" input position, or 10 megohms paralleled
by approximately 6 pF in the "Ext -HO" position.
TRIGGER MODES include Free-Running, Single-Sweep, Nor-
mal, and 2 types of Automatic Base Line operation (manual or
fixed trigger level). The Automatic Base Line provides a bright
reference trace (regardless of sweep speed) when no input
signal is applied, and provides stable triggered-sweeps for
triggering signal repetition rates above 20 Hz.
FIXED-LEVEL AUTOMATIC OPERATION presets the trigger
level to near zero. It offers the most triggering convenience
for high duty-cycle waveforms.
MANUAL-LEVEL AUTOMATIC OPERATION offers full
operator control of trigger level for both + and — slope
triggering, even on signals of very low duty cycle.
TRIGGER LEVEL adjusts to allow sweep triggering at any
selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the
waveform. Level range for internal triggering covers the entire
screen; for external triggering it is ±5V, or ±50 V using the
external -HO trigger attenuator.
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal, external, external -HO,
or line.
TRIGGER COUPLING can be DC, AC (— 3 dB at approx
16 Hz), or AC low-frequency reject ( — 3dB at approx 17 kHz).
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS are a 2-mm deflection or 125-mV
external signal to 50 kHz, increasing to a 1 -cm deflection or
250-mV external signal to 50 MHz. These requirements apply
to Normal triggering, and also Automatic Base Line when
using manual-level control.
HIGH-FREQUENCY STABILITY changes the time base re-
covery time to reduce high frequency jitter.
FREE-RUN LIGHT warns the operator when the sweep is
free running. The indicator is particulary useful when setting
up triggering in the automatic mode from a high repetition-
rate external trigger source.
WEIGHT:
TYPE 11B1
Net — 4V 2 pounds. Shipping-
TIME BASE
-7 pounds, approx.
$650
Each instrument includes: 2-instruction manuals (070-0424-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
189
Type TIME- BASE UNIT
NORMAL AND DELAYED SWEEPS
XI SWEEP MAGNIFIER
FLEXIBLE TRIGGERING
SINGLE-SWEEP OPERATION
The Type 11B2 is a ruggedized time-base unit for the
Type 647 Oscilloscope. Two separate time-base generators
provide for calibrated sweep delay. Time Base A is the
normal sweep and is also used to delay the start of Time
Base B. This high performance unit is designed for severe
operating and storage conditions.
TIME BASE A and B SWEEP RANGE from 0.1 /xs/cm
to 5 s/cm is in 24 calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence.
Sweep range is continuously variable uncalibrated from 0.1
jus/cm to approximately 12 s/cm. A front-panel lamp indi-
cates uncalibrated sweep range.
10X SWEEP MAGNIFIER expands the center portion of
the unmagnified display to fill 10 cm. It can be used to extend
the calibrated sweep range to lOns/cm.
ACCURACIES
0°C — 30°C
to to
+ 40°C +65°C
5 s/cm to 0.1 s/cm
±3%
+4%, -6%
50 ms/cm to 0.1 iis/cm
±1.5%
±2.5%
10X Magnifier additional:
Up to 50 ns/cm
20, 10 ns/cm
±1% ±1.5%
±2% ±2.5%
DISPLAY MODES include Time Base A only, A intensified
by B, or B delayed by A. In the 2 latter modes, Time Base B
can be started automatically at the end of the delay period, or
is triggerable at the end of the delay period.
SINGLE SWEEP OPERATION facilitates photographic re-
cording of waveforms displayed on Time Base A. A RESET
pushbutton arms the sweep to fire on the next received trigger.
The sweep can also be remotely reset, through a rear-panel
jack on the Type 647 Oscilloscope. After firing once, the sweep
is locked out until rearmed by pressing the RESET button. The
button lights to indicate when the sweep is armed to fire on the
next received trigger.
+ GATE AND SAWTOOTH OUTPUTS from each time base
are available at the front panel. Output is =; +15 V from A
and B gate, and ==: +10 V from A and B sweep.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT provides for horizontal
beam deflection with an external source. Horizontal deflec-
tion factor is 1 V/cm ±10% without magnification or 0.1
V/cm ±10% with XI magnifier. Bandwidth is DC to at least
3 MHz (3-dB down). With AC coupling, the low-frequency
— 3-dB point is approximately 16 Hz. Input RC is 1 megohm
paralleled by approximately 30 pF.
TRIGGER
TRIGGER MODE includes free-running, normal, single-sweep,
or automatic operation.
AUTOMATIC TRIGGERING provides a bright reference
trace (regardless of sweep range) in the absence of an input
signal, provides a free-running display until triggering is
achieved, and permits stable triggering from 20 Hz to above
50 MHz.
190
11B2
TRIGGER LEVEL adjusts to allow sweep triggering at any
selected point on either the rising or falling portion of the
waveform, and up to ±5 or ±50 V (Time Base A), or ±10 V
(Time Base B) external.
TRIGGER SOURCE can be internal or external (Time Base
B), internal, external, external -MO, or line (Time Base A).
Time Base B is AC or DC coupled. Time Base A has AC or
DC coupling plus AC low-frequency reject.
LOW-FREQUENCY REJECT (— 3 dB at approx 17 kHz)
enables triggering on high-frequency components of wave-
forms, with reduced interference from low-frequency compo-
nents such as line-frequency hum.
HIGH-FREQUENCY STABILITY changes Time Base A re-
covery time to reduce high-frequency jitter.
TIME BASE A and B TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS for in-
ternal triggering are 2-mm deflection to 50 kHz, 1-cm deflec-
tion at 50 MHz. External triggering requires 125mV to 50 kHz,
250 mV to 50 MHz.
SWEEP DELAY
CALIBRATED DELAY RANGE from Time Base A is con-
tinuously variable, 1 ^s to 50 s. A ten-turn precision potenti-
ometer permits accurate delay time multiplication of the Time
Base A delay steps. The 3 fastest Time Base A ranges are not
normally used for delay generation.
DELAY ACCURACIES*
0° c
to
+ 40° C
-30°C
to
+ 65°C
5 s/cm to 0.1 s/cm
±2.5% 1
+3%, -6% 1
50ms/cm to 1.0/is/cm
±1.0% 1
±2% 1
Multiplier Incremental
Linearity
±0.15% FS
±0.2% FS
Jitter, Parts in 10" of Maxi-
mum Available Delay
Period
<5
<5
*l ss % of indicated delay.
FS = % of full scale (10X TIME/cm or DELAY TIME setting). For absolute
delay from trigger point to display start, trigger processing time (typically
<O00ns) must be added.
TRIGGERED OPERATION holds off the start of the de-
layed sweep until the arrival of the first trigger signal following
the selected delay time. Because the delayed sweep is actually
triggered by the signal under observation, the display is jitter
free. A steady display is thus provided for time-modulated pulses
and signals with inherent jitter.
CONVENTIONAL OPERATION holds off the start of the
delayed sweep for the precise amount of the selected delay
time. Any time-modulation or jitter on the signal will be mag-
nified in proportion to the amount of sweep expansion.
The time jitter in the delayed trigger or delayed sweep will
not exceed one part in 20,000 of the maximum available de-
lay interval (where this interval is 10 times the Time/cm or
Delay-Time setting).
II
MM IMMMMM
■■■■■■■■■■
CALIBRATED SWEEP DELAY
Above waveform (A intensified by BJ indicates by trace bright-
ening the portion expanded 20X below (B delayed by A).
Time Base A — 2 fis/cm, Time Base B — 0.1 jus/cm.
WIDE-RANGE MAGNIFICATION is readily accomplished
when Time Base B is operated at a faster rate than Time Base
A. For example, if TIME BASE B is operating at 1 /ts/cm and
TIME BASE A is operating at 50 fis/cm, the magnification is
50 times.
TRACE BRIGHTENING indicates the portion that will appear
on the magnified display, and shows the point-in-time relation-
ship of the magnified display to the original display.
WEIGHT: Net — 6'/ 2 pounds, Shipping — 9 pounds, approx.
TYPE 1 1 B2 TIME BASE $850
Each instrument includes: 1 — BNC female to BSM female adapter
1103-0036-00), 2— instruction manuals (070-0377-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
191
Type 647 ACCESSORIES
ATTENUATOR PROBES
Attenuator Probes reduce loading on the circuit under test,
and increase the input resistance of the measuring system.
All probes include a variety of tips for easy access to com-
ponents, even in crowded circuit conditions.
The P6023 Probe is recommended for use with Type 10A1
in making accurate slide-back measurements and for differ-
ential measurements where common-mode signal rejection is
important. Where these capabilities are not required, P6008
and P6009 Probes can be used to give maximum bandwidth
with Type 10A1. P6006 and P6007 Probes offer a cost advan-
tage with some sacrifice in bandwidth. P6010 and P601 1
Probes are extra small in size and are well suited for serv-
icing sub-miniature circuits where access is limited.
CHARACTERISTICS OF PROBES WITH TYPE 10A1 AND 10A2 AMPLIFIERS
PROBE
P6006 P6007 P6008
P6009 P6010 P6011
P6023
ATTENUATION RATIO
INPUT RESISTANCE
10X
100X
10X
100X
10X
IX
10X
10 megohms
10 megohms
10 megohms
10 megohms 10 megohms
1 megohm
8 megohms
INPUT CAPACITANCE
(Typical)
6.7 pF
2.1 pF 7.7 pF
2.6 pF lOpF
28 pF
12 pF
TOTAL RISETIME— 10A1
< 10.6 ns < 10.6 ns <8.8ns
<7.9 ns <7.9 ns
<15ns
< 10.5 ns
10A2
<10ns <10ns <8.1 ns
<7.1 ns <7.1 ns
<15ns
<10ns
VOLTAGE RATING
600 volts 1 .5 kV DC 600 volts
1 .5 kV DC 500 volts 600 volts
1000 volts
DC or AC or AC RMS, DC or AC
or AC RMS, DC or AC DC or AC
DC or AC
P to P 4.2 kV AC P to P
4.2 kV AC P to P P to P
P to P
P to P
P to P
VOLTAGE DERATING*
5.7 MHz 200 kHz 20 MHz
300 kHz 2.5 MHz 0.5 MHz
5 MHz
CABLE LENGTH
3.5' t 3.5' t 3.5'
9' 3.5' tt 3.5' tt
3.5'
PART NUMBER
010-0127-00 010-0150-00 010-0129-00
010-0170-00 010-0188-00 010-0193-00
010-0167-00
PRICE
$22 $22 $35
$55
$30
$15
$40
*Peak to peak voltage deratir
g is necessary for CW frequencies higher than those listed.
tP6006 and P6007 Probes can
be ordered in 6, 9, or 12-foot lengths at no additional
cost. Longer lengths increase input capacitance an
d risefime.
ttPoOlO and P601 1 Probes car
be ordered in 6-foot length at no additional cost. Longer length increases input capacitance and risetim
PLUG-IN EXTENSIONS
12" Rigid Extension (Part Number 013-0077-00) $20.00
30" Flexible Extension (Part Number 012-0080-00) 24.00
REAR-PANEL CONNECTOR
10-Pin Connector for remote single sweep reset and external
use of power supply voltages (Part Number 131-0300-00) $13.00
BNC TO BSM ADAPTER
Converts front-panel outputs on the Type 11B2 to accept BNC
cables (Part Number 103-0036-00) $5.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
192
SAMPLING OSCILLOSCOPE Type
• 2 mV/em TO 200 mV/cm CALIBRATED DEFLEC-
TION FACTOR
MONITORABLE DC OFFSET
• lOps/cm TO 100/xs/em CALIBRATED SWEEP
TIME /em
• XI TO XI 00 TIME EXPANDER (CONSTANT DOTS/
cm)
• REPETITIVE, SINGLE, OR TIMED DISPLAYS
• DELAY THROUGH FULL TIME BASE DURATION
The above feafures of Type 661 are capabilities with
Type 5T1A or 5T3 Timing Units and Type 4S1, 4S2A, or
4 S3 Dual-Trace Sampling Units.
This compact and complete sampling system consists of
either a Type 5T1A or Type 5T3 Timing Plug-In Unit and
any of three Vertical Plug-In Units used with the Type 661
Oscilloscope.
The 2 mV/cm deflection factor of the vertical units in
conjunction with their DC offset capability, allows 1000-
to-1 vertical resolution. XI 00 time expansion and wide-
range time position allows 1000-to-l time resolution. To
help make these features applicable to your problem, Tek-
tronix offers a wide variety of probes, test fixtures, and
accessories.
Some Of The Things Possible
With The Type 661,
Type 4S1, And Type 5T3
Combination
7 . Trigger internally — observe fast leading edges of both
A and B traces. Matched internal delay lines in both
vertical channels assure accurate time comparisons.
2. Measure pulse risetime wth 0.35-nanosecond response
in both channels.
3. Display repetitive signals on 22 calibrated equivalent-
time sampling sweep ranges from 10 ps/cm to 100 jj.sl
cm, accurate within 3 % .
4. Display either repetitive or non-repetitive signals on 14
calibrated real-time sampling sweep ranges from 0.2
ms/cm to 5 s/cm.
5. Magnify any portion of the display up to 100 times on
sweep ranges from 1 ns/cm to 100 /is/ cm. Magnifica-
tion occurs about a fixed time-reference point while
maintaining a constant number of samples/cm.
6. Position the magnified equivalent-time display any-
where on the unmagnified time-base duration. Time
position range is at least 20 ns or 7 screen diameter,
whichever is greater, and is indicated directly at the
time I cm control.
7 . Change signal source impedance without affecting dot
transient response or ground reference.
8. Reduce random system time jitter and amplitude noise
by means of a smoothing control.
9. Measure millivolt signals in the presence of a substantial
DC component by means of o DC-offset voltage moni-
torable at the front panel.
10. Calibrate voltage and time scales with signals avail-
able from the front panel.
1 1 . Show lissajous patterns in addition to single and dual-
trace displays and signals added algebraically.
12. Drive X-Y plotters or similar readout accessories, man-
ually or automatically. Slow speed scan nominally set at
7.5 s/cm.
13. Drive external equipment, with fast-rise delayed pulse
output.
-
193
661
PLUG-IN UNIT COMPARTMENTS
VERTICAL SYSTEM accepts any 4-series plug-in unit.
HORIZONTAL SYSTEM accepts any 5-series plug-in unit.
HORIZONTAL DISPLAY CONTROLS
HORIZONTAL POSITION controls provide either coarse
or fine adjustment-shift of display over 10 centimeters unmag-
nified or 1000 centimeters fully magnified.
FAST or SLOW MANUAL SCAN permits detailed analysis
of any portion of the display. This mode of operation facilitates
driving external recorders.
SWEEP MAGNIFICATION of XI, X2, X5, XI 0, X20, X50, or
XI 00, symmetrical about the screen center, reduces the number
of dots/cm and keeps time/dot uniform.
EXTERNAL HORIZONTAL INPUT permits externally scan-
ning the sampled display. 50 mV/cm to 5V/cm deflection
factor (into 25-kQ impedance) is in 7 steps, I -2-5 sequence,
either AC or DC-coupled. Equivalent time per centimeter
remains calibrated.
AMPLITUDE/TIME CALIBRATOR
CALIBRATED AMPLITUDES range from l mV to lOOOmV in
4 decade steps. Accuracy with 50-ohm load is within 2% at
lOOOmV.
CALIBRATED TIMES range from 0.01 ^.s/cycle to 10/xs/
cycle in 4 decade steps. Accuracy with 50-ohm load is within
0.2%, except within 2% at 0.01 ^.s/cycle.
DELAYED-PULSE AND SIGNAL OUTPUTS
DELAYED PULSE 50-ohm output permits the Type 661 (with
4Sl or 4S2A and 5T1A or 5T3 Units) to serve as a rate gen-
erator to trigger external circuitry. Pulses occur nominally
50 ns after the equivalent sweep start with a Type 4Sl Unit,
or 10 ns after sweep start with a Type 4S2A Unit. Amplitude
is at least — 350 m V and risetime is less than I50ps.
SIGNAL OUTPUTS include those for Vertical A, Vertical
B, and Horizontal Outputs through an impedance of 10 kilohms,
at an amplitude of 200 mV/cm referred to the CRT display.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE DISPLAY
TEKTRONIX CRT is a flat-faced, 5" tube with an 8-cm by
10-cm viewing area and £;3 kV accelerating potential. A P2
phosphor will be supplied with the instrument unless another
phosphor is specified.
BEAM-POSITION INDICATORS show the direction of the
CRT beam when it is deflected away from the center-screen
area.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE with variable edge lighting is
accurately ruled in centimeter squares. Viewing area is 8 by
10 cm. Vertical and horizontal centerlines are further marked
in 2-mm divisions for convenience in making time and amplitude
measurements.
ELECTRONICALLY-REGULATED POWER SUPPLIES
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED AND REFERENCE ISO-
LATED SUPPLIES provide adequate power for stable opera-
tion of the oscilloscope with plug-in units. Line voltage changes
within the operating range cause imperceptible changes in the
display. Thermal cutout interrupts the power if chassis tempera-
ture becomes excessive.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 V, to 1 25 V or 21 V to 250 V,
50 to 60 Hz, typically 450 watts.
MECHANICAL FEATURES f\
Dimensions are 16 7 / 8 " high by 13'/ e " wide by 23 3 //' deep. ^
Net weight is 49'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is ~ 67 pounds.
TYPE 661 OSCILLOSCOPE, without plug-in units . . $1150
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3- to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1
3-conductor power cord |1 61 -0010-00]; 1— Smoke gray filter (378-
0567-00]; 2— Instruction Manual (070-0324-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
TIME JITTER
A 250 mV, 1.0 ns-wide pulse internally triggering the 4SI /
573 system. Vertical deflection factor is 50 mV/cm; sweep
range is 0.2 ns/cm. Note very small amount of jitter.
TYPICAL APPLICATION
2 gigahertz sine-wave driving inputs to 4S2A for X-Y opera-
tion. Diagonal line shows in-phase characteristics. Ellipse is
caused by insertion of 8 millimeters of air-line to one input,
resulting in approximately 20 degrees of phase shift. Resolution
below one degree is possible.
194
DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT
T yp e B*
0.35 ns RISET1ME
INTERNAL DELAY LINES
2 mV/cm TO 200 mV/em
CALIBRATED DEFLECTION f ACTOR
±2 VOtT DYNAMIC RANGE
±1 VOLT DC Off SET
LESS THAN 1 mV RANDOM NOISE
(UNSMOOTHED, y 2 mV SMOOTHED)
The Type 4S1 Dual-Trace Sampling Unit is a general-
purpose sampling plug-in unit for the Type 661 Sampling
Oscilloscope. Separate internal trigger takeoffs, delay lines,
and terminations are provided, which permit triggering on
either A or B input signals.
DISPLAY MODES include ±A only, ±B only, Dual-Trace,
Algebraic Addition, and an X-Y display of A— vertically and
B — horizontally (for observation of hysteresis loops, phase shift,
similar displays). Independent controls for each channel permit
positioning and inverting input signals as desired.
RISETIME is 0.35 ns or less, measured from 10% to 90%
amplitude points on an input step.
BANDWIDTH is equivalent to DC-to-1 000 MHz.
DEFLECTION FACTOR is in 7 calibrated steps from 2 mV/
cm to 200mV/cm, 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%. A
variable control permits continuous adjustment uncalibrated
from 200 mV/cm to 0.67 mV/cm.
TANGENTIAL NOISE
A 0.8-millivolt 2.5 ns pulse with Type 5T3 externally triggered. Vertical
deflection factor is 2 mV/cm. This displays a typical tangential noise
of the Type 4S1 (specification: 1 millivolt). A tangential noise measure-
ment is more useful than an RMS noise measurement, when taking a visual
reading, as the eye easily interprets a quasi peak to peak noise value.
A peak to peak value of 3 times the RMS value contains approximately
90% of the trace dots. Most observers agree that the tangential noise
displayed is 0.8 millivolt (4 mm quasi peak to peak); thus the RMS noise
is approximately 270 microvolts (unsmoothed). Random noise decreases
2X with smoothing.
SMOOTHING CONTROL reduces system time jitter and
amplitude noises, if needed, when there is sufficient dot density.
RANDOM NOISE LEVEL is equivalent to an input signal of
1 mV or less (quasi peak to peak) unsmoothed, or 0.5 mV
smoothed. Only approximately 10% of the random noise dots
are outside this level.
DC OFFSET through ±1 volt, for signal levels exceeding
"on screen" sensitivity settings, allows utilization of full sensi-
tivity to display and accurately measure small signals.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±2V. Full sensitivity can be used
with signals up to ±2 volts in amplitude. Safe overload
is ±10 volts DC (higher with reduced duty factor).
TRIGGERING can be either internal or external. Separate in-
ternal delay lines and trigger takeoffs permit triggering on either
A or B input signals. The trigger takeoffs deliver to the timing
unit approximately Y 8 the input signal amplitude. Risetime of
the trigger amplifier system is nominally 0.6 ns (600 MHz band-
width).
INPUT IMPEDANCE is 50 ohms. Input connectors are GR
874. Tektronix 45-ns delay lines terminate in 2 pF and 50-ohm
1 % resistor.
PROBE POWER is available at the front panel for cathode-
follower probes, Type 281 TDR Pulser and Type 282 Adapter
for high-impedance probes. See Accessory pages.
WEIGHT: Net— 15V 4 pounds. Shipping — 21 pounds, approx.
TYPE 4S1 DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT $1430
Each instrument includes: 2— XI 50-12 attenuators (017-0078-00);
2— 5-ns 50-S2 cables (017-0502-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0329-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
195
Type
DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT
• 90 ps RISETIME
• 2 mV/em TO 200 mV/cm CALIBRATED DEFLEC-
TION FACTOR
• ±1 VOLT DYNAMIC RANGE
• ±1 VOLT DC OFFSET
• RANDOM NOISE LESS THAN 4 mV (UNSMOOTHED,
<2 mV SMOOTHED)
• VSWR < ? .5 THROUGH S GHz
The Type 4S2A Dual-Trace Sampling Unit is a special-
purpose sampling plug-in unit which makes possible a new
degree of time resolution. This vertical plug-in unit retains
most features of the general-purpose Type 4S7 when used
in a Type 661 Sampling Oscilloscope, except for delay
lines and internal triggering.
661/5T3/4S2A CAPABILITIES
DISPLAY 0.1 % system discontinuities as reflectometer with
centimeter separation capability (limited by external pulse
generators, delay lines, attenuators).
DISPLAY millivolts of information on top of signals hundreds
of millivolts in amplitude (not limited by the usual amplifier
overload problem).
DISPLAY fastest present switching transistor risetimes, includ-
ing commercially available avalanche types (usually limited
by the transistor or the transistor case).
DISPLAY most tunnel diode switching times. (Only diodes
with better than 3 mA/pF are faster).
DISPLAY stored charge in switching diodes to the 0.01 pico-
coulomb/milliampere region (generally limited by diode ca-
pacity and turn-on capability).
DISPLAY fractions of a degree of relative phase shift to
over 3 gigahertz frequency with lissajous-mode operation
(usually limited by harmonic content or residual reflections
to a few degrees absolute).
DISPLAY MODES include ±A only, ±B only, Dual-Trace,
Algebraic Addition, and an X-Y display of A — vertically and
B — horizontally (for observation of hysteresis loops, phase shift,
similar displays). Independent controls for each channel permit
positioning and inverting input signals as desired.
RISETIME is 90 ps or less, measured from 10% to 90%
amplitude points on an input step. Overshoot, blowby, and
other transient aberrations are less than ±1%.
BANDWIDTH is equivalent to DC-to-3900 MHz.
DEFLECTION FACTOR is in 7 calibrated steps from 2 mV/
cm to 200mV/cm, 1-2-5 sequence, accuracy within 3%. A
variable control permits continuous adjustment uncalibrated
from 200 mV/cm to 0.67 mV/cm.
SMOOTHING CONTROL reduces system time jitter and
amplitude noises, if needed, when there is sufficient dot density.
RANDOM NOISE LEVEL is less than 4 mV (quasi peak to
peak) unsmoothed or 2 mV smoothed. Only 10% of the random
noise dots pre outside this level.
DC-OFFSET through zbl volt, for signal levels exceeding
"on screen" sensitivity settings, allows utilization of full sensitivity
to display and accurately measure small order signal discon-
tinuities.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±1 volt. Full sensitivity can be used
with overloads up to ±1 volt in amplitude. Safe overload is
±10 volts DC (higher with reduced duty factor).
INTERNAL TRIGGERING is available on Channel A only.
No internal delay line is provided with either channel.
INPUT IMPEDANCE is 50 ohms. Input connectors are GR
874. Termination is 50-ohm ±1% resistor and approximately
0.5 pF.
PROBE POWER is available at the front panel for cathode-
follower probes and Type 282 Adapter for high-impedance
probes. See accessory pages.
WEIGHT: Net — 9 pounds. Shipping — 15 pounds, approx.
TYPE 4S2A DUAL-TRACE SAMPLING UNIT $1450
Each instrument includes: 2 — X10 attenuator, 50-S2 (017-0078-00);
2— 5 ns cable, 50-12 (017-0502-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-
0356-00).
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
196
SAMPLING-PROBE DUAL-TRACE UNIT Type
• 0.35 ns RISETIME
• MINIATURE DIRECT SAMPLING PROBES
• 100 kCl, 2 pF INPUT RC
• 2 mV/cm TO 200 mV/cm CALIBRATED DEFLEC-
TION FACTOR
• LESS THAN 300 V RANDOM NOISE (SMOOTHED)
• ±2 VOLT DYNAMIC RANGE
• ± I VOLT DC OFFSET
The Type 4S3 Sampling Probe Unit, for the Type 661
Sampling Oscilloscope is a special - purpose dual - trace
unit incorporating extremely small direct sampling probes.
Since sampling actually takes place in the probe head,
signals with high source impedances can be measured
at a very low noise level. The Type 4S3 Unit retains many
of the features of its companion instruments, the Type 4S1
and 4S2A, such as 2 mV/cm deflection factor, monitor-
able DC offset, signal inversion, and 5 display modes.
Smoothing controls, in combination with risetimelnoise
selection, permit correct adjustment of dot transient response
for either LOW-NOISE or FAST RISETIME operation.
DISPLAY MODES include ±A only, ±B only, Dual-Trace,
Algebraic Addition, and an X-Y display of A — vertically and
B — horizontally (for observation of hysteresis loops, phase shift,
similar displays). Independent controls for each channel per-
mit positioning and inverting input signals as desired. Time
coincidence between channels is within 60 picoseconds.
DEFLECTION FACTOR from 2 mV/cm to 200 mV/cm is in 7
calibrated steps with 1-2-5 sequence, and is accurate within
3%. A variable control permits continuous adjustment uncal-
ibrated from 200 mV/cm to approximately 0.67 mV/cm.
BANDWIDTH is equivalent to DC-to-1 000 MHz.
RISETIME AND SMOOTHING controls, while maintaining
correct dot transient response, adjust the instrument for: least
noise or best risetime, or a compromise of the two, with signal
sources from below 25 ohms to beyond 300 ohms. A Fast-
Risetime/Low-Noise switch in conjunction with the smoothing
control allows the operator to select optimum risetime at a
sacrifice in noise level. Or, he may select for a low noise level
at some sacrifice in risetime.
RISETIME is 0.35 ns or less (FAST RISETIME) and approx-
imately 0.5 ns (LOW NOISE) with a 50-Q source.
RANDOM NOISE is less than 0.5 mV unsmoothed (LOW
NOISE), 1 mV (FAST RISETIME), or approximately 300 /xV
smoothed, when using a 50-ohm source.
DC OFFSET through ±1 V for signal levels exceeding "on
'screen" deflection factor settings allows utilization of full
sensitivity to display and accurately measure small discon-
tinuities.
DYNAMIC RANGE is ±2 V. Full sensitivity can be used
with signals up to ±2V in amplitude. Safe overload is zfclOV.
TRIGGERING is external (required approximately 50 ns prior
to signal). Please refer to Timing Unit specifications.
SAMPLING PROBES included with the Type 4S3 are ex-
tremely compact. The sampling bridge is contained in the
probe head to obtain optimum results with the input RC of
100 kQ paralleled by 2 pF. Low-frequency response is approxi-
mately 3-dB down at 1.5 kHz with the blocking capacitor;
approximately 3-dB down at 150 Hz with the blocking capac-
itor and 10X attenuator. Probes can be changed from channel
to channel with only minor readjustment.
RECOMMENDED OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES include probe-
to-GR adapter, probe-to-BNC adapter, and 50-ohm voltage
pickoff. See catalog page 198 for additional information.
WEIGHT: Net — 13 pounds. Shipping — 16 pounds, approx.
TYPE 4S3/P6038 SAMPLING PROBE DUAL-TRACE UNIT
$1450
Each instrument includes: 2— P6038 probe package (010-0156-00);
2— Instruction Manual (070-0397-00).
P6038 DIRECT SAMPLING PROBE (010-0156-00) . $225
Each Probe Package includes: 1— P6038 probe (010-0157-00); 1 —
Response normalizer (011-0070-01); 1 — X10 attenuator (011-0071-00);
2 — Test point jack (131-0258-00); 1 — Coupling capacitor (011-0072-00);
1— Hook-tip assembly (206-0114-00); 1— Ground clip (175-0249-00);
1 — Probe holder (352-0068-00); 1 — Bayonet ground assembly (013-
0085-00); 1— Carrying case (202-0123-00); 1— Minigator clip (344-
0046-00); 1— Instruction Manual (070-0400-00).
U. S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
197
II
I
m
DIRECT SAMPLING PROBE
Specifically designed for use with the Type 3S3 and 4S3
Sampling Plug-Ins, the P6038 Probe features wide-band perform-
ance in the DC-to-1000 MHz range.
Very small in size for ease of handling, the P6038 Probe
contains sampling circuitry in the probe head, permitting low-
noise, full-sensitivity measurements even when used with source
impedances above 50 ohms.
Standard accessories supplied with the P6038 Probe include a
10X Attenuator, a Coupling Capacitor for blocking the DC
component of the signal, and a non-attenuating Response Norm-
alizer to assure the probe input is insensitive to source imped-
ance variations.
PROBE ALONE:
ATTENUATION is IX.
INPUT RESISTANCE is lOOkO. ±1%.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is 2 pF ±10%.
TYPICAL RISETIME with Type 3S3 or 4S3 Plug-In Unit and
a 50-ohm source is 0.35 ns or less.
CABLE is approximately 4.5' with special 4-pin connector.
P6038 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0156-00) $225
Includes:
1— P6038 probe, 010-0157-00
1 — coupling capacitor, 011-0072-00
1—1 OX attenuator, 011-0071-00
1 — response nomalizer, 011-0070-00
2— test-point jacks, 131-0258-00
1 — bayonet ground assembly,
013-0085-00
—hook tip, 206-0114-00
—2 1 /." ground lead, 175-0249-00
—probe holder, 352-0068-00
—carrying case, 202-0123-00
— minigator clip, 344-0046-00
—instruction manual, 070-0400-00
PROBE/ADAPTER CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT R INPUT C
PROBE AND COUPLING
CAPACITOR
PROBE AND 10X
ATTENUATOR
PROBE AND RESPONSE
NORMALIZER
3.5 pF ± 10%
1 MO ± 1% 1.8 pF ± 10%
1% 3.5 pF ± 10%
100.3 kn
J
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
PROBE TIP-TO-BNC ADAPTER (013-0084-00) 4.50
PROBE TIP-TO-GR ADAPTER (017-0076-00) $ 4.50 \
VP-2 VOLTAGE PICKOFF "T" (017-0077-00) 30.00
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
198
TIMING UNIT Type
• 10 ps/em to 5 si cm CALIBRATED SWEEP TIME/CM
• DC to 500-MHz TRIGGERING, 500-MHz to 5 GHz
SYNCHRONIZATION — AT LEVELS OF A FEW MILLI-
VOLTS
• MAGNIFICATION AND TIME POSITIONING OF
EQUIVALENT -TIME DISPLAYS
• THREE TRIGGER MODES, FOUR TRIGGER SOURCES
REPETITIVE OR SINGLE DISPLAYS
The Type 5T3 Timing Unit for Type 661 Oscilloscopes in-
corporates both EQUIVALENT-TIME and REAL-TIME SAMPLING,
to provide an extremely wide range of sweep times. THREE
TRIGGER MODES together with FOUR TRIGGER SOURCES in-
cluding 50-ohm and 1 -megohm external trigger inputs offer
convenient and flexible wide-range triggering. Trigger kick-
out using external modes is reduced to less than lOmV by
isolation amplifiers.
TIMING SECTION
REAL-TIME SAMPLING
0.2 ms/cm to 5s/cm, 14 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accuracy within 3%. Uncalibrated continuous variation be-
tween steps and to ~ 80 ,us/cm. The Sweep Magnifier in
the Type 661 Oscilloscope allows up to XI 00 magnification
of the CRT display. The 100-kHz sampling rate can be fre-
quency modulated to easily detect and correct false displays.
EQUIVALENT-TIME SAMPLING
lOps/cm to 100/is/cm, 22 calibrated steps (1-2-5 sequence),
accuracy within 3%. Uncalibrated continuous variation be-
tween steps and to ~ 4 ps/cm. Sweep steps from 1 ns/cm
to lOO^is/cm can be magnified up to XI 00 while maintain-
ing a constant number of samples/cm. Magnification occurs
from a fixed time-reference point at the left edge of the
screen. Equivalent-time sweep ranges, whether magnified
or not, are read out directly. Coarse and fine control posi-
tion the displayed time "window" and set the time-reference
point for magnification.
SAMPLING DISPLAY
Real-time displays are in the form of dots; the number of
samples/cm depends on sweep time. Equivalent-time displays
can be viewed at 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, or 1000 samples/cm,
or a timed slow scan (:=2 0.5s/cm to S 5s/cm) for chart
recorder use.
SWEEP MODES
Normal (repetitive) and Single Display.
TRIGGER SECTION
NORMAL MODE
Triggering from DC to several hundred megahertz at 5-mV
sensitivity. Schmitt-type tunnel-diode logic, operation similar
to conventional real-time oscilloscope. Stability and level
controls; free-running displays possible.
AUTOMATIC RECOVERY MODE
Easy triggering on fast, short pulses or synchronizing on high-
frequency signals up to 500-MHz repetition rate — at 5-mV
sensitivity. One-knob adjustment for a wide variety of trig-
ger signals.
UHF SYNC MODE
Stable synchronization on low-amplitude signals from 500
MHz to 5 GHz. 50-ohm input connected directly (by-passing
transistor amplifiers) through high-pass filter to very fast
tunnel-diode multivibrator.
199
5T3
VIEWS THESE 2 SIGNALS WITH THE TYPE 661/5T3/4S2A
V f
50-Hz REAL-TIME DISPLAY
Horiz: 20ms/cm ; Vert: lOOmV/cm
External trigger, I -megohm input
g
5-GHz EQUIVALENT-TIME DISPLAY
Horiz: 0.2 ns/cm; Vert: lOOmV/cm
External trigger, UHF Sync Mode
TRIGGER CAPABILITIES
TRIGGER SOURCE
FREQUENCY
COVERAGEt COUPLING
DYNAMIC MAXIMUM
RANGE OVERLOAD
External 1 -megohm input
DC to 20 MHz DC
160 Hz to 20 MHz AC
±50 mV to 1.5 V ±100 V
External 50-ohm input
DC to 500 MHz
500 kHz to 500 MHz
500 MHz to 5 GHz
DC
AC
UHF Sync
±5mV to 150mV
±5V
Internal from Sampling
Plug-In Unit
DC to SS 1 GHz
DC coupled
in Type 5T3
Trigger takeoffs in the Type 4S1
Sampling Unit deliver SS % of
input signal amplitude
Internal from
Oscilloscope Calibrator
AC
100-mV signal from Amplitude/
Time Calibrator
t AC lower-frequency limits refer to sinewaves only.
TRIGGER JITTER
PEAK TO PEAK
MODE JITTER FREQUENCY VOLTAGE
NORMAL
< 30 ps
2-ns pulse
width (50% points)
50 mV at 50-fi input
or 400 mV internal
AUTO
< 70 ps
500 MHz
50 mV at 50-n input
RECOVERY
< 30 ps
2-ns pulse
width (50% points)
or 400 mV internal
UHF SYNC < 30 ns
2 GHz
lOmV at 50-Q
input
5 GHz
50 mV at 50-Q
input
WEIGHT
Net — 6 3 / 4 pounds, shipping — 13 pounds approx.
TYPE 5T3 TIMING UNIT $800
Each instrument includes: 2—1 OX 50 12 attenuators (017-0078-00),
1— 10-ns 50-12 cable (017-0501-00), 1— BNC-to-banana plug patch
cord (012-0090-00), 2— instruction manuals (070-0470-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
200
TRIGGER COUNTDOWN UNIT Type
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCIES — 30 megahertz to 5
gigahertz.
OUTPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCIES Continuously vari-
able from 15 to 45 megahertz.
The Tektronix Type 280 Trigger Countdown Unit allows
timing systems to be synchronized on frequencies up to
5 gigahertz. It can be used to lower the frequency of
the triggering signals to within a range of 15 to 45 mega-
hertz. This permits triggering circuits of timing systems to
lock in solidly with high-frequency signals.
By using the Type 280 with a Tektronix sampling oscillo-
scope, microwave engineers can observe RF signals in the
gigahertz range.
CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT FREQUENCY is from 30 megahertz to 5 gigahertz.
INPUT SIGNAL VOLTAGE is 50 millivolts to 4 volts peak
to peak.
INPUT IMPEDANCE is nominally 50 ohms.
OUTPUT REPETITION is continuously variable from 15 to
45 megahertz.
JITTER is 10 ps, or less than 1% of input signal period,
whichever is larger.
Timing Unit
Dual-Trace Sampling
Plug-In Unit
O O O O
O O O <■
Signal Source
(50 n Output Zj
FAST RISE
TRIGGER
OUTPUT
Connector
Sync Output of Signal Source
Type 280 connected for use with Type 661 Oscilloscope.
TWO OUTPUTS-
LARGE AMPLITUDE TRIGGER OUTPUT is 1.5 volts, nominal-
ly 8-ns long, with less than 4-ns risetime, (for use with high-
speed conventional oscilloscopes).
FAST-RISE TRIGGER OUTPUT (terminated in 50 ohms) is
150 millivolts, with less than 0.4-ns risetime, decaying with
2-ns time constant, (for use with Type 1S1, 5T1, 5T1A, 3T4,
3T77, or 3T77A and other high-speed sampling oscilloscopes).
AMPLITUDE OF TRIGGER OUTPUT as seen at input con-
nector is <125mV peak to peak.
SHIELDING of the Type 280 is adequate to permit opera-
tion in areas that have significant RF radiation levels.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V,
50 to 800 Hz 10W. Transformer taps allow operation on either
range. Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL FEATURES include an aluminum-alloy chassis,
die-cast aluminum-alloy top and bottom covers, and steel wrap-
around housing. Overall dimensions are 7 3 / 8 " high by 7 5 / 8 "
wide by 4 5 / 8 " deep. Net weight is 4V 2 pounds. Shipping
weight is 9 pounds, approx.
TYPE 280 TRIGGER COUNTDOWN UNIT $265
Each instrument includes: 1— 5-ns cable (017-0512-00); 1—3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord, AC (161-
0015-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0350-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
201
T SEMICONDUCTOR TESTER
T+iFA POWER SUPPLY
Type 292, with a test fixture, furnishes DC power and
provides sub-nanosecond environment for reading out time
and charge information about fast semiconductor diodes
and transistors. A Type 292 is used between a sub-
nanosecond pulse generator and the 50-Q input of a
sampling oscilloscope. Two variable electronically-regulated
power supplies, TEST VOLTS and BIAS CURRENT, are elec-
trically connected through a supporting platform to the test
fixture in use. Polarity of either power supply can be in-
verted from the front panel; both supplies are short-circuit
and open-circuit protected.
A general-purpose unwired plug-in transistor test fix-
ture is shipped with each Type 292. The fixture consists
of an etched -circuit board with a transistor socket mounted
in the center. Signal connections to the fixture are made
through coaxial connectors mounted on the circuit board.
A number of isolated tie points are provided on the test
fixture board to facilitate wiring of experimental circuits.
Banana-pin jacks at the rear of the Type 292 can be
used for two purposes-.
1. Monitoring either the internal TEST VOLTS or BIAS
CURRENT supply, or
2. Connecting external sources of current and voltage
to the test fixture in use.
Leads from the banana-pin jacks to the test fixture limit
externally-supplied currents to 7 ampere or less.
TEST VOLTS POWER SUPPLY supplies fixed DC voltages
of 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20 volts, accuracy within ±3% when the
variable control is fully clockwise. An uncalibrated variable
control allows the voltage of a fixed step to be divided
by any factor between 1 and at least 10. Ripple voltage
(either polarity) is equal to, or less than, 4 mV peak to peak at
any voltage, over a current range of 0-200 mA, for line volt-
ages from 105 to 125 V AC, or 230 to 250 V AC. Maximum
short-circuit current is about 400 mA on all ranges.
BIAS CURRENT POWER SUPPLY supplies fixed DC currents
in 11 calibrated steps from 0.1 mA to 200 mA, 1-2-5 sequence,
accuracy within ±3% when the variable control is fully
clockwise. An uncalibrated variable control allows the current
of a fixed step to be divided by any factor between 1 and
at least 10. Ripple current (either polarity), listed below, ap-
plies for any current from about 2 /xA to 200 mA, for line volt-
ages from 105 to 125 V AC or 230 to 250 V AC, providing the
load on the current supply limits the output voltages to less
than 20 volts.
RANGE
0.1 to 20 mA
50 mA
100 mA
200 mA
RIPPLE
less than 5 /jA
less than 10 ,uA
less than 20 /iA
less than 100^A
POWER REQUIREMENTS are from 105 V to 125 V or 210 V
to 250 V, 50 to 60 hertz, 30 W. Transformer taps allow opera-
tion on either range. Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS include dimensions of
4 5 / e " high by 8" wide by 10" deep. Net weight is 6'/ 4
pounds, approx. Shipping weight is 12 pounds, approx.
TYPE 292 SEMICONDUCTOR TESTER POWER SUPPLY $325
Each instrument includes: 1— Adapter, 3-wire (103-0013-00); 3— P6040
probe (010-0133-00]; 1— Transistor test fixture, unwired (016-0057-00);
1— Power cord (161-0015-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0410-00).
OPTIONAL TEST ACCESSORIES
TRANSISTOR TEST FIXTURE, UNWIRED, Part Number 016-
0057-00 $20
016-0059-00
A special jig is available for testing axial-lead diodes.
Contact-resistance problems are minimized by the use of V-
shaped jig contacts.
An adapter will be required to mechanically support and
electrically connect the diode test jig to the Type 292 plat-
form.
Careful design of the jig and adapter provides high-quality
50-ohm coaxial connections to the diode leads.
TEST JIG ADAPTER, Part Number 016-0059-00 $25
DIODE TEST JIG, Part Number 013-0080-00 $40
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
202
The usefulness of the Type 661 Oscilloscope is further
range of accessories and associat-
descriptions of some of these are
specifications, please refer to each
je listed in the index.
TYPE 281 TIME DOMAIN REFLECTOMETRY PULSER
Type 281 is a compact current source designed for use with
Type 3S76, 4S1, and 1S1 50-Q Sampling Units; power is
obtained from their probe power connectors.
PULSE AMPLITUDE is approx 18.5 mA; RISETIME <0.75ns
at leading negative transition; WIDTH >5^s from negative-
going edge to positive-going edge, at 50% amplitude points;
FLATNESS ±2% overshoot and ringing following negative-
going edge for first 10 ns, 0.5% thereafter; LOADING EFFECT
on 50-n SYSTEM <10% reflection (capacitive).
TYPE 281 TDR PULSER $95
TYPE 282 ADAPTER FOR HIGH-IMPEDANCE PROBES
This accessory permits the use of conventional high-imped-
ance probes with 50-fi sampling plug-ins units, such as Types
1S1, 4S1, 4S2A, and 3S76. Now, with a wide-range sampling
timing unit (Types 1S1 or 5T3), one oscilloscope can cover
nearly the entire range of signal measurement (from power-
supply ripple to sub-nanosecond events).
Other advantages include: voltage offset, smoothing, and
overload-recovery features of sampling not normally available
with a conventional oscilloscope; no loss of DC stability with
sampling units; and excellent linearity over entire dynamic
' range.
The adapter is recommended for use with P6008 or P6009
Probes. It can also be used with P6010 or P6011.
TYPE 282 PROBE ADAPTER $95
SSORIE
TYPE 109 PULSE GENERATOR
Produces 0.25-ns risetime pulses of either equal or alternately
different time duration. Pulse width is 0.5 to 100 ns at full
repetition rate of 550 to 720 p/s; and to 300 ns at half repeti-
tion rate.
Pulse amplitude is variable from V through 50 V, accuracy
within 3%. Polarity can be either positive or negative.
External DC charge voltage inputs permit alternate pulses
of different amplitudes and/or polarity.
TYPE 109 PULSE GENERATOR $360
TYPE 111 PULSE GENERATOR
The Type 111 is a high-repetition rate, fast-rise pulse gen-
erator that provides two pulse outputs:
OUTPUT PULSE has a risetime < 0.5 ns for positive and
negative polarity. Repetition rate is variable from 10 p/s to
100 kHz. Pulse duration is 2 ns tol500ns with an external
charge line. Pulse amplitude is dzlOV.
PRETRIGGER PULSE amplitude is ^10 V, duration is 250 ns,
and half-amplitude risetime is 5 ns (approx).
Time delay between pretrigger and output pulse is variable
from 30 ns to 250 ns.
TYPE 111 PULSE GENERATOR $365
TYPE 113 DELAY CABLE
The Type 113 Delay Cable provides 60-ns delay so trigger
signals can arrive ahead of the vertical deflection signal.
The Type 113 has a to 50% risetime of about 0.0025 ns,
and 10 to 90% risetime of better than 0.1 ns. Impedance is
50 Q ±1%.
TYPE 113 DELAY CABLE $250
C3^
203
SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
TYPE CT-1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER
Type CT-1 provides a means for accurate measurement of
current flow in a circuit, while keeping loading effects to a
minimum. TYPE P6040 serves as an inter-connecting cable
between the CT-1 and an oscilloscope. SENSITIVITY is 5 mV/
mA into a 50-Q load. BANDWIDTH is 35 kHz to 1 GHz.
RISETIME for pulse response is less than 0.35 ns. DECAY TIME
CONSTANT is 5 fxs, approximated by 1 % per 50 ns ; limit,
1 [is. MAXIMUM VOLTAGE is 1000 V, DC. CURRENT RATINGS
are 500 mA maximum RMS, 100 A peak pulse.
CT-1 (ORDER PART NUMBER 015-0040-00) $17
P6040 PROBE (ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0133-00) $14
TYPE CT-1 AND P6040 (ORDER PART NUMBER 015-0041-00) $31
TYPE CT-2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER AND P6041 PROBE
Type CT-2 and probe are similar to CT-1 with probe, except
for lower bandwidth limits, higher RMS current rating, and
reduced sensitivity. SENSITIVITY is 1 mV/mA into a 50-fi
load. BANDWIDTH is 30% down at 1.2 kHz to 7% down at
200 MHz. RISETIME is approximately 0.5 ns. DECAY TIME
CONSTANT is 125 /is, approximated by 1% per 1.25 ,u,s;
limit, 25 p.s. CURRENT RATINGS are 2.5 A maximum RMS,
100 A peak pulse. Though designed primarily for conventional
oscilloscopes, the longer decay time constant and higher RMS
current rating make Type CT-2 useful for some sampling oscillo-
scope applications. (Requires BNC to GR adapter.)
CT-2 (ORDER PART NUMBER 015-0046-00) $17
P6041 PROBE (ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0164-00) $12
BNC to GR ADAPTER (Part Number 017-0063-00) .... $4.75
TYPE CT-3 50-OHM SIGNAL PICKOFF
The Type CT-3 provides a convenient means of picking off
a signal in a 50-Q system. Used with a Tektronix Sampling
Instrument, the CT-3 provides the link for uses as a trigger
source.
Sensitivity is 10% of the voltage under test, into a 50-Q
load. Risetime is less than 0.4 ns. Insertion impedance with
a 50-Q termination is 1 Q shunted by 4.5 fjH; or 2 O shunted
by 4.5 jaH without 50 Q termination. VSWR approx 1.2 at
1.5 GHz.
ORDER PART NUMBER 01 7-0061 -00 $30.00
TYPE P6032 CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE
Type P6032 with a bandwidth of greater than 800 MHz,
permits accurate measurements of high-speed repetitive pulses.
The DC-coupled probe uses 7 plug-in attenuator heads (10X
to 1000X). Risetime is typically 0.4 ns for probe and attenuator
head. Maximum output is ±150mV into a 50-H load. Signal
delay is approximately 10 ns.
ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0108-00 $220
204
SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
MINIATURE PASSIVE PROBES
Type P6034 permits accurate measurement of high-speed
pulses. Attenuation ratio is 10X. Input resistance is 500 Q at
DC and approximately 300 Q at 1.0 GHz with an input capaci-
tance of 0.7 pF ±0.1 pF at 1.0 MHz to 1.0 GHz. Risetime is
less than lOOps. Maximum DC input, DC-coupled, is 16 V
and, AC-coupled, is 500 V. Ringing and overshoot is <2%
on pulses from a 25 Q source.
ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0110-00 $35
Type P6035 is similar to P6034, except that attenuation is
100X. Input resistance is 5000 Q at DC and approximately
1500 at 1.0 GHz. Input capacitance is 0.6 pF ±0.1 pF at
1.0 MHz to 1.0 GHz. Risetime is less than 200 ps. Maximum
DC input, DC-coupled, is 50 V and, AC-coupled, is 500 V.
ORDER PART NUMBER 010-0111-00 $35
Various probe nose adapters are available to facilitate
connecting to BNC, GR, etc. (See Accessory Section for details.)
VOLTAGE PICKOFF
The VP-1 and VP-2 are 50 Q "T" type voltage pickoffs for
use with Tektronix probes while introducing minimum disturb-
ance of the equipment under test. VP-1 fits the P6034 and
P6035 probes, while VP-2 fits the P6038 probe.
VP-1— ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0073-00 $25
VP-2— ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0077-00 $30
MISCELLANEOUS SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
A variety of items are available to facilitate inter-connection
between sampling plug-in units and other related devices.
Examples are: GR, UHF, BNC, TYPE C and TYPE N adapters;
50-ohm connecting cables (GR-TYPE CONNECTORS) of various
lengths; and attenuators, terminations, 50-ohm T and L fittings,
etc. (See Accessory Section for descriptions.)
GENERAL RADIO 50-n POWER DIVIDER, TYPE 874-TPD
This divider is designed for use in broad-band 50-fi systems
where the mismatch introduced by ordinary "Tee" connectors is
undesirable. It is especially useful in a time-domain reflecto-
meter set-up where test line, pulser, and oscilloscope must be
coupled with a minimum of reflection-producing discontinuities.
ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0082-00 $70
MAINTENANCE AIDS
These items are offered for the convenience of companies
with in-plant instrument-maintenance facilities. If you intend
performing your own maintenance, please include 2 plug-in
extensions fone each for the dual-trace and timing units), I
circuit-board extension, and 2 coaxial trigger cables with your
initial instrument order. One set of 5 will usually be adequate
for maintenance of several instruments.
Plug-In Extension for Dual-Trace and Timing Units
Order Part Number 012-0064-00 (24-pin extension) ... $23.00
Circuit-Board Extension for Dual-Trace Unit
Order Part Number 012-0069-00 (22-pin extension) ... $25.00
Coaxial Cable for Coupling Trigger Signals
Order Part Number 012-0070-00 $10.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
205
Type SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR
• 10 Hz TO 1 MHz REPETITION RATE
• HI-AMPLITUDE OR FAST-RISE OUTPUTS
• SYNC INPUT, TRIGGER OUTPUT
• SIMULTANEOUS + & - FAST-RISE
OUTPUTS
This general-purpose generator provides simultaneous posi-
tive and negative-going outputs with <l-ns risetime into 50 Q,
and a positive-going hi-amplitude output with <12-ns risetime
into 50 n. A clean transition and flat top make the Type 106
ideal for checking oscilloscope transient response. In addition
to its use in the calibration or maintenance lab, it can be used
in such applications as diode recovery, core testing, digital
and analog design. Little bench space is required for this
compact instrument. It can be tilted for convenience, or stacked
atop other instruments.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
REPETITION RATE
10 Hz to 1 MHz in decade steps, accuracy within
indicated rate. Continuously variable between
calibrated.
SYMMETRY
Duty cycle variable between 45 and 55%.
FAST-RISE OUTPUTS
<l-ns risetime into 50 Q. Separate amplitude controls and
outputs for simultaneous positive and negative-going signals.
Amplitude continuously variable from 50 mV to 500 mV into
50 n. Aberrations <2% in first 5 ns, <0.5% after first 5 ns.
HI-AMPLITUDE OUTPUT
<12-ns risetime into 50 ft. Amplitude continuously variable
from <0.5V to 12 V with 50-Q load, <7V to >120V
unterminated. Output DC levels are from a negative poten-
tial to ground. Aberrations <2% in first 100 ns, <0.5%
peak to peak after first 100 ns.
±10% of
steps, un-
'■■ •>-:- • .
■
W.wM
,—
mwm
HI-AMPLITUDE OUTPUT
5 ns/cm, 100 mV/cm deflection factor, external 10X attenuator.
Waveform displayed on Type 547 Oscilloscope with Type 151 Sampling
Unit; photographed with C-12 Camera, projected graticule.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
SYNC INPUT
Accepts sinewaves, squarewaves, or pulses. Accepts 5 V to
100 V peak to peak sinewave, 2.5 V to 50 V pulse or square-
wave.
N EW
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Differentiated squarewave, -(-triggers coincide (within 50 ns)
with leading edge of all outputs. <50-ns risetime into 50 O,
>0.15V into 50 0, <300-ps time jitter.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
103.5 V to 126.5 V or 207 V to 253 V, 50 to 60 Hz. Low
or high range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 85
watts maximum power consumption at 115 VAC.
MECHANICAL
Foot permits tilting for convenient bench-top operation.
Handle hinges out for carrying. Net weight is 15 pounds.
Shipping weight is approx 21 pounds. Dimensions are 6"
high by 9" wide by 14 3 /," deep.
TYPE 106 SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR $590
Each instrument includes: 1 — 5-ns cable (017-0502-00]; 1 — 50-12 GR to
BNC in-line termination (017-0083-00); 1 — right-angle 3-conductor
power cord (161-0024-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2—
instruction manual (070-0523-00).
TYPE 106 SQUARE-WAVE GENERATOR MOD 146B . $565
As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in Rack Adapter.
RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 1 06, 1 1 4, 1 84 and 1 91
The Rack Adapter converts the latest series of Tektronix
Generators for rack mounting. Any combination of two instru-
ments can be mounted (less cabinets) side by side in a 19"
rack, in only 5 1 //' of panel height. The Rack Adapter pro-
vides forced air ventilation and shielding between compart-
ments. A blank panel is included to cover the unused open-
ing when only one Generator is installed.
RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-00) $1 25
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverfon, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
206
PULSE GENERATOR Type
0.25 NS RISETIME PULSES
ALTERNATE PULSES OF EQUAL OR DIFFERENT TIME DURATION
CALIBRATED VARIABLE AMPLITUDE PULSES
OF EITHER POSITIVE OR NEGATIVE POLARITY
PULSE DURATIONS TO 100 NS
The Type 109 is intended for use with fast-rise sampling
systems or conventional oscilloscopes that generate their own
internal sweep trigger. The Type 109 is transistorized and
requires no warmup time before operating.
CHARACTERISTICS
PULSE RISETIME
Less than 0.25 ns.
PULSE WIDTH
From approximately 0.5 ns to a maximum of 100 ns at full
repetition rate; 300 ns at half repetition rate. An external
charge network with a 10X attenuation provides long dura-
tion pulses. Amplitude decay is approx 10% in 300 ns.
REPETITION RATE
Preset between 550 pulses per second to 720 pulses per
second.
PULSE AMPLITUDE
Can be selected from three calibrated ranges extending
from zero through 55 volts, accuracy within 3%.
PULSE POLARITY
Can be either positive or negative.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
50 ohms.
CHARGE LINES
Either one or two charge lines can be used to provide alter-
nate equal or unequal pulses as desired. Equal charge lines
produce a repetition rate of 500 pulses per second to 720
pulses per second.
EXTERNAL DC CHARGE VOLTAGE INPUTS
Use of external charge voltages allows attenuated pulses
to be of different amplitude and polarity. Maximum external
charge voltage is 600 volts. With up to 100 volts input,
the output amplitude will be half the external input ampli-
tude. At voltage inputs over 100 volts, the output amplitude
will be less than half the input amplitude. At pulse outputs
over 50 volts, irregularities may occur.
DC POWER SUPPLY
Electronically regulated to compensate for varying load
conditions.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 800 Hz, 60 watts.
MECHANICAL
Aluminum-alloy chassis, anodized front-panel. Dimensions:
7 7 / 8 " high by 5" wide by 11%" deep. Net weight: 8'/ 2
pounds. Shipping weight: 18 pounds.
TYPE 109 PULSE GENERATOR $360
Each instrument includes: 1 — charge network (017-0067-00); 3 — 5 ns
cable (01 7-0502-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3
to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0299-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
Alternate pulses of different widths and amplitudes produced
by using 5-ns and 20-ns charge lines and external charge
voltages. Vertical deflection factor WV/cm, sweep speed
10 ns/cm.
207
Type
PULSE GENERATOR
The Type 111 is a high-repetition rate, fast-rise pulse gen-
erator. It is primarily intended for use with the Tektronix
Sampling Plug-In Units; however, its characteristics make it
ideally suited for use with conventional oscilloscopes and other
equipment as well. The unit provides two pulse outputs: the
fast-rising Output Pulses and the Pretrigger Pulses. The Pre-
trigger Pulses occur from 30 to 250 nanoseconds ahead of
each Output Pulse. These Pretrigger Pulses can be used as
a Regenerated Trigger Signal for the Sampling Systems with-
out internal delay lines or as a triggering signal for a con-
ventional oscilloscope. The amount of delay between the Pre-
trigger Pulse and the Output Pulse can be varied by means
of a front panel control. This eliminates the need for delay
cables.
OUTPUT PULSE RISETIME
< 0.5 ns for both (+) and (— ) polarity.
OUTPUT PULSE DURATION
Minimum is approx 2 ns with no external charge line. Max-
imum, 1500 ns at low rep rates decreasing to 30 ns at 100-
kHz rep rate. Maximums are obtained with an external
charge line.
OUTPUT PULSE POLARITY
Either (+) or (— ) as selected by a front panel control.
OUTPUT PULSE REPETITION RATE
Four ranges: 10 Hz, 100 Hz, 1 kHz, 10 kHz. A vernier provides
continuous adjustment from 10 Hz to 100 kHz.
OUTPUT PULSE ABERRATIONS
Overshoot and other aberrations on the leading edge and
top of the output pulse are less than 5% peak to peak of
the pulse amplitude when output is properly terminated.
Aberrations following the pulse are less than 10% peak to
peak of the pulse amplitude. Pulse aberration figures are
taken as viewed on a Tektronix Type 4S3 or equivalent.
PULSE AMPLITUDE
More than 10 volts. The output voltage is fixed by the
particular avalanche transistor used. External attenuators
are necessary to vary the output amplitude. Refer to Acces-
sories Section for available 50-Q attenuators.
PRETRIGGER PULSE CHARACTERISTICS
Amplitude: ~ 10 V, duration: ~ 300 ns, risetime: ~ 5 ns.
PULSE DELAY
30 to 250 ns, continuously variable. Time jitter less than
lOOps.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
50 ohms.
EXTERNAL TRIGGER SIGNAL
+3 V or greater at a rate of rise of 3 V/^s or faster. As
long as rate of rise is maintained, repetition rates from
to 100 kHz can be used.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 800 Hz, approxi-
mately 35 watts at 117 V. Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are ll'/ 8 " high by 7" wide by liy 8 " deep.
Net weight is 8 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 16 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 1 1 1 GENERATOR $365
Each instrument includes: 1 — 5-ns 50-12 cable (017-0502-00); 1 — 9-ns
50-12 charge line (017-0506-00); 1 — 50-12 10X attenuator (017-0078-00);
1— 3-wire power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-
0013-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0252-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
208
TRANSMISSION LINES
Transmission lines used for nanosecond pulses are commonly
of the transverse electric and magnetic fields mode type. The
Type 113 uses this mode, because response is desired to zero
frequency with minimum dispersion. In the nanosecond region,
skin effect losses cause most of the pulse distortion in well-
constructed cables. This results in a nongaussian response.
Risetimes of cascaded cables do not follow the usual RMS
addition method of combining risetimes, as in gaussian ampli-
fiers.
Transmission line distortion of a step function shows up in a
distinctive way. After a small transition period, the output
rises fairly rapidly and then slows considerably, compared to
an RC charge. An RC step requires 2.2 time constants to change
from 10% to 90% of the input step. A transmission line requires
30 times the 0-to-50% risetime period to accomplish this (10%
to 90%) transition.
The graph illustrates time of rise from O-to-50%, (T a ) of the
input for various common coaxial cables. Note that the rise-
time deteriorates as the square of the length. Thus, it is very
•poriant to keep cable lengths (or delays) to a minimum.
e Type 113 uses about 50 feet of 7 /e" diameter cable, result-
ing in a O-to-50% risetime of about 0.0025 nanosecond, and
10% to 90% of better than 0.1 nanosecond.
10
4
tn
C
O
2
10-'
8
4
2
io- 2
8
4
2
/*y '
/ y *«
/ 4/
(offer F. Kirsten L.R.L.,.
Berkeley, Calif.)
DELAY CABLE Type
1
10 20 40 80 100
Cable Length in Feet
1000
the triggering of
required.
Rise-
The Tektronix Type 113 Delay Cable has a delay of 60 ns
and a characteristic impedance of 5011. In general it is used
in those sampling applications where the vertical amplifier
does not contain internal delay lines and
the sweep is external and signal delay is
CHARACTERISTIC IMPEDANCE
50 Q ±1%.
HIGH QUALITY CABLE
Approximately 1.5-dB loss per 100 feet at 1000 MHz.
time approximately 0.1 ns.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Three-piece cabinet houses the coaxial cable compactly
coiled between two GR connectors. Side panels and bottom
panel are easily removable. Rubber feet installed in one
side, the bottom, and the back facilitate use of the Tektronix
Type 113 Delay Cable in any of three positions.
Dimensions are 22%" high by 8 5 / 8 " wide by 217s" deep.
Net weight is 44 3 / 4 pounds. Snipping weight is 59 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 1 1 3 DELAY CABLE $250
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
209
Type
PULSE GENERATOR
LESS THAN 10-NANOSECOND RISE AND FALL
TIME
# VARIABLE PULSE PERIOD, WIDTH, AND AMPLI-
TUDE
£ INSTANT SQUARE-WAVE SELECTION
REGULATED POWER SUPPLY — STABLE, LOW-JIT-
TER OPERATION
ALL SOLID STATE — NO FAN
The new Type 114 is a general-purpose generator designed
for laboratory and production test facilities. The versatility
of the Type 114 makes it well suited for numerous applications,
such as medical stimulation, studying network response to
changes in period and/or width, or determining the step re-
sponse of systems. It can also serve as a repetition-rate gen-
erator or as a delay generator.
Compact in size, the Type 114 utilizes solid-state circuitry
throughout, insuring trouble-free operation and long component
life. Functional front-panel layout makes the instrument easy
to operate. Three switches are used for selecting pulse period,
width, and amplitude. Each switch has a variable control for
use over the selected range. A front-panel lamp indicates when
the pulse width exceeds the maximum allowed by the period.
The width selector switch features a square-wave position pro-
viding symmetrical square-wave output at all pulse periods.
Front-panel connectors are provided for pulse output, trigger
output, and external trigger input. Two Type 114's can be con-
nected together so that the output pulse of the second unit is
delayed by the pulse width of the first unit.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
RISE AND FALL TIME
10 ns or less.
PULSE ABERRATIONS
5% or less (at maximum amplitude).
POLARITY
Positive or negative.
PULSE PERIOD
5 switched positions from 1 /is to 10 ms, plus external trigger
position; continuously variable from 1 /.is to 100 ms. ACCU-
RACY: ±3% with variable control in calibrated position;
square-wave mode ±5% from 100 ms to 10,us, ±10% at
1 /as. JITTER: <0.05%.
PULSE WIDTH
5 switched positions from 100 ns to 1 ms, (continuously vari-
able from 100 ns to 10 ms) plus square-wave mode. ACCU-
RACY: ±3% with variable control in calibrated position.
JITTER: <0.05% plus 2 ns. Front-panel lamp indicates when
pulse width exceeds pulse period. SQUARE-WAVE OUTPUT:
symmetrical square-wave output at all Pulse Period settings
PULSE AMPLITUDE
4 switched positions: —1 V to — 3 V, — 3 V to — 1 V; +1 V
to +3V, +3 V to +10V. Variable within each range.
Maximum output into a 50-Q load is 10 V; 16 V into 1000-Q
load. Maximum DC voltage fed back into Type 114 from
device under test should not exceed ±0.5 V.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
EXTERNAL TRIGGER INPUT REQUIREMENT
Trigger signals from +2 V to +20 V having a risetime of
1 /is or less. Signals up to 2 MHz may be used.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
>2V, open circuit; approx 0.5 V into 50-f2 load. Front-
panel switch sets trigger output pulse to occur at leading
or trailing edge of output pulse.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
94.5 V to 137.5 V or 189 V to 275 V, 50 to 400 Hz. Low or
high range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 15 watts
maximum power consumption.
MECHANICAL
Foot permits tilting for convenient bench-top operation.
Handle hinges out for carrying. Net weight is 10 pounds.
Shipping weight is approx 14 pounds. Dimensions are 6"
high by 9" wide by 12%* deep.
TYPE 114 PULSE GENERATOR $350
Each instrument includes: 1 — power cord (161-0024-00), 1 — 3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-001, 2— instruction manual (070-0465-00).
TYPE 114 PULSE GENERATOR MOD 146B $325
As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in Rack Adapter.
RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 1 06, 1 1 4, 1 84 and 1 91
The Rack Adapter converts the latest series of Tektronix
Generators for rack mounting. Any combination of two
instruments can be mounted (less cabinets) side by side in
a 19" rack, in only 5'/ 4 " of panel height. The Rack Adapter
provides forced air ventilation and shielding between com-
partments. A blank panel is included to cover the unused
opening, when only one Generator is installed.
RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-00) $125
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
210
PROGRAMMABLE PULSE GENERATOR Type
CALIBRATED & PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS
TRIGGER SOURCE
PERIOD
DELAY OR BURST TIME
MODE
DC OFFSET
RISETIME & FALLTIME
WIDTH
AMPLITUDE
POLARITY
The Type Rl 1 6 is a 10-MHz, 10-volt programmable pulse
generator with rise and fall time variable to 10 nanoseconds.
The unit is primarily intended for applications where various
combinations of pulse amplitude, polarity, shape, and other
parameters are required in rapid sequence. All functions are
programmable and, in addition, the Type Rl 1 6 can be operated
from calibrated front-panel controls for applications which do
not require external programming.
Programming is accomplished by a combination of digital
and analog methods. Switching functions such as trigger source
(internal or external), mode of operation, ranges, and polarity
require voltage-level logic inputs. A logical "1" is zero volts
(contact closure to ground) and a logical "0" is +12 volts
(or an open). Variable functions such as period, delay or burst
time, width, amplitude, risetime, falltime, and DC offset all are
linearly related to the value of analog resistances connected
by the programmer between appropriate program leads. Pro-
gramming inputs are via a microribbon connector at the rear
of the instrument.
Programmable parameters can be remotely controlled
(automatic sequence optional) with the Type 262 Program-
mer. The Type 567 Readout Oscilloscope and Type 6R1A
Digital Unit display the results of each measurement and
indicate whether these results are within, above, or below
predetermined limits.
PULSE CHARACTERISTICS
At 10 Volts Amplitude
RISETIME AND FALLTIME
10ns to 110 /as, continuously variable and calibrated in 4
ranges: 10 ns to 110 ns, 100 ns to 1.1 /as, 1 /as to 1 1 /as, 10 /as
to 110 /as. Risetime and falltime independently variable
within the same range. Accuracy within ±5% of dial read-
ing (except ±10% on fastest range). Complete program-
ming requires 1 resistor per program for risetime, 1 resistor
per program for falltime and 3 bits for range selection.
PERIOD
100 ns to 11 ms, continuously variable and calibrated in 5
ranges: 100 ns to 1.1 /as, 1 /as to 1 1 /as, 10 /as to 110 /as, 100/as
to 1.1 ms, 1 ms to 11 ms. Accuracy within ±3% of dial
reading (except ±5% on shortest period range). Complete
programming requires 1 resistor per program for multiplier
and 4 bits for range selection.
DELAY OR BURST TIME
50 ns to 550 /as, continuously variable and calibrated in 4
ranges: 50 ns to 550 ns, 500 ns to 5.5 /as, 5 /as to 55 /as, 50 /as
to 550 /as. Accuracy within ±3% of dial reading (±5% on
shortest delay range). Complete programming requires 1
resistor per program for multiplier and 3 bits for range
selection.
211
R116
WIDTH
50 ns to 550 /xs, continuously variable and calibrated in 4
ranges: 50 ns to 550 ns, 500 ns to 5.5 lis, 5 /ts to 55 lis, 50 /.is
to 550 /is. Accuracy within ±3% of dial reading (±5% on
shortest-width range). Complete programming requires l
resistor per program for multiplier and 3 bits for range
selection.
AMPLITUDE
0.4 V to 10V (into 50 fi), either polarity, continuously variable
and calibrated in 3 ranges: 0.4 V to 2 V, l V to 5 V, 2 V to
10V. Accuracy within ±3% of dial reading. Complete
programming requires I resistor per program for multiplier
and 2 bits for range selection.
POLARITY
Positive or negative. Programming requires l bit.
DC OFFSET
— 5 V to +5V into 50 fi, continuously variable and cali-
brated. Full DC offset in either direction and full pulse
amplitude of either polarity permitted simultaneously.
Accuracy within ±150 mV of dial reading, ±50 mV at
zero offset. DC offset range reduced by pulse attenuator,
both internal and external. Programming requires 1 resistor
per program.
ABERRATIONS
<3% peak overshoot, rounding, tilt or other aberration.
PROGRAM ACCURACY
Accuracy of the remote program when using recommended
program resistor values is the same as the corresponding
front-panel control plus 2%, plus any error in the value of
the program resistor. For example, the period which has a
basic accuracy of ±3% from the front panel would have a
maximum error of ±5%, plus the error in the programming
resistor when it is remotely programmed. Accuracy of remote
programming may be improved by calibrating the instrument
for remote programming rather than for front-panel operation.
OPERATING MODES
SINGLE
Undelayed pulses.
DELAYED SINGLE
Pulses occurring at the end of the delay time.
DOUBLE
Pairs of pulses: one occurring at the time of the normal
undelayed pulse, one occurring at the end of the delay time.
BURST
Output pulses obtained for the duration of Burst Time when
initiated by external triggering pulse. Pulses occur at
internal repetition rate.
GATED OUTPUT
Output pulses obtained for the duration of input gate. Pulses
are synchronous with input gate and occur at internal repeti-
tion rate.
REMOTE PROGRAM
Permits remote programming of the operating mode. Pro-
gramming requires 4 bits.
INPUTS
+ TRIGGER
Accepts trigger from +2 V to +20 V, for triggering signals
having at least 100 ns separation; +2 V to +4 V for signals
having at least 50 ns separation. DC-coupled input.
+ GATE
Accepts gate from +2V to +10 V. Output pulses start
approximately 100 ns after gate reaches +2-V level and
Multiple exposure showing timing relationships between Single,
Delayed Single, and Double operating modes. Oscilloscope
triggered from Type R1I6 Pretrigger. 50 /is/ cm sweep time,
5 V /cm deflection factor.
Multiple exposure showing burst capabilities of the Type R116.
Upper trace shows burst of 3 pulses. Center trace shows burst
of 9; lower trace shows bursts of 9 on a slower time scale.
5/is/cm sweep time on upper 2 traces; 20 /is /cm on lower trace M 1
5 V /cm deflection factor. ^-^
continue until gate drops below +2 V. Output pulses syn-
chronous with gate. DC-coupled input.
AUXILIARY OUTPUTS
+ PRETRIGGER
2 V minimum into 1 kfi, risetime less than 20 ns. Occurs
approx 30 ns prior to start of the undelayed output pulse.
+ DELAYED TRIGGER
2 V minimum into 1 kfi, risetime less than 20 ns. Occurs
approx 30 ns prior to the start of the delayed output pulse.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
94.5 to 137.5 or 189 to 275 volts, 50 to 60 Hz. Low or high
range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 100 watts
maximum power consumption.
MECHANICAL
Net weight is 25 '/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight is approx 65
pounds. Dimensions (including panel knobs, handles, and
connectors) are 5 1 /," high by 19" wide by 18%" deep.
COOLING
Filtered forced air.
TYPE Rl 16 PULSE GENERATOR $1550
Each instrument includes: 1-42" 50-S2 BNC cable (012-0057-00);
1— 50-fi BNC termination (011-0049-00]; 1—36 pin remote program
connector (131-0293-001; 1— set mounting tracks (351 -0084-00); 1— set
mounting hardware; cabinet feet kit (016-0052-00); 1 — 3-conductor
power cord (161-0024-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00);
2 — instruction manual (070-0498-00).
Circuit Card extension for servicing (012-0078-00) $20
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
212
"
LOW-LEVEL PREAMPLIFIER Type
H
VOLTAGE GAIN
High position — approximately 1000.
Low position — approximately 100.
BANDWIDTH 0.2 Hz to 40 kHz maximum.
INPUT SELECTION Single ended or differential
The Tektronix Type 122 Low-Level Preamplifier is a compact
3-stage amplifier extending the usefulness of the oscilloscope
into the microvolt region. The Type 122 is especially useful
in biological research and other applications that require the
amplification of microvolt signals.
The Type 122 can be used with any DC-coupled oscillo-
scope, increasing its sensitivity by a factor of either 1000 or
100. If the Type 122 is used with an AC-coupled oscilloscope,
the overall low-frequency response will be limited to that of
the oscilloscope.
Shock mounting, careful bypassing, and use of the Tektronix
Type 125 Power Supply or battery power reduce microphonics,
noise, and hum to a low level.
BANDWIDTH
0.2 Hz to 40 kHz. High and low-frequency —3 dB points can
be set by front panel switches.
VOLTAGE GAIN
100 or 1000, selected by a toggle switch.
COMMON-MODE REJECTION RATIO (CMRR)
100 dB between 5 Hz and 40 kHz. Maximum common-mode
input signal: 4 V.
SIGNAL OUTPUT
20 V (peak to peak) maximum in high gain position, 10 V
(peak to peak) maximum in low gain position; AC signals up
to 0.02 V (gain 1000) or 0.1 V (gain 100) and DC levels up
to ±0.1 V (either gain setting) can be applied before wave-
form distortion occurs. Output impedance is approximately
1000 ohms.
INPUT RC
10 megohms paralleled by approximately 50 pF.
NOISE LEVEL
1 to 5-/xV RMS referred to input with input grounded.
POWER REQUIREMENT
+ 1 35 V at 5 mA, —90 V at 4 mA, and 6.3 V at 0.9 A, applied
through a standard octal plug. The Type 122 can be pow-
ered by the Type 125 Power Supply or by batteries. The
battery cable furnished with the instrument is designed to be
used with five 45 V dry-cell batteries and one 6.3 V storage
battery. Batteries are not included with the Type 122.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 12V 4 " high by 4y 8 " wide by 7V 8 " deep.
Net weight is 4 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 9 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 1 22 PREAMPLIFIER $1 35
Each instrument includes: 1— battery cable (012-0009-001; 1— output
cable (012-0003-00); 1— input plug (131-0013-00); 2— instruction manual
(070-0246-00).
BATTERY CABLES
Extra long battery cables can be ordered to fit a particular
arrangement.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
213
Type FM^|22 FRAME MOUNT
The Type FM122 has a specially designed front panel and
cabinet for use where mounting in a vertical position is re-
quired. It can be mounted in an existing support or adapted
to mounting in a standard rack by a Tektronix Mounting
Frame.
Electrical characteristics of the Type FM122 are the same as
described for the Tektronix Type 122 Preamplifier.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 12 1 //' high by 4%" wide by 7" deep.
Net weight is 5'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 9 pounds,
approx.
TYPE FM122 (without Mounting Frame) $140
Each instrument includes: 1— battery cable (012-0009-00); 1— output
cable (012-0003-00); 1— input plug (131-0013-00); 1— set mounting
hardware; 2— instruction manual (070-0246-00).
MOUNTING FRAME
Fits any standard 19-inch rack and is fastened to the front
of the rack by four screws. Adapts Type FM122 Preamplifier
to rack mounting. Capacity is four of any combination of
Type FM122 Preamplifier, Type 360 Indicator, Type 160-Series
Units, and Type FM125 Power Supply. (Note: Because the
Type FM122 Preamplifier has high sensitivity, it is recommended
that it be mounted at least 4 inches to the left of the Type
FM125 Power Supply or other source of transformer hum field.)
Part Number 014-0002-00 $7
Type RM"(22 RACK MOUNT
The Type RM122 is a mechanically rearranged Type 122
Preamplifier for horizontal mounting in a standard 19-inch
rack. Th'e instrument is fastened to the front of the rack by
four screws. It requires only 5V 4 inches of rack height.
Electrical characteristics of the Type RM122 are the same as
described for the Tektronix Type 122 Preamplifier.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 5 1 /," high by 19" wide by 7" deep. Net
weight is 6 pounds. Shipping weight is 14 pounds, approx.
TYPE RM122 $140
Each instrument includes: 1 — battery cable (012-0009-00); 1 — output
cable (012-0003-00); 1— input plug (131-0013-00); 1— set mounting
hardware; 2 — instruction manual (070-0246-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
214
POWER SUPPLY Type
i125
m12
ELECTRONIC VOLTAGE REGULATION
OUTPUT VOLTAGES
+ 135V DC, to 20 mA.
— 90 V DC, to 20 mA.
— 6V DC, 0.7 to 4 A.
The Type 1 25 Power Supply provides power for one to four
Type 122 Amplifiers.
Peak to peak ripple voltages are: +135V supply, less than
3 mV; —90 V supply, less than 2 mV; — 6 V supply, less than
5 mV. Voltage stability of the Type 125 is assured by use of
regulated voltages applied to the tube heaters.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V, or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 110 watts.
Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 14 5 / 8 " high by 4'/ e " wide by 10%" deep.
Net weight is 19 pounds. Shipping weight is 27 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 1 25 POWER SUPPLY $285
Each instrument includes: 4 — 36" interconnecting cable (012-0065-001;
1— 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter
(103-0013-00]; 2— instruction manual (070-0246-00).
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 12 1 /," high by 4%" wide by 13V 2 " deep.
Net weight is 19 pounds. Shipping weight is 27 pounds,
approx.
TYPE FM1 25 $290
Each instrument includes: 4 — 36" interconnecting cable (012-0065-00);
1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter
(103-0013-00); 1 — set mounting hardware; 2 — instruction manual (070-
0246-00).
MOUNTING FRAME
Fits any standard 19-inch rack and is fastened to the front
of the rack by four screws. Capacity is four of any combina-
tion of Type FM122 Preamplifier, Type FM125 Power Supply,
Type 360 Indicator, and Type 160-Series Units. (Note: Because
the Type FM122 Preamplifier has high sensitivity, it is recom-
mended that it be mounted at least 4 inches to the left of
the Type FM125 Power Supply.)
ORDER PART NUMBER 014-0002-00 $7
d
The Type FM1 25 has a specially designed front panel for
use where vertical mounting in a standard rack is desired.
It can be mounted in an existing support or adapted to mount-
ing by a Tektronix mounting frame. Electrical characteristics
are the same as the Type 125.
The Type RM125 is a mechanically rearranged Type 125
for horizontal mounting in a standard 19" rack. Electrical
characteristics are the same as the Type 125.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 5 1 //' high by 19" wide by 13V 2 " deep.
Net weight is 19 pounds. Shipping weight is 29 pounds,
approx.
TYPE RM1 25 $290
Each instrument includes: 4 — 36" interconnecting cable (012-0065-00);
l_3. con ductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter
(103-0013-00); 1 — set mounting hardware; 2 — instruction manual (070-
0246-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
215
Type
REAMPLIFIER POWER SUPPLY
SQUAIE W*VI C»l«»*tO«
y* -Tr* ssss
The Tektronix Type 127 Preamplifier Power Supply provides
operating power to one or any combination of two Tektronix
Letter Series or "1" Series Plug-In Units. This permits the opera-
tion of Tektronix Plug-Ins separate from the oscilloscope in
which they are normally used. For example, a double-differen-
tial dual-trace display can be obtained with a Type 127 and
two Type 1A7, D, E, or G Plug-In Units — when used in conjunc-
tion with an oscilloscope and Type CA, 1A1, or 1A2 Plug-In
Unit.
Also, Triggering Signal Input Terminals are provided at the
rear of the instrument to permit the introduction of triggering
pulses into a Type CA, 1A1, 1A2, or Type M Unit to utilize
the alternate-sweep features of these multitrace units. The
triggering pulses may be obtained from the + GATE OUT
terminal of the associated oscilloscope.
CHARACTERISTICS
BALANCED OUTPUT
The outputs of Plug-In Units powered by the Type 127 are
fed through DC-coupled differential amplifier stages and
cathode followers to provide a push-pull signal at the output
terminals. Risetime of the unit is 18 ns. Push-pull output
swing is linear ±3% over a range of ±0.3 volt into 170-n
termination. Output DC operating levels are adjustable to
ground potential.
GAIN
The Type 127 has a gain of one, push-pull. With single-
ended output, gain is one-half.
OUTPUT TERMINALS
Each channel has four output terminals, two on the front
panel and two at the rear. Terminated 170-Q output cables
are furnished.
ELECTRONIC REGULATION
All DC supply voltages are electronically regulated to com-
pensate for line voltage and load variations between 105
and 125 V or 210 and 250 V and for current-demand dif-
ference among the Plug-In Units. A current-sensitive relay
switches in a compensating power load when only one pre-
amplifier is plugged into the Type 127.
AMPLITUDE CALIBRATOR
A squarewave calibration voltage is available through a
front-panel coaxial connector. Eighteen fixed voltages — 0.2, ^^
0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100 millivolts, 0.2 0.5, 1, 2, 5, 10, I
20, 50, and 100 volts peak to peak are provided. Accuracy
is within 3%. Squarewave frequency is approximately 1 kHz.
216
127
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 21 OV to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 450 watts
maximum. Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 8 3 / 4 " high by 19" wide by 21%" deep.
Net weight is 39'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 69 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 1 27 POWER SUPPLY (without plug-in units) . . . $650
Each instrument includes: 4 — 1 70-ii termination (011-0048-00]; 4—
170-12 coaxial cable (012-0034-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— pair mounting
tracks (351-0085-00); 4— adapter, BNC to UHF (103-0032-00); 4—
adapter, UHF to BNC (103-0015-00); 2— instruction manual (070-
0284-00).
SUPPORTING CRADLES
For rear slide support when the instrument is to be mounted
in a backless rack. Two cradles with necessary mounting
hardware.
ORDER PART NUMBER 040-0344-00 $1 1 .45
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
Outpuf characteristics of the Type 127 in combination
with Tektronix Plug-In Units, measured with the Type 127
output terminated at 7 70 Q.
Plug-In
Unit
Maximum
Voltage Gain
(push-pull
output)
Bandwidth
Risetime
B
2
20
DC to 15 MHz
2 Hz to 1 1 MHz
23 ns
30 ns
CA
2
DC to 17 MHz
20 ns
D
100
DC to 300 kHz at
a gain of 100, in-
creasing to 2 MHz
at a gain of 2
E
2000
0.06 Hz to 20 kHz
at full gain, increas-
ing to 60 kHz at a
gain of 200
»
G
2
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
H
20
DC to 12 MHz
29 ns
K
2
DC to 19 MHz
18 ns
L
2
20
DC to 19 MHz
3 Hz to 17 MHz
18 ns
20 ns
M
5
DC to 15 MHz
23 ns
O
2
DC to 17 MHz
20 ns
Q
*
DC to 6 kHz
60/is
W
2
100
DC to 16.5 MHz
DC to 7.5 MHz
21 ns
46 ns
z
2
DC to 1 1 MHz
31 ns
1A1
2
20
200
DC to 19 MHz
DC to 17 MHz
2 Hz to 11 MHz
18 ns
20 ns
30 ns
1A2
2
DC to 19 MHz
18 ns
1A7
10,000
DC to 500 kHz
0.7 /is
1S1
50
Equiv to
DC to 1 GHz
0.35 ns
1S2
20
Equiv to
DC to 3.9 GHz
90 ps
*A 10 //.strain input produces a 100 mV output.
217
PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLY
... a means for out-of-scope use of Tek-
tronix 2 and 3-Series Plug-In Units
The Type 129 Plug-In Supply provides a new way to utilize
the 2 and 3-Series Amplifier Plug-In Units in a wide variety of
instrumentation systems. With this power supply the amplifiers
are useful for driving recording equipment, X-Y plotters, oscillo-
scopes, or other external indicators having requirements within
the plug-in unit specifications.
The Type 129 Plug-In Power Supply is recommended for
use with the 2 and 3-Series single channel low-frequency
amplifiers.
Multiple-trace plug-ins are usable in the Type 129, but
operation should be limited to single-trace modes unless pro-
vision is made to operate the multiple-trace switching circuits
at a relatively slow rate compatible with the output circuit
bandwidth.
The Type 129 powers up to four 2 and 3-Series plug-in
units*, singly or in combination. Each plug-in unit fits into a
plug-in module having an output connector at the front and
rear panels. A selectable cathode-follower or passive circuit
card placed between the plug-in unit and the output connector
controls the output characteristics. Each channel must use one
of these cards in order to function properly with plug-in
units except sampling and Type 3C66.
With the cathode-follower plug-in circuit card installed,
push-pull, low impedance signals (to approximately 8 V peak
to peak) are available via cathode followers at front and rear
connectors. An automatic DC level-setting circuit keeps the
average DC level of the two connectors close to V. Band-
width of the cathode-follower output circuit is DC to approxi-
mately 1 MHz.
With the passive card installed, a high-impedance push-
pull signal is available at the front panel for balancing and
a single-ended signal at low impedance (approximately 500
ohms) is available at the rear output connector. Bandwidth
of the passive divider output circuit is DC to approximately
100 kHz and is dependent upon the plug-in used.
Each output can be switched to a meter for DC balance
indication. This allows quick setting of the plug-in position
control. In addition to the output monitor switch, a two-position
switch has been included for balancing of the Type 3C66
Carrier Amplifier Plug-In Unit.
*Sampling plug-ins, designed to operate in pairs (one vertical ^_
and one sweep), and Spectrum Analyzer or Automatic "Seek- € ]
ing" plug-ins designed to operate in conjunction with another ^^
2 or 3 series plug-in, must be "paired up" in Channels 1 and
2 or 3 and 4.
218
129
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
INDICATED
APPROXIMATE SYSTEM GAIN
PLUG-IN
TYPE
DEFLECTION
With CF Output Card**
FACTOR
With Passive Output Card*
Single Ended
Push-Pull
2A60
50 mV/div
50
20
40
2A61
0.01 mV/div (AC)
2.5 X TO 5
io 5
2X10 5
2A63
I mV/div (DC)
2.5 XIO 3
io 3
2 X10 3
3A3
100/iV/div
2.5 X10 4
IO 4
2 X10 4
3A5/3B5
l mV/div to
O.l jus/div
Automatic/Programmable Amplifier and Time Base
for automatic seeking operation.
3A75
50 mV/div
50
20
40
3C66
lO/tstrain/div
0.25 V/justrain
0.1 V/justrain
0.2V/ju,strain
3L10
To be used with any 2 or 3-Series Time Base to provide I to 36 MHz Spectrum Analysis.
3S3/3S76
2 mV/div (max)
Sampling Amplifier (must be paired with Sampling Time Base).
3T4/3T77A
to 0.2/is/div
Sampling Time Base (must be paired with Sampling Amplifier).
*Output single ended at rear connector.
**Output at front or rear connector.
In addition to supplying power for the plug-in compartments,
the Type 129 provides regulated voltages at a rear-panel con-
nector for powering accessories.
Two low-noise fans provide forced-air cooling for the power
supply and plug-in compartments.
Electronically-regulated DC supplies insure stable operation
with as much as —10% to +7% variation from design-center
line voltage. The instrument is normally wired to operate at
a design center of 117 volts, but a multi-tap transformer per-
mits operation at design centers of 110, 117, 124, 220, 234,
or 248 volts, 50 to 60 Hz. Power consumption is typically 575
watts maximum under full load.
Dimensions are 10V 2 " high by 19" wide by 23'A" deep.
Net weight is 46 pounds. Shipping weight is approximately
85 pounds.
TYPE 129 RACK-MOUNT PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLY
(without circuit cards) $650
Each instrument includes: 1 — right angle power cord (161-0024-QO);
1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1— pair mounting tracks (351-
0085-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0409-00).
BLANK PLUG-IN CHASSIS
This chassis contains necessary unique mechanical parts for
construction of a custom plug-in including frame, blank front
panel, blank chassis, 24-pin connector, latch, and small hard-
ware. Electrical components are not included.
BLANK PLUG-IN CHASSIS (Part Number 040-0245-00) .. $25
CATHODE- FOLLOWER CIRCUIT CARD
(Part Number 018-0001-00)
$40
PASSIVE DIVIDER CIRCUIT CARD
(Part Number 018-0002-00)
$10
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
219
Type
DIRECT-READING L-C METER
FIVE RANGES
MICROHENRYS— to 3, 10, 30, 100, 300.
PICOFARADS— to 3, 10, 30, 100, 300.
ACCURACY*
Within 3% of full scale.
4 7/2" METER
The Type 130 L-C Meter is a direct-reading reactance meter
that measures small reactances in a series mode at a fre-
quency between 125 kHz and 140 kHz. Meter indicates
inductance up to 300 fxH and capacitance up to 300 /a/xF (pF).
The unknown inductor or capacitor is part of a resonant cir-
cuit whose frequency is compared to a 140-kHz reference
oscillator. Meter indicates the two oscillators frequency dif-
ference but is calibrated directly in pH and fi/xF.
Measurement of very small reactances is possible by using
special measurement procedures that are described in the
instrument instruction manual.
The Type 130 is particularly useful for measuring small
capacitances in the presence of environmental strays. A
front-panel Guard Voltage output connector provides in-phase
drive to the environmental capacitance to eliminate strays
from the measurement. Thus it is possible to measure vacuum
tube interelectrode capacitances. Up to 300 pF environmental
capacitance around an unknown capacitor can be guarded
if the guard terminal loading is not excessive. Loading limits
are outlined in the instruction manual.
Resistance loading compensation is optimized for 117-volts
RMS operation. The following loads will not appreciably alter
the measurement indication:
Capacitance: as low as 100-kQ shunt.
Inductance: as low as 20-kQ shunt, up to 10-12 series.
Correction tables in instruction manual indicate needed
corrections for other values of load resistance. Actual cor-
rections determined for each instrument at time of each recali-
bration.
*Full scale accuracy of any one range can be improved by
special calibration at the time of making a measurement.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 40 watts.
Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 10%" high by 7" wide by 11 '/„" deep.
Net weight is 8 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 15 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 130 DIRECT-READING L-C METER $225
Each instrument includes: 1 — probe (010-0003-00); 1 — black output
lead (012-0014-00); 1— red output lead (012-0015-00); 1— 3-conductor
power cord (161-0010-00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-001; 2—
instruction manual (070-0231-00).
PRODUCTION TEST FIXTURE
For use with the Type 130 L-C Meter. Speeds sorting and
testing of capacitors and inductors.
Order Part Number 013-0001-00 $5
DELTA STANDARDS
For calibration of the Type 130 L-C Meter. The unit pro-
vides accurately adjusted steps of capacitance and induc-
tance, selected by a rotary selector switch. Values of the
capacitance steps correspond to the full-scale adjustments
required on the five scales of the Type 130. Two resistors
of similar capacitance, values of 1 megohm and 0.1 megohm,
are provided for the resistance compensation adjustment. A
330-jU.H standard permits proper adjustments of the inductance
ranges.
Order Part Number 015-0001-00 $40
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
220
PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLY Type
The Type 132 provides an electronically regulated power
supply and amplifier for any Tektronix Letter-Series or "1"
Series Plug-In Unit.
Easily portable, it enables the many plug-ins to be used
with or without an oscilloscope in a wide variety of appli-
cations.
The electronically regulated power supply provides cor-
rect operating voltages for both the internal amplifier and
plug-in unit and assures stable operation.
Convenient front-panel terminals for either push-pull or
single-ended output facilitate connections to associated equip-
ment.
CHARACTERISTICS
Bandwidth Specifications are at — 3 dB.
BANDWIDTH AND RISETIME
DC to 15 MHz, 23 ns, when used with a Tektronix Type K
or Type L Plug-In Unit and terminated with a 50-Q load.
GAIN
10 (push-pull) when using a Tektronix Plug-In Unit at 50
mV/cm deflection factor, terminated with a 93-Q load
(approximately 5 into 50-H load).
OUTPUT TERMINALS
Push-pull, or single-ended
or — outputs on front panel.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
High impedance load; ±50 V at each connector and
±100 V push-pull. Source impedance is approximately
5000 Q with ±10mA available (unterminated). With 93-fi
load, voltage swing is approximately ±1 V.
DUAL-TRACE OPERATION
Back-panel jacks and switching arrangements provide for
use of the alternate and chopped modes of operation
including blanking, with a Tektronix Type 1A1, 1A2, CA
or M Plug-In Unit.
POWER REQUIREMENT
Electronically-regulated DC supplies insure stable operation
between 105 and 125 V or between 210 and 250 V, 50 to
60 Hz. Transformer taps allow operation on either range.
Instrument factory wired for 117 V. Power consumption
approximately 320 watts.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are lO'//' high by 7 } /a" wide by 19y B " deep.
Net weight is 21 '/ s pounds. Shipping weight is 36 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 132 PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLY
(without plug-in units) $460
Each instrument includes: 2—93-12 termination, BNC (011-0056-00);
2— 93-0 cable, BNC (012-0075-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2 — instruction manual
(070-0288-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
TYPE 132 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE WITH TEKTRONIX PLUG-IN UNITS
Equivalent
noise
referred
Performance* Performance*
Terminated Double terminated
in 93 Q 93 n
to input
TYPE (P to P)
Systemt Band- Systemt Band-
Gain Width Gain Width
B
200 /*V
100
10
10 MHz
14 MHz
50
5
10 MHz
16 MHz
CA
200 ,mV
10
14 MHz
5
16 MHz
D
100 p.V
10
500
2 MHz
300 kHz
5 2 MHz
250 300 kHz
E
35 ,. V
10,000
See Manual
5000
See Manual
G
200 ,iV
10
14 MHz
5
16 MHz
H
200 ,.,.V
100
11 MHz
50
12 MHz
K
200 iiV
10
14 MHz
5
16 MHz
L
200 /iV
100
10
14 MHz
14 MHz
50
5
16 MHz
16 MHz
M
200 pV
10
14 MHz
5
16 MHz
O
200 /iV
10 14MHz
5
16 MHz
Q
See Manual
6 kHz
6 kHz
W
200 nV
500 7 MHz
10 14.5 MHz
250
5
7 MHz
16 MHz
z
200 M V
10 10MHz
5
10 MHz
1A1
200 m V
2 Hz to
1000 10MHz
100 14MHz
10 14MHz
500
50
5
2 Hz to
10 MHz
16 MHz
16 MHz
1A2
200 ,. V
10
14 MHz 5 16 MHz
1A7
10 /iV
Useful to
20,000
500 kHz Useful to 500 kHz
10,000
1S1
lmV
250
Equiv to '125 Equiv to
1 GHz 1 GHz
1S2
1 mV
100 Equiv to 50 Equiv to
3.9 GHz 3.9 GHz
•Performance measured with push-pull output of Type 132 connected into
CA unit in a Type 545B Oscilloscope.
^System Gain = Overall gain from input of plug-in to the push-pull
output cables.
221
Type
PLUG-IN UNIT POWER SUPPLY
The Type 133 provides power to an internal, transistor-
ized amplifier and any Tektronix Letter-Series or "1" Series
Plug-In Unit. The flexibility of this plug-in feature permits
quick adaptation of the Type 133 to meet any particular
requirement.
The frequency response of the transistorized amplifier is
DC to 100 kHz and the output is ±5V. The source imped-
ance is 2 Q. Characteristics of this unit make it particularly
useful for driving recorders, and in audio or other low-fre-
quency work.
Connectors on the front-panel enable the output to be fed
directly into an oscilloscope or used for other applications.
A typical application of the Type 133 is its use in con-
junction with the Tektronix Type Q Transducer and Strain
Gage Unit. This completely self-contained combination requires
no external equipment other than the strain gages or trans-
ducers needed for the particular operation. The output can
drive a recorder and be monitored visually at the same time
with an oscilloscope. The indicating instrument should have
some response at 25 kHz to enable balancing the bridge in
the Type Q Unit, otherwise an external monitor must be used.
BANDWIDTH
DC to 100 kHz. Specified at — 3dB.
GAIN
10, single-ended.
OUTPUT
±5 V (high-impedance load). 1 .5 A (short circuit). Source
impedance 2 Q.
DC ADJUST
The output DC operating level adjusts to ground potential.
PHASE INVERSION
An internal switch permits either output polarity.
MONITOR JACK
Allows observation of the output with an oscilloscope with-
out switching cables.
DUAL-TRACE OPERATION
Back-panel jacks and switching arrangements provide for
use of the Alternate mode of operation when using a Tek-
tronix Type 1A1, 1A2, CA or M Plug-In Unit.
POWER SUPPLY
Electronic regulation assures stable operation under chang-
ing loads or line voltages.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 320 watts.
Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 10 1 /," high by 7'/ 8 " wide by 19'/ 4 " deep.
Net weight is 22 pounds. Shipping weight is 36 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 133 POWER SUPPLY (without plug-in units) $440
Each instrument includes: 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00);
1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2— instruction manual (070-
0290-00).
TYPE 133 TYPICAL PERFORMANCE
Bandwidth Specifications are at —3 dB
PLUG-IN
TYPE
EQUIVALENT
NOISE REFERRED
TO INPUT
OVERALL GAIN
(NO LOAD)
BANDWIDTH
B
200 /iV
10
100 (AC only)
DC to 100 kHz
2 Hz to 100 kHz
CA
200 /tV
10
DC to 100 kHz
D
100/iV
500
DC to 100 kHz
E
35 /iV
10,000
See E Unit
G
200 /.iV
10
DC to 100 kHz
H
200 /..V
100
DC to 100 kHz
K
200 /iV
10
DC to 100 kHz
L
200 /xV
10
100 (AC only)
DC to 100 kHz
3 Hz to 100 kHz
M
200 p.V
10
DC to 100 kHz
O
200 /j.V
10
DC to 100 kHz
Q
See Manual
DC to 6 kHz
Z
200 /xV
10
DC to 100 kHz
1A1
200 /tV
10
100
1000
DC to 100 kHz
DC to 100 kHz
2 Hz to 100 kHz
1A2
200 /iV
10
DC to 100 kHz
1A7
10 [xV
50,000
DC to 100 kHz
1S1
<1 mV
250
Equiv to
DC to 1 GHz
1S2
<lmV
100
Equiv to
DC to 3.9 GHz
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
222
POWER SUPPLY Type
ELECTRONIC VOLTAGE REGULATION
OUTPUT CONNECTORS
For Sockets in Parallel
Conveniently Located at Rear of Chassis
LARGE LOAD CAPACITY
+ 300 V DC, Unregulated.
+ 225V DC, Regulated, at 225 mA.
+ 150V DC, Regulated, at 15 mA.
+ 80 V DC, Unregulated.
— 170V DC, Regulated, at 125 mA.
6.3 V AC, Unregulated, at 20 A.
The Type 160A Power Supply provides the required cur-
rents and voltages for one Type 360 Indicator Unit in com-
bination with up to six Type 160-Series Generators. Power
capability handles up to five Type 360 Indicator Units, up
to five Type 163 Fast-Rise Pulse Generators, up to seven Type
162 Waveform Generators, or up to seven Type 161 Pulse
Generators. Output terminals are four octal sockets on the
back of the instrument.
Electronic regulation compensates for line-voltage variations
between 105 and 125 V or 210 and 250 V, and for any
current-demand differences between instruments.
MAXIMUM LOAD CONDITIONS
The maximum amount of current that can be drawn from
the +300-V unregulated supply is limited by the amount
of current drawn from the +225-V regulated supply and
varies between 275 mA, in the absence of any current drawn
from the +225-V supply, and 50 mA when maximum cur-
rent is drawn from the +225-V supply.
Output current of the +225-V supply is limited to 175
mA with no shunt across the series tube and increases to
a maximum of 225 mA with a 1500-ohm shunt.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 350 watts
maximum. Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL
The Type 160A can be conveniently mounted with other
Type 160-Series Instruments or the Type 360 Indicator Unit
in a mounting frame that fits a standard 19" rack. Dimen-
sions are 12 1 /," high by 4%" wide by 14%" deep. Net
weight is 20'/ 4 pounds. Shipping weight is 28 pounds
approx.
TYPE 160A POWER SUPPLY $190
Each instrument includes: 2 — inter-unit power cable (012-001 6-00);
1— 3-conductor power cord (lol-0010-00); 1 — 3 to 2-wire adapter
(103-0013-00); 1 — set mounting hardware; 1 — instruction manual
(070-0220-00).
MOUNTING FRAME
A Mounting Frame conveniently adapts the Type 160A for
rack mounting. The frame accepts up to 4 Type 160-Series
Instruments or up to 3 Type 160-Series Instruments and a Type
360 Indicator Unit. The frame fits a standard 19" rack. Rack
height required is 1 2 1 /,"
Order Part Number 014-0002-00
$7
Blank Panel for above, occupies same panel area as Type
160-Series Generator or Type 360 Indicator Unit.
Order Part Number 333-0157-00 $2.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
223
Type
PULSE GENERATOR
The Tektronix Type 161 Pulse Generator is designed to
supply calibrated rectangular output pulses from zero to 50-V
amplitude and 10 /xs to 100 ms duration when an external
trigger of required voltage is received. An excellent trigger
source is the Type 162 Waveform Generator. The 50-V Gate
Output has the same duration and timing as the pulse, but is
of fixed amplitude.
When triggered by a negative-going sawtooth, the output
pulse and gate can be adjusted to occur at any designated
point along the sawtooth. A calibrated control indicates out-
put delay as a fraction of the triggering sawtooth duration.
Other calibrated controls indicate pulse and gate width (in
milliseconds) and pulse amplitude (in volts). When triggered
by a positive pulse, the same output waveforms are available.
In this instance the delay control functions as a triggering-
level selector.
Voltages necessary to operate the Type 161 can be obtained
from the T>pe 160A Power Supply, which can power up to
seven Type 161 Generators.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
Variable-amplitude positive or negative pulse. Fixed-ampli-
tude positive gate.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Risetime — Positive pulse; within 0.5 /is when load capacitance
is lOpF or less, within 0.75 /xs for lOOpF or less load capaci-
tance. Negative pulse; within 0.5 ^s when load capacitance
is lOpF or less, within 1.5 /is for lOOpF or less load capaci-
tance. Overshoot less than 5%.
Duration — calibrated, variable, 10 /xs to 0.1 s.
Delay — continuously variable, to 100% of triggering saw-
tooth waveform.
AMPLITUDE PEAK TO PEAK
Pulse — calibrated, continuously variable, to 50 V.
Gate — fixed, 50-V positive, peak to peak minimum.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
Positive pulse — 1.8 kilohms maximum.
Negative pulse — 5 kilohms approximately.
Positive gate — 1 kilohm maximum.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Positive pulse, 3 V peak to peak minimum. Negative-going
sawtooth; must include DC bias sufficient to keep voltage
positive. Maximum repetition rate, 50 kHz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
-170 V DC at 17 mA +225 VDC at 22 mA, 6.3 VAC at
1.65 A.
MECHANICAL
The Type 161 can be conveniently mounted with other Type
160-Series Instruments or the Type 360 Indicator Unit in a
Mounting Frame that fits a standard 19" rack. Dimensions
are 12V 4 " high by 4%" wide by 6%" deep. Net weight
is 3Y 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds, approx.
TYPE 161 PULSE GENERATOR $130
Each instrument includes: 1 — inter-unit power cable [01 2-001 7-00};
1 — set mounting hardware; 1 — instruction manual (070-0220-00).
MOUNTING FRAME
A Mounting Frame conveniently adapts the Type 161 for
rack mounting. The frame accepts up to 4 Type 160-Series
Instruments or up to 3 Type 160-Series Instruments and a Type
360 Indicator Unit. The Frame fits a standard 19" rack. Rack
height required is 12'/ 4 ".
Order Part Number 01 4-0002-00 $7
Blank Panel for above, occupies same panel area as Type
160-Series Generator or Type 360 Indicator Unit.
Order Part Number 333-0157-00 $2.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
224
WAVEFORM GENERATOR Type
The Type 162 Waveform Generator produces three types of
calibrated output waveforms. Both the duration and repetition
rate of the output waveforms — pulse, gate, and sawtooth — are
adjustable. Triggering can occur from an external electrical
impulse or by front-panel push button. The unit is designed to
operate as a delay generator in conjunction with the Type 161
or Type 163, and to supply a sweep voltage for the Type 360
Indicator Unit. It is useful for initiating chains of events electri-
cally, for controlling their duration and repetition rate, and for
generating waveforms recurrently. As such it is a stable repeti-
tion rate generator.
Amplitude of the pulse and gate waveforms is 50 V, with
minimum risetime of 1 /as. Amplitude of the sawtooth waveform
decreases linearly from > +148 V to < +20 V. A calibrated
control indicates waveform duration. Shortest pulse duration
is approximately 10 /xs.
Voltages necessary to operate the Type 162 can be obtained
from the Type 160A Power Supply, which can power up to
seven Type 162 Generators.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
Positive pulse, positive gate, and negative-going positive
sawtooth.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Risetime: 1 -/xs minimum.
Duration: pulse, 1 xxs to 0.05 s, gate and sawtooth, 100 /is
to 10 s.
Repetition Rate: 0.1 Hz to 10 kHz, recurrent operation.
AMPLITUDE
Pulse and gate are fixed, positive, 50-V peak to peak mini-
mum. Sawtooth decreases linearly with time from > +148 V
to < +20 V, ±4%.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
1000 ohms approximately for all outputs.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Positive pulse — 1 5 V. Positive gate — 8 V. Sinewave — 6 V RMS,
frequency from 5 Hz to 50 kHz. At frequencies below 5 Hz,
the product of RMS voltage time frequency must exceed 10.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
-170 V DC at 7 mA +150 V DC at 1 mA. +225 V DC at
28 mA, 6.3 V AC at 1 .7 A.
MECHANICAL
The Type 162 can be mounted conveniently with other Type
160-Series Instruments or the Type 360 Indicator Unit in a
Mounting Frame that fits a standard 19" rack.
Dimensions are 12V 4 " high by 4V 8 " wide by 6%" deep.
Net weight is 3 1 /; pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds, approx.
TYPE 162 WAVEFORM GENERATOR $130
Each instrument includes: 1 — inter-unit power cable (012-0017-00);
1 — set mounting hardware; 1 — instruction manual (070-0220-00).
MOUNTING FRAME
A Mounting Frame conveniently adapts the Type 162 for rack
mounting. The frame accepts up to 4 Type 160-Series Instru-
ments or up to 3 Type 160-Series Instruments and a Type 360
Indicator Unit. The Frame fits a standard 19" rack. Rack height
required is 12V 4 ".
Order Part Number 01 4-0002-00 $7
Blank Panel for above, occupies same panel area as Type
160-Series Generator or Type 360 Indicator Unit.
Order Part Number 333-01 57-00 $2.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
225
Type
FAST-RISE PULSE GENERATOR
The Tektronix Type 163 Fast-Rise Pulse Generator is designed
to supply rectangular output pulses from to 25 V in amplitude
and 1 fxs to 10 ms in duration when an external trigger of
required voltage is received. An excellent trigger source is
the Type 162 Waveform Generator. The 25-V Gate Output
has the same characteristics as the pulse, but is of fixed ampli-
tude.
When triggered by a negative-going sawtooth, the output
pulse and gate can occur at any designated point along the
sawtooth. A calibrated control indicates output delay as a
fraction of the triggering sawtooth duration. Other calibrated
controls indicate pulse and gate width (in microseconds) and
pulse amplitude (in volts).
The Type 163 operates up to 50% duty cycle at the minimum
time setting on any range. With higher multiplier-control set-
tings, the duty cycle is correspondingly higher. Maximum repe-
tition rate is 500 kHz — with a generated pulse of l-/is duration.
Voltages necessary to operate the Type 163 can be obtained
from the Type 160A Power Supply, which can power up to five
Type 163 Generators.
OUTPUT WAVEFORMS
Variable-amplitude positive pulse.
Fixed-amplitude positive gate.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
Risetime — Within 0.2 /xs when load capacitance is 10 pF or
less, within 0.25 /xs for 100 pF or less load capacitance.
Overshoot can be ad|usted to zero.
Duration — calibrated, variable, 1 /xs to 10 ms.
Delay — continuously variable, to 100% of triggering saw-
tooth duration.
Decay Time — 0.2 to 0.5 /is.
AMPLITUDE PEAK TO PEAK
Pulse — calibrated, continuously variable, to 25 V.
Gate — fixed, positive, 25 V minimum.
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE
Pulse — 500 ohms (varies with pulse-amplitude control setting).
Gate — 100 ohms.
Minimum load resistance — 3.5 kilohms.
TRIGGER REQUIREMENTS
Positive pulse, 2 V peak to peak minimum.
Negative-going sawtooth; must include DC bias sufficient to
keep voltage positive. Maximum repetition rate, 500 kHz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS
-170 V DC at 25 mA, +225 V DC at 45 mA. 6.3 V AC at
3.6 A.
MECHANICAL
The Type 163 can be conveniently mounted with other Type
160-Series Instruments or the Type 360 Indicator Unit in a
Mounting Frame that fits a standard 19" rack.
Dimensions are 12y 2 " high by 4V 8 " wide by 6%" deep.
Net weight is 3y 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 8 pounds,
approx.
TYPE 163 PULSE GENERATOR $130
Each instrument includes: 1 — inter-unit power cable (012-0017-00); 1 —
set mounting hardware; 1 — instruction manual (070-0220-00).
MOUNTING FRAME
A Mounting Frame conveniently adapts the Type 163 for
rack mounting. The frame accepts up to 4 Type 160-Series
Instruments or up to 3 Type 160-Series Instruments and a Type
360 Indicator Unit. The frame fits a standard 19" rack. Rack
height required is 12V 4 ".
Order Part Number 014-0002-00 $7
Blank Panel for above, occupies same panel area as Type
160-Series Generator or Type 360 Indicator Unit.
Order Part Number 333-01 57-00 $2.50
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
226
TIME-MARK GENERATOR Type
76 MARKER INTERVALS, 5 SINEW AVE
FREQUENCIES
500-MHz SINEW AVE OUTPUT
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR
PUSH BUTTON SELECTION
COOL AND COMPACT
Unique in having a 500-MHz OUTPUT, the Type 184 is a
compact, wide-range time-mark generator. It is CRYSTAL-CON-
TROLLED and provides 16 MARKER INTERVALS, 5 SINEWAVE
FREQUENCIES, and 7 TRIGGER-PULSE INTERVALS.
Marker push buttons are self-cancelling so that when any
marker button is pushed, other buttons are automatically
released. More than one marker interval (up to two decades
apart) can be obtained at one time by pushing the desired
buttons simultaneously. Triggers are time-coincident with the
corresponding markers.
The Type 184 is transistorized (plus 6 nuvistors) and is fre-
quency controlled by a temperature-stabilized 10-MHz crystal
oscillator. This instrument gives you great versatility for many
laboratory or production-line applications.
Compact design requires little bench space. The Type 184
can be tilted for convenience, or stacked with other new Tek-
tronix Generators.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
CRYSTAL-CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR
10 MHz, adjustable to a primary standard; long-term stability,
3 p/m per 24 h; temperature-stabilized.
MARKER OUTPUT
Positive-going markers with 16 intervals of 100 ns to 5 s in
1-5-10 sequence, 1-V minimum amplitude into 50 ohms.
MARKER AMPLIFIER OUTPUT
Positive- or negative-going markers with 14 intervals of 1 /as
to 5s in 1-5-10 sequence, 25-V minimum amplitude into 1 kfi.
SINEWAVE OUTPUTS
10-ns, 20-ns, and 50-ns sinewave signals at Marker Output
connector with 1-V minimum peak to peak amplitude into
50 ohms. 2-ns and 5-ns sinewave signals at HF output con-
nector with 0.3-V minimum peak to peak amplitude into 50
ohms.
TRIGGER OUTPUT
Positive-going pulses with 7 intervals of 1 /as to Is in 1-10
sequence, 0.4-V minimum amplitude into 50 ohms.
NEW
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
94.5 V to 137.5 V or 189 V to 275 V, 50 to 400 Hz. Low or
high range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 40 W
power consumption.
MECHANICAL
Foot permits tilting for convenient bench-top operation.
Handle hinges out for carrying. Net weight is 13 pounds.
Shipping weight is approx 18 pounds. Dimensions are 6"
high by 9" wide by 15" deep.
TYPE 184 TIME-MARK GENERATOR $675
Each instrument includes: 2 — 50-12 BNC cobles (012-0057-00); 1— 50-fi
BNC termination (011-0049-00); 1— power cord (161-0024-00); 1—3 to
2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2 — instruction manual (070-0499-00).
TYPE 184 TIME-MARK GENERATOR MOD 146B .. $650
As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in Rack Adapter.
RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 1 06, 1 1 4, 1 84, and 1 91
The Rack Adapter converts the latest series of Tektronix
Generators for rack mounting. Any combination of two instru-
ments can be mounted (less cabinets) side by side in a 19"
rack in only 5 , / 4 " of panel height. Additional mounting infor-
mation on Catalog Instrument Dimensions page. The Rack
Adapter provides forced air ventilation and shielding between
compartments. A blank panel is included to cover the unused
opening when only one Generator is installed.
RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-00) $1 25
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment-, General Information page.
227
Type
CONSTANT-AMPLITUDE
SIGNAL GENERATOR
350 kHz to 100 MHz SINEW AVES
5 mV to 5.5 V CONSTANT AMPLITUDE
50 kHz AMPLITUDE REFERENCE
Frequency is continuously variable and calibrated from
350 kHz to 100 MHz. A 50 kHz reference output is also pro-
vided. Amplitude is calibrated from 5 mV to 5 V peak to
peak into 50 Q (twice this amplitude unterminated). Output
amplitude is held constant by continuous peak to peak volt-
age sampling. Source impedance is 50 Q for all control set-
tings.
Compact design requires little bench space. The Type 191
can be tilted for convenience, or stacked with other new Tek-
tronix Generators.
OUTPUT CHARACTERISTICS
FREQUENCY RANGE
Continuously variable and calibrated in 7 ranges from 350
kHz to 100 MHz, plus 50-kHz reference output. Accuracy
within ±2% of selected frequency with output terminated
in 50 Q or unterminated (except ±5% on 0.5-5 V range
with output unterminated).
AMPLITUDE RANGE
5 mV to 5 V peak to peak in 3 ranges (10 calibrated steps
per range) into 50 Q termination. Unterminated output is
2X indicated output. Amplitude is continuously variable
(uncalibrated) between steps and to 10% over the top of
each range (5.5 V terminated or 1 1 V unterminated).
AMPLITUDE ACCURACY
50-kHz reference output accurate within ±3% of indicated
amplitude on 0.5-5 V range, ±4% on 50-500 mV range,
and ±5% on 5-50 mV range, into ±1% 50 Q termination.
Accuracy improved with a more accurate termination.
Unterminated output is 2X indicated amplitude, at same
accuracy.
AMPLITUDE REGULATION INTO 50 Q
Output amplitude (at output connector or through 5-ns or
less of RG8 cable) varies no more than ±3% from actual
amplitude at 50 kHz, when frequency is varied from 350
kHz to 100 MHz, except +3%, —5% from 42 MHz to 100
MHz on 5 mV to 50 mV range.
HARMONIC CONTENT
Typically less than 5%.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
103.5 V to 126.5 V or 207 V to 253 V, 50 to 400 Hz. Low or
high range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 25 watts
maximum power consumption.
NEW
MECHANICAL
Foot permits tilting for convenient bench-top operation.
Handle hinges out for carrying. Net weight is approx
13 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight is approx 18 pounds. Dimen-
sions are 6" high by 9" wide by 15 5 / 8 " deep.
TYPE 191 CONSTANT AMPLITUDE SIGNAL GENERATOR
$400
Each instrument includes: 1— 5-ns cable (017-0502-00); 1— 50-12 GR to
BNC in-line termination (017-0083-00); 1— right-angle 3-conductor
power cord (161-0024-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2—
instruction manual (070-0522-00).
TYPE 191 CONSTANT AMPLITUDE SIGNAL GENERATOR
MOD 1 46B $375
As above, but less cabinet, for mounting in Rack Adapter.
RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPE 106, 1 14, 184, and 191
The Rack Adapter converts the latest series of Tektronix
Generators for rack mounting. Any combination of two
instruments can be mounted (less cabinets) side by side in a
19" rack, in only 5'/ 4 " of panel height. Refer to Instrument
Dimension page for mounting information. The Rack Adapter
provides forced air ventilation and shielding between com-
partments. A blank panel is included to cover the unused
opening, when only one Generator is installed.
RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-00) $125
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
228
EXTERNAL PROGRAMMER Type
The Type 263 Programmer provides the facility for con-
trolling the Type 3A5 and 3B5 Automatic/Programmable Plug-
In Units remotely. Push buttons on the front panel of the Pro-
grammer select any one of six internal program cards. Each
card, after initial set up, establishes the plug-in functions
required for a particular test or measurement. More than one
programmer can be cascaded for applications requiring more
than the six initial measurement set-ups.
The plug-in type program cards are identical, allowing them
to be interchanged or arranged in any sequence. New pro-
grams are easily established by relocating small jumpers and
changing the potentiometer settings on the cards.
PROGRAM CAPABILITIES
Vertical V/div Setting (lOmV/div — 50V/div), Input Cou-
pling (AC, AC Stabilized, DC), XI Probe; Horizontal Time/
Div Settings (5 s to 10 ns), Trigger Mode selection and Cou-
pling (Ext DC, Ext AC, Int AC, AUTO), Trigger Slope; XI,
XI 0, XI 00 Magnifier for Delayed Sweep, auxiliary SP6T
switch function. All established by jumper connection. Ver-
tical and Horizontal Positioning, Trigger Level, and varia-
tion of Sweep Delay, by potentiometer setting.
PROGRAM CARDS
Interchangeable, plug-in type.
OUTPUT CABLES
Two 3' cables with multipin connectors.
CONSTRUCTION
Cast aluminum side plates with wrap-around steel cabinet.
DIMENSIONS
5'/ 2 " high x 8%" wide x 9" deep overall.
NET WEIGHT
Approx 5 lbs. Shipping weight, approx 8 lbs.
NEW
TYPE 263 PROGRAMMER $325
Each instrument includes: 6 — program cards (670-0226-00); 11 — leads,
electrical (175-0674-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0535-00).
EXTRA PROGRAM CARDS (Order Part Number 670-0226-00)
each $30
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
PROGRAMMABLE SYSTEM FOR FAST PRODUCTION-LINE TESTING
The Type 561 A Oscilloscope* combined with the Type 3A5,
3B5 Plug-In Units and the Type 263 Programmer, offer the
ideal system for making production-line measurements quickly
and conveniently . . . and with less chance for operator error.
The system allows measurements to be made at the push of
a button without changing the manual controls of either plug-
in unit. The oscilloscope settings are programmed for a par-
ticular measurement and read out in large, lighted indicators
on the face of the plug-in units. After the initial program is
established, this new system can be operated by personnel
with little or no technical training.
*Also Type 564 for storage applications.
SEE THE TYPE 3A5 AND 3B5 PAGES
■ IN UNIT INFORMATION
229
Type
TRIGGER COUNTDOWN UNIT
INPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCIES 30 megahertz to 5
gigahertz.
OUTPUT SIGNAL FREQUENCIES Continuously vari-
able from 15 to 45 megahertz.
The Tektronix Type 280 Trigger Countdown Unit allows
timing systems to be synchronized on frequencies up to
5 gigahertz. It can be used to lower the frequency of
the triggering signals to within a range of 15 to 45 mega-
hertz. This permits triggering circuits of timing systems to
lock in solidly with high-frequency signals.
By using the Type 280 with a Tektronix sampling oscillo-
scope, microwave engineers can observe RF signals in the
gigahertz range.
CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT FREQUENCY is from 30 megahertz to 5 gigahertz.
INPUT SIGNAL VOLTAGE is 50 millivolts to 4 volts peak
to peak.
INPUT IMPEDANCE is nominally 50 ohms.
OUTPUT REPETITION is continuously variable from 15 to
45 megahertz.
JITTER is 10 ps, or less than 1% of input signal period,
whichever is larger.
Dual-Trace Sampling
Plug-In Unit
Timing Unit
Signal Source
(50n Output Z)
Sync Output of Signal Source
SYNC INPUT
Connector
Type 280 connected for use with Type 661 Oscilloscope.
TYPE 280
TRIGGER COUNTDOWN
UNIT
t
tl«I.O«,». ,«., K.1ILANO, „ MOO „ .
TWO OUTPUTS-
LARGE AMPLITUDE TRIGGER OUTPUT is 1.5 volts, nominal-
ly 8-ns long, with less than 4-ns risetime, (for use with high-
speed conventional oscilloscopes).
FAST-RISE TRIGGER OUTPUT (terminated in 50 ohms) is
150 millivolts, with less than 0.4-ns risetime, decaying with
2-ns time constant, (for use with Type 1S1, 5T1, 5T1A, 3T4.
3T77, or 3T77A and other high-speed sampling oscilloscopes).
AMPLITUDE OF TRIGGER OUTPUT as seen at input con-
nector is <125mV peak to peak.
SHIELDING of the Type 280 is adequate to permit opera-
tion in areas that have significant RF radiation levels.
POWER REQUIREMENT is 105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V,
50 to 800 Hz 10W. Transformer taps allow operation on either
range. Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL FEATURES include an aluminum-alloy chassis,
die-cast aluminum-alloy top and bottom covers, and steel wrap-
around housing. Overall dimensions are 7%" high by 7%"
wide by 4 5 / 8 " deep. Net weight is 4'/ 2 pounds. Shipping
weight is 9 pounds, approx.
TYPE 280 TRIGGER COUNTDOWN UNIT $265
Each instrument includes: 1— 5-ns cable (017-0512-00); 1—3 to 2-
wire adapter (103-0013-00); 1 — 3-conductor power cord, AC (161-
0015-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0350-00).
U.S. Sales Price f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
230
"
TIME-DOMAIN REFLECTOMETER PULSER Type
This compact current pulse source is designed for use with
Tektronix Type 3S76, 4S1, and 1S1 Sampling Units; power is
obtained from their probe power connector.
NEW
Approx 460 mV
into
double-terminated
50 Q environment.
OmV V_
AMPLITUDE
18.5 mA ±1.5 mA.
RISETIME
<0.75ns at negative transition.
WIDTH
>5/xs from negative-going edge to positive-going edge, at
50% amplitude points.
FLATNESS
<±2% overshoot and ringing following negative-going
edge for first 10ns, 0.5% thereafter.
LOADING EFFECT ON 50-n SYSTEM
<10% reflection (capacitive).
TYPE 281 TDR PULSER $95
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0515-00).
The Type 282 permits the use of conventional high-impedance
probes with 50-Q sampling plug-in units, such as Types 1S1,
4S1, 4S2, 4S2A, and 3S76. Power is obtained from their probe
power connector.
With wide-range sampling units such as Types T SI, or 5T3
Timing Unit and a 4 series sampling vertical unit, one oscillo-
scope can cover nearly the entire range of signal measurement
from power-supply ripple to nanosecond events.
Other advantages include: voltage offset, smoothing, and
overload-recovery features of sampling not normally available
with a conventional oscilloscope; no loss of DC stability with
sampling units; and excellent linearity over entire dynamic
range.
Risetime is <3 ns from a 25-Q source directly into the Type
282 input. Gain is unity ±3%, non-inverting. Dynamic range
is up to ±750 mV into 50 Q. Maximum input is ±5V.
CHARACTERISTICS REFERRED TO PROBE TIP
Probe
Overall
Risetime
Dynamic
Input RC Range
Deflection
Factor
Offset
P6008
(10X)
~4 ns
10 MO,
7.5 pF
±7.5V
20mV/cm to
2V/cm
±10V
P6009
(100X)
~3.5 ns
10Mn,
2.5 pF
±75 V
200mV/cm to
20 V/cm
±100V
P6010
(10X)
~3.5 ns
10 MQ,
10 pF
±7.5V
20mV/cm to
2 V/cm
±10V
P6011*
(IX)
=12 ns
iMn,
42 pF
± 0.75 V
2mV/cm to
200 mV/cm
±1 V
*Care must be used to avoid exceeding the ±5V max input limit
of the Type 282.
PROBE
ADAPTER ' ype
TYPE 282 PROBE ADAPTER $95
Each instrument includes: 2 — instruction manual (070-0544-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
231
T SEMICONDUCTOR TESTER
££U POWER SUPPLY
Type 292, with a test fixture, furnishes DC power and
provides sub-nanosecond environment for reading out time
and charge information about fast semiconductor diodes
and transistors. A Type 292 is used between a sub-
nanosecond pulse generator and the 50-Q input of a
sampling oscilloscope. Two variable electronically-regulated
power supplies, TEST VOLTS and BIAS CURRENT, are elec-
trically connected through a supporting platform to the test
fixture in use. Polarity of either power supply can be in-
verted from the front panel; both supplies are short-circuit
and open-circuit protected.
A general-purpose unwired plug-in transistor test fix-
ture is shipped with each Type 292. The fixture consists
of an etched-circuit board with a transistor socket mounted
in the center. Signal connections to the fixture are made
through coaxial connectors mounted on the circuit board.
A number of isolated tie points are provided on the test
fixture board to facilitate wiring of experimental circuits.
Banana-pin jacks at the rear of the Type 292 can be
used for two purposes-.
J. Monitoring either the internal TEST VOLTS or BIAS
CURRENT supply, or
2. Connecting external sources of current and voltage
to the test fixture in use.
Leads from the banana-pin jacks to the test fixture limit
externally-supplied currents to 1 ampere or less.
TEST VOLTS POWER SUPPLY supplies fixed DC voltages
of 1, 2, 5, 10 and 20 volts, accuracy within ±3% when the
variable control is fully clockwise. An uncalibrated variable
control allows the voltage of a fixed step to be divided
by any factor between 1 and at least 10. Ripple voltage
(either polarity) is equal to, or less than, 4 mV peak to peak at
any voltage, over a current range of 0-200 mA, for line volt-
ages from 105 to 125 V AC, or 230 to 250 V AC. Maximum
short-circuit current is about 400 mA on all ranges.
BIAS CURRENT POWER SUPPLY supplies fixed DC currents
in 11 calibrated steps from 0.1 mA to 200 mA, 1-2-5 sequence,
accuracy within ±3% when the variable control is fully
clockwise. An uncalibrated variable control allows the current
of a fixed step to be divided by any factor between 1 and
at least 10. Ripple current (either polarity), listed below, ap-
plies for any current from about 2 fxA to 200 mA, for line volt-
ages from 105 to 125 V AC or 230 to 250 V AC, providing the
load on the current supply limits the output voltages to less
than 20 volts.
RANGE RIPPLE
0.1 to 20 mA less than 5 ^A
50 mA less than 10 /xA
100 mA less than 20 //A
200 mA less than lOO/M
POWER REQUIREMENTS are from 105 V to 125 V or 210 V
to 250 V, 50 to 60 hertz, 30 W. Transformer taps allow opera-
tion on either range. Instrument factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS include dimensions of
4%" high by 8" wide by 10" deep. Net weight is 6V 4
pounds, approx. Shipping weight is 12 pounds, approx.
TYPE 292 SEMICONDUCTOR TESTER POWER SUPPLY $325
Each instrument includes: 1 — Adapter, 3-wire (103-0013-00); 3 — P6040
probe (010-0133-00); 1— Transistor test fixture, unwired (016-0057-00);
1— Power cord (161-0015-00); 2— Instruction Manual (070-0410-00).
OPTIONAL TEST ACCESSORIES
TRANSISTOR TEST FIXTURE, UNWIRED, Part Number 016-
0057-00 $20
016-0059-00
A special jig is available for testing axial-lead diodes.
Contact-resistance problems are minimized by the use of V-
shaped jig contacts.
An adapter will be required to mechanically support and
electrically connect the diode test jig to the Type 292 plat-
form.
Careful design of the jig and adapter provides high-quality
50-ohm coaxial connections to the diode leads.
TEST JIG ADAPTER, Part Number 016-0059-00 $25
DIODE TEST JIG, Part Number 013-0080-00 $40
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
f
232
PROGRAMMABLE PULSE GENERATOR
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETERS
• PULSE AMPLITUDE
• PULSE WIDTH
• PULSE REPETITION RATE
• REGULATED VOLTAGE
• REGULATED CURRENT
The Type R293 is a combination pulse generator and power
supply which may be used for testing time and charge param-
eters of semiconductor devices. It can also be used to measure
switching and propagation times of micro-logic circuits. The
unit is useful in a wide variety of applications which require
fast-rise and fast-fall pulses. The remote program capabilities
make the instrument useful in production line and systems
applications.
Programming is accomplished by analog resistances connected
between appropriate program leads. One program resistor per
program is required for each of the five programmable func-
tions. The programmed value for each function is linearly
related to the conductance of its respective programming
resistor. Any single or combination of programmable param-
eters can be externally programmed, with the remaining param-
eters controlled from the front panel.
As an example, programmable parameters can be remotely
controlled (automatic sequence optional) with the Type 262
Programmer. The Type 567 Readout Oscilloscope and Type
6R1A Digital Unit may be used to display the results of each
measurement and indicate whether results are within, above,
or below predetermined limits.
Pulse output is via a GR connector. Regulated voltage and
regulated current are available via a 4-pin Bendix connector.
The Type R293 includes slide-out tracks for mounting in a
standard 19" rack, and requires only 3'/ 2 " of panel height.
233
R293
PULSE OUTPUT
+ J2-volt pulse, 5 ns/ cm.
-12-volt pulse, 50 ns /cm.
RISETIME
<1 ns, at maximum pulse amplitude.
FALLTIME
<1 ns, at maximum pulse amplitude, >20-ns pulse width.
<2ns, at maximum pulse amplitude, 5 to 20 ns pulse width.
AMPLITUDE
6 V ±3% to 12 V ±3%, continuously variable. Accuracy*
when programmed within ±3% of programmed value.
POLARITY
Positive or negative.
WIDTH
<2 ns to > 250 ns, continuously variable. Accuracy* when
programmed within ± (3% of programmed value +3 ns).
<100-ps width jitter.
*Stated program accuracy is with I % program resistor. Accu-
racy can be improved by calibrating the instrument for remote
programming rather than for front-panel operation.
REPETITION RATE
<10kHz to 100 kHz, -10% +0%. Accuracy* when pro-
grammed within ±10% of programmed value.
PRESHOOT
<1%.
LEADING EDGE CHARACTERISTICS (first 10 ns)
Overshoot <3%; rounding <5%; ringing <3%.
DROOP
TRAILING-EDGE CHARACTERISTICS (last 15 ns)
Rounding <5%; ringing <10%; overshoot ±5%; storage
<5%.
FLAT-TOP ABERRATIONS
<2% (after first 10 ns and before last 15 ns).
PRETRIGGER PULSE
> + 'A V into 50 fi and > + 2V into open circuit, occurs
approximately 200 ns before leading edge of main pulse.
100-ps maximum jitter between pretrigger and leading edge
of main pulse.
EXTERNAL TRIGGER REQUIREMENT
>2-V ; DC to 100 kHz; <l-/xs risetime; 200 V DC maximum.
POWER SUPPLY
REGULATED CURRENT SUPPLY
300 /J.A to 300 mA (continuously variable) at up to 20 V,
positive or negative polarity. Accuracy* within ± (3% of
dial reading) + 50 /xA, or ± (3% of programmed value)
+50 fiA. ±1% maximum change with line change from
93.5 V to 135 V. Ripple <0.5% or 50 M A, whichever is
greater. Overshoot <0.5% of change in programmed cur-
rent.
REGULATED VOLTAGE SUPPLY
to ±50 V (continuously variable) at up to 200 mA. Accu-
racy* within ± (2% of dial reading) +25 mV, or ± (3% of
programmed value) +25 mV. ±1% maximum change with
line change from 93.5 V to 135 V. Ripple <0.05% or 5 mV,
whichever is greater. Overshoot <5% of change in pro-
grammed voltage.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
POWER REQUIREMENTS
93.5 V to 135 V or 187 V to 270 V, 50 to 400 Hz. Low or high
range selected by rear-panel switch. Approx 65 watts maxi-
mum power consumption.
MECHANICAL
Net weight is 20'/ 2 pounds. Shipping weight is approx 56
pounds. Dimensions are 3V 2 " high by 19" wide by 18" deep.
TYPE R293 PULSE GENERATOR AND POWER SUPPLY
$1000
Each instrument includes: 1 — 5-ns 50-ft GR cable (017-0502-00); 1 —
4-pin power supply output connector (131-0268-001; 1 — 24-pin remote
program connector (131 -0325-00); 1 — set mounting tracks (351-0084-00);
mounting hardware; 1 — 3-conductor power cord (161-0010-00); 1 3
to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0433-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
234
INDICATOR UNIT Type
VERTICAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Bandwidth — DC to 500 kHz.
Deflection Factor —
0.05 V/div to 50 V/div.
4 calibrated steps.
Continuously variable between steps, and to approxi-
mately 500 V/div.
Input RC is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 40 pF.
Maximum Input Voltage — 600 V (DC plus peak AC).
HORIZONTAL-DEFLECTION SYSTEM
Waveforms Required —
Positive or negative-going sawtooth, 110 to 1 50 V
excursion within the limits of — 95 V to +170V.
Gate, 45 to 75 V positive same duration as the saw-
tooth.
Bandwidth — DC to 1 00 kHz.
POWER REQUIREMENTS-
DC Power
+ 300 V at 20 mA (unregulated).
+ 225 V at 35 mA (regulated).
— 170 V at 23 mA (regulated).
AC Power
6.3 V at 3.5 A.
The Type 360 Indicator Unit in combination with the Type
160-Series Instruments becomes an integral building block in
a complex sequence control and monitoring system.
The compact indicator contains a flat-faced, 3-inch cathode-
ray tube, accelerating-voltage supply, horizontal amplifier,
vertical amplifier and a calibrated vertical attenuator, among
other features. It is designed to receive its sweep and unblank-
ing voltages from a Type 162 Waveform Generator.
Any source of proper voltage and waveforms can power the
indicator. The Type 160A Power Supply is recommended for
applications that require a compact rack-mounted combination.
In system use, up to 5 Type 360 Indicator Units can operate
from a single Type 160A Power Supply.
OTHER CHARACTERISTICS
DC-COUPLED UNBLANKING
The external unblanking waveform, DC-coupled to the grid of
the CRT, assures uniform bias for all sweep speeds, and
repetition rates at any setting of the intensity control.
ILLUMINATED GRATICULE
Edge-lighting of the graticule is adjusted by the SCALE ILLUM
control. Display area of the graticule is marked in eight
vertical and ten horizontal one-fourth inch major divisions.
Centerlines are further marked in five minor divisions per
major division.
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
A flat-faced, 3-inch cathode-ray tube provides a bright trace.
Accelerating potential is 1 .5 kV. A P2 phosphor is normally
supplied.
MOUNTING
The Type 360 Indicator Unit and up to 3 Type 160 Series
Instruments can be secured quickly and easily to a Mounting
Frame which bolts directly to a standard 19" rack.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 12y 4 " high by 4%" wide by 14" deep. Net
weight is 10 pounds. Shipping weight is 17 pounds, approx.
TYPE 360 INDICATOR $270
Each instrument includes: 1— P6006 probe (010-0125-00]; 1— inter-unit
power cable (012-0016-00]; 1— smoke gray filter (378-0550-00]; 1— set
mounting hardware; 1 — instruction manual (070-0220-00).
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
235
Type
m
AMPLIFIER
AMPLIFIER GAIN
Accurately set at 100.
INPUT ATTENUATOR
Attenuates input signal by a factor of IX through 500X
in 9 calibrated steps.
GAIN STABILITY
± 1 % over 24-hour period.
BANDWIDTH
5 Hz to 17 MHz (3-dB down) at IX, 2X, 5X, and 10X
attenuator settings.
RISETIME
21 ns.
PROBE POWER
Heater supply — 6.3 V DC, 0.2 A.
Plate supply — 120 V DC, 10 m/ regulated.
The Type 1121 Wide-Band Amplifier is a cascaded-input,
low-noise amplifier designed with Tektronix precision, quality,
and style. It increases the amplitude of low-level wideband
signals; thus increases the sensitivity of the oscilloscope or
other associated instrument with which it is operated.
The output, terminated in 93-ohm coaxial cable, allows sep-
aration of at least 100 feet between the Type 1121 and asso-
ciated instrument without causing noticeable deterioration of
the response. Output voltage of ±1 volt guarantees linear
amplification of any input signal up to ±10 mV at full gain.
Internal noise is no more than 50-/xV peak to peak referred to
the input with the input grounded and the INPUT ATTENUATOR
control in the IX position. As in all Tektronix instruments, opti-
mum response is a prime consideration. Risetime is approxi-
mately 21 ns, and bandwidth extends from 5 Hz to over 17 MHz
with the INPUT ATTENUATOR control in the IX, 2X, 5X, or
10X positions.
Power is available at the front panel for a cathode-follower
probe. For applications requiring both high impedance input
and high gain or where the attenuation of an RC probe would
be objectionable, a Tektronix P170CF cathode-follower probe
can be used.
The Type 1121 has a turret-type step attenuator that permits
attenuation of the input level to a factor of 500X in nine cali-
brated steps. Unique design of the attenuator allows the series
and shunt compensations to be conveniently set without remov-
ing the instrument side panels. Hum pickup at the input is
minimized by the inherently short internal leads. These leads are
of the same length in all positions of the attenuator, thus lower,
more stable values of circuit capacitance are realized. Input RC
is 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 22 pF at all step-
attenuator positions. This feature enables the use of a probe
with minimum circuit loading on the point measured.
Its compactness, reliability, and low noise level adapt the
versatile Type 1121 to almost any application involving wide-
band amplification.
CHARACTERISTICS
INPUT RC
Direct, 1 megohm paralleled by approximately 22 pF.
INTERNAL NOISE
Internally generated noise is equivalent to an input signal
of 50-^.V, peak to peak, maximum, with the INPUT ATTEN-
UATOR at IX.
GAIN STABILITY
After initial warmup, and under all conditions of line voltage £
between 105 and 125 V or 210 and 250 V, gain stability of
the Type 1121 is ±1% over a 24-hour period.
236
1121
INPUT ATTENUATION
The turret-type step attenuator permits accurate attenuation
of the input level from a net gain factor of 100X to 0.2X in
nine calibrated steps: IX, 2X, 5X, 10X, 20X, 50X, 100X, 200X,
and 500X. Attenuator accuracy is ±3%.
BANDWIDTH
With the INPUT ATTENUATOR control in the IX, 2X, 5X, or
10X positions, transient response is clean over a band extend-
ing from 5 Hz to 17 MHz (at — 3dB). Bandwidth for the
remaining attenuator positions are as follows: 20X — 5 Hz
to 16.5 MHz, 50X — 5 Hz to 16.0 MHz, 100X — 5 Hz to 15.5
MHz, 200X — 5 Hz to 14.0 MHz, and 500X — 5 Hz to 12.0
MHz.
POWER PROBE
The front-panel PROBE POWER socket provides 0.2 A DC at
6.3 V for the heater supply and 10 mA regulated DC at 120 V
for the plate supply of a cathode-follower probe. The Tek-
tronix P170CF cathode-follower probe is ideally suited for
use with Type 1121 Amplifier.
When a P170CF cathode-follower probe is used with a
Type 1121 Amplifier ahead of a Type 540A or 540B-Series
Oscilloscope and a Type L Plug-In Unit set at 0.05 V/cm,
overall sensitivity of the combination is 1 mV/cm. Bandwidth
will be 5 Hz to 16 MHz. At this sensitivity, noise inherent in
the Type 1121 will appear as 0.1 cm of deflection. With the
L Unit set at 0.005 V/cm, overall sensitivity is 0.1 mV/cm.
Bandwidth will be 5 Hz to 15 MHz and inherent noise will
appear as 1 cm of deflection. Input RC of the P170CF probe
is 12 megohm paralleled by 5 pF.
Other passive probes are available. Please refer to the
catalog Accessory pages.
OUTPUT VOLTAGE
Capable of a ±1 V swing in a terminated 93-ohm coaxial
cable, the Type 1121 reproduces any input signal up to
±10 mV at full gain. The output, via cathode followers,
permits up to 100-foot separation between the amplifier and
associated instrument without noticeable waveform distortion.
OUTPUT CONNECTION
Output of the Type 1121 is connected to the associated instru-
ment via a 93-ohm coaxial cable and 93-ohm termination.
The terminated end of the cable must be connected to the
associated instrument for minimum waveform distortion. If
additional cable length is required, insert a section of RG62U
(93-ohm) cable between the Type 1121 OUTPUT and the
cable supplied with the amplifier.
REGULATED POWER SUPPLIES
The Type 1121 embodies exceptionally stable power-supply
voltage regulation. Transistor-regulated heater circuits limit
the heater-supply ripple components to less than 4 mV. Elec-
tronically-regulated plate circuits insure stable operation over
line fluctuations between 105 to 125 V or 210 to 250 V.
POWER REQUIREMENT
105 V to 125 V or 210 V to 250 V, 50 to 60 Hz, 150 watts.
Unit factory wired for 117 V.
MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Dimensions are 10 3 /," high by 7" wide by 15 7 / 8 " deep. Net
weight is 1 8V 2 pounds. Shipping weight is 28 pounds, approx.
TYPE 1121 AMPLIFIER $465
Each instrument includes: 1—93-12 termination, BNC (011-0056-00);
1— 93-S2 cable, BNC [012-0075-00); 1— 3-conductor power cord (161-
0010-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-0013-00); 2 — instruction manual
1070-0204-00).
ACCESSORIES
P170CF CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE
The probe alone has an attenuation ratio of 2X. With the
3 included attenuator heads, attenuation is variable from
4X to 4000X. Probe power is obtained directly from the Type
1121 Amplifier. When used with the Type 1121, a 170-ohm
termination is required (see below).
P170CF CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE (010-0101-00) .. $99.50
170-OHM UHF TERMINATION (011-0048-00) $15.00
COAXIAL OUTPUT CABLE
For applications requiring variable attenuation between steps,
a 93-ohm, 42" coaxial output cable (with UHF connectors)
that terminates in a variable attenuator can be used.
OUTPUT CABLE (012-0004-00) $13.50
BNC TO UHF ADAPTER
This adapter makes the above accessories with UHF con-
nectors compatible with the Type 1121 Amplifier.
BNC MALE ADAPTER (103-0032-00) $1 .70
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
237
ilTED-DEMAND INSTRUMENT
The instruments described on this page are in limited
demand, but represent a desirable choice in a few special-
ized cases. As such, they remain available for you who
still have a need for them. Consult your Tektronix Field
Engineer for information on other instruments in the Tek-
tronix product line that generally give greater value in
application areas presently filled by these instruments.
TYPE 507 OSCILLOSCOPE
The Tektronix Type 507 is a specialized oscilloscope,
designed primarily for high-voltage surge testing of power
transformers, high-voltage insulators, lightning arrestors, etc.
Careful design of circuitry grounding points ensures minimum
sensitivity to extraneous disturbances caused by large voltage
transients often introduced info the grounding system.
TYPE 507 OSCILLOSCOPE $2900
TYPE 570 CHARACTERISTIC-CURVE TRACER
The Type 570 Characteristic-Curve Tracer presents an
accurate graphic analysis of electron-tube characteristics
under almost any conceivable operating conditions. The
cathode-ray tube display consists of a family of curves with
from four to twelve curves per family. The display is accu-
rately calibrated, with current and voltage readings made
directly from the CRT screen. All operating parameters are
set at the front panel with calibrated controls. A grid-step
generator provides stepping from curve to curve. Bias volt-
age between each step is selected by a calibrated control.
TYPE 570 CURVE TRACER $1 100
TYPE 123 PREAMPLIFIER
The Type 123 is a compact, battery-operated amplifier for
use in applications where a gain of 100 without AC hum is
desired. Bandwidth is within 3 dB from 3 Hz to 25 kHz. Maxi-
mum input signal for linear amplification is 0.1 V, peak to peak.
Input resistance is lOMfi and effective output impedance is
31 kfi. The unit is powered by internal miniature batteries.
TYPE 1 23 PREAMPLIFIER $75
TYPE 261 COAXIAL SWITCH
The Type 261 is designed primarily for use as part of an
automated electronic-testing system, such as Types 567/6R1A/
262. Type 261 will switch signal offset voltages, trigger signals,
loads, attenuators, signal delays, and provide ground references
for subnanosecond measurements in a 50-ohm environment.
Switching functions are performed by eight single-pole double-
throw mercury wetted relays. Signal connections are made
with 50-ohm coaxial cables with General Radio Type 874
connectors. The Type 261 is rack-mount in configuration, requi-
ring only 5'/ 4 inches of rack height.
TYPE 261 COAXIAL SWITCH $700
TYPE 290 TRANSISTOR SWITCHING-TIME TESTER
The Type 290 permits DC-coupled pulse-response characteris-
tics of fast-switching transistors to be observed and measured
on Tektronix oscilloscopes. When driven by a fast-rise pulse
generator and monitored on a fast-rise sampling oscilloscope,
Type 290 becomes an integral part of a transistor testing system
with an overall risetime of less than 1 ns. An Input Monitor
connector permits comparison of the input pulse and the trans-
istor collector signal on a dual-trace oscilloscope.
TYPE 290 TRANSISTOR SWITCHING-TIME TESTER . $290
TYPE 291 DIODE SWITCHING-TIME TESTER
The Type 291 with associated Diode Test Jig and Adapter
in conjunction with a fast-rise pulse generator (such as Type
109) and a fast-rise oscilloscope, permits measurement of fast-
switching diode characteristics. Fast-rise resolution of reverse-
recovery measurements depend primarily on the characteristics
of the pulse generator and oscilloscope used.
TYPE 291 DIODE SWITCHING-TIME TESTER POWER
SUPPLY $185
DIODE TEST JIG (Part Number 013-0080-00) 40
ADAPTER (Part Number 017-0075-00) 55
TYPE R TRANSISTOR-RISETIME UNIT
Type R Plug-In Unit can be used in all Tektronix Type 530,
540, 550, and 580* Series Oscilloscopes. It supplies a fast-
rising pulse and the required supply and bias voltages for
measurement of transistor rise, fall, delay, and storage times.
Risetime of the pulse supplied by the Type R is less than 5 ns,
therefore measurement limitations depend mainly on the rise-
time of the oscilloscope used (to 12 ns with Type 540, 550,
and 580* Series Oscilloscopes).
TYPE R PLUG-IN UNIT $325
TYPE S DIODE RECOVERY UNIT
The Type S Plug-In Unit permits display of semiconductor-
diode switching characteristics on a Tektronix Type 530, 540,
550, or 580* Series Oscilloscope. Risetime of the overall meas-
urement depends on the oscilloscope used. Calibrated test
parameters assure accuracy in measurements of carrier recom-
bination, stored charge, capacitance, and resistance.
TYPE S DIODE RECOVERY UNIT $260
TYPE Z DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR UNIT
Type Z Plug-In Unit can be used in all Tektronix Type 530,
540, 550, and 580* Series Oscilloscopes.
The Type Z Plug-In Unit is designed to improve the accuracy
of oscilloscope voltage measurements. The unit has three
modes of operation: (1) conventional preamplifier, (2) differen-
tial-input preamplifier, (3) calibrated differential comparator.
Resolution to 0.005% is attainable. In the differential-compara-
tor mode of operation, accurate DC comparison voltages are
added differentially to the input waveform via the slide-back
technique, providing a vertical scale of up to ±2000 cm.
TYPE Z PLUG-IN UNIT $525
TYPE 500 SERIES SCOPE-MOBILE® CARTS
The Type 500A (without plug-in carrier) and the Type 500/
53A (with plug-in carrier factory installed) Scope-Mobile®
Carts comprise the Type 500 Series. Both carts have front
wheel parking brakes. These carts are designed for supporting
a Tektronix Oscilloscope, and provide portability.
TYPE 500A (without plug-in carrier) $ 99.50
TYPE 500/53A (with plug-in carrier) 1 10.00
PLUG-IN CARRIER (converts 500A to 500/53A) (Part Number
014-0005-00) 10.50
Special trays provide a positioning mount for smaller
Tektronix Oscilloscopes.
TRAY FOR TYPE 502A (Part Number 436-0019-00) $5.00
TRAY FOR TYPES 503, 504, 51 5A, 516, 561 A, 564 (Part
Number 436-0058-00) $5.00
*A Type 81 Adapter is required.
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
238
-
30 Cameras
■t3*
LIFT-ON MOUNTING AND SWING-AWAY HINGING
EASILY-ACCESSIBLE CONTROLS
COMFORTABLE BINOCULAR VIEWING, C-12 & C-27
ROTATING AND SLIDING BACK, C-12 & C-27
VARIABLE MAGNIFICATION, C-30
239
Camera Lenses
Seven interchangeable lenses are available for
C-12 and C-27 Cameras with the Polaroid 1 Land
or Graflok 2 Film Backs. The wide range of object-
to-image ratios and maximum apertures permits
selection of the lens which is best for your appli-
cation.
Lens optics are designed to meet the strict require-
ments of precision oscillography: flat field, low
distortion, and high resolution even at maximum
aperture openings.
Lenses are set for precise object-to-image ratios
in prefocused mounts, for easy interchange in
camera.
* Writing Rate Factor (WRF) is an arbitrary
indication of the relative light-gathering capability
of the various lenses. A WRF of 4 indicates four
times as much light-gathering ability as a WRF
of 1.
PRECISE FULL-SIZE IMAGE & HIGH WRITING RATE
— f/1.4, 1:1 object-to-image ratio ... for precise full-
size records . . . measurements can be scaled directly
off photograph with maximum resolution . . . WRF* of 7.
GENERAL PURPOSE— f/ 1.9, 1:0.85 object-
to-image ratio . . . image brightness suf-
ficient for most applications. When photo-
graphing 8 x 10 cm graticules or 10x10 di-
vision graticules, such as used on Tektronix
Types 570, 575, and 536, we recommend
use of the f/1.9, 1:0.85 lens to provide the
largest size image that will still fall within
the maximum recording area of 3% x 4V 4
size Polaroid film WRF* of 4
GENERAL PURPOSE— f/1.9, 1:0.9 object-
to-image ratio . . . image brightness suf-
ficient for most applications . . . records up
to 8xl0-cm graticule on 3 1 /,, x 4'/ 4 film with
maximum resolution . . . WRF* of 4.
Registered Trade-Mark Polaroid Corporation
Registered Trade-Mark Graflex, Inc.
240
Camera Lenses
Photographs taken under iden-
tical conditions illustrate rela-
tive writing-rate capabilities of
the 1/1.9 and f/1.3 lenses.
HIGH WRITING RATE— f/ 1.9, 1:0.5 object-to-
image ratio ... for high writing rate applications
#as single-shot photography of fast transients
. recommended for use with Tektronix Type
and 580-Series Oscilloscopes . . . WRF* of 6.
ULTRA-HIGH WRITING RATE— f/1.3, 1:0.5
object-to-image ratio ... for applications where
writing rate is the prime consideration . . . advances
the state of the art and in combination with the
C-27 Main Frame records higher-speed phenomena
than before . . . WRF* of 12.
■■■■■■■■■I
HumiKililil
■MllllllillllllIMM
■■MIIUHUNMI
=■■■■■■■■■
■■■MisnnnM
■RMMilMHM
■IHnnninun
!■■■■■■■!■
Photographs on these two
pages reproduced in the actu-
al size of the print.
ISIS
& LENS ECONOMY— f/4.5, 1:0.7 object-
tolTfiage ratio ... for economy of price and
efficient use of film where high writing rate is not
required . . . records 3 4xl0-cm or 2 6xl0-cm
graticule on 3'/ 4 x 4'/ 4 film . . . WRF* of 1.
FILM ECONOMY & MEDIUM WRITING RATE
— f/1.9, 1:0.7 object-to-image ratio . . . efficient
use of film . . . WRF* of 5.
241
Camera Backs & Film
Tektronix C-l 2 and C-27 Cameras are designed for maximum flexibility and easy interchange of components. A
complete camera consists of an appropriate mounting bezel, main frame assembly, lens, rear frame, rotating slide adapt-
er, and Graflok or Polaroid Land film back. Standard Camera Assemblies are described on the following pages. Varia-
tions of the standard cameras (using interchangeable lenses and backs and incorporating a shutter actuator with built-
in power supply) are also available as custom cameras. Each component part can be ordered separately for further versa-
tility or for addition to a present Tektronix Trace-Recording Camera. Your nearest Tektronix Field Office or Representative
is ready to assist you in your trace-recording needs.
CAMERA BACKS AND FILM
Four different backs are available for Tektronix Trace-Record-
ing Cameras: Polaroid 3'/ 4 x 4'/ 4 Pack Film and Roll Film Backs,
and Graflok 4x5 and 2'/ 4 x 3% Backs. The choice of a Camera
Back will depend primarily on (1) the intended use for the pho-
tograph, (2) how quickly you want the finished photograph, (3)
how large an area you wish to photograph, (4) the magnifica-
tion factor of the particular lens used, and (5) the size of the
positive or negative desired. If you want to obtain a negative
from which a number of prints can be made, either Type 55
P/N film (which comes in Polaroid Land 4x5, only) or conven-
tional film is quite satisfactory.
With either Polaroid Land or conventional films, the exposable
area of the film used by the selected back must be at least
as large as the image from the lens. Size will depend on the
object-to-image ratio of the camera lens and or the size of the
oscilloscope display. For example, the roll film back for 120
or 620 film would probably not be used with a 1:0.9 lens and a
10-cm wide oscilloscope display. This is because the image of
the display is 9 centimeters wide and the exposable area (long
dimension) of the film is only about 8.25 centimeters. Thus at
least 7.5 mm would be cut off of the photograph. The film size
should be at least 5 mm larger than the size of the image to
allow for normal tolerances in the construction of the Camera
Backs and for the position of the film in the back.
Available film types and film speed are other important
considerations in choosing a back, especially where single-
shot transients must be recorded. Polaroid Type 47 and Type
107 (roll film and pack film, respectively) each have an ASA
equivalent exposure index of 3000. Polaroid Type 410 roll
film is especially suited for high-speed photography. It has an
ASA equivalent of 10,000. Each film type has 8 exposures, and
develops in 10 seconds. Roll-film versions develop inside the
film back; pack film develops outside.
Polaroid films can also be used in a Polaroid 4x5 film holder
with the 4x5 Graflok Back. This combination, used with Type
57 film (3000 speed), a 1:1 lens, and a C-27 Main Frame will
give full-size records of graticule areas as large as 8x10 cm.
A Standard C-27 Camera (1:0.85 lens) equipped in the same
way will make a complete record of a 10 x 10 cm graticule.
Conventional cut film and 120 roll film can be used with
either the 4 x 5 or 2'/ 4 x 3V 4 Graflok Back and the proper holder
or adapter. A number of film types, manufactured by Eastman
Kodak, Agfa, Ansco, and others, are available in both forms, ^""^
at ASA speeds of from 64 to 1250.
A detailed list of film types and characteristics of these and
other films not mentioned here can be obtained from the
respective manufacturer.
242
'
C-27 Camera
The C-27 Standard Camera combines general-purpose utility
and performance in a design compact enough for multiple
stacking on 7" Rack-Mount Oscilloscopes.
Direct binocular viewing is featured. For stacking, the view-
ing tunnel is removed and the carrying handle folded out of
the way. The camera frame can be rotated 90° or 180° to
view from the top, bottom, or either side. The f/1.9 — 1:0.85
lens supplied with the Standard C-27 offers an ideal compro-
mise of writing rate and image size (8xlO-cm on 3 } / 4 x 4'/ 4
film or 10 x 10-cm coverage on 4 x 5 film) in a moderately -priced
camera.
The Polaroid Land Pack-Film Back offers convenient loading
and picture development outside the camera. Dimensions over-
all are 13 7 /3i" high (only 8" with viewing tunnel removed} by
7'/ 2 " vv/'de by 73"/ 3 /' long (only 12" with viewing tunnel
removed). Net weight is 10 pounds. Shipping weight is approx-
imately 14 pounds.
C-27 CAMERA $420
Each camera includes: 1 — cable release (122-0586-00), 1 — focus plate
(387-0893-00], 2— instruction manual (070-0383-01).
ROLL-FILM CAMERA identical to the Standard C-27, except a
Polaroid Roll-Film Back is substituted for the Pack-Film Back.
C-27-R CAMERA $420
ELECTRICALLY-ACTUATED* CAMERA identical to the Standard
C-27, but with a shutter actuator and built-in power supply.
(See page 247.)
C-27-S CAMERA $575
ETECTRICALLY-ACTUATED* CAMERA with Roll-Film Back com-
bines features of the C-27-R and C-27-S, above.
C-27-RS CAMERA $575
All cameras are sold less mounting bezel; order from page 248.
cus
LENS
(Writing rate factor compared to
Standard f/1.9, 1:0.85 lens)
TOM C-27 CAMERAS
SHUTTER ACTUATOR
and BUILT-IN
POWER SUPPLY*
POLAROID
FILM BACK
ORDER
NUMBER
PRICE
FILM ECONOMY & MEDIUM WRF— f/1.9, 1:0.7
Records two 6 x 10-cm, three 4 x 10-cm or one 10 x
10cm graticule on 3%x4% film. Writing rate factor
1.25X Standard Lens.
No
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-27-547
C-27-547 R
$440
440
Yes
Pack Film C-27-547 S
Roll Film C-27-547 RS
595
595
GENERAL-PURPOSE— f/1.9, 1:0.9
Records an 8 x 10-cm graticule on 3V4x4y 4 film.
Writing rate factor same as Standard Lens.
No
Pack Film C-27-548
Roll Film C-27-548 R
420
420
Yes
Pack Film C-27-548 S
Roll Film C-27-548 RS
575
575
HIGH WRITING RATE— f/1.9, 1:0.5
Records fast-writing displays such as single-shot tran-
sients. Writing rate factor 1.5X Standard Lens.
No
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-27-549
C-27-549 R
460
460
Yes
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-27-549 S
C-27-549 RS
615
615
FILM & LENS ECONOMY— f/4.5, 1:0.7
Records two 6 x 10-cm or three 4 x 10-cm graticules
on each film. Writing rate factor 0.25X Standard Lens.
No
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-27-550
C-27-550 R
365
365
PRECISE FULL-SIZE IMAGE & HIGH WRITING RATE
— f/1.4, 1:1. Records full-size image of 10 x 10-cm grati-
No
Pack Film C-27-608
Roll Film C-27-608 R
535
535
cule (on 4x5 film with Graflok Back). Writing rate
factor 1.75X Standard Lens.
Yes
Pack Film ] C-27-608 S
Roll Film C-27-608 RS
690
690
ULTRA-HIGH WRITING RATE— f/ 1.3, 1:0.5
Records two 6 x 10-cm graticules on each film. Writ-
ing rate factor 3X Standard Lens.
No
Pack Film C-27-662
Roll Film C-27-662 R
585
585
Yes
Pack Film C-27-662 S
Roll Film C-27-662 RS
740
740
Any C-27 Standard or Custom Trace-Recording Camerc
and deduct $80 from the price. 4x5 and 2%x3% C
can be ordered less ba
>raflok Backs and accessc
ck. Use suffix
sries are shown
G' after the Orde
on page 249.
r Number
243
C-12 Camera
The C-/2 Standard Camera is ideally suited for general-
purpose trace recording. A beam-splitting mirror provides the
operator with an on-axis binocular view of the CRT display,
and also allows use of the Projected Graticule accessory (see
next page). The f/l.9 — 7.0.9 lens supplied with the Standard
C-12 offers the ideal compromise of writing rate and image
size (up to 8 x Wcm coverage] in a moderately-priced camera.
The Polaroid Land Pack-Film Back offers convenient loading and
picture development outside the camera. Dimensions overall
75%" high by 7'//' wide by 77'//' long. Net weight is 72%
pounds. Shipping weight is approximately 75 pounds.
C-12 CAMERA $450
Each camera includes: 1 — cable release (122-0586-00), 1 — focus plate
(387-0893-00), 2— instruction manual (070-0383-01 1.
ROLL-FILM CAMERA identical to the Standard C-12, except
a Polaroid Roll-Film Back is substituted for the Pack-Film Back.
C-12-R CAMERA $450
ELECTRICALLY-ACTUATED* CAMERA identical to the Standard
C-12, but with a shutter actuator and built-in power supply.
C-12-S CAMERA $605
ELECTRICALLY-ACTUATED* CAMERA with Roll-Film Back com-
bines features of the C-12-R and C-12-S, above.
C-1 2-RS CAMERA $605
All cameras are sold less mounting bezel; order from page 248.
LENS
(Writing rate factor compared
to Standard f/1.9, 1:0.9 lens)
SHUTTER ACTUATOR
and BUILT-IN
POWER SUPPLY*
POLAROID
FILM BACK
ORDER
NUMBER
PRICE
FILM ECONOMY & MEDIUM WRF— f/1.9, 1:0.7
Records two 6 x 10-cm or three 4x10-cm graticules
on each film. Writing rate factor 1 .25X Standard
Lens.
No
Yes
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-547
C-1 2-547 R
$470
470
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-547 S
C-1 2-547 RS
625
625
HIGH WRITING RATE— f/1.9, 1:0.5
Records fast-writing displays such as single-shot
transients. Writing rate factor 1.5X Standard Lens.
No
Yes
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-549
C-1 2-549 R
490
490
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-549 S
C-1 2-549 RS
645
645
FILM & LENS ECONOMY— f/4.5, 1:0.7
Records two 6xl0-cm or three 4xl0-cm graticules
on each film. Writing rate factor 0.25X Standard
Lens.
No
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-550
C-1 2-550 R
395
395
PRECISE FULL-SIZE IMAGE & HIGH WRITING
RATE— f/ 1.4, 1:1 Records full-size image of 8x10-
cm graticule (on 4x5 film with Graflok Back). Writ-
ing rate factor 1 .75X Standard Lens.
No
Yes
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-608
C-1 2-608 R
565
565
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-608 S
C-1 2-608 RS
720
720
ULTRA-HIGH WRITING RATE— f/ 1.3, 1:0.5
Where writing rate is prime consideration Records
two 6x 10-cm graticules on each film. Writing rate
factor 3X Standard Lens.
No
Yes
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-662
C-1 2-662 R
615
615
Pack Film C-1 2-662 S
Roll Film C-1 2-662 RS
770
770
GENERAL-PURPOSE— f/1.9, 1:0.85
Complete 8 x 10-cm graticule is always positioned
within exposable area of 3'/ 4 x4 , / 4 film. Writing
rate factor same as Standard C-12.
No
Yes
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-692
C-1 2-692 R
450
450
Pack Film
Roll Film
C-1 2-692 S
C-1 2-692 RS
605
605
•
Any C-12 Standard or Custom Trace-Recording Camera can be ordered less back. Use suffix 'G' after the Order Number and
deduct $80 from the price. 4x5 and 2'/ 4 x 3% Graflok Backs and accessories are shown on page 249.
•Power supplies are normally wired tor 115V. For 230 V add suffix B' to the Order Number. Price for either is the same.
244
Projected Graticule for the c-12 camera
The Projected Graticule eliminates parallax, one of the most
common problems in viewing and photographing waveforms
on an external graticule.
Parallax is the apparent displacement of the trace in relation
to the graticule. Error is introduced since the graticule and CRT
phosphor are on different planes.
To eliminate parallax, a virtual image of the graticule is
presented at the CRT phosphor plane, as viewed by the operator
and as projected to the camera film plane.
Special graticules, reference waveforms, or any image that
can be recorded on a film transparency, can be superimposed
on the CRT display. The graticule is held in a slide assembly
and is easily slipped in and out of the Projected Graticule case,
making possible rapid change of graticules. The included slide
assembly has a clear window. Assemblies can be obtained (see
below) in several colors to match or contrast the projection with
the CRT phosphor.
The projected graticule provides up to an 8xl0-cm projec-
tion, a portion of which can be used for write-in data.
The light source is indexed in approx '/ 2 f stop increments for
use as a film exposure guide. This source can also be used
for precise prefogging of film for increased sensitivity in fast
writing-rate applications.
Operates on 90 to 130 V, or 180 to 260 V, 50 to 440 Hz.
Although the Projected Graticule case is small (it adds only
2 1 /," to camera height), clearance problems exist with the
Type 81 Adapter and a few plug-in unit/probe combinations.
If in doubt about compatibility, please consult your Tektronix
Field Office or Representative.
PROJECTED GRATICULE for 115 volts (016-0204-00) .... $160
PROJECTED GRATICULE for 230 volts (016-0234-00) .... $160
Includes: 1— power cord (161-0015-00); 1—3 to 2-wire adapter (103-
0013-00); 1 — graticule, 4x10 cm with write-in area and short minor
lines (331-0117-00); 1 — graticule, 6xl0-cm with write-in area and
short minor lines (331-0111-00); 1 — graticule, 8 x 10 cm without write-in
area, but with full minor lines (331-0119-00); 1 — graticule mask, 4x
10cm (331-0118-00); 1— graticule mask, 6 x 10 cm (331-0116-00); 1 —
instruction manual (070-0383-01).
GRATICULE SLIDE ASSEMBLIES $3 each
Clear Window
122-0659-00
Blue Window
122-0667-00
Green Window
122-0668-00
Amber Window
122-0669-00
OPTIONAL GRATICULES and MASKS $0.85 each
. . ■''.:.'
m
: : - ■ - . : . ' '
1 :"
. . .
X ::::;:::'■;::;
:. :
.. ■;, ■ ■;■ ., .: ■ ;■ ■■"'■■ : ■
: : ■ ■ '■ :;: - v. ■■■■■ :
331
-0
23-00
I
■
■
■
■
■
■
■
■■
331-0137-00
■■■■■■■■■■
33
-0131-00
■
331-0117-00
31-0130-00
h
■
■
■■■■■■■
- . • -"-
■
i
■
mis:
331-0124-00
■■.il.ll.ll
. ■ - .
l W:2K:. :J:.. '■".&
iiiiisiini
331-0120-00
Hi
:. ' ■ : '.':::":
Illllllllllll
. ■■■ ■
331-0111-00
331-0161-01
245
C-30 Camera
The C-30 is a compact, light weight camera which mounts
directly to Tektronix Type 422 and 453 Oscilloscopes. Optional
bezels are available for other oscilloscopes.
f STOPS
1.9, 2.8, 4, 5.6, 8, 11 and 16.
SHUTTER SPEEDS
T and B and seven shutter speeds from 1 second to 1/50
second.
MAGNIFICATION
Variable in indexed steps of 1.5, 1.4, 1.3, 1.2, 1.1, 1.0, 0.9,
0.85, 0.8 and 0.7. At 1:0.7 magnification, an 8xl0-cm or
lOxlO-div graticule can be recorded in its entirety.
LENS
57-mm, f/1.9 oscilloscope recording lens. Custom designed
for high performance, comparable to lenses used with other
Tektronix cameras. Writing rate factor (at 1:0.7 mag) equal
to C-12 standard f/1.9 1:0.9 lens.
FILM TYPE
Accepts Polaroid Type 107 film (3000 speed). Film develops
outside camera in about 10 seconds.
CONSTRUCTION
Attaches directly to Type 422 and 453 Oscilloscopes; no bezel
needed. Can be hinged from oscilloscope to left or right
side. Accepts Tektronix Shutter Actuator. Rear casting reces-
sed for carrying. Net weight is 4 3 / 4 pounds. Shipping weight
is approx 9 pounds.
C-30 CAMERA $390
Each camera includes: 1 — light seal for Type 422 Oscilloscope [354-
0279-00): 1— light seal for Type 453 Oscilloscope (354-0280-00): 1— / *
focus plate (387-0893-00): 2— instruction manual (070-0527-00). ^/
The Type 422 with the Tektronix C-30 Camera.
OPTIONAL BEZELS $15 each
OSCILLOSCOPE TYPE
PART NUMBER
'321, 321 A
01 6-0242-00
Tektronix Oscilloscopes with 5" round
CRT (not 519).
016-0243-00
Tektronix 560-Series with rectangular 016-0244-00
CRT, 529 and RM529.
SHUTTER ACTUATOR MOUNT
f STOP CONTROL
SHUTTER SPEED CONTROL
FOCUS LOCK
SHUTTER TRIP-LEVER
DUAL-HINGE
SCOPE MOUNTING GROOVES
FOCUS ADJUST
MAGNIFICATION LOCK
MAGNIFICATION SETTING
SHUTTER SYNC CONNECTOR
(UNDER CAMERA)
246
Shutter Actuator
iTpnTTflT*
The Shutter Actuator System (Model 3) is a rotary solenoid-
operated release that closely simulates the action of a hand-
operated cable release. It permits electrical actuation of most
Tektronix Trace-Recording Cameras.
A holding circuit in the power supply allows the actuator
to be energized indefinitely without overheating. This feature
is especially useful in obtaining Time exposures. Several actu-
ators can be operated simultaneously by paralleling their
REMOTE inputs and applying 24VDC.
Two power supply packages are available. They are elec-
trically identical, and differ only in mechanical configuration.
One takes the place of the standard Rear Frame in the C-12,
and C-27 Camera. The other is a separate small housing which
can be mounted to either of the Polaroid Backs, or used
remotely. Only the small power supply can be used with the
C-30 Camera.
The actuator mounts to the cable release bushing of the
C-30 Camera, or Alphax #3 and Ilex #3 shutters. It is not
compatible with the Alphax #1 shutter used in the f/4.5 — 1:0.7
lens.
Operating time from switch contact to full open blades at
115 VAC is 20 to 25 ms.
Power requirement is 115 VAC, 50 to 400 Hz, or 1 15 VDC.
Actuator for either supply (016-0218-01) $75
Separate Power Supply (016-0230-01) $ 85
Includes hinged mounting bracket (122-0713-001
Built-in Power Supply (016-0231-01) $125
Power requirement is 230 VAC, 50 to 400 Hz, or 230 VDC.
Actuator for either supply (016-0235-01) $ 75
Separate Power Supply (016-0236-01) $ 85
Includes hinged mounting bracket (122-071 3-00)
Built-in Power Supply (016-0237-01) $125
247
Camera Components
MOUNTING
BEZELS
Polarized viewers are avail-
able for most bezels. See Ac-
cessory pages.
FOR
C-72
CAMERA
For Tektronix Oscilloscopes
with round 5" CRT.
Part No. 016-0226-00 ... $15
For Tektronix 560-Series Oscil-
loscopes with rectangular CRT,
Type 529 and RM529.
Part No. 016-0217-00 ... $15
For Tektronix Type 519.
Part No. 01 6-0239-00 ... $25
For some Hewlett-Packard Os-
cilloscopes. Contact your lo-
cal Tektronix Field Office or
Representative.
Part No. 016-0229-00 ... $16
FOR
C-27
CAMERA
For all Tektronix Oscilloscopes
with 5" round CRT.
Part No. 016-0225-00 ... $15
For all Tektronix 560-Series
Oscilloscopes with rectangu-
lar CRT, Type 529 and RM529.
Part No. 016-0224-00 ... $15
For Tektronix Type 647 and
RM647 Oscilloscopes.
Part No. 016-0223-00 ... $15
For Tektronix Type 519
Part No. 016-0240-00 ... $25
For most models of Hewlett-
Packard Oscilloscopes. Con-
tact your local Tektronix Field
Office or Representative.
Part No. 016-0228-00 ... $15
For some models of DuMont
Oscilloscopes. Contact your
local Tektronix Field Office or
Representative.
Part No. 016-0227-00 ... $15
MAIN FRAME
ASSEMBLIES
Each Main Frame Assembly in-
cludes a cable release and stand-
ard camera instruction manual.
C-12 Main Frame with beam-splitting mirror
and on-axis binocular viewing.
Part No. 122-0635-00 $155
C-27 Main Frame with direct binocular view-
ing, removable viewing tunnel and maximum
light transmission from CRT to film.
Part No. 122-0676-00 $125
INTERCHANGEABLE
LENSES
f/ 1.9— 1:0.7
Film Economy
Medium Writing Rate
Alphax or Ilex
No. 3X Shutter
Part No. 122-0547-00 $180
f/ 1.9— 1:0.9
General Purpose
Alphax or Ilex
No. 3X Shutter
Part No. 122-0548-00 $160
f/ 1.9— 1:0.5
High Writing Rate
Alphax or Ilex
No. 3X Shutter
Part No. 122-0549-00 $200
f/4.5 — 1:0.7
Economy of Film & Price
Alphax No. 1 Shutter
Part No. 122-0550-00 $105
248
Camera Components
INTERCHANGEABLE
LENSES
f/1.4— 1:1
Precise full-size Image
High Writing Rate
Alphax No. 3 Shutter
Part No. 122-0608-00 $275
«fe— 1 :0.5
ra-High Writing Rate
Ilex No. 3X Shutter
Part No. 122-0662-00 $325
REAR
FRAMES
Standard Frame
Part No. 122-0591-00 $45
Power Supply Frame for
Model 3 Shutter Actuator
Refer to page 247.
f/1. 9— 1:0.85
General Purpose
Alphax or Ilex
No. 3X Shutter
Part No. 122-0692-00
$160
ROTATING
SLIDE ADAPTER
Adapts Polaroid or Graflok
Back to rear frame.
Part No. 122-0602-00 $25
INTERCHANGEABLE
FILM BACKS
Polaroid Land 3V 4 x 4 1 /,
Pack-Film Back, 8 exp.
Part No. 122-0671-00 $ 75
Focus Plate for above.
Part. No. 387-0893-00 $ 5
Polaroid Land 3V, x 4'/ 4
Roll-Film Back, 8 exp.
Part No. 122-0603-00 $ 75
Focus Plate for above.
Part No. 387-0460-00 $ 5
(Focus Plates not needed if
Graflok Back is available.)
4x5 Graflok Back with
Focusing Screen accepts
standard
film-pack
film (120)
4x5 Film
Part No.
cut-film holders,
adapters, roll-
holders, Polaroid
Holder.
122-0604-00 $ 45
2 1 /, x V/ A Graflok Back with
Focusing Screen accepts
standard cut-film holders,
film-pack adapters, roll-film
(120) holders.
Part No. 016-0233-00 $ 45
ACCESSORIES FOR GRAFLOK BACKS
Readily available from local camera shops.
Cut-Film Holder
2 exposures
: -!HMKS£™
Film-Pack Adapter
12 exposures
Film Holder
6 exposures
120 Roll-Film Holder
8 exposures, 2'/ 4 x 3'/w
120 Roll-Film Holder
10 exposures, 2'/ 4 x 2 3 / 4
120 Roll-Film Holder
12 exposures, 2y 4 x 2'/ 4
Polaroid Land 4x5 Film
Holder.
249
Five models comprise the Type 200-Series Scope-Mobile 9
Carts featuring tilt locking in one of nine tray positions.
These tilt-lock models include the Types 201-1, 201-2,
2021, 202-2, and 205-1. The three models ending with
-I hove o storage drawer for holding accessory items.
The two models ending with -2 have a storage drawer and
a plug-in carrier for housing a pair of plug-in units. Three
AC-receptacles are located at the rear of the storage
drawer for supplying power to the oscilloscope and associ-
ated instruments. A flange around the receptacles provides
convenient storage for the power cord when not in use.
All tilt-lock models come equipped with front-wheel brakes.
ADJUSTABLE TRAY tilt-locks in either of six 4.5° steps in
the upward direction or two 4.5° steps in the downward direc-
tion from the horizontal axis.
MECHANICAL FEATURES include aluminum construction, 5
inch rubber wheels with front wheel brakes, and linoleum
topped steel shelf at the bottom.
OVERALL DIMENSIONS are approximately 36" high by
19" wide by 29" deep for the 201-1, -2 and the 202-1, -2;
36" high by 23" wide by 29" deep for the 205-1.
Either the storage drawer or the storage drawer and
plug-in carrier combination can be ordered separately to
modernize older 200-Series Scope-Mobile® Carts.
014-0012-00 drawer for 201-1 $40
014-0013-00 drawer/plug-in carrier combination for 201-2 . . 45
014-0014-00 drawer for 202-1 40
014-0015-00 drawer/plug-in carrier combination for 202-2 . . 45
MODEL
DRAWER
PLUG-IN
CARRIER
TRAY
WIDTH
TRAY DESIGNED FOR TEKTRONIX
OSCILLOSCOPE TYPE
BOTTOM TRAY
DIMENSIONS**
201-1
201-2
YES
NO
10%"
422, 503, 504, 51 5A, 516 561 A,
564, 647
2, 3, 9, 10
and 11 Series
10%"
202-1
MOD 52
NO
143//'
519
15%" by 25"
202-1
NO
14"
453, 502A*, 507, 517, 51 7A,
524AD, 530, 540, 580 Series;
551, 555, 570, 575, 661
202-2
205-1
1, 80 and
Letter Series
14"
NO
17%"
556, 565, 567, and Rackmount
Instruments
18%" by 25"
•Requires sp
ecial adapter, Part Number
40-0365-00 .
. . . $2.75 "Useable din
ensions may be limit*
NET
WEIGHT PRICE
$120.00
130.00
38 lbs
1 55.00
43 lbs
120.00
130.00
135.00
250
CCESSORY CONTENT
PROBES
Introduction
Probe-Instrument Compatibility Chart
General Purpose Probes
Special Purpose Probes
Sampling Probes
CT-1 Current Transformer and P6040 Probe
CT-2 Current Transformer and P6041 Probe
CT-3 50-ohm Signal Pickoff
252
PROBE ACCESSORIES
Identification Tags
Grounding Adapter
Probe Tips, Adapters, Ground Leads
SAMPLING ACCESSORIES
Coble Adapters
50-ohm Connecting Cables
50-ohm Attenuators, Terminations
Plug-In Extensions
50-ohm Voltage Pickoff "T"
PLUG-IN UNIT ACCESSORIES
Blank Plug-In Chassis
Storage Cabinets
Extensions
Gain Adjust Adapter
Operational Amplifier Adapters
ATTENUATORS, TERMINATIONS
Input Adapters, Attenuators, Terminations
268
269
270
272
MISCELLANEOUS CABLES 273
CABLE ADAPTERS, CORDS 274
Miscellaneous Adapters
Power Cords
Miscellaneous Cords and Leads
INSTRUMENT COVERS, CASES 275
Carrying Cases
Dust Covers
VIEWING ACCESSORIES 275
Polarized Viewers
Viewing Hoods
MOUNTING ACCESSORIES 276
Cradle Mounts
Rack Adapter
Camera Mounting Adapters
REPLACEMENT CATHODE-RAY TUBES 277
REPLACEMENT GRATICULES 278
UNSCRIBED GRATICULES 279
CRT LIGHT FILTERS 279
Plexiglass Filters
Mesh Filters
MISCELLANEOUS ACCESSORIES 280
Tunnel Diode Pulser
TV Sync Separator
Replacement Batteries
ACCESSORY INDEX Inside Back Cover
251
robe
Tektronix manufactures both active and passive probes
for broadening the applications of Tektronix preamplifiers
and oscilloscopes.
A prime consideration in selecting a probe is the attenua-
tion ratio. Probe attenuation allows the measurement of
signals that would otherwise over-drive the preamplifier or
oscilloscope. In addition, the higher input resistance and
lower input capacitance associated with the attenuation
reduces the loading effect of the oscilloscope on the circuit
under test.
To help you select the right probe for your application,
the probes have been grouped in three categories: general
purpose, special purpose, and sampling. The following
factors should be considered in making your selection-.
1. Be sure the desired probe will match the input resistance
and capacitance of the oscilloscope used, and is equipped with
the proper connector.
2. For RF (CW) or high-voltage applications, select a probe
with an adequate RF or HV rating. Most probes require de-
rating for RF work, due to heating effects.
3. Select a probe with adequate risetime and bandwidth for
the oscilloscope and application.
4. When considering high input impedance, select the short-
est cable length, highest attenuation probe compatible with the
application. The probe with the lowest input capacitance will
generally provide the most accurate measurements.
When ordering any probe, please designate not only
the type but also the nine-digit part number.
If you desire help in selecting the right probe for your ap-
plication, please consult your Tektronix Field Engineer.
PROBE-INSTRUMENT COMPATIBILITY CHART
-33
OSCILLOSCOPES
*
P6006/
P6007
P6008/
P6009
P6010
P6013/
P60U P6015
P6019
P6020
P6023
P6027/
P6028
P6030
P6032
P6034/
P6035
P6038
P170CF
P500CF
CT-1/
P6040
CT-2/
P6041
1
CT-3
31 OA
317
321 A
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
360
422
453
X
X
X
+
X
+
+
X
X
X
X
X
X
+
X
X
X
X
X
X
p
502A
503
504
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
51 5A
516
519
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
524AD
526
529
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
+
PLUG-IN UNITS
B
CA
D
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
G
H
K
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
L
M
O
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
W
1A1
1A2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
+
+
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1A7
1S1
1S2
X
X
X
X
X
X
+
4-
X
X
X
X
2A60
2A63
3A1
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
r\
*Both Cabinet and Rackmount Versions X Recommended
+ Specifically designed for use with this instrument These combinations have limitation, but
may be very useful in certain applications
252
■
Probes
P6006/ P6008/
P6007 P6009
P6010
P6011
P6013/
P6015
P6019
P6027/
P6020 P6023 P6028
P6030 P6032
P6034/ CT-1/
P6035 P6038 P170CF P500CF P6040
CT-2/
P6041
CT-3
PLUG-IN UNITS
(Cont. )
3A2
3A3
3A5
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
+
X
X
3A6
3A7
3A72
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
3A74
3A75
3A8
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
10A1
10A2
82
X
X
+
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
+
X
X
X
U
X
X
X
86
3S76
3S3
+
X
X
X
+
X
+
+
X
X
X
4S1
4S2
4S3
X
X
+
+
+
X
X
X
X
AW
PLIFIER
S AND
ADAPTERS
134
282
1121
X
X
X
+
+
X
+
VP-1
VP-2
+
+
m 'Specifically designe
i for use
with th
s instrur
nenr
X Recommended
These combinations have limitations, but
may be very useful in certain applications
253
General Purpose Probes
P6006 10X PASSIVE PROBE
175-0125-00
r
344-0046-00
206-0060-00
206-0105-00
206-0015-00
o
The Type P6006 low input-capacitance probe is designed
for use with Tektronix low- and medium-frequency instruments.
By rotating the probe body with respect to its base, the
probe time-constant can be made equal to the input time-
constant of the oscilloscope or plug-in unit.
At no additional cost, the probe is available with 6', 9' and
12' cable lengths in addition to the standard 3.5' cable length,
with either BNC or UHF connectors. UHF to BNC adapters ore
available from your local supplier or Tektronix, Inc.
ATTENUATION RATIO is 10X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 10 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE for standard length probe is approxi-
mately 7pF when used with an instrument having a 20 pF input
capacitance and approximately 9.5 pF when used with an
instrument having a 47 pF input capacitance.
PROBE RISETIME is approximately 5 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe, Type 1A2 Plug-In Unit, and
Type 545B Oscilloscope is 12 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 600 V DC or AC peak to peak.*
STANDARD CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with BNC or
UHF connector.
P6006 PROBE PACKAGE
(010-0127-00 BNC or 010-0125-00 UHF) $22
Includes:
1— P6006 probe, 010-0128-00
BNC or 010-0126-00 UHF
1— straight tip, 206-0015-00
1— hook tip, 206-0105-00
1 — retractable hook tip,
013-0071-00
1 — spring tip, 206-0060-00
1 — banana plug, 134-0013-00
2 — minigator clips, 344-0046-00
1— probe holder, 352-0068-00
1—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
1—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
1 — instruction manual, 070-0381-00
ADDITIONAL CABLE LENGTH P6006 PROBE PACKAGE WITH
CORRESPONDING INPUT C.
Cable
Length
Input C
Part Number
BNC UHF
20 pF 47 pF
Connector Connector Price
6'
9'
12'
8.5 pF
11.0 pF
13.0 pF
11.0 pF
13.5 pF
15.5pF
010-0160-00 010-0158-00 $22
010-0146-00 010-0142-00 22
010-0148-00 010-0144-00 22
*Peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 5.7 MHz when working into a 20 pF input, or higher than 3.6
MHz when working into a 47 pF input.
254
SEE PAGE 252 fOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
General Purpose Probes
P6007 100X PASSIVE PROBE
134-0013-00
344-0046-00
175-0125-00
352-0068-00 175-0124-00
344-0046-00
206-0105-00 206-0060-00
206-0015-00
The Type P6007 low input-capacitance probe is designed for
use with Tektronix low and medium frequency instruments.
By rotating the probe body with respect to its base, the probe
time constant can be made equal to the input time constant of
the oscilloscope or plug-in unit.
At no additional cost, the probe is available with 6', 9',
and 12' cable lengths in addition to the standard 3.5' cable
length with either BNC or UHF connectors. UHF to BNC adapt-
ers are available from your local supplier or Tektronix, Inc.
ATTENUATION RATIO is 100X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 10 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE for a standard length probe is
approximately 2.0 pF when used with an instrument having a
20 pF input capacitance and approximately 2.3 pF when used
with an instrument having a 47 pF input capacitance.
PROBE RISETIME is approximately 7 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe, Type 1A2 Plug-In Unit, and
Type 545B Oscilloscope is approx 12.5 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 1.5 kV DC or AC RMS, 4.2 kV AC
peak to peak.*
STANDARD CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with BNC or UHF
connector.
P6007 PROBE PACKAGE
(010-0150-00 BNC or 010-0134-00 UHF) $22
Includes:
1— P6007 probe, 010-0151-00 BNC
or 010-0135-00 UHF
1— straight tip, 206-0015-00
1— hook tip, 206-0105-00
1 — retractable hook tip,
013-0071-00
1 — spring tip, 206-0060-00
1 — banana plug, 134-0013-00
2 — minigator clip, 344-0046-00
1— probe holder, 352-0068-00
1—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
1—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
1 — instruction manual, 070-0388-00
ADDITIONAL CABLE LENGTH P6007 PROBE PACKAGE WITH
CORRESPONDING INPUT C.
Part Number
Cable
Length
Input C
BNC UHF
20 pF
47 pF
Connector Connector
Price
6'
9'
12'
2.2
2.4
2.6
2.5 010-0165-00 010-0162-00
2.7 010-0152-00 010-0136-00
2.8 | 010-0154-00 010-0138-00
$22.00
22.00
22.00
*Peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 200 kHz. At 10 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 2 kV. Above 10 MHz, additional derating is required depending
on the input capacitance of the plug-in or instrument used.
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
255
General Purpose Probes
P6008 and P6009 PASSIVE PROBES
The P6008 and P6009 low-capacitance probes are designed
for use with Tektronix Type 82 and 86 Plug-In Units. They are
also recommended for use with Types 1A1, 1A2, or the Type
453 Oscilloscope. In addition, the P6008 and a separate ver-
sion of the P6009 can be used with the Type 10A2.
The time-constant of the probe is adjusted by rotating the
probe body with respect to its base. The range of adjustment
is sufficient to match the input time-constant of all Tektronix
Plug-In Units ranging from 8 to 50 pF capacitance. Maximum
frequency response (minimum risetime) is obtained when the
P6008 or P6009 is used with plug-in units having minimum input
capacitance.
P6008 10X PASSIVE PROBE
ATTENUATION RATIO is 10X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 10 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is approximately 7.5 pF.
PROBE RISETIME is less than 3 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe, Type 82 Plug-In Unit,
Type 580-Series Oscilloscope is 5 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 600 V DC or AC peak to peak.*
CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with a BNC connector.
P6008 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0129-00) $35
Includes:
-P6008 probe, 010-0130-00
-bayonet adapter, 013-0052-00
-hook tip, 206-0105-00
-retractable hook tip, 013-0071-00
1— spring tip, 206-0060-00
1— straight lip, 206-0015-00
-banana plug, 134-0013-00
1 — center pin, 214-0325-00
2 — minigator clip, 344-0046-00
— probe holder, 352-0068-00
—3" ground lead, 175-0263-00
—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
— instruction manual 070-0362-00
*Peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 20 MHz. At 40 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 300 V.
P6009 100X PASSIVE PROBE
ATTENUATION RATIO is 100X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 10 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is 2.5 pF.
PROBE RISETIME is approximately 2 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe, Type 82 Plug-In Unit, and 580-
Series Oscilloscope is 4.5 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 1.5 kV DC or AC RMS, 4 kV AC peak
to peak.*
CABLE is 9' long, terminated with a BNC connector.
P6009 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0140-00) $55
P6009 PROBE PACKAGE, for Type 10A2 (010-0170-00)
Includes:
1— P6009 probe, 010-0141-00
or 010-0171-00
1 — bayonet adapter, 013-0052-00
1— hook tip, 206-0105-00
1 — retractable hook tip, 013-0071-00
1— spring tip, 206-0060-00
1— straight tip, 206-0015-00
1— banana plug, 134-0013-00
1 — center pin, 214-0325-00
2— minigator clip, 344-0046-00
1— probe holder, 352-0068-00
1—3" ground lead, 175-0263-00
1—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
1—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
1 — instruction manual, 070-0401-00
*Peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 300 kHz. At 40 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 575 V.
206-0015-00
256
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
General Purpose Probes
P6010 10X PASSIVE PROBE
P6011 IX PASSIVE PROBE
166-0404-00
o-
013-0085-00
206-0114-00
166-0404-00
206-0114-00
The P6010 is a miniature passive probe designed for use
with Tektronix wide-band oscilloscopes. The probe is easily
compensated for use with any instrument having an input
capacitance of 14 to 21 pF.
Extra small in size, the P6010 is well suited for servicing sub-
miniature circuits where easy access is required. In addition
|to the standard 3.5' length, the probe is available with a 6' or
9' cable at no additional cost.
ATTENUATION is 10X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 10 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE for the standard length probe is
approximately 10 pF when used with instruments having a 14
to 21 pF input capacitance; 12 pF for the 6' version, 15.5 pF
for the 9' version.
PROBE RISETIME is less than 2 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe with Type 453 Oscilloscope is
7 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 500 V DC, AC peak, or DC and AC
peak combined.*
STANDARD CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with a BNC con-
nector.
P6010 3.5' PROBE PACKAGE (010-0188-00) $30.00
P6010 6' PROBE PACKAGE (010-0185-00) $30.00
P6010 9' PROBE PACKAGE (010-0201-00) $30.00
Includes:
1 — P6010 probe, 010-0187-00, 1 — minigator clip, 344-0046-00
010-0184-00 or 010-0200-00 1— probe holder, 352-0090-00
1— hook tip, 206-0114-00 1—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
1 — retractable hook tip, 013-0090-00 2 — insulating tube, 166-0404-00
1 — bayonet ground adapter, 1 — instruction manual, 070-0495-00
013-0085-00
*Peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher than
2.5 MHz. At 20 MHz, the maximum allowable peak voltage is 175 V;
60 V at 60 MHz.
The P601 1 IX Passive Probe can be used with all Tektronix
general-purpose oscilloscopes. Like the P6010, the small size of
the probe body makes it ideal for working on compact circuitry.
The probe cable utilizes a resistive center conductor for
damping critical reflections, insuring maximum bandwidth. In
addition to the standard 3.5' length, the probe is available
with a 6' cable at no additional cost.
ATTENUATION is IX.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 1 megohm.
INPUT CAPACITANCE for standard length probe is approx
28 pF; 48 pF for the 6' version, instrument excluded.
PROBE RISETIME for the standard cable length is less than
12 ns working into a plug-in with an input capacitance of 15 pF;
less than 15 ns working into a plug-in with an input capacitance
of 20 pF. The probe risetime of the 6' version is less than 15 ns
into 1 5 pF or less than 17 ns into 20 pF.
VOLTAGE RATING is 600 V DC, AC peak, or DC and AC
peak combined.*
STANDARD CABLE is 3.5' long with a BNC connector.
P6011 3.5' PROBE PACKAGE (010-0193-00) $15.00
P601 1 6' PROBE PACKAGE (010-0190-00) $15.00
Includes:
1— P6011 probe, 010-0189-00
or 010-0192-00
1— hook tip, 206-0114-00
1— retractable hook tip, 013-0090-00
2 — minigator clip, 344-0046-00
1— probe holder, 352-0090-00
2 — insulating tube, 166-0404-00
1—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
1—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
1— instruction manual, 070-0512-00
*Peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher than
0.5 MHz. When the probe is used with a plug-in having an input C
of 20 pF, the maximum allowable peak voltage at 1 MHz is 510 V.
At 5 MHz, the maximum is 100 V; 46 V at 10 MHz. When the probe
is used with a plug-in having a 47 pF input, the allowable voltage
will be lower by a ratio of 1:3.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
P6010 or P6011-to-BNC ADAPTER (013-0084-00) $3.00
P6010 or P6011-to-GR ADAPTER (017-0076-00) $4.50
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
257
General Purpose Probes
P6027 and P6028 IX PROBES
175-0125-00
344-0046-00
352-0068-00
134-0013-00
c3
206-0105-00
206-0060-00
The P6027 and P6028 passive probes are identical in all
respects with the exception of the connectors. The P6027 uses
a UHF connector. The P6028 uses a BNC connector.
In addition to the standard 3.5' cable length, these probes
are available in cable lengths of 6', 9', and 12', at no additional
cost. Insertion loss increases with probe cable length.
ATTENUATION RATIO is IX.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 1 megohm.
INPUT CAPACITANCE for a standard length probe is
60 pF when used with an instrument having a 20 pF input
capacitance and 87 pF when used with an instrument having
a 47 pF input capacitance.
PROBE RISETIME is approximately 10 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe, Type K Plug-In Unit, and Type
540-Series Oscilloscope is 16 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 600 V DC or AC peak to peak.*
*peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 1 MHz. At 10 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 60 V.
STANDARD CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with BNC or
UHF connector.
P6027 PROBE PACKAGE
with UHF connector (010-0070-00)
$12.50
P6028 PROBE PACKAGE
with BNC connector (01 0-0074-00) $1 2.50
Each probe package includes:
1— probe, 010-0116-00 UHF, or
010-0120-00 BNC
1— hook tip, 206-0105-00
1— retractable hook tip, 013-0071-00
1— spring tip, 206-0060-00
—banana plug, 134-0013-00
— minigator clip, 344-0046-00
—probe holder, 352-0068-00
—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
— parts list
P6027 and P6028 PROBES with over 3.5' cable lengths
Probe
Cable
Length
Con-
nector
Part r SJ
K , , Capacitance Price
Number ... r - .. c
Min-pF Max-pF
P6027
P6028
6 ft
UHF
BNC
010-0071-00 83Q .... $
010-0075-00 83 -° lla0 $1Z5 °
P6027
P6028
9 ft
UHF
BNC
010-0072-00 . 0Q $
010-0076-00 "°-° U/0 $12 - 50
P6027
P6028
12 ft
UHF
BNC
010-0073-00 „ n .,,_ *
010-0077-00 1380 1650 $125 °
258
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
Special Purpose Probes
P6013 HIGH-VOLTAGE PROBE
The Type P6013 provides 1000X attenuation for oscilloscope
measurements of high amplitude waveforms or DC potentials
up to 12 kV. Pulse frequency can be up to 100 kHz at 12 kV.
The probe can be compensated for oscilloscope input capaci-
ties up to 60 pF.
ATTENUATION RATIO is 1000X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 100 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is 3 pF.
PROBE RISETIME is less than 7 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe, Type 1A1 Plug-In Unit, and
Type 545B Oscilloscope is 13 ns.
VOLTAGE RATING is 12 kV DC, peak pulse, or peak AC*
CABLE is 10' long, terminated with a LOCKING BNC or
UHF connector.
P6013 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0177-00 LOCKING BNC or 010-
0181-00 UHF) $75
fl— storage case, 202-0139-00
fl_storage case tray, 436-0062-00
fl— storage case pad, 004-0217-00
fl —instruction manual, 070-0321-00
Includes:
1— P6013 Probe, 010-0178-00 BNC,
or 010-0182-00 UHF
1— banana plug tip, 206-0116-00
1— alligator clip, 344-0005-00
1 — probe holder, 352-0056-00
Jnot shown
*peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 100 kHz. At 1 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 5.5 kV.
P6015 HIGH-VOLTAGE PROBE
The Type P6015 provides 1000X attenuation for oscilloscope
measurements up to 40-kV peak. Voltage or duty cycle derat-
ing is necessary for RF voltages at frequencies over 100 kHz,
or in environmental temperatures above 25 °C.
The probe time constant can be adjusted to equal the oscillo-
scope input time constant for instruments with 12 pF to 50 pF
input capacitance.
ATTENUATION RATIO is 1000X, adjustable ± 9%.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 100 megohms.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is approximately 2.7 pF.
PROBE RISETIME is approximately 4 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of the probe, Type 1A1 Plug-In Unit, and
Type 545B Oscilloscope is 11.5 ns.
TEMPERATURE RANGE is 10° C to 55° C environmental
temperature. Calibration adjustments are necessary when en-
vironmental or nose resistor temperature changes.
VOLTAGE RATING is 40 kV peak AC or pulse, 20 kV DC
or RMS continuous at 25°C environmental temperature.*
CABLE is 10' long, terminated with a BNC or UHF connector.
P6015 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0172-00 LOCKING BNC
or 010-0132-00 UHF) $200
Includes:
1— P6015 probe, 010-0131-00
1 — compensating box, 015-0049-00
BNC, or 015-0039-00 UHF
1— banana plug tip, 206-0116-00
1— alligator clip, 344-0005-00
1— probe holder, 352-0056-00
1— can, dielectric, 252-0120-00
fl— silica-gel, 256-0570-00
fl—storage case, 202-0139-00
fl— storage case tray, 436-0035-00
fl_ s torage case pad, 004-0217-00
fl — instruction manual, 070-0373-00
*peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 100 kHz. At 10 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 13 kV.
fnot shown.
252-0120-00
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
259
Special Purpose Probes
P6019, P6020 CURRENT PROBES, AND TYPE 134 CURRENT AMPLIFIER
With these new AC current probes, you can make accurate
current measurements over a wide range of frequencies, with-
out breaking the circuit under test. Simply open the spring-
loaded slide, place the conductor in the probe slot, and release
the slide ... no electrical connection required. The shielded
probe head is not grounded when the slide is in the open
position, eliminating accidental grounding of the circuit under
test.
For general-purpose applications, the P6019 offers wide-
band performance with excellent low-frequency characteristics.
The extra-small size of the P6020 makes it ideally suited for
measuring current in compact semiconductor circuits. The low
frequency capabilities and sensitivity of both the P6019 and
P6020 Probes can be expanded using the Type 134 Current
Probe Amplifier. The amplifier also serves as an auxiliary volt-
age amplifier.
PERFORMANCE CHARACTERISTICS
P6019 PROBE WITH
PASSIVE TERMINATION
P6019 PROBE WITH
TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER
P6020 PROBE WITH
PASSIVE TERMINATION
P6020 PROBE WITH
TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER
SENSITIVITY
2 mA or 10 mA for each
mV/div of oscilloscope
deflection. Selected by
termination switch. Ac-
curacy ±3%.
Switched current ampli-
fier steps from 1 mA/div
to 1 A/div (with 50 mV/
div oscilloscope setting).
Accuracy ±3%.
1 mA or 10 mA for each
mV/div of oscilloscope
deflection. Selected by
termination switch. Ac-
curacy ±3%.
Switched current ampli-
fier steps from 1 mA/div
to 1 A/div (with 50 mV/
div oscilloscope setting).
Accuracy ±3%.
HIGH FREQ (-3dB)
60 MHz at lOmA/mV.
> 40 MHz
200 MHz at lOmA/mV.
> 70 MHz
LOW FREQ (-3 dB)
450 Hz at 2 mA/mV.
120 Hz at lOmA/mV.
<12Hz
(within 0.4 dB at 30 Hz)
6.5 kHz at 1 mA/mV.
775 Hz at lOmA/mV.
<50Hz
RISETIME
<5.8 ns
<9ns
< 1.75 ns
<5ns
ABERRATIONS
(first 50 ns of display)
<4%
<5% from 1 mA to
20 mA.
<6% from 50 mA to
1 A.
<4% to 100 MHz
<5% from 1 mA to
20 mA.
<6% from 50 mA to
1 A.
FLATNESS
<4% of 10 /as square
pulse at 2 mA/mV.
<4% of 35 /as square
pulse at 10 mA/mV.
<3% tilt during 400 /as
of displayed square-
wave.
<4% of 1 /as square
pulse at 1 mA/mV.
<4% of 10 /as square
pulse at 10 mA/mV.
<3% tilt during 80 /as
of displayed square-
wave.
NOISE
<150/aA
<150/aA-
MAXIMUM CUR-
RENT RATING
15 A Peak to Peak.
15 A Peak to Peak.
6 A Peak to Peak.
6 A Peak to Peak.
MAXIMUM BREAK-
DOWN VOLTAGE
600 V
600 V
600 V
600 V
260
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
Special Purpose Probes
TYPE 134 AS A VOLTAGE AMPLIFIER
DEFLECTION FACTOR: (with 50 mV/div oscilloscope input set-
ting) 1 mV/div or 0.4 mV/div. Selected by lever switch.
GAIN: 50 or 125, ±3%.
IMPEDANCE: (input and output) approx 50 Q, AC-coupled.
BANDWIDTH: 8 Hz to 54 MHz at a gain of 50; 10 Hz to 30 MHz
at a gain of 125 (3-dB down).
ORDERING INFORMATION
CURRENT PROBES* WITH TERMINATION
P6019 PROBE WITH PASSIVE TERMINATION (015-0065-00) $ 90
P6019 PROBE ONLY (010-0196-00) $75
P6019 PASSIVE TERMINATION (011-0078-00) $ 20
P6020 PROBE WITH PASSIVE TERMINATION (015-0066-00) $135
P6020 PROBE ONLY (010-0197-00) $110
P6020 PASSIVE TERMINATION (01 1 -0079-00) $ 30
*Each probe includes: 1 — 3" ground lead, 175-0124-00: 1 — 5" ground
lead, 175-0263-00; 2 — alligator clip, 344-0046-00; 2 — instruction manual,
070-0524-00.
CURRENT PROBES WITH TYPE 134 CURRENT AMPLIFIER **
P6019 PROBE, TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER WITH 117 V POWER SUPPLY
(01 5-0067-00) $275
P6019 PROBE, TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER WITH 234 V POWER SUPPLY
(01 5-0068-00) $275
P6020 PROBE, TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER WITH 117 V POWER SUPPLY
(015-0069-00) $310
P6020 PROBE, TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER WITH 234 V POWER SUPPLY
(01 5-0070-00) $310
TYPE 134 AMPLIFIER ONLY (015-0057-00) $180
POWER SUPPLY ONLY, 117 V (015-0058-00) $ 30
POWER SUPPLY ONLY, 234 V (015-0059-00) $ 30
** Each probe/amplifier includes: 1 — hanger assembly, 014-0029-00;
1— cable, coax, 18", 012-0104-00; 1— carrying casef, 016-0078-00; 1—
3" ground lead, 175-0124-00; 1—5" ground lead, 175-0263-00; 2—
alligator clip, 344-0046-00; 2 — instruction manual, 070-0524-00.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES
BATTERY ADAPTER* (01 3-0050-00) $8.00
CALIBRATOR ADAPTER, BNC (013-0092-00) $3.50
ADAPTER, BNC TO UHF (103-0015-00) $1.15
fNot shown.
*For 16 V to 33 V battery operation of amplifier.
Use Eveready $763 or equivalent.
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
261
Special Purpose Probes
P6023 10X PROBE
\
344-0046-00
134-0013-00
•—"41 352-0068-00
00 V 206-0105-00
206-0060-00
206-0100-00
175-0124-00
The P6023 Low-Capacitance Probe is designed for use with
Tektronix differential preamplifiers.
The probe can be adjusted to match plug-in input capaci-
tance ranging from 20 pF to 50 pF. The XI attenuation ratio
is adjustable over a ±2.5% range to compensate for differ-
ences in the input resistance of the plug-in unit. When two
P6023 probes are used to drive the two inputs of a differential
amplifier, the ability to change the attenuation ratio of one
probe versus the other helps to maintain the common-mode
rejection ratio of the system.
ATTENUATION RATIO is 10X, adjustable
INPUT RESISTANCE is =;8 megohms.
:2.5%.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is approximately 12 pF when used
with an instrument having a 20 pF or 47 pF input capacitance.
PROBE RISETIME is less than 7 ns.
TYPICAL RISETIME of probe,
Type 545B Oscilloscope is 17 ns.
Type W Plug-In Unit, and
VOLTAGE RATING is 1000 V DC or AC peak to peak.*
CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with a locking BNC or
UHF connector.
P6023 PROBE PACKAGE
(010-0167-00 LOCKING BNC or 010-0065-00 UHF)
Includes:
1— P6023 probe, 010-0168-00 BNC
or 010-0097-00 UHF
1— spring tip, 206-0060-00
1— hook tip, 206-0105-00
1 — retractable hook tip, 013-0071 -00
1— calibration tip, 206-0100-00
$40
1— banana plug, 134-0013-00
2— minigator clip, 344-0046-00
1— probe holder, 352-0068-00
1—5" ground lead, 175-0124-00
1—12" ground lead, 175-0125-00
1— instruction manual, 070-0294-00
*Peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 5 MHz. At 20 MHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak volt-
age is 300 V.
Il
262
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
Special Purpose Probes
P170CF CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE
The P170CF Probe is recommended for use with the Tektronix
Type 1121 Amplifier. An output connector on the front of the
amplifier supplies the necessary voltage to operate the probe.
When the P170CF is used with other instruments, an external
power source is required.
The probe is supplied with three adjustable attenuator heads,
offering attenuation up to 4000X. A 170-ohm termination is
required when the probe is used with the Type 1121 Amplifier.
PROBE ALONE:
ATTENUATION is 2X.
RISETIME is less than 2 ns.
INPUT SHUNT CAPACITANCE is 5 to 5.5 pF.
LOW FREQUENCY INPUT RESISTANCE is 12 megohms,
isolated by 0.001 /aF coupling capacitor.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE is down less than 0.5 dB at 65 MHz
for high frequency and down 3 dB at 15 Hz for low frequency.
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE INPUT is ±0.5 V peak.
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS are regulated +120 V at
10 mA, regulated or unregulated 6.3 V at 150 mA.
CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with a UHF connector.
P170CF PROBE PACKAGE (010-0101-00) $99.50
Includes:
1— P170CF probe, 010-0102-00 2— hook tips, 206-0107-00
2— straight tips, 206-0106-00
1 — PAX-1 attenuator head,
010-0301-00
1 — PAX-1 1 attenuator head,
010-0302-00
1 — PAX-1 11 attenuator head.
1— ground lead, 175-0014-00
1— clip, 344-0005-00
1— screwdriver, 003-0179-00
1— instruction manual, 070-0201-00
010-0303-00
170-n TERMINATION (011-0048-00)
$15.00
P500CF CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE
The P500CF Probe has been developed for use with the
Tektronix Type 524AD Oscilloscope. When used with oscillo-
scopes other than the Type 524AD, the P500CF requires an
external power source.
PROBE GAIN is from 0.8 to 0.85.
ATTENUATION is 10X with attenuator head.
INPUT IMPEDANCE is 40 megohms paralleled by 4 pF when
using the probe alone and 10 megohms paralleled by 2 pF
when using 10X attenuator head.
HIGH FREQUENCY RESPONSE is 0.5-dB down at 10 MHz.
LOW FREQUENCY RESPONSE is 3-dB down at 5 Hz.
AMPLITUDE DISTORTION is less than 3% for peak ampli-
tudes up to 5 V when using the probe alone, or up to 50 V
when using the 10X attenuator head.
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE is approximately 5 V at 10
MHz or 2 V at 30 MHz for the probe alone and approximately
50 V at 10 MHz or 20 V at 30 MHz when using the 10X attenu-
ator head.
HUM LEVEL is less than 1.5 mV at maximum sensitivity.
POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS are regulated +120 V
at 25 mA, regulated or unregulated +6.3 V at 150 mA, DC
voltages.
CABLE is 3.5' long, terminated with a UHF connector.
010-0303-00
P170CF ATTENUATOR HEADS
Type
Affenuaf/'on Input Low-Freq Max
(includes Capacity 3-dB Point Voltage
P170CF) Input
Part
Number
Price
PAX-1
4X min 5pF 800 Hz ±1 V
40X max 1.2 pF 1700 Hz peak
010-0301-00
$14.00
PAX-II
40X min 5 pF 150 Hz ±10 V
400X max 1.2 pF 150 Hz 1 peak
010-0302-00
$14.00
PAX-III
400X min
4000X max
3pF
1.1 pF
60 Hz ±100 V
60 Hz peak
010-0303-00
$14.00
010-0304-00
P500CF PROBE PACKAGE (010-0109-00) $85
Includes:
1— P500CF probe, 010-0183-00
1—1 OX probe head, 010-0304-00
2— hook tips, 206-0107-00
2— straight tip, 206-0106-00
1— ground lead, 175-0014-00
1— clip, 344-0005-00
l_in S truction manual, 070-0212-00
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
263
Sampling Probes
P6032 CATHODE-FOLLOWER PROBE
The P6032 is a high-frequency cathode-follower probe
designed for use with Tektronix vertical sampling plug-in
units, such as the Type 3S76, 4S1 , 4S2A, or 1S1.
The attenuator heads can be compensated for AC atten-
uation ratios.
RISETIME is typically 0.4 ns for probe and attenuator head.
MAXIMUM OUTPUT is ±150 mV into a 50-n load.
SIGNAL DELAY is approximately 10 ns.
POWER REQUIREMENTS are 12.6 V at 180 m A for the fila-
ment and +100 V at 12 mA for the plate.
CABLE is 54" long with GR connector.
CAPACITOR-COUPLER HEAD is rated at 0.001 M F, 600 V
DC. Low frequency 3-dB point is 16 Hz.
Order Part Number 010-0330-00 $4
P6032 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0108-00) $220
Includes:
1— P6032 probe, 010-0098-00
1 — capacitor-coupler head,
010-0330-00
1— ground clip, 013-0037-00
1— spring contact, 214-0278-00
7 — attenuator head
"fnot shown
1— center pin, 214-0302-00
2 — solderable ground clip,
344-0080-00
|4 — indicator ring, 354-0196-00
t 4— indicator ring, 354-0197-00
t 1— storage case, 202-0136-00
{ 1— instruction manual, 070-0327-00
Input
Part
Attenuator Max Input Capacitance
Number
010-0350-00
Head
Voltage*
(±10%)
10X
± 1.5 V
3.6 pF
010-0351-00
20X
± 3.0 V
2.6 pF
010-0352-00
50X
± 7.5 V
1.8 pF
010-0353-00
100X
± 15V
1.5 pF
010-0354-00
200X
± 30 V
1.4 pF
010-0355-00
500X
± 75 V**
1.3 pF
010-0356-00
1000X
± 150 V**
1.3 pF
*Limited by
inearity of ca
thode follower. This value
may be ex-
ceeded by 50% for pulses
without damage to probe
components.
**Must be de
rated for cont
nuous wave use. Peak to
peak voltage
derating is necessary at CW
frequencies higher than 500 MHz for the
1000X attenuator head and
1000 MHz for the 500X attenuator head.
Max
nput Voltage (peak
to peak)
Attenuator
(at 100% duty factor)
Head
500 MHz
750 MHz 1000 MHz 1250 MHz
500X
150 V
150 V 150 V
125 V
1000X
300 V
200 V 150 V
125V
INPUT RESISTANCE at DC of all attenuator heads is
10 megohms
±2%.
All Heads . .
. $18.00 ea
264
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
Sampling Probes
P6034 10X PROBE
The P6034 low-capacitance, miniature passive probe is
designed for use with Tektronix Type 4S1 , 4S2A, IS?,
1S2 or Type 3S76 Pulse-Sampling Plug-In Units for making
accurate measurements of high-speed repetitive pulses.
Risetime of the probe conforms to the risetime of the plug-
in units.
ATTENUATION RATIO is 10X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 500 ohms ±1.5%, approximately
300 ohms at 1 GHz.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is 0.7 pF, DC to 100 MHz.
PROBE RISETIME is less than lOOps.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 3.5 GHz (3-d B down).
LOW FREQUENCY RESPONSE is approximately 70 kHz at
3-dB down, AC-coupled.
MAXIMUM RINGING AND OVERSHOOT is 2% using a
25-ohm source and coaxial probe ground.
VOLTAGE RATING is 16 V DC or 45 V peak to peak.*
CABLE is 18" long with GR connector.
P6034 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0110-00) $35
Includes:
1 — P6034 probe 2— test jack, 131-0258-00
1— hook tip, 206-0114-00 1— 2V 2 " ground lead, 175-0249-00
6— ground clip, 214-0283-00 1— instruction manual, 070-0368.00
1— minigator clip, 344-0046-00
*peak to peak voltage derating is necessary for CW frequencies higher
than 800 MHz. At 1 GHz, the maximum allowable peak to peak
voltage is 25 V.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES— see probe adapters on page 268.
~Cu— ---d
344-0046-00
206-0114-00
131-0258-00
175-0249-00
li ; i 111(11117 I
/ /////
214-0283-00
P6035 100X PROBE
The P6035 low-capacitance, miniature passive probe
physically resembles the P6034 probe. It is designed for
use with the Types 4S1 , 4S2A, 1S1, 1S2, and 3S76 Sam-
pling Plug-In Units for making high-speed repetitive-pulse
measurements.
:1.5%, approximately
ATTENUATION RATIO is 100X.
INPUT RESISTANCE is 5 kilohms
1.5 k at 1 GHz.
INPUT CAPACITANCE is 0.6 pF, DC to 100 MHz.
PROBE RISETIME is less than 200 ps.
BANDWIDTH is DC to 1.7 GHz (3-dB down).
LOW FREQUENCY RESPONSE is approximately 6 kHz at
3-dB down, AC-coupled.
MAXIMUM RINGING AND OVERSHOOT is 2% using a
25-ohm source and coaxial probe ground.
VOLTAGE RATING is 50 V DC or 140 V peak to peak.*
CABLE is 18" long with GR connector.
P6035 PROBE PACKAGE (010-0111-00) $35
Includes:
2— test jack, 131-0258-00
1—2'/," ground lead, 175-0249-00
1— instruction manual, 070-0369-00
1— P6035 probe
1— hook tip, 206-0114-00
6— ground clip, 214-0283-00
1— minigator clip, 344-0046-00
*peak to peak voltage derating i
than 500 MHz. At 1 GHz, the
voltage is 60 V.
OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES—see probe adapters on page 268.
necessary for CW frequencies higher
allowable peak to peak
maximum
214-0283-00
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPAT/B/LITY
265
Sampling Probes
TYPE CT-1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER & P6040 PROBE
ET
When used with Tektronix sampling systems, the CT-1
and P6040 combination will measure milliamp currents at
frequencies from 35 kHz to beyond 1 GHz.
Because of its compact size (approx 2" long, 9 / u " wide
and %" thick) the CT-1 is easy to use in compact circuits.
Its insulated case eliminates the possibility of shorting-out
adjacent components or wiring.
SENSITIVITY is 5 mV/mA into a 50-ohm load. Accuracy is
better than ±3%.
DECAY TIME CONSTANT is 5/*s, approximated by 1%
per 50 ns; limit, 1 ^s.
RISETIME is less than 0.35 ns.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE is 35 kHz to 1 GHz (3 dB down
points).
INSERTION IMPEDANCE with a 50-ohm termination is 1
ohm shunted by approximately 5 (j.H; 2 ohms shunted by
approximately 5 /xH without a 50-ohm termination.
CAPACITIVE LOADING to a bare wire passing through
the CT-1 transformer is typically 1.5 pF for #14 gauge, 0.6
pF for #20 gauge.
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF CIRCUIT UNDER TEST is 1000 V
DC.
DIRECT CURRENT reduces the L/R time constant by a factor
of 2 at 0.6 A.
PULSE CURRENT RATING is 100 A peak, with an amp/
second product of 1 A//xs. When the A/s product is exceeded,
the core saturates reducing the CT-1 output to zero.
RMS CURRENT RATING is 500 mA maximum.
TEMPERATURE RATING is -25°C to +65°C.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS are %" x »/ 16 " x !'*/„" plus '/,"
x 6-32 mounting stud.
TYPE P6040 PROBE
The P6040 Probe is an inter-connecting cable for the CT-1,
used between the transformer and oscilloscope input.
If several CT-1 Transformers are in a circuit, the P6040 Probe
can be used to monitor any one of them.
The P6040 can be used with other test-point connectors,
such as Amphenol series 27 Sub-Minax or Sealectro Sub-Minia-
ture RF.
IMPEDANCE is 50 ohms.
ATTENUATION is IX.
OUTPUT CONNECTOR is a GR type.
CABLE LENGTH is 18 inches. Additional 50-O cable can
be used in series with the probe. RG8/U or RG58/AU is rec-
ommended for best preservation of the CT-1 Transformer high-
frequency response.
CT-1 AND P6040 (015-0041-00) $31
CT-1 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (015-0040-00) 17
P6040 PROBE (010-0133-00) 14
266
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPAT/B/t/TY
Sampling Probes
TYPE CT-2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER & P6041 PROBE
The CT-2 Current Transformer and P6041 Probe com-
bination is designed for use with conventional oscilloscopes
such as the Tektronix Type 530, 540, 550 and 580 Series.
Since the frequency response of the CT-2/P6041 is only
0.6-dB down at 200 MHz, the response of the system
will be that of the oscilloscope used.
The insulated case of the CT-2 Current Transformer is
convenient to use in applications where limited circuit space
exists. Several CT-2 Transformers may be placed through-
out the circuit and monitored by one or more P604I Probes.
SENSITIVITY is 1 mV/mA into a 50-ohm load. Accuracy
is better than ±3%.
DECAY TIME CONSTANT is 125 fis, approximated by 1%
per 1 .25 /xs; limit, 25 lis.
RISETIME is approximately 0.5 ns.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE is 3-dB down at 1.2 kHz, 0.6-dB.
down at 200 MHz.
INSERTION IMPEDANCE with a 50-ohm termination is
0.04 ohms shunted by approximately 5 /xH; 0.08 ohms shunted
by approximately 5 iiH without a 50-ohm termination.
CAPACITIVE LOADING to a bare wire passing through
the CT-2 Transformer is typically 2.1 pF for #16 gauge, 0.7 pF
for #22 gauge.
MAXIMUM VOLTAGE OF CIRCUIT UNDER TEST is 1000 V
DC.
DIRECT CURRENT reduces the L/R time constant by a fac-
tor of 2 at 0.5 A.
PULSE CURRENT RATING is 100 A peak, with an amp/
second product of 50 A/iis. When the A/s product is exceeded,
the core saturates reducing the CT-2 output to zero.
RMS CURRENT RATING is 2.5 A maximum.
TEMPERATURE RATING is -25° C to +65° C.
PHYSICAL DIMENSIONS are 3 / 8 " x '/,«" x 1 ,3 / 16 " plus '//'
x 6-32 mounting stud.
TYPE CT-3 50-OHM SIGNAL PICKOFF
Designed for use with high-frequency oscilloscopes, the CT-3
Pickoff provides a convenient means of picking off a signal
in a 50-ohm system. Used with any of the Tektronix Sampling
Instruments, the CT-3 provides the link for use as a trigger
source.
The CT-3 inductively meters the current in a circuit, develop-
ing a proportional output voltage. Used in a 50-ohm system,
the output voltage of the CT-3 is 10% of the voltage at the
center conductor.
SENSITIVITY is 10% of the voltage under test, into a 50-
ohm load.
DECAY TIME CONSTANT is 4.5 ps at DC current.
RISETIME is less than 0.4 ns.
FREQUENCY RESPONSE is 50 kHz to 875 MHz at DC
current.
TYPE P6041 PROBE
The P604 J Probe serves as an interconnecting cable
between the CT-2 Transformer and the oscilloscope input.
A 50-ohm termination is used in conjunction with the P6041
for terminating the probe at the high impedance input of
the oscilloscope used.
Although designed for use with the CT-2, the P6041
Probe can be used with other test-point connectors, such
as Amphenol Series 27 Sub-Minax or Sealectro Sub-Minia-
ture RF.
IMPEDANCE is 50 ohms.
ATTENUATION is IX.
OUTPUT CONNECTOR is BNC type.
CABLE LENGTH is 42". Additional 50-ohm cable can be
used in series with the probe. RG8/U or RG58A/U cable is
recommended to preserve the high-frequency response.
CT-2 AND P6041/50-OHM TERMINATION (015-0047-00) ..
$37,75
CT-2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER (015-0046-00) 17.00
P6041 PROBE (010-0164-00) 12.00
50-OHM TERMINATION (011-0049-00) 8.75
INSERTION IMPEDANCE with a 50-ohm termination is 1
ohm shunted by 4.5 tiH; 2 ohms shunted by 4.5 ju,H without a
50-ohm termination.
VSWR is less than 1.2 at 1.5 GHz.
VOLTAGE RATING at V DC is 25 V RMS, 1 kV pulse
peak. The volts/second product is 100V//xs. If exceeded, the
L/R decay will decay rapidly toward zero.
ORDER PART NUMBER 017-0061-00 $30.00
SEE PAGE 252 FOR PROBE COMPATIBILITY
267
Probe Accessories
IDENTIFICATION TAGS
134-0013-00
Probe identification tags for multi-probe applications help
locate correlating probe ends quickly. One package contains
2 each of 10 colors.
Order Part Number 334-0798-00 $1 .00
PROBE GROUNDING ADAPTER
PROBE GROUNDING ADAPTER for Tektronix 10X probes
provides a convenient method of establishing the vertical
position of the oscilloscope trace in relation to zero volts in-
put at the probe tip. The adapter eliminates the need for
moving the probe tip from the signal source to ground.
Push-button operation of the Adapter disconnects the os-
cilloscope input from the probe and, at the same time, con-
nects the input to ground through a parallel combination of
a 9.1 megohm resistor and a 0.03 /xF capacitor.
The Probe Grounding Adapter adds 7.5 pF to the input capac-
itance of the plug-in or oscilloscope. Readjustment of the
probe is necessary for proper squarewave response.
Order Part Number (015-0048-00 BNC) $11
(015-0044-00 UHF) 11
PROBE TIPS, GROUND LEADS AND ADAPTERS
175-0249-00
<M
175-0263-00
1 75-01 24-00
The following Ground Leads have a 6-32 thread size.
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PRICE
3-inch Ground Lead 175-0263-00 $ .60
5-inch Ground Lead 175-0124-00 .60
12-inch Ground Lead 175-0125-00 .60
2y 2 -inch Ground Lead 175-0249-00 1.70
(for P6034, P6035, P6038)
013-0071-00
v (f 206-0052-00 (I
.Hill
206-0015-00 206-0054-00
206-0100-00
206-0060-00
344-0046-00
1206-0061-00
I
206-0104-00
206-0114-00
1 1 s
I
The following Tips have a 6-32 thread size.
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PRICE
Calibration tip (P6023) 206-0100-00 $ .75
Insulated Straight Shank 206-0054-00 .25
Long Straight Shank 206-0104-00 .25
Spring Tip, without Shank 206-0061-00 .40
Recessed, fits 0.065" recessed pin or
plug 206-0052-00 .25
Short Straight Shank 206-0015-00 .25
Spring Tip 206-0060-00 .50
Hook Tip (P6038) 206-0114-00 .40
Banana Tip 134-0013-00 .20
Minigator Tip 344-0046-00 .20
Retractable Hook Tip 013-0071-00 2.00
U i ■
013-0037-00 013-0052-00 013-0054-00 013-0056-00 013-0057-00
017-0066-00
013-0084-00
|--j 013-0085-00
017-0076-00
A
214-0325-00
206-0045-00
DESCRIPTION PART NUMBER PRICE
Probe Tip to GR Adapter ((for P6010,
P601 1 , P6034, P6035, P6038) 01 7-0076-00
Probe Tip to GR Adapter (for P6025,
P6026, P6032) 017-0066-00
Probe to male BNC Connector 013-0056-00
Probe Tip to BNC Adapter (for P6006,
P6007, P6008, P6009) 013-0054-00
Probe Tip to BNC Adapter (for P6025,
P6026, P6032) 013-0057-00
Probe Tip to BNC Adapter (for P6010,
P6011, P6034, P6035, P6038) 013-0084-00
Bayonet Ground Assembly (for P6010,
P6011, P6034, P6035, P6038) 013-0085-00
Bayonet Ground Assembly (for P6008,
P6009) 013-0052-00
Ground Clip Assembly (for P6025,
P6026) 013-0037-00
Straight Shank, fits 0.082" pin jacks 206-0045-00
Center Pin (for 013-005 2-00) 214-0325-00
$4.50
6.25
3.00
3.00
4.50
3.00
2.50
2.50
2.50
.25
.25
268
Sampling Accessories
CABLE ADAPTERS
017-0065-00 017-0063-00
017-0023-00
017-0021-00
^
SI 1111 II 11 H
017-0064-00
Adapter
GR to C male
GR to N male
GR to UHF female
GR to UHF male
GR to BNC female
GR to BNC male
GR to C female
i
017-0027-00
017-0022-00
Part Number
017-0027-00
017-0021-00
017-0022-00
017-0023-00
017-0063-00
017-0064-00
017-0065-00
50-OHM CONNECTING CABLES
(GR-TYPE CONNECTORS)
Delay
1 ns
2 ns
5 ns
10 ns
20 ns
Cable Type
RG58/CU*
RG58/CU
RG8/213
RG58/CU
RG8/213
Part Number
017-0503-00
017-0505-00
017-0502-00
017-0501-00
01 7-0504-00
*Connector on one end only.
ATTENUATORS, TERMINATIONS
Item
50-n
50-n
50-n
10:1 Attenuator
5:1 Attenuator
2:1 Attenuator
Part
Number
017-0078-00
017-0079-00
017-0080-00
VSWR Rating*
<1.1 to 1 GHz
<1.1 to 1 GHz
<1.1 to 1 GHz
50-O Termination (end- 017-0081-00 <1.1 to 1 GHz
line)
50-n Type 874-L20 017-0084-00
20-cm Airline
50-n Type 874-K 017-0028-00
Coupling Cap
50-n Type 874-X 017-0030-00
Insertion Unit
50-n Type 874-EL 017-0070-00
90° Elbow
50-n Type 874-T Tee 017-0069-00
50-n to 125-n Min 017-0052-00
Loss Attenuator
50-n Type 874-TPD 017-0082-00
Power Divider
50-n Termination, 017-0083-00
GR to BNC (mid-line)
*See Page 272 For Connector Characteristics.
<1.1 to 1 GHz
<1.06 to 1 GHz
<1.06 to 2 GHz
<1.15 to 4 GHz
<1.2 to 1 GHz
Price
$7.00
5.50
5.50
5.00
4.75
6.50
7.50
Price
$ 8.25
13.50
13.50
13.50
16.50
Price
$30.00
30.00
30.00
25.00
10.50
10.50
13.00
11.00
15.00
30.00
70.00
28.00
SAMPLING PLUG-IN ACCESSORIES
]
15-PIN PLUG-IN EXTENSION CARD— Allows protrusion
of Type 6R1A 15-pin etched-circuit boards.
Order Part Number 012-0067-00 $20
20-PIN PLUG-IN EXTENSION CARD— Allows protrusion
of Type 6R1A 20-pin etched-circuit boards.
Order Part Number 012-0068-00 $25
56-PIN PLUG-IN EXTENSION CARD— Allows protrusion of
Type 3T4 56-pin etched-circuit boards. Also used for extend-
ing Type 262 Programmer cards.
Order Part Number 01 2-0078-00 $20
TYPE 3S3 SUB-CHASSIS EXTENSION— Allows maintenance
of Type 3S3 sub-chassis when 3S3 is extended out of oscillo-
scope.
Order Part Number 012-0077-00 $25
TYPE 4S1 SUB-CHASSIS EXTENSION— Allows maintenance
of Type 4S1 sub-chassis when 4S1 is extended out of oscillo-
scope.
Order Part Number 012-0069-00 $25
50-OHM GREMAR CABLE— For retaining internal trigger
and snap-off driver connection between plug-in units of the
Type 661 when one or both plug-in units are extended out of
oscilloscope.
Order Part Number 012-0070-00 $10.50
FLEXIBLE EXTENSION— 30" long, permits Type 661 vertical
or sweep plug-in units to be operated away from oscilloscope.
See Gremar Cable.
Order Part Number 012-0064-00 $23
FLEXIBLE EXTENSION— 30" long, permits Type 3S76, 3T4,
3S3 and Type 3T77A Sampling Plug-In Units to be operated
away from oscilloscope.
Order Part Number 012-0066-00 $23
269
Plug-In Unit Accessories
50-OHM VOLTAGE PICKOFF "T"
] [
STORAGE CABINETS
The 50-ohm "T" type pickoff allows signal pickoff from a
closed 50-ohm system with minimum disturbance of the sys-
tem's characteristics. The coaxial "T" incorporates GR Type
connectors at each end, with a plastic center collar for probe
tip insertions.
TYPE VP-1 is designed for use with the P6034 or P6035
Miniature Passive Probes. The reflection coefficient of the
VP-1 alone is approximately 3%. With the P6034 or P6035
inserted, it is typically 2%. The resistive reflection of the
VP-1 is '/ 2 % when used with the P6035, 5% when used with
the P6034.
Order Part Number 017-0073-00 $25
TYPE VP-2 is used in conjunction with the P6038 Direct
Sampling Probe. The reflection coefficient without the P6038
Probe is approximately 4%. With the probe inserted it is
typically 6%.
All accessory heads supplied with the P6038 Probe can be
used with the VP-2.
Order Part Number 017-0077-00 $30
INPUT TIME-CONSTANT STANDARDIZERS
Five input standardizers are available for standardizing the
input time-constant of plug-ins or oscilloscopes having a nom-
inal capacitance of 12 pF, 15 pF, 20 pF, 24 pF, or 47 pF. Each
standardizer has an approximate 1 megohm resistance and
2X voltage attenuation.
12 pF (011-0051-00 UHF) (011-0065-00 BNC) $10.00
15 pF (011-0073-00 BNC) 10.00
20 pF (01 1 -0022-00 UHF) (01 1 -0066-00 BNC) 1 0.00
24 pF (01 1 -0029-00 UHF) (01 1 -0067-00 BNC) 10.00
47 pF (01 1 -0030-00 UHF) (01 1 -0068-00 BNC) 10.00
BLANK PLUG-IN CHASSIS
BLANK 1 -SERIES AND LETTER-SERIES PLUG-IN CHASSIS
— Useful for constructing your own special circuits.
Order Part Number 040-0065-00 $25.00
BLANK TYPE 560-SERIES PLUG-IN CHASSIS— For special
circuit construction of sweep or vertical amplifier.
Order Part Number 040-0245-00 $25.00
PLUG-IN PREAMPLIFIER STORAGE CABINET mounts in
standard rack, available in two types:
FOR 1 -SERIES AND LETTER-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS— holds 3
plug-in units. Measures 19" wide, 8 3 / 4 " high, 9%" deep.
Order Part Number 437-0031-00 $25
FOR 2 AND 3-SERIES PLUG-IN UNITS— holds 4 plug-in units.
Measures 19" wide, 7" high, 13 5 / u " deep.
Order Part Number 437-0071-00 $30
EXTENSIONS
Plug-In Extension Extension Card
PLUG-IN EXTENSIONS— allow unit to be operated par-
tially out of the oscilloscope:
For units in Type 560-Series Oscilloscopes
Order Part Number 013-0034-00 $14.00
For units in Type 530-, 540-, 550-, 580-Series Oscilloscopes
Order Part Number 013-0055-00 $14.50
For units in Type 647 Oscilloscope
Order Part Number 013-0077-00 $20.00
For Type 21 A and 22A Time-Base Units
Order Part Number 013-0013-00 $20.00
EXTENSION CARDS — extend removable circuit cards for
ease of calibration and maintenance:
For Type 1A1 Plug-In Unit
Order Part Number 012-0100-00 $20.00
For Type 262 Programmer
Order Part Number 012-0078-00 $20.00
FLEXIBLE EXTENSIONS — permit plug-in unit operation away
from the oscilloscope. Useful for trouble shooting — not used for /
calibration: ^J
For 1 -Series and Letter-Series Plug-In Units
Order Part Number 012-0038-00 $20.00
For 10 and 11 -Series Plug-In Units
Order Part Number 012-0080-00 $24.00
270
Plug-In Unit Accessories
GAIN ADJUST ADAPTER
Permits an external signal to by-
pass the plug-in preamplifier. For
adjusting the deflection factor of
the main amplifier of Types 530,
540 and 550-Series Oscilloscopes.
Order Part Number 013-0005-00
$15
LOGARITHMIC AMPLIFIER ADAPTER
The Logarithmic Amplifier Adapter converts linear amplifica-
tion characteristics of either operational amplifier in the Type
O or 3A8 Plug-In Unit to approximate logarithmic character-
istics.
ALLOWABLE INPUT SIGNAL— ±100 V maximum, AC or
DC-coupled.
INPUT IMPEDANCE — Approximately 10 kilohms.
AMPLIFICATION CHARACTERISTICS — With the Logarith-
mic Amplifier Adapter, the operational amplifier approximates
a logarithmic amplification response for input signals from
±0.1 V to ±100V.
Signal-In Deflection
±10.0 V 3 cm ±1.0 mm
±100V 4 cm ±1.0 mm
0.05 V, the amplifier is no longer
Signal-In Deflection
±0.1 V 1 cm ±0.5 mm
±1.0 V 2 cm ±0.5 mm
Below an input level of d
logarithmic.
RISETIME— Typically 0.2 /is-
0.1 V to 10 V.
FALLTIME— Typically 0.3 ps
10 V to 0.1 V.
LOW FREQUENCY RESPONSE— 65 Hz. (In the AC-coupled
mode, the — 3 dB point for signals of over 500 mV peak ampli-
tude, and where the effective input resistance is 10 k.)
BANDWIDTH— The — 3dB apparent bandwidth varies with
both signal amplitude and signal DC level. It varies typically
from 400 kHz to 1 MHz, depending on the input signal.
LOGARITHMIC AMPLIFIER ADAPTER (013-0067-00) $75
-for a 10-V signal to rise from
-for a 10-V signal to fall from
GATING ADAPTER
The Gating Adapter permits on and off gating of the Type
O Unit from the +20 V gate output of the oscilloscope used.
The Adapter can also be used with the Type 3A8 using an
external gating signal.
With the Adapter plugged into the lower operational ampli-
fier, the upper operational amplifier is gated on or off. The sig-
nal applied is then amplified, integrated or differentiated only
during the "on" time.
The Adapter is particularly useful for integration operations
where the accumulative voltage of repetitive signals would
exceed the voltage rating of the deflection amplifier input.
GATING ADAPTER (013-0068-00) $75
COMPENSATING ADAPTER
The Compensating Adapter extends the frequency perform-
ance of the Plug-In Unit Operational Amplifiers.
The adapter compensates for stray capacitance associated
with the internal Z, and Z f resistors, providing an adjustment
for optimum HF response.
CHARACTER/ST/CS
PLUG-IN AND ADAPTER
TYPICAL FREQUENCY RESPONSE — ^750 kHz.
INPUT RESISTANCE— 0.01 to 1 megohm, determined by Z,
Selector position.
INPUT CAPACITANCE— approximately 40 to 450 pF, de-
pending on the Z f Selector position. (Maximum at XI 00 gain)
MAXIMUM INPUT VOLTAGE— 400 V DC or 150 V RMS.*
MAXIMUM OUTPUT VOLTAGE— ±50 V peak.
MAXIMUM TEMPERATURE— +55° C.
COMPENSATING ADAPTER (013-0081-00) $35
♦Voltage derating is necessary for frequencies above 1 MHz.
LEAKAGE CURRENT ADAPTER
The Leakage Current Adapter, used with Tektronix Oper-
ational Amplifier Plug-In Units, adapts the plug-in for measur-
ing the reverse leakage current of semiconductor diodes and
small-signal transistors. The adapter may also be used for
measuring junction resistance or capacitance.
Banana plugs on the base of the adapter allow the unit
to be plugged into the jacks on the front panel of the Plug-In
Unit. Axial-lead diodes are checked by placing them in a
notched retainer mounted on a swing-down cover. When
closed, the cover places the leads against spring-contact clips,
assuring good electrical contact. A four-pin socket is provided
for checking small-signal transistors. The diode clips and the
transistor socket are completely shielded to minimize leakage
capacitance.
A positive-going sawtooth voltage is required for driving
the adapter. Tektronix Oscilloscopes that accept the Type O
Plug-In Unit have a Sawtooth or Sweep Out jack conveniently
located on the front panel for supplying the required saw-
tooth voltage. The Type 3A8 requires an external source of the
required sawtooth voltage.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION FACTOR— 1 microampere/volt or 1
nanoampere/volt, selected by a toggle switch.
VERTICAL DEFLECTION ACCURACY— ±8%.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION FACTOR— (with 100-V saw-
tooth, minimum). 1, 2, 5 and 10-V/cm selected by Horizontal
V/CM switch.
HORIZONTAL DEFLECTION ACCURACY— ±3%.
INPUT SAWTOOTH VOLTAGE— 100 to 200 V (for 10-V/cm
horizontal deflection).
MAXIMUM INTERNAL LEAKAGE— 50 picoamperes at 100 V.
LEAKAGE CURRENT ADAPTER (013-0086-00) $85
271
Attenuators, Terminations
TERMINAL ADAPTERS AND SHIELDS
]
TERMINAL ADAPTER ASSEMBLY has all the mechanical
parts for creating a custom adapter for the Operational Plug-In
Unit.
Order Part Number 013-0048-01 $10
TERMINAL SHIELD protects exposed terminals of the Plug-In
Unit from spurious signals.
Order Part Number 013-0049-01 $2.50
INPUT ADAPTERS— ATTENUATORS— TERMINATIONS
ACCESSORIES WITH UHF-JYPE CONNECTORS
Description
50-Q termination
50-Q 5:1 attenuator
50-Q 10:1 attenuator
50-Q to 75-Q min loss attenuator
50-Q to 93-Q min loss attenuator
50-Q to 170-Q min loss attenuator
75-Q termination
75-Q 5:1 attenuator
75-Q 10:1 attenuator
93-Q termination
93-Q 5:1 attenuator
93-Q 10:1 attenuator
170-Q* termination
*VSWR less than 1 .25 up to 30 MHz.
Parr Number
Price
011-0045-00
$15.00
01 1 -0032-00
16.00
011-0031-00
16.00
011-0041-00
16.00
011-0042-00
16.00
011-0043-00
16.00
01 1 -0046-00
15.00
011-0034-00
16.00
011-0033-00
16.00
011-0047-00
15.00
01 1 -0036-00
16.00
011-0035-00
16.00
01 1 -0048-00
15.00
ACCESSORIES WITH BNC-TYPE CONNECTORS
ACCESSORIES WITH TEKTRONIX J25-Q TYPE CONNECTORS
125-Q termination 017-0051-00 $20.00
125-Q 2:1 attenuator
125-Q 5:1 attenuator
125-Q 10:1 attenuator
017-0071-00
017-0049-00
017-0050-00
ACCESSORIES WITH GR-TEKTRONIX
125-Q TYPE CONNECTORS
50-Q to 125-Q min loss atten
125-Q adapter N50/N125
125-Q adapter N50/T125
125-Q adapter T50/N125
017-0052-00
017-0053-00
017-0054-00
017-0055-00
30.00
30.00
30.00
$30.00
17.50
17.50
23.00
ACCESSORY HOUSINGS W/O ELECTRICAL COMPONENTS
Component housings are useful for applications requiring special
circuitry.
Coupler, Test Set with UHF connectors
Order Part Number 01 1 -0080-00 $5.00
Coupler, Test Set with BNC connectors
Order Part Number 01 1 -0081 -00 $5.00
CONNECTOR CHARACTERISTICS
Accuracy of Indicated Attenuation Ratio:
UHF ±2% at DC;
±3% at 100 MHz
GR ±2% at DC;
±3% at 1 GHz.
TEKTRONIX 125 Q ±2% at DC;
±3% at 1 GHz.
BNC ±2% at DC;
±3% at 100 MHz
Voltage Standing Wave Ratio:
UHF less than 1.2 up to 100 MHz.
GR less than 1.1 up to 1 GHz.
TEKTRONIX 125Q less than 1.1 up to 1 GHz.
BNC less than 1.1 up to 100 MHz.
Power Rating-.
UHF 1.5 watts.
GR 1 watt.
TEKTRONIX 125Q1 watt.
■BNC 1 watt.
50-Q termination
011-0049-00
$ 8.75
uutput to input
Voltage Ka
tios tor Mmimum-L
dss Atten-
50-Q 2:1 attenuator
011-0069-00
10.00
uators:
50-Q 2.5:1 attenuator
50-Q 5:1 attenuator
011-0076-00
011-0060-00
10.00
10.00
When properly terminated the E out /E in ratios for the various
minimum-loss attenuators are as follows-
50-Q 10:1 attenuator
011-0059-00
10.00
50-Q to 75-Q min loss
attenuator
01 1 -0057-00
10.00
Connection
Eout/Ein
Connection
Eout/Ein
50-Q to 93-Q min loss
atte
nuator
011-0058-00
10.00
50 Q ^ 75 Q
0.63
50 Q -* 125 Q
0.56
75-Q termination
01 1 -0055-00
8.75
75 Q -^ 50 Q
0.42
125 Q -h> 50 Q
0.23
75-Q 10:1 attenuator
011-0061-00
10.00
50 Q -^ 93 Q
0.59
50 Q -h> 170 Q
0.54
93-Q termination
011-0056-00
8.75
93 Q -* 50 Q
0.32
170 Q -> 50 Q
0.16
93-Q 10:1 attenuator
170-Q termination (UHF
to
BNC)
011-0062-00
011-0063-00
10.00
10.00
All attenuators, with the ex
are T-type attenuators.
ception of minimum-
loss types,
272
Miscellaneous Cables
M
N
INSTRUMENT
TYPE
FUNCTION
LENGTH
(INCHES)
IMPEDANCE
(OHMS)
CONNECTOR
PART
NUMBER
PRICE
TYPE
FIG
GENERAL
Output
42
50
UHF
A-A
012-0001-00
$ 6.50
GENERAL
Output
42
50
BNC
B-B
012-0057-00
4.00
GENERAL
Output
42
75
UHF
A-A
012-0002-00
7.50
GENERAL
Output
42
75
BNC
B-B
012-0074-00
6.50
GENERAL
Output
42
93
UHF
A-A
012-0003-00
6.50
GENERAL
Output
42
93
BNC
B-B
012-0075-00
4.00
GENERAL
Output-Terminated
with 93 n Resistor
42
93
UHF
A-A
012-0005-00
6.50
GENERAL
Output-Terminated
with Variable Attenuator
42
93
UHF
A-A
012-0004-00
13.50
GENERAL
Output
42
170
UHF
A-A
012-0006-00
7.50
GENERAL
Horizontal Input
18
—
Banana
C-C
012-0054-00
2.50
GENERAL
Adapter Cable
5
—
2-Banana to UHF
A-C
012-0059-00
3.50
E
Input
30
—
Special 3-pin
D
012-0022-00
6.00
Q
Input
15 ft
—
Special 9-pin
E
012-0040-00
12.00
2A61
Input
60
—
Special 4-pin
F
012-0072-00
10.00
122
Battery Cable
7 ft
Octal to (5) 3-pin
H-O
012-0009-00
15.00
127
Input
60
170
UHF
A-A
012-0034-00
7.50
160A, 360
Inter-connecting
20
—
Octal
G-O
012-0016-00
7.00
161, 162, 163
Inter-connecting
10
—
Octal
G-O
012-0017-00
5.00
175
Test Cable
30
—
Banana to Alliga-
tor
Special Plug
C
012-0056-00
1.75
175
Test Cable-Black Plug
42
1
012-0044-00
9.00
175
Test Cable-Red Plug
42
—
Special Plug
1
012-0043-00
9.00
175
Socket Adapter
—
—
Special 9-pin
N
012-0045-00
11.25
262
6R1A Inter-connecting
6 ft
36-50 Pin Ribbon
Special 41 -pin
K-L
012-0081-00
60.00
262
262 Inter-connecting
48
—
50-pin Ribbon
J-J
01 2-0082-00
60.00
551, 555
Inter-connecting
72
—
16-pin Ribbon
M-M
012-0051-00
28.50
273
Cable Adapters, Cords
POWER CORDS
Description
Adapter, clip lead BNC
Adapter, clip lead UHF
Adapter, binding post
Binding Post Adapter, with
terminal, 3 / 4 " spacing
UHF Male to BNC Female
UHF Female to Female
UHF T Male to 2 Female
UHF Elbow
BNC Female to Female
BNC Male to Male
BNC T Male to 2 Female
BNC Elbow
Male BNC to Female UHF
BNC to Binding Post
BNC Dual Binding Post
UHF Female to N Male
BNC Female to N Male.
N Female to BNC Male
N Female to UHF Male
ground
Part Number
Price
013-0076-00
$3.00
013-0003-00
3.00
013-0004-00
3.00
013-0009-00
3.50
103-0015-00
1.15
103-0025-00
3.30
1 03-0026-00
2.60
103-0027-00
2.25
103-0028-00
1.60
103-0029-00
3.00
103-0030-00
3.50
103-0031-00
2.75
103-0032-00
1.70
103-0033-00
1.60
103-0035-00
5.25
103-0044-00
2.95
103-0045-00
1.65
103-0058-00
2.15
103-0059-00
2.25
Instrument*
Part Number
Price
Type 109, 111, 125, 127, 130, 132, 133,
160A, 175t, R293, 317, 502A, 51 5A,
516, 519, 524, 526, 530-, 540-, 550-,
560-, 570-, 580-Series, 661, 1121
161-0010-00
$2.50
Type 262, 31 0A, RM503, RM504,
RM564, RM565, 647
161-0022-00
3.75
Type 106, 114, 116, 129, 184, 191, 422-
AC only, RM561A
161-0024-00
2.75
Type 280, 292, 321A-AC, 422-AC
161-0015-01
3.25
Type 321A-DC, 422-DC
161-0016-01
2.75
Type 453 (117 V)
161-0024-01
2.80
Type 453 (230 V)
161-0027-01
4.00
*Also applies to rack-mount version if detachable cord is used (except where
rack-mount version is listed separately).
fl61-0014-00 @ $1.40 also used with this instrument.
MISCELLANEOUS CORDS AND LEADS
Description Length Connectors
(Inches)
Part
Number
Price
Output Lead,
Black
Output Lead,
Red
30
Banana Plug to
Alligator Clip
012-0014-00
012-0015-00
$2.50
2.50
Patch Cord,
Black
Patch Cord, Red
6
Banana Plug-
Jack
(Both Ends)
012-0023-00
012-0024-00
1.15
1.15
100-Q
Suppressor Cord
300-n
Suppressor Cord
iooo-n
Suppressor Cord
Patch Cord,
Black
Patch Cord, Red
Banana Plug
(Both Ends)
012-0025-00
012-0026-00
012-0027-00
012-0028-00
012-0029-00
3.00
3.00
3.00
2.00
2.00
Patch Cord, Red
Patch Cord, 18
Black
012-0031-00
012-0039-00
1.20
1.20
274
OSCILLOSCOPE DUST COVERS
The slip-on cover provides protection for instruments during
transport or storage. Made of water-proof blue vinyl, the
cover features a clear frontal area for easy identification of
the instrument.
INSTRUMENT
Type 422 (with battery pack)
Type 422 (without battery pack)
Type 453
Type 502A
Type 529 (with field case)
Type 503, 504, 51 5A, 516, 647; 560-Series
(except Type 565, 567)
Type 565, 567, 556
Type 661; 530-, 540-, 550-, and 580-Series
(except Type 555 )
OSCILLOSCOPE DUST COVER
PART NUMBER
016-0075-00
016-0076-00
016-0074-00
016-0070-00
016-0085-00
016-0067-00
016-0069-00
016-0068-00
$7.50
CARRYING CASES
..'■■■■
CARRYING CASE FOR LETTER-SERIES OR 1 -SERIES PLUG-
IN UNITS — Provides protection for one oscilloscope plug-in unit.
Order Part Number 437-0065-00 $20
CARRYING CASE FOR 2, 3, 10 and 11 SERIES PLUG-IN
UNITS — accommodates two plug-in units.
Order Part Number 437-0070-00 $20
Instrument Covers, Cases
Viewing Accessories
CARRYING CASE — For Type 321 A Portable Oscilloscope.
Order Part Number 01 6-0026-00 $35
CARRYING CASE— For Type 31 0A Oscilloscope. Made of
sturdy, turquoise-colored canvas.
Order Part Number 016-0028-00 $17.50
VIEWING ACCESSORIES
The viewing accessories listed normally mount on the oscillo-
scope graticule cover. In many cases, they will also fit camera-
mounting bezels. If you intend using a camera on your oscillo-
scope, check with your Tektronix Field Engineer for bezel-viewer
compatibility before ordering.
POLARIZED VIEWERS— For Tektronix 5" Oscilloscopes. The
viewers reduce troublesome reflections and glare under high
ambient-light conditions.
RECTANGULAR VIEWER (016-0039-00) $10
PLASTIC ROUND VIEWER (016-0053-00) 10
016-0001-00 ^ 016-0002-00 016-0010-00
VIEWING HOOD — For Tektronix 5" Oscilloscopes. Includes
molded rubber eyepiece and separate tubular light shield.
Order Part Number 016-0001-00 $5.00
VIEWING HOOD— For Tektronix 3" Oscilloscopes. Includes
molded rubber eyepiece and separate tubular light shield.
Order Part Number 016-0002-00 $5.00
COLLAPSIBLE VIEWING HOOD— For Tektronix 3" Oscillo-
scopes. It is made of black acrylic plastic with handy fastening
arrangement.
Order Part Number 016-0010-00 $3.50
275
Mounting Accessories
CRADLE MOUNTS
] [
RACK ADAPTER FOR TYPES 106, 114, 184, 191
CRADLE-MOUNT — For rack mounting cabinet-type oscillo-
scopes. Each cradle-mount consists of a cradle (or "shelf") to
support the instrument in any standard 19" relay rack, and a
mask to fit over the regular instrument panel. Blue vinyl finish.
For Type 524AD, Type 530-Series, 540-, 570-Series and Type
661 (1 mask, 1 cradle). Rack height requirements 17y 2 ".
Order Part Number 040-0281 -00 $45
For Type 551 Oscilloscope (2 masks, 2 cradles). Rack height
requirements: Indicator mask 1 7 '/ 2 " , Power Supply mask 12 1 /,".
Order Part Number 040-0279-00 $75
For Type 51 5A and Type 516 instruments (1 mask, 1 cradle).
Rack height requirements 15 3 / 4 ".
Order Part Number 040-0277-00 $45
For Type 502A instruments (1 mask, 1 cradle). Rack height
requirements 17y 2 ".
Order Part Number 040-0278-00 $40
For Type 555 (2 masks, 2 cradles). Rack height requirements:
Indicator mask 21", Power Supply mask 12 1 /,".
Order Part Number 040-0280-00 $75
For Types 503, 504, 561 A, 564 instruments (1 mask, 1 cradle).
Rack height requirements 15 3 / 4 ".
Order Part Number 040-0321 -00 $50
MOUNTING FRAME — Holds four of any combination of
Type FM122, Type 360, or Type 160-Series units. Mounts to
standard instrument rack.
Order Part Number 014-0002-00 $7.00
BLANK PANEL — Provides coverage for mounting frame
Type FM122 area not being used.
Order Part Number 333-0157-00 $2.50
g m
• • CI §
£ 5 Z <E> # ©
KW:
The Rack Adapter converts the latest series of Tektronix
Generators for rack mounting. Any combination of two instru-
ments can be mounted side-by-side in 19" rack, occupying
only 5'/ 4 " of vertical rack space. Mounting brackets located
on the rear of the unit are adjustable for installation in racks
of different depths. The brackets can be adjusted for a depth
of 8y 2 " to 26".
Forced air ventilation is provided by two fan assemblies.
The fans can be operated from a 115 or 230 voltage source.
Outlets located on the rear of the unit provide a convenient
source of power for the instruments. A blank panel is included
to cover the opening when only one instrument is installed
in the Rack Adapter.
RACK ADAPTER (016-0086-00) $1 25
CAMERA MOUNTING ADAPTERS
Bezels for mounting commercially available cameras on Tek-
tronix Oscilloscopes. Mounting ring measures 5 5 / 8 " outside
diameter. Die-cast construction.
INSTRUMENT*
Type 502, 503, 504, 51 5A, 516, 524, 526, 530-,
540-, 550-, 580-Series, 565, 661
Type 561 A, 564, 567
Type 647
Type 529
CAMERA MOUNTING ADAPTER
*Also rackmount version.
PART NUMBER
014-0018-00
014-0016-00
014-0017-00
014-0031-00
$4.50
276
Cathode-Ray Tubes
Replacement CRTs listed are for current production instruments only. Phosphor types other than indicated are avail-
able on special order. (See page 14 for phosphor descriptions.) Direct-replacement CRT's for all earlier instruments not
listed are also available. Consult your Tektronix Field Engineer for particulars.
Instrumentt
Phosphor
Graticule
Used
Notes
Part
Number
Price
31 OA, 360
PI
P2*
P7
Pll
P31*
External
310A: all SN's
360: SN 2577-up
P31 is Standard
Phosphor for
31 OA; P2 for 360
154-0362-00
1 54-0363-00
154-0364-00
1 54-0365-00
154-0366-00
$ 45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
45.00
317
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0216-00
154-0196-00
154-0217-00
154-0218-00
154-0346-00
90.00
90.00
90.00
90.00
90.00
1
321 A
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0442-00
154-0443-00
154-0444-00
154-0433-00
85.00
85.00
85.00
85.00
422
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
Internal
For SN 1890
and above only
1 54-0466-06
154-0466-07
154-0466-08
1 54-0466-09
154-0466-05
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
140.00
453
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
Internal
For all
Serial Numbers
1 54-0492-00
154-0492-01
154-0492-02
1 54-0492-03
1 54-0492-04
175.00
175.00
175.00
175.00
175.00
502A
PI
P2 »
P7
Pll
P31
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0245-00
154-0246-00
154-0247-00
154-0248-00
154-0348-00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
125.00
503, 504
PI
P2*
P7
Pll
P31
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0264-00
154-0265-00
154-0266-00
154-0267-00
154-0341-00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
51 5A, 516
1
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
External
For all
Serial Numbers
1 54-01 25-00
1 54-01 20-00
154-0126-00
154-0127-00
154-0344-00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
519
Pll*
External
For SN 244 and
above only
154-0308-00
1000.00
Instrumentt
Phosphor
Graticule
Used
Notes
Part
Number
Price
524AD
PI*
Pll
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0068-01
154-0070-01
40.00
40.00
526
P31*
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0289-01
99.00
529
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0469-00
154-0470-00
154-0471-00
1 54-0472-00
154-0473-00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
531 A, 533A
535A
PI
P2*
P7
Pll
P31
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0178-00
154-0165-00
154-0179-00
154-0180-00
154-0350-00
75.00
75.00
75.00
75.00
75.00
536
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0140-00
154-0133-00
154-0135-00
154-0136-00
154-0351-00
75.00
75.00
75.00
75.00
75.00
543B, 544,
545B, 546,
547
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
Internal
Kit 050-0246-00
required for early
Serial Numbers
154-0478-01
154-0478-02
154-0478-03
154-0478-00
120.00
1 20.00
120.00
120.00
549
202
External
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0498-00
450.00
551
PI
P2*
P7
Pll
P31
External
For SN 2032
and above only
154-0251-00
154-0252-00
154-0254-00
154-0255-00
154-0352-00
1 80.00
1 80.00
180.00
1 80.00
180.00
555
P2*
P7
Pll
P31
Internal
For SN 10,410
and above only
154-0476-00
154-0476-01
154-0476-02
154-0476-03
245.00
245.00
245.00
245.00
556
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
Internal
For all
Serial Numbers
154-0500-01
154-0500-02
154-0500-03
154-0500-04
154-0500-00
245.00
245.00
245.00
245.00
245.00
561 A, 567
P2*
P7
Pll
P31*
Internal
561 A: 12696-up
RM561A: 6886-up
567: 1999-up
RM567: 2000-up
561 A: P31
Phosphor
567: P2 Phosphor
154-0454-00
154-0455-00
154-0456-00
154-0449-00
80.00
80.00
80.00
80.00
564
200
201
External
Optimum stored
Brightness
Optimum
Writing Rate
154-0410-00
154-0418-00
300.00
300.00
Continued
277
Graticules
Instrument!
Phosphor
Graticule
Used
Notes
Part
Number Price
565
P2*
P7
Pll
P31
Internal
565: SN 1370-up
RM565:
SN 1279-up
154-0477-00 195.00
154-0477-01 195.00
154-0477-02 195.00
154-0477-03 195.00
575
PI
P2
P7
Pll
P31*
External
SN 1352-up
154-0093-00 60.00
1 54-0097-00 60.00
154-0102-00 60.00 '
154-0103-00 60.00
154-0343-00 60.00
581 A, 585A
P2
Pll
P31*
Internal
581 A: SN 5390-up
585A:
SN 10,205-up
RM585A: 1171 -up
154-0479-01 195.00
154-0479-02 195.00
154-0479-00 1 195.00
Instrument!
Phosphor
Graticule
Used
Notes
Part
Number
Price
647
Pll
P31*
Internal
647: SN220
and above only
RM647: All
Serial Numbers
154-0434-00
154-0448-00
270.00
270.00
661
PI
P2*
P7
Pll
P31
External
For SN310
and above only
1 54-0264-00
154-0265-00
154-0266-00
154-0267-00
154-0341-00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
60.00
t Both Cabinet and Raclcmounf versions unless Rackmount is listed.
* Standard Phosphor shipped with the instrument initially.
REPLACEMENT GRATICULES
INSTRUMENT TYPE*
GRATICULE RULING
DIVISION
VERTICAL
HORIZONTAL
PART NUMBER
PRICE
31 0A, 360
y/'
8
10
331-0027-00
$3.00
317
8
10
331-0095-00
(adjustable)
331 -0042-00
(not adjustable)
3.00
3.00
321 A
6
10
331-0055-00
3.00
502A
1 cm
10
10
331-0047-00
4.00
503, 504, 661
8
10
331-0056-00
4.00
51 5A, 516, 531 A
533A, 535A, 549
6
10
331-0037-00
(adjustable)
331-0016-00
(not adjustable)
4.00
4.00
519
2
6
331-0065-00
9.50
524AD
6
10
331-0006-00
4.00
524AD
%" x 1 cm
17
10
331-0009-00
4.50
524AD
Color TV Bar Dimensions
331-0040-00
4.50
526
Marked in Degrees for Color TV
Vector Analysis
331-0104-00
9.50
529
7 cm, composite —50 to +110 IEEE
50 to +120 IEEE and to 100 Modulation
non-composite IEEE
7 cm, HAD, sine 2 ; 2%, 4% K Factor; 0.125, 0.250 ^s HAD
331-0156-01
331-0157-00
331-0077-01
331-0161-00
4.50
4.50
4.50
4.50
536
For Phase Angle Measurements
331-0057-00
4.50
536, 575
5/l."
10
10
331-0028-00
4.00
551, 555
1 cm
6
10
331-0045-00
4.00
564
8
10
331-0097-00
4.00
*For both cabinet and rack-mount instruments.
278
UNSCRIBED GRATICULES
INSTRUMENT*
I 1
PART NUMBER PRICE
31 OA, 317, 360, 502A,
386-0395-00
$1.50
524AD, 526, 536, 551,555,
575;
331-0093-00
2.00
503, 504, 661, 51 5A, 516,
331-0105-00
2.00
549
386-0451-00
2.00
531 A, 533A, 535A
386-0451-00 (adjustable)
2.00
331-0093-00 (not adjust-
able)
2.00
*For both cabinet and rack-mount instruments.
The mesh filter improves display contrast for oscilloscope
viewing under high-ambient light conditions. The filter is a
direct replacement for the existing graticule cover on most
Tektronix instruments, or, in the case of the new portable os-
cilloscopes, snaps in the CRT opening on the front panel.
A fine metal screen with a matte black surface is utilized
to reduce light reflections. Although light transmission from
the CRT is reduced to approximately 28%, the high attenua-
tion of external reflections allows viewing low-intensity dis-
plays in room light or other bright surroundings.
The mesh filter also serves as an RFI filter. Installed on the
instrument, the metal frame of the filter is grounded, provid-
ing effective filtering of the RFI spectrum.
INSTRUMENT*
PART NUMBER
PRICE
Type 321 A
378-0577-00
$12.00
Type 422
378-0571-00
12.00
Type 453
378-0573-00
12.00
Type 502A, 503, 504,
51 5A, 516, 524AD,
526, 661; 530, 540,
550, 580-Series, 565
378-0572-00
15.00
Type 529, 560-Series
(except 565)
378-0575-00
15.00
Type 647
378-0574-00
15.00
*For both cabinet and rack-m
1
aunt instruments.
Unscribed Graticules
Light Filters
INSTRUMENT*
FIG
PART
COLOR NUMBER PRICE
Type 31 0A, 317,
RM17, 360
A
Smoke grayt 378-0550-00 $1.35
Green 378-0551-00 1.35
Blue 378-0552-00 1.35
Amber 378-0553-00 1 .35
Type 321 A
B
Smoke grayt 378-0547-00 1.15
Green 378-0554-00 1.15
Blue 378-0555-00 1.15
Amber 378-0556-00 1.15
Type 422
C
Smoke grayt 378-0549-00 .90
Green ~ 378-0557-00 .90
Blue 378-0558-00 .90
Amber 378-0559-00 .90
Type 453
D
Smoke grayt
Green
Blue
Amber
378-0576-00 .90
378-0576-03 .90
378-0576-02 .90
378-0576-01 .90
Type 502A, 503,
504, 51 5A, 516,
524AD, 526,
530-, 540-, 550-
Series, 565, 580-
Series, 661
E
Smoke grayt
Green
Blue
Amber
378-0567-00 1.60
378-0568-00 1.60
378-0569-00 1.60
378-0570-00 1.60
Type 529, 561 A,
567
F
Smoke grayt 378-0560-00 1.35
Green ~ 378-0561-00 1.35
Blue 378-0562-00 1.35
Amber 378-0563-00 1 .35
Type 647
Smoke grayt 378-0548-00 1.15
Green " 378-0564-00 1.15
° Blue 378-0565-00 1.15
Amber 378-0566-00 1.15
*For both cabinet and rack-mount instruments unless rack-mount version is
listed.
fStandard filter supplied with instrument.
279
Miscellaneous Accessories
TYPE TU-5 PULSER
] [
TV SYNC SEPARATOR
011-0049-00
011-0059-00
103-0015-00
The TU-5 tunnel diode pulser generates a fast-rise, flat-top
squarewave designed to aid in adjustment of transient response
of the Tektronix 80-Series Plug-In Units. It can also be used
with letter series and sampling plug-in units. When used with
letter-series and 80-series plug-in units the pulser is sufficiently
fast to show the risetime of the oscilloscope and plug-in unit.
The oscilloscope calibrator output provides the proper input
to the pulser.
A bias adjustment on the pulser provides for changes in
tunnel-diode characteristics due to temperature variations, tol-
erance, or other variables.
RISETIME — less than or equal to 1.0 ns into 50 ohms.
AMPLITUDE— at least 200 mV with 50-ohm termination,
20 mV with 10X attenuator and 50-ohm termination.
PULSE WIDTH — about 0.5 ms, dependent on oscilloscope
calibrator output, (oscilloscope calibrator is 1 kHz).
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE— 50 ohms (25 ohms when used with
50 ohm termination).
SOURCE VOLTAGE— 100 volt squarewave (10 mA) from
the oscilloscope calibrator output.
REPETITION RATE— same as source voltage (1 kHz from
oscilloscope calibrator output).
BNC CONNECTORS — for input and output.
TU-5 PULSER PACKAGE (015-0043-00) $46.50
Includes: 1— TU-5 Pulser, 015-0038-00; 1— 10X attenuator, 011-0059-00;
1— 50-ohm termination, 011-0049-00; 1— UHF to BNC adapter, 103-
0015-00; 1— 50-ohm cable, 012-0057-00.
TU-5 PULSER ONLY (015-0038-00) $25.00
TU-5/105 ADAPTER— allows the TU-5 Pulser to be used
with the Type 105 Square- Wave Generator.
The Adapter inverts the negative 100 V output of the Type
105 to a positive voltage source for driving the TU-5. A bright-
er trace display is possible because of the faster repetition
rate of the Type 105 output.
TU-5/105 ADAPTER (013-0075-00) $20.00
The new TV Sync Separator provides the trigger facilities
for viewing composite video signals on a conventional oscillo-
scope. It can be used with any Tektronix Oscilloscope that
has a 100-volt calibrator output. When used with other instru-
ments, a separate 100-V source is required to power the unit.
A front panel switch selects field- or line-rate triggers, and
a separate output jack supplies field triggers continuously. The
unit has a clipping level control, allowing it to be used with
signals ranging from 0.5 V to 8.5 V in amplitude.
POWER REQUIREMENTS— 7 mA, operates on 100 V DC, or
60 Hz and 1 kHz calibrators.
INPUT — Composite video signal from signal source or from
Vert Sig Out jack on front panel of oscilloscope.
OUTPUT — ~10-V negative-going composite sync for line
rate triggering or ~6-V negative-going field rate triggers.
Selected by toggle switch. Also second output for field-rate
triggers.
TV SYNC SEPARATOR (015-0062-00) $85
Each instrument includes: 1 — patch cord, BNC to banana, 18" (012-
0091-00); 1— patch cord, BNC to BNC, 18" (012-0087-00); 1— patch
cord, banana to banana, 18" (012-0031-00); 1 — hanger assembly (014-
0029-00); 2— instruction manual (070-0542-00).
REPLACEMENT BATTERIES
NiCad CELLS — 3y 2 AH 'D' size rechargeable, for Tektronix
Portable Oscilloscopes.
For Type 321 A: Order 1 ea (146-0005-00) $ 7
Order 1 set (01 6-0077-00) $ 70 ^
For Type 422: Order Battery Pack (016-0066-00) .... $125
U.S. Sales Prices f.o.b. Beaverton, Oregon
Please refer to Terms and Shipment, General Information page.
280
Instrument Dimensions
A
oPTTOoraBererecTOW
%:§|||p
tiUUBlBWaUBUHi
L
1
V
i RF It'll t)
H
Illlliiw
r
RACK MOUNT INSTRUMENTS
EXCLUS/VE OF PLUG-IN UNITS AND PROBES
Symbol
Description
Definition
H
Height
Height of front panel.
W
Width
Width of front panel.
L
Length
Rack front to rearmost permanent
fixture, excluding cables.
F
Forward Clearance
Back of front panel to foremost
protrusion.
G
Vertical Axis
Bottom of front panel to horizontal
plane of rotation.
E
Extended Inst
Maximum forward clearance with
instrument out and horizontal.
RF
Radius — front
Front radius of rotation.
RR
Radius — rear
Rear radius of rotation.
T
Track
Rack front to pivot point.
C
Cabinet
Cabinet height.
1
1
hese instrumenis mount with sliding tracks
i o cabinet that mounts to a standard 7 9" rack.
I These instruments mount with sliding tracks to a standard 7 9" rack.
Rear support for sliding tracks is required, such as an enclosed rack.
~~| These instruments bolt directly to a standard 7 9" rack. They can be ordered
■ at additional cost, with tilt-lock, sliding tracks. Rear support for tracks is required
MOUNTING DIMENSIONS
TYPE
H W L F G E
RF
RR
T
C
127
129
8% 19 21% 1% 2%, 28%
10% 19 21% 2% 1% 29%
12"/,*
17%
12%
H%*
16%
13%
8%
io%*
R116
R293
5% 19 17% 1% 1% 25%
3%, 19 16%, 1%, 1% 22%,
1172
9%
8%
8%6
14%
12%
5
3%
R422
R453
7 19 14%, l'%, 16%
7 19 18%, l'%, 3% 20"/,,
11%
77s
9%,
6%
67e
RM15
RM17
RM31A, RM33A,
RM35A
8% 19 22%, 1% 2%, 29%
7 19 17% 1% 2'y M 21%
137s
12%,
12%
7%
16%
9'/ 8
8%
6'%*
14 19 22% 2% 7%* 29%
14
12%
16%
137e
RM502A
12% 19 21% 1% 2%, 26
15%
10%
13
11
RM503, RM504
526
RM529
7 19 17 1% 3% 22%
11%
7%*
11%
7
8% 19 17"/ M 1% 2%* 21%
5% 19 18% 1% 2% 21%
11%
127s
10
8%
10%
9%
8%
RM543B, RM544,
RM545B, RM546,
RM547
14 19 22% l»/„ 7%, 28%
13%,
13
16%
13%
R556
14 19 22"/,* 1% 8% 30%
13%
14%
18%
13'%*
RM561A
RM564
1 7 19 18% l"/„ 2%, 24*/,,
\ 7 19 18% 1"/ M 2%, 24%,
13%*
13%
7%
77s
11%
11
6%
6%
RM565
RM567
12% 19 22 17, 2%, 30%,
12% 19 22 1% 2%, 31%
15'%,
16%
14
12
16%
16%*
12%*
12%*
RM585A
14 19 22% 2% 7Vu 29%
14
12%
16%
13%
RM647
7 19 19 l"/„ 2%, 27%
13%
8"/„
14%
6%
016-0086-00* 5'/, 19 17%
*A special rack adapter is available for rack-mounting Type 106, 114, 184, and 191. The adapter has
various rack depths. (See Accessory Section for details.)
on adjustable mounting
bracket to accommodate
2
81
Shipping Weights and Volumes
Type
Domestic
Export Packed
Net Wl
Packed
Weight
Volume
in lbs
in lbs
lbs kgs
Cubic Ft
B
4
6
14 6
2
CA
4%
9
15 7
2
C-12
14%
16
32 15
4
C-27
10
14
29 13
3
C-30
4%
9
D
4%
8
14 6
2
E
4%
8
14 6
2
FM122
5%
9
15 7
1
FM125
19
27
42 19
4
G
4'A
6
14 6
2
H
4
9
14 6
2
K
3%
8
13 6
2
L
4'A
8
14 6
2
M
5V,
8
16 7
2
O
5%
9
17 7
2
Q
5'A
10
16 7
2
R
7%
9
18 8
2
Rl 16
25%
56
RM15
57
75
96 44
9
RM122
6
14
25 11
4
RM125
19
29
39 22
5
RM17
35
66
87 39
9
RM31A
75
101
122 55
9
RM33A
74%
100
121 55
9
RM35A
78%
105
126 57
9
R293
20%
56
R422
18
51
R453
32
65
RM502A
90
97
117 51
9
RM503
27
51
72 33
9
RM504
25%
48
69 31
9
RM529
27
58
81 37
10
RM543B
81
108
130 56
9
RM544
80%
109
132 57
9
RM545B
85
113
135 59
9
RM546
87
114
136 59
9
RM547
87
116
139 60
9
RM556
86
126
RM561A
30%
54
74 33
10
RM564
31
41
80 35
9
RM565
67
101
122 55
9
RM567
50%
85
106 48
9
RM585A
81
110
131 59
9
RM647
50
61
84 37
9
S
4'A
9
14 6
2
T
4%
9
15 7
2
W
5
7
11 5
2
z
5%
10
16 7
2
1A1
5%
10
13 6
1
1A2
4'A
8
15 7
1
1A7
4%
9
1S1
7%
11
15 7
2
1S2
5
11
1L10
6
10
14 7
2
1L30
7
11
15 7
2
1L20
7%
11
17 8
2
106
16%
21
109
8%
18
28 13
3
111
8%
16
27 12
3
113
44%
59
75 34
6
114
10
14
19 9
3
1121
18%
28
40 18
4
122
4%
9
14 6
1
123
1
2
8 4
1
125
15
19
42 19
4
127
39%
69
90 41
9
129
46
85
103 45
8
130
8%
15
26 12
3
132
21%
36
67 30
4
133
22
36
67 30
4
160A
20%
28
44 20
3
161
3%
8
13 6
1
162
3%
8
13 6
1
163
3%
8
13 6
1
175
93
118
139 63
9
184
13
19
191
13%
18
2A60
3
4
17 8
3
2A61
4%
5
18 8
3
2A63
3%
5
18 8
3
2B67
4'A
5
18 8
3
261
17%
28
50 22
9
262
24
39
50 23
5
263
5
8
Domestic
E
<port Packed
Type
Net Wt
Packed
Weight
Volume
in lbs
in lbs
lbs
kgs
Cubic Ft
280
4%
9
15
7
2
281
%
2
282
1
2
290
6
9
15
7
2
291
6
9
15
7
2
292
6'A
12
17
7
1
3A1
6
8
13
6
3
3A2
5'A
8
13
6
2
3A3
6
10
15
7
2
3A5
5'A
11
3A6
6
8
13
6
2
3A7
5%
10
3A8
4%
10
14
6
2
3A72
5
6
19
9
3
3A74
6'A
7
20
9
3
3A75
3%
8
17
8
3
3B1
5'A
8
19
9
3
3B2
5
8
13
6
2
3B3
6
7
18
8
3
3B4
4%
6
11
5
1
3B5
8
13
3C66
5'A
7
15
7
2
3L10
6'A
11
3S3
6%
9
18
8
2
3S76
7%
12
23
10
3
3T4
5%
8
12
6
3
3T77A
5%
9
20
9
3
31 0A
23
34
45
20
4
317
33'A
47
57
26
4
321 A
14
22
29
13
3
360
10
17
31
14
4
422
22 'A
31
45
21
5
453
28%
40
54
25
5
4S1
15%
21
29
13
4
4S2A
9
15
23
10
3
4S3
13
16
16
23
103
5T3
6%
13
17
8
3
502A
60
65
84
38
8
503
29'A
38
49
22
6
504
27%
43
57
26
5
507
94%
120
147
67
12
51 5A
42 %
52
63
29
6
516
44%
54
65
29
6
519
103%
136
169
77
13
524AD
61
82
106
48
9
526
45%
74
95
43
9
529
24
33
531 A
57%
78
95
43
8
533A
62%
78
95
43
8
535A
61%
83
100
45
8
536
55%
76
93
42
8
543B
64
81
99
43
8
544
59%
80
98
43
8
545B
64
84
102
46
8
546
65%
85
103
45
8
547
65%
85
103
45
8
549
66
87
102
46
8
551
96%
126
155
70
12
555
11 6'A
150
183
83
13
556
81
111
561 A
28
39
50
23
6
564
33
41
52
24
6
565
62
92
113
49
9
567
49
76
97
44
9
570
74%
94
111
50
8
575
66
85
102
46
8
581 A
71
80
97
44
8
585A
74
84
101
46
8
6R1A
13%
21
32
14
4
647
40%
51
62
27
6
661
49%
67
84
38
8
81
4
6
17
8
3
82
4%
10
16
7
2
86
3%
7
13
6
2
10A1
4%
9
13
6
2
10A2
5
7
19
8
4
11B1
4%
7
12
5
2
11B2
6%
9
14
7
2
500A and
500/53A
35
52
58
26
7
201
34
49
62
28
15
202
38
53
68
31
15
205
43
62
78
35
20
282
All weights are approximate and may vary depending upon packing materials used.
GENERAL
AND
ORDERING INFORMATION
THE UNITED STATES
INSTRUMENT ORDERS, TERMS, AND SHIPMENT
Orders should be placed with your Tektronix Field
Engineering Office listed on page 285.
TERMS OF SALE
Tektronix standard terms of sale are NET 30 DAYS.
Other credit terms are available for a customer's par-
ticular requirements. Credit accommodations and terms
of sale are arranged through your Tektronix Field Engi-
neer.
Normally all prices and quotations are FOB Beaver-
ton, Oregon.
Unless otherwise specified on your order, shipment will
be made via most economical method. If a specific surface
carrier is specified, shipment will be made at full valuation
unless your order instructs differently. In case air ship-
ment and full valuation are desired, please specify
whether Air Express or Air Freight. Lacking specification,
Air Freight and full valuation will be used.
FIELD MAINTENANCE
To help assure adequate instrument-maintenance facili-
ties for our customers, Tektronix has established Field
Engineering Offices and Service Centers at strategic points
in the United States. Your own Tektronix Field Office will
process all orders for repair parts promptly, and provide
emergency parts service when needed to restore an instru-
ment to operating condition. Your Field Office will also
arrange for fast service with necessary adjustments or
repair of your instruments at a nearby Service Center.
Tektronix repair and replacement-part service is geared
directly to the field, therefore all requests for repairs and
replacement parts should be directed to the Tektronix
Field Office in your area. This procedure will assure you
the fastest possible service. Please include instrument
Type number and Serial number with all requests for
parts or service. PLEASE DO NOT RETURN INSTRUMENTS
OR PARTS BEFORE RECEIVING DIRECTIONS.
WARRANTY
All Tektronix instruments are warranted against defec-
tive materials and workmanship for one year. Tektronix
transformers, manufactured in our own plant, are war-
ranted for the life of the instrument.
Any questions with respect to the warranty mentioned
above should be taken up with your Tektronix Field
Engineer.
Tektronix, Inc. is an Oregon Corporation,
Home Office & Factory, P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon 97005
Telephone: 644-0161 TWX— 503-291 -6805 Telex: 036-636 Cable: TEKTRONIX
283
GENERAL
AND
ORDERING INFORMATION
CUSTOMERS OUTSIDE THE UNITED STATES
To provide you with personal assistance in ordering as well as servicing Tektronix instruments, we have established
Field Engineering Offices and technically qualified Tektronix distributors in many countries throughout the world. The
Tektronix office or distributor in your country will be pleased to help you select the instrument that best suits your re-
quirements in performance, and provide you with prompt ordering service.
SERVICE
If you require service, replacement parts, a warranty
question resolved, or other help, please notify the Tek-
tronix facility through which you ordered your instrument.
They will process all orders for repair parts promptly,
and provide emergency parts service when needed to
restore an instrument to operating condition. They will
also arrange for fast service with necessary recalibration
or repair work on your instrument.
WARRANTY
All Tektronix instruments are warranted against defec-
tive material and workmanship for one year from date
of shipment. Tektronix transformers, manufactured in our
own plant, are warranted for the life of the instrument.
PLEASE DO NOT RETURN INSTRUMENTS OR PARTS BE-
FORE RECEIVING DIRECTIONS.
COUNTRIES WITH TEKTRONIX
FIELD ENGINEERING OFFICES
AUSTRALIA
CANADA
SWITZERLAND
UNITED KINGDOM
The Tektronix Field Engineer-
ing office in your country will
provide you with quotations
and accept your orders. Nor-
Listed on pages 286-287 mally, prices quoted are FOB
your plant.
COUNTRIES WITH
TEKTRONIX DISTRIBUTORS
Listed on pages 286-287
Your Tektronix distributor
will provide you with quo-
tations FOB your country
and accept your orders.
COUNTRIES WITH NO TEKTRONIX DISTRIBUTOR OR TEKTRONIX FIELD ENGINEERING OFFICE
Please address your inquiries and orders to:
Tektronix, Inc.
International Marketing Dept.
P. O. Box 500
Beaverton, Oregon, USA
INFORMATION AND QUOTATIONS
Staff Field Engineers will be pleased to provide you
with information on Tektronix instruments and answer
your technical questions. A pro forma invoice will be
issued, if requested, indicating price and sales conditions.
When our pro forma invoice or purchase order acknowl-
edgement is issued, we will indicate the documents needed
to ship your order. We will be glad to prepare neces-
sary export documentation for you and make all shipping
arrangements.
METHOD OF PAYMENT
We would like to make our products available to cus-
tomers on open account terms, whenever conditions per-
mit. Upon request for open account terms consideration
will be given to foreign exchange convertibility, and the
credit rating of the customer. Where time will not permit
enough information to be presented to establish open
account terms or where financial practices preclude open
account terms, payment will be requested by cash in ad-
vance or irrevocable letter of credit. Extended payment
terms will be considered, if requested, with approval sub-
ject to the conditions listed above.
SHIPMENTS
Unless otherwise requested, shipments will be made
by the most economical method.
284
J
UNITED STATES
FIELD ENGINEERING
OFFICES
Tektronix, Inc., an
Telephone
ALABAMA
ARIZONA
CALIFORNIA
Los Angeles Area
San Francisco
Bay Area
COLORADO
FLORIDA
GEORGIA
ILLINOIS
INDIANA
KANSAS
MARYLAND
MASSACHUSETTS
MICHIGAN
MINNESOTA
NEW MEXICO
NEW YORK
New York City Area
NORTH CAROLINA
OHIO
PENNSYLVANIA
Central Pennsylvania
TEXAS
WASHINGTON
WASHINGTON, DC.
• Also Service Center
Oregon Corporation, Home Office & Factory, P. O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon 97005
(503) 644-0161 TWX— 503-291 -6805 Telex: 036 691 Cable: TEKTRONIX
Huntsville... 3322 South Memorial Parkway, Suite 6, Huntsville 35801 ,_-,„,, ,„,.,
Telex 05-9422 ... Telephone: (205)881-2912
Phoenix... 7045 E. Camelback Road, Scottsdale 85251 .. .Telex 066-701 Telephone: (602)946-4273
Tucson Area: Enterprise 383
San Diego... 3045 Rosecrans Street. San Diego 92110. .. Telex 069-525 Telephone: (714)222-0384
• Orange.. . 1722 E. Rose Avenue, Orange 92667. . .Telex 06-78812 Telephone: (714)633-3450
Pasadena... 1194 East Walnut Street, Pasadena 91106. . .TWX : 213-449-1151 .. .Telex 06-74397
Telephone (213)449-2164
From Los Angeles telephones call : 681 -0201
• VanNuys... 16930 Sherman Way, Van Nuys 91406. . .Telex 74396 Telephone: (213) -987-2600
From Los Angeles telephones : 873-6868
Island of Oahu, Hawaii Area: ENterprise 5-700
Walnut Creek ... 1709 Mt. Diablo Blvd., Walnut Creek 94596 . . . Telex 033-644 .... Telephone : (415) 935-6101
From Oakland, Berkeley, Richmond, Albany and San Leandro: 254-5353
• Palo Alto... 3750 Fabian Way, Palo Alto 94303. . Telex 34-8411 Telephone: (415)326-8500
Denver . 2120 South Ash Street, Denver 80222 ... Telex 045-662 Telephone: (303)757-1249
Salt Lake Area: Zenith 381
• Orlando... Suite 185, 1010 Executive Center Drive, Orlando 32803
(also serves Puerto Rico) Telex 056-515 . Telephone: (305) 841-2382
From The Cape Kennedy Area: 636-0343
• Atlanta... 467 Armour Circle, N.E., Atlanta 30324. . .Telex 05-42233 Telephone: (404)873-5708
• Chicago. . . 400 Higgins Road, Park Ridge 60068. . .Telex 02-53374 Telephone: (312)825-6666
119 East Ogden Avenue, Suite 111, Hinsdale 60521 .. Telex 02-53694 .. Telephone : (312)325-3050
Indianapolis... 3937 North Keystone Avenue, Indianapolis 46205 ... Telex 027-348 ._„_
Telephone: (317)LIberty 6-2408
Kansas Citv. . . 5845 Horton, Suite 106, Mission 66202. . Telex 04-2321 ... Telephone: (913) HEdrick 2-1003
St. Louis Area: ENterprise 6m0
• Baltimore. . . 1045 Taylor Avenue, Towson 21204. . .Telex 087-804 Telephone: (301)825-9000
From Harrisburg, Lancaster and York Area call ENterprise 1-0631
• Boston... 244 Second Avenue, Waltham 02154. . .Telex 094-6301 Telephone: (617)894-4550
• Detroit... 27308 Southfield Road, P. O. Box 37, Lathrup Village 48075 ,„„_ .
Telex 023^100 ... Telephone: (313)ELgin 7-0040
Minneapolis... Suite 115, 7515 Wayzata Boulevard, Minneapolis 55426
v Telex 029-699.. Telephone: (612) 545-2581
• Albuquerque... 1258 Ortiz Drive, S.E., Albuquerque 87108 ... Telex 074-621 Telephone: (505)268-3373
Southern New Mexico Area: Enterprise 678
Buffalo... 965 Maryvale Drive, Buffalo 14225... Telex 091-385 Telephone: (716) 633-7861
• Endicott... 3214 Watson Blvd., Endwell 13763. . .Telex 093-796 Telephone: (607) Pioneer 8-8291
• Poughkeepsie... 12 Raymond Ave., Poughkeepsie 12603. . .Telex 096-4724 ... Telephone: (914)GRover 1-3620
• Syracuse. . . East Molloy Road & Pickard Drive, P.O. Box 155, Syracuse 13211
3 Telex 093-739 .... Telephone: (315)455-6666
• New York City and Long Island... 125 Mineola Avenue, Roslyn Heights, L. I, N. Y. 11577
Telex: ROSN 01-26446 .... Telephone ( 5 16) HT 4-2300
• Northern N.J. ... 400 Chestnut Street, Union, New Jersey 07083. . .Telex 01-26344 . . Telephone: (201)688-2222
Hudson River Valley, Westchester County, Connecticut... 144 Morgan Street, Stamford, Connecticut 06905
Telex 096-5917 Telephone: (203) DAvis 5-3817
• Greensboro. . . 1011 Homeland Avenue, Greensboro 27405. . .Telex 057-417 Telephone: (919)274-4647
Cleveland... 5562 Pearl Road, Suite 101, Cleveland 44129 ... Telex 098-5217 Telephone: (216)884-6558
Columbus... 12 West Selby Blvd., Suite 5, Worthington 43085
Telex: WOGN 024-684... Telephone: (614)888-4040
Dayton. . .3309 Office Park Drive, Dayton 45439. . .Telex 02-8825 Telephone: (513)293-4175
• Philadelphia... 126 Presidential Blvd. North, Bala-Cynwyd 1 9004 ... Telex 083-4218 ,_,„__ . .„,
Telephone: (215)TEnnyson 9-3111
Pittsburgh. . . 3834 Northern Pike, Monroeville 15146. . .Telex 086-761 Telephone: (412)351-3345
North Central Area — contact our Endicott, New York Office
South Central Area — contact our Baltimore, Maryland Office
• Dallas... 2600 Stemmons Freeway, Suite 162, Dallas 75207.. .Telex 073-2217 ,,,„,,„-, , ,,<-,„
Telephone: (214)MElrose M560
Houston... 3723 Westheimer, Suite H, Houston 77027. . .Telex 077-494 ... Telephone: (713) MOhawk 7-8301
Austin Area: ENterprise 3093
New Orleans, Louisiana Area : WX 3093
San Antonio... 8031 Broadway, San Antonio 78209 ... Telex : 76-7456 Telephone: (512) TAylor 6-0686
Seattle 236 S W. 153rd St., Seattle 98166. . .Telex 032-488 Telephone: (206)CHerry 3-2494
From Portland, Corvallis, Eugene (Oregon) : Commerce 9369
From Pullman, Richland, Spokane, Yakima: Zenith 9369
• Washington, D.C.... 4205 Evergreen Lane, Annandale, Virginia 22003 ... Telex 089-515
Telephone: (703) 256-6700
Norfolk, Portsmouth, and Hampton, Virginia Area: Enterprise 741
Area Code Numbers are in parenthesis preceding telephone number.
285
INTERNATIONAL
FIELD OFFICES
AND DISTRIBUTORS
c
AUSTRALIA
CANADA
SWITZERLAND
UNITED KINGDOM
Supplied And
ARGENTINA
BRASIL
CHILE
COLOMBIA
HONG KONG and
MACAU
INDIA
JAPAN
MEXICO
NEW ZEALAND
PAKISTAN
SINGAPORE
URUGUAY
VENEZUELA
TEKTRONIX INTERNATIONAL FIELD OFFICES
Tektronix Australia Pty. Limited, 4-14 Foster Street, Sydney, N.S.W. ; (mail address P. O. Box 488 Darling-
Cable: TEKTRONIX AUSTRALIA hurst, N.S.W.) . . . Telephone: 211-2666
Tektronix Australia Pty. Limited, Suite 20, 67 Queen's Road, Melbourne, Victoria Telephone: 51-1592
Tektronix Canada Ltd., 5050 de Sorel Street, Montreal 9, Quebec Telephone: (514) 731-3761
Telex: 01-2867
Tektronix Canada Ltd., 4A Finch Ave. West, Willowdale, Ontario Telephone: Toronto (416) 225-1138
Toronto Telex : 02-2776 From Ottawa Telephone : (613) 828-6962
Tektronix Canada Ltd., 2180 West Broadway, Vancouver, British Columbia . . Telephone ; (604) 736-0265
Telex: 04-50262
Tektronix International A.G., Alpenstrasse No. 9, 6300 Zug (P. O. Box 57, CH-6301 Zug)
Telex: 58408 ... Cable: TEKINTAG ... Telephone: 042 49192
Tektronix U.K. Ltd., Beaverton House, Station Approach, Harpenden, Herts
Telex No. 25559 ... Cable : TEKTRONIX HARPENDEN ... Telephone : Harpenden 61251
INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTORS
Supported By Tektronix, Inc., P.O. Box 500, Beaverton, Oregon, U.S.A. 97005
Telephone: (503)644-0161 Telex: 036-691 Cable: TEKTRONIX
Coasin S.A., Virrey del Pino 4071, Buenos Aires .. Cable: COASIN, Buenos Aires ... Telephone: 52-3185
Importacao Industria E Comercio Ambriex, S.A., Av. Graca Aranha 226-6°, Rio de Janeiro, ZC-00
Cable : RAIOCARDIO Rio de Janeiro . . . Telephone : 42-7990 & 42-7291
Importacao Industria E Comercio Ambriex, S.A., Av. Pacaembu, 811 Sao Paulo .... Telephone: 37-7611
Pentz y Cia., Ltda, Casilla 2839, Santiago Cable: PETIER Santiago . . . Telephone. 63010
Manuel Trujillo Venegas & Cia., Ltda., Calle 12 No. 5-82 4° Piso (Apartado Aereo #3956) Bogota D.E.,
Cable: MATRUVE Bogota ... Telephone: 42 31 99 & 42 92 17
International Service Corporation Ltd., 64, Castle Peak Road, Kowloon, Hong Kong .... Telephone : 868214
Cable : INSCOL, Hong Kong
Electronic Enterprises, 46, Karani Building, New Charni Road, Bombay 4 BR Telephone ■ 75376
Cable: TRONIX Bombay
Midoriya Electric Co., Ltd., 3, 2-Chome, Kyobashi, Chuo-Ku, Tokyo Telephone ■ 561-9256
Cable: MIDRIYAELEC Tokyo
Fredin SA., Melchor Ocampo No. 212-505, Mexico 5, D.F., (P. O. Box 53-958, Mexico 17, D.F.)
Telephone: 46-44-21, 34-88-61
W & K McLean, Ltd., 7 Anzac Avenue (P.O. Box 3097) Auckland Telephone- 34-541
Cable: KOSFY Auckland
Pak-Land Corporation, Central Commercial Area, Iqbal Road, P.E.C.H. Society, Karachi 29
Cable : PAKLAND Pakistan Telephone : 47315
Mechanical & Combustion Engineering Co. Ltd., 9, Jalan Kilang, Redhill Industrial Estate (P O Box 46
Alexandra Post Office), Singapore 3 Cable : MECOMB . . . Telephone : 642361-3
CompaSia Uruguaya De Rayos X y Electromedicina S.A., Mercedes 1300, Yaguaron 1449, Montevideo
Cable : CURZRAY, Montevideo Telephone : 8 58 29
Tecnica Nuclear de Venezuela, C.A, (Apartado Del Este 10.507) Plaza Morelos Edificio Eso, Caracas....
Cable : TECNUC Caracas Telephone : 54-39-56
o
.
286
INTERNATIONAL
FIELD OFFICES
AND DISTRIBUTORS
INTERNATIONAL DISTRIBUTORS
Supplied And Supported By Tektronix Limited, P.O. Box 36, St. Peter Port, Guernsey, Channel Islands
Telephone: Guernsey 23411, Telex: 41193
Tektronix Limited maintains a warehouse of United States-made instruments, accessories and parts on the
Island of Guernsey to quickly support these distributors in filling customer orders. Technical support of customers
and distributors is also available from this facility. In addition, Tektronix has manufacturing facilities within the
European Economic Community and European Free Trade Association.
ANGOLA
AUSTRIA
BELGIUM
DENMARK
FINLAND
FRANCE
GREECE
ISRAEL
ITALY
LEBANON
The NETHERLANDS
NORWAY
PORTUGAL
REPUBLIC OF
SOUTH AFRICA
SPAIN
SWEDEN
TURKEY
WEST GERMANY
Equipamentos Tecnicos, Lda., Caixa Postal 6319, Luanda Telephone : Luanda 6917
Cable: EQUIPAL Luanda
Inglomark Markowitsch & Co., Mariahilfer Strasse 133, Wien IS Telephone: 54-75-85-SERIE
Telex: Wien 1393 ... Cable : INGLOMARK Wien
Regulation Mesure, SPRL, 22, Rue Saint-Hubert, Bruxelles 15 Telephone : 71.20.20
Telex: 02-21520. . .Cable: MEREG Bruxelles
Tage Olsen A.S., 1, Ronnegade, Copenhagen O Telephone : (01) 29.48.00
Telex: 5788.. .Cable: TOCOPEN, Copenhagen
Into O/Y, P. O. Box 153, 11, Meritullinkatu, Helsinki Telephone : 61.133
Cable: INTO, Helsinki
Relations Techniques Intercontinentales, S.A., 134, Avenue de Malakoff, Paris XVI
Telex: 25.002 ... Cable: RELATEK, Paris ... Telephone: PASsy 08-36 & PASsy 43-09
Relations Techniques Intercontinentales, S.A., Bureau Regional de Lyon, 166, Avenue Berthelot, (69) Lyon 7°
Telephone: (78) 72.00.70
Relations Techniques Intercontinentales, S.A., Bureau Regional de Nice, 11, Avenue Valdiletta, (6) Nice
Telephone: (93) 84.05.93
Relations Techniques Intercontinentales, S.A., Bureau Regional de Toulouse, 15, rue Joseph Vie, (31) Toulouse
Telephone: (61) 42.04.50
Marios Dalleggio Representations, 2, Alopekis Street, Athens 139 Telephone : 710.669
Cable: DALMAR Athens
Eastronics Limited, 75 Haifa Road, (P.O. Box 21029) Tel Aviv Telephone: 446060
Telex: 033-638 ... Cable : EASTRONIX Tel Aviv
Silverstar Ltd., Via Dei Gracchi N20, Milano Telephone : 469.6551, 2, 3, 4, 5
Cable: SILVERSTAR, Milano
Silverstar Ltd., Via Paisiello N.30, Roma . . . Cable: SILVERSTAR, Roma . . . Telephone: 855.366 & 869.009
Silverstar Ltd., Via Castelfidardo N.21, Torino Telephone : 400.75 & 435.27
Cable: SILVERSTAR, Torino
Projects, P. O. Box 5281, Beirut Cable: PROJECTS Beirut ... Telephone: 241200
C. N. Rood, N. V., 13 Cort van der Lindenstraat, P. O. Box 4542, Rijswijk
Telex: 31238 ... Cable: ROODHOLLAND G.V. ... Telephone: The Hague 98.51.53
Morgenstierne & Co. A/S, Wesselsgt 6, Oslo 1 Telephone : 20-16-35
Telex : 1719 . . . Cable : MOROF Oslo
Equipamentos de Laboratorio Lda, Rue Pedro Nunes 47, Lisboa 1 Telephone : 73.34.36 & 73.34.37
Cable: EQUILAB, Lisboa
Protea Physical & Nuclear Instrumentation (Pty) Ltd., 38, Faraday Street, Wemmer, Johannesburg
Telex: J7337 ... Cable: MANLU Telephone: 838-8351
Carlos Rafael Mares, S.L., Valencia 333, Barcelona (9) Telephone: 257.62.00
Cable: SERAM Barcelona
Carlos Rafael Mares, S.L., Calle Ibiza 70, Madrid Telex: 7332 ... Telephone: 273.38.15
Erik Ferner, A.B., Snormakarvagen 35, Box 56, Bromma Telephone : 08/252870
Telex: 10312 ... Cable: SCIENTRON, Stockholm
Erik Ferner, A.B., Vastra Annebergsvagen 3H, Partille, Goteborg Telephone 031/44 41 30
M. Suheyl Erkman, Necatibey Cad No. 207, Galata, Istanbul Telephone : 441546
Cable: INGMESUER Istanbul
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH, Hohe Strasse 160-168, K61n Telephone : 23-30-06
Telex: 08882917. . .Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Koln
Rohde & Schwarz Handels-GmbH, Ernst-Reuter-Platz, 10, Berlin 10 Telephone: 34-05-36
Telex: 0181636. . .Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Berlin
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH, Kornerstrasse 34, Hamburg Telephone: 27.41.41
Telex: 0213749. . .Cable: ROHDESCHWARZ Hamburg
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH, Kriegsstrasse 39, Karlsruhe Telephone : 23.97.7
Telex : 0782730 . . . Cable : ROHDESCHWARZ Karlsruhe
Rohde & Schwarz Vertriebs-GmbH, Dachauer Strasse 109, Miinchen Telephone. 52.10.41
Telex: 0522953 ... Cable : ROHDESCHWARZVERTRIEB Miinchen
287
Instrument Index
TYPE INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION PAGE
B High-Gain Unit 90
CA Dual-Trace DC Unit 91
D High-Gain DC Differential Unit 92
E Low-Level AC Differential Unit 93
G Wide-Band DC Differential Unit 94
H Wide-Band, High-Gain DC Unit 95
K Fast-Rise DC Unit 96
L Fast-Rise, High-Gain Unit 97
M Four-Trace DC Unit 98
O Operational Amplifier Unit 99
Q Transducer & Strain Gage Unit 101
R Transistor Risetime Unit 238
S Diode Recovery Unit 238
T Time-Base Generator 103
W High-Gain Differential Comparator Unit 104
Z High-Gain Differential Comparator Unit 238
21 A Time-Base Unit 85
22A Time-Base Unit 85
81 Plug-In Unit Adapter
(for 1- and Letter-Series Plug-In Units) 179
82 Dual-Trace DC to 85 MHz Unit 1 80
86 DC to 85 MHz Unit 181
1 06 Square-wave Generator 206
1 09 Pulse Generator 207
111 Pretrigger Pulse Generator 208
113 Delay Cable 209
114 Variable Pulse Generator 210
R116 Programmable Pulse Generator 21 1
122, FM122,
RM122 Low-Level Preamplifiers 213
123 Preamplifier 238
125, FM125,
RM125 Power Supplies 215
127 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 216
129 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 218
130 L-C Meter 220
132 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 221
133 Plug-In Unit Power Supply 222
160A Power Supply 223
161 Pulse Generator 224
162 Waveform Generator 225
163 Pulse Generator 226
175 High-Current Adapter For Type 575 170
184 Time-Mark Generator 227
191 Constant-Amplitude Signal Generator 228
1A1 Wide-Band, High-Gain, Dual-Trace Unit 106
1 A2 Wide-Band Dual-Trace Unit 1 06
1A7 High-Gain DC Differential Unit 108
1L10 1 to 36 MHz Spectrum Analyzer Unit HI
1L20 Multi-Band 10 MHz to 4.2 GHz
Spectrum Analyzer Unit 112
1L30 Multi-Band 925 MHz to 10.5 GHz
Spectrum Analyzer Unit 112
151 Wide-Band Sampling Unit 114
152 Reflectometer and Wide-Band Sampling Unit 116
10A1 High-Gain Differential Comparator 185
10A2 Dual-Trace DC to 50 MHz Unit 187
11B1 Time-Base X50 Magnifier Unit 188
HB2 Time-Base — Delayed Sweep Unit 190
261 Coaxial Switch 238
262 Programmer Unit 143
263 3A5/3B5 Programmer Unit 229
280 Trigger Countdown 201 , 230
281 Time Domain Reflectometer Pulser 231
282 Probe Adapter 231
290 Transistor Switching Time Tester 238
291 Diode Switching Time Tester 238
292 Semi-Conductor Tester Power Supply 202, 232
R293 Programmable Pulse Generator 233
2A60 DC to 1 MHz Unit 1 47
2A61 Low-Level Differential Unit 147
2A63 DC to 300 kHz Differential Unit 1 48
2B67 Time-Base Unit 148
TYPE
31 0A
317,
RM17
321 A
360
3A1
3A2
3A3
3A5
3A6
3A7
3A8
3A72
3A74
3A75
3B1
3B2
3B3
384
3B5
3C66
3L10
3S3
3S76
3T4
3T77A
422,
R422
453,
R453
4S1
4S2A
4S3
502A
RM502A
503,
RM503
504,
RM504
507
51 5A
RM15
516
519
524AD
526
529,
RM529
531 A
RM31A
533A
RM33A
535A
RM35A
536
543B,
RM543B
544,
RM544
545 B,
RM545B
546,
RM546
547,
RM547
549
551
555
556,
R556
561 A
RM561A
564,
RM564
565,
RM565
567,
RM567
570
575
581 A
585A
RM585A
5T3
647,
RM647
661
6R1A
1121
C-12
C-27
C-30
200-S
eries
INSTRUMENT DESCRIPTION PAGE
DC to 4 MHz Portable Oscilloscope 18
DC to 10 MHz Oscilloscope 20
DC to 6 MHz, AC/DC Battery Portable Oscilloscope . . 23
Indicator Unit 235
Dual-Trace DC to 10 MHz Unit 149
Dual-Trace Unit 138
100/iV/div DC Differential Unit 150
DC to 15 MHz Automatic/Programmable Amplifier .... 152
Dual-Trace DC to 10 MHz Unit 149
High-Gain Differential Comparator Unit 154
Operational Amplifier Unit 155
Dual-Trace DC to 650 kHz Unit 157
Four-Trace DC to 2 MHz Unit 1 58
DC to 4 MHz Unit 157
Time-Base — Delayed Sweep Unit 159
Time-Base Unit 138
Time-Base — Delayed Sweep Unit 160
Time-Base — X50 Magnifier Unit 161
Automatic/Programmable Time-Base Unit 153
Carrier Amplifier Unit 162
1 to 36 MHz Spectrum Analyzer 164
Sampling-Probe Dual-Trace Unit 139, 166
Dual-Trace Sampling Unit 1 40, 1 67
Programmable Sampling Sweep Unit 141, 168
Sampling Sweep Unit 142, 169
DC to 15 MHz, AC, AC/DC or
Battery Portable Oscilloscope 26
DC to 50 MHz — Sweep Delay Portable Oscilloscope .. 29
Dual-Trace Sampling Unit 195
Dual-Trace Sampling Unit 196
Sampling-Probe Dual-Trace Unit 197
1 00 juV/cm Dual-Beam Oscilloscope 33
DC to 450 kHz, X-Y Oscilloscope 36 1
DC to 450 kHz Oscilloscope 38
High Voltage, Surge Test Oscilloscope 238
DC to 15 MHz Oscilloscope 40
DC to 15 MHz — Dual-Trace Oscilloscope 42
DC to 1 GHz Oscilloscope 44
DC to 10 MHz Television Oscilloscope 47
Color TV Vectorscope 49
TV Waveform Monitor 52
DC to 15 MHz Oscilloscope 56
DC to 15 MHz— XI 00 Magnifier Oscilloscope 59
DC to 15 MHz — Sweep Delay Oscilloscope 56
DC to 10 MHz— X-Y Oscilloscope 62
DC to 33 MHz— XI 00 Magnifier Oscilloscope 65
DC to 50 MHz— X100 Magnifier Oscilloscope 69
DC to 33 MHz — Sweep Delay Oscilloscope 65
DC to 50 MHz — Sweep Delay Oscilloscope 72
DC to 50 MHz— Automatic
Display Switching Oscilloscope 72
DC to 30 MHz Storage — Sweep Delay Oscilloscope ... 76
DC to 27 MHz — Dual-Vertical, Dual-Beam Oscilloscope . 80
DC to 33 MHz — Sweep Delay, Dual-Beam Oscilloscope . 83
DC to 50 MHz— Dual-Vertical and Horizontal
Oscilloscope — Dual-Beam — Sweep Delay 86
DC to 15 MHz— X-Y Oscilloscope 118
Split-Screen Storage Oscilloscope 122
Dual-Beam — Delayed Sweep Oscilloscope 127
Digital Readout Oscilloscope 131
Vacuum Tube Curve Tracer 238
Transistor Curve Tracer 1 70
DC to 85 MHz Oscilloscope 175
DC to 85 MHz — Sweep Delay Oscilloscope 175
Sampling and Real Time Sweep Unit 199
DC to 50 MHz — Environmental Oscilloscope 182
Sampling Oscilloscope T 931
Digital Unit 135
X100 Amplifier 236
Trace-Recording Camera 244
Trace-Recording Camera 243
Trace-Recording Camera 246
Scope-Mobile Carts 250
288
Accessory Index
Page
A
Accessory Housings 272
Adapters
Cable 269, 274
Camera Mounting 276
Gain Adjust 271
Probe 268
Probe Grounding 268
Rack 276
Type O, 3A8 271, 272
Type TU-5 280
Amplifier, Current 260, 261
Attenuators 269, 272
B
Base, Fan, (or Type 31 0A 19
Batteries, Replacement 280
Bezels, Camera Mounting 276
C
Cabinets, Plug-In Storage 270
Cable Adapters 269, 274
Cables
Delay 269
Gremar 269
Miscel laneous 273
Camera Mounting Adapter 276
Cards, Extension 269, 270
Cases, Carrying 275
Cathode-Ray Tubes 277
Graticules 278, 279
Filters 279
Chassis, Blank Plug-In 270
^Compensating Adapter, Type O, 3A8 271
IConnector Characteristics 272
Cords
Miscellaneous 274
Power 274
Covers, Dust 275
Cradle Mount 276
Current Amplifier 261 , 262
Current Probes 260, 261
D
Delay Cables, 50 S2 269
Delta Standards, Type 130 220
Diode Test Jig 1 74, 202
Dust Covers 275
E
Extension
Flexible 269, 270
Plug-In 269, 270
Sub-Chassis 269
F
Fan Base, Type 310A 19
Filters
Light 279
Mesh 279
Fixture, Test, Type 130 220
Frame, Mounting 276
G
Gain Adjust Adapter 271
Gating Adapter, Type O, 3A8 271
Graticules
Replacement 278
Unscribed 279
•Gremar Cable 269
ground Leads, Probe 268
Grounding Adapter, Probe 268
H
High Voltage Probes 259
Hoods, Viewing 275
Housing, Accessory 272
I
Identification Tags, Probe 268
Input Adapters 272
Input Cables 273
Input Standardizes 270
L
Leads, Miscellaneous 274
Leakage Current Adapter, Type O, 3A8 271
Light Filters 279
Log Amplifier Adapter, Type O, 3A8 271
M
Mesh Filters 279
Mounts, Cradle 276
Mounting Adapters, Camera 276
Mounting Frame 276
O
Operational Amplifier Accessories 271 , 272
Output Cables 273
P
Probes
Cathode-Follower 263, 264
Current 260, 261
General Purpose 254-258
High Voltage 259
Sampling 198, 264-267
Probe Accessories
Adapters 268
Grounding Adapter 268
Ground Leads 268
Identification Tags 268
Tips 268
Pickoff "T", Voltage 270
Polarized Viewers 275
Power Cords 274
Production Test Fixtures, Type 130 220
Pulser, TU-5 280
R
Rack Adapter 276
S
Sampling Accessories 203-205, 269
Sampling Probes 1 98, 264-267
Separator, TV Sync 280
Signal Pickoff, CT-3 267
Shield, Type O, 3A8 Terminal 272
Standard, Type 130 Delta 220
Standardizes, Input Time-Constant 270
Storage Cabinets, Plug-In 270
T
Tags, Probe Identification *. 268
Terminations 269, 272
Test Fixture, Type 130 220
Test Jig Adapter 202
Test Jig, Diode 174, 202
Terminal Adapters, Type O, 3A8 272
Terminal Shields, Type O, 3A8 272
Tips, Probe 268
Transistor Test Boards, Type 575 1 74
TU-5 Adapter 280
Pulser 280
TV Sync Separator 280
U
Unscribed Graticules 279
V
Viewing Hoods 275
Viewers, Polarized 275
Voltage Pickoff "T" 270
Live Music Archive
Librivox Free Audio
Metropolitan Museum
Cleveland Museum of Art
Internet Arcade
Console Living Room
Books to Borrow
Open Library
TV News
Understanding 9/11